Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Relevant costs, special sales order—idle versus full capacity The Delmar Beverage Co. produces a premium root beer that is sold throughout its chain of restaurants in the Midwest. The company is currently producing 4,000 gallons of root beer per day, which represents 80% of its manufacturing capacity. The root beer is available to restaurant customers by the mug, in bottles, or packaged in six packs to take home. The selling price of a gallon of root beer averages $10, and cost accounting records indicate the following manufacturing costs per gallon of root beer:
|
Raw materials
|
$3.20
|
|
Direct labor
|
1.6
|
|
Variable overhead
|
1
|
|
Fixed overhead
|
2.2
|
|
Total absorption cost
|
$8.00
|
In addition to the manufacturing costs just described, Delmar Beverage incurs an average cost of $0.50 per gallon to distribute the root beer to its restaurants.
SaveMore, Inc., a chain of grocery stores, is interested in selling the premium root beer in gallon jugs throughout its stores in the St. Louis area during holiday periods and has offered to purchase root beer from Delmar Beverage at a price of $7.70 per gallon. SaveMore believes it could sell 600 gallons per day. If Delmar Beverage agrees to sell root beer to SaveMore, it estimates the average distribution cost will be $0.70 per gallon.
Required:
a. Identify all the relevant costs that Delmar Beverage should consider in evaluating the special sales order from SaveMore.
b. How would Delmar Beverage’s daily operating income be affected by the acceptance of this offer?
c. Assume that Delmar Beverage is currently producing 5,000 gallons of root beer daily. Repeat requirements a and b.
d. Explain why your answers are different when Delmar Beverage is producing 4,000 gallons per day versus 5,000 gallons per day.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Continue or discontinue a segment? MMV Inc. opened a chain of businesses several years ago that provide quick oil changes and other minor services in conjunction with a convenience operation consisting of a soup, sandwich, and snack bar. The strategy was that as customers brought autos in for oil changes, they would likely use the convenience operation to purchase a sandwich, bowl of soup, beverage, or some other snack while they were waiting for the work to be completed on their autos. The oil change operation occupies 75% of the facility and includes three service bays. The soup, sandwich, and snack bar occupies the remaining 25%. A general manager is responsible for the entire operation, but each segment also has a manager responsible for its individual operation.
Recently the following annual operating information for the soup, sandwich, and snack bar at one of MMV’s locations caught his attention. Sales for the year were $250,000, and cost of sales (food, beverages, and snack items) are 50% of sales revenue. Operating expense information for the convenience operation follows:
|
Food service items (spoons, napkins, etc.)
|
$ 3,600
|
|
Utilities
|
7,200
|
|
Wages for part time employees
|
48,000
|
|
Convenience operation manager’s salary
|
60,000
|
|
General manager’s salary
|
18,000
|
|
Advertising
|
20,000
|
|
Insurance
|
12,000
|
|
Property taxes
|
3,000
|
|
Food equipment depreciation
|
5,000
|
|
Building depreciation
|
15,000
|
While investigating these operating expenses, MMV Inc., determines the following:
- Utilities are allocated to each segment based on square footage; however, 50% of the amount allocated to the soup, sandwich, and snack bar results from operating the food equipment.
- The general manager’s salary is allocated between the segments based on estimated time spent with each operation. It is determined that 20% of the general manager’s time is spent with the convenience operation.
- Advertising is allocated to each segment equally but could be reduced by $3,000 if MMV decided to advertise only the auto services.
- Insurance is allocated to each segment based on square footage, but only 25% of the amount allocated to the soup, sandwich, and snack bar results directly from its operation.
- Property taxes and building depreciation are allocated to each segment based on square footage.
Required:
a. From the preceding information, calculate the operating income from the soup, sandwich, and snack bar operation that has caught MMV’s attention.
b. Identify whether each of these operating expenses is relevant to the decision of discontinuing the soup, sandwich, and snack bar operation.
c. If MMV Inc., discontinues the soup, sandwich, and snack bar operation, how much will operating income increase or decrease for this location?
d. Should MMV continue or discontinue the soup, sandwich, and snack bar operation at this location? Consider possible opportunities for the use of this space in your response.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Continue or discontinue a segment? The segmented income statement for XYZ Company for the year ended December 31, 2010, follows:
|
|
XYZ COMPANY
|
|
|
|
Segmented Income Statement
|
|
|
|
For the Year Ended December 31, 2010
|
|
|
|
Total
|
|
|
|
|
|
Company
|
Product A
|
Product B
|
Product C
|
|
Sales
|
$1,200,000
|
$600,000
|
$240,000
|
$360,000
|
|
Variable expenses
|
552,000
|
300,000
|
108,000
|
144,000
|
|
Contribution margin
|
$ 648,000
|
$300,000
|
$132,000
|
$216,000
|
|
Fixed expenses
|
564,000
|
328,000
|
92,000
|
144,000
|
|
Operating income
|
$ 84,000
|
$(28,000)
|
$ 40,000
|
$ 72,000
|
The company is concerned about the performance of product A, and you have been asked to analyze the situation and recommend to the president whether to continue or discontinue the product. During your investigation, you discover that certain fixed expenses are traceable directly to each product line as indicated here:
|
|
Total
|
|
|
|
|
|
Company
|
Product A
|
Product B
|
Product C
|
|
Direct fixed expenses
|
$204,000
|
$148,000
|
$20,000
|
$36,000
|
The remaining fixed expenses are considered to be corporate wide expenses that have been allocated to each product line based on sales revenue.
Required:
a. Prepare a relevant cost analysis for the decision to continue or discontinue product A. Comment on your analysis.
b. Assume that product A is discontinued. Prepare a segmented income statement for the remaining products. Allocate corporate wide fixed expenses as described.
c. Starting with the segmented income statement, use the information you discovered during your investigation to present a more appropriately designed segmented income statement.
d. Explain to the president why the redesigned segmented income statement is more appropriate than the current one.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Calculate NPV, present value ratio, and payback TopCap Co. is evaluating the purchase of another sewing machine that will be used to manufacture sport caps.
The invoice price of the machine is $208,000. In addition, delivery and installation costs will total $10,000. The machine has the capacity to produce 18,000 dozen caps per year. Sales are forecast to increase gradually, and production volumes for each of the five years of the machine’s life are expected to be:
|
2010
|
5,400 dozen
|
|
2011
|
8,400 dozen
|
|
2012
|
12,750 dozen
|
|
2013
|
13,950 dozen
|
|
2014
|
18,000 dozen
|
The caps have a contribution margin of $6.00 per dozen. Fixed costs associated with the additional production (other than depreciation expense) will be negligible.
Salvage value and the investment in working capital should be ignored. TopCap Co.’s
cost of capital for this capacity expansion has been set at 14%.
Required:
a. Calculate the net present value of the proposed investment in the new sewing machine.
b. Calculate the present value ratio of the investment.
c. What is the internal rate of return of this investment relative to the cost of capital?
d. Calculate the payback period of the investment.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Present value ratios index Information about four investment proposals is summarized here:
|
Proposal
|
Investment Required
|
Net Present Value
|
|
1
|
$60,000
|
$36,000
|
|
2
|
24,000
|
9,600
|
|
3
|
72,000
|
36,000
|
|
4
|
72,000
|
14,400
|
Required:
Calculate the present value ratio of each proposal and indicate which proposal is the most desirable investment.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Calculate NPV—rank projects using present value ratios The following capital expenditure projects have been proposed for management’s consideration at Heard, Inc., for the upcoming budget year:
|
|
|
|
|
Project
|
|
|
|
Year(s)
|
A
|
B
|
C
|
D
|
E
|
|
Initial
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
investment
|
0
|
$(50,000)
|
$(50,000)
|
$(100,000)
|
$(100,000)
|
$(200,000)
|
|
Amount of
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
net cash return
|
1
|
10000
|
0
|
32000
|
10000
|
60000
|
|
.
|
2
|
10000
|
0
|
32000
|
20000
|
60000
|
|
.
|
3
|
10000
|
20000
|
32000
|
30000
|
30000
|
|
.
|
4
|
10000
|
20000
|
32000
|
40000
|
30000
|
|
.
|
5
|
10000
|
20000
|
32000
|
50000
|
30000
|
|
Per year
|
6–10
|
10000
|
12000
|
0
|
0
|
30000
|
|
NPV (14%
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
discount rate)
|
|
2161
|
$ ?
|
$ ?
|
$ ?
|
5884
|
|
Present
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
value ratio
|
|
1.04
|
?
|
?
|
?
|
?
|
Required:
a. Calculate the net present value of projects B, C, and D, using 14% as the cost of capital for Heard, Inc.
b. Calculate the present value ratio for projects B, C, D, and E.
c. Which projects would you recommend for investment if the cost of capital is 14% and
1. $100,000 is available for investment?
2. $300,000 is available for investment?
3. $500,000 is available for investment?
d. What additional factors (beyond those considered in parts a–c might influence your project rankings?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Accounting rate of return and NPV Crichton Publications uses the accounting rate of return method to evaluate proposed capital investments. The company’s desired rate of return (its cost of capital) is 18%. The project being evaluated involves a new product that will have a three year life. The investment required is $300,000, which consists of a $240,000 machine, and inventories and accounts receivable totaling $60,000. The machine will have a useful life of three years and a salvage value of $150,000. The salvage value will be received during the fourth year, and the inventories and accounts receivable related to the product also will be converted back to cash in the fourth year.
Accrual accounting net income from the product will be $87,000 per year, before depreciation expense, for each of the three years. Because of the time lag between selling the product and collecting the accounts receivable, cash flows from the product will be:
|
1st year
|
$42,000
|
|
2nd year
|
72,000
|
|
3rd year
|
87,000
|
|
4th year
|
60,000
|
Required:
a. Calculate the accounting rate of return for the first year of the product. Assume straight line depreciation. Based on this analysis, would the investment be made? Explain your answer.
b. Calculate the net present value of the product using a cost of capital of 18% and assuming that cash flows occur at the end of the respective years. Based on this analysis, would the investment be made? Explain your answer.
c. Which of these two analytical approaches is the more appropriate to use? Explain your answer.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Accounting rate of return, payback, and NPV Busy Beaver Corp. is interested in reviewing its method of evaluating capital expenditure proposals using the accounting rate of return method. A recent proposal involved a $50,000 investment in a machine that had an estimated useful life of five years and an estimated salvage value of $10,000. The machine was expected to increase net income (and cash flows) before depreciation expense by $15,000 per year. The criteria for approving a new investment are that it have a rate of return of 16% and a payback period of three years or less.
Required:
a. Calculate the accounting rate of return on this investment for the first year. Assume straight line depreciation. Based on this analysis, would the investment be made? Explain your answer.
b. Calculate the payback period for this investment. Based on this analysis, would the investment be made? Explain your answer.
c. Calculate the net present value of this investment using a cost of capital of 16%. Based on this analysis, would the investment be made? Explain your answer.
d. What recommendation would you make to the management of Busy Beaver Corp. about evaluating capital expenditure proposals? Support your recommendation with the appropriate rationale.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Case study—NPV of opening a small business Jinny Buffett recently retired as a flight attendant and is interested in opening a fitness center and health spa exclusively for women in Grand Cayman, where she resides. After careful study, she is somewhat puzzled as to how to proceed. In her words, “I see my business going in one of two directions: Either I open the fitness center and health spa all at once, or I start with the health spa and hold off on the fitness center for a while. Either way, it should be a success because women on this island love to be pampered. My only concern about the fitness center is the initial cost, but if the projections look good enough, I know some investors in Phoenix who can help me get started. In any event, I plan to retire permanently in 10 years.”
The following information is available:
• Jinny has identified a suitable location for her business in a new shopping center in George Town, capital of the Cayman Islands. The developer has units of 1,000 square feet and 2,500 square feet available and is willing to sell either unit for CI$150 per square foot (CI$1.00 _ US$1.25). Alternatively, the space can be leased at a cost of CI$1.80 per square foot per month, on an annual basis.
• Commercial real estate values have more than doubled in Grand Cayman during the past 10 years, with no slowdown in sight. As a result, Jinny is more attracted to the purchase option because she expects the price per square foot to be CI$300 by the time she is ready to sell her unit in 10 years.
• Exercise machines and other equipment necessary to open the fitness center would cost US$50,000. In addition, US$35,000 would need to be invested in equipment related to the health spa. The useful life for all such equipment is 10 years, and the expected salvage value is not large enough to be concerned about.
• In addition, US$8,000 would need to be invested in an inventory of cosmetics and skin care products necessary to operate the health spa. This level of inventory would need to be maintained throughout the 10 year period and will be given away to loyal customers when Jinny retires permanently.
• The health spa can be operated in the 1,000 square foot unit. Variable operating costs would include CI$0.10 per square foot per month for cleaning and CI$0.40 per square foot per month for utilities. The 2,500 square foot unit is large enough to operate both the fitness center and health spa, and the CI$0.10 rate per square foot for cleaning would not change. However, if the 2,500 square foot unit were used, the health spa would be located in an open loft that would need to be air conditioned at all times. As a result, utility costs are expected to be CI$0.60 per square foot per month under this option.
• Jinny is a certified aesthetician and expects to do most of the makeovers, facials, and peels herself, but she needs a qualified assistant for the health spa. She estimates that hiring an appropriate person will cost US$25,000 per year. Likewise, for the fitness center, two full time aerobics instructors would be hired for US$20,000 each per year, and a physical trainer would be hired for US$30,000 per year.
• Additional fixed costs include US$3,000 per year for advertising and US$4,500 per year for maintenance, insurance, and other items. These costs will be incurred without respect to the size of operations.
• Annual membership fees to the fitness center will be CI$300, and a preliminary market survey shows a demand of approximately 500 initial members.
Although members tend to come and go, the net change in membership from year to year is not expected to be significant. No additional fees will be charged to fitness center members.
• Health spa fees are assessed on a user basis, although the steam room facilities are available at no charge to fitness center members. The net cash inflow from cosmetics and skin care products (after deducting the cost of inventory used and sold) is expected to be CI$8,000 per month.
• Jinny’s cost of capital is 12%, and there are no taxes in the Cayman Islands.
Required:
a. Calculate the net present value in US$ of an investment in the health spa only, assuming that the 1,000 square foot unit is purchased and then resold at the end of 10 years.
b. Calculate the net present value in US$ of an investment in the fitness center and health spa, assuming that the 2,500 square foot unit is purchased and then resold at the end of 10 years.
c. Jinny is quite concerned about possible forecasting errors and has asked you to prepare a more conservative estimate. Repeat part b, assuming that the fitness center attracts only 300 members per year (rather than 500); that the net cash inflow per month from cosmetics and skin care products is only CI$6,000 per month (rather than CI$8,000 per month); and that commercial real estate values in Grand Cayman at the end of 10 years are only CI$200 per square foot (rather than CI$300 per square foot).
d. Explain why it might be in Jinny’s best interest to lease (rather than purchase) the 1,000 square foot unit if she initially decides to open the health spa only.
Although no calculations are required, you should consider both quantitative and qualitative factors in your response.
e. What is your overall recommendation? Include an explanation of any additional factors that you would consider in making your recommendation. Keep in mind that Jinny has not given herself a salary in her projections. Assume that a reasonable salary would be CI$4,000 per month.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Comprehensive problem—quantitative and qualitative analysis The following data have been collected by capital budgeting analysts at Sunrise Beach, Inc., concerning an investment in an expansion of the company’s product line.
Analysts estimate that an investment of $400,000 will be required to initiate the project at the beginning of 2010. The estimated cash returns from the new product line are summarized in the following table; assume that the returns will be received in a lump sum at the end of each year:
|
|
Amount of
|
|
Year
|
Cash Return
|
|
2010
|
$100,800
|
|
2011
|
129,600
|
|
2012
|
156,000
|
|
2013
|
115,200
|
The new product line will also require an investment in inventory and receivables of $64,000; this investment will become available for other purposes at the end of the project. The salvage value of machinery and equipment at the end of the product line’s life is expected to be $60,000. The cost of capital used in Sunrise Beach, Inc.’s, capital budgeting analysis is 12%.
Required:
a. Calculate the net present value of the proposed investment. Ignore income taxes and round all answers to the nearest $1.
b. Calculate the present value ratio of the investment.
c. What will the internal rate of return on this investment be relative to the cost of capital? Explain your answer.
d. Calculate the payback period of the investment.
e. Based on the quantitative analysis, would you recommend that the product line expansion project be undertaken? Explain your answer.
f. Identify some qualitative factors that you would want to have considered with respect to this project before management proceeds with the investment.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Capital budget expenditure analysis, Internet assignment Annual reports provide significant information about an organization’s capital budget and capital budgeting process. Intel Corporation provides financial reports for several years. This exercise will require you to use Intel’s consolidated statements of cash flows, management’s discussion and analysis of financial condition and results of operations, and notes to the consolidated financial statements for the most recent year presented.
Required:
Using Intel’s most recent annual report, answer the following:
a. From Intel’s consolidated statements of cash flows:
1. Identify the amount of capital expenditures from the investing activities section. How much were the additions to property, plant, and equipment?
How much were the acquisitions, net of cash acquired?
2. How do these amounts compare to the previous two years? Comment on the trend relative to the general cash flow position for each year.
b. Read Intel’s management’s discussion and analysis of financial condition and results of operations.
1. In the Strategy section, what information is provided about the Intel capital program?
2. In the Critical Accounting Estimates section, describe how Intel assesses the impairment of long lived assets.
3. In the Liquidity and Capital Resources section, how were investing cash flows used for capital expenditures?
4. In the Business Outlook section, describe Intel’s capital spending plan for the next year.
c. From Intel’s notes to the consolidated financial statements, determine the following:
1. How does Intel value and depreciate property, plant, and equipment?
2. If applicable, describe Intel’s acquisitions for the year.
3. If applicable, describe Intel’s divestitures for the year.
d. From Intel’s selected financial data, do the following:
1. For the five years presented, calculate the ratio of additions to property, plant, and equipment to net revenue.
2. For the five years presented, calculate the ratio of net investment in property, plant, and equipment to total assets.
3. Comment on the trends.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Constant Growth Model
Suppose that Steady State Electronics wins a major contract for its revolutionary computer chip. The very profitable contract will enable it to increase the growth rate of dividends from 5% to 6% without reducing the current dividend from the projected value of $4.00 per share. What will happen to the stock price? What will happen to future expected rates of return on the stock?
The stock price ought to increase in response to the good news about the contract, and indeed it does. The stock price rises from its original value of $57.14 to a post announcement price of
d1 / k g =$4.00/0.12 0.06=$66.67
Investors who are holding the stock when the good news about the contract is announced will receive a substantial windfall.
On the other hand, at the new price the expected rate of return on the stock is 12%, just as it was before the new contract was announced.
E(r) = D1/P0 + g = $4.00/$66.67 +0.06 = 0.12, or 12%
This result makes sense, of course. Once the news about the contract is reflected in the stock price, the expected rate of return will be consistent with the risk of the stock. Since the risk of the stock has not changed, neither should the expected rate of return.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Direct material variances—solving for price and usage variances Fiber works Company is a manufacturer of fiberglass toy boats. The company has recently implemented a standard cost system and has designed the system to isolate variances as soon as possible. During the month of August, the following results were reported for the production of 50,000 toy boats:
|
Direct materials (fiberglass) purchased
|
100,000 pounds
|
|
Direct materials issued into production
|
80,000 pounds
|
|
Standard pounds allowed per boat
|
1.5 pounds
|
|
Standard price per pound
|
$7.50
|
|
Cost of fiberglass purchased
|
$725,500
|
Required:
a. Calculate the actual cost per pound of fiberglass purchased during August.
b. Calculate the direct materials purchase price variance for August.
c. Calculate the direct materials usage variance for August.
d. Comment on calculating the material price variance based on pounds purchased rather than pounds issued into production.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Segmented income statement The president of Truman, Inc., attended a seminar about the contribution margin model and returned to her company full of enthusiasm about it. She requested that last year’s traditional model income statement be revised, and she received the following report:
|
|
Total Company
|
|
Division
|
|
|
A
|
B
|
C
|
|
Sales
|
$400,000
|
$160,000
|
$100,000
|
$140,000
|
|
Variable expenses
|
240,000
|
104,000
|
60,000
|
76,000
|
|
Contribution margin
|
$160,000
|
$ 56,000
|
$ 40,000
|
$ 64,000
|
|
Fixed expenses
|
120,000
|
40,000
|
44,000
|
36,000
|
|
Net income (loss)
|
$ 40,000
|
$ 16,000
|
$ (4,000)
|
$ 28,000
|
The president was told that the fixed expenses of $120,000 included $84,000 that had been split evenly between divisions because they were general corporate expenses.
After looking at the statement, the president exclaimed, “I knew it! Division B is a drag on the whole company. Close it down!”
Required:
a. Evaluate the president’s remark.
b. Calculate what the company’s net income would be if Division B were closed down.
c. Write a policy statement related to the allocation of fixed expenses.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Segmented income statement Vogel Co. produces three models of heating and air conditioning thermostat components. The following table summarizes data about each model:
|
BV19
|
HV41
|
MV12
|
|
Selling price per unit
|
$36
|
$60
|
$30
|
|
Contribution margin per unit
|
12
|
18
|
6
|
|
Units sold per month
|
4,000
|
2,000
|
6,000
|
|
Total contribution margin
|
$48,000
|
$36,000
|
$36,000
|
|
Direct fixed expenses.
|
21,600
|
17,100
|
24,300
|
|
Segment margin
|
$26,400
|
$18,900
|
$11,700
|
|
Allocated company fixed expenses
|
10,000
|
5,000
|
15,000
|
|
Operating income (loss)
|
$16,400
|
$13,900
|
($3,300)
|
Required:
a. Criticize the preceding presentation. On what basis does the $30,000 of company fixed expenses appear to be allocated?
b. Calculate the effect on total company net income if the MV12 model were discontinued.
c. Calculate the contribution margin ratio for each model.
d. If an advertising campaign focusing on a single model were to result in an increase of 5,000 units in the quantity of units sold, which model should be advertised? Explain your answer.
e. If an advertising campaign focusing on a single model were to result in an increase of $15,000 in revenues, which model should be advertised? Explain your answer.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Investment center analysis; ROI and residual income Milano Corporation has three operating divisions and requires a 12% return on all investments. Selected information is presented here:
|
Division A
|
Division B
|
Division C
|
|
Revenues
|
$500,000
|
?
|
?
|
|
Operating income
|
$60,000
|
?
|
$80,000
|
|
Operating assets
|
$250,000
|
$600,000
|
?
|
|
Margin
|
?
|
12%
|
?
|
|
Turnover
|
?
|
1 turn
|
2 turns
|
|
ROI
|
?
|
?
|
?
|
|
Residual income
|
?
|
?
|
$20,000
|
Required:
a. Calculate the missing amounts for each division.
b. Comment on the relative performance of each division.
c. Provide an example to show how residual income improves decision making at the divisional level.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Calculate variable cost variances—explain results The standards for one case of Spring fever Tonic are:
|
Direct materials
|
6 lbs. @ $5.00/lb. = $30
|
|
Direct labor
|
5 hrs. @ $12.00/hr. = 60
|
|
Variable overhead (based on direct labor hours)
|
5 hrs. @ $6.00/hr. = 30
|
During the week ended March 28, the following activity took place:
16,000 lbs. of raw materials were purchased for inventory at a cost of $4.95 per pound.
2,500 cases of finished product were produced.
15,600 lbs. of raw materials were used.
12,200 direct labor hours were worked at a total cost of $152,500.
$76,860 of actual variable overhead costs were incurred.
Required:
Calculate each of the following variances and provide plausible explanations for the results:
a. Price variance for raw materials purchased.
b. Raw materials usage variance.
c. Direct labor rate variance.
d. Direct labor efficiency variance.
e. Variable overhead spending variance.
f. Variable overhead efficiency variance.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Calculate variable cost variances—explain results The standards for one case of liquid weed killer are:
|
Direct materials
|
3 lbs. @ $ 6.00/lb.
|
|
Direct labor
|
1.8 hrs. @ $12.00/hr.
|
|
Variable overhead (based on machine hours)
|
0.6 hr. @ $ 3.50/hr.
|
During the week ended August 6, the following activity took place:
2,390 machine hours were worked.
11,400 lbs. of raw material were purchased for inventory at a total cost of $70,680.
3,800 cases of finished product were produced.
11,290 lbs. of raw material were used.
6,720 labor hours were worked at an average rate of $12.25 per hour.
$8,126 actual variable overhead costs were incurred.
Required:
Calculate each of the following variances and provide plausible explanations for the results:
a. Price variance for raw materials purchased.
b. Raw materials usage variance.
c. Direct labor rate variance.
d. Direct labor efficiency variance.
e. Variable overhead spending variance.
f. Variable overhead efficiency variance.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Direct labor variances—insurance company application The Foster Insurance Company developed standard times for processing claims. When a claim was received at the processing center, it was first reviewed and classified as simple or complex. The standard time for processing was:
|
Simple claim
|
36 minutes
|
|
Complex claim
|
1.25 hours
|
Employees were expected to be productive 7.5 hours per day. Compensation costs were $135 per day per employee. During July, which had 20 working days, the following number of claims were processed:
|
Simple claims
|
3,000 processed
|
|
Complex claims
|
960 processed
|
Required:
a. Calculate the number of workers that should have been available to process July claims.
b. Assume that 23 workers were actually available throughout the month of July.
Calculate a labor efficiency variance expressed as both a number of workers and a dollar amount for the month.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Direct labor variances—banking application Pioneer State Bank developed a standard for teller staffing that provided for one teller to handle 12 customers per hour. During April, the bank averaged 57 customers per hour and had six tellers on duty at all times. (Relief tellers filled in during lunch and rest breaks.) The teller compensation cost is $15 per hour. The bank is open eight hours a day, and there were 22 working days during April.
Required:
a. Calculate the teller efficiency variance during April expressed in terms of number of tellers and cost per hour.
b. Now assume that in April, during the 11:00 a.m. to 1:00 p.m. period every day, the bank served an average of 84 customers per hour. During the other six hours of the day, an average of 48 customers per hour were served.
1. Calculate a teller efficiency variance for the 11:00 to 1:00 period expressed in terms of number of tellers per hour and total cost for the month.
2. Calculate a teller efficiency variance for the other six hours of the da expressed in terms of number of tellers per hour and total cost for the month.
3. As teller supervisor, explain the significance of the variances calculated in (1) and (2), and explain how you might respond to the uneven work flow during each day .
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Fixed overhead variances—various issues Silverstone’s production budget for March called for making 200,000 units of a single product. The firm’s production standards allow one quarter of a machine hour per unit produced. The fixed overhead budget for March was $108,000. Silverstone uses an absorption costing system.
Actual activity and costs for March were:
|
Units produced
|
195,000
|
|
Fixed overhead costs incurred
|
$111,000
|
Required:
a. Calculate the predetermined fixed overhead application rate that would be used in March.
b. Calculate the number of machine hours that would be allowed for actual March production.
c. Calculate the fixed overhead applied to work in process during March.
d. Calculate the over or underapplied fixed overhead for March.
e. Calculate the fixed overhead budget and volume variances for March.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Variable and fixed overhead variances—various issues Presented here are the original overhead budget and the actual costs incurred during July for Rembrant, Inc. Rembrant’s managers relate overhead to direct labor hours for planning, control, and product costing purposes. The original budget is based on budgeted production of 30,000 units in 6,000 standard direct labor hours. Actual production of 32,400 units required 6,750 actual direct labor hours.
|
|
Original Budget
|
Actual Costs
|
|
Variable overhead
|
$45,000
|
$50,700
|
|
Fixed overhead
|
54,000
|
56,400
|
Required:
a. Calculate the flexed budget allowances for variable and fixed overhead for July.
b. Calculate the direct labor efficiency variance for July expressed in terms of direct labor hours.
c. Calculate the predetermined overhead application rate for both variable and fixed overhead for July.
d. Calculate the fixed and variable overhead applied to production during July if overhead is applied on the basis of standard hours allowed for actual production achieved.
e. Calculate the fixed overhead budget and volume variances for July.
f. Calculate the over or underapplied fixed overhead for July.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Performance reporting The chair of the Science Department of State University has a budget for laboratory supplies. Supplies have a variable cost behavior pattern that is a function of the number of students enrolled in laboratory courses. For planning purposes, when the budget was prepared in March 2010, it was estimated that there would be 300 students enrolled in laboratory courses during the fall 2010 semester.
Actual enrollment for the fall semester was 318 students.
Required:
a. Explain what action should be taken with respect to the supplies budget when the actual enrollment is known.
b. Would your answer to part a be any different if the actual enrollment turned out to be 273 students? Explain your answer.
c. Suppose the budget item in question was the salary for the lab assistant. How would your answer to part a and part b change, if at all? Explain your answer.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Flexible budgeting One of the significant costs for a nonpublic college or university is student aid in the form of gifts and grants awarded to students because of academic potential or performance, and/or financial need. Gifts and grants are only a part of a financial aid package, usually accounting for no more than 20% of the total package. Federal and state grants, other scholarships, loans, and income from work constitute the rest of financial aid, but these funds are not provided by the institution.
Assume that for the 2010–2011 academic year, Mission College had a gift and grant budget of $1,200,000 and that all of these funds had been committed to students by May 15, 2010. The college had capacity to enroll up to 250 additional students.
Required:
Explain why and how flexible budgeting should be applied by the management of Mission College in administering its gift and grant awards budget.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Frequency of performance reporting If a company uses a standard cost system, should all variances be calculated with the same frequency (e.g., monthly) and should they always be expressed in dollar amounts? Explain your answer and include in it the reason for calculating variances.
Rank the importance of eight variances Assume that you are the production manager of a small branch plant of a large manufacturing firm. The central accounting control department sends you monthly performance reports showing the flexed budget amount, actual cost and variances for raw materials, direct labor, variable overhead (which is expressed on a direct labor hour basis), and fixed overhead. The variable cost budget variances are separated into quantity and cost per unit of input variances, and the fixed overhead budget and volume variances are shown. All variances are expressed in dollars.
Required:
a. Rank the eight variances in descending order of their usefulness to you for planning and controlling purposes. Explain your ranking.
b. Given the usefulness ranking in part a, explain how the frequency of reporting and the units in which each variance is reported might make the performance reports more useful.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Direct material variances—the price versus usage trade off Williamson, Inc., manufactures quality replacement parts for the auto industry. The company uses a standard costing system and isolates variances as soon as possible. The purchasing manager is responsible for controlling the direct material price variances for hundreds of raw material items that are used in the company’s various production processes.
Recent experience indicates that, in the aggregate, direct material price variances have been favorable. However, several problems have occurred. Direct material usage
variances have become consistently unfavorable for many items, and the company’s total budget variance for direct materials has been unfavorable during each of the past six months. Direct laborers have complained about the quality of certain raw material items, and major customers have canceled purchase orders. In the meantime, the company’s raw materials inventory has increased by nearly 240%.
Required:
a. Give a probable explanation of why these results have occurred.
b. How could the performance reporting system be improved to encourage more appropriate behavior on the part of the purchasing manager?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Evaluate the effects of erroneous standards During the year ended May 31, 2009, Teller Register Co. reported favorable raw material usage and direct labor and variable overhead efficiency variances that totaled $114,312. Price and rate variances were negligible. Total standard cost of goods manufactured during the year was $952,600.
Required:
a. Comment about the effectiveness of the company’s standards for controlling material and labor usage.
b. If standard costs are used for valuing finished goods inventory, will the ending inventory valuation be higher or lower than if actual costs are used? Explain your answer.
c. Assume that the ending inventory of finished goods valued at standard cost is $79,380. Calculate the adjustment to finished goods inventory that would be appropriate because of the erroneous standards.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The planning and control environment: Internet assignment The Consortium for Advanced Manufacturing—International (CAM I) is an international consortium of companies, consultancies, and academics that have elected to work cooperatively in a precompetitive environment to solve problems common to the group. Its sole purpose is to support member companies in their quest for excellence in today’s highly competitive global marketplace. This case requires you to to complete the following requirements.
Assume that a start up manufacturing company has recently hired you, and your first task is to develop a cost planning and control environment for the firm.
Required:
a. Review CAM I’s executive overview. Summarize the history of the organization and describe how CAM I’s “participative model” produces value for its members.
b. Review CAM I’s columns and news. Choose an article from the list that would guide you by specifically addressing a planning or control system topic, and write a brief summary of the article. Explain how information in the article will support the development of your planning and control system.
c. Review CAM I’s member companies. Choose two companies from different industries and list several reasons for their membership in the organization.
d. Review CAM I’s programs. Choose a program that you expect to be beneficial and write a memo to your new supervisor describing your rationale to justify the cost of joining this program.
e. Review CAM I’s online bookstore. Identify two items from the cost management resources that would help you with your new responsibility. Explain your choices.
f. Consider CAM I’s private forums. How would participation in CAM I be justified for your organization from a benefit/cost perspective?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Match the appropriate letter for the key term or concept to each definition provided (items 1–15). Note that not all key terms and concepts will be used.
|
a. Differential cost
|
j. Present value
|
|
b. Allocated cost
|
k. Cost of capital
|
|
c. Sunk cost
|
l. Net present value (NPV)
|
|
d. Opportunity cost
|
m. Internal rate of return (IRR)
|
|
e. Relevant cost
|
n. Payback method
|
|
f. Full capacity
|
o. Accounting rate of return
|
|
g. Idle capacity
|
p. Profitability index
|
|
h. Capital budgeting
|
q. Post audit
|
|
i. Cash flow
|
r. Outsourcing
|
1. The level of ROI that must be earned to permit the firm to meet its interest obligations and provide the owners their expected return; the discount rate used in the present value calculations of capital budgeting.
2. A cost that has been incurred and that cannot be unincurred, or reversed, by some future action.
3. A capital budgeting analytical technique that calculates the length of time for the cash flows from an investment to equal the investment.
4. The process of comparing the assumptions used in a capital budgeting analysis with the actual results of the investment.
5. The operating condition when some available production resources are not being utilized.
6. The process of analyzing proposed investments in plant and equipment and other long lived assets.
7. An economic concept relating to income forgone because an alternative to earn income was not pursued.
8. A capital budgeting analytical technique that solves for the time adjusted rate of return on an investment over its life.
9. The ratio of the present value of cash flows to the investment; used to rank proposed capital expenditures by profitability.
10. The acquisition of resources or services from outside the organization as opposed to producing those resources or services internally.
11. A capital budgeting analytical technique that calculates the rate of return on the investment based on the financial statement impacts of the investment.
12. A cost that has been assigned to a product or activity using some sort of systematic process.
13. A cost that will differ based on the selection of an alternative activity.
14. A capital budgeting analytical technique that relates the present value of the returns (cash inflows) from an investment to the present value of the cost (cash outflows) of the investment, given a cost of capital.
15. A cost classification used in analyzing costs of decision alternatives.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Using the present value factors in your text, the estimated annual cash inflow
from the following investment proposal would be (rounded)
|
Investment cost
|
$13,000
|
|
Net present value
|
$ 3,300
|
|
Life of the project
|
6 years
|
|
Cost of capital
|
14%
|
a. $3,800.
b. $3,900.
c. $4,000.
d. $4,100.
e. $4,200.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Antonio, Inc., has invested in new production equipment at a cost of $24,000. The equipment has an estimated useful life of eight years. The estimated annual sales and operating expense related to the equipment are as follows:
|
Annual sales
|
$44,000
|
|
Labor costs.
|
(36,000)
|
|
Depreciation of equipment
|
(3,000)
|
|
Operating income
|
$ 5,000
|
|
Income taxes (40%).
|
(2,000)
|
|
Net income
|
$ 3,000
|
The payback period of the investment in equipment is approximately
a. 3.0 years.
b. 4.0 years.
c. 4.8 years.
d. 8.0 years.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Antonio, Inc., has invested in new production equipment at a cost of $24,000. The equipment has an estimated useful life of eight years. The estimated annual sales and operating expense related to the equipment are as follows:
|
Annual sales
|
$44,000
|
|
Labor costs.
|
(36,000)
|
|
Depreciation of equipment
|
(3,000)
|
|
Operating income
|
$ 5,000
|
|
Income taxes (40%).
|
(2,000)
|
|
Net income
|
$ 3,000
|
The accounting rate of return is approximately
a. 12.5%.
b. 20.8%.
c. 25.0%.
d. 33.3%.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cash budget—part 1 PrimeTime Sportswear is a custom imprinter that began operations six months ago. Sales have exceeded management’s most optimistic projections. Sales are made on account and collected as follows: 60% in the month after the sale is made and 35% in the second month after sale. Merchandise purchases and operating expenses are paid as follows:
|
In the month during which the merchandise
|
|
|
is purchased or the cost is incurred
|
70%
|
|
In the subsequent month
|
30%
|
PrimeTime Sportswear’s income statement budget for each of the next four months, newly revised to reflect the success of the firm, follows:
|
July
|
August
|
September
|
October
|
|
Sales
|
$84,000
|
$108,000
|
$136,000
|
$118,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold:
|
|
|
|
|
|
Beginning inventory
|
$12,000
|
$28,800
|
$41,200
|
$43,800
|
|
Purchases
|
75,600
|
88,000
|
97,800
|
66,200
|
|
Cost of goods available for sale
|
$87,600
|
$116,800
|
$139,000
|
$110,000
|
|
Less: Ending inventory
|
28,800
|
41,200
|
43,800
|
40,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
$58,800
|
$75,600
|
$95,200
|
$70,000
|
|
Gross profit
|
$25,200
|
$32,400
|
$40,800
|
$48,000
|
|
Operating expenses
|
21,000
|
25,600
|
28,600
|
32,200
|
|
Operating income
|
$4,200
|
$6,800
|
$12,200
|
$15,800
|
Cash on hand June 30 is estimated to be $75,000. Collections of June 30 accounts receivable were estimated to be $40,000 in July and $30,000 in August. Payments of June 30 accounts payable and accrued expenses in July were estimated to be $48,000.
Required:
a. Prepare a cash budget for July.
b. What is your advice to management of PrimeTime Sportswear?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cash budget—comprehensive Following are the budgeted income statements for the second quarter of 2010 for Marine Tech, Inc.:
|
|
April
|
May
|
June
|
|
Sales
|
$224,000
|
$272,000
|
$304,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
153,600
|
182,400
|
201,600
|
|
Gross profit
|
$ 70,400
|
$ 89,600
|
$102,400
|
|
Operating expenses
|
35,200
|
40,000
|
43,200
|
|
Operating income
|
$ 35,200
|
$ 49,600
|
$ 59,200
|
The company expects about 40% of sales to be cash transactions. Of sales on account, 65% are expected to be collected in the first month after the sale is made, and 35% are expected to be collected in the second month after sale. Depreciation, insurance, and property taxes represent $19,200 of the estimated monthly cost of goods sold and $12,800 of the estimated monthly operating expenses. The annual insurance premium is paid in January, and the annual property taxes are paid in August. Of the remainder of the cost of goods sold and operating expenses, 90% are expected to be paid in the month in which they are incurred, and the balance is expected to be paid in the following month.
Current assets as of April 1, 2010, consist of cash of $22,400 and accounts receivable of $239,680 ($168,000 from March credit sales and $71,680 from February credit sales). Current liabilities as of April 1 consist of $28,800 of accounts payable for product costs incurred in March; $7,360 of accrued liabilities for operating expenses incurred in March; and a $76,000, 12%, 120 day note payable that is due on April 17, 2010.
An estimated income tax payment of $72,000 will be made in May. The regular quarterly dividend of $25,600 is expected to be declared in May and paid in June.
Capital expenditures amounting to $27,520 will be made in April.
Required:
a. Complete the monthly cash budgets for the second quarter of 2010 using the following format. Note that the ending cash balance for June is provided as a check figure.
b. Assume that management of Marine Tech, Inc., desires to maintain a minimum cash balance of $20,000 at the beginning of each month and has arranged a $100,000 line of credit with a local bank at an interest rate of 10% to ensure the availability of funds. Borrowing transactions are to occur only at the end of months in which the budgeted cash balance would otherwise fall short of the $20,000 minimum balance. Repayments of principal and interest are to occur at the end of the earliest month in which sufficient funds are expected to be available for repayment. Explain how this minimum cash balance requirement would affect the monthly cash budgets prepared in part a.
|
MARINE TECH, INC.
|
|
|
|
|
Cash Budget
|
|
|
|
|
For the Months of April, May, and June, 2010
|
|
|
|
|
April
|
May
|
June
|
|
Beginning cash balance
|
$22,400
|
$
|
$
|
|
Cash Receipts:
|
|
|
|
|
From cash sales made in current month
|
|
|
|
|
From credit sales made in:
|
|
|
|
|
February
|
|
|
|
|
March
|
|
|
|
|
April
|
|
|
|
|
May
|
|
|
|
|
Total cash available.
|
$
|
$
|
$
|
|
Cash Disbursements:
|
|
|
|
|
For cost of goods sold and operating expenses
|
|
|
|
|
incurred in:
|
|
|
|
|
March
|
$
|
$
|
$
|
|
April
|
|
|
|
|
May
|
|
|
|
|
June
|
|
|
|
|
For payment of note payable and interest
|
|
|
|
|
For capital expenditures
|
|
|
|
|
For payment of income taxes
|
|
|
|
|
For payment of dividends
|
|
|
|
|
Total disbursements
|
$
|
$
|
$
|
|
Ending cash balance
|
$
|
$
|
$
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Sales, production, purchases, and cash budgets Rolen, Inc., is in the process of preparing the fourth quarter budget for 2010, and the following data have been assembled:
- The company sells a single product at a price of $25 per unit. The estimated sales volume for the next six months is as follows:
|
September
|
13,000 units
|
|
October
|
12,000 units
|
|
November
|
14,000 units
|
|
December
|
20,000 units
|
|
January
|
9,000 units
|
|
February
|
10,000 units
|
All sales are on account. The company’s collection experience has been that 30% of a month’s sales are collected in the month of sale, 68% are collected in the month following the sale, and 2% are uncollectible. It is expected that the net realizable value of accounts receivable (i.e., accounts receivable less allowance for uncollectible accounts) will be $211,000 on September 30, 2010.
- Management’s policy is to maintain ending finished goods inventory each month at a level equal to 30% of the next month’s budgeted sales.
- The finished goods inventory on September 30, 2010, is expected to be 3,600 units.
- To make one unit of finished product, 5 pounds of materials are required. Management’s policy is to have enough materials on hand at the end of each month to equal 40% of the next month’s estimated usage. The raw materials inventory is expected to be 25,200 pounds on September 30, 2010.
- The cost per pound of raw material is $2, and 70% of all purchases are paid for in the month of purchase; the remainder is paid in the following month.
The accounts payable for raw material purchases is expected to be $37,980 on September 30, 2010.
Required:
a. Prepare a sales budget in units and dollars, by month and in total, for the fourth quarter (October, November, and December) of 2010.
b. Prepare a schedule of cash collections from sales, by month and in total, for the fourth quarter of 2010.
c. Prepare a production budget in units, by month and in total, for the fourth quarter of 2010.
d. Prepare a materials purchases budget in pounds, by month and in total, for the fourth quarter of 2010.
e. Prepare a schedule of cash payments for materials, by month and in total, for the fourth quarter of 2010.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Standard setting process Canada Printing Group, Inc. (CPGI), has recently begun the process of acquiring small to medium size local and regional printing firms across the country to facilitate its corporate strategy of becoming the low cost provider of graphic arts and printing services in Canada. To emphasize the importance of cost control, CPGI uses a standard cost system in all of its printing plants. Most of the smaller firms that CPGI has acquired have never used a standard cost system before. Therefore, when CPGI acquires a new printing plant, its first task is to evaluate the operation and set standards for the printing presses.
One such recent acquisition was Pierre’s Lithographing of Montreal. Pierre has a five year old, 40 inch, four color press that is in very good condition. Specifications provided by the manufacturer of the press indicate that under ideal conditions, the press should be able to produce 10,000 impressions per hour. CPGI has many similar presses throughout its organization, and in most locations the standard has been set at 9,000 impressions per hour. Many of Pierre’s jobs have been for smaller run quantities, which means that the presses are stopped many times during the day as the press operator sets up the press for each new job. Additionally, the jobs that Pierre attracts are very complex and require high quality results. Pierre suggests that even if everything ran perfectly throughout a day, the most he could expect the press to run would be 8,000 impressions per hour.
As usual with new acquisitions, CPGI has prepared a time study of the press for the past six months to determine how productive each of the operators has been. The results of the time study are as follows:
|
Press Operator
|
Average Impressions per Hour
|
|
M. Lemieux
|
6,800
|
|
G. LeFleur
|
5,700
|
|
M. Richard.
|
7,400
|
|
P. Roy
|
6,100
|
|
P. Turgeon
|
6,500
|
|
Overall average
|
6,500
|
Required:
a. CPGI is considering five possibilities for setting the press standard for impressions per hour: 10,000, 9,000, 8,000, 7,400, or 6,500. Discuss the appropriateness, including a list of pros and cons, of setting the press standard at each level identified.
b. What qualitative factors should CPGI consider when setting a standard for the same model press at other sites across Canada?
c. Which level would you choose for the press standard at Pierre’s Lithographing of Montreal? Explain your answer.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Budget of the United States government: Internet assignment The Office of Management and Budget provides access to the budget of the United States government. “A Citizen’s Guide to the Federal Budget” provides information about the budget and the budget process for the general public. Access the guide for the most current fiscal year and complete the following requirements:
Required:
a. Why was the guide designed, and what information is presented at this site?
b. What is the federal budget?
c. What percentage of the gross domestic product does spending for federal programs represent? What percentage does state and local government spending represent?
d. What was the amount of total receipts? Where did they come from?
e. What was the amount of total outlays? Where did they go?
f. Explain the process used by the government to create a budget.
g. How is the federal budget monitored?
h. What is meant by a budget surplus? A budget deficit?
i. Why is a budget deficit important? A budget surplus?
j. How does the government’s budget process compare to the operating budgeting process described in the chapter? What are the similarities and differences?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
- What does it mean to state that a favorable usage variance may not really be favorable?
- What does it mean to state that for variance analysis to be effective, it should result in better communication between managers?
- What does it mean to state that the analysis of fixed manufacturing overhead variance is not likely to be done with the same frequency as the analysis of variable cost variances?
- What does it mean to have a responsibility reporting system?
- What does it mean to state that common fixed expenses should never be arbitrarily allocated to segments (for example, products or organizational units)?
- What does it mean when an investment center manager sub optimizes company performance?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Match the appropriate letter for the key term or concept to each definition provided (items 1–20). Note that not all key terms and concepts will be used.
|
a. Performance report
|
h. Responsibility reporting
|
|
b. Flexible budget
|
i. Overapplied overhead
|
|
c. Organization segment
|
j. Underapplied overhead
|
|
d. Direct fixed expenses
|
k. Favorable variance
|
|
e. Common fixed expenses
|
l. Unfavorable variance
|
|
f. Management by exception
|
m. Direct labor rate variance
|
|
g. Segment margin
|
n. Direct labor efficiency variance
|
|
o. Volume variance
|
s. Variable overhead spending
|
|
p. Raw materials usage variance
|
variance
|
|
q. Raw materials price variance
|
t. Variance
|
|
r. Variable overhead efficiency
|
u. Residual income
|
|
variance
|
v. Balanced scorecard
|
1. The excess of actual cost over budgeted cost.
2. The contribution of a segment of an organization to the common fixed expenses and operating income of the organization.
3. A system of performance reporting that involves successive degrees of summarization as the number of management levels being reported about increases.
4. A management concept that involves thorough planning and then exerting corrective effort only in those areas that do not show results consistent with the plan.
5. A report comparing planned and actual activity or costs.
6. A budget that has been adjusted to reflect a budget allowance based on actual level of activity rather than the planned level of activity used to establish the original budget.
7. An expense assigned to an organizational segment in a segmented income statement that would not be incurred if the segment were eliminated.
8. The excess of budgeted cost over actual cost.
9. An expense that is not assigned to an organizational segment in a segmented income statement because the expense would be incurred even if the segment were eliminated.
10. A set of integrated financial and operating performance measures that communicate an organization’s strategic goals and priorities.
11. That part of the variable overhead variance due to the difference between actual hours required and standard hours allowed for the work done.
12. A fixed manufacturing overhead variance caused by actual activity being different from the estimated activity used in calculating the predetermined overhead application rate.
13. That part of the direct labor variance due to the difference between actual hours required and standard hours allowed for the work done.
14. A debit balance in the manufacturing overhead account that results from actual overhead costs in excess of applied overhead.
15. That part of the total raw materials variance due to the difference between standard usage and actual usage of raw materials.
16. That part of the variable overhead variance due to the difference between actual variable overhead cost per hour and the standard rate used to apply overhead.
17. The difference between budgeted amount and actual amount.
18. That part of the direct labor variance due to the difference between the actual hourly wage rate paid and the standard rate used to cost a product.
19. That part of the total raw materials variance due to the difference between standard cost and actual cost of raw materials used.
20. The amount of income an investment center generates above a minimum required return on investment.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Zona Company’s income statement for 2010 for Brands A and Z and for the company as a whole follows:
|
|
Total
|
Brand A
|
Brand Z
|
|
Sales
|
$450,000
|
$250,000
|
$200,000
|
|
Variable expenses
|
(322,000)
|
(160,000)
|
(162,000)
|
|
Contribution margin
|
$128,000
|
90,000
|
38,000
|
|
Direct fixed expenses
|
(53,000)
|
(22,000)
|
(31,000)
|
|
Segment margin
|
$ 75,000
|
$ 68,000
|
$ 7,000
|
|
Common fixed expenses
|
(45,000)
|
|
|
|
Operating Income
|
$ 30,000
|
|
|
If Brand Z’s sales increase by $25,000 and its direct fixed expenses increase by $3,000, operating income for the company as a whole would increase by a. $875.
b. $1,167.
c. $1,750.
d. $4,167.
e. $1,900.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Precision Inc.’s standard cost per unit, based on a budgeted level of production of 400 units, is as follows:
|
Raw materials (200 pounds @ 30 cents per pound)
|
$60.00
|
|
Direct labor (3 hours @ $15.00 per hour)
|
45.00
|
The actual results for the 380 units produced were as follows:
|
Raw materials cost for 76,300 pounds used
|
$25,942
|
|
Direct labor cost for 1,200 hours worked
|
16,200
|
Raw material price variance is
a. $2,905 U.
b. $3,052 U.
c. $3,075 U.
d. $3,052 F.
e. $3,075 F.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Precision Inc.’s standard cost per unit, based on a budgeted level of production of 400 units, is as follows:
|
Raw materials (200 pounds @ 30 cents per pound)
|
$60.00
|
|
Direct labor (3 hours @ $15.00 per hour)
|
45.00
|
The actual results for the 380 units produced were as follows:
|
Raw materials cost for 76,300 pounds used
|
$25,942
|
|
Direct labor cost for 1,200 hours worked
|
16,200
|
Raw material usage variance is
a. $300 U.
b. $180 U.
c. $90 U.
d. $300 F.
e. $90 F.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Precision Inc.’s standard cost per unit, based on a budgeted level of production of 400 units, is as follows:
|
Raw materials (200 pounds @ 30 cents per pound)
|
$60.00
|
|
Direct labor (3 hours @ $15.00 per hour)
|
45.00
|
The actual results for the 380 units produced were as follows:
|
Raw materials cost for 76,300 pounds used
|
$25,942
|
|
Direct labor cost for 1,200 hours worked
|
16,200
|
Labor rate variance is
a. $1,200 U.
b. $1,800 U.
c. $1,200 F.
d. $1,800 F.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Precision Inc.’s standard cost per unit, based on a budgeted level of production of 400 units, is as follows:
|
Raw materials (200 pounds @ 30 cents per pound)
|
$60.00
|
|
Direct labor (3 hours @ $15.00 per hour)
|
45.00
|
The actual results for the 380 units produced were as follows:
|
Raw materials cost for 76,300 pounds used
|
$25,942
|
|
Direct labor cost for 1,200 hours worked
|
16,200
|
Labor efficiency variance is
a. $0.
b. $900 U.
c. $300 U.
d. $900 F.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Air Fresh Industries uses a standard overhead costing system for the production of its EnergyPro cooling systems. Based on a capacity of 120,000 direct labor hours, the standard costs per unit of EnergyPro are applied to production as follows:
|
Variable overhead portion
|
2 hours @ $16 _ $32
|
|
Fixed overhead portion
|
2 hours @ $10 _ $20
|
During August, 30,000 units of EnergyPro were scheduled for production, but only 27,000 units were actually produced. Actual direct labor cost incurred was $885,600 for 55,350 actual hours of work. Actual variable overhead cost incurred was $863,450, and actual fixed overhead cost was $622,000.
The variable overhead spending variance was
a. $540 U.
b. $21,600 F.
c. $22,140 F.
d. $24,000 F.
e. $96,540 F.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Air Fresh Industries uses a standard overhead costing system for the production of its EnergyPro cooling systems. Based on a capacity of 120,000 direct labor hours, the standard costs per unit of EnergyPro are applied to production as follows:
|
Variable overhead portion
|
2 hours @ $16 _ $32
|
|
Fixed overhead portion
|
2 hours @ $10 _ $20
|
During August, 30,000 units of EnergyPro were scheduled for production, but only 27,000 units were actually produced. Actual direct labor cost incurred was $885,600 for 55,350 actual hours of work. Actual variable overhead cost incurred was $863,450, and actual fixed overhead cost was $622,000.
The variable overhead efficiency variance was
a. $540 U.
b. $21,600 U.
c. $20,700 U.
d. $74,400 F.
e. $72,540 F.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Air Fresh Industries uses a standard overhead costing system for the production of its EnergyPro cooling systems. Based on a capacity of 120,000 direct labor hours, the standard costs per unit of EnergyPro are applied to production as follows:
|
Variable overhead portion
|
2 hours @ $16 _ $32
|
|
Fixed overhead portion
|
2 hours @ $10 _ $20
|
During August, 30,000 units of EnergyPro were scheduled for production, but only 27,000 units were actually produced. Actual direct labor cost incurred was $885,600 for 55,350 actual hours of work. Actual variable overhead cost incurred was $863,450, and actual fixed overhead cost was $622,000.
The fixed overhead budget variance was
a. $22,000 U.
b. $46,500 U.
c. $60,000 U.
d. $46,500 F.
e. $60,000 F.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Air Fresh Industries uses a standard overhead costing system for the production of its EnergyPro cooling systems. Based on a capacity of 120,000 direct labor hours, the standard costs per unit of EnergyPro are applied to production as follows:
|
Variable overhead portion
|
2 hours @ $16 _ $32
|
|
Fixed overhead portion
|
2 hours @ $10 _ $20
|
During August, 30,000 units of EnergyPro were scheduled for production, but only 27,000 units were actually produced. Actual direct labor cost incurred was $885,600 for 55,350 actual hours of work. Actual variable overhead cost incurred was $863,450, and actual fixed overhead cost was $622,000.
The fixed overhead volume variance was
a. $22,000 U.
b. $46,500 U.
c. $60,000 U.
d. $46,500 F.
e. $60,000 F.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Flexible budgeting Rocky Mountain Manufacturing produces a single product.
The original budget for November was based on expected production of 35,000 units; actual production for November was 33,250 units. The original budget and actual costs incurred for the manufacturing department follow:
|
|
Original Budget
|
Actual Costs
|
|
Direct materials
|
$ 551,250
|
$ 541,500
|
|
Direct labor
|
427,000
|
413,500
|
|
Variable overhead
|
217,000
|
195,250
|
|
Fixed overhead
|
170,000
|
172,500
|
|
Total.
|
$1,365,250
|
$1,322,750
|
Required:
Prepare an appropriate performance report for the manufacturing department.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Performance reporting and flexible budgeting Following is a partially completed performance report for a recent week for direct labor in the binding department of a book publisher:
|
|
Original Budget
|
Flexed Budget
|
Actual
|
Budget Variance
|
|
Direct labor
|
$4,800
|
|
$5,330
|
|
The original budget is based on the expectation that 8,000 books would be bound; the standard is 20 books per hour at a pay rate of $12 per hour. During the week, 7,600 books were actually bound. Employees worked 410 hours at an actual total cost of $5,330.
Required:
a. Calculate the flexed budget amount against which actual performance should be evaluated and then calculate the budget variance.
b. Calculate the direct labor efficiency variance in terms of hours.
c. Calculate the direct labor rate variance.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Performance reporting and flexible budgeting For the stamping department of a manufacturing firm, the standard cost for direct labor is $12 per hour, and the production standard calls for 1,000 stampings per hour. During June, 168 hours were required for actual production of 148,000 stampings. Actual direct labor cost for the stamping department for June was $2,184.
Required:
a. Complete the following performance report for June:
|
|
Flexed Budget
|
Actual
|
Budget Variance
|
|
Direct labor
|
|
|
|
b. Analyze the budget variance by calculating the direct labor efficiency and rate variances for June.
c. What alternatives to the preceding monthly report could improve control over the stamping department’s direct labor?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Direct labor variances—solving for unknowns Coastal Industries has established direct labor performance standards for its maintenance and repair shop.
However, some of the labor records were destroyed during a recent fire. The actual hours worked during March were 4,000, and the total direct labor budget variance was $2,200 unfavorable. The standard labor rate was $18 per hour, but recent resignations allowed the firm to hire lower paid replacement workers for some jobs, and this produced a favorable rate variance of $3,200 for March.
Required:
a. Calculate the actual direct labor rate paid per hour during March.
b. Calculate the dollar amount of the direct labor efficiency variance for March.
c. Calculate the standard direct labor hours allowed for the actual level of activity during March.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cost of goods manufactured, cost of goods sold, and income statement Gravois, Inc., incurred the following costs during June:
|
Selling expenses
|
$158,375
|
|
Direct labor
|
283,140
|
|
Interest expense
|
41,065
|
|
Manufacturing overhead, actual.
|
204,750
|
|
Raw materials used
|
460,980
|
|
Administrative expenses
|
123,000
|
Required:
During the month, 19,500 units of product were manufactured and 11,000 units of product were sold. On June 1, Gravois, Inc., carried no inventories. On June 30, there were no inventories for raw materials or work in process.
a. Calculate the cost of goods manufactured during June and the average cost per unit of product manufactured.
b. Calculate the cost of goods sold during June.
c. Calculate the difference between cost of goods manufactured and cost of goods sold. How will this amount be reported in the financial statements?
d. (Optional) Prepare a traditional (absorption) income statement for Gravois, Inc., for the month of June. Assume that sales for the month were $1,035,000 and the company’s effective income tax rate was 35%.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cost of goods manufactured and cost of goods sold The following table summarizes the beginning and ending inventories of Decatur Manufacturing, Inc., for the month of March:
|
|
Feb. 28
|
Mar. 31
|
|
Raw materials
|
$ 53,600
|
$ 44,160
|
|
Work in process
|
114,080
|
103,680
|
|
Finished goods
|
75,520
|
67,040
|
Raw materials purchased during the month of March totaled $198,240. Direct labor costs incurred totaled $499,520 for the month. Actual and applied manufacturing overhead costs for March totaled $301,440 and $307,680, respectively. Over/ underapplied overhead is written off to cost of goods sold at the end of the year in December.
Required:
a. Calculate the cost of goods manufactured for March.
b. Calculate the cost of goods sold for March.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cost of goods manufactured, cost of goods sold, and income statement Big Thunder Co. incurred the following costs during April:
|
Raw materials purchased
|
$ 99,225
|
|
Direct labor ($15 per hour)
|
123,750
|
|
Manufacturing overhead (actual)
|
303,175
|
|
Selling expenses
|
67,050
|
|
Administrative expenses
|
33,075
|
|
Interest expense
|
11,490
|
Manufacturing overhead is applied on the basis of $37.50 per direct labor hour. Assume that overapplied or underapplied overhead is transferred to cost of goods sold only at the end of the year. During the month, 7,500 units of product were manufactured and 7,950 units of product were sold. On April 1 and April 30, Big Thunder Co. carried the following inventory balances:
|
|
April 1
|
April 30
|
|
Raw materials
|
$ 41,160
|
$ 37,590
|
|
Work in process
|
111,720
|
119,640
|
|
Finished goods
|
88,000
|
56,320
|
Required:
a. Prepare a statement of cost of goods manufactured for the month of April and calculate the average cost per unit of product manufactured.
b. Calculate the cost of goods sold during April.
c. Calculate the difference between cost of goods manufactured and cost of goods sold. How will this amount be reported in the financial statements?
d. (Optional) Prepare a traditional (absorption) income statement for Big Thunder Co. for the month of April. Assume that sales for the month were $722,925 and the company’s effective income tax rate was 40%.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cost of goods manufactured, cost of goods sold, and income statement Determine each of the following missing amounts:
|
|
Firm A
|
Firm B
|
Firm C
|
|
Beginning raw materials inventory
|
$ 17,000
|
$ ?
|
$ 42,000
|
|
Purchases of raw materials during the year
|
?
|
96,000
|
226,000
|
|
Raw materials available for use
|
?
|
119,000
|
?
|
|
Ending raw materials inventory
|
12,000
|
?
|
51,000
|
|
Cost of raw materials used
|
90,000
|
101,000
|
?
|
|
Direct labor costs incurred.
|
130,000
|
?
|
318,000
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead applied.
|
?
|
34,000
|
72,000
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead applied.
|
100,000
|
60,000
|
?
|
|
Total manufacturing costs incurred
|
370,000
|
?
|
?
|
|
Beginning work in process.
|
15,000
|
7,000
|
19,000
|
|
Ending work in process
|
25,000
|
11,000
|
16,000
|
|
Cost of goods manufactured
|
$ ?
|
266,000
|
$ ?
|
|
Sales
|
$ ?
|
410,000
|
$ ?
|
|
Beginning finished goods inventory
|
$ 30,000
|
?
|
61,000
|
|
Cost of goods manufactured
|
?
|
266,000
|
?
|
|
Cost of goods available for sale
|
?
|
303,000
|
761,000
|
|
Ending finished goods inventory
|
50,000
|
?
|
48,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
?
|
273,000
|
?
|
|
Gross profit
|
140,000
|
?
|
198,000
|
|
Selling, general, and administrative expenses
|
68,000
|
?
|
?
|
|
Income from operations.
|
$ ?
|
32,000
|
$ 89,000
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Financial reporting, manufacturing firm—Internet assignment Intel Corporation provides access to its annual reports. The annual reports are found in the “About Intel/Investor Relations/Financials and Filings” area. Locate the following information in the annual reports provided for 2008, 2007, and 2006:
1. From the notes to consolidated financial statements, find the composition of the beginning and ending inventory for each of the following accounts: Raw Material, Work in Process, and Finished Goods.
2. From the consolidated statements of income, find the amount for Cost of Sales.
3. From the consolidated balance sheets, find the amount for Inventories.
4. From the management’s discussion and analysis, find the overview section that explains the Results of Operations.
Required:
a. Calculate the cost of goods manufactured for 2008, 2007, and 2006.
b. Calculate the total amount of combined cost incurred in 2008, 2007, and 2006 for raw material, direct labor, and manufacturing overhead.
c. From the 2008 “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations,” identify the ratio of cost of sales to net revenue.
Comment on the overall trend.
d. if necessary and calculate the inventory turnover and day’s sales in inventory for 2008, 2007, and 2006. Comment on the overall trend.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Activity based management—Internet assignment SAS® is a world leader in business analytics software, delivering breakthrough technology to transform the way organizations do business. For SAS the mission is to empower organizations around the world with superior software, solutions, and services and give them The Power to Know®. many activity based management success stories are presented from a variety of firms in different industries.
Required:
a. Locate the product information about SAS’s activity based management solution. Read the product overview and write a summary report detailing your findings.
b. Locate the Success Stories for activity based management. Choose an organization and read its testimonial. Write a summary report describing how that organization is using activity based management.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Match the appropriate letter for the key term or concept to each definition provided (items 1–12). Note that not all key terms and concepts will be used.
|
a.
|
Budgeting
|
j.
|
Committed cost
|
|
b.
|
Top down budgeting
|
k.
|
Discretionary cost
|
|
c.
|
Participative budgeting
|
l.
|
Standard cost
|
|
d.
|
Zero based budgeting
|
m.
|
Ideal (or engineered) standard
|
|
e.
|
Single period budget
|
n.
|
Attainable standard
|
|
f.
|
Rolling (or continuous) budget
|
o.
|
Past experience standard
|
|
g.
|
Operating budget
|
p.
|
Predetermined overhead
|
|
h.
|
Budget slack (or budget padding)
|
|
application rate
|
|
i.
|
Cash budget
|
|
|
1. A budgeting process that involves justifying resource requirements based on an analysis and prioritization of unit objectives without reference to prior period budget allowances.
2. A budgeting approach that implies little or no input from lower levels of management.
3. A budget that is prepared for several periods in the future and that is revised several times prior to the budget period.
4. A plan comprised of the sales budget (or sales forecast), the purchases/ production budget, the operating expense budget, the income statement budget, the cash budget, and the budgeted balance sheet.
5. A budgeting process that involves input and negotiation at several management layers.
6. Allowances for contingencies built into a budget.
7. A cost that is incurred because of a long range policy decision.
8. A unit budget allowance for a cost component of a product or an activity.
9. A standard cost or production standard that is based on historical data.
10. A standard cost or production standard that assumes optimal operating conditions and maximum efficiency at all times.
11. The rate per unit of activity (e.g., direct labor hour) used to apply manufacturing overhead to work in process.
12. A standard cost or production standard that is achievable under actual operating conditions.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Long Company’s budgeted sales are as follows:
|
|
January
|
February
|
March
|
April
|
|
Units sales
|
1,500
|
1,250
|
1,625
|
1,375
|
The ending inventory of finished goods for each month must be equal to 40% of the next month’s budgeted unit sales. Finished goods inventory on January 1 was 600 units. Calculate the number of units scheduled for production in March.
a. 1,275.
b. 1,400.
c. 1,525.
d. 1,625.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Production and purchases budgets Olympia Productions, Inc., makes award medallions that are attached to ribbons. Each medallion requires 18 inches of ribbon. The sales forecast for February is 8,000 medallions. Estimated beginning inventories and desired ending inventories for February are:
|
|
Estimated
|
Desired
|
|
|
Beginning Inventory
|
Ending Inventory
|
|
Medallions
|
4,000
|
3,200
|
|
Ribbon (yards)
|
200
|
80
|
Required:
a. Calculate the number of medallions to be produced in February.
b. Calculate the number of yards of ribbon to be purchased in February.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Production and purchases budgets Pelican Co. is forecasting sales of 40,300units of product for October. To make one unit of finished product, 10 pounds of raw materials are required. Actual beginning and desired ending inventories of raw materials and finished goods are:
|
|
October 1
|
October 31
|
|
|
(Actual)
|
(Desired)
|
|
Raw materials (pounds)
|
48,550
|
44,300
|
|
Finished goods (units)
|
3,850
|
5,400
|
Required:
a. Calculate the number of units of product to be produced during October.
b. Calculate the number of pounds of raw materials to be purchased during October.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Purchases budget Each gallon of Old Guard, a popular aftershave lotion, requires 6 ounces of ocean scent. Budgeted production of Old Guard for the first three quarters of 2010 is:
|
Quarter I
|
10,000 gallons
|
|
Quarter II
|
18,000 gallons
|
|
Quarter III
|
11,000 gallons
|
Management’s policy is to have on hand at the end of every quarter enough ocean scent inventory to meet 30% of the next quarter’s production needs. At the beginning of Quarter I, 18,000 ounces of ocean scent were on hand.
Required:
a. Calculate the number of ounces of ocean scent to be purchased in each of the first two quarters of 2010.
b. Explain why management plans for an ending inventory instead of planning to purchase each quarter the amount of raw materials needed for that quarter’s production.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Production and purchases budgets Osage Inc. has actual sales for June and July and forecast sales for August, September, October, and November as follows:
|
Actual:
|
|
|
June
|
4,150 units
|
|
July
|
4,350 units
|
|
Forecasted:
|
|
|
August
|
4,200 units
|
|
September
|
4,950 units
|
|
October
|
3,900 units
|
|
November
|
3,700 units
|
Required:
a. The firm’s policy is to have finished goods inventory on hand at the end of the month that is equal to 70% of the next month’s sales. It is currently estimated that there will be 3,300 units on hand at the end of July. Calculate the number of units to be produced in each of the months of August, September, and October.
b. Each unit of finished product requires 5 pounds of raw materials. The firm’s policy is to have raw material inventory on hand at the end of each month that is equal to 80% of the next month’s estimated usage. It is currently estimated that 13,000 pounds of raw materials will be on hand at the end of July. Calculate the number of pounds of raw materials to be purchased in each of the months of August and September.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cash receipts budget Kiel Center’s sales are all made on account. The firm’s collection experience has been that 35% of a month’s sales are collected in the month the sale is made, 55% are collected in the month following the sale, and 8% are collected in the second month following the sale. The sales forecast for the months of June through September is:
|
June
|
$140,000
|
|
July
|
160,000
|
|
August
|
170,000
|
|
September
|
195,000
|
Required:
Calculate the cash collections that would be included in the cash budgets for August and September.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cash receipts budget Flagstaff Co. has actual sales for July and August and forecast sales for September, October, November, and December as follows:
|
Actual:
|
|
|
July
|
$73,500
|
|
August
|
78,750
|
|
Forecasted:
|
|
|
September
|
85,500
|
|
October
|
70,500
|
|
November
|
91,500
|
|
December
|
80,250
|
Based on past experience, it is estimated that 30% of a month’s sales are collected in the month of sale, 50% are collected in the month following the sale, and 18% are collected in the second month following the sale.
Required:
Calculate the estimated cash receipts for September, October, and November.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Developing direct labor cost standards Brass Creations Co. makes decorative candle pedestals. An industrial engineer consultant developed ideal time standards for one unit of the Cambridge model pedestal. The standards follow, along with the cost accountant’s determination of current labor pay rates:
|
Work type 1
|
0.20 hour @ $18.40 per hour
|
|
Work type 2
|
0.30 hour @ $16.50 per hour
|
|
Work type 3
|
0.42 hour @ $28.00 per hour
|
Required:
a. Using the preceding data, calculate the direct labor cost for a Cambridge model pedestal.
b. Would it be appropriate to use the cost calculated in part a as a standard cost for evaluating direct labor performance and valuing inventory? Explain your answer.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Developing raw material cost standards Ozark Manufacturing Co. manufactures and sells household cleaning products. The company’s research department has developed a new cleaner for which a standard cost must be determined. The new cleaner is made by mixing 18 quarts of triphate solution and 8 pounds of so base granules and boiling the mixture for several minutes. After the solution has cooled, 4 ounces of methage are added. This “recipe” produces 15 quarts of the cleaner, which is then packaged in one quart plastic dispenser bottles. Raw material costs are:
|
Triphate solution
|
$0.45 per quart
|
|
Sobase granules
|
0.90 per pound
|
|
Methage
|
1.40 per ounce
|
|
Bottle
|
0.25 each
|
Required:
a. Using the preceding data, calculate the raw material cost for one bottle of the new cleaner.
b. Assume that the preceding costs are the current best estimates of the costs at which required quantities of the raw material can be purchased. Would you recommend that any other factors be considered in establishing the raw material cost standard for the new cleaner?
c. Explain the process that would be used to develop the direct labor cost standard for the new product.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Standard absorption cost per unit DMA, Inc., processes corn into corn starch and corn syrup. The company’s productivity and cost standards follow:
From every bushel of corn processed, 12 pounds of starch and 6 pounds of syrup should be produced.
Standard direct labor and variable overhead total $0.86 per bushel of corn processed.
Standard fixed overhead (the predetermined fixed overhead application rate) is $0.66 per bushel processed.
Required:
a. Calculate the standard absorption cost per pound for the starch and syrup produced from the processing of 15,000 bushels of corn if the average cost per bushel is $5.68.
b. Comment about the usefulness of this standard cost for management planning and control purposes.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Standard absorption cost per unit A cost analyst for Stamper Manufacturing Co. has assembled the following data about the Model 24 stamp pad:
The piece of sheet metal from which five pad cases can be made costs $0.24.
This amount is based on the number of sheets in a 4,200 pound bundle of sheet metal, which is the usual purchase quantity.
The foam pad that is put in the case costs $0.06, based on the number of pads that can be cut from a large roll of foam.
Production standards, based on engineering analysis recognizing attainable performance, provide for the manufacture of 1,000 pads by two workers in an eight hour shift. The standard direct labor pay rate is $15 per hour.
Manufacturing overhead is applied to units produced using a predetermined overhead application rate of $16 per direct labor hour, of which $6 per hour is fixed manufacturing overhead.
Required:
a. Calculate the standard absorption cost of a package of 10 stamp pads.
b. Stamper Manufacturing Co.’s management is considering a special promotion that would result in increased sales of 500 packages of 10 pads per package.
Calculate the cost per package that is relevant for this analysis.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Purchases budget Brooklyn Furniture, a retail store, has an average gross profit ratio of 42%. The sales forecast for the next four months follows:
|
May
|
$100,000
|
|
June
|
88,000
|
|
July
|
124,000
|
|
August
|
160,000
|
Management’s inventory policy is to have ending inventory equal to 80% of the cost of sales for the subsequent month, although it is estimated that the cost of inventory at April 30 will be $45,000.
Required:
Calculate the purchases budget, in dollars, for the months of May and June.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Purchases budget—analytical Gemstone, Ltd., is a retail jeweler. Most of the firm’s business is in jewelry and watches. The firm’s average gross profit ratio for jewelry and watches is 80% and 40%, respectively. The sales forecast for the next two months for each product category is as follows:
|
|
Jewelry
|
Watches
|
|
September
|
$186,000
|
$90,000
|
|
October
|
144,000
|
76,500
|
The company’s policy, which is expected to be achieved at the end of August, is to have ending inventory equal to 120% of the next month’s cost of goods sold.
Required:
a. Calculate the cost of goods sold for jewelry and watches for September and October.
b. Calculate a purchases budget, in dollars, for each product for the month of September.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
CVP application—expand existing product line? Nautical Canvas Co. currently makes and sells two models of a boat cover. Data applicable to the current operation are summarized in the following columns labeled Current Operation.
Management is considering adding a Value model to its current Luxury and Economy models. Expected data if the new model is added are shown in the following columns labeled Proposed Expansion:
|
|
Current Operation
|
Proposed Expansion
|
|
Luxury
|
Economy
|
Luxury
|
Economy
|
Value
|
|
Selling price per unit
|
$2,000
|
$1,200
|
$2,000
|
$1,200
|
$1,500
|
|
Variable expenses per unit
|
800
|
700
|
800
|
700
|
800
|
|
Annual sales volume—units
|
1,000
|
2,000
|
600
|
1,700
|
800
|
|
Fixed expenses for year
|
Total of $700,000
|
Total of $840,000
|
Required:
a. Calculate the company’s current total contribution margin and the current average contribution margin ratio.
b. Calculate the company’s current amount of operating income.
c. Calculate the company’s current break even point in dollar sales.
d. Explain why the company might incur a loss, even if the sales amount calculated in part c was achieved and selling prices and costs didn’t change.
e. Calculate the company’s total operating income under the proposed expansion.
f. Based on the proposed expansion data, would you recommend adding the Value model? Why or why not?
g. Would your answer to part of change if the Value model sales volume were to increase to 1,000 units annually, and all other data remained the same? Why or why not?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
CVP application—eliminate product from operations? Body Sculpture, Inc., makes three models of high performance weight training benches. Current operating data are summarized here:
|
|
MegaMuscle
|
PowerGym
|
ProForce
|
|
Selling price per unit
|
$ 280
|
$ 400
|
$ 580
|
|
Contribution margin per unit
|
84
|
154
|
116
|
|
Monthly sales volume—units
|
6,000
|
4,000
|
2,000
|
|
Fixed expenses per month
|
|
Total of $1,280,000
|
|
Required:
a. Calculate the contribution margin ratio of each product.
b. Calculate the firm’s overall contribution margin ratio.
c. Calculate the firm’s monthly break even point in sales dollars.
d. Calculate the firm’s monthly operating income.
e. Management is considering the elimination of the ProForce model due to its low sales volume and low contribution margin ratio. As a result, total fixed expenses can be reduced to $1,080,000 per month. Assuming that this change would not affect the other models, would you recommend the elimination of the ProForce model? Explain your answer.
f. Assume the same facts as in part e. Assume also that the sales volume for the PowerGym model will increase by 1,000 units per month if the ProForce model is eliminated. Would you recommend eliminating the ProForce model? Explain your answer.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
CVP analysis—effects of changes in cost structure; breakeven Riveria Co. makes and sells a single product. The current selling price is $32 per unit. Variable expenses are $20 per unit, and fixed expenses total $43,200 per month. Sales volume for May totaled 4,100 units.
Required:
a. Calculate operating income for May.
b. Calculate the break even point in terms of units sold and total revenues.
c. Management is considering installing automated equipment to reduce direct labor cost. If this were done, variable expenses would drop to $14 per unit, but fixed expenses would increase to $67,800 per month.
1. Calculate operating income at a volume of 4,100 units per month with the new cost structure.
2. Calculate the break even point in units with the new cost structure. (Round your answer.)
3. Why would you suggest that management seriously consider investing in the automated equipment and accept the new cost structure?
4. Why might management not accept your recommendation but decide instead to maintain the old cost structure?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
CVP analysis—effects of change in cost structure; breakeven Ozark, Inc. Produces small scale replicas of vintage automobiles for collectors and museums. Finished products are built on a 1/20 scale of originals. The firm’s income statement showed the following:
|
Revenues (2,400 units)
|
$1,584,000
|
|
Variable expenses
|
871,200
|
|
Contribution margin
|
$ 712,800
|
|
Fixed expenses
|
520,000
|
|
Operating income
|
$ 192,800
|
An automated stamping machine has been developed that can efficiently produce body frames, hoods, and doors to the desired scale. If the machine is leased, fixed expenses will increase by $58,000 per year. The firm’s production capacity will increase, which is expected to result in a 25% increase in sales volume. It is also estimated that labor costs of $33 per unit could be saved because less polishing and finishing time will be required.
Required:
a. Calculate the firm’s current contribution margin ratio and break even point in terms of revenues. (Round your answer.)
b. Calculate the firm’s contribution margin ratio and break even point in terms of revenues if the new machine is leased.
c. Calculate the firm’s operating income assuming that the new machine is leased.
d. Do you believe that management of Ozark, Inc., should lease the new machine? Explain your answer.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
CVP application—determine offering price Tommy Appleton is in charge of arranging the “attitude adjustment” period and dinner for the monthly meetings of the local chapter of the Management Accountants Association. Tommy is negotiating with a new restaurant that would like to have the group’s business, and Tommy wants to apply some of the cost–volume–profit analysis concepts he has learned. The restaurant is proposing its regular menu prices of $4.00 for a before dinner drink and $22.00 for dinner. Tommy has determined that on average, the people attending the meeting have 1.5 drinks before dinner. He also believes that the contribution margin ratios for the drinks and dinner are 50% and 40%, respectively.
Required:
Prepare a memo to Tommy outlining the possible offers he might make to the restaurant owner, and recommend which offer he should make.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Understanding the effects of operating leverage HighTech, Inc., and OldTime Co. compete within the same industry and had the following operating results in 2010:
|
|
HighTech,
|
OldTime
|
|
Sales
|
Inc.
|
Co.
|
|
Variable expenses
|
$2,100,000
|
$2,100,000
|
|
Contribution margin
|
420,000
|
1,260,000
|
|
Fixed expenses
|
$1,680,000
|
$ 840,000
|
|
Operating income
|
1,470,000
|
630,000
|
|
Sales
|
$ 210,000
|
$ 210,000
|
Required:
a. Calculate the break even point for each firm in terms of revenue.
b. What observations can you draw by examining the break even point of each firm given that they earned an equal amount of operating income on identical sales volumes in 2010?
c. Calculate the amount of operating income (or loss) that you would expect each firm to report in 2011 if sales were to
1. Increase by 20%.
2. Decrease by 20%.
d. Using the amounts computed in requirement c, calculate the increase or decrease in the amount of operating income expected in 2011 from the amount reported in 2010.
e. Explain why an equal percentage increase (or decrease) in sales for each firm would have such differing effects on operating income.
f. Calculate the ratio of contribution margin to operating income for each firm in 2010.
g. Multiply the expected increase in sales of 20% for 2011 by the ratio of contribution margin to operating income for 2010 computed in requirement f for each firm.
h. Multiply your answer in requirement g by the operating income of $210,000 reported in 2010 for each firm.
i. Compare your answer in requirement h with your answer in requirement d.
What conclusions can you draw about the effects of operating leverage from the steps you performed in requirements f, g, and h?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Break even analysis, CVP application using Internet tools You have recently been engaged by Dominic’s Italian Cafe to evaluate the financial impact of adding gourmet pizza items to the menu. A survey of the clientele indicates that demand for the product exists at an average selling price of $18 per pizza. Fixed costs related to new equipment would be $12,000 per month. Variable costs for ingredients, labor, and electricity for the oven would average $6 per pizza. You decide that a good starting point is to conduct an initial break even analysis on the new project.
Knowing that many commercial Internet companies provide free downloads or online demos of their products for your evaluation and testing pleasure, you decide to conduct the break even analysis using break even.
Required:
a. Calculate the break even point in pizzas per month and print your results using the online break even analysis tools
b. Calculate the break even point in pizzas per month and print your results using the break even chart analysis:
c. Write a comparative analysis of each of the four tools that you used to calculate the break even point. You might discuss strengths, weaknesses, usefulness, and user interaction for each tool.
d. Dominic’s now is interested in the amount of operating income available from the gourmet pizza operation if sales are initially expected to be 2,000 pizzas each month. Calculate the operating income and print your results using the Excel file “Contribution Income Analysis”.
e. Dominic’s now would like to understand the effect on operating income if certain changes in costs or volume occur. Use the “Contribution Income Analysis” Excel spreadsheet to evaluate each of the following independent cases assuming sales are initially expected to be 2,000 pizzas each month:
1. Selling price is decreased by 10%, and pizza sales are expected to increase by 5%.
2. Selling price is increased to $20, and pizza sales are expected to decrease by 20%.
3. Higher quality ingredients are used at a cost increase of $2 to $8 per pizza, and pizza sales are expected to increase to 2,200 pizzas per month.
4. A more efficient pizza oven is available that would reduce the electricity used in baking each pizza. Variable costs would be reduced to $5 per pizza. The more efficient oven would increase the fixed costs to $15,000 per month.
f. Write a memo to Dominic’s explaining the results of your analysis.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Match the appropriate letter for the key term or concept to each definition provided (items 1–14). Note that not all key terms and concepts will be used.
|
a.
|
Cost accounting
|
l.
|
Production standards
|
|
b.
|
Cost management
|
m.
|
Raw material
|
|
c.
|
Value chain
|
n.
|
Direct labor
|
|
d.
|
Cost object
|
o.
|
Overhead
|
|
e.
|
Cost pool
|
p.
|
Overhead application rate
|
|
f.
|
Cost assignment
|
q.
|
Job order costing system
|
|
g.
|
Direct cost
|
r.
|
Process costing system
|
|
h.
|
Indirect cost
|
s.
|
Absorption costing
|
|
i.
|
Product costs
|
t.
|
Direct (or variable) costing
|
|
j.
|
Period costs
|
u.
|
Activity based costing
|
|
k.
|
Statement of cost of goods manufactured
|
|
|
1. A product costing method by which only variable manufacturing costs are included in product cost.
2. Any reference point for which management wants to measure cost.
3. A supplementary financial statement that supports the cost of goods sold figure on the income statement by summarizing raw materials, direct labor, and manufacturing overhead costs incurred during the period.
4. Noninventoriable costs, including selling, general, and administrative expenses, that relate to an accounting period.
5. The process of allocating an amount of cost to a cost object.
6. The rate used to allocate overhead to specific production runs.
7. A cost incurred because of the product or activity under consideration; the cost would not be incurred if the product or activity were discontinued.
8. A product costing method by which both variable and fixed manufacturing costs are included in product cost.
9. A product costing system used when discrete products, such as sailboats tailored to the buyer’s specifications, are manufactured.
10. Effort provided by workers who are directly involved in the manufacture of a product.
11. The sequence of functions (R&D, design, production, marketing, distribution, and customer service) and related activities that, over the life of a product or service, adds value for the customer.
12. Inventoriable costs including raw materials, direct labor, and manufacturing overhead.
13. A cost related to the product or activity under consideration but not incurred solely because of the product or activity; the cost would continue to be incurred if the product or activity were discontinued.
14. Expected or allotted times and costs to make a product or perform an activity.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Sterner Company computes its predetermined overhead application rate using direct labor hours as the activity base. Estimated and actual overhead costs and direct labor hours for the year were as follows:
|
|
Estimated
|
Actual
|
|
Manufacturing overhead costs
|
$126,000
|
$118,020
|
|
Direct labor hours
|
10,000
|
9,200
|
Based on this information, manufacturing overhead was
a. underapplied by $2,100.
b. underapplied by $3,420.
c. overapplied by $3,420.
d. overapplied by $5,580.
e. none of the above.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Information obtained from Blue Heron, Inc.’s accounts on December 31 included:
|
|
2010
|
2009
|
|
Raw materials inventory
|
$22,000
|
$18,000
|
|
Work in process inventory
|
38,000
|
26,000
|
|
Finished goods inventory
|
66,000
|
84,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
For the
|
|
|
Year Ended
|
|
|
December
|
|
|
31, 2010
|
|
Sales
|
$420,000
|
|
Depreciation, factory
|
24,000
|
|
Direct labor costs
|
76,000
|
|
Sales
|
88,000
|
|
Depreciation, factory
|
20,000
|
The cost of goods manufactured for Blue Heron, Inc., in 2010 was
a. $172,000.
c. $192,000.
b. $180,000.
d. $196,000.
e. $202,000.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Information obtained from Blue Heron, Inc.’s accounts on December 31 included:
|
|
2010
|
2009
|
|
Raw materials inventory
|
$22,000
|
$18,000
|
|
Work in process inventory
|
38,000
|
26,000
|
|
Finished goods inventory
|
66,000
|
84,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
For the
|
|
|
Year Ended
|
|
|
December
|
|
|
31, 2010
|
|
Sales
|
$420,000
|
|
Depreciation, factory
|
24,000
|
|
Direct labor costs
|
76,000
|
|
Sales
|
88,000
|
|
Depreciation, factory
|
20,000
|
The cost of goods sold for Blue Heron, Inc., in 2010 was
a. $154,000.
b. $190,000.
c. $198,000.
d. $210,000.
e. $214,000.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Value chain classifications Match each of the following cost items with the value chain business function where you would expect the cost to be incurred:
|
Business Function
|
Cost Item
|
Answer
|
|
a. Research and development
|
1. Purchase of raw materials
|
|
|
b. Design
|
2. Advertising
|
|
|
c. Production
|
3. Salary of research scientists
|
|
|
d. Marketing
|
4. Shipping expenses
|
|
|
e. Distribution
|
5. Reengineering of product assembly process
|
|
|
f. Customer service
|
6. Replacement parts for warranty repairs
|
|
|
7. Manufacturing supplies
|
|
|
8. Sales commissions
|
|
|
9. Purchase of CAD (computer aided
|
|
|
design) software
|
|
|
10. Salary of Web site designer
|
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Value chain classifications Match each of the following cost items with the value
chain business function where you would expect the cost to be incurred:
|
Business Function
|
Cost Item
|
Answer
|
|
a. Research and development
|
1. Labor time to repair products under warranty
|
|
|
b. Design
|
2. TV commercial spots
|
|
|
c. Production
|
3. Labor costs of filling customer orders
|
|
|
d. Marketing
|
4. Testing of competitor’s product
|
|
|
e. Distribution
|
5. Direct manufacturing labor costs
|
|
|
f. Customer service
|
6. Development of order tracking system for
|
|
|
the Internet
|
|
|
7. Printing cost of new product brochures
|
|
|
8. Hours spent designing childproof bottles
|
|
|
9. Training costs for representatives to staff
|
|
|
the customer call center
|
|
|
10. Installation of robotics equipment in
|
|
|
manufacturing plant
|
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cost classifications For each of the following costs, check the columns that most likely apply (both variable and fixed might apply for some costs).
|
Costs
|
Direct
|
Indirect
|
Period
|
Variable
|
Fixed
|
|
Wages of assembly line workers
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Depreciation of plant equipment
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Glue and thread
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Outbound shipping costs
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Raw materials handling costs
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Salary of public relations manager
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Production run setup costs
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Plant utilities
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Electricity cost of retail stores
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Research and development
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
expense
|
|
|
|
|
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cost classifications For each of the following costs, check the columns that most likely apply (both variable and fixed might apply for some costs).
|
|
Product
|
|
|
|
|
Costs
|
Direct
|
Indirect
|
Period
|
Variable
|
Fixed
|
|
Raw materials
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Staples used to secure packed
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
boxes of product
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Plant janitors’ wages
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Order processing clerks’ wages
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Advertising expenses
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Production workers’ wages
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Production supervisors’ salaries
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Sales force commissions
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Maintenance supplies used
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
President’s salary
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Electricity cost for office building
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Real estate taxes for
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Factory
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Office building
|
|
|
|
|
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Activity based costing MedTech, Inc., manufactures and sells diagnostic equipment used in the medical profession. Its job costing system was designed using an activity based costing approach. Direct materials and direct labor costs are accumulated separately, along with information concerning four manufacturing overhead cost drivers (activities). Assume that the direct labor rate is $25 per hour and that there were no beginning inventories. The following information was available for 2010, based on an expected production level of 100,000 units for the year:
|
Activity
|
Budgeted
|
Cost Driver Used
|
Cost
|
|
(Cost Driver)
|
Costs for 2010
|
as Allocation Base
|
Allocation Rate
|
|
Materials handling
|
$1,200,000
|
Number of parts used
|
$ 2.00 per part
|
|
Milling and grinding
|
2,200,000
|
Number of machine hours
|
11.00 per hour
|
|
Assembly and inspection
|
1,500,000
|
Direct labor hours worked
|
5.00 per hour
|
|
Testing
|
300,000
|
Number of units tested
|
3.00 per unit
|
The following production, costs, and activities occurred during the month of August:
|
Units
|
Direct
|
Number
|
Machine
|
Direct
|
|
Produced/Tested
|
Materials Costs
|
of Parts Used
|
Hours
|
Labor Hours
|
|
10,000
|
$900,000
|
62,000
|
18,000
|
35,000
|
Required:
a. Calculate the total manufacturing costs and the cost per unit produced and tested during the month of August for MedTech, Inc.
b. Explain the advantages of the ABC approach relative to using a single predetermined overhead application rate based on direct labor hours.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Activity based costing versus traditional overhead allocation methods Galvaset Industries manufactures and sells custom made windows. Its job costing system was designed using an activity based costing approach. Direct materials and direct labor costs are accumulated separately, along with information concerning three manufacturing overhead cost drivers (activities). Assume that the direct labor rate is $20 per hour and that there were no beginning inventories. The following information was available for 2010, based on an expected production level of 50,000 units for the year, which will require 200,000 direct labor hours:
|
Activity
|
Budgeted
|
Cost Driver Used
|
Cost
|
|
(Cost Driver)
|
Costs for 2010
|
as Allocation Base
|
Allocation Rate
|
|
Materials handling
|
$ 325,000
|
Number of parts used
|
$ 0.25 per part
|
|
Cutting and lathe work
|
2,340,000
|
Number of parts used
|
1.80 per part
|
|
Assembly and inspection
|
5,000,000
|
Direct labor hours
|
25.00 per hour
|
The following production, costs, and activities occurred during the month of March:
|
Units
|
Direct
|
Number
|
Direct
|
|
Produced
|
Materials Costs
|
of Parts Used
|
Labor Hours
|
|
3,800
|
$142,000
|
83,600
|
17,180
|
Required:
a. Calculate the total manufacturing costs and the cost per unit of the windows produced during the month of March (using the activity based costing approach).
b. Assume instead that Galvaset Industries applies manufacturing overhead on a direct labor hours basis (rather than using the activity based costing system previously described). Calculate the total manufacturing cost and the cost per unit of the windows produced during the month of March.
c. Compare the per unit cost figures calculated in parts a and b. Which approach do you think provides better information for manufacturing managers? Explain your answer.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Variable versus absorption costing TroutPro Co. manufactures fishing equipment. During 2010, total costs associated with manufacturing 35,000 fly cast fishing rods (a new product introduced this year) were as follows:
|
Raw materials
|
$372,500
|
|
Direct labor
|
99,000
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead.
|
67,500
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead.
|
105,000
|
Required:
a. Calculate the cost per fishing rod under both variable costing and absorption costing.
b. If 750 of these fishing rods were in finished goods inventory at the end of2010, by how much and in what direction (higher or lower) would 2010 operating income be different under variable costing than under absorption costing?
c. Express the fishing rod cost in a cost formula. What does this formula suggest the total cost of making an additional 500 fishing rods would be?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Variable versus absorption costing Millan, Inc., manufactures digital voice recorders. During 2010, total costs associated with manufacturing 208,000 of the new MV 5253 model (introduced this year) were as follows:
|
Raw materials
|
$1,788,800
|
|
Direct labor
|
2,953,600
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead.
|
748,800
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead.
|
707,200
|
Required:
a. Calculate the cost per recorder under both variable costing and absorption costing.
b. If 20,400 of these recorders were in finished goods inventory at the end of 2010, by how much and in what direction (higher or lower) would 2010 cost of goods sold be different under variable costing than under absorption costing?
c. Express the digital voice recorder cost in a cost formula. What does this formula suggest the total cost of making an additional 1,700 recorders would be?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cost of goods manufactured, cost of goods sold, and income statement Richards, Inc., incurred the following costs during May:
|
Raw materials used
|
$ 662,000
|
|
Direct labor
|
1,304,000
|
|
Manufacturing overhead, actual.
|
896,000
|
|
Selling expenses
|
534,000
|
|
Administrative expenses
|
388,000
|
|
Interest expense
|
182,000
|
Required:
During the month, 59,625 units of product were manufactured and 54,000 units of product were sold. On May 1, Richards, Inc., carried no inventories. On May 31, there were no inventories other than finished goods.
a. Calculate the cost of goods manufactured during May and the average cost per unit of product manufactured.
b. Calculate the cost of goods sold during May.
c. Calculate the difference between cost of goods manufactured and cost of goods sold. How will this amount be reported in the financial statements?
d. (Optional) Prepare a traditional (absorption) income statement for Richards, Inc., for the month of May. Assume that sales for the month were $4,896,000 and the company’s effective income tax rate was 35%.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Which of the following steps is NOT considered to be part of this systems survey?
a. Interviews are conducted with operating people and managers.
b. The complete documentation of the system is obtained and reviewed.
c. Measures of processing volume are obtained for each operation.
d. Equipment sold by various computer manufacturers is reviewed in terms of capability, cost, and availability.
e. Work measurement studies are conducted to determine the time required to complete various tasks or jobs.
2. A systems development approach that starts with broad organizational goals and the types of decisions organizational executives make is called
a. bottom up.
b. network.
c. top down.
d. strategic.
e. sequential.
3. The TELOS study that determines whether a project can be completed in an acceptable time frame is
a. a schedule feasibility study.
b. a time frame feasibility study.
c. an on time feasibility study.
d. an economic completion feasibility study.
e. a length of contract feasibility study.
4. Which of the following is least likely to be an accountant’s role in the SDLC?
a. user
b. consultant
c. auditor
d. programmer
e. all of these are likely roles
5. The TELOS acronym is often used for determining the need for system changes. Which of the following types of feasibility studies are elements of TELOS?
a. legal, environmental, and economic
b. environmental, operational, and economic
c. technical, economic, legal, and practical
d. practical, technical, and operational
e. technical, operational, and economic
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. What name is given to the time value of money technique that discounts the after tax cash flows for a project over its life to time period zero using the company’s minimum desired rate of return?
a. net present value method
b. capital rationing method
c. payback method
d. average rate of return method
e. accounting rate of return method
2. One time costs of system development include all of the following EXCEPT
a. site preparation.
b. hardware maintenance.
c. programming.
d. hardware acquisition.
e. data conversion.
3. Which of the following aspects of a cost benefit study would have the greatest uncertainty as to its precise value?
a. the tangible costs
b. the intangible costs
c. the tangible benefits
d. the intangible benefits
e. none of the above because they are equally precise
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
- What does it mean to state that the contribution margin model is more useful than the traditional model for determining the effect of changes in activity on operating income?
- What does it mean to expand the contribution margin model?
- What does it mean to state that the contribution model provides better support for decision making?
- What does it mean that fixed expenses should not be unitized because they don’t behave that way?
- What does it mean to state that contribution margin ratio is frequently a more useful measurement than contribution margin per unit?
- What does it mean to break even?
- What does it mean to state that a firm has a relatively high degree of operating leverage?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Match the appropriate letter for the key term or concept to each definition provided (items 1–12). Note that not all key terms and concepts will be used.
|
a.
|
Cost–volume–profit analysis
|
i.
|
Break even point
|
|
b.
|
Cost formula
|
j.
|
High–low technique
|
|
c.
|
Contribution margin
|
k.
|
Managerial accounting
|
|
d.
|
Contribution margin format
|
l.
|
Management process
|
|
|
income statement
|
m.
|
Variable cost
|
|
e.
|
Linearity assumption
|
n.
|
Fixed cost
|
|
f.
|
Contribution margin ratio
|
o.
|
Relevant range
|
|
g.
|
Operating leverage
|
p.
|
Mixed (semivariable) cost
|
|
h.
|
Sales mix
|
q.
|
Cost behavior pattern
|
1. The proportion of total sales represented by various products or categories of products.
2. The difference between revenues and variable costs.
3. The concept that operating income changes proportionately more than revenues for any given change in revenues.
4. The amount of revenue required to have neither operating income nor operating loss.
5. The percentage of each dollar in revenues that is available to cover fixed expenses; revenues minus variable costs, divided by revenues.
6. An income statement presentation in which variable costs are subtracted from revenues to show contribution margin, from which fixed costs are subtracted to determine operating income.
7. Analysis of the impact on profit of volume and cost changes using knowledge about the behavior patterns of the costs involved.
8. An arithmetic expression that reflects the fixed and variable elements of a cost.
9. The range of activity over which the fixed or variable cost behavior pattern exists.
10. A cost that has both fixed and variable elements.
11. A cost that does not change in total as the level of activity changes within a relevant range.
12. Planning, organizing, and controlling the activities of an organization so I can accomplish its purpose.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
O’Brien, Inc.’s, 2010 contribution margin income statement shows the following:
|
Sales @ $8 per unit
|
$ 160,000
|
|
Less: Variable expense
|
(128,000)
|
|
Contribution margin
|
$ 32,000
|
|
Less: Fixed expenses
|
(44,000)
|
|
Operating income (loss)
|
$ (12,000)
|
If O’Brien, Inc.’s, advertising costs increased by $8,000, by how much would sales have to increase for the company to achieve an operating income of $6,000?
a. $66,000.
b. $96,000.
c. $102,000.
d. $130,000.
e. None of the above.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
O’Brien, Inc.’s, 2010 contribution margin income statement shows the following:
|
Sales @ $8 per unit
|
$ 160,000
|
|
Less: Variable expense
|
(128,000)
|
|
Contribution margin
|
$ 32,000
|
|
Less: Fixed expenses
|
(44,000)
|
|
Operating income (loss)
|
$ (12,000)
|
What would O’Brien, Inc.’s, operating income (or loss) be if fixed costs were increased by 10 percent and sales volume increased by 30 percent?
a. $1,290.
b. $2,650.
c. $(6,800).
d. $(9,680).
e. None of the above.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cost classifications For each of the following costs, check the column(s) that most likely apply:
|
Cost
|
Variable
|
Fixed
|
|
Wages of assembly line workers
|
|
|
|
Depreciation—plant equipment
|
|
|
|
Glue and thread
|
|
|
|
Shipping costs
|
|
|
|
Raw materials handling costs
|
|
|
|
Salary of public relations manager
|
|
|
|
Production run setup costs
|
|
|
|
Plant utilities
|
|
|
|
Electricity cost of retail stores
|
|
|
|
Research and development expense
|
|
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Estimating costs based on behavior patterns The following information provides the amount of cost incurred in May for the cost items indicated. During May 16,000 units of the firm’s single product were manufactured.
|
Raw materials
|
$ 83,200
|
|
Factory depreciation expense
|
81,000
|
|
Direct labor
|
198,400
|
|
Production supervisor’s salary
|
12,200
|
|
Computer rental expense
|
8,400
|
|
Maintenance supplies used
|
1,600
|
Required:
a. How much cost would you expect to be incurred for each of these items during June when 19,200 units of the product are planned for production?
b. Calculate the average total cost per unit for the 16,000 units manufactured in May. Explain why this figure would not be useful to a manager interested in predicting the cost of producing 19,200 units in June.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Understanding CVP relationships Calculate the missing amounts for each of the following firms:
|
|
Units
|
Selling
|
Variable Costs
|
Contribution
|
Fixed
|
Operating
|
|
|
Sold
|
Price
|
per Unit
|
Margin
|
Costs
|
Income (Loss)
|
|
Firm A
|
5,600
|
$12.00
|
?
|
$25,200
|
$20,300
|
?
|
|
Firm B
|
16,800
|
?
|
$22.20
|
?
|
84,500
|
$ 43,180
|
|
Firm C
|
?
|
7.30
|
3.20
|
28,700
|
?
|
(13,500)
|
|
Firm D
|
14,160
|
?
|
55.25
|
66,552
|
73,250
|
?
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Calculate selling price of new product; what if questions; break even Meyers Corp. has annual revenues of $450,000, an average contribution margin ratio of 35%, and fixed expenses of $175,000.
Required:
a. Management is considering adding a new product to the company’s product line. The new item will have $9.75 of variable costs per unit. Calculate the selling price that will be required if this product is not to affect the average contribution margin ratio.
b. If the new product adds an additional $37,800 to Meyers’s fixed expenses, how many units of the new product must be sold at the price calculated in part a to break even on the new product?
c. If 15,000 units of the new product could be sold at a price of $16.00 per unit, and the company’s other business did not change, calculate Meyers’s total operating income and average contribution margin ratio.
d. Describe how the analysis of adding the new product would be complicated if it were to “steal” some volume from existing products.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Special promotion—effects of a 1 cent sale The management of Rocko’s Pizzeria is considering a special promotion for the last two weeks of October, whichis normally a relatively low demand period. The special promotion would involve selling two medium pizzas for the price of one, plus 1 cent. The medium pizza normally sells for $12.99 and has variable expenses of $4.50. Expected sales volume without the special promotion is 600 medium pizzas per week.
Required:
a. Calculate the total contribution margin generated by the normal volume of medium pizzas in a week.
b. Calculate the total number of medium pizzas that would have to be sold during the 1 cent sale to generate the same amount of contribution margin that results from the normal volume.
c. What other factors should management consider in evaluating the pros and cons of the special promotion?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
High–low method A department of Alpha Co. incurred the following costs for the month of September. Variable costs, and the variable portion of mixed costs, are a function of the number of units of activity:
|
Activity level in units.
|
5,000
|
|
Variable costs
|
$10,000
|
|
Fixed costs
|
30,000
|
|
Mixed costs.
|
20,000
|
|
Total costs.
|
$60,000
|
During October the activity level was 8,000 units, and the total costs incurred were $70,500.
Required:
a. Calculate the variable costs, fixed costs, and mixed costs incurred during October.
b. Use the high–low method to calculate the cost formula for mixed cost.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
High–low method—missing amounts The following data have been extracted from the records of Riddle Co.:
|
|
July
|
December
|
|
Production level, in units
|
5,000
|
10,000
|
|
Variable costs
|
$12,000
|
$ ?
|
|
Fixed costs
|
?
|
18,000
|
|
Mixed costs
|
10,000
|
?
|
|
Total costs
|
$40,000
|
$59,000
|
Required:
a. Calculate the missing costs.
b. Calculate the cost formula for mixed cost using the high–low method.
c. Calculate the total cost that would be incurred for the production of 8,000 units.
d. Identify the two key cost behavior assumptions made in the calculation of your answer to part c.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Prepare a contribution margin format income statement; answer what if questions Shown here is an income statement in the traditional format for a firm with a sales volume of 20,000 units:
|
July
|
December
|
|
Production level, in units
|
5,000
|
10,000
|
|
Variable costs
|
$12,000
|
$ ?
|
|
Fixed costs
|
?
|
18,000
|
|
Mixed costs
|
10,000
|
?
|
|
Total costs
|
$40,000
|
$59,000
|
Required:
a. Prepare an income statement in the contribution margin format.
b. Calculate the contribution margin per unit and the contribution margin ratio.
c. Calculate the firm’s operating income (or loss) if the volume changed from 20,000 units to
1. 25,000 units.
2. 11,000 units.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Prepare a contribution margin format income statement; answer what if questions Shown here is an income statement in the traditional format for a firm with a sales volume of 20,000 units. Cost formulas also are shown:
|
Revenues
|
$200,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold ($36,000 + $5.20/unit)
|
140,000
|
|
Gross profit
|
$ 60,000
|
|
Operating expenses:
|
|
|
Selling ($9,200 + $0.30/unit)
|
15,200
|
|
Administration ($18,800 + $0.50/unit)
|
28,800
|
|
Operating income
|
$ 16,000
|
Required:
a. Prepare an income statement in the contribution margin format.
b. Calculate the contribution margin per unit and the contribution margin ratio.
c. Calculate the firm’s operating income (or loss) if the volume changed from 20,000 units to
1. 28,000 units.
2. 12,000 units.
d. Refer to your answer to part a for total revenues of $200,000. Calculate the firm’s operating income (or loss) if unit selling price and variable expenses per unit do not change, and total revenues
1. Increase $60,000.
2. Decrease $52,000.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Prepare a contribution margin format income statement; answer what if questions Shown here is an income statement in the traditional format for a firm with a sales volume of 20,000 units:
|
Revenues
|
$160,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold ($16,000 + $3.20/unit)
|
80,000
|
|
Gross profit
|
$ 80,000
|
|
Operating expenses:
|
|
|
Selling ($4,500 + $1.40/unit)
|
32,500
|
|
Administration ($7,500 + $1.00/unit)
|
27,500
|
|
Operating income
|
$ 20,000
|
Required:
a. Prepare an income statement in the contribution margin format.
b. Calculate the contribution margin per unit and the contribution margin ratio.
c. Calculate the firm’s operating income (or loss) if the volume changed from 20,000 units to
1. 25,000 units.
2. 11,000 units.
d. Refer to your answer to part a when total revenues were $160,000. Calculate the firm’s operating income (or loss) if unit selling price and variable expenses do not change, and total revenues
1. Increase by $18,000.
2. Decrease by $12,000.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Prepare a contribution margin format income statement; calculate breakeven point Presented here is the income statement for Big Surf, Inc., for the month of May:
|
Sales
|
$ 65,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
53,500
|
|
Gross profit.
|
$ 11,500
|
|
Operating expenses
|
14,000
|
|
Operating loss
|
$ (2,500)
|
Based on an analysis of cost behavior patterns, it has been determined that the company’s contribution margin ratio is 30%.
Required:
a. Rearrange the preceding income statement to the contribution margin format.
b. If sales increase by 10%, what will be the firm’s operating income?
c. Calculate the amount of revenue required for Big Surf, Inc., to break even.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Prepare a contribution margin format income statement; calculate break even point Presented here is the income statement for Edwards Co. for February:
|
Sales
|
$80,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
48,000
|
|
Gross profit
|
$32,000
|
|
Operating expenses
|
21,200
|
|
Operating income
|
$10,800
|
Based on an analysis of cost behavior patterns, it has been determined that the company’s contribution margin ratio is 35%.
Required:
a. Rearrange the preceding income statement to the contribution margin format.
b. Calculate operating income if sales volume increases by 20%.
c. Calculate the amount of revenue required for Edwards to break even.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
CVP analysis—what if questions; breakeven Monterey Co. makes and sells a single product. The current selling price is $15 per unit. Variable expenses are $9 per unit, and fixed expenses total $27,000 per month.
Required:
(Unless otherwise stated, consider each requirement separately.)
a. Calculate the break even point expressed in terms of total sales dollars and sales volume.
b. Calculate the margin of safety and the margin of safety ratio. Assume current sales are $75,000.
c. Calculate the monthly operating income (or loss) at a sales volume of 5,400 units per month.
d. Calculate monthly operating income (or loss) if a $2 per unit reduction in selling price results in a volume increase to 8,400 units per month.
e. What questions would have to be answered about the cost–volume–profit analysis simplifying assumptions before adopting the price cut strategy of part d?
f. Calculate the monthly operating income (or loss) that would result from a $1 per unit price increase and a $6,000 per month increase in advertising expenses, both relative to the original data. Assume a sales volume of 5,400 units per month.
g. Management is considering a change in the sales force compensation plan. Currently each of the firm’s two salespeople is paid a salary of $2,500 per month. Calculate the monthly operating income (or loss) that would result from changing the compensation plan to a salary of $400 per month, plus a commission of $0.80 per unit, assuming a sales volume of
1. 5,400 units per month.
2. 6,000 units per month.
h. Assuming that the sales volume of 6,000 units per month achieved in part g could also be achieved by increasing advertising by $1,000 per month instead of changing the sales force compensation plan, which strategy would you recommend? Explain your answer.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
CVP analysis—what if questions; sales mix issue Camden Metal Co. makes a single product that sells for $84.00 per unit. Variable costs are $54.00 per unit, and fixed costs total $120,000 per month.
Required:
a. Calculate the number of units that must be sold each month for the firm to break even.
b. Assume current sales are $400,000. Calculate the margin of safety and the margin of safety ratio.
c. Calculate operating income if 5,000 units are sold in a month.
d. Calculate operating income if the selling price is raised to $88 per unit, advertising expenditures are increased by $16,000 per month, and monthly unit sales volume becomes 5,200 units.
e. Assume that the firm adds another product to its product line and that the new product sells for $40 per unit, has variable costs of $28 per unit, and causes fixed expenses in total to increase to $150,000 per month. Calculate the firm’s operating income if 5,000 units of the original product and 3,000 units of the new product are sold each month. For the original product, use the selling price and variable cost data given in the problem statement.
f. Calculate the firm’s operating income if 4,000 units of the original product and 4,000 units of the new product are sold each month.
g. Explain why operating income is different in parts e and f, even though sales totaled 8,000 units in each case.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A table of data for a library is shown in the table for Problem. Normalize these data into the third normal form, preparing it for use in a relational database environment. The library’s computer is programmed to compute the due date to be 14 days after the checkout date. Document the steps necessary to normalize the data similar to the procedures found in the chapter. Index any fields necessary and show how the databases are related.
|
NORMALIZATION OF DATA
|
|
STUDENT ID NUMBER
|
STUDENT FIRST NAME
|
STUDENT LAST NAME
|
NUMBER OF BOOKS OUT
|
BOOK CALL NO
|
BOOK TITLE
|
DATE OUT
|
DUE DATE
|
|
678 98 4567
|
Amy
|
Baker
|
4
|
hf351.j6
|
Avalanches
|
09 02 09
|
09 16 09
|
|
678 98 4567
|
Amy
|
Baker
|
4
|
hf878.k3
|
Tornadoes
|
09 02 09
|
09 16 09
|
|
244 23 2348
|
Ramesh
|
Sunder
|
1
|
i835.123
|
Politics
|
09 02 09
|
09 16 09
|
|
398 34 8793
|
James
|
Talley
|
3
|
k987.d98
|
Sports
|
09 02 09
|
09 16 09
|
|
398 34 8793
|
James
|
Talley
|
3
|
d879.39
|
Legal Rights
|
09 02 09
|
09 16 09
|
|
678 98 4567
|
Amy
|
Baker
|
4
|
p987.t87
|
Earthquakes
|
09 03 09
|
09 17 09
|
|
244 23 2348
|
Ramesh
|
Sunder
|
1
|
q875.i76
|
Past Heroes
|
09 03 09
|
09 17 09
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A college bookstore maintains all of its records on index cards. This has proven to be a very tedious chore, and the manager has asked you to design a database that will simplify this task. The index cards are preprinted and contain the following labels:
Title:
Author(s):
Edition:
Publisher:
Publisher Address:
Publisher Phone #:
Cost of Text:
Selling Price:
Number on Hand:
Professor:
Class:
Semester:
Year:
Professor Phone #:
Using your understanding of the business rules that exist in most colleges and for most college bookstores, prepare the base tables (in third normal form) that will be required to translate the index card information into a working database for the bookstore.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Prepare the base tables, in third normal form, needed to produce the user view in the table for Problem.
|
USER VIEW
|
|
Part Num
|
Description
|
QOH
|
Reorder Point
|
EOQ
|
Unit Cost
|
Ven Num
|
Ven Name
|
Ven Address
|
Tel
|
|
132
|
Bolt
|
100
|
50
|
1000
|
1.50
|
987
|
ABC Co.
|
654 Elm St
|
555 5498
|
|
143
|
Screw
|
59
|
10
|
100
|
1.75
|
987
|
ABC Co.
|
654 Elm St
|
555 5498
|
|
760
|
Nut
|
80
|
20
|
500
|
2.00
|
742
|
XYZ Co.
|
510 Smit
|
555 8921
|
|
982
|
Nail
|
100
|
50
|
800
|
1.00
|
987
|
ABC Co.
|
654 Elm St
|
555 5498
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Prepare the base tables, in third normal form, needed to produce the user view in the table for Problem.
|
USER VIEW
|
|
Part Num
|
Description
|
QOH
|
Reorder Point
|
EOQ
|
Unit Cost
|
Ven Num
|
Ven Name
|
Ven Address
|
Tel
|
|
132
|
BOLT
|
100
|
50
|
1000
|
1.50
|
987
|
ABC Co.
|
654 Elm St
|
555 5498
|
|
1.55
|
750
|
RST Co.
|
3415 8th St
|
555 3421
|
|
1.45
|
742
|
XYZ Co.
|
510 Smit
|
555 8921
|
|
982
|
NAIL
|
100
|
50
|
800
|
1.00
|
987
|
ABC Co.
|
654 Elm St
|
555 5498
|
|
1.10
|
742
|
XYZ Co.
|
510 Smit
|
555 8921
|
|
1.00
|
549
|
LMN Co.
|
18 Oak St
|
555 9987
|
Prepare the 3NF base tables needed to produce the sales report view shown in the diagram for Problem
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Employees at the Sagerod Manufacturing Company record their hours worked on paper time cards that are inserted into a time clock machine at the beginning and end of each shift. On Fridays, the supervisor collects the time cards, reviews and signs them, and sends them to the payroll clerk. The clerk calculates the pay for each employee and updates the employee earnings file. This involves adding a new record for each employee in the pay period that reflects the employee’s gross pay, tax deductions, and other withholdings for the period. The clerk then prepares a paycheck for each employee and records them in the check register. The check register and corresponding paychecks reflect each employee’s net earnings for the period. Based on these records, the clerk prepares a payroll summary, which is sent with the paychecks to the cash disbursements clerk. The clerk reviews the payroll summary, updates the cash disbursements journal to record the total payroll, and prepares a check for the total payroll, which is deposited into the payroll imprest account. The clerk then signs the paychecks and distributes them to the employees.
Required
Assume that this manual system is to be automated using a relational database system. Perform the following tasks. You may need to make assumptions about how certain automated activities will be performed.
a. List all candidate entities in the procedures described.
b. Identify the valid entities and explain why the rejected entities should not be modeled.
c. Create a data model of the process showing entity associations.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The business rules that constitute the purchases system for the Safe Buy Grocery Stores chain are similar at all the store locations. The purchase manager at each location is responsible for selecting his or her local suppliers. If the manager needs a product, he or she chooses a supplier. Each store follows the steps described here.
1. The purchasing function begins with sales representatives from suppliers periodically observing the shelves and displays at each location and recognizing the need to restock inventory. Inventory declines by direct sales to the customers or by spoilage of perishable goods. In addition, the supplier’s sales representatives review obsolescence reports that the purchase manager prepares. These reports identify slow moving and dated products that are deemed unsalable at a particular location. These products are returned to the supplier and replaced with more successful products. The sales representatives prepare a hard copy purchase requisition and meet with the purchase managers of the individual store locations. Together, the sales representative and the purchase manager create a purchase order defining the products, the quantity, and the delivery date.
2. At the intended delivery date, Safe Buy Grocery Stores receive the goods from the suppliers. Goods received are unloaded from the delivery trucks and stocked on the shelves and displays by part time employees.
3. The unloading personnel create a receiving report. Each day a receiving report summary is prepared and sent to the purchase managers for review.
4. The supplier subsequently submits an invoice to the AP department clerk, who creates an invoice record. The clerk reconciles the invoice against the receiving report and purchase order and then creates a payment obligation to be paid at a future date, depending on the terms of trade.
5. On the due date, a check is automatically prepared and sent to the supplier, and the payment is recorded in the check register. At the end of each day, a payment summary is sent to the purchase managers for review.
Required
Assume that the manual system described is to be automated using a relational database system. Perform the following tasks. You may need to make assumptions about how certain automated activities will be performed.
a. List all candidate entities in the procedures described.
b. Identify the valid entities and explain why the rejected entities should not be modeled.
c. Create a data model of the process showing entity associations.
d. Create a fully attributed model by adding primary keys, foreign keys, and data attributes. Normalize the model.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Given the following business rules, construct an ER diagram so each rule is captured for the database. Presume each rule is to be treated individually. Construct an ER diagram for each rule.
a. A retail sales company prepares sales orders for its customers’ purchases. A customer can make many purchases, but a sales order is written for a single customer.
b. A retail sales company orders inventory using a purchase order. An inventory item may be ordered many times, and a purchase order may be created for more than one inventory item.
c. A company that sells antique cars prepares a sales order for each car sold. The inventory for this company consists of unique automobiles, and only one of these automobiles may be listed on a sales order.
d. A grocery store identifies returning customers via a plastic card that the clerk scans at the time of each purchase. The purpose of this card is to track inventory and to maintain a database of customers and their purchases. Obviously, a customer may purchase an unlimited number of items from the grocery store. Items are unique only by a UPC code, and each UPC code may be associated with many different customers.
e. A video rental store uniquely identifies each of its inventory items so customers can rent a movie and return the movie via a drop box, and the store can identify which copy of the movie was rented and returned. A customer is allowed to rent up to six movies at a time, but a copy of a movie can only be rented by one customer at a time.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. The concept of duality means that an REA diagram must consist of
a. two events—one of them economic and the other support.
b. two agents—one of them internal and the other external.
c. two resources—one increased and the other decreased by the same event.
d. all of the above.
e. none of the above.
2. Each economic event in an REA diagram is always
a. linked to at least two resource entities.
b. linked to two external agents.
c. linked to two internal agents.
d. linked to another economic event.
e. linked to a support event.
3. Which of the following are characteristics of economic agents?
a. They participate in economic events, but do not assume control of the resources.
b. They participate in economic events, but not in support events.
c. Internal agents are employees of the company whose system is being modeled.
d. External agents are not employees of the company whose system is being modeled.
e. All of the above describe agents.
4. Which of the following is true?
a. REA diagram entities are arranged in constellations by entity class.
b. ER diagrams present a static picture of the underlying business phenomena.
c. Entity names in ER diagrams are always in the noun form.
d. Events entity names in REA diagrams are in the verb form.
e. All of the above are true statements.
5. Which of the following events would be LEAST likely to be modeled in an REA diagram?
a. customer inquiries
b. sales to a customer
c. accounts payable
d. cash
e. all of these events would be modeled
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Feinman Computers sells desktop computer systems that it manufactures from parts and software that thirdparty vendors provide. Customers are both private consumers and small businesses. Consumers pay cash or by credit card, but business customers buy on credit. A credit check is made of all new business customers before approving a line of credit. Sales are made online or by a hard copy order document that customers mail or fax to the company. When a credit order is received, the sales clerk verifies inventory availability, prepares a sales order and sends the stock release copy to Willy, a warehouse employee who picks the goods and arranges shipment. Willy then prepares the bills of lading and shipping notices. Barb in the billing department receives the shipping notice from Willy and updates the inventory subsidiary ledger to account for the reduction in inventory. Barb files the stock release, prepares the invoice, and mails a copy of it to the customer. Barb then updates the sales journal and then sends the invoice, sales order, stock release, and shipping notice to the AR department. Adam in the AR department files the documents that Barb sent him and updates the AR subsidiary ledger. Mickey in the mail room receives remittance advices and customer checks sent in payment of accounts. He sends the remittance advice to Adam for posting to the AR ledger and sends the checks to Carol, the cash receipts clerk. At the end of the day, she prepares a deposit slip and deposits the checks into the company’s bank account, files the bank receipt, and updates the cash receipts journal. Cash sales to consumer customers are handled in a manner similar to the process described here except that checks or credit card account numbers are submitted with the original order. At the end of each week, John, an accounting clerk, reconciles all transactions and posts them to the general ledger.
Required
a. Prepare the REA model of the sales/collection process.
b. Show the cardinalities for all associations.
c. List the tables, keys, and attributes needed t implement this model in a relational database.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
K Cannon, Inc., is a manufacturer of portable CD players. The company purchases raw materials such as plastics and computer chips for its conversion cycle. The following describes K Cannon’s purchases and payments procedures. John, the purchasing department clerk, monitors raw materials inventory levels and prepares a purchase requisition when purchases are necessary. These are sent to the purchasing agent, who prepares six copies of a purchase order. Two purchase orders are sent directly to the vendor. One is placed in an open purchase order file in the purchasing department, and one is used to post to the purchases journal. Each week the purchasing department clerk prepares a journal voucher from the purchases journal and sends it to the general ledger department for posting. The AP and the receiving departments also each receive a copy of the purchase order, which they file temporarily. Upon receiving the raw materials, the receiving department clerk creates five copies of the receiving report. One copy is sent to the raw materials warehouse and one copy is sent to the AP department. Two copies are sent to the purchasing department, where one is filed and one is used to update the inventory records. The final copy is filed in the receiving department with the purchase order and packing slip. Vendors send their invoices to the AP department, where they are used to update the AP subsidiary ledger. In the cash disbursements department, Larry receives the information from the AP department, such as the purchase requisition, purchase order, receiving report, and invoice. He then prepares and signs the checks for the suppliers. After preparation of the checks, these supporting documents are sent back to the AP department. Each week, Larry prepares a journal voucher and sends it to the general ledger department for posting. Required
a. Prepare the REA model of the purchase cash payments process.
b. Show the cardinalities for all associations.
c. List the tables, keys, and attributes needed to implement this model in a relational database.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Closed database architecture is
a. a control technique intended to prevent unauthorized access from trading partners.
b. a limitation inherent in traditional information systems that prevents data sharing.
c. a data warehouse control that prevents unclean data from entering the warehouse.
d. a technique used to restrict access to data marts.
e. a database structure that many of the leading
ERPs use to support OLTP applications.
2. Each of the following is a necessary element for the successful warehousing of data EXCEPT
a. cleansing extracted data.
b. transforming data.
c. modeling data.
d. loading data.
e. all of the above are necessary.
3. Which of the following is typically NOT part of an ERP’s OLAP applications?
a. decision support systems
b. information retrieval
c. ad hoc reporting/analysis
d. logistics
e. what if analysis
4. There are a number of risks that may be associated with ERP implementation. Which of the following was NOT stated as a risk in the chapter?
a. A drop in firm performance after implementation because the firm looks and works differently than it did while using a legacy system.
b. Implementing companies have found that staff members, employed by ERP consulting firms, do not have sufficient experience in implementing new systems.
c. Implementing firms fail to select systems that properly support their business activities.
d. The selected system does not adequately meet the adopting firm’s economic growth.
e. ERPs are too large, complex, and generic for them to bewell integrated into most company cultures.
5. Which statement is NOT true?
a. In a typical two tier client server architecture, the server handles both application and database duties.
b. Client computers are responsible for presenting data to the user and passing user input back to the server.
c. Two tier architecture is for local area network applications where the demand on the server is restricted to a relatively small population of users.
d. The database and application functions are separated in the three tier model.
e. In three tier client server architectures, one tier is for user presentation, one is for database and applications access, and the third is for Internet access.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Which statement is NOT true?
a. Drill down capability is an OLAP feature of data mining tools available to the user.
b. The data warehouse should be separate from operational systems.
c. De normalization of data involves dividing the data into very small tables that support detailed analysis.
d. Some decisions supported by a data warehouse are not fundamentally different from those that are supported by traditional databases.
e. Data cleansing involves transforming data into standard business terms with standard data values.
2. Which statement is LEAST accurate?
a. Implementing an ERP system has more to do with changing the way an organization does business than it does with technology.
b. The phased in approach to ERP implementation is particularly suited to diversified organizations whose units do not share common processes and data.
c. Because the primary reason for implementing an ERP is to standardize and integrate operations, diversified organizations whose units do not share common processes and data do not benefit and tend not to implement ERPs.
d. To take full advantage of the ERP process, reengineering will need to occur.
e. A common reason for ERP failure is that the ERP does not support one or more important business processes of the organization.
3. SAP, one of the leading ERP producers, makes several modules available to adopters. Which of the following is not a SAP module?
a. Business Process Support
b. Internet Development Support
c. Logistics
d. E Commerce Support
e. Human Resources
4. Auditors of ERP systems
a. need not be concerned about segregation of duties because these systems possess strong computer controls.
b. focus on output controls such as independent verification to reconcile batch totals.
c. are concerned that managers fail to exercise adequate care in assigning permissions.
d. do not see the data warehouse as an audit or control issue at all because financial records are not stored there.
e. need not review access levels granted to users because these are determined when the system is configured and never change.
5. Which statement is most correct?
a. SAP is more suited to service industries than manufacturing clients.
b. J.D. Edwards’s ERP is designed to accept the best practices modules of other vendors.
c. Oracle evolved from a human resources system.
d. PeopleSoft is the world’s leading supplier of software for information management.
e. Soft Brands provides enterprise software for the hospitality and manufacturing sectors.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
You are the CEO of a large organization that implemented a data warehouse for internal analysis of corporate data. The operations manager has written you a memo advocating opening the data warehouse to your suppliers and customers. Explain any merit to this proposal. What are the control issues, if any?
Your organization is planning to implement an ERP system. Some managers in the organization favor the big bang approach. Others are advocating a phased in approach. The CEO has asked you, as project leader, to write a memo summarizing the advantages and disadvantages of each approach and to make a recommendation. This is a traditional organization with a strong internal hierarchy. The company was acquired in a merger 2 years ago, and the ERP project is an effort on the part of the parent company to standardize business processes and reporting across the organization. Prior to this, the organization had been using a general ledger package that it acquired in 1979. Most of the transaction processing is a combination of manual and batch processing. Most employees think that the legacy system works well. At this point, the implementation project is behind schedule.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
For each of the following processes, state whether OLTP or OLAP is appropriate and why.
a. An order entry system that retrieves customer information, invoice information, and inventory information for local sales.
b. An order entry system that retrieves customer information, invoice information, inventory information, and several years of sales information about both the customer and the inventory items.
c. An order entry system that retrieves customer information, invoice information, inventory information, and information to compare the current sale to sales across several geographic regions.
d. An order entry system that retrieves customer information, invoice information, inventory information, and accounts receivable information for sales within one marketing region.
e. An insurance company requires a system that will allow it to determine total claims by region, determine whether a relationship exists between claims and meteorological phenomenon, and why one region seems to be more profitable than another.
f. A manufacturing company has only one factory, but that factory employs several thousand people and has nearly $1 billion in revenue each year. The company has seen no reason to make comparisons about its operations from year to year or from process to process. Its information needs focus primarily on operations, but it has maintained backup of prior year operations activities. Examination of prior year financial reports have shown that the company, while profitable, is not growing and return on investment is decreasing. The owners are not satisfied with this situation.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Nevada Department of Motor Vehicles (DMV) is the agency responsible for licensing both drivers and vehicles in the state of Nevada. Until recently, legacy systems were used for both licensing needs. The legacy system for driver’s licenses maintained the following information about each licensed driver: name, age, address, violation, license classification, organ donation, and restrictions. The vehicle licensing system maintained information about each vehicle, including cost, taxes, vehicle identification number (VIN), weight, insurance, and ownership. In the summer of 1999, over a 3 day weekend, information from the two legacy systems was transferred to a new ERP. The ERP and all new hardware were installed in every DMV across the state, and when employees returned from their long weekend, an entirely new system was in place. The DMV employees were not well trained on the new system, and the system itself presented a few bugs. As a result of these obstacles, customers at the DMV faced excessively long lines and extended waiting times, and several of the employees simply quit their jobs because of frustrations with the system and difficulty dealing with irate customers. Knowing that the waiting times were so long, many drivers simply refused to renew licenses or obtain new licenses. Assume that the ERP the DMV management selected was correctly configured and was capable of meeting all requirements of the DMV; consider data warehousing implications, business culture implications, and disruption to operations; and discuss the advantages and disadvantages associated with the decision to implement the new system using the big bang approach versus the phased in approach.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Do an Internet search of complaints about ERP consultants. Write a report about the most common complaints and cite examples.
The Sports Car Factory is a SAP based project that deals with transaction processing, master file maintenance, adequacy of role definitions, and internal control issues. Students may download the case materials from the student resources section of the text’s Web site (www.cengage.com/accounting/hall). These materials include screen by screen instructions for how to process key transactions in the Order to Cash and Purchase to Pay modules. Members of the SAP University Alliance who wish to supplement their course with hands on SAP training may request the Sports Car Factory client from their SAP provider. For more on the SAP University Alliance please refer to http://www.sap.com/about/ citizenship/education/universityalliances.epx.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. A DDos attack
a. is more intensive than a Dos attack because it emanates from single source.
b. may take the form of either a SYN flood or smurf attack.
c. is so named because it affects many victims simultaneously, which are distributed across the Internet.
d. turns the target victim’s computers into zombies that are unable to access the Internet.
e. none of the above is correct.
2. A ping signal is used to initiate
a. URL masquerading.
b. digital signature forging.
c. Internet protocol spoofing.
d. a smurf attack
e. a SYN ACK packet.
3. A digital signature
a. is the encrypted mathematical value of the message sender’s name.
b. is derived from the digest of a document that has been encrypted with the sender’s private key.
c. is derived from the digest of a document that has been encrypted with the sender’s public key.
d. is the computed digest of the sender’s digital certificate.
e. allows digital messages to be sent over an analog telephone line.
4. Which of the following statements about the client server model is correct?
a. It is best suited to the token ring topology because the random access method this topology uses detects data collisions.
b. It distributes both data and processing tasks to the server node. The client server model can use the bus or ring topology.
c. It is most effective when used as a bus topology because its deterministic access method avoids collisions and prevents data loss during transmissions.
d. It is more efficient than the bus or ring topologies because it transmits an entire file of records to the requesting node rather than only a single record.
e. It is not used in conjunction with either the bus or ring topologies.
5. Which of the following statements is correct?
a. A bridge is used to connect a LAN and a
b. Packet switching combines the messages of multiple users into a packet for transmission.
At the receiving end, the packet is disassembled into individual messages and distributed to the user.
c. The decision to partition a database assumes that no identifiable primary user exists in the organization.
d. Message switching is used to establish temporary connections between network devices for the duration of a communications session.
e. A deadlock is a temporary phenomenon that disrupts transaction processing. It will resolve itself when the primary computer completes processing its transaction and releases the data the other nodes need.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Mr. and Mrs. Gresko started Gresko Toys in the early 1960s. Initially, the company was small and few toys were produced. The talent and skills of Mr. Gresko were by far the major assets of the company. Toys were mainly made of wood and had few or no electronic parts; they were mainly manually operated and included toy cars, several kinds of dolls, and toy guns. Gresko Toys became part of the Pennsylvania tradition. Kids loved them and parents had no choice but to buy them. Gresko Toys quickly expanded, and by 1969 it reported a sales volume of $400,000, $50,000 of which was profit. Such profits caught the attention of other businesspeople, who began entering the market. The innovative spirit of some competitors through the introduction of fancy, battery operated toys stole some of Gresko’s market share. As the competition became more intense, the Greskos saw their market share declining even further. Children liked batteryoperated toys. Mr. Gresko saw this as both a threat and a challenge. He would not give up, however. He knew that he needed better machinery to make competitive toys. With a loan from the local bank and his savings, he sought and bought what he needed. After a period of training and test marketing, Gresko Toys was again in the market and boosting sales. However, the company was generating orders that the factory could not handle. The workforce rose from a low of 50 to a high of 350 people. Most of the workforce was on the factory floor. More equipment was purchased and the company has been expanding ever since. Today, the company sells $20 million of toys per year. The president of the company is Mrs. Gresko. Mr. Gresko thought that he should be on the factory floor managing production. Under him are the purchasing agent, supervising a buyer; the warehouse manager, managing two inventory clerks; a chief engineer; and a supervisor who is in charge of the factory workers. The controller of the company is Randi, the Greskos’ elder daughter. An accounting clerk, a cashier, and a personnel manager work for her. Finally, Bob, the Greskos’only son, is the sales manager. A credit manager and two salespeople work for him. Company Information At present, the company’s profit margin is 9 percent, only 2 percent below the industry average. According to Mr. Gresko, $850,000 in sales was lost last year because of insufficient inventory of parts. Because of the seasonal nature of the market and the short popularity span of most toys, Gresko customers require fast delivery; if the parts are not available, it takes at least 2 weeks to get the paperwork ready, order the parts, and have the suppliers deliver them. Some customers cannot wait that long; others order the toys and subsequently cancel the order if it takes too long to complete. Often orders are accepted on the assumption that the parts are readily available in the warehouse; when they are not, orders are delayed for weeks. A missing part not only delays an order, but the whole assembly line. To alleviate the problem, many parts are rushed in, which raises the cost of the toys tremendously. The fine quality of the products allows for slight price increases to make up for part of the extra cost, but customers have already complained about such price fluctuations. The Greskos are on good terms with their suppliers. After all, the market is so competitive that a reliable supplier is crucial to a firm’s survival. Most of their major suppliers are located in Pennsylvania, where the Greskos have about 35 percent of the market share. However, those suppliers deal with the Greskos’ competitors as well. There are about a dozen suppliers with whom the Greskos deal; eight of them supply about 95 percent of all inventory parts. Even though good supplier relations are crucial to Gresko Toys, suppliers have often complained about the Greskos’ promptness in paying. The Greskos’ demand on time delivery; the payment of the supplier invoice, however, is usually not timely. Mr. Gresko said that he does not have the time to run from the factory to the accounting department to make sure payments are on time. Late payments, however, also mean a loss of the 2 percent discount the suppliers offer for early payment. Besides resulting in lost sales, insufficient inventory of parts also delays the whole assembly line. Workers spend much time switching jobs. A just in time inventory system would, according to Mr. Gresko, be more appropriate for the factory. If the parts were available in the warehouse, the machines could be set up on an assembly line fashion and operated on scheduled runs. But the fact that the necessary parts are frequently missing, forcing production to switch to another job, is a major obstacle to a just in time inventory system. The Purchasing Cycle Gresko Toys is very involved in purchasing the parts used in the production of toys. The company uses a periodic inventory system. When sales orders are received, Bob Gresko sends a copy to the production floor. This copy is used to trigger production as well as to indicate the potential need of parts not available in inventory. The inventory clerks search for parts; when parts are out of stock, the inventory clerks issue two copies of a purchase requisition. Mr. Gresko approves this requisition before a purchase order is issued. One copy is sent to the purchasing manager and the other to the accounting department. The buyer checks the suppliers’ prices for the needed parts. Based on cost as well as past experience with a particular supplier, two suppliers are recommended. The purchasing manager subsequently decides on the supplier, and four copies of a purchase order are issued. The first copy is sent to the supplier, the purchasing manager files the second copy, the third is sent to the warehouse, and the fourth is sent to the accounting department. All purchase order copies are filed by supplier number. Approximately a week after the initiation of the purchase, the parts are received. The warehouse manager, along with the inventory clerks, inspects and counts the received parts. The purchase order copy that the purchasing manager previously received is used as the basis of comparison. A receiving report in three parts is prepared. If prices and quantities received agree with those ordered and with the information on the packing slip the carrier receives, the parts are accepted. If any differences exist, Mr. Gresko is called in to decide whether to accept or reject the parts. On many occasions, acceptance of parts will be delayed for days until the suppliers are informed and an agreement is reached. One copy of the receiving report is sent to the purchasing manager and another to the accounting department. The original copy is kept at the warehouse. The accounting clerk files the receiving report along with the purchase requisition and the purchase order by supplier number. The clerk also prepares the necessary journal entry and credits the related supplier in the subsidiary ledger. When the supplier sends the invoice, the accounting clerk matches the information to the purchase requisition, purchase order, and receiving report and prepares a disbursement voucher. This voucher is used for two purposes. It initiates the journal entry for the disbursement of cash, and the cashier uses it to issue a check. Randi Gresko, as well as Mrs. Gresko, must sign the checks before they are sent to the suppliers. Electronic Data Interchange In search of anything that could improve the present system at the Gresko Toys factory, Mr. Gresko came across the EDI system. One of his suppliers had attended a conference on EDI and had supplied Mr. Gresko with the conference material. Looking at the present system, Mr. Gresko tried to find EDI applications that would benefit the company’s operations and at the same time improve its financial position. For EDI to be implemented, certain databases will need to be established. An inventory master file with all relevant information is the key to the system. Predetermined order quantities and minimum inventory levels will need to be set for each item based on forecasts. At the warehouse, the inventory clerks will be constantly updating this database. When inventory levels drop below acceptable levels, an EDI purchase requisition will be issued to the purchasing department. A supplier master file with related information on supplier performance will be accessed to identify potential suppliers. Depending on how advanced the system is, the computer or the purchasing manager will choose the proper supplier and issue an EDI order. This means that the factory’s suppliers will also need to be using EDI. Various ways of developing EDI links with suppliers are available. In the Gresko case, developing an independent system seems more appropriate; it is cheaper and perhaps easier to convince suppliers to join in. Software is readily available in the market and is easy to set up. Someone, however, should help set up the EDI links with the suppliers. Once an EDI order is issued, the supplier will receive the message instantaneously. The open purchase order will be kept in a database until the receipt of the parts. Any changes to the order can be made by accessing the particular transmitted order and making the change. Suppliers can send the parts as well as their invoices more quickly. An EDI invoice can be sent to the Gresko factory upon shipment. On arrival of the parts, the receiving clerk will prepare a receiving report and file it in a receiving database file. This report will be used to verify prices by accessing the purchase order. Credit terms, volume discounts, trade allowances, and other adjustments to quoted prices can be settled through EDI transmitted messages. If adjustments from disagreements occur, the transaction is entered into the adjusted database file. The inventory master file is also updated, and the open purchase order is closed. In addition, the supplier history file and the accounts payable file are updated, and an evaluated receipts settlement (ERS) is established. An ERS is a database containing records to be used for the payment of suppliers. The EDI order is matched against the receiving and adjusted database files. This comparison creates a payment input file that contains the following three data items: (1) the scheduled payment date, within which any discount can be obtained; (2) the latest possible payment date; and (3) the remittance record for such payments. At the beginning of every day, the treasurer (who presently does not exist at Gresko Toys) should receive a listing of the payment input file; this listing will indicate what has to be paid and when. The treasurer will initiate an EDI payment pending the approval of Mrs. Gresko. Upon approval and the transmission of the payment, the supplier records as well as the accounts payable records will be automatically updated. For an EFT to occur, the banks that serve Gresko and its suppliers will also need to be using EDI. If such intermediary banks are not using EDI, Gresko and its suppliers will need to rely on a manual system of cash disbursement to settle their transactions. Conclusion Mr. Gresko has hired you to look at the present accounting system and his suggested EDI implementation plan. He wants you to identify the problem areas and look into the feasibility of setting up EDI links with the company’s suppliers.
Required
a. Draw a system flowchart of the present accounting system at Gresko.
b. What control problems, if any, exist in the accounting system?
c. Draw a system flowchart of the accounting system of the Gresko Toys factory using EDI as Mr. Gresko suggested.
d. Do some research on your own. What EDI options, other than the one Mr. Gresko suggested, are available to the Gresko Toys factory?
e. Discuss the possible implementation of an EDI system at the Gresko Toys factory. What areas should
Mr. Gresko concentrate on, and what are the related issues associated with implementing EDI at the factory?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Santa’sAttic.com is an online retailer/manufacturer of children’s toys. Its main competitors are larger electronic commerce toy companies including Amazon.com; Yahoo Shopping, which includes ToysRUs.com and KBKids.com; and all of the other retail stores with online shopping. It has a low market share compared to the industry leaders and is possibly a victim of Internet fraud. The CEO of Santa’sAttic.com has noticed that the level of accounts receivable has been quite high in comparison to prior years. He is wondering if this is a sign of weak internal controls. He has also heard through the grapevine that some of his customers were noticing unauthorized charges on their credit cards and is wondering if there may be online security issues to deal with as well. For this reason, you have been contacted to help Santa’sAttic.com restructure its company to prevent possible company failure. Santa’sAttic.com employs 100 individuals, 75 of whom work directly on the manufacturing line and 25 of whom hold administrative positions. Its customer base consists mainly of individuals, but also smaller toy stores, day care centers, and schools. Santa’sAttic.com works on a cash basis with its customers and accepts all major credit cards. It has running credit balances with all of its suppliers. Its credit terms are 2/10, n30. Being the technical genius that he is, the vice president of marketing took it upon himself to design the company Web site. The Web site has pages where customers can view all of the products and prices. There is a virtual shopping cart available for each customer once he or she has set up a demographic information account. If the customer chooses to make a purchase, he or she simply clicks on the direct link to the shopping cart from the product that he or she wishes to purchase and proceeds to the checkout. Here the customer is prompted to choose a payment method and enter the shipping address. Once this information has been entered, the customer chooses a shipping method. All shipping is done through U.S. Mail, UPS, Federal Express, Airborne Express, or certified mail. The customer is then informed of the total price and the date to expect shipment. Within the purchasing system, Santa’sAttic.com purchases raw materials for production, such as plastics, wood, metal, and certain fabrics. There is no formal purchasing department at Santa’sAttic.com. Judy, the inventory clerk in the warehouse department, is responsible for all purchasing activity. Santa’sAttic.com currently has only one warehouse, which is located in Cooperstown, New York. Within the warehouse department, Judy has access to the inventory records and knows when certain materials have to be repurchased. If materials are needed, she prepares a single purchase requisition and also five copies of the purchase order form. Judy includes all of the necessary information on all copies of the form, including the material to be purchased, the price of the material, the quantity needed, and the requested delivery date. Once completed, two copies of the form are sent to the vendor along with the order. One is placed in the open purchase order file in the warehouse, and one is used to update the inventory records that are also kept within the warehouse department. The final copy is forwarded to the receiving department. Harry, the receiving clerk, receives the materials and creates four copies of a receiving report based on the packing slip and purchase order information. Two of these receiving reports are forwarded to the warehouse, where one is used to update inventory records and the other is filed. One copy of the receiving report is also maintained within the receiving department and is filed along with the packing slip and the purchase order. The final copy is sent to the accounts payable department, where it is reconciled with the vendor invoice. Once the receiving report and the vendor invoice are reconciled in the accounts payable department, the liability is posted to the purchases journal and the total amount due is paid to the vendor. Finally, both the receiving report and the invoice are filed within the accounts payable department and Joanna, the accounts payable clerk, posts the liability to the general ledger. Santa’sAttic.com’s production workers each have time cards that they punch at a punch in station when they arrive and when they leave. The punch in station is located at the entrance to the plant and is not monitored. At the end of the week, the supervisor reviews, authorizes, and signs the time cards. He then sends the time cards to cash disbursements. Supervisors do not keep their own attendance records. Rose, in cash disbursements, receives the time cards and reconciles them with personnel records on the company database to verify the time cards for accuracy. All personnel records are maintained in a database. Access to the database is restricted. Personnel can update the records only once a year. Rose’s only view displays employee demographic information and does not allow access to salary information. Rose prepares the paychecks and signs them. She then prepares the payroll register using only information gained from the time cards. Sally in accounts payable receives a copy of the payroll register and uses it to update the general ledger. Accounts payable receives no information besides the payroll register. Rose, in cash disbursements, hands the prepared paychecks to the supervisors of each department for distribution. All checks are written directly from the company’s only cash account. Supervisors distribute the checks directly to the employees and themselves. Engaging in electronic commerce has exposed Santa’sAttic.com to a whole new nature of risks within its real time revenue cycle. A customer has the option of paying with a credit card or personal check. Upon entering the credit card information, it becomes attached to the customer’s e mail file. This information includes the type of card, the customer’s name as it appears on the card, the credit card number, and the expiration date. Once an order is placed, an employee reviews the order in question, verifies credit, and enters the transaction into main database. The main problem with this system is that orders have been placed with the company where the customer in question honestly denies ever submitting orders. It turns out that their children have placed many of these orders without the customer’s knowledge. The children were able to gain access to their parent’s account after the system recognized cookies in the hard drive. When the children went to the Web site, the page recognized them as the users of the account and gave them authorized access to make purchases. Another problem with the information in the revenue cycle has been that hackers have been able to enter the database and obtain information concerning customers. This unauthorized access has sent top management into a frenzy knowing that their customer information is insecure.
Required
a. Discuss the control and security weaknesses in this system.
b. Make specific recommendations for improving controls.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. All of the following individuals would likely be SDLC participants EXCEPT
a. accountants.
b. shareholders.
c. management.
d. programmers.
e. all of the above.
2. Which of the following represents the correct order in problem resolution?
a. Define the problem, recognize the problem, perform feasibility studies, specify system objectives, and prepare a project proposal.
b. Recognize the problem, define the problem, perform feasibility studies, specify system objectives, and prepare a project proposal.
c. Define the problem, recognize the problem, specify system objectives, perform feasibility studies, and prepare a project proposal.
d. Recognize the problem, define the problem, specify system objectives, perform feasibility studies, and prepare a project proposal.
3. A feasibility study for a new computer system should
a. consider costs, savings, controls, profit improvement, and other benefits analyzed by application area.
b. provide the preliminary plan for converting existing manual systems and clerical operations.
c. provide management with assurance from qualified, independent consultants that the use of a computer system appeared justified.
d. include a report by the internal audit department that evaluated internal control features for each planned application.
4. Which of the following is the most important factor in planning for a system change?
a. Having an auditor as a member of the design team.
b. Using state of the art techniques.
c. Concentrating on software rather than hardware.
d. Involving top management and people who use the system.
e. Selecting a user to lead the design team.
5. In the context of the TELOS acronym, technical feasibility refers to whether
a. a proposed system is attainable, given the existing technology.
b. the systems manager can coordinate and control the activities of the systems department.
c. an adequate computer site exists for the proposed system.
d. the proposed system will produce economic benefits exceeding its costs.
e. the system will be used effectively within the operating environment of an organization.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Which of the following is least likely to be an attribute of an employee table in a normalized database?
a. employee name
b. employee address
c. employee number
d. employee supervisor’s name
e. all of these would be attributes of the employee table in a normalized database.
2. The advantages to using a partitioned database approach include all of the following EXCEPT
a. the possibility for the deadlock phenomenon is reduced.
b. user control is increased.
c. transaction processing time is decreased.
d. the potential for wide scale disaster is reduced.
e. these are all advantages of partitioned databases.
3. Of the following, select the attribute that would be the best primary key in an inventory table.
a. ITEM NAME
b. ITEM LOCATION
c. ITEM COST
d. ITEM NUMBER
e. ITEM SUPPLIER
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Design a relational database for a video rental store. The store, which rents only DVDs and has no sales other than DVD rentals, has approximately 5,000 customers and approximately 1,200 DVD titles. There are 25 suppliers of DVDs. Business rules include: (1) each DVD title may have many copies; (2) customers use their telephone numbers to uniquely identify themselves for video rentals; (3) a telephone number may apply to anyone in the household; (4) customers may rent more than one copy of any title, but, obviously, a copy of a title can only be rented by one customer at a time; and (5) suppliers may provide many titles and a DVD may be acquired from several different suppliers. Design the necessary database tables. State the primary key for each table as well as all other necessary attributes. Make certain the tables are in third normal form. Mark the attribute you have selected as the primary key (PK) as well as the attributes that serve as foreign keys (FK).
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
How is a lockout different from a deadlock? Give an accounting example to illustrate why a database lockout is necessary and how a deadlock can occur. Provide meaningful table names in your example.
The XYZ Company is a geographically distributed organization with several sites around the country. Users at these sites need rapid access to common data for read only purposes. Which distributed database method is best under these circumstances? Explain your reasoning.
The ABC Company is a geographically distributed organization with several sites around the country. Users at these sites need rapid access to data for transaction processing purposes. The sites are autonomous; they do not share the same customers, products, or suppliers. Which distributed database method is best under these circumstances? Explain your reasoning.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Why is it important to organizationally separate the accounting function from other functions of the organization?
2. What is the most likely system acquisition method—in house, turnkey, backbone, or vendor supported—for each of the following situations?
• A plumbing supply company with 12 employees that sells standard products to wholesale customers in a local community needs a system to manage its affairs.
• A major oil company with diverse holdings, complex oil leases, and esoteric accounting practices needs a system that can coordinate its many enterprises.
• A municipal government needs a system that complies with standard government accounting practices but can be integrated with other existing systems.
3. The REA model is based on the premise that “business data must not be preformatted or artificially constrained and must reflect all relevant aspects of the underlying economic events.” What does this mean and how is it applied?
4. ERP systems are composed of a highly integrated set of standardized modules. Discuss the advantages and potential disadvantages of this approach.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Which of the following is NOT a financial transaction?
a. purchase of products
b. cash receipts
c. update valid vendor file
d. sale of inventory
2. The following are subsystems of the Accounting Information System, EXCEPT
a. Transaction Processing System.
b. Human Resources System.
c. General Ledger/Financial Reporting System.
d. Management Reporting System.
3. Which of the following is NOT a purpose of the Transaction Processing System?
a. managing and reporting on the status of financial investments
b. converting economic events into financial transactions
c. distributing essential information to operations personnel to support their daily operations
d. recording financial transactions in the accounting records
4. The objectives of the data collection activity of the general model for AIS are to collect data that are
a. relevant and redundant.
b. efficient and objective.
c. efficient and redundant.
d. efficient and relevant.
5. Which of the following is NOT a characteristic of effective information?
a. relevance
b. accuracy
c. summarization
d. precision
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Which of the following is NOT a database management task?
a. retrieval
b. storage
c. summarization
d. deletion
2. When viewed from the highest to most elemental level, the data hierarchy is
a. attribute, record, file.
b. record, attribute, key.
c. file, record, attribute.
d. file, record, key.
e. key, record, file.
3. Which is NOT an accountant’s primary role in information systems?
a. system user
b. system auditor
c. system designer
d. system programmer
4. Which of the following is NOT an objective of all information systems?
a. support for the stewardship function of management
b. support for management decision making
c. support for the day to day operations of the firm
d. all of the above are objectives
5. Which of the following best describes the activities of the materials management function?
a. purchasing, receiving, and inventory control
b. receiving, sales, distribution, and purchasing
c. receiving, storage, purchasing, and accounts payable
d. purchasing, receiving, and storage
e. purchasing, storage, and distribution
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
All records in a file must be uniquely identifiable in at least one attribute, which is its primary key. Drawing on your general knowledge of accounting, identify the primary key for the following types of accounting records. To illustrate, the first record is done for you.
|
Record Type
|
Primary Key
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
Customer Number
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
|
Inventory
|
|
|
Customer Sales Orders
|
|
|
Purchase Orders to vendors
|
|
|
Cash Receipts (checks) from customers
|
|
|
Cash Disbursements (checks) to vendors
|
|
|
Employee Payroll
|
|
|
Earnings records
|
|
7.
Drawing from your basic accounting knowledge, list the relevant data attributes that constitute the record types below. Identify which attribute is the primary key for the record.
Accounts Payable record
Inventory record
Customer Sales Orders record
Purchase Orders to vendors
Cash Receipts (checks) from customers
Employee Payroll Earnings records
Explain why an organization would choose to install a distributed instead of a centralized computer environment.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. If management control and strategic planning decisions do not receive a high level of support from traditional information systems, then how do they get the support?
2. In terms of decision making capabilities, which type of report do you think is generally more important—scheduled reports or on demand reports? Explain your answer and give an example of each type of report.
3. Scheduled reports may contain some information that is relevant to some decisions and irrelevant to other decisions. Why are some scheduled reports designed this way, rather than multiple reports being generated for various decision making purposes?
4. Sometimes a trade off must be made between information accuracy and timeliness. Give an example in which it is imperative to make an estimate now, rather than wait a couple of weeks for an exact number.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Sequential access means that
a. data are stored on magnetic tape.
b. the address of the location of data is found through the use of either an algorithm or an index.
c. to read any record on the file, all of the preceding records must first be read.
d. each record can be accessed in the same amount of time.
2. Which file has as its primary purpose to provide historical financial data for comparative financial reports?
a. journal voucher history file
b. budget master file
c. responsibility file
d. general ledger history file
3. Which of the following statements is true?
a. Journal vouchers detailing transaction activity flow from various operational departments into the GLS, where they are independently reconciled and posted to the journal voucher history file.
b. Journal vouchers summarizing transaction activity flow from the accounting department into the GLS, where they are independently reconciled and posted to the general ledger accounts.
c. Journal vouchers summarizing transaction activity flow from various operational departments into the GLS, where they are independently reconciled and posted to the general ledger accounts.
d. Journal vouchers summarizing transaction activity flow from various operational departments into the GLS, where they are independently reconciled and posted to the journal voucher history file.
4. Which of the following statements best describes a computer based GL/FRS?
a. Most firms derive little additional benefit from a real time FRS.
b. Batch processing is typically not appropriate for transaction processing of GLS.
c. The sequential file approach is an inefficient use of technology.
d. A batch system with direct access files recreates the entire database each time the file is updated.
5. Which of the following is NOT a potential exposure of the FRS?
a. a defective audit trail
b. general ledger accounts that are out of balance with subsidiary accounts
c. unauthorized access to the check register
d. unauthorized access to the general ledger
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Which task should the general ledger perform?
a. update the general ledger
b. prepare journal vouchers
c. have custody of physical assets
d. have record keeping responsibility for special journals of subsidiary ledgers
2. The Ozment Corporation uses a performance reporting system that shows online the data for each subordinate who reports to a supervisor. The data presented show the actual costs incurred during the period, the budgeted costs, and all variances from budget for that subordinate’s department. The name of this system of reporting is a. contribution accounting.
b. responsibility accounting.
c. flexible budgeting.
d. program budgeting.
e. cost benefit accounting.
3. Which of the following is not a characteristic of the strategic planning process?
a. emphasis on both the short and long run
b. analysis of external economic factors
c. review of the attributes and behavior of the organization’s competition
d. analysis and review of departmental process
e. analysis of consumer demand
4. The following are all output reports of the financial reporting system, EXCEPT
a. variance analysis report.
b. statement of cash flows.
c. tax return.
d. comparative balance sheet.
5. Which of the following budgeting processes is LEAST likely to motivate managers toward organizational goals?
a. setting budget targets at attainable levels
b. participation by subordinates in the budgetary process
c. use of management by exception
d. holding subordinates accountable for the items they control
e. having top management set budget levels
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Which of the following would normally be considered in a strategic plan?
a. setting a target of 12 percent return on sales
b. maintaining the image of the company as the industry leader
c. setting a market price per share of stock outstanding
d. distributing monthly reports for departmental variance analysis
e. tightening credit terms for customers to 2/10, n/30
2. At what level of management is the long range planning function most important?
a. at top management levels
b. at middle management levels
c. at lower management levels
d. for staff functions
e. for line functions
3. Which of the following is the basic purpose of a responsibility accounting?
a. variance analysis
b. motivation
c. authority
d. budgeting
e. pricing
4. Which statement below best describes a profit center?
a. The authority to make decisions affecting the major determinants of profit, including the power to choose its markets and sources of supply.
b. The authority to make decisions affecting the major determinants of profit, including the power to choose its markets, sources of supply, and significant control over the amount of invested capital.
c. The authority to make decisions over the most significant costs of operations, including the power to choose the sources of supply.
d. The authority to provide specialized support to other units within the organization.
e. The responsibility for combining the raw materials, direct labor, and other factors of production into a final product.
5. Which statement below best describes an investment center?
a. The authority to make decisions affecting the major determinants of profit, including the power to choose its markets and sources of supply.
b. The authority to make decisions affecting the major determinants of profit, including the power to choose its markets and sources of supply, and significant control over the amount of invested capital.
c. The authority to make decisions over the most significant costs of operations, including the power to choose the sources of supply.
d. The authority to provide specialized support to other units within the organization.
e. The responsibility for developing markets for and selling of the output of the organization.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Draw a diagram depicting the relationship between the general ledger master file, control accounts, subsidiary files, and financial statements.
The following contains the various steps of the financial reporting process. Place these steps in the proper order and indicate whether each step is a function of the TPS, GLS, or FRS.
_ Record transaction in special journal
_ Make adjusting entries
_ Capture the transaction
_ Prepare the post closing trial balance
_ Prepare the adjusted trial balance
_ Prepare the financial statements
_ Journalize and post the adjusting entries
_ Post to the subsidiary ledger
_ Post to the general ledger
_ Journalize and post the closing entries
_ Prepare the unadjusted trial balance
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
John Ozment, director of special projects and analysis for Ozment’s Corporation, is responsible for preparing corporate financial analyses and monthly statements and reviewing and presenting the financial impacts of proposed strategies to upper management. Data for such financial analyses are obtained from operations and financial databases through direct queries of Ozment’s department staff. Reports and charts for presentations are then prepared by hand and typed. Multiple copies are prepared and distributed to various users. The pressure on Ozment’s group has intensified as demand for more and more current information increases. A solution to this reporting problem must be found. The systems department wants to develop a proprietary software package to produce the reports automatically. The project would require the company to make a considerable programming investment. Ozment is concerned about the accuracy, completeness, and currency of data in automatically produced reports. He has heard about a reporting system called XBRL and wonders whether a new system based on this technology would not be more effective and reliable.
Required
a. Research the current state of XBRL and determine if this technology is appropriate for internal reporting projects such as this.
b. Identify the enhancements to current information and reporting that the company could realize by using XBRL.
c. Discuss any data integrity, internal control, and reporting concerns associated with XBRL.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Prepare an organizational chart for your university.
Classify the following decisions as being characteristic of strategic planning, tactical planning, managerial control, or operational control.
Determining the mix of products to manufacture this year
Examining whether the number of defective goods manufactured is within a certain range
Expanding a product line overseas
Determining the best distribution route
Examining whether the cost of raw materials is within a certain range
Examining whether personnel development cost is rising
Employing more automated manufacturing this year
Examining whether the amount of scrap material is acceptable
Building a new plant facility
Examining whether employees’ attitudes are improving
Examining whether production levels are within a predicted range
Making purchasing arrangements with a new supplier
Increasing production capabilities this year by purchasing a more efficient piece of machinery
Closing a plant
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
While attending night school to earn a degree in computer engineering, Stan Wilson worked for Morlot Container Company (MCC) as an assembly line supervisor. MCC was located near Wilson’s hometown and had been a prominent employer in the area for many years. MCC’s main product was milk cartons that were distributed throughout the Midwest for milk processing plants. The technology at MCC was stable, and the assembly lines were monitored closely. MCC employed a standard cost system because cost control was considered important. The employees who manned the assembly lines were generally unskilled workers who had been with the company for many years; the majority of these workers belonged to the local union. Wilson was glad he was nearly finished with school because he found the work at MCC to be repetitive and boring, even as a supervisor. The supervisors were monitored almost as closely as the line workers, and standard policies and procedures existed that applied to most situations. Most of MCC’s management had been with the company for several years and believed in clear lines of authority and well defined responsibilities. Whereas he knew he had performed well against the company’s standards, Wilson also knew that there probably would be little opportunity for advancement or significant compensation increases. After receiving his degree, Wilson went to work in the research and development department of Alden Computers, a 5 year old company specializing in educational computer systems for elementary schools. The company was customer oriented and willing to tailor its computer systems to the needs of the end users. The customization of its systems, combined with continual changes in technology, resulted in a job shop orientation in the company’s production facility. The employees who assembled Alden’s systems were skilled technicians who worked closely with the engineering staff. Wilson was gratified by the respect and authority his newly acquired knowledge and skills afforded him at Alden. If changes were required in his area of expertise, Wilson often made recommendations about how the work should proceed and was involved in decisions on new product development. The company’s management team frequently ‘‘rolled up its sleeves’’ and worked alongside the technicians when production problems arose; the lines of authority were sometimes difficult to distinguish, and decisions were often made by the expert on the spot. Wilson believed that his skills were appreciated at Alden, and he would be fairly compensated for his professional expertise.
Required
a. Morlot Container Company and Alden Computers represent two different types of organizational structures. In terms of each of the following points, explain how MCC differs from Alden Computers.
1. General organizational structure and climate
2. Bases of authority
3. Evaluation criteria
4. Bases of compensation
b. Both structures have potential benefits or can create problems. Discuss the features of the structure used by
1. Alden Computers that might benefit MCC.
2. Alden that might create problems for Alden.
3. MCC that might benefit Alden Computers.a
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A variety of quantitative measures are used to evaluate employee performance, including standard costs, financial ratios, human resource forecasts, and operating budgets.
Required
a. Discuss the following aspects of a standard cost system.
1. Discuss the characteristics that should be present to encourage positive employee motivation.
2. Discuss how the system should be implemented to positively motivate employees.
b. The use of variance analysis often results in management by exception.
1. Explain the meaning of management by exception.
2. Discuss the behavioral implications of management by exception.
c. Explain how employee behavior could be adversely affected when actual to budget comparisons are used as the basis for performance evaluation.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Engineers Education Association (EEA) is a volunteer membership organization providing educational and professional services to its members. The professional staff is organized into four divisions with a total of 14 operating departments. EEA adopted an annual budget program many years ago as a means for planning and controlling activities. Each department of EEA prepares an annual budget in consultation with its respective volunteer committee(s). After a series of reviews by both the professional staff and the volunteer structure, the budget is adopted. The professional staff is expected to comply with the budget in conducting its activities and operations. The EEA’s accounting department generates monthly income statements that present actual performance as compared to budget for each EEA department. The November 2010 statement for the publications department is shown in the first figure designated Problem 17. Accompanying the report this month was a memorandum from EEA’s president, Daniel Riley, which is shown in the second figure designated as Problem 17. Marie Paige, publications manager, was having lunch with Jon Franklin, continuing education manager, when the following conversation about Riley’s memorandum took place.
|
EEA—PUBLICATIONS DEPARTMENT INCOME STATEMENT FOR THE MONTH ENDED NOVEMBER 30, 2009 ($000 OMITTED)
|
|
Variance
|
|
Budget
|
Actual
|
Dollar
|
Percent
|
|
Revenues
|
|
Subscriptions
|
$ 9.5
|
$ 8.4
|
$ (1.1)
|
(11.6)
|
|
Library
|
|
subscriptions
|
3.4
|
3.3
|
(.1)
|
(2.9)
|
|
Research
|
|
publications
|
13.6
|
15.2
|
1.6
|
11.8
|
|
Advertising
|
64.0
|
50.1
|
(13.9)
|
(21.7)
|
|
List rentals
|
15.2
|
13.9
|
(1.3)
|
(8.6)
|
|
Total revenue
|
$105.7
|
$90.9
|
$(14.8)
|
(14.0)
|
|
Operating expenses
|
|
Salaries and wages
|
$ 24.0
|
$ 22.0
|
$ 2.0
|
8.3
|
|
Employee benefits
|
4.8
|
4.4
|
.4
|
8.3
|
|
Temporary help
|
0.0
|
1.5
|
(1.5)
|
(ERR)
|
|
Outside services
|
1.0
|
2.5
|
(1.5)
|
150.0)
|
|
Education and training
|
0.5
|
0.0
|
.5
|
100.0
|
|
Promotion and advertising
|
7.5
|
4.0
|
3.5
|
46.6
|
|
Typesetting
|
8.0
|
12.0
|
(4.0)
|
(50.0)
|
|
Production printing
|
46.0
|
40.4
|
5.6
|
12.2
|
|
Postage, freight, and handling
|
12.0
|
11.0
|
1.0
|
8.3
|
|
Supplies
|
1.0
|
.8
|
.2
|
20.0
|
|
Total expenses
|
$104.8
|
$ 98.6
|
$ 6.2
|
5.9
|
|
Contribution
|
$ .9
|
$ (7.7)
|
$ (8.6)
|
955.6)
|
Paige: The volunteers must be giving Riley some static—the memo doesn’t sound like him. Franklin: I think you’re right. One of EEA’s problems is that membership is down. Paige: I heard that both growth and retention are bad. This is confirmed by my results. A set percentage of the membership dues of each member is assigned to us each month for the magazine subscription. This amount is down 12 percent. I have no control over this number because only members get the magazine. Franklin: I wonder if the results are really as bad as they look. For instance, accounting has December 9, 2009 TO: Department Managers FROM: Daniel Riley, President SUBJECT: Performance Analysis The November 2009 operating results for your department are attached. The results for the entire organization and most departments are unfavorable as compared to budget. In fact, our results for the first three months of this fiscal year are substantially below budget. I want to determine our problems as quickly as possible. Prepare an explanation of all unfavorable (negative) variances by line item that exceed budget by 5 percent or more, and present a plan to eliminate such variances in the future. Remember that you played a key role in the development of the budget, and you have a responsibility to achieve the budget figures. These negative variances must be eliminated if we are to get back on steam. Please submit your analysis to your divisional director and accounting by noon, Monday, December 14. Divisional directors will meet at 10 a.m. on Tuesday, December 15, to review these analyses. divided all of the annual budget figures by 12 to derive the monthly figures. This is okay for some things but not for most. What about you? Paige: I agree. I don’t know why they do that when we spend so much time up front developing the annual budget. I know what Riley is attempting, but I don’t think he is going to get the results he wants. I know he wants to eliminate the negative variances, but some positive variances are really not favorable! We should be analyzing all significant variances—positive and negative. Franklin: What are you going to do—analyze just the negatives? Should we do anything before we prepare our reports?
Required
a. The monthly income statements that EEA’s accounting department prepares for each department of EEA are a form of communication.
1. Explain why the departmental income statements are considered a form of communication.
2. In terms of the format of the income statement presented for the publications department, evaluate
EEA’s departmental income statement as a communication device.
b. Paige stated that all significant variances should be analyzed because some positive variances are not favorable. Discuss why EEA’s departments should be analyzing all significant variances, both positive (favorable) and negative (unfavorable). As support for your answer, identify a positive variance from the publications department’s income statement that may not be favorable to EEA’s operations and explain why.
c. Recommend a course of action that Paige or Franklin could take to encourage Riley to have all significant variances reviewed.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. The data attributes that a particular user has permission to access are defined by the
a. operating system view.
b. systems design view.
c. database schema.
d. user view.
e. application program.
2. The database approach has several unique characteristics not found in traditional (flat file) systems. Which of the following statements does not apply to the database model?
a. Database systems have data independence; that is, the data and the programs are maintained separately except during processing.
b. Database systems contain a data definition language that helps describe each schema and subschema.
c. The database administrator is the part of the software package that instructs the operating aspects of the program when data are retrieved.
d. A primary goal of database systems is to minimize data redundancy.
e. Database systems provide increased accessibility to data and flexibility in its usage.
3. One of the first steps in the creation of a relational database is to
a. integrate accounting and nonfinancial data.
b. plan for increased secondary storage capacity.
c. order data mining software that will facilitate data retrieval.
d. create a data model of the key entities in the system.
e. construct the physical user view using SQL.
4. Database currency is achieved by
a. implementing partitioned databases at remote sites.
b. employing data cleansing techniques.
c. ensuring that the database is secure from accidental entry.
d. an external auditor’s reconciliation of reports from multiple sites.
e. a database lockout that prevents multiple simultaneous access.
5. The installation of a database management system is likely to have the least impact on
a. data redundancy.
b. entity wide sharing of common data.
c. exclusive ownership of data.
d. the logic needed to solve a problem in an application program.
e. the internal controls over data access.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. The functions of a database administrator are
a. database planning, data input preparation, and database design.
b. data input preparation, database design, and database operation.
c. database design, database operation, and equipment operations.
d. database design, database implementation, and database planning.
e. database operations, database maintenance, and data input preparation.
2. A relational database system contains the following inventory data: part number, description, quantity on hand, and reorder point. These individual items are called
a. attributes.
b. relations.
c. associations.
d. occurrences.
3. Which of the following is a characteristic of a relational database system?
a. All data within the system are shared by all users to facilitate integration.
b. Database processing follows explicit links that are contained within the records.
c. User views limit access to the database.
d. Transaction processing and data warehousing systems share a common database.
4. Partitioned databases are most effective when
a. users in the system need to share common data.
b. primary users of the data are clearly identifiable.
c. read only access is needed at each site.
d. all of the above.
5. Database entities
a. may contain zero or many occurrences.
b. are represented as verbs in an ER diagram.
c. may represent both physical assets and intangible phenomena.
d. are often defined by common attributes that also define other entities.
e. are unique to a specific user view.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. A transitive dependency
a. is a database condition that is resolved through special monitoring software.
b. is a name given to one of the three anomalies that result from un normalized database tables.
c. can exist only in a table with a composite primary key.
d. cannot exist in tables that are normalized at the 2NF level.
e. is none of the above.
2. A partial dependency
a. is the result of simultaneous user requests for the same data in a partitioned database environment.
b. is a name given to one of the three anomalies that result from un normalized database tables.
c. can exist only in a table with a composite primary key.
d. may exist in tables that are normalized at the 2NF level.
e. is none of the above.
3. Repeating group data
a. is a form of data redundancy common to replicated databases in a distributed database environment.
b. is a name given to one of the three anomalies that result from un normalized database tables.
c. can exist only in a table with a composite primary key.
d. cannot exist in tables that are normalized at the 2NF level.
e. is none of the above.
4. The database model most likely to be used in the development of a modern (not legacy) system is
a. hierarchical
b. structured
c. relational
d. network
e. navigational
5. Typical DBMS features include all of the following EXCEPT
a. database interface design and development.
b. backup and recovery.
c. program development.
d. database access.
e. all of these are typical DBMS features.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Banking Crises Throughout the World
1) As in the United States, an important factor in the banking crises in Norway, Sweden, and
Finland was the
A) financial liberalization that occurred in the 1980s.
B) decline in real interest rates that occurred in the 1980s.
C) high inflation that occurred in the 1980s.
D) sluggish economic growth that occurred in the 1980s.
2) As in the United States, an important factor in the banking crises in Latin America was the
A) financial liberalization that occurred in the 1980s.
B) decline in real interest rates that occurred in the 1980s.
C) high inflation that occurred in the 1980s.
D) sluggish economic growth that occurred in the 1980s.
3) The Argentine banking crisis of 2001 resulted from Argentina”s banks being required to
A) purchase large amounts of government debt.
B) pay back the value of failed loans.
C) make risky real estate loans.
D) make loans to only state owned businesses.
4) When comparing the banking crisis in the United States to the crises in Latin America, cost to the taxpayers of the government bailouts was
A) higher in Latin American than in the United States.
B) higher in the United States than in Latin America.
C) about the same in both Latin America and the United States.
D) positive in Latin America but negative in the United States.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) The Japanese banking system went through a cycle of ________ in the 1990s similar to the one that occurred in the U.S. in the 1980s.
A) regulatory forbearance
B) policy antagonism
C) regulatory ignorance
D) policy renewal
2) China is trying to move its banking system from being strictly ________ owned by having them issue shares overseas.
A) state
B) domestic investor
C) depositor
D) domestic corporate
3) The evidence from banking crises in other countries indicates that
A) deposit insurance is to blame in each country.
B) a government safety net for depositors need not increase moral hazard.
C) regulatory forbearance never leads to problems.
D) deregulation combined with poor regulatory supervision raises moral hazard incentives.
4) Banking crises have occurred throughout the world. What similarities do we find when we look at the different countries?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) The modern commercial banking system began in America when the
A) Bank of United States was chartered in New York in 1801.
B) Bank of North America was chartered in Philadelphia in 1782.
C) Bank of United States was chartered in Philadelphia in 1801.
D) Bank of North America was chartered in New York in 1782.
2) A major controversy involving the banking industry in its early years was
A) whether banks should both accept deposits and make loans or whether these functions should be separated into different institutions.
B) whether the federal government or the states should charter banks.
C) what percent of deposits banks should hold as fractional reserves.
D) whether banks should be allowed to issue their own bank notes.
3) The government institution that has responsibility for the amount of money and credit supplied in the economy as a whole is the
A) central bank.
B) commercial bank.
C) bank of settlement.
D) monetary fund.
4) Because of the abuses by state banks and the clear need for a central bank to help the federal government raise funds during the War of 1812, Congress created the
A) Bank of United States in 1812.
B) Bank of North America in 1814.
C) Second Bank of the United States in 1816.
D) Second Bank of North America in 1815.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) The Second Bank of the United States was denied a new charter by
A) President Andrew Jackson.
B) Vice President John Calhoun.
C) President Benjamin Harrison.
D) President John Q. Adams.
2) Currency circulated by banks that could be redeemed for gold was called ________.
A) junk bonds
B) banknotes
C) gold bills
D) state money
3) To eliminate the abuses of the state chartered banks, the ________ created a new banking system of federally chartered banks, supervised by the ________.
A) National Bank Act of 1863; Office of the Comptroller of the Currency
B) Federal Reserve Act of 1863; Office of the Comptroller of the Currency
C) National Bank Act of 1863; Office of Thrift Supervision
D) Federal Reserve Act of 1863; Office of Thrift Supervision
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) The belief that bank failures were regularly caused by fraud or the lack of sufficient bank capital explains, in part, the passage of
A) the National Bank Charter Amendments of 1918.
B) the Garn St. Germain Act of 1982.
C) the National Bank Act of 1863.
D) Federal Reserve Act of 1913.
2) Before 1863,
A) federally chartered banks had regulatory advantages not granted to state chartered banks.
B) the number of federally chartered banks grew at a much faster rate than at any other time since the end of the Civil War.
C) banks acquired funds by issuing bank notes.
D) banks were required to maintain 100% of their deposits as reserves.
3) Although the National Bank Act of 1863 was designed to eliminate state chartered banks by imposing a prohibitive tax on banknotes, these banks have been able to stay in business by
A) issuing credit cards.
B) ignoring the regulations.
C) acquiring funds through deposits.
D) branching into other states.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) The U.S. banking system is considered to be a dual system because
A) banks offer both checking and savings accounts.
B) it actually includes both banks and thrift institutions.
C) it is regulated by both state and federal governments.
D) it was established before the Civil War, requiring separate regulatory bodies for the North and South.
2) The Federal Reserve Act of 1913 required that
A) state banks be subject to the same regulations as national banks.
B) national banks establish branches in the cities containing Federal Reserve banks.
C) national banks join the Federal Reserve System.
D) state banks could not join the Federal Reserve System.
3) The Federal Reserve Act required all ________ banks to become members of the Federal Reserve System, while ________ banks could choose to become members of the system.
A) state; national
B) state; municipal
C) national; state
D) national; municipal
4) Probably the most significant factor explaining the drastic drop in the number of bank failures since the Great Depression has been
A) the creation of the FDIC.
B) rapid economic growth since 1941.
C) the employment of new procedures by the Federal Reserve.
D) better bank management.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) With the creation of the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation, member banks of the Federal Reserve System ________ to purchase FDIC insurance for their depositors, while non member commercial banks ________ to buy deposit insurance.
A) could choose; were required
B) could choose; were given the option
C) were required, could choose
D) were required; were required
2) With the creation of the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation,
A) member banks of the Federal Reserve System were given the option to purchase FDIC insurance for their depositors, while non member commercial banks were required to buy deposit insurance.
B) member banks of the Federal Reserve System were required to purchase FDIC insurance for their depositors, while non member commercial banks could choose to buy deposit insurance.
C) both member and non member banks of the Federal Reserve System were required to purchase FDIC insurance for their depositors.
D) both member and non member banks of the Federal Reserve System could choose, but were not required, to purchase FDIC insurance for their depositors.
3) The Glass Steagall Act, before its repeal in 1999, prohibited commercial banks from
A) issuing equity to finance bank expansion.
B) engaging in underwriting and dealing of corporate securities.
C) selling new issues of government securities.
D) purchasing any debt securities.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) The legislation that separated investment banking from commercial banking until its repeal in 1999 is known as the:
A) National Bank Act of 1863.
B) Federal Reserve Act of 1913.
C) Glass Steagall Act.
D) McFadden Act.
2) Which of the following statements concerning bank regulation in the United States are true?
A) The Office of the Comptroller of the Currency has the primary responsibility for state banks that are members of the Federal Reserve System.
B) The Federal Reserve and the state banking authorities jointly have responsibility for the 900 state banks that are members of the Federal Reserve System.
C) The Office of the Comptroller of the Currency has sole regulatory responsibility over bank holding companies.
D) The state banking authorities have sole regulatory responsibility for all state banks.
3) Which bank regulatory agency has the sole regulatory authority over bank holding companies?
A) The FDIC
B) The Comptroller of the Currency
C) The FHLBS
D) The Federal Reserve System
4) State banks that are not members of the Federal Reserve System are most likely to be examined by the
A) Federal Reserve System.
B) FDIC.
C) FHLBS.
D) Comptroller of the Currency.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) State banking authorities have sole jurisdiction over state banks
A) without FDIC insurance.
B) that are not members of the Federal Reserve System.
C) operating as bank holding companies.
D) chartered in the 21st century.
Financial Innovation and the Growth of the “Shadow Banking System”
1) Financial innovations occur because of financial institutions search for ________.
A) profits
B) fame
C) stability
D) recognition
2) ________ is the process of researching and developing profitable new products and services by financial institutions.
A) Financial engineering
B) Financial manipulation
C) Customer manipulation
D) Customer engineering
3) The most significant change in the economic environment that changed the demand for financial products in recent years has been
A) the aging of the baby boomer generation.
B) the dramatic increase in the volatility of interest rates.
C) the dramatic increase in competition from foreign banks.
D) the deregulation of financial institutions.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) In the 1950s the interest rate on three month Treasury bills fluctuated between 1 percent and 3.5 percent; in the 1980s it fluctuated between ________ percent and ________ percent.
A) 5; 15
B) 4; 11.5
C) 4; 18
D) 5; 10
2) Uncertainty about interest rate movements and returns is called ________.
A) market potential
B) interest rate irregularities
C) interest rate risk
D) financial creativity
6) Rising interest rate risk
A) increased the cost of financial innovation.
B) increased the demand for financial innovation.
C) reduced the cost of financial innovation.
D) reduced the demand for financial innovation.
7) Adjustable rate mortgages
A) protect households against higher mortgage payments when interest rates rise.
B) keep financial institutions” earnings high even when interest rates are falling.
C) benefit homeowners when interest rates are falling.
D) generally have higher initial interest rates than on conventional fixed rate mortgages.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) The most important source of the changes in supply conditions that stimulate financial innovation has been the
A) deregulation of financial institutions.
B) dramatic increase in the volatility of interest rates.
C) improvement in computer and telecommunications technology.
D) dramatic increase in competition from foreign banks.
2) New computer technology has
A) increased the cost of financial innovation.
B) increased the demand for financial innovation.
C) reduced the cost of financial innovation.
D) reduced the demand for financial innovation.
3) Credit cards date back to
A) prior to the second World War.
B) just after the second World War.
C) the early 1950s.
D) the late 1950s.
4) A firm issuing credit cards earns income from
A) loans it makes to credit card holders.
B) subsidies from the local governments.
C) payments made to it by manufacturers of the products sold in stores on credit card purchases.
D) sales of the card in foreign countries.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) The declining cost of computer technology has made ________ a reality.
A) brick and mortar banking
B) commercial banking
C) virtual banking
D) investment banking
2) Bank customers perceive Internet banks as being
A) more secure than physical bank branches.
B) a better method for the purchase of long term savings products.
C) better at keeping customer information private.
D) prone to many more technical problems.
3) A disadvantage of virtual banks (clicks) is that
A) their hours are more limited than physical banks.
B) they are less convenient than physical banks.
C) they are more costly to operate than physical banks.
D) customers worry about the security of on line transactions.
4) So called fallen angels differ from junk bonds in that
A) junk bonds refer to newly issued bonds with low credit ratings, whereas fallen angels refer to previously bonds that have had their credit ratings fall below Baa.
B) junk bonds refer to previously bonds that have had their credit ratings fall below Baa, whereas fallen angels refer to newly issued bonds with low credit ratings.
C) junk bonds have ratings below Baa, whereas fallen angels have ratings below C.
D) fallen angels have ratings below Baa, whereas junk bonds have ratings below C.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Out Camping is a manufacturer of supplies and has several divisions, one of which is the tent division that produces the deluxe tent Away From Home. Fourteen thousand of these tents are made each year. This model of tent incorporates two zipping doors in each model. Zippers for these doors are purchased from Zippy Zippers. Out Camping began this year with 500 zippers in inventory, but is now adopting an economic order quantity approach to inventory. A review of last year’s records reveals the following information concerning each order placed with Zippy Zippers: variable labor— $12; variable supplies—$1; fixed computer costs—$4; fixed office expenses—$2; fixed mailing expenses— $2; and fixed supplies—$1. No differences are expected this year. Last year, the cost of carrying one zipper in inventory for the entire year was $1, but Out Camping has recently negotiated a new lease on its warehouse, and the cost of carrying each zipper is now expected to increase by 25 cents. Out Camping also found that it took 7 days from the time an order was sent to Zippy until the zippers were received.
Required
a. Compute economic order quantity.
b. Compute re order point. Presume Out Camping has a desire to reduce its ending inventory to one half of this year’s beginning amount and that the company produces the Away From Home model 140 days each year.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Nautilus Water Pumps, Inc., manufactures automotive water pumps. Since 1988 it has supplied the Big Three (Ford Motor Company, General Motors, and Chrysler) North American auto manufacturers. Nautilus has recently broken into the American made Japanese car market. The company now supplies Toyota, Nissan, and Honda with automotive water pumps for their assembly operations in North America. Conversion Cycle At the start of the year each automobile manufacturer provides Nautilus with an order that is based on budgeted sales predictions. However, this order is guaranteed for only the first month; after that each automobile manufacturer can revise orders on a monthly basis. Nautilus’s current system requires orders for raw material to be placed with suppliers on a quarterly basis. Although the order provides a general idea of what is to be expected, orders from the automobile manufacturers can increase or decrease dramatically after the initial month. Under the current batch production process in the conversion cycle, the auto manufacturer sends the blanket order to the Materials and Operations Requirements Department. In this phase production documents (bills of materials, route sheets) are created and combined with inventory status reports from inventory control and the required engineering specifications from the engineering department to create a purchase requisition. Currently, the production scheduling phase falls under the responsibility of the work center. At the work center, the supervisor in charge prepares work orders, move tickets, and materials requisitions. These documents are sent to the cost accounting department and are also used to create an open work order file. The work center also retains copies of these documents so they can be used to initiate production activities. Under the current system, once production is initiated, any excess material is immediately scrapped. The work center also prepares the necessary timekeeping documents (payroll time card and job tickets) and sends this information to the cost accounting department as well. Upon completion of the production cycle, the production schedule and move tickets are used to close the open work order file, while one copy of the work order is sent to the finished goods warehouse and another is sent to inventory control. At the start of the production phase, a copy of the materials requisition is sent to storekeeping so that the necessary raw materials can be issued to the work center. A copy of the materials requisition is kept on file in storekeeping. Inventory control is involved in the batch production process throughout the entire operation. It releases the inventory status document to production, planning, and control so that materials and operations requirements can be determined. A copy of the materials requisition document is received from storekeeping so that inventory files can be updated. Once files are updated, the materials requisition is sent to cost accounting, while the updated files are also used to prepare a journal voucher that is sent to the general ledger department. A copy of the materials requisition, purchase requisition, and work order documents are kept on file in inventory control. Once the cost accounting department has received all the necessary information from the other departments, the work in process file is updated. All work center documents (move tickets, job tickets, materials requisitions, excess materials, and materials returns), along with a copy of the work order, are filed in the cost accounting department. At the end of the phase, the cost accounting department prepares a journal voucher and sends it to the general ledger department. This journal voucher, along with the one sent by inventory control, is used to update the general ledger. Both journal vouchers are kept on file in the general ledger department.
Required
a. Create a data flow diagram of the current system.
b. Create a system flowchart of the existing system.
c. Analyze the internal control weaknesses in the system. Model your response according to the six categories of physical control activities specified in the SAS 78/COSO control model.
d. Prepare a system flowchart of a redesigned computer based system that resolves the control weaknesses you identified. Explain your solution.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
SAGA Fly Fishing, Inc., is a manufacturer of high quality fly fishing equipment that includes rods, reels, fly lines, nets, drift boats, waders, and other equipment. It also produces low end and moderately priced spinning rods and saltwater fishing equipment, which it sells under a different brand name to protect the high quality image associated with its fly fishing division. Its home office/fly fishing production plant is located near Manchester, New Hampshire. The spinning and saltwater manufacturing plants are in upstate New York. In total, SAGA employs 1,500 workers. SAGA distributes its products worldwide through three distribution centers. Sales are currently $200 million per year and growing. Although equipped with up to date production and shop floor machinery, SAGA’s Manchester plant’s inventory management, production planning, and control procedures employ little computer technology. The process begins in the storekeeping department, where Mr. Holt controls the inventory and maintains the inventory records. He checks daily on the inventory control files to assess the raw material inventory needs and sends an inventory status report to production planning and control. The production planning and control department is led by Mr. Brackenbury. Once the inventory status report is received, as well as the sales forecasts from marketing, Mr. Brackenbury takes a copy of the bill of materials and route sheet and assesses the inventory requirements. If the inventory amounts are adequate, Mr. Brackenbury prepares a production schedule, work order, move tickets, and materials requisitions, which he sends to the work centers. Mr. Brackenbury then sends a purchase requisition to the purchasing and storekeeping departments. Mr. Brackenbury also heads the various work centers, and the supervisors of the different work centers report to him. These supervisors, upon receipt of the aforementioned documents, send the materials requisitions to the storekeeping department, and Mr. Holt sends the necessary materials to the work center. He then files a copy of the materials requisition and updates the raw material inventory ledger. At the end of each day, he sends a copy of the materials requisitions to the cost accounting department. He also sends a journal voucher for the use of materials and a journal voucher for finished goods to the general ledger department. In the work centers, the managers of each center collect the employees’ time cards and send them to cost accounting, along with a copy to payroll. They also send the job and move tickets, which outline the various costs that have been incurred, to cost accounting. Ms. Kay, who heads the cost accounting department, collects all of the data, determines the overall cost, compares it to the standard costs, and determines the variances. Only the total variances are compared; the information is then used to evaluate managers and supervisors of the various departments. Ms. Kay updates the work in process files and finished goods inventory files. She then creates a journal voucher and sends it to the general ledger department. In the general ledger department, the information from the journal vouchers is entered in the general ledger computer program, where the files are updated. The journal vouchers are filed.
Required
a. Create a data flow diagram of the current system.
b. Create a system flowchart of the existing system.
c. Analyze the internal control weaknesses in the system. Model your response according to the six categories of physical control activities specified in the SAS 78/COSO control model.
d. Prepare a system flowchart of a redesigned computer based system that resolves the control weaknesses you identified. Explain your solution.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The production process at General Manufacturing Inc. involves the planning, scheduling, and controlling of the physical products through the manufacturing process. General’s manufacturing process begins in the production planning and control department, where June determines the materials and operations requirements and combines information from various departments to assess inventory requirements needed to produce a product. Marketing provides the sales forecast, engineering provides the engineering specifications, and the storeroom provides the raw material inventory status. June reviews this information to prepare a purchase requisition document, which she sends to purchasing. June then reviews the bill of materials and route sheets and prepares the following documents: work orders, move tickets, and materials requisitions. Three copies of each document are prepared. One copy of the work order, move ticket, and materials requisitions document is sent to cost accounting. The remaining two copies are sent to Mike, the supervisor in the work center. Once Mike receives the production control documents, he initiates the production process. Mike sends a copy of the materials requisitions to the inventory storeroom in exchange for necessary raw material. When additional raw material is needed for a job in process, they are obtained by calling Steve, the storeroom clerk. Materials in excess of those needed for production are kept in the work center and used in the future. When the job passes through all production stages and is complete, Mike sends the finished product to the finished goods warehouse. He files one copy each of the work order, move ticket, and materials requisition and sends the remaining copies of the work order and move ticket to the cost accounting department. One of Mike’s duties is to review the job tickets and the employee timecards, which are sent to cost accounting and payroll, respectively. Steve, in the inventory storeroom, accepts materials requisitions from the work center employees and releases the raw material to the work centers. Steve files a copy of the materials requisitions and updates the raw material inventory records. At the end of the day he creates a journal voucher that is sent to Ronica in the cost accounting department. Ronica receives the following documents: work orders, move tickets, and materials requisitions from the production planning department; job tickets, work orders, and move tickets from the work center; and journal vouchers from the inventory storeroom. Ronica uses these to initiate a work in process account and to update the work in process as work progresses, to calculate variances, and to update the general ledger accounts. Ronica files all documents in the department. Required
a. Create a data flow diagram of the current system.
b. Create a system flowchart of the existing system.
c. Analyze the internal control weaknesses in the system. Model your response according to the six categories of physical control activities specified in the SAS 78/COSO control model.
d. Prepare a system flowchart of a redesigned computer based system that resolves the control weaknesses you identified. Explain your solution.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
In 1983, Mr. Amusement created Bumper Cars, Ltd., a company whose main concern was the manufacture and repair of the exterior shells of bumper cars used in amusement parks. Although the company functioned on a small scale for a few years, it has recently expanded to some new areas, including larger scale amusement parks like Coney Island. Despite the recent increase in business, Bumper Cars still operates as a small company with limited technology invested in computer systems. Many departments run totally manual systems. Because of the expansion, however, Mr. Amusement has taken a serious look at the setup of his company and determined that some problems exist. The most pressing problem is in the area of inventory management and control. Inventory Control Department At Bumper Cars, raw material is stored in a warehouse until it is transferred to the production department for manufacturing. The inventory control department, which consists of three workers employed under the inventory manager, Ms. Coaster, works with the inventory at the raw material stage. Each worker’s responsibilities involve periodic inventory counts, along with the dayto day jobs of storing and transferring inventory. Each day, when the workers transfer the inventory to workin process, they also attempt to keep track of the levels of inventory to inform the purchasing department to reorder if the stock of materials becomes too low. However, in their attempt to achieve efficient and speedy transfers of raw material to manufacturing, the workers find it difficult and inconvenient to constantly check for low levels of inventory. As a result, the inventory frequently runs out before the workers reorder, which causes a gap in raw material needed for production. Production Department The production department receives the goods from inventory control and then puts them into production. Recently, Mr. Ferris, the production manager, complained to the president about the inconvenience caused by the lack of raw material at crucial periods of production. As he stated at an important managerial meeting: ‘‘Each week, we have a certain number of orders that must be filled, along with an indeterminable and changing number of repair requests. When we receive these orders, we immediately start work in order to fill our quotas on time. Lately, however, my workers have been handicapped by the fact that the raw material is not available to put into production at the times we need it. During these lags, production stops, workers become idle, and back orders pile up. Although we inform the inventory control and purchases departments of the problem right away, it still takes time for them to order and get the inventory to the warehouse. Then, it takes even more time for them to get the inventory to us in production. As a result, when we finally receive the necessary materials, my workers are forced to work overtime and at an unreasonable rate to meet demand. This up anddown method of working is bad for general morale in my department. My workers tend to become lazy, expecting a lag to occur. Also, requests for repairs become nearly impossible to fulfill because we never know if the materials needed to fix the problem will be available. Usually we fall so far behind on regular production during these lags that we must concentrate all our efforts just to meet daily demand. As a result, our repair business has dropped steadily over the past year. I feel that these production lags are extremely detrimental to our expanding business, and we should immediately work on finding a solution.’’ Possible Solutions As a result of Mr. Ferris’s complaints, Bumper Cars realized that some changes must be made. Basically, the company determined that both the inventory control and production departments needed reorganization at a reasonable cost. Another managerial meeting of all the department heads took place specifically to discuss this problem. Each manager came to the meeting with his or her own ideas for a possible solution. Mr. Flume, the controller, aggressively suggested that a new companywide computer system be installed. This system would solve the inventory control problems by keeping up todate records of the inventory available at any given time. At the same time, the system could be set up to reduce paperwork in the accounting and finance departments. In addition, this computer could link all the departments and thus alleviate communication breakdowns. Finally, the computer could be linked to the company from which Bumper Cars ordered its inventory, so that as soon as materials became low, it could immediately reorder before a problem developed. At this point in the meeting, the president, Mr. Amusement, jumped up and exclaimed: ‘‘Wait a minute! This system would solve our problems. But as you all know, we are not a large company. The cost of implementing a companywide computer system would be excessive. We would have to consider research, installation, maintenance, and repair costs involved in developing a complex system such as this one. When you take everything into consideration, I’m not sure if the costs would greatly exceed the benefits. Let’s search for some other less costly, but still efficient, solutions.’’ Mr. Ferris, the production manager, then offered a second possible solution. After agreeing that a computer system might be too expensive, he went on to suggest: ‘‘My main problem is meeting demand after a backlog has occurred: another possible solution might be to hire temporary workers to help alleviate the overload problem. These workers would not cost much because they would not receive benefits. Yet they would help solve the immediate problem. They would then be trained for production, so if people leave the production department, it would be easy to find replacements. As a result, production could continue with a minimum of problems and lags.’’ The managers discussed Mr. Ferris’s suggestion for a few minutes. Then Ms. Coaster, the inventory control manager, stood up and offered a third solution for the inventory problems. She explained: ‘‘Although Mr. Ferris’s plan might work, I feel that the real root of the problem lies in my department rather than in the area of production. It seems that the problem is that my employees have too many tasks to perform all at once. Therefore, what we really need are more employees in the inventory control department to continually check and recheck inventory levels. Then my other employees could concentrate solely on the transfer of raw material to production. By this separation of tasks, I feel we could efficiently solve our inventory problems. Also, the cost of hiring a few more people would not be excessive.’’ By the end of the meeting, management still had not made a decision. They had identified the need to reorganize, but they could not decide which approach would be the best for the company.
Required
Using the information about Bumper Cars, Ltd., along with your knowledge, either agree or disagree with the various solutions that the company’s employees suggest.
Discuss what you feel is the best solution for the company’s inventory problem.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Blades R Us is a growing manufacturing firm that produces high pressure turbine blades. The company supplies these to airline companies as replacement parts for use in large commercial jet engines. The high pressure turbine is the segment of the engine that undergoes the most stress and heat. This requires that these parts be replaced frequently, so Blades R Us operates a relatively large firm with constant demand for its products. It operates out of Philadelphia, Pennsylvania, with a workforce of approximately 1,000 employees. Its annual output is based on demand, yet at full capacity, it has the ability to produce 100,000 blades a year. The company’s largest suppliers are casting houses, which take a rough shape of the final product to very demanding specifications given by Blades. Blades R Us then does the final detail work to bring it to Federal Aviation Administration regulations. The general business environment of Blades R Us is one in which it sees expansion in its future. This is because of the recent boom in the commercial airline industry. In addition, with the recent attention to airline safety and the discovery of bogus parts used in engines, the airlines will be doing better checks and needing to replace parts more frequently to ensure safety. Blades R Us has been around for some time, and therefore has no computer operated accounting systems. Some of the problems the company faces include (1) lack of inventory control; (2) keeping track of items in production or production that was completed in 1 day; (3) a need for trends and tracking of the largest customers so that future demand might be more accurate; (4) supervisory issues dealing with theft of parts, near substandard parts, and hiding of scrap; and (5) large inventories on hand of both finished goods and raw material. Procurement Procedures The company reviewed the records associated with the raw material inventory files. Mr. Sampson, the inventory manager, was in charge of this procedure. Once he finished his manual review of the inventory, he issued two purchase requisitions. He kept one of the purchase requisitions in the inventory department, filing it in a cabinet. He sent the second purchase requisition to the purchasing department. Ms. Connolly in the purchasing department took the requisition and completed a purchase order in triplicate. One copy was sent to the supplier, the second was filed in the purchases department filing cabinet, and the third was sent back to Mr. Sampson in the inventory department. Mr. Sampson used this purchase order to update his inventory records so he knew exactly how much inventory was on hand at all times. Once the inventory was updated, the purchase order was put in the filing cabinet in the inventory department with the original purchase requisition. The supplier received the purchase order and sent the requested blades, including a packing slip with the shipment. At the same time shipment was made, the supplier also sent an invoice to the accounts payable department. In receiving, Mr. Hiro simply used the packing slip that was included with the goods to make three copies of the receiving report. The first copy was sent to the purchasing department, where it was filed. The second copy was sent to accounts payable, and Mr. Hiro filed the third copy in the filing cabinet. The accounts payable department filed the receiving report until the invoice from the supplier arrived. Then Mr. Maldonado checked both the receiving report and invoice to make sure everything sent was actually received. Mr. Maldonado then handed off the documents to Mr. Bailey so that he could do the appropriate posting and filing of the checked documents. Mr. Bailey posted the changes to the voucher register and purchases journal, sending a journal voucher to the general ledger department after the purchases journal was updated. Mr. Bailey then put the receiving report and invoice in the appropriate file. Also in accounts payable, Mr. Dresden scanned the records to see when it was time to write checks to the different vendors. Whenever a due date arrived, Mr. Dresden would write a check in two copies. The first copy was filed in the cabinet, and the other was sent to the appropriate vendor. Then Mr. Dresden updated the accounts payable subsidiary ledger and sent an account summary to the general ledger department. The general ledger department was a tight ship. Mr. Callahan received the account summary and journal voucher and then posted the necessary changes to the general ledger. After posting, the documents were filed in the general ledger department. Conversion Cycle Procedures The conversion cycle at Blades R Us begins with the production planning and control department receiving the inventory levels from the finished goods warehouse. If the number of a given part in the finished goods warehouse is below the set minimum, then production for the part is to be run. The production planning and control department gathers the bill of materials and the route sheet for that part and makes up the production schedule and work orders. A copy of the work order, route sheet, bill of materials, and production schedule is filed at the production planning and control department. A copy of the production schedule, work order, and bill of materials is sent to the work centers. Once the work centers receive the paperwork from the production planning and control department, production is initiated. The work order is sent to the finished goods warehouse, and the production schedule and route sheet are filed. Time cards are filled out and given to the payroll department. Materials requisition forms are filled out to attain the necessary materials—one is filed and the other is sent to the inventory control department. When inventory control receives the materials requisition, they send the desired material to the work center, update the inventory records, and then file the material requisition. The inventory control department makes the decision to buy raw material based on a predetermined minimum of parts in inventory and a set order number. The inventory records are periodically reviewed, and when the number of a part in inventory falls below the set minimum, a purchase requisition is completed. One copy is sent to the purchasing department and the other is filed. The purchasing department sends inventory control a purchase order, which it then uses to update its inventory records. The purchase order is then filed. Blades R Us has made the decision to try to become a world class company. It realizes that it will have to make many fundamental changes to achieve this goal. One of the first steps that they have decided to take is to implement a MRP system. They feel this will help them to keep better track of their inventories, work in process, and customer demands and trends. They also realize that there are many weaknesses in the other pieces of their conversion cycles, and they would like to take steps in improving those as well.
Required
a. Create a data flow diagram of the current system.
b. Create a system flowchart of the existing system.
c. Analyze the internal control weaknesses in the system. Model your response according to the six categories of physical control activities specified in the SAS 78/COSO control model.
d. Prepare a system flowchart of a redesigned computer based system that resolves the control weaknesses you identified. Explain your solution.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Automotive Component Corporation (ACC) began in 1979 as a small machine shop supplying the Big Three automakers. The business is now a $2 billion component manufacturing firm. During the three decades from 1979 to 2009, ACC expanded from a common machine shop to a modern manufacturing operation with CNC machines, automatic guided vehicles (AGVs), and a world class quality program. Consequently, ACC’s direct labor cost component has decreased significantly since 1979 from 46 percent to 11 percent. ACC’s current cost structure is as follows:
|
Manufacturing overhead
|
43.6%
|
|
Materials
|
27.1%
|
|
Selling and administrative expenses
|
17.8%
|
|
Labor
|
11.5%
|
Despite efforts to expand, revenues leveled off and margins declined in the late 1980s and early 1990s. ACC began to question its investment in the latest flexible equipment and even considered scrapping some. Bill Brown, ACC’s controller, explains: ‘‘At ACC, we have made a concerted effort to keep up with current technology. We invested in CNC machines to reduce setup time and setup labor and to improve quality. Although we accomplished these objectives, they did not translate to our bottom line. Another investment we made was in AGVs. Our opinion at the time was that the reduction in labor and increased accuracy of the AGVs combined with the CNC machines continue to dwindle, it becomes harder and harder to defend my position.’’ With these sentiments in mind, Bill decided to study the current costing system at ACC in detail. He had attended a seminar recently that discussed some of the problems that arise in traditional cost accounting systems. Bill felt that some of the issues discussed in the meeting directly applied to ACC’s situation. The speaker mentioned that activity based costing (ABC) was a tool that corporations could use to better identify their true product costs. He also mentioned that better strategic decisions could be made based on the information provided from the activity based reports. Bill decided to form an ABC team to look at the prospect of implementing ABC at ACC. The team consisted of two other members: Sally Summers, a product engineer with a finance background, and Jim Schmidt, an industrial engineer with an MBA. Sally had some feelings about the current state of ACC: ‘‘ACC is a very customer focused company. When the automakers demanded small volume orders, we did what we could to change our manufacturing processes. The problem is that no one realized that it takes just as long for the engineering department to design a ten component part and process for a small volume order as it does for a ten component, large volume order. Our engineering departments cannot handle this kind of workload much longer. On top of this, we hear rumors about layoffs in the not too distant future.’’ Jim felt similarly: ‘‘Sally is correct. As an industrial engineer, I get involved in certain aspects of production that are simply not volume dependent. For example, I oversee first run inspections. We run a predetermined number of parts before each full run to ensure the process is under control. Most of the inspections we perform on the automobile components are looking for burrs, which can severely affect fit or function downstream in our assembly process. Many times, we can inspect sample part runs right on the line. The real consumption of resources comes from running a sample batch, not by inspecting each part.’’ To begin its study, the team obtained a cost report from the plant’s cost accountant. A summary of the product costs is as follows:
|
Product Costs
|
|
Product
|
|
101
|
102
|
103
|
|
Material
|
$5.46
|
$4.37
|
$3.09
|
|
Direct labor
|
1.43
|
1.55
|
1.80
|
|
Overhead(labor hour basis)
|
5.44
|
5.89
|
6.85
|
|
Total
|
$12.33
|
$11.81
|
$11.74
|
ACC has been determining product costs basically the same way it did in 1979. Raw material cost is determined by multiplying the number of components by the standard raw material price. Direct labor cost is determined by multiplying the standard labor hours per unit by the standard labor rate per hour. Manufacturing overhead is allocated to product based on direct labor content. The team then applied the traditional 20 percent markup to the three products. This represents the target price that ACC tries to achieve on its products. They then compared the target price to the market price. ACC was achieving its 20 percent target gross margin on Product 101, but not on Products 102 or 103, as illustrated in the following table.
|
Product Costs
|
|
Product
|
|
101
|
102
|
103
|
|
Traditional cost
|
$12.33
|
$11.81
|
$11.74
|
|
Target selling price
|
14.79
|
14.17
|
14.08
|
|
Target gross margin
|
20%
|
20%
|
20%
|
|
Market price
|
$14.79
|
$14.05
|
$13.61
|
|
Actual gross margin
|
20%
|
20%
|
20%
|
Bill was concerned; he remembered the conference he had attended. The speaker had mentioned examples of firms headed in a downward spiral because of a faulty cost system. Bill asked the team, ‘‘Is ACC beginning to show signs of a faulty cost system?’’ Next, the team looked at the manufacturing overhead breakdown (Case 6, Fig. 1). The current cost accounting system allocated 100 percent of this overhead to product based on labor dollars. The team felt ACC could do a better job of tracing costs to products based on transaction volume. Jim explains: ‘‘The manufacturing overhead really consists of the six cost pools shown in Figure 1. Each of these activity cost pools should be traced individually to products based on the proportion of transactions they consume, not the amount of direct labor they consume.’’ The team conducted the following interviews to determine the specific transactions ACC should use to trace costs from activities to products. John ‘‘Bull’’ Adams, the supervisor in charge of material movement, provided the floor layout shown in Figure 2 for Case 6 and commented on his department’s workload: ‘‘Since ACC began accepting small volume orders, we have had our hands full. Each time we design a new part, a new program must be written. Additionally, it seems the new small volume parts we are producing are much more complex than the largevolume parts we produced just a few years ago. This translates into more moves per run. Consequently, we wind up performing AGV maintenance much more frequently. Sometimes I wish we would get rid of those AGVs; our old system of forklifts and operators was much less resistant to change.’’ Sara Nightingale, the most experienced jobsetter at ACC, spoke about the current status of setups: ‘‘The changeover crew has changed drastically recently. Our team has shifted from mostly mechanically skilled maintenance people to a team of highly trained programmers and mechanically skilled people. This shift has greatly reduced our head count. Yet the majority of our work is still spent on setup labor time.’’ Phil Johnson, the shipping supervisor, told the team what he felt drove the activity of the shipping department: ‘‘The volume of work we have at the shipping department is completely dependent on the number of trucks we load. Recently, we have been filling more trucks per day with less volume. Our workload has increased, not decreased. We still have to deal with all of the paperwork and administrative hassles for each shipment. Also, the smaller trucks they use these days are sideloaders, and our loading docks are not set up to handle these trucks. Therefore, it takes us a while to coordinate our docks.’’ Once the interviews were complete, the team went to the systems department to request basic product information on the three products ACC manufactured. The information is shown.
Required
The team has conducted all of the required interviews and collected all of the necessary information in order to proceed with its activity based costing (ABC) pilot study.
a. The first three steps in an activity based cost implementation are to define the resource categories, activity centers, and first stage resource drivers. These steps have already been completed at ACC, and the results are displayed. Using the information from the case, perform the next step for the implementation team and determine the second stage cost drivers ACC should use in its ABC system. Support your choices with discussion.
b. Using the second stage cost drivers identified in part (a), compute the new product costs for Products 101, 102, and 103.
c. Modify Figure 2 for Case 6 and include the cost drivers identified in part (a).
d. Compare the product costs computed under the current cost accounting system to the product costs computed under the activity based system.
e. Explain the differences in product cost.
f. Given the new information provided by the ABC system, recommend a strategy ACC should pursue to regain its margins, and comment on specific improvements that would reduce ACC’s overhead burden in the long run.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Discuss what is meant by the statement, “The accounting system is a conceptual flow of information that represents the physical flows of personnel, raw materials, machinery, and cash through the organization.”
2. Discuss the importance of accounting independence in accounting information systems. Give an example of where this concept is important (use an example other than inventory control).
3. Discuss why it is crucial that internal auditors report solely to the uppermost level of management (either to the chief executive officer or the audit committee of the board of directors) and answer to no other group.
4. Contrast centralized data processing with distributed data processing. How do the roles of systems professionals and end users change? What do you think the trend is today?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) In May 1991, the FDIC announced that it would sell the government”s final 26% stake in Continental Illinois, ending government ownership of the bank that it had rescued in 1984. The FDIC took control of the bank, rather than liquidate it, because it believed that Continental Illinois
A) was a good investment opportunity for the government.
B) could be the Chicago branch of a new governmentally owned interstate banking system.
C) was too big to fail.
D) would become the center of the new midwest region central bank system.
2) If the FDIC decides that a bank is too big to fail, it will use the ________ method, effectively ensuring that ________ depositors will suffer losses.
A) payoff; large
B) payoff; no
C) purchase and assumption; large
D) purchase and assumption; no
3) Federal deposit insurance covers deposits up to $100,000, but as part of a doctrine called “too big to fail” the FDIC sometimes ends up covering all deposits to avoid disrupting the financial system. When the FDIC does this, it uses the
A) “payoff” method.
B) “purchase and assumption” method.
C) “inequity” method.
D) “Basel” method.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) The result of the too big to fail policy is that ________ banks will take on ________ risks, making bank failures more likely.
A) small; fewer
B) small; greater
C) big; fewer
D) big; greater
2) A problem with the too big to fail policy is that it ________ the incentives for ________ by big banks.
A) increases; moral hazard
B) decreases; moral hazard
C) decreases; adverse selection
D) increases; adverse selection
3) The too big to fail policy
A) reduces moral hazard problems.
B) puts large banks at a competitive disadvantage in attracting large deposits.
C) treats large depositors of small banks inequitably when compared to depositors of large banks.
D) allows small banks to take on more risk than large banks.
4) Regulators attempt to reduce the riskiness of banks” asset portfolios by
A) limiting the amount of loans in particular categories or to individual borrowers.
B) encouraging banks to hold risky assets such as common stocks.
C) establishing a minimum interest rate floor that banks can earn on certain assets.
D) requiring collateral for all loans.
27) A well capitalized financial institution has ________ to lose if it fails and thus is ________ likely to pursue risky activities.
A) more; more
B) more; less
C) less; more
D) less; less
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) A bank failure is less likely to occur when
A) a bank holds less U.S. government securities.
B) a bank suffers large deposit outflows.
C) a bank holds fewer excess reserves.
D) a bank has more bank capital.
2) The leverage ratio is the ratio of a bank”s
A) assets divided by its liabilities.
B) income divided by its assets.
C) capital divided by its total assets.
D) capital divided by its total liabilities.
3) To be considered well capitalized, a bank”s leverage ratio must exceed ________.
A) 10%
B) 8%
C) 5%
D) 3%
4) Off balance sheet activities
A) generate fee income with no increase in risk.
B) increase bank risk but do not increase income.
C) generate fee income but increase a bank”s risk.
D) generate fee income and reduce risk.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) The practice of keeping high risk assets on a bank”s books while removing low risk assets with the same capital requirement is know as
A) competition in laxity.
B) depositor supervision.
C) regulatory arbitrage.
D) a dual banking system.
2) Banks engage in regulatory arbitrage by
A) keeping high risk assets on their books while removing low risk assets with the same capital requirement.
B) keeping low risk assets on their books while removing high risk assets with the same capital requirement.
C) hiding risky assets from regulators.
D) buying risky assets from arbitragers.
3) Because banks engage in regulatory arbitrage, the Basel Accord on risk based capital requirements may result in
A) reduced risk taking by banks.
B) reduced supervision of banks by regulators.
C) increased fraudulent behavior by banks.
D) increased risk taking by banks.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) One of the criticisms of Basel 2 is that it is procyclical. That means that
A) banks may be required to hold more capital during times when capital is short.
B) banks may become professional at a cyclical response to economic conditions.
C) banks may be required to hold less capital during times when capital is short.
D) banks will not be required to hold capital during an expansion.
2) Overseeing who operates banks and how they are operated is called ________.
A) prudential supervision
B) hazard insurance
C) regulatory interference
D) loan loss reserves
3) The chartering process is especially designed to deal with the ________ problem, and regular bank examinations help to reduce the ________ problem.
A) adverse selection; adverse selection
B) adverse selection; moral hazard
C) moral hazard; adverse selection
D) moral hazard; moral hazard
4) The chartering process is similar to ________ potential borrowers and the restriction of risk assets by regulators is similar to ________ in private financial markets.
A) screening; restrictive covenants
B) screening; branching restrictions
C) identifying; branching restrictions
D) identifying; credit rationing
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) Banks will be examined at least once a year and given a CAMELS rating by examiners. The L stands for ________.
A) liabilities
B) liquidity
C) loans
D) leverage
2) The federal agencies that examine banks include
A) the Federal Reserve System.
B) the Internal Revenue Service.
C) the SEC.
D) the U.S. Treasury.
3) Banks are required to file ________ usually quarterly that list information on the bank”s assets and liabilities, income and dividends, and so forth.
A) call reports
B) balance reports
C) regulatory sheets
D) examiner updates
4) Regular bank examinations and restrictions on asset holdings help to indirectly reduce the ________ problem because, given fewer opportunities to take on risk, risk prone entrepreneurs will be discouraged from entering the banking industry.
A) moral hazard
B) adverse selection
C) ex post shirking
D) post contractual opportunism
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) Consumer protection legislation includes legislation to
A) reduce discrimination in credit markets.
B) require banks to make loans to everyone who applies.
C) reduce the amount of interest that bank”s can charge on loans.
D) require banks to make periodic reports to the Better Business Bureau.
2) An important factor in producing the subprime mortgage crisis was
A) lax consumer protection regulation.
B) onerous rules placed on mortgage originators.
C) weak incentives for mortgage brokers to use complicated mortgage products.
D) strong incentives for the mortgage brokers to verify income information.
3) Competition between banks
A) encourages greater risk taking.
B) encourages conservative bank management.
C) increases bank profitability.
D) eliminates the need for government regulation.
4) Regulations that reduced competition between banks included
A) branching restrictions.
B) bank reserve requirements.
C) the dual system of granting bank charters.
D) interest rate ceilings.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) The ________ that required separation of commercial and investment banking was repealed in 1999.
A) the Federal Reserve Act.
B) the Glass Steagall Act.
C) the Bank Holding Company Act.
D) the Monetary Control Act.
2) Which of the following is not a reason financial regulation and supervision is difficult in real life?
A) Financial institutions have strong incentives to avoid existing regulations.
B) Unintended consequences may happen if details in the regulations are not precise.
C) Regulated firms lobby politicians to lean on regulators to ease the rules.
D) Financial institutions are not required to follow the rules.
3) Who has regulatory responsibility when a bank operates branches in many countries?
A) It is not always clear.
B) The WTO.
C) The U.S. Federal Reserve System.
D) The first country to submit an application.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) The collapse of the Bank of Credit and Commerce International, BCCI, showed the difficulty of international banking regulation. BCCI operated in more than ________ countries and was supervised by the small country of ________.
A) 70, Luxembourg
B) 100, Monaco
C) 70, Monaco
D) 100, Luxembourg
2) Agreements such as the ________ are attempts to standardize international banking regulations.
A) Basel Accord
B) UN Bank Accord
C) GATT Accord
D) WTO Accord
3) The Basel Committee ruled that regulators in other countries can ________ the operations of a foreign bank if they believe that it lacks effective oversight.
A) restrict
B) encourage
C) renegotiate
D) enhance
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) The government safety net creates both an adverse selection problem and a moral hazard problem. Explain.
The 1980″s Savings and Loan and Banking Crisis
1) In the ten year period 1981 1990, 1202 commercial banks were closed, with a peak of 206 failures in 1989. This rate of failures was approximately ________ times greater than that in the period from 1934 to 1980.
A) two
B) three
C) five
D) ten
2) During the 1960s, 1970s, and early 1980s, traditional bank profitability declined because of
A) financial innovation that increased competition from new financial institutions.
B) a decrease in interest rates to fight the inflation problem.
C) a decrease in deposit insurance.
D) increased regulation that prohibited banks from making risky real estate loans.
3) Moral hazard problems increased in prominence in the 1980s
A) as deregulation required savings and loans and mutual savings banks to be more cautious.
B) following a burst of financial innovation in the 1970s and early 1980s that produced new financial instruments and markets, thereby widening the scope for risk taking.
C) following a decrease in federal deposit insurance from $100,000 to $40,000.
D) as interest rates were sharply decreased to bring down inflation.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) The Depository Institutions Deregulation and Monetary Control Act of 1980
A) restricted thrift institutions to making loans for home mortgages.
B) restricted the use of ATS accounts.
C) imposed restrictive interest rate ceilings on large agricultural loans.
D) increased deposit insurance from $40,000 to $100,000.
2) How did the increase in the interest rates in the early 80s contribute to the S&L crisis?
Banking Crises Throughout the World
1) The evidence from banking crises in other countries indicates that
A) deposit insurance is to blame in each country.
B) a government safety net for depositors need not increase moral hazard.
C) regulatory forbearance never leads to problems.
D) deregulation combined with poor regulatory supervision raises moral hazard incentives.
2) A common element in all of the banking crisis episodes in different countries is
A) the existence of a government safety net.
B) deposit insurance.
C) increased regulation.
D) lack of competition.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Whither Financial Regulation After the Subprime Financial Crisis?
1) All of the following would reduce the agency problems of the originate to distribute model except
A) encouraging more complex mortgage products.
B) more stringent licensing requirements.
C) clearer disclosure of mortgage terms.
D) discouraging borrowers from “getting in over their head.”
2) Higher capital requirements will reduce the problems incurred when troubled ________ which had been off balance sheet activities come back on the balance sheet.
A) structured investment vehicles (SIVs)
B) negotiable CDs
C) Eurodollars
D) Federal funds
3) Currently, Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac are
A) privately owned government sponsored enterprises.
B) privately owned enterprises with no government sponsorship.
C) government agencies.
D) government departments.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) Investment banks that are part of ________ are regulated and supervised like banks.
A) bank holding companies
B) insurance companies
C) Freddie Mac
D) Fannie Mae
2) The inaccurate ratings provided by credit rating agencies
A) meant that investors did not have the information they needed to make informed choices about their investments.
B) were irrelevant since no one pays any attention to them anyway.
C) meant that investors actually took on less risk.
D) will not be a problem when determining capital requirements under Basel 2..
3) The subprime financial crisis showed the need for increased financial regulation, however, too much or poorly designed regulation could
A) choke off financial innovation.
B) increase the efficiency of the financial system.
C) increase economic growth.
D) increase international financial integration.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Savings and Loan Crisis and Its Aftermath
1) Moral hazard and adverse selection problems increased in prominence in the 1980s
A) as deregulation required savings and loans and mutual savings banks to be more cautious.
B) following a burst of financial innovation in the 1970s and early 1980s that produced new financial instruments and markets, thereby widening the scope for risk taking.
C) following a decrease in federal deposit insurance from $100,000 to $40,000.
D) as interest rates were sharply decreased to bring down inflation.
2) The Depository Institutions Deregulation and Monetary Control Act of 1980
A) separated investment banks and commercial banks.
B) restricted the use of ATS accounts.
C) imposed restrictive usury ceilings on large agricultural loans.
D) increased deposit insurance from $40,000 to $100,000.
3) One of the problems experienced by the savings and loan industry during the 1980s was
A) managers lack of expertise to manage risk in new lines of business.
B) heavy regulations in the new areas open to S&Ls.
C) slow growth in lending.
D) close monitoring by the FSLIC.
4) In the early stages of the 1980s banking crisis, financial institutions were especially harmed by
A) declining interest rates from late 1979 until 1981.
B) the severe recession in 1981 82.
C) the disinflation from mid 1980 to early 1983.
D) the increase in energy prices in the early 80s.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) When regulators chose to allow insolvent S&Ls to continue to operate rather than to close them, they were pursuing a policy of ________.
A) regulatory forbearance
B) regulatory kindness
C) ostrich reasoning
D) ignorance reasoning
2) Savings and loan regulators allowed S&Ls to include in their capital calculations a high value for intangible capital called
A) goodwill.
B) salvation.
C) kindness.
D) retribution.
3) Reasons regulators chose to follow regulatory forbearance rather than to close the insolvent S&Ls include all of the following except
A) they had insufficient funds to close all of the insolvent S&Ls.
B) they were friends with the S&L owners.
C) they hoped the problem would go away.
D) they did not have the authority to close the insolvent S&Ls.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) The policy of ________ exacerbated ________ problems as savings and loans took on increasingly huge levels of risk on the slim chance of returning to solvency.
A) regulatory forbearance; moral hazard
B) regulatory forbearance; adverse hazard
C) regulatory agnosticism; moral hazard
D) regulatory agnosticism; adverse hazard
2) Regulatory forbearance
A) meant delaying the closing of “zombie S&Ls” as their losses mounted during the 1980s.
B) had the advantage of benefiting healthy S&Ls at the expense of “zombie S&Ls”, as insolvent institutions lost deposits to health institutions.
C) had the advantage of permitting many insolvent S&Ls the opportunity to return to profitability, saving the FSLIC billions of dollars.
D) increased adverse selection dramatically.
3) The major provisions of the Competitive Equality Banking Act of 1987 include
A) expanding the responsibilities of the FDIC, which is now the sole administrator of the federal deposit insurance system.
B) the establishment of the Resolution Trust Corporation to manage and resolve insolvent thrifts placed in conservatorship or receivership.
C) directing the Federal Home Loan Bank Board to continue to pursue regulatory forbearance.
D) prompt corrective action when a bank gets in trouble.
4) The S&L Crisis can be analyzed as a principal agent problem. The agents in this case, the ________, did not have the same incentive to minimize cost to the economy as the principals, the ________.
A) politicians/regulators; taxpayers
B) taxpayers; politician/regulators
C) taxpayers; bank managers
D) bank managers; politicians/regulators
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) “Bureaucratic gambling” refers to
A) the strategy of thrift managers that they would not be audited by thrift regulators in the 1980s due to the relatively weak bureaucratic power of thrift regulators.
B) the risk that thrift regulators took in publicizing the plight of the S&L industry in the early 1980s.
C) the strategy adopted by thrift regulators of lowering capital requirements and pursuing regulatory forbearance in the 1980s in the hope that conditions in the S&L industry would improve.
D) the risk that regulators took in going to Congress to ask for additional funds.
2) That several hundred S&Ls were not even examined once in the period January 1984 through June 1986 can be explained by
A) Congress”s unwillingness to allocate the necessary funds to thrift regulators.
B) regulators” reluctance to find the specific problem thrifts that they knew existed.
C) slower growth in lending meant that less regulation was needed.
D) Congress”s unwillingness to listen to campaign contributors.
3) The bailout of the savings and loan industry was much delayed and, therefore, much more costly to taxpayers because
A) of regulators” initial attempts to downplay the seriousness of problems within the thrift industry.
B) politicians listened to the taxpayers rather than the S&L lobbyists.
C) Congress did not wait long enough for many of the problems in the thrift industry to correct themselves.
D) regulators could not be fired, therefore, they didn”t care if they did a good job or not.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) An analysis of the political economy of the savings and loan crisis helps one to understand
A) why politicians aided the efforts of thrift regulators, raising regulatory appropriations and encouraging closing of insolvent thrifts.
B) why thrift regulators were so quick to inform Congress of the problems that existed in the thrift industry.
C) why thrift regulators willingly acceded to pressures placed upon them by members of Congress.
D) why politicians listened so closely to the taxpayers they represented.
2) Taxpayers were served poorly by thrift regulators in the 1980s. This poor performance cannot be explained by
A) regulators” desire to escape blame for poor performance, leading to a perverse strategy of “bureaucratic gambling.”
B) regulators” incentives to accede to pressures imposed by politicians, who sought to keep regulators from imposing tough regulations on institutions that were major campaign contributors.
C) Congress”s dogged determination to protect taxpayers from the unsound banking practices of managers at many of the nations savings and loans.
D) politicians strong incentives to act in their own interests rather than the interests of the taxpayers.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) The Federal Home Loan Bank Board and the FSLIC, both of which failed in their regulatory tasks, were abolished by the
A) Competitive Equality Banking Act of 1987.
B) Financial Institutions Reform, Recovery and Enforcement Act of 1989.
C) Office of Thrift Supervision.
D) Office of the Comptroller of the Currency.
2) The Resolution Trust Corporation was created by the FIRREA in order to
A) manage and resolve insolvent S&Ls.
B) build up trust in government regulation.
C) regulate the S&L industry.
D) purchase large amounts of government debt.
3) FIRREA increased the core capital leverage requirement for thrift institutions from 3% to
A) 8%.
B) 5%
C) 10%
D) 25%
4) The Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation Improvement Act of 1991
A) increased the FDIC”s ability to borrow from the Treasury to deal with failed banks.
B) increased the FDIC”s ability to use the too big to fail doctrine.
C) eliminated governmentally administered deposit insurance.
D) eliminated restrictions on nationwide banking.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) The ability to use the too big to fail policy was curtailed by the passage of the FDICIA. To use this action today, the FDIC must get approval of a two thirds majority of both the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve and the directors of the FDIC and also the approval of the ________.
A) Secretary of the Treasury
B) Senate Finance Committee Chairperson
C) President of the United States
D) Governor of the state in which the failed bank is located
2) The directive of prompt corrective action means that
A) the FDIC will intervene earlier and more vigorously when a bank gets into trouble.
B) the banks must take actions quickly to resolve reserve disputes.
C) bank failures cannot occur.
D) there must be an immediate response to an increase in interest rates.
3) FDICIA ________ incentives for banks to hold capital and ________ incentives to take on excessive risk.
A) increased; decreased
B) increased; increased
C) decreased; decreased
D) decreased; increased
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) Which of the following would a bank not hold as insurance against the highest cost of deposit outflow bank failure?
A) Excess reserves
B) Secondary reserves
C) Bank capital
D) Mortgages
2) Which of the following has not resulted from more active liability management on the part of banks?
A) Increased bank holdings of cash items
B) Aggressive targeting of goals for asset growth by banks
C) Increased use of negotiable CDs to raise funds
D) An increased proportion of bank assets held in loans
3) Banks that actively manage liabilities will most likely meet a reserve shortfall by
A) calling in loans.
B) borrowing federal funds.
C) selling municipal bonds.
D) seeking new deposits.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) Modern liability management has resulted in
A) increased sales of certificates of deposits to raise funds.
B) increase importance of deposits as a source of funds.
C) reduced borrowing by banks in the overnight loan market.
D) failure by banks to coordinate management of assets and liabilities.
2) A bank failure occurs whenever
A) a bank cannot satisfy its obligations to pay its depositors and have enough reserves to meet its reserve requirements.
B) a bank suffers a large deposit outflow.
C) a bank has to call in a large volume of loans.
D) a bank is not allowed to borrow from the Fed.
3) A bank is insolvent when
A) its liabilities exceed its assets.
B) its assets exceed its liabilities.
C) its capital exceeds its liabilities.
D) its assets increase in value.
4) Holding large amounts of bank capital helps prevent bank failures because
A) it means that the bank has a higher income.
B) it makes loans easier to sell.
C) it can be used to absorb the losses resulting from bad loans.
D) it makes it easier to call in loans.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) Net profit after taxes per dollar of assets is a basic measure of bank profitability called
A) return on assets.
B) return on capital.
C) return on equity.
D) return on investment.
2) Net profit after taxes per dollar of equity capital is a basic measure of bank profitability called
A) return on assets.
B) return on capital.
C) return on equity.
D) return on investment.
3) The amount of assets per dollar of equity capital is called the
A) asset ratio.
B) equity ratio.
C) equity multiplier.
D) asset multiplier.
4) For a given return on assets, the lower is bank capital,
A) the lower is the return for the owners of the bank.
B) the higher is the return for the owners of the bank.
C) the lower is the credit risk for the owners of the bank.
D) the lower the possibility of bank failure.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) Bank capital has both benefits and costs for the bank owners. Higher bank capital ________ the likelihood of bankruptcy, but higher bank capital ________ the return on equity for a given return on assets.
A) reduces; reduces
B) increases; increases
C) reduces; increases
D) increases; reduces
2) In the absence of regulation, banks would probably hold
A) too much capital, reducing the efficiency of the payments system.
B) too much capital, reducing the profitability of banks.
C) too little capital.
D) too much capital, making it more difficult to obtain loans.
3) Conditions that likely contributed to a credit crunch in 2008 include:
A) capital shortfalls caused in part by falling real estate prices.
B) regulated hikes in bank capital requirements.
C) falling interest rates that raised interest rate risk, causing banks to choose to hold more capital.
D) increases in reserve requirements.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) Which of the following would not be a way to increase the return on equity?
A) Buy back bank stock
B) Pay higher dividends
C) Acquire new funds by selling negotiable CDs and increase assets with them
D) Sell more bank stock
2) If a bank needs to raise the amount of capital relative to assets, a bank manager might choose to
A) buy back bank stock.
B) pay higher dividends.
C) shrink the size of the bank.
D) sell securities the bank owns and put the funds into the reserve account.
Managing Credit Risk 3) Banks face the problem of ________ in loan markets because bad credit risks are the ones most likely to seek bank loans.
A) adverse selection
B) moral hazard
C) moral suasion
D) intentional fraud
4) If borrowers with the most risky investment projects seek bank loans in higher proportion to those borrowers with the safest investment projects, banks are said to face the problem of
A) adverse credit risk.
B) adverse selection.
C) moral hazard.
D) lemon lenders.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) Because borrowers, once they have a loan, are more likely to invest in high risk investment projects, banks face the
A) adverse selection problem.
B) lemon problem.
C) adverse credit risk problem.
D) moral hazard problem.
2) In order to reduce the ________ problem in loan markets, bankers collect information from prospective borrowers to screen out the bad credit risks from the good ones.
A) moral hazard
B) adverse selection
C) moral suasion
D) adverse lending
3) In one sense ________ appears surprising since it means that the bank is not ________ its portfolio of loans and thus is exposing itself to more risk.
A) specialization in lending; diversifying
B) specialization in lending; rationing
C) credit rationing; diversifying
D) screening; rationing
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) A bank that wants to monitor the check payment practices of its commercial borrowers, so that moral hazard can be prevented, will require borrowers to
A) place a bank officer on their board of directors.
B) place a corporate officer on the bank”s board of directors.
C) keep compensating balances in a checking account at the bank.
D) purchase the bank”s CDs.
2) Of the following methods that banks might use to reduce moral hazard problems, the one not legally permitted in the United States is the
A) requirement that firms keep compensating balances at the banks from which they obtain their loans.
B) requirement that firms place on their board of directors an officer from the bank.
C) inclusion of restrictive covenants in loan contracts.
D) requirement that individuals provide detailed credit histories to bank loan officers.
3) When a lender refuses to make a loan, although borrowers are willing to pay the stated interest rate or even a higher rate, the bank is said to engage in
A) coercive bargaining.
B) strategic holding out.
C) credit rationing.
D) collusive behavior.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) When banks offer borrowers smaller loans than they have requested, banks are said to
A) shave credit.
B) rediscount the loan.
C) raze credit.
D) ration credit.
2) Credit risk management tools include
A) deductibles.
B) collateral.
C) interest rate swaps.
D) duration analysis.
3) How can specializing in lending help to reduce the adverse selection problem in lending?
4)Managing Interest Rate Risk Risk that is related to the uncertainty about interest rate movements is called
A) default risk.
B) interest rate risk.
C) the problem of moral hazard.
D) security risk.
5) All else the same, if a bank”s liabilities are more sensitive to interest rate fluctuations than are its assets, then ________ in interest rates will ________ bank profits.
A) an increase; increase
B) an increase; reduce
C) a decline; reduce
D) a decline; not affect
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) If the First National Bank has a gap equal to a negative $30 million, then a 5 percentage point increase in interest rates will cause profits to
A) increase by $15 million.
B) increase by $1.5 million.
C) decline by $15 million.
D) decline by $1.5 million.
2) Measuring the sensitivity of bank profits to changes in interest rates by multiplying the gap times the change in the interest rate is called
A) basic duration analysis.
B) basic gap analysis.
C) interest exposure analysis.
D) gap exposure analysis.
3) Measuring the sensitivity of bank profits to changes in interest rates by multiplying the gap for several maturity subintervals times the change in the interest rate is called
A) basic gap analysis.
B) the maturity bucket approach to gap analysis.
C) the segmented maturity approach to gap analysis.
D) the segmented maturity approach to interest exposure analysis.
10) If interest rates rise by 5 percentage points, say, from 10 to 15%, bank profits (measured using gap analysis) will
A) decline by $0.5 million.
B) decline by $1.5 million.
C) decline by $2.5 million.
D) increase by $1.5 million.
4) Assuming that the average duration of its assets is five years, while the average duration of its liabilities is three years, then a 5 percentage point increase in interest rates will cause the net worth of First National to decline by ________ of the total original asset value.
A) 5 percent
B) 10 percent
C) 15 percent
D) 25 percent
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) If interest rates rise by 5 percentage points, say from 10 to 15%, bank profits (measured using gap analysis) will
A) decline by $0.5 million.
B) decline by $1.5 million.
C) decline by $2.5 million.
D) increase by $2.0 million.
2) Assuming that the average duration of its assets is four years, while the average duration of its liabilities is three years, then a 5 percentage point increase in interest rates will cause the net worth of First National to ________ by ________ of the total original asset value.
A) decline; 5 percent
B) decline; 10 percent
C) decline; 15 percent
D) increase; 20 percent
3) Duration analysis involves comparing the average duration of the bank”s ________ to the average duration of its ________.
A) securities portfolio; non deposit liabilities
B) assets; liabilities
C) loan portfolio; deposit liabilities
D) assets; deposit liabilities
4) Because of an expected rise in interest rates in the future, a banker will likely
A) make long term rather than short term loans.
B) buy short term rather than long term bonds.
C) buy long term rather than short term bonds.
D) make either short or long term loans; expectations of future interest rates are irrelevant.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Your bank has the following balance sheet
|
Assets
|
|
Liabilities
|
|
|
Rate sensitive
|
$100 million
|
Rate sensitive
|
$75 million
|
|
Fixed rate
|
100 million
|
Fixed rate
|
125 million
|
What would happen to bank profits if the interest rates in the economy go down? Is there anything that you could do to keep your bank from being so vulnerable to interest rate movements?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) Examples of off balance sheet activities include
A) loan sales.
B) extending loans to depositors.
C) borrowing from other banks.
D) selling negotiable CDs.
2) All of the following are examples of off balance sheet activities that generate fee income for banks except
A) foreign exchange trades.
B) guaranteeing debt securities.
C) back up lines of credit.
D) selling negotiable CDs.
3) Which of the following is not an example of a backup line of credit?
A) loan commitments
B) overdraft privileges
C) standby letters of credit
D) mortgages
4) Off balance sheet activities involving guarantees of securities and back up credit lines
A) have no impact on the risk a bank faces.
B) greatly reduce the risk a bank faces.
C) increase the risk a bank faces.
D) slightly reduce the risk a bank faces.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) When banks involved in trading activities attempt to outguess markets, they are
A) forecasting.
B) diversifying.
C) speculating.
D) engaging in riskless arbitrage.
2) Traders working for banks are subject to the
A) principal agent problem.
B) free rider problem.
C) double jeopardy problem.
D) exchange risk problem.
3) A reason why rogue traders have bankrupt their banks is due to
A) the separation of trading activities from the bookkeepers.
B) stringent supervision of trading activities by bank management.
C) accounting errors.
D) a failure to maintain proper internal controls.
4) One way for banks to reduce the principal agent problems associated with trading activities is to
A) set limits on the total amount of a traders” transactions.
B) make sure that the person conducting the trades is also the person responsible for recording the transactions.
C) encourage traders to take on more risk if the potential rewards are higher.
D) reduce the regulations on the traders so that they have more flexibility in conducting trades.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) The principal agent problem that exists for bank trading activities can be reduced through
A) creation of internal controls that combine trading activities with bookkeeping.
B) creation of internal controls that separate trading activities from bookkeeping.
C) elimination of regulation of banking.
D) elimination of internal controls.
2) Banks develop statistical models to calculate their maximum loss over a given time period. This approach is known as the
A) stress testing approach.
B) value at risk approach.
C) trading loss approach.
D) doomsday approach.
3) When banks calculate the losses the institution would incur if an unusual combination of bad events happened, the bank is using the ________ approach.
A) stress test
B) value at risk
C) trading loss
D) maximum value
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Duration Gap Analysis
1) Assume a bank has $200 million of assets with a duration of 2.5, and $190 million of liabilities with a duration of 1.05. If interest rates increase from 5 percent to 6 percent, the net worth of the bank falls by
A) $1 million.
B) $2.4 million.
C) $3.6 million.
D) $4.8 million.
2) Assume a bank has $200 million of assets with a duration of 2.5, and $190 million of liabilities with a duration of 1.05. The duration gap for this bank is
A) 0.5 year.
B) 1 year.
C) 1.5 years.
D) 2 years.
3) If interest rates increase from 9 percent to 10 percent, a bank with a duration gap of 2 years would experience a decrease in its net worth of
A) 0.9 percent of its assets.
B) 0.9 percent of its liabilities.
C) 1.8 percent of its liabilities.
D) 1.8 percent of its assets.
4) One of the problems in conducting a duration gap analysis is that the duration gap is calculated assuming that interest rates for all maturities are the same. That means that the yield curve is
A) flat.
B) slightly upward sloping.
C) steeply upward sloping.
D) downward sloping.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Measuring Bank Performance
1) Most of a bank”s operating income results from
A) interest on assets.
B) service charges on deposit accounts.
C) off balance sheet activities.
D) fees from standby lines of credit.
2) All of the following are operating expenses for a bank except
A) service charges on deposit accounts.
B) salaries and employee benefits.
C) rent on buildings.
D) servicing costs of equipment such as computers.
3) When a bank suspects that a $1 million loan might prove to be bad debt that will have to be written off in the future the bank
A) can set aside $1 million of its earnings in its loan loss reserves account.
B) reduces its reported earnings by $1, even though it has not yet actually lost the $1 million.
C) reduces its assets immediately by $1 million, even though it has not yet lost the $1 million.
D) reduces its reserves by $1 million, so that they can use those funds later.
4) For banks,
A) return on assets exceeds return on equity.
B) return on assets equals return on equity.
C) return on equity exceeds return on assets.
D) return on equity is another name for net interest margin.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) Depositors lack of information about the quality of bank assets can lead to ________.
A) bank panics
B) bank booms
C) sequencing
D) asset transformation
2) The fact that banks operate on a “sequential service constraint” means that
A) all depositors share equally in the bank”s funds during a crisis.
B) depositors arriving last are just as likely to receive their funds as those arriving first.
C) depositors arriving first have the best chance of withdrawing their funds.
D) banks randomly select the depositors who will receive all of their funds.
3) Depositors have a strong incentive to show up first to withdraw their funds during a bank crisis because banks operate on a
A) last in, first out constraint.
B) sequential service constraint.
C) double coincidence of wants constraint.
D) everyone shares equally constraint.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) Because of asymmetric information, the failure of one bank can lead to runs on other banks. This is the
A) too big to fail effect.
B) moral hazard problem.
C) adverse selection problem.
D) contagion effect.
2) The contagion effect refers to the fact that
A) deposit insurance has eliminated the problem of bank failures.
B) bank runs involve only sound banks.
C) bank runs involve only insolvent banks.
D) the failure of one bank can hasten the failure of other banks.
3) During the boom years of the 1920s, bank failures were quite
A) uncommon, averaging less than 30 per year.
B) uncommon, averaging less than 100 per year.
C) common, averaging about 600 per year.
D) common, averaging about 1000 per year.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) To prevent bank runs and the consequent bank failures, the United States established the ________ in 1934 to provide deposit insurance.
A) FDIC
B) SEC
C) Federal Reserve
D) ATM
2) The primary difference between the “payoff” and the “purchase and assumption” methods of handling failed banks is
A) that the FDIC guarantees all deposits when it uses the “payoff” method.
B) that the FDIC guarantees all deposits when it uses the “purchase and assumption” method.
C) that the FDIC is more likely to use the “payoff” method when the bank is large and it fears that depositor losses may spur business bankruptcies and other bank failures.
D) that the FDIC is more likely to use the purchase and assumption method for small institutions because it will be easier to find a purchaser for them compared to large institutions.
3) Deposit insurance has not worked well in countries with
A) a weak institutional environment.
B) strong supervision and regulation.
C) a tradition of the rule of law.
D) few opportunities for corruption.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) The government safety net creates ________ problem because risk loving entrepreneurs might find banking an attractive industry.
A) an adverse selection
B) a moral hazard
C) a lemons
D) a revenue
2) Since depositors, like any lender, only receive fixed payments while the bank keeps any surplus profits, they face the ________ problem that banks may take on too ________ risk.
A) adverse selection; little
B) adverse selection; much
C) moral hazard; little
D) moral hazard; much
3) Acquiring information on a bank”s activities in order to determine a bank”s risk is difficult for depositors and is another argument for government ________.
A) regulation
B) ownership
C) recall
D) forbearance
4) The existence of deposit insurance can increase the likelihood that depositors will need deposit protection, as banks with deposit insurance
A) are likely to take on greater risks than they otherwise would.
B) are likely to be too conservative, reducing the probability of turning a profit.
C) are likely to regard deposits as an unattractive source of funds due to depositors” demands for safety.
D) are placed at a competitive disadvantage in acquiring funds.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Dynamics of Financial Crises in Emerging Market Economies
1) Financial crises generally develop along two basic paths:
A) mismanagement of financial liberalization/globalization and severe fiscal imbalances.
B) stock market declines and severe fiscal imbalances.
C) mismanagement of financial liberalization/globalization and stock market declines.
D) stock market declines and unanticipated declines in the value of the domestic currency.
2) In emerging market countries, the deterioration in bank”s balance sheets has more ________ effects on lending and economic activity than in advanced countries.
A) negative
B) positive
C) affirming
D) advancing
3) The mismanagement of financial liberalization in emerging market countries can be understood as a severe ________.
A) principal/agent problem
B) asymmetric information problem.
C) lemons problem.
D) free rider problem.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) Factors likely to cause a financial crisis in emerging market countries include
A) fiscal imbalances.
B) decreases in foreign interest rates.
C) a foreign exchange crisis.
D) too strong oversight of the financial industry.
2) The two key factors that trigger speculative attacks on emerging market currencies are
A) deterioration in bank balance sheets and severe fiscal imbalances.
B) deterioration in bank balance sheets and low interest rates abroad.
C) low interest rates abroad and severe fiscal imbalances.
D) low interest rates abroad and rising asset prices.
3) Severe fiscal imbalances can directly trigger a currency crisis since
A) investors fear that the government may not be able to pay back the debt and so begin to sell domestic currency.
B) the government may stop printing money.
C) the government may have to cut back on spending.
D) the currency must surely increase in value.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) In emerging market countries, many firms have debt denominated in foreign currency like the dollar or yen. A depreciation of the domestic currency
A) results in increases in the firm”s indebtedness in domestic currency terms, even though the value of their assets remains unchanged.
B) results in an increase in the value of the firm”s assets.
C) means that the firm does not owe as much on their foreign debt.
D) strengthens their balance sheet in terms of the domestic currency.
2) A sharp depreciation of the domestic currency after a currency crisis leads to
A) higher inflation.
B) lower import prices.
C) lower interest rates.
D) decrease in the value of foreign currency denominated liabilities.
3) The key factor leading to the financial crises in Mexico and the East Asian countries was
A) a deterioration in banks” balance sheets because of increasing loan losses.
B) severe fiscal imbalances.
C) a sharp increase in the stock market.
D) a sharp decline in interest rates.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) Factors that led to worsening conditions in Mexico”s 1994 1995 financial markets include
A) failure of the Mexican oil monopoly.
B) the ratification of the North American Free Trade Agreement.
C) increased uncertainty from political shocks.
D) decline in interest rates.
2) Factors that led to worsening financial market conditions in East Asia in 1997 1998 include
A) weak supervision by bank regulators.
B) a rise in interest rates abroad.
C) unanticipated increases in the price level.
D) increased uncertainty from political shocks.
3) Factors that led to worsening conditions in Mexico”s 1994 1995 financial markets, but did not lead to worsening financial market conditions in East Asia in 1997 1998 include
A) rise in interest rates abroad.
B) bankers” lack of expertise in screening and monitoring borrowers.
C) deterioration of banks” balance sheets because of increasing loan losses.
D) stock market decline.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) Before the South Korean financial crisis, sales by the top five chaebols (family owned conglomerates) were
A) nearly 50% of GDP.
B) about 10% of GDP.
C) almost 90% of GDP.
D) nearly 25% of GDP.
2) The chaebols encouraged the Korean government to open up Korean financial markets to foreign capital. The Korean government responded by
A) allowing unlimited short term foreign borrowing but maintained quantity restrictions on long term foreign borrowing by financial institutions.
B) allowing unlimited short term and long term foreign borrowing by financial institutions.
C) maintaining quantity restrictions on short term foreign borrowing but allowing unlimited long term foreign borrowing by financial institutions.
D) not allowing any foreign borrowing by financial institutions.
3) At the time of the South Korean financial crisis, the government allowed many chaebol owned finance companies to convert to merchant banks. Finance companies ________ allowed to borrow abroad and merchant banks ________.
A) were not; could borrow abroad
B) were not; could not borrow abroad
C) were; could borrow abroad
D) were; could not borrow abroad
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Bank Balance Sheet
1) Which of the following statements are true?
A) A bank”s assets are its sources of funds.
B) A bank”s liabilities are its uses of funds.
C) A bank”s balance sheet shows that total assets equal total liabilities plus equity capital.
D) A bank”s balance sheet indicates whether or not the bank is profitable.
2) Which of the following statements is false?
A) A bank”s assets are its uses of funds.
B) A bank issues liabilities to acquire funds.
C) The bank”s assets provide the bank with income.
D) Bank capital is recorded as an asset on the bank balance sheet.
3) Which of the following are reported as liabilities on a bank”s balance sheet?
A) Reserves
B) Checkable deposits
C) Loans
D) Deposits with other banks
4) Which of the following are reported as liabilities on a bank”s balance sheet?
A) Discount loans
B) Reserves
C) U.S. Treasury securities
D) Loans
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) The share of checkable deposits in total bank liabilities has
A) expanded moderately over time.
B) expanded dramatically over time.
C) shrunk over time.
D) remained virtually unchanged since 1960.
2) Which of the following statements is false?
A) Checkable deposits are usually the lowest cost source of bank funds.
B) Checkable deposits are the primary source of bank funds.
C) Checkable deposits are payable on demand.
D) Checkable deposits include NOW accounts.
3) In recent years the interest paid on checkable and time deposits has accounted for around ________ of total bank operating expenses, while the costs involved in servicing accounts have been approximately ________ of operating expenses.
A) 45 percent; 55 percent
B) 55 percent; 4 percent
C) 25 percent; 50 percent
D) 50 percent; 30 percent
4) Which of the following statements are true?
A) Checkable deposits are payable on demand.
B) Checkable deposits do not include NOW accounts.
C) Checkable deposits are the primary source of bank funds.
D) Demand deposits are checkable deposits that pay interest.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) Large denomination CDs are ________, so that like a bond they can be resold in a ________ market before they mature.
A) nonnegotiable; secondary
B) nonnegotiable; primary
C) negotiable; secondary
D) negotiable; primary
2) Because ________ are less liquid for the depositor than ________, they earn higher interest rates.
A) money market deposit accounts; time deposits
B) checkable deposits; passbook savings
C) passbook savings; checkable deposits
D) passbook savings; time deposits
3) Because ________ are less liquid for the depositor than ________, they earn higher interest rates.
A) passbook savings; time deposits
B) money market deposit accounts; time deposits
C) money market deposit accounts; passbook savings
D) time deposits; passbook savings
4) Banks acquire the funds that they use to purchase income earning assets from such sources as
A) cash items in the process of collection
B) savings accounts.
C) reserves.
D) deposits at other banks.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) Bank loans from the Federal Reserve are called ________ and represent a ________ of funds.
A) discount loans; use
B) discount loans; source
C) fed funds; use
D) fed funds; source
2) Which of the following is not a source of borrowings for a bank?
A) Federal funds
B) Eurodollars
C) Transaction deposits
D) Discount loans
3) Bank capital is equal to ________ minus ________.
A) total assets; total liabilities
B) total liabilities; total assets
C) total assets; total reserves
D) total liabilities; total borrowings
4) Bank capital is listed on the ________ side of the bank”s balance sheet because it represents a ________ of funds.
A) liability; use
B) liability; source
C) asset; use
D) asset; source
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) Bank reserves include
A) deposits at the Fed and short term treasury securities.
B) vault cash and short term Treasury securities.
C) vault cash and deposits at the Fed.
D) deposits at other banks and deposits at the Fed.
2) The fraction of checkable deposits that banks are required by regulation to hold are
A) excess reserves.
B) required reserves.
C) vault cash.
D) total reserves.
3) Which of the following are reported as assets on a bank”s balance sheet?
A) Borrowings
B) Reserves
C) Savings deposits
D) Bank capital
4) Which of the following are not reported as assets on a bank”s balance sheet?
A) Cash items in the process of collection
B) Deposits with other banks
C) U.S. Treasury securities
D) Checkable deposits
5) Through correspondent banking, large banks provide services to small banks, including
A) loan guarantees.
B) foreign exchange transactions.
C) issuing stock.
D) debt reduction.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) The largest percentage of banks” holdings of securities consist of
A) Treasury and government agency securities.
B) tax exempt municipal securities.
C) state and local government securities.
D) corporate securities.
2) Which of the following bank assets is the most liquid?
A) Consumer loans
B) Reserves
C) Cash items in process of collection
D) U.S. government securities
3) Secondary reserves include
A) deposits at Federal Reserve Banks.
B) deposits at other large banks.
C) short term Treasury securities.
D) state and local government securities.
4) Because of their ________ liquidity, ________ U.S. government securities are called secondary reserves.
A) low; short term
B) low; long term
C) high; short term
D) high; long term
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) Secondary reserves are so called because
A) they can be converted into cash with low transactions costs.
B) they are not easily converted into cash, and are, therefore, of secondary importance to banking firms.
C) 50% of these assets count toward meeting required reserves.
D) they rank second to bank vault cash in importance of bank holdings.
2) Banks” asset portfolios include state and local government securities because
A) their interest payments are tax deductible for federal income taxes.
B) banks consider them helpful in attracting accounts of Federal employees.
C) the Federal Reserve requires member banks to buy securities from state and local
governments located within their respective Federal Reserve districts.
D) there is no default risk with state and local government securities.
3) Bank”s make their profits primarily by issuing ________.
A) equity
B) negotiable CDs
C) loans
D) NOW accounts
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) When Jane Brown writes a $100 check to her nephew (who lives in another state), Ms. Brown”s bank ________ assets of $100 and ________ liabilities of $100.
A) gains; gains
B) gains; loses
C) loses; gains
D) loses; loses
2) When you deposit a $50 bill in the Security Pacific National Bank,
A) its liabilities decrease by $50.
B) its assets increase by $50.
C) its reserves decrease by $50.
D) its cash items in the process of collection increase by $50.
3) When you deposit $50 in currency at Old National Bank,
A) its assets increase by less than $50 because of reserve requirements.
B) its reserves increase by less than $50 because of reserve requirements.
C) its liabilities increase by $50.
D) its liabilities decrease by $50.
4) Holding all else constant, when a bank receives the funds for a deposited check,
A) cash items in the process of collection fall by the amount of the check.
B) bank assets increase by the amount of the check.
C) bank liabilities decrease by the amount of the check.
D) bank reserves increase by the amount of required reserves.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) When a $10 check written on the First National Bank of Chicago is deposited in an account at Citibank, then
A) the liabilities of the First National Bank increase by $10.
B) the reserves of the First National Bank increase by $ 10.
C) the liabilities of Citibank increase by $10.
D) the assets of Citibank fall by $10.
2) When a $10 check written on the First National Bank of Chicago is deposited in an account at Citibank, then
A) the liabilities of the First National Bank decrease by $10.
B) the reserves of the First National Bank increase by $10.
C) the liabilities of Citibank decrease by $10.
D) the assets of Citibank decrease by $10.
3) When you deposit $50 in your account at First National Bank and a $100 check you have written on this account is cashed at Chemical Bank, then
A) the assets of First National rise by $50.
B) the assets of Chemical Bank rise by $50.
C) the reserves at First National fall by $50.
D) the liabilities at Chemical Bank rise by $50.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) When $1 million is deposited at a bank, the required reserve ratio is 20 percent, and the bank chooses not to hold any excess reserves but makes loans instead, then, in the bank”s final balance sheet,
A) the assets at the bank increase by $800,000.
B) the liabilities of the bank increase by $1,000,000.
C) the liabilities of the bank increase by $800,000.
D) reserves increase by $160,000.
2) When $1 million is deposited at a bank, the required reserve ratio is 20 percent, and the bank chooses not to make any loans but to hold excess reserves instead, then, in the bank”s final balance sheet,
A) the assets at the bank increase by $1 million.
B) the liabilities of the bank decrease by $1 million.
C) reserves increase by $200,000.
D) liabilities increase by $200,000.
3) With a 10% reserve requirement ratio, a $100 deposit into New Bank means that the maximum amount New Bank could lend is
A) $90.
B) $100.
C) $10.
D) $110.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
General Principles of Bank Management
1) Which of the following are primary concerns of the bank manager?
A) Maintaining sufficient reserves to minimize the cost to the bank of deposit outflows
B) Extending loans to borrowers who will pay low interest rates, but who are poor credit risks
C) Acquiring funds at a relatively high cost, so that profitable lending opportunities can be realized
D) Maintaining high levels of capital and thus maximizing the returns to the owners.
2) If a bank has $100,000 of checkable deposits, a required reserve ratio of 20 percent, and it holds $40,000 in reserves, then the maximum deposit outflow it can sustain without altering its balance sheet is
A) $30,000.
B) $25,000.
C) $20,000.
D) $10,000.
3) If a bank has $200,000 of checkable deposits, a required reserve ratio of 20 percent, and it holds $80,000 in reserves, then the maximum deposit outflow it can sustain without altering its balance sheet is
A) $50,000.
B) $40,000.
C) $30,000.
D) $25,000.
4) If a bank has $10 million of checkable deposits, a required reserve ratio of 10 percent, and it holds $2 million in reserves, then it will not have enough reserves to support a deposit outflow Of
A) $1.2 million.
B) $1.1 million.
C) $1 million.
D) $900,000.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) If a bank has excess reserves greater than the amount of a deposit outflow, the outflow will result in equal reductions in
A) deposits and reserves.
B) deposits and loans.
C) capital and reserves.
D) capital and loans.
2) A $5 million deposit outflow from a bank has the immediate effect of
A) reducing deposits and reserves by $5 million.
B) reducing deposits and loans by $5 million.
C) reducing deposits and securities by $5 million.
D) reducing deposits and capital by $5 million.
3) Bankers” concerns regarding the optimal mix of excess reserves, secondary reserves, borrowings from the Fed, and borrowings from other banks to deal with deposit outflows is an example of
A) liability management.
B) liquidity management.
C) managing interest rate risk.
D) managing credit risk.
4) If, after a deposit outflow, a bank needs an additional $3 million to meet its reserve requirements, the bank can
A) reduce deposits by $3 million.
B) increase loans by $3 million.
C) sell $3 million of securities.
D) repay its discount loans from the Fed.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) Using T accounts show what happens to reserves at Security National Bank if one individual deposits $1000 in cash into her checking account and another individual withdraws $750 in cash from her checking account.
2) A bank with insufficient reserves can increase its reserves by
A) lending federal funds.
B) calling in loans.
C) buying short term Treasury securities.
D) buying municipal bonds.
3) Of the following, which would be the first choice for a bank facing a reserve deficiency?
A) Call in loans
B) Borrow from the Fed
C) Sell securities
D) Borrow from other banks
4) In general, banks would prefer to acquire funds quickly by ________ rather than ________.
A) reducing loans; selling securities
B) reducing loans; borrowing from the Fed
C) borrowing from the Fed; reducing loans
D) “calling in” loans; selling securities
5) ________ may antagonize customers and thus can be a very costly way of acquiring funds to meet an unexpected deposit outflow.
A) Selling securities
B) Selling loans
C) Calling in loans
D) Selling negotiable CDs
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) Banks hold excess and secondary reserves to
A) reduce the interest rate risk problem.
B) provide for deposit outflows.
C) satisfy margin requirements.
D) achieve higher earnings than they can with loans.
2) Which of the following statements most accurately describes the task of bank asset management?
A) Banks seek the highest returns possible subject to minimizing risk and making adequate provisions for liquidity.
B) Banks seek to have the highest liquidity possible subject to earning a positive rate of return on their operations.
C) Banks seek to prevent bank failure at all cost; since a failed bank earns no profit, liquidity needs supersede the desire for profits.
D) Banks seek to acquire funds in the least costly way.
3) The goals of bank asset management include
A) maximizing risk.
B) minimizing liquidity.
C) lending at high interest rates regardless of risk.
D) purchasing securities with high returns and low risk.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) Banks that suffered significant losses in the 1980s made the mistake of
A) holding too many liquid assets.
B) minimizing default risk.
C) failing to diversify their loan portfolio.
D) holding only safe securities.
2) A bank will want to hold more excess reserves (everything else equal) when
A) it expects to have deposit inflows in the near future.
B) brokerage commissions on selling bonds increase.
C) the cost of selling loans falls.
D) the discount rate decreases.
3) As the costs associated with deposit outflows ________, the banks willingness to hold excess reserves will ________.
A) decrease; increase
B) increase; decrease
C) increase; increase
D) decrease; not be affected
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) How does collateral help to reduce the adverse selection problem in credit market?
How Moral Hazard Affects the Choice Between Debt and Equity Contracts
1) Equity contracts
A) are claims to a share in the profits and assets of a business.
B) have the advantage over debt contracts of a lower costly state verification.
C) are used much more frequently to raise capital than are debt contracts.
D) are not subject to the moral hazard problem.
2) A problem for equity contracts is a particular type of ________ called the ________ problem.
A) adverse selection; principal agent
B) moral hazard; principal agent
C) adverse selection; free rider
D) moral hazard; free rider
3) Moral hazard in equity contracts is known as the ________ problem because the manager of the firm has fewer incentives to maximize profits than the stockholders might ideally prefer.
A) principal agent
B) adverse selection
C) free rider
D) debt deflation
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) Managers (________) may act in their own interest rather than in the interest of the stockholder owners (________) because the managers have less incentive to maximize profits than the stockholder owners do.
A) principals; agents
B) principals; principals
C) agents; agents
D) agents; principals
2) The principal agent problem
A) occurs when managers have more incentive to maximize profits than the stockholders owners do.
B) in financial markets helps to explain why equity is a relatively important source of finance for American business.
C) would not arise if the owners of the firm had complete information about the activities of the managers.
D) explains why direct finance is more important than indirect finance as a source of business finance.
3) The recent Enron and Tyco scandals are an example of
A) the free rider problem.
B) the adverse selection problem.
C) the principal agent problem.
D) the “lemons problem.”
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) The name economists give the process by which stockholders gather information by frequent monitoring of the firm”s activities is
A) costly state verification.
B) the free rider problem.
C) costly avoidance.
D) debt intermediation.
2) Because information is scarce
A) helps explain why equity contracts are used so much more frequently to raise capital than are debt contracts.
B) monitoring managers gives rise to costly state verification.
C) government regulations, such as standard accounting principles, have no impact on problems such as moral hazard.
D) developing nations do not rely heavily on banks for business financing.
3) Government regulations designed to reduce the moral hazard problem include
A) laws that force firms to adhere to standard accounting principles.
B) light sentences for those who commit the fraud of hiding and stealing profits.
C) state verification subsidies.
D) state licensing restrictions.
4) One financial intermediary in our financial structure that helps to reduce the moral hazard from arising from the principal agent problem is the
A) venture capital firm.
B) money market mutual fund.
C) pawn broker.
D) savings and loan association.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) A venture capital firm protects its equity investment from moral hazard through which of the following means?
A) It places people on the board of directors to better monitor the borrowing firm”s activities.
B) It writes contracts that prohibit the sale of an equity investment to the venture capital firm.
C) It prohibits the borrowing firm from replacing its management.
D) It requires a 50% stake in the company.
2) Equity contracts account for a small fraction of external funds raised by American businesses because
A) costly state verification makes the equity contract less desirable than the debt contract.
B) of the reduced scope for moral hazard problems under equity contracts, as compared to debt contracts.
C) equity contracts do not permit borrowing firms to raise additional funds by issuing debt.
D) there is no moral hazard problem when using a debt contract.
3) Debt contracts
A) are agreements by the borrowers to pay the lenders fixed dollar amounts at periodic intervals.
B) have a higher cost of state verification than equity contracts.
C) are used less frequently to raise capital than are equity contracts.
D) never result in a loss for the lender.
4) Since they require less monitoring of firms, ________ contracts are used more frequently than ________ contracts to raise capital.
A) debt; equity
B) equity; debt
C) debt; loan
D) equity; stock
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) One way of describing the solution that high net worth provides to the moral hazard problem is to say that it
A) collateralizes the debt contract.
B) makes the debt contract incentive compatible.
C) state verifies the debt contract.
D) removes all of the risk in the debt contract.
2) A clause in a debt contract requiring that the borrower purchase insurance against loss of the asset financed with the loan is called a
A) collateral insurance clause.
B) prescription covenant.
C) restrictive covenant.
D) proscription covenant.
3) Professional athletes often have contract clauses prohibiting risky activities such as skiing and motorcycle riding. These clauses are
A) limited liability clauses.
B) risk insurance.
C) restrictive covenants.
D) illegal.
4) For restrictive covenants to help reduce the moral hazard problem they must be ________ by the lender.
A) monitored and enforced
B) written in all capitals
C) easily changed
D) impossible to remove
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) Although restrictive covenants can potentially reduce moral hazard, a problem with restrictive covenants is that
A) borrowers may find loopholes that make the covenants ineffective.
B) they are inexpensive to monitor and enforce.
C) too many resources may be devoted to monitoring and enforcing them, as debtholders duplicate others” monitoring and enforcement efforts.
D) they reduce the value of the debt contract.
2) Solutions to the moral hazard problem include
A) low net worth.
B) monitoring and enforcement of restrictive covenants.
C) greater reliance on equity contracts and less on debt contracts.
D) greater reliance on debt contracts than financial intermediaries.
3) A key finding of the economic analysis of financial structure is that
A) the existence of the free rider problem for traded securities helps to explain why banks play a predominant role in financing the activities of businesses.
B) while free rider problems limit the extent to which securities markets finance some business activities, nevertheless the majority of funds going to businesses are channeled through securities markets.
C) given the great extent to which securities markets are regulated, free rider problems are not of significant economic consequence in these markets.
D) economists do not have a very good explanation for why securities markets are so heavily regulated.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) One reason financial systems in developing and transition countries are underdeveloped is
A) they have weak links to their governments.
B) they make loans only to nonprofit entities.
C) the legal system may be poor making it difficult to enforce restrictive covenants.
D) the accounting standards are too stringent for the banks to meet.
2) One reason China has been able to grow so rapidly even though its financial development is still in its early stages is
A) the high savings rate of around 40%.
B) the shift of labor to the agricultural sector.
C) the stringent enforcement of financial contracts.
D) the ease of obtaining high quality information about creditors.
3) Why does the free rider problem occur in the debt market?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Conflicts of Interest
1) The presence of economies of scope may benefit financial institutions but may create potential costs from ________.
A) conflicts of interest
B) multiple profitable enterprises
C) economies of scale
D) unsecured debt
2) Because conflicts of interest increase asymmetric information problems
A) the economy will not operate as efficiently.
B) loans will not be made.
C) banks will not be able to make a profit.
D) the financial markets will operate more smoothly.
3) Investment banks ________ companies issuing securities and ________ these securities by selling them to the public on behalf of the issuing companies.
A) research; underwrite
B) research; monitor
C) monitor; underwrite
D) monitor; manipulate
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) A conflict of interest arises in investment banking because the banks are attempting to simultaneously serve two client groups
A) the security issuing firms and the security buying investors.
B) the government and the stockholders.
C) the government and the security issuing firms.
D) the security issuing firms and the lawyers.
2) The practice of ________ is allocating initially underpriced initial public offerings to executives in companies the investment bank hopes to do underwriting business with in the future.
A) discounting
B) spinning
C) peppering
D) wiring
3) A conflict of interest can occur for accounting firms when the firms both
A) provide auditing services and nonaudit consulting services.
B) provide nonaudit services and tax advice.
C) enter data and record data.
D) monitor data and underwrite securities.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) Credit rating agencies may face a conflict of interest because they
A) both advise clients on how to structure debt issues and determine the creditworthiness of the debt issues.
B) underwrite securities and advise clients on how to structure debt issues.
C) underwrite securities and determine the creditworthiness of the debt issues.
D) both advise clients on how to structure debt issues and write restrictive covenants.
2) The fact that the credit rating agencies both advised clients on how to structure the financial instruments that paid out cash flows from subprime mortgages and also rated these financial instruments contributed to the
A) subprime financial crisis that began in 2007.
B) Enron collapse.
C) demise of Arthur Andersen.
D) technology bust.
3) All of the following are credit rating agency reforms proposed by the SEC in 2008 except
A) prohibit credit rating agencies from structuring the same products that they rate.
B) disclose historical ratings performance.
C) differentiate the ratings on structured products from those issued on bonds.
D) sever links between research and securities underwriting.
4) The Sarbanes Oxley Act of 2002 increased supervisory oversight by
A) giving the FDIC the authority to review independent audits.
B) increasing the SEC”s budget to supervise securities markets.
C) creating a new Department of Conflict Resolution.
D) reducing the penalties for obstruction of an official investigation.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) While Sarbanes Oxley is designed to reduce the problems caused by conflicts of interest critics say that it might diminish economies of scope and
A) reduce information in financial markets.
B) encourage IPOs in the U.S.
C) encourage smaller firms to list on the U.S. financial markets.
D) increase U.S. capital markets relative to those abroad.
2) The Global Legal Settlement of 2002 required investment banks to separate ________ and ________.
A) research; securities underwriting
B) deposits; securities underwriting
C) research; legal analysis
D) deposits; legal analysis
3) What three types of financial service activities have led to serious conflict of interest problems in financial markets in recent years?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Factors Causing Financial Crises
1) A major disruption in financial markets characterized by sharp declines in asset prices and firm failures is called a
A) financial crisis.
B) fiscal imbalance.
C) free rider problem.
D) “lemons” problem.
2) A financial crisis occurs when an increase in asymmetric information from a disruption in the financial system
A) causes severe adverse selection and moral hazard problems that make financial markets incapable of channeling funds efficiently.
B) allows for a more efficient use of funds.
C) increases economic activity.
D) reduces uncertainty in the economy and increases market efficiency.
3) A serious consequence of a financial crisis is
A) a contra ction in economic activity.
B) an increase in asset prices.
C) financial engineering.
D) financial globalization.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) A sharp decline in the stock market means that the ________ of corporations has fallen making lenders ________ willing to lend.
A) net worth; less
B) net worth; more
C) liability; less
D) liability; more
2) A sharp stock market decline increases moral hazard incentives
A) since borrowing firms have less to lose if their investments fail.
B) because it is immoral to profit from someone”s loss.
C) since lenders are more willing to make loans.
D) reducing uncertainty in the economy and increasing market efficiency.
3) An unanticipated decline in the price level increases the burden of debt on borrowing firms but does not raise the real value of borrowing firms” assets. The result is
A) that net worth in real terms declines.
B) that adverse selection and moral hazard problems are reduced.
C) an increase in the real net worth of the borrowing firm.
D) an increase in lending.
4) If debt contracts are denominated in foreign currency, then an unanticipated decline in the value of the domestic currency results in
A) a decline in a firm”s net worth.
B) an increase in a firm”s net worth.
C) a decrease in adverse selection and moral hazard.
D) an increase in willingness to lend.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) Factors that lead to worsening conditions in financial markets include:
A) declining interest rates.
B) unanticipated increases in the price level.
C) the deterioration in banks” balance sheets.
D) increases in bond prices.
2) In a bank panic, the source of contagion is the
A) free rider problem.
B) too big to fail problem.
C) transactions cost problem.
D) asymmetric information problem.
3) A bank panic can lead to a severe contraction in economic activity due to
A) a decline in international trade.
B) the losses of bank shareholders.
C) the losses of bank depositors.
D) a decline in lending for productive investment.
4) In addition to having a direct effect on increasing adverse selection problems, increases in interest rates also promote financial crises by ________ firms” and households” interest payments, thereby ________ their cash flow.
A) increasing; increasing
B) increasing; decreasing
C) decreasing; decreasing
D) decreasing; increasing
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Dynamics of Past U.S. Financial Crises
1) When financial institutions go on a lending spree and expand their lending at a rapid pace they are participating in a
A) credit boom.
B) credit bust.
C) deleveraging.
D) market race.
2) When the value of loans begins to drop, the net worth of financial institutions falls causing them to cut back on lending in a process called
A) deleveraging.
B) releveraging.
C) capitulation.
D) deflation.
3) When financial intermediaries deleverage, firms cannot fund investment opportunities resulting in
A) a contraction of economic activity.
B) an economic boom.
C) an increased opportunity for growth.
D) a call for government regulation.
4) A credit boom can lead to a(n) ________ such as we saw in the tech stock market in the late
1990s.
A) asset price bubble
B) liability war
C) decline in lending
D) decrease in moral hazard
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) Debt deflation occurs when
A) an economic downturn causes the price level to fall and a deterioration in firms” net worth because of the increased burden of indebtedness.
B) rising interest rates worsen adverse selection and moral hazard problems.
C) lenders reduce their lending due to declining stock prices (equity deflation) that lowers the value of collateral.
D) corporations pay back their loans before the scheduled maturity date.
2) A substantial decrease in the aggregate price level that reduces firms” net worth may stall a recovery from a recession. This process is called
A) debt deflation.
B) moral hazard.
C) insolvency.
D) illiquidity.
3) A possible sequence for the three stages of a financial crisis in the U.S. might be ________ leads to ________ leads to ________.
A) asset price declines; banking crises; unanticipated decline in price level
B) unanticipated decline in price level; banking crises; increase in interest rates
C) banking crises; increase in interest rates; unanticipated decline in price level
D) banking crises; increase in uncertainty; increase in interest rates
4) The economy recovers quickly from most recessions, but the increase in adverse selection and moral hazard problems in the credit markets caused by ________ led to the severe economic contraction known as The Great Depression.
A) debt deflation
B) illiquidity
C) an improvement in banks” balance sheets
D) increases in bond prices
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Subprime Financial Crisis of 2007 2008
1) Financial innovations that emerged after 2000 in the mortgage markets included all of the following except
A) adjustable rate mortgages.
B) subprime mortgages.
C) Alt A mortgages.
D) mortgage backed securities.
2) ________ is a process of bundling together smaller loans (like mortgages) into standard debt securities.
A) Securitization
B) Origination
C) Debt deflation
D) Distribution
3) A ________ pays out cash flows from subprime mortgage backed securities in different tranches, with the highest rated tranch paying out first, while lower ones paid out less if there were losses on the mortgage backed securities.
A) Collateralized debt obligation (CDO)
B) Adjustable rate mortgage
C) Negotiable CD
D) Discount bond
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) The growth of the subprime mortgage market led to
A) increased demand for houses and helped fuel the boom in housing prices.
B) a decline in the housing industry because of higher default risk.
C) a decrease in home ownership as investors chose other assets over housing.
D) decreased demand for houses as the less credit worthy borrowers could not obtain residential mortgages.
2) The originate to distribute business model has a serious ________ problem since the mortgage broker has little incentive to make sure that the mortgagee is a good credit risk.
A) principal agent
B) debt deflation
C) democratization of credit
D) collateralized debt
3) Mortgage brokers often did not make a strong effort to evaluate whether the borrower could pay off the loan. This created a
A) severe adverse selection problem.
B) decline in mortgage applications.
C) call to deregulate the industry.
D) decrease in the demand for houses.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) Agency problems in the subprime mortgage market included all of the following except
A) homeowners could refinance their houses with larger loans when their homes appreciated in value.
B) mortgage originators had little incentives to make sure that the mortgage is a good credit risk.
C) underwriters of mortgage backed securities had weak incentives to make sure that the holders of the securities would be paid back.
D) the evaluators of securities , the credit rating agencies, were subject to conflicts of interest.
2) When housing prices began to decline after their peak in 2006, many subprime borrowers found that their mortgages were “underwater.” This meant that
A) the value of the house fell below the amount of the mortgage.
B) the basement flooded since they could not afford to fix the leaky plumbing.
C) the roof leaked during a rainstorm.
D) the amount that they owed on their mortgage was less than the value of their house.
3) Although the subprime mortgage market problem began in the United States, the first indication of the seriousness of the crisis began in
A) Europe.
B) Australia.
C) China.
D) South America.
4) Like a CDO, a structured investment vehicle pays off cash flows from pools of assets, however, rather than long term debt the structured investment vehicle backs
A) commercial paper.
B) Treasury notes.
C) corporate bonds.
D) municipal bonds.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) Which investment bank filed for bankruptcy on September 15, 2008 making it the largest bankruptcy filing in U.S. history?
A) Lehman Brothers
B) Merrill Lynch
C) Bear Stearns
D) Goldman Sachs
2) The largest bank failure in U.S. history was ________ which went into receivership by the FDIC on September 25, 2008.
A) Washington Mutual
B) Bank of America
C) J.P. Morgan
D) Wells Fargo
3) Credit market problems of adverse selection and moral hazard increased as a result of all of the following except
A) increase in housing market prices.
B) increased uncertainty from the failures of financial institutions.
C) deterioration in financial institutions” balance sheets.
D) decline in the stock market of over 40% from its peak.
4) The Economic Recovery Act of 2008 had several provisions to promote recovery from the subprime financial crisis. These provisions included all of the following except
A) guaranteed all the deposits of the commercial banks.
B) purchase of subprime mortgage assets from troubled financial institutions by the Treasury.
C) temporarily raised the limit of the federal deposit insurance from $100,000 to $250,000.
D) guarantee of par value for money market mutual fund shares for one year by the Treasury.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
SPECIALTY RETAILER
|
CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEETS ($ in millions, except per share and share amounts)
|
| |
February 28, 2009
|
March 1, 2008
|
|
Assets (continued)
|
|
|
|
Current Assets
|
|
|
|
Cash and cash equivalents
|
$498
|
$1,438
|
|
Short term investments
|
11
|
64
|
|
Receivables
|
1,868
|
549
|
|
Merchandise inventories
|
4,753
|
4,708
|
|
Other current assets
|
1,062
|
583
|
|
Total current assets
|
8,192
|
7,342
|
|
Property and Equipment
|
|
|
|
Land and building
|
755
|
732
|
|
Leasehold improvements
|
2,013
|
1,752
|
|
Fixtures and equipment
|
4,060
|
3,057
|
|
Property under capital lease
|
112
|
67
|
|
Less accumulated depreciation
|
6,940
|
5,608
|
|
Net property and equipment
|
2,766
|
2,302
|
|
Goodwill
|
4,174
|
3,306
|
| |
2,203
|
1,088
|
|
Assets
|
|
|
|
Tradenames
|
173
|
97
|
|
Customer Relationships
|
322
|
5
|
|
Equity and Other Investments
|
395
|
605
|
|
Other Assets
|
367
|
315
|
|
Total Assets
|
$15,826
|
$12,758
|
Property under capital lease is comprised of buildings and equipment used in our retail operations and corporate support functions. The related depreciation for capital lease assets is included in depreciation expense. The carrying value of property under capital lease was $68 and $54 at February 28, 2009, and March 1, 2008, respectively, net of accumulated depreciation of $44 and $13, respectively.
Estimated useful lives by major asset category are as follows:
|
Asset
|
Life (in years)
|
|
Buildings
|
25–50
|
|
Leasehold improvements
|
3–25
|
|
Fixtures and equipment
|
3–20
|
|
Property under capital lease
|
2–20
|
Required
a. 1. What is the balance in receivables at February 28, 2009 and March 1, 2008
2. Comment on the trend in receivables.
3. What is the balance in merchandize inventories at February 28, 2009 and March 1, 2008?
4. Comment on the trend in merchandise inventories.
5. Speculate on what the trend in receivable indicates vs. the trend in merchandise inventories.
b. 1. What does it mean to have a consolidated balance sheet?
2. Comment on the consolidation policy.
c. Comment on the use of estimates.
d. Comment on the fiscal year.
e. Cash and cash equivalents—are they presented conservatively?
f. 1. Comment on the inventory loss reserve.
2. What depreciation methods are generally used for income tax purposes?
3. Why the difference in depreciation between financial reporting and tax purposes?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
OUR PRINCIPAL ASSET IS OUR PEOPLE
Dana Corporation included the following in its 2001 financial report:
Foundation Business: Focused Excellence
Dana’s foundation businesses are: axles, drive shafts, structures, brake and chassis products, fluid systems, filtration products, and bearing and sealing products.
These products hold strong market positions—number one or two in the markets they serve. They provide value added manufacturing, are technically advanced, and each has features that are unique and patented.
Management Statement (in Part)
We believe people are Dana’s most important asset. The proper selection, training, and development of our people as a means of ensuring that effective internal controls are fair, uniform reporting are maintained as standard practice throughout the Company.
Required
a. Dana states that ‘‘We believe people are Dana’s most important asset.’’ Currently, generally accepted accounting principles do not recognize people as an asset. Speculate on why people are not considered to be an asset.
b. Speculate on what concept of an asset Dana is considering when it states ‘‘We believe people are Dana’s most important asset./p>
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
CANADIAN GAAP VS. U.S. GAAP
Shaw Communications included Note 21 ‘‘United States Generally Accepted Accounting Principles’’ in its 2008 annual report.
|
SHAW COMMUNICATIONS INC.* NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENS (In Part) August 31, 2008, 2007, and 2006 (All amounts in thousands of Canadian dollars except share and per share amounts) Consolidated Balance sheet items using U.S. GAAP
|
| |
2008
|
|
2007
|
|
| |
Canadian GAAP$
|
US GAAP$
|
Canadian GAAP$
|
US GAAP$
|
|
Property, plant, and equipment(11)
|
2,616,500
|
2,622,877
|
2,422,900
|
2,425,144
|
|
Deferred charges(2)(9)
|
274,666
|
175,818
|
278,525
|
170,881
|
|
Broadcast rights(1)(5)(6)
|
4,776,078
|
4,750,844
|
4,776,078
|
4,750,844
|
|
Long term debt(2)
|
2,706,534
|
2,731,404
|
2,771,316
|
2,771,316
|
|
Other long term liability(10)
|
78,912
|
183,347
|
56,844
|
157,043
|
|
Derivative instruments(8)
|
518,856
|
518,856
|
—
|
526,679
|
|
Deferred credits(2)(3)(9)
|
687,836
|
685,349
|
1,151,724
|
687,913
|
|
Future income taxes
|
1,281,826
|
1,215,566
|
1,327,914
|
1,271,791
|
|
Shareholders’ equity:
|
|
|
|
|
|
Share capital
|
2,063,431
|
2,063,431
|
2,053,160
|
2,053,160
|
|
Contributed surplus
|
23,027
|
23,027
|
8,700
|
8,700
|
|
Retained earnings (deficit)
|
226,408
|
121,169
|
68,132
|
178,652
|
|
Accumulated other comprehensive income (loss)
|
57,674
|
130,698
|
312
|
126,746
|
|
Total shareholders’ equity
|
2,255,192
|
2,076,929
|
1,994,040
|
1,756,462
|
The cumulative effect of these adjustments on consolidated shareholders’ equity is as follows:
| |
2008 $
|
2007 $
|
|
Shareholders’ equity using Canadian GAAP
|
2,255,192
|
1,994,040
|
|
Amortization of intangible assets(1)
|
130,208
|
130,208
|
|
Deferred charges and credits(2)
|
19,989
|
4,215
|
|
Equity in loss of investees(4)
|
35,710
|
35,710
|
|
Gain on sale of subsidiary(5)
|
16,052
|
16,052
|
|
Gain on sale of cable systems(6)
|
50,063
|
50,063
|
|
Foreign exchange gains on hedged long term debt(3)
|
—
|
386,075
|
|
Reclassification of hedge losses from other comprehensive income(8)
|
—
|
386,075
|
|
Capitalized interest(11)
|
4,623
|
1,566
|
|
Income taxes(12)(13)
|
9,930
|
8,068
|
|
Accumulated other comprehensive loss
|
73,024
|
127,058
|
|
Shareholders’ equity using US GAAP
|
2,076,929
|
1,756,462
|
Required
a. In your opinion, is there a material difference between shareholders’ equity at the end of 2008 using Canadian GAAP vs. U.S. GAAP? Comment.
b. The disclosure indicates ‘‘all amounts in thousands of Canadian dollars except share and per share amounts.’’ In your opinion, does this present a challenge to U.S. investors?
Note: Canada is scheduled to adopt IFRS for their 2011 financial statements.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following information for Decher Automotives covers the year ended 2010:
|
Administrative expense
|
$62,000
|
|
Dividend income
|
10,000
|
|
Income taxes
|
100,000
|
|
Interest expense
|
20,000
|
|
Merchandise inventory, 1/1
|
650,000
|
|
Merchandise inventory, 12/31
|
440,000
|
|
Flood loss (net of tax)
|
30,000
|
|
Purchases
|
460,000
|
|
Sales
|
1,000,000
|
|
Selling expenses
|
43,000
|
Required
a. Prepare a multiple step income statement.
b. Assuming that 100,000 shares of common stock are outstanding, calculate the earnings per share before extraordinary items and the net earnings per share.
c. Prepare a single step income statement.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following information for Lesky Corporation covers the year ended December 31, 2010:
|
LESKY CORPORATION Income Statement For the Year Ended December 31, 2010
|
|
Revenue:
|
|
|
|
Revenues from sales
|
|
$362,000
|
|
Rental income
|
|
1,000
|
|
Interest
|
|
2,400
|
|
Total revenue
|
|
365,400
|
|
Expenses:
|
|
|
|
Cost of products sold
|
$242,000
|
|
|
Selling expenses
|
47,000
|
|
|
Administrative and general expenses
|
11,400
|
|
|
Interest expense
|
2,200
|
|
|
Federal and state income taxes
|
20,300
|
|
|
Total expenses
|
|
322,900
|
|
Net income
|
|
$42,500
|
Required Change this statement to a multiple step format, as illustrated in this chapter.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following items are from Taperline Corporation on December 31, 2010. Assume a flat 40% corporate tax rate on all items, including the casualty loss.
|
Sales
|
$670,000
|
|
Rental income
|
3,600
|
|
Gain on the sale of fixed assets
|
3,000
|
|
General and administrative expenses
|
110,000
|
|
Selling expenses
|
97,000
|
|
Interest expense
|
1,900
|
|
Depreciation for the period
|
10,000
|
|
Extraordinary item (casualty loss—pretax)
|
30,000
|
|
Cost of sales
|
300,000
|
|
Common stock (30,000 shares outstanding)
|
150,000
|
Required
a. Prepare a single step income statement for the year ended December 31, 2010. Include earnings per share for earnings before extraordinary items and net income.
b. Prepare a multiple step income statement. Include earnings per share for earnings before extraordinary items and net income.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The income statement of Rawl Company for the year ended December 31, 2010, shows the following:
|
Net sales
|
$360,000
|
|
Cost of sales
|
190,000
|
|
Gross profit
|
170,000
|
|
Selling, general, and administrative expense
|
80,000
|
|
Income before unusual write offs
|
90,000
|
|
Provision for unusual write offs
|
50,000
|
|
Earnings from operations before income taxes
|
40,000
|
|
Income taxes
|
20,000
|
|
Net earnings from operations before extraordinary charge
|
20,000
|
|
Extraordinary charge, net of tax of $10,000
|
50,000
|
|
Net earnings (loss)
|
($30,000)
|
Required Compute the net earnings remaining after removing unusual write offs and the extraordinary charge. Remove these items net of tax. Estimate the tax rate for unusual write offs based on the taxes on operating income.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following information applies to Bowling Green Metals Corporation for the year ended December 31, 2010:
|
Total revenues from regular operations
|
$832,000
|
|
Total expenses from regular operations
|
776,000
|
|
Extraordinary gain, net of applicable income taxes
|
30,000
|
|
Dividends paid
|
20,000
|
|
Number of shares of common stock outstanding during the year
|
10,000
|
Required
Compute earnings per share before extraordinary items and net earnings. Show how this might be presented in the financial statements.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
You were recently hired as the assistant treasurer for Victor, Inc. Yesterday, the treasurer was injured in a bicycle accident and is now hospitalized, unconscious. Your boss, Mr. Fernandes, just informed you that the financial statements are due today. Searching through the treasurer’s desk, you find the following notes:
a. Income from continuing operations, based on computations done so far, is $400,000. No taxes are accounted for yet. The tax rate is 30%.
b. Dividends declared and paid were $20,000. During the year, 100,000 shares of stock were outstanding.
c. The corporation experienced an uninsured $20,000 pretax loss from a freak hailstorm. Such a storm is considered to be unusual and infrequent.
d. The company decided to change its inventory pricing method from average cost to the FIFO method. The effect of this change is to increase prior years’ income by $30,000 pretax. The FIFO method has been used for 2010. (Hint: This adjustment should be placed just prior to net income.)
e. In 2010, the company settled a lawsuit against it for $10,000 pretax. The settlement was not previously accrued and is due for payment in February 2011.
f. In 2010, the firm sold a portion of its long term securities at a gain of $30,000 pretax.
g. The corporation disposed of its consumer products division in August 2010, at a loss of $90,000 pretax. The loss from operations through August was $60,000 pretax.
Required
Prepare an income statement for 2010, in good form, starting with income from continuing operations. Compute earnings per share for income from continuing operations, discontinued operations, extraordinary loss, cumulative effect of a change in accounting principle, and net income.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
List the statement on which each of the following items may appear. Choose from (A) income statement, (B) balance sheet, or (C) neither.
|
a.
|
Net income
|
|
b.
|
Cost of goods sold
|
|
c.
|
Gross profit
|
|
d.
|
Retained earnings
|
|
e.
|
Paid in capital in excess of par
|
|
f.
|
Sales
|
|
g.
|
Supplies expense
|
|
h.
|
Investment in G. Company
|
|
i.
|
Dividends
|
|
j.
|
Inventory
|
|
k.
|
Common stock
|
|
l.
|
Interest payable
|
|
m.
|
Loss from flood
|
|
n.
|
Land
|
|
o.
|
Taxes payable
|
|
p.
|
Interest income
|
|
q.
|
Gain on sale of property
|
|
r.
|
Dividend income
|
|
s.
|
Depreciation expense
|
|
t.
|
Accounts receivable
|
|
u.
|
Accumulated depreciation
|
|
v.
|
Sales commissions
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
List where each of the following items may appear. Choose from (A) income statement, (B) balance sheet, or (C) reconciliation of retained earnings.
a. Dividends paid
b. Notes payable
c. Income from noncontrolling interest
d. Accrued payrolls
e. Loss on disposal of equipment
f. Land
g. Adjustments of prior periods
h. Redeemable preferred stock
i. Treasury stock
j. Extraordinary loss
k. Unrealized exchange gains and losses
l. Equity in net income of affiliates
m. Goodwill
n. Unrealized decline in market value of equity investment
o. Cumulative effect of change in accounting principle
p. Common stock
q. Cost of goods sold
r. Supplies
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) American businesses get their external funds primarily from
A) bank loans.
B) bonds and commercial paper issues.
C) stock issues.
D) loans from nonbank financial intermediaries.
2) Of the sources of external funds for nonfinancial businesses in the United States, loans from banks and other financial intermediaries account for approximately ________ of the total.
A) 6%
B) 40%
C) 56%
D) 60%
3) Of the sources of external funds for nonfinancial businesses in the United States, corporate bonds and commercial paper account for approximately ________ of the total.
A) 5%
B) 10%
C) 32%
D) 50%
4) Of the following sources of external finance for American nonfinancial businesses, the least important is
A) loans from banks.
B) stocks.
C) bonds and commercial paper.
D) loans from other financial intermediaries.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) Of the sources of external funds for nonfinancial businesses in the United States, stocks account for approximately ________ of the total.
A) 2%
B) 11%
C) 20%
D) 40%
2) Which of the following statements concerning external sources of financing for nonfinancial businesses in the United States are true?
A) Stocks are a far more important source of finance than are bonds.
B) Stocks and bonds, combined, supply less than one half of the external funds.
C) Financial intermediaries are the least important source of external funds for businesses.
D) Since 1970, more than half of the new issues of stock have been sold to American households.
3) Which of the following statements concerning external sources of financing for nonfinancial businesses in the United States are true?
A) Issuing marketable securities is the primary way that they finance their activities.
B) Bonds are the least important source of external funds to finance their activities.
C) Stocks are a relatively unimportant source of finance for their activities.
D) Selling bonds directly to the American household is a major source of funding for American businesses.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) Direct finance involves the sale to ________ of marketable securities such as stocks and bonds.
A) households
B) insurance companies
C) pension funds
D) financial intermediaries
2) Regulation of the financial system
A) occurs only in the United States.
B) protects the jobs of employees of financial institutions.
C) protects the wealth of owners of financial institutions.
D) ensures the stability of the financial system.
3) One purpose of regulation of financial markets is to
A) limit the profits of financial institutions.
B) increase competition among financial institutions.
C) promote the provision of information to shareholders, depositors and the public.
D) guarantee that the maximum rates of interest are paid on deposits.
4) Property that is pledged to the lender in the event that a borrower cannot make his or her debt payment is called
A) collateral.
B) points.
C) interest.
D) good faith money.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) Commercial and farm mortgages, in which property is pledged as collateral, account for
A) one quarter of borrowing by nonfinancial businesses.
B) one half of borrowing by nonfinancial businesses.
C) one twentieth of borrowing by nonfinancial businesses.
D) two thirds of borrowing by nonfinancial businesses.
2) A ________ is a provision that restricts or specifies certain activities that a borrower can engage in.
A) residual claimant
B) risk hedge
C) restrictive barrier
D) restrictive covenant
3) A clause in a mortgage loan contract requiring the borrower to purchase homeowner”s insurance is an example of a
A) proscriptive covenant.
B) prescriptive covenant.
C) restrictive covenant.
D) constraint imposed covenant.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) Which of the following is not one of the eight basic puzzles about financial structure?
A) Stocks are the most important source of finance for American businesses.
B) Issuing marketable securities is not the primary way businesses finance their operations.
C) Indirect finance, which involves the activities of financial intermediaries, is many times more important than direct finance, in which businesses raise funds directly from lenders in financial markets.
D) Banks are the most important source of external funds to finance businesses.
2) Which of the following is not one of the eight basic puzzles about financial structure?
A) Debt contracts are typically extremely complicated legal documents that place substantial restrictions on the behavior of the borrower.
B) Indirect finance, which involves the activities of financial intermediaries, is many times more important than direct finance, in which businesses raise funds directly from lenders in financial markets.
C) Collateral is a prevalent feature of debt contracts for both households and business.
D) There is very little regulation of the financial system.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Transaction Costs
1) The current structure of financial markets can be best understood as the result of attempts by financial market participants to
A) adapt to continually changing government regulations.
B) deal with the great number of small firms in the United States.
C) reduce transaction costs.
D) cartelize the provision of financial services.
2) The reduction in transactions costs per dollar of investment as the size of transactions increases is
A) discounting.
B) economies of scale.
C) economies of trade.
D) diversification.
3) Which of the following is not a benefit to an individual purchasing a mutual fund?
A) reduced risk
B) lower transactions costs
C) free riding
D) diversification
4) Financial intermediaries develop ________ in things such as computer technology which allows them to lower transactions costs.
A) expertise
B) diversification
C) regulations
D) equity
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Asymmetric Information: Adverse Selection and Moral Hazard
1) A borrower who takes out a loan usually has better information about the potential returns and risk of the investment projects he plans to undertake than does the lender. This inequality of information is called
A) moral hazard.
B) asymmetric information.
C) noncollateralized risk.
D) adverse selection.
2) The presence of ________ in financial markets leads to adverse selection and moral hazard problems that interfere with the efficient functioning of financial markets.
A) non collateralized risk
B) free riding
C) asymmetric information
D) costly state verification
3) The problem created by asymmetric information before the transaction occurs is called ________, while the problem created after the transaction occurs is called ________.
A) adverse selection; moral hazard
B) moral hazard; adverse selection
C) costly state verification; free riding
D) free riding; costly state verification
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Lemons Problem: How Adverse Selection Influences Financial Structure
1) The “lemons problem” exists because of
A) transactions costs.
B) economies of scale.
C) rational expectations.
D) asymmetric information.
2) Because of the “lemons problem” the price a buyer of a used car pays is
A) equal to the price of a lemon.
B) less than the price of a lemon.
C) equal to the price of a peach.
D) between the price of a lemon and a peach.
3) Adverse selection is a problem associated with equity and debt contracts arising from
A) the lender”s relative lack of information about the borrower”s potential returns and risks of his investment activities.
B) the lender”s inability to legally require sufficient collateral to cover a 100% loss if the borrower defaults.
C) the borrower”s lack of incentive to seek a loan for highly risky investments.
D) the lender”s inability to restrict the borrower from changing his behavior once given a loan.
4)
The Lemons Problem: How Adverse Selection Influences Financial Structure
1) The “lemons problem” exists because of
A) transactions costs.
B) economies of scale.
C) rational expectations.
D) asymmetric information.
2) Because of the “lemons problem” the price a buyer of a used car pays is
A) equal to the price of a lemon.
B) less than the price of a lemon.
C) equal to the price of a peach.
D) between the price of a lemon and a peach.
3) Adverse selection is a problem associated with equity and debt contracts arising from
A) the lender”s relative lack of information about the borrower”s potential returns and risks of his investment activities.
B) the lender”s inability to legally require sufficient collateral to cover a 100% loss if the borrower defaults.
C) the borrower”s lack of incentive to seek a loan for highly risky investments.
D) the lender”s inability to restrict the borrower from changing his behavior once given a loan.
4) The ________ problem helps to explain why the private production and sale of information cannot eliminate ________.
A) free rider; adverse selection
B) free rider; moral hazard
C) principal agent; adverse selection
D) principal agent; moral hazard
A) free rider; adverse selection
B) free rider; moral hazard
C) principal agent; adverse selection
D) principal agent; moral hazard
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) Because of the adverse selection problem,
A) good credit risks are more likely to seek loans causing lenders to make a disproportionate amount of loans to good credit risks.
B) lenders may refuse loans to individuals with high net worth, because of their greater proclivity to “skip town.”
C) lenders are reluctant to make loans that are not secured by collateral.
D) lenders will write debt contracts that restrict certain activities of borrowers.
2) Net worth can perform a similar role to ________.
A) diversification
B) collateral
C) intermediation
D) economies of scale
3) The problem of adverse selection helps to explain
A) why firms are more likely to obtain funds from banks and other financial intermediaries, rather than from securities markets.
B) why collateral is an important feature of consumer, but not business, debt contracts.
C) why direct finance is more important than indirect finance as a source of business finance.
D) why lenders refuse loans to individuals with high net worth.
4) The concept of adverse selection helps to explain
A) why collateral is not a common feature of many debt contracts.
B) why large, well established corporations find it so difficult to borrow funds in securities markets.
C) why financial markets are among the most heavily regulated sectors of the economy.
D) why stocks are the most important source of external financing for businesses.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
FLYING HIGH*
Note 1
Summary of Significant Accounting Policies (in Part)
Contract accounting—Contract accounting is used for development and production activities predominately by the Aircraft and Weapons Systems (A&WS), Network Systems, Support Systems, and Launch and Orbital Systems (L&OS) segments within Integrated Defense Systems (IDS). These activities include the following products and systems: military aircraft, helicopters, missiles, space systems, missile defense systems, satellites, rocket engines, and information and battle management systems. The majority of business conducted in these segments is performed under contracts with the U.S. government and foreign governments that extend over a number of years. Contract accounting involves a judgmental process of estimating the total sales and costs for each contract, which results in the development of estimated cost of sales percentages. For each sale contract, the amount reported as cost of sales is determined by applying the estimated cost of sales percentage to the amount of revenue recognized. Sales related to contracts with fixed prices are recognized as deliveries are made, except for certain fixed price contracts that require substantial performance over an extended period before deliveries begin, for which sales are recorded based on the attainment of performance milestones. Sales related to contracts in which we are reimbursed for costs incurred plus an agreed upon profit are recorded as costs are incurred. The majority of these contracts are with the U.S. government. The Federal Acquisition regulations provide guidance on the types of cost that will be reimbursed in establishing contract price. Contracts may contain provisions to earn incentive and award fees if targets are achieved. Incentive and award fees that can be reasonably estimated are recorded over the performance period of the contract. Incentive and award fees that cannot be reasonably estimated are recorded when awarded. Program accounting—We use program accounting to account for sales and cost of sales related to all our commercial airplane programs by the Commercial Airplanes segment. Program accounting is a method of accounting applicable to products manufactured for delivery under production type contracts where profitability is realized over multiple contracts and years. Under program accounting, inventoriable production costs, program tooling costs, and warranty costs are accumulated and charged as cost of sales by program instead of by individual units or contracts. A program consists of the estimated number of units (accounting quantity) of a product to be produced in a continuing, long term production effort for delivery under existing and anticipated contracts. To establish the relationship of sales to cost of sales, program accounting requires estimates of (a) the number of units to be produced and sold in a program, (b) the period over which the units can reasonably be expected to be produced, and (c) the units’ expected sales prices, production costs, program tooling, and warranty costs for the total program. We recognize sales for commercial airplane deliveries as each unit is completed and accepted by the customer. Sales recognized represent the price negotiated with the customer, adjusted by an escalation formula. The amount reported as cost of sales is determined by applying the estimated cost of sales percentage for the total remaining program to the amount of sales recognized for airplanes delivered and accepted by the customer. Service revenue—Service revenue is recognized when the service is performed. This method is predominately used by our Support Systems, L&OS, and Commercial Airplanes segments. Service activities include the following: Delta launches, ongoing maintenance of International Space Station, Space Shuttle and explosive detection systems, support agreements associated with military aircraft and helicopter contracts, and technical and flight operation services for commercial aircraft. BCC lease and financing revenue is also included in ‘‘Service revenue’’ on the Consolidated Statements of Operations. See the ‘‘Lease and financing arrangements’’ section below for a discussion of BCC’s revenue recognition policies. Notes receivable—At commencement of a note receivable issued for the purchase of aircraft or equipment, we record the note and any unamortized discounts. Interest income and amortization of any discounts are recorded ratably over the related term of the note.
Required
a. Contract Accounting (in Part)
‘‘Contracts may contain provisions to earn incentive and award fees if targets are achieved. Incentive and award fees that can be reasonably estimated are recorded over the performance period of the contract. Incentive and award fees that cannot be reasonably estimated are recorded when awarded.’’ Comment on the difficulty in determining which incentive and award fees can be reasonably estimated.
b. Program Accounting (in Part)
‘‘We recognize sales for commercial airplane deliveries as each unit is completed and accepted by the customer. Sales recognized represent the price negotiated with the customer, adjusted by an escalation formula.’’ Comment on the difficulty in determining the sales amount.
‘‘The amount reported as cost of sales is determined by applying the estimated cost of sales percentage for the total remaining program to the amount of sales recognized for airplanes delivered and accepted by the customer.’’
Does it appear more difficult to determine the sales or cost of sales? Comment.
c. Service Revenue (in Part)
‘‘Service revenue is recognized when the service is performed.’’ Is it difficult to determine service revenue? Comment.
d. Notes Receivable
‘‘At commencement of a note receivable issued for the purchase of aircraft or equipment, we record the note and any unamortized discounts. Interest income and amortization of any discounts are recorded ratably over the related term of the note.’’ Is it difficult to determine revenue from notes receivable? Comment.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
HAWAII CENTERED
Alexander & Baldwin, Inc.*
Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements (in Part)
1. Summary of Significant Accounting Policies (in Part) Real Estate Sales Revenue Recognition: Sales are recorded when the risks and benefits of ownership have passed to the buyers (generally on closing dates), adequate down payments have been received, and collection of remaining balances is reasonably assured. *‘‘Alexander & Baldwin, Inc. (‘A&B’) is a diversified corporation with most of its operations centered in Hawaii. It was founded in 1870 and incorporated in 1900. Ocean transportation operations, related shoreside operations in Hawaii, and intermodal, truck brokerage and logistics services are conducted by a wholly owned subsidiary, Matson Navigation Company, Inc. (‘Matson’) and two Matson subsidiaries. Property development and food products operations are conducted by A&B and certain other subsidiaries of A&B.’’ 10 K Real Estate Leasing Revenue Recognition: Rental revenue is recognized on a straight line basis over the terms of the related leases, including periods for which no rent is due (typically referred to as ‘‘rent holidays’’). Differences between revenue recognized and amounts due under respective lease agreements are recorded as increases or decreases, as applicable, to deferred rent receivable. Also included in rental revenue are certain tenant reimbursements and percentage rents determined in accordance with the terms of the leases. Income arising from tenant rents that are contingent upon the sales of the tenant exceeding a defined threshold are recognized in accordance with Staff Accounting Bulletin 101, which states that this income is to be recognized only after the contingency has been removed (i.e., sales thresholds have been achieved). Sugar and Coffee Revenue Recognition: Revenue from bulk raw sugar sales is recorded when delivered to the cooperative of Hawaiian producers, based on the estimated net return to producers in accordance with contractual agreements. Revenue from coffee is recorded when the title to the product and risk of loss pass to third parties (generally this occurs when the product is shipped or delivered to customers) and when collection is reasonably assured.
Required
a. Real Estate Sales Revenue Recognition—Conservative? Reasonable?
b. Real Estate Leasing Revenue Recognition—Why is income arising from tenant rents that are contingent upon the sales of the tenant exceeding a defined threshold handled differently than the ‘‘normal’’ real estate leasing?
c. Sugar and Coffee Revenue Recognition
1. Bulk raw sugar sales (why recorded based on the estimated net return to producers)?
2. Revenue from coffee (revenue recognition reasonable)?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
ECONOMICS AND ACCOUNTING: THE UNCONGENIAL TWINS*
‘‘Economics and accountancy are two disciplines which draw their raw material from much the same mines. From these raw materials, however, they seem to fashion remarkably different products. They both study the operations of firms; they both are concerned with such concepts as income, expenditure, profits, capital, value, and prices. In spite of an apparently common subject matter, however, they often seem to inhabit totally different worlds, between which there is remarkably little communication.’’ ‘‘It is not surprising that the economist regards much accounting procedure as in the nature of ritual. To call these procedures ritualistic is in no way to deny or decry their validity. Ritual is always the proper response when a man has to give an answer to a question, the answer to which he cannot really know. Ritual under these circumstances has two functions. It is comforting (and in the face of the great uncertainties of the future, comfort is not to be despised), and it is also an answer sufficient for action. It is the sufficient answer rather than the right answer which the accountant really seeks. Under these circumstances, however, it is important that we should know what the accountant’s answer means, which means that we should know what procedure he has employed. The wise businessman will not believe his accountant although he takes what his accountant tells him as important evidence. The quality of that evidence, however, depends in considerable degree on the simplicity of the procedures and the awareness which we have of them. What the accountant tells us may not be true, but, if we know what he has done, we have a fair idea of what it means. For this reason, I am somewhat suspicious of many current efforts to reform accounting in the direction of making it more ‘accurate.’’’ ‘‘If accounts are bound to be untruths anyhow, as I have argued, there is much to be said for the simple untruth as against a complicated untruth, for if the untruth is simple, it seems to me that we have a fair chance of knowing what kind of an untruth it is. A known untruth is much better than a lie, and provided that the accounting rituals are well known and understood, accounting may be untrue but it is not lies; it does not deceive because we know that it does not tell the truth, and we are able to make our own adjustment in each individual case, using the results of the accountant as evidence rather than as definitive information.’’
Required
a. Assume that accounting procedures are in the form of ritual. Does this imply that the accountant& product does not serve a useful function? Discuss.
b. Does it appear that Kenneth Boulding, the author of this article, would support complicated procedures
and a complicated end product for the accountant? Discuss.
c. Accounting reports must be accurate in order to serve a useful function. Discuss.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
OFTEN PAINT FAKES*
An art dealer bought a canvas signed ‘‘Picasso’’ and traveled all the way to Cannes to discover whether it was genuine. Picasso was working in his studio. He cast a single look at the canvas and said, ‘‘It’s a fake.’’ A few months later, the dealer bought another canvas signed ‘‘Picasso.’’ Again he traveled to Cannes, and again Picasso, after a single glance, grunted: ‘‘It’s a fake.’’ ‘‘But cher maitre,’’ expostulated the dealer, ‘‘it so happens that I saw you with my own eyes working on this very picture several years ago.’’ Picasso shrugged: ‘‘I often paint fakes.’’
Required
a. Assume that the accounting report was prepared using generally accepted accounting principles.
Does this imply that the report is exactly accurate? Discuss.
b. In your opinion, do accountants paint fakes? Discuss.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
OVERSIGHT
Selected sections of the Sarbanes Oxley Act follow:
Public Law 107 204—July 30, 2002
Section 1. Short title. This Act may be cited as the ‘‘Sarbanes Oxley Act of 2002’’
TITLE I—Public Company Accounting Oversight Board
Sec.101. Establishment; Administrative Provisions
(a) Establishment of Board—There is established the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board, to oversee the audit of public companies that are subject to the securities laws, and related matters, in order to protect the interests of investors and further the public interest in the preparation of informative, accurate, and independent audit reports for companies the securities of which are sold to, and held by and for, public investors. The Board shall be a body corporate, operate as a nonprofit corporation, and have succession until dissolved by an Act of Congress.
(b) Duties of the Board—The Board shall, subject to action by the Commission under section 107, and once a determination is made by the Commission under subsection (d) of this section—
(1) register public accounting firms that prepare audit reports for issuers, in accordance with section 102;
(2) establish or adopt, or both, by rule, auditing, quality control, ethics, independence, and other standards relating to the preparation of audit reports for issuers, in accordance with section 103;
(3) conduct inspections of registered public accounting firms, in accordance with section 104 and the rules of the Board;
(4) conduct investigations and disciplinary proceedings concerning, and impose appropriate sanctions where justified upon, registered public accounting firms and associated persons of such firms, in accordance with section 105;
(5) perform such other duties or functions as the Board (or the Commission, by rule or order) determines are necessary or appropriate to promote high professional standards among, and improve the quality of audit services offered by, registered public accounting firms and associated persons thereof, or otherwise to carry out this Act, in order to protect investors, or to further the public interest;
(6) enforce compliance with this Act, the rules of the Board, professional standards, and the securities laws relating to the preparation and issuance of audit reports and the obligations and liabilities of accountants with respect thereto, by registered public accounting firms and associated persons thereof; and
(7) set the budget and manage the operations of the Board and the staff of the Board. Sec.102. Registration with the Board
(a) Mandatory Registration—Beginning 180 days after the date of the determination of the Commission under section 101(d), it shall be unlawful for any person that is not a registered public accounting firm to prepare or issue, or to participate in the preparation or issuance of, any audit report with respect to any issuer.
Sec.103. Auditing, Quality Control, and Independence Standards and Rules
(a) Auditing, quality control, and ethics standards
(1) In General—The Board shall, by rule, establish, including, to the extent it determines appropriate, through adoption of standards proposed by 1 or more professional groups of accountants designated pursuant to paragraph (3)(A) or advisory groups convened pursuant to paragraph (4), and amend or otherwise modify or alter, such auditing and related attestation standards, such quality control standards, and such ethics standards to be used by registered public accounting firms in the preparation and issuance of audit reports, as required by this Act or the rules of the Commission, or as may be necessary or appropriate in the public interest or for the protection of investors.
Sec.104. Inspections of Registered Public Accounting Firms
(a) In General—The Board shall conduct a continuing program of inspections to assess the degree of compliance of each registered public accounting firm and associated persons of that firm with this Act, the rules of the Board, the rules of the Commission, or professional standards, in connection with its performance of audits, issuance of audit reports, and related matters involving issuers.
Sec.105. Investigations and Disciplinary Proceedings
(a) In General—The Board shall establish, by rule, subject to the requirements of this section, fair procedures for the investigation and disciplining of registered public accounting firms andassociated persons of such firms.
(3) Noncooperation with Investigations
(A) In General—If a registered public accounting firm or any associated person there of refuses to testify, produce documents, or otherwise cooperate with the Board in connection with an investigation under this section, the Board may—
(i) suspend or bar such person from being associated with a registered public accounting firm, or require the registered public accounting firm to end such association;
(ii) suspend or revoke the registration of the public accounting firm; and
(iii) invoke such other lesser sanctions as the Board considers appropriate, and as specified by rule of the Board.
Sec. 106. Foreign Public Accounting Firms
(a) Applicability to Certain Foreign Firms
(1) In General—Any foreign public accounting firm that prepares or furnishes an audit report with respect to any issuer, shall be subject to this Act and the rules of the Board and the Commission issued under this Act, in the same manner and to the same extent as a public accounting firm that is organized and operates under the laws of the United States or any State, except that registration pursuant to section 102 shall not by itself provide a basis for subjecting such a foreign public accounting firm to the jurisdiction of the Federal or State courts, other than with respect to controversies between such firms and the Board.
Sec. 107. Commission Oversight of the Board
(a) General Oversight Responsibility—The Commission shall have oversight and enforcement authority over the Board, as provided in this Act.
Sec. 108. Accounting Standards
(a) Amendment to Securities Act of 1933—Section 19 of the Securities Act of 1933 (15 U.S.C. 77s) is amended
(b) Recognition of Accounting Standards
(1) In General—In carrying out its authority under subsection (a) and under section 13(b) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, the Commission may recognize, as ‘‘generally accepted’’ for purposes of the securities laws, any accounting principles established by a standard setting body—
(A) that—
(i) is organized as a private entity;
(ii) has, for administrative and operational purposes, a board of trustees (or equivalent body) serving in the public interest, the majority of whom are not, concurrent with their service on such board, and have not been during the 2 year period preceding such service, associated persons of any registered public accounting firm;
(iii) is funded as provided in section 109 of the Sarbanes Oxley Act of 2002;
(iv) has adopted procedures to ensure prompt consideration, by majority vote of its members, of changes to accounting principles necessary to reflect emerging accounting issues and changing business practices; and
(v) considers, in adopting accounting principles, the need to keep standards current in order to reflect changes in the business environment, the extent to which international convergence on high quality accounting standards is necessary or appropriate in the public interest and for the protection of investors; and
(B) that the Commission determines has the capacity to assist the Commission in fulfilling the requirements of subsection (a) and section 13(b) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, because, at a minimum, the standard setting body is capable of improving the accuracy and effectiveness of financial reporting and the protection of investors under the securities laws.
Sec. 109. Funding
(a) In General—The Board, and the standard setting body designated pursuant to section 19(b) of the Securities Act of 1933, as amended by section 108, shall be funded asprovided in this section.
(d) Annual Accounting Support Fee for the Board
(1) Establishment of Fee—The Board shall establish, with the approval of the Commission, a reasonable annual accounting support fee (or a formula for the computation thereof), as may be necessary or appropriate to establish and maintain the Board. Such fee may also cover costs incurred in the Board’s first fiscal year (which may be a short fiscal year), or may be levied separately with respect to such short fiscal year.
(2) Assessments—The rules of the Board under paragraph (1) shall provide for the equitable allocation, assessment, and collection by the Board (or an agent appointed by the Board) of the fee established under paragraph (1), among issuers, in accordance with subsection (g), allowing for differentiation among classes of issuers, as appropriate.
(e) Annual Accounting Support Fee for Standard Setting Body—The annual accounting support fee for the standard setting body referred to in subsection (a)—
(1) shall be allocated in accordance with subsection (g), and assessed and collected against each issuer, on behalf of the standard setting body, by 1 or more appropriate designated collection agents, as may be necessary or appropriate to pay for the budget and provide for the expenses of that standard setting body, and to provide for an independent, stable source of funding for such body, subject to review by the Commission; and
(2) may differentiate among different classes of issuers.
TITLE II—Auditor Independence
Sec. 201. Services Outside the Scope of Practice of Auditors
(a) Prohibited Activities—Section 10A of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 (15 U.S.C. 78j–1) is amended by adding at the end the following:
(g) Prohibited Activities—Except as provided in subsection (h), it shall be unlawful for a registered public accounting firm (and any associated person of that firm, to the extent determined appropriate by the Commission) that performs for any issuer any audit required by this title or the rules of the Commission under this title or, beginning 180 days after the date of commencement of the operations of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board established under section 101 of the Sarbanes Oxley Act of 2002 (in this section referred to as the ‘‘Board’’), the rules of the Board, to provide to that issuer, contemporaneously with the audit, any non audit service, including—
(1) bookkeeping or other services related to the accounting records or financial statements of the audit client;
(2) financial information systems design and implementation;
(3) appraisal or valuation services, fairness opinions, or contribution in kind reports;
(4) actuarial services;
(5) internal audit outsourcing services;
(6) management functions or human resources;
(7) broker or dealer, investment adviser, or investment banking services;
(8) legal services and expert services unrelated to the audit; and
(9) any other service that the Board determines, by regulation, is impermissible.
(h) Preapproval Required for Non Audit Services—A registered public accounting firm may engage in any non audit service, including tax services, that is not described in any of paragraphs (1) through (9) of subsection (g) for an audit client, only if the activity is approved in advance by the audit committee of the issuer, in accordance with subsection (i). TITLE IV—Enhanced Financial Disclosures
Sec. 404. Management Assessment of Internal Controls
(a) RULES REQUIRED—The Commission shall prescribe rules requiring each annual report required by section 13(a) or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 [15 U.S.C. 78m or 78o(d)] to contain an internal control report, which shall—
(1) state the responsibility of management for establishing and maintaining an adequate internal control structure and procedures for financial reporting; and
(2) contain an assessment, as of the end of the most recent fiscal year of the issuer, of the effectiveness of the internal control structure and procedures of the issuer for financial reporting.
(b) INTERNAL CONTROL EVALUATION AND REPORTING—With respect to the internal control assessment required by subsection (a), each registered public accounting firm that prepares or issues the audit report for the issuer shall attest to, and report on, the assessment made by the management of the issuer. An attestation made under this subsection shall be made in accordance with standards for attestation engagements issued or adopted by the Board. Any such attestation shall not be the subject of a separate engagement.
Required
a. The Sarbanes Oxley Act refers to ‘‘the Commission’’ in several sections. To what Commission is the Sarbanes Oxley Act referring?
b. Describe the responsibility of the Commission in relation to the ‘‘Board.’’
c. Describe the Board.
d. Describe the duties of the Board.
e. Who must register with the Board?
f. Describe the Board’s responsibility as to the inspection of those registered with the Board.
g. Describe the responsibilities of the Board in relation to auditing standards.
h. Contrast the applicability of the Sarbanes Oxley Act to domestic public accounting firms versus foreign public accounting firms.
i. Describe the recognition of accounting standards by the Commission as provided.
j. Comment on the funding for the:
1. Board.
2. Financial Accounting Standards Board.
k. Describe prohibited activities of the independent auditor. Can the independent auditor perform tax services for an audit client?
l. Describe management’s responsibility in relation to internal controls.
m. Speculate on why Title IV, Section 404, ‘‘Management Assessment of Internal Controls,’’ has received substantial criticism.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
REGULATION OF SMALLER PUBLIC COMPANIES
The U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) chartered the Advisory Committee on Smaller Public Companies on March 23, 2005. The charter provided an objective of assessing the regulatory system for smaller companies under the securities laws of the United States and makes recommendations for changes. The SEC Advisory Committee gave its final recommendations to the SEC in April 2006. These recommendations included several primary recommendations, such as establish a scaled or proportional securities regulation for smaller public companies based on a stratification of smaller public companies into two groups; micro cap companies and small cap companies.* The report indicates that a scales or proportional securities regulation for smaller public companies assures the full benefits and protection of federal securities regulation for investors in large companies that make up 94% of the total public U.S. equity capital markets.…_ The committee acknowledges the relative risk to investors and the capital markets as it’s currently used by professional investors when using proportional securities regulations.
Required
It is perceived that the risk is greater when investing in smaller public companies with proportional securities regulations than in larger companies. Speculate on why the committee considers this risk worth taking.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Usually, current assets are listed in a specific order, starting with cash. What is the objective of this order of listing?
Differentiate between marketable securities and long term investments. What is the purpose of owning each?
Differentiate between accounts receivable and accounts payable.
What types of inventory will a retailing firm have? A manufacturing firm?
What is depreciation? Which tangible assets are depreciated, and which are not? Why?
For reporting purposes, management prefers higher profits; for tax purposes, lower taxable income is desired. To meet these goals, firms often use different methods of depreciation for tax and reporting purposes. Which depreciation method is best for reporting and which for tax purposes? Why?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
When would noncontrolling interest be presented on a balance sheet?
DeLand Company owns 100% of Little Florida, Inc. Will DeLand Company show a noncontrolling interest on its balance sheet? Would the answer change if it owned only 60%? Will there ever be a case in which the subsidiary, Little Florida, is not consolidated?
Describe the item Unrealized Decline in Market Value of Noncurrent Equity Investments.
What is redeemable preferred stock? Why should it be included with debt for purposes of financial statement analysis?
Describe fair value as it relates to assets and liabilities. With fair value the firm selects the highest appropriate level for valuation. Why the direction to select the highest appropriate level of valuation?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following information was obtained from the accounts of Airlines International dated December 31, 2010. It is presented in alphabetical order.
|
Accounts payable
|
77,916
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
67,551
|
|
Accrued expenses
|
23,952
|
|
Accumulated depreciation
|
220,541
|
|
Allowance for doubtful accounts
|
248
|
|
Capital in excess of par
|
72,913
|
|
Cash
|
28,837
|
|
Common stock (par $0.50, authorized 20,000 shares, issued 14,304 shares)
|
7,152
|
|
Current installments of long term debt
|
36,875
|
|
Deferred income tax liability (long term)
|
42,070
|
|
Inventory
|
16,643
|
|
Investments and special funds
|
11,901
|
|
Long term debt, less current portion
|
393,808
|
|
Marketable securities
|
10,042
|
|
Other assets
|
727
|
|
Prepaid expenses
|
3,963
|
|
Property, plant, and equipment at cost
|
809,980
|
|
Retained earnings
|
67,361
|
|
Unearned transportation revenue (airline tickets
expiring within one year)
|
6,808
|
Required Prepare a classified balance sheet in report form.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following information was obtained from the accounts of Lukes, Inc., as of December 31, 2010. It is presented in scrambled order.
|
Common stock, no par value, 10,000 shares authorized, 5,724 shares issued
|
3,180
|
|
Retained earnings
|
129,950
|
|
Deferred income tax liability (long term)
|
24,000
|
|
Long term debt
|
99,870
|
|
Accounts payable
|
35,000
|
|
Buildings
|
75,000
|
|
Machinery and equipment
|
300,000
|
|
Land
|
11,000
|
|
Accumulated depreciation
|
200,000
|
|
Cash
|
3,000
|
|
Receivables, less allowance of $3,000
|
58,000
|
|
Accrued income taxes
|
3,000
|
|
Inventory
|
54,000
|
|
Other accrued expenses
|
8,000
|
|
Current portion of long term debt
|
7,000
|
|
Prepaid expenses
|
2,000
|
|
Other assets (long term)
|
7,000
|
Required
Prepare a classified balance sheet in report form. For assets, use the classifications of current assets, plant and equipment, and other assets. For liabilities, use the classifications of current liabilities and long term liabilities.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following information was obtained from the accounts of Alleg, Inc., as of December 31, 2010. It is presented in scrambled order.
|
Common stock, authorized 21,000 shares at $par
value, issued 10,000 shares
|
$10,000
|
|
Additional paid in capital
|
38,000
|
|
Cash
|
13,000
|
|
Marketable securities
|
17,000
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
26,000
|
|
Accounts payable
|
15,000
|
|
Current maturities of long term debt
|
11,000
|
|
Mortgages payable
|
80,000
|
|
Bonds payable
|
70,000
|
|
Inventory
|
30,000
|
|
Land and buildings
|
57,000
|
|
Machinery and equipment
|
125,000
|
|
Goodwill
|
8,000
|
|
Patents
|
10,000
|
|
Other assets
|
50,000
|
|
Deferred income taxes (long term liability)
|
18,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
33,000
|
|
Accumulated depreciation
|
61,000
|
Required
Prepare a classified balance sheet in report form. For assets, use the classifications of current assets, plant and equipment, intangibles, and other assets. For liabilities, use the classifications of current liabilities and long term liabilities.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following is the balance sheet of Ingram Industries:
|
INGRAM INDUSTRIES Balance Sheet June 30, 2010
|
|
Assets
|
|
|
|
Current assets:
|
|
|
|
Cash (including $13,000 in sinking fund for bonds payable)
|
$70,000
|
|
|
Marketable securities
|
23,400
|
|
|
Investment in subsidiary company
|
23,000
|
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
21,000
|
|
|
Inventories (lower of cost or market)
|
117,000
|
$254,400
|
|
Plant assets:
|
|
|
|
Land and buildings
|
$160,000
|
|
|
Less: Accumulated depreciation
|
100,000
|
60,000
|
|
Investments:
|
|
|
|
Treasury stock
|
|
4,000
|
|
Deferred charges:
|
|
|
|
Discount on bonds payable
|
$6,000
|
|
|
Prepaid expenses
|
2,000
|
8,000
|
| |
|
$326,400
|
|
Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity
|
|
|
|
Liabilities:
|
|
|
|
Notes payable to bank
|
$60,000
|
|
|
Accounts payable
|
18,000
|
|
|
Bonds payable
|
61,000
|
|
|
Total liabilities
|
|
$139,000
|
|
Stockholders’ equity:
|
|
|
|
Preferred and common (each $10 par, 5,000 shares preferred and 6,000 shares common)
|
$110,000
|
|
|
Capital in excess of par
|
61,000
|
|
|
Retained earnings
|
16,400
|
|
| |
|
187,400
|
|
Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity
|
|
$326,400
|
Required
Indicate your criticisms of the balance sheet and briefly explain the proper treatment of any item criticized.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following is the balance sheet of Rubber Industries:
|
RUBBER INDUSTRIES
Balance Sheet
For the Year Ended December 31, 2010
|
|
Assets
|
|
|
Current assets:
|
|
|
Cash
|
50,000
|
|
Marketable equity securities
|
19,000
|
|
Accounts receivable, net
|
60,000
|
|
Inventory
|
30,000
|
|
Treasury stock
|
20,000
|
|
Total current assets
|
179,000
|
|
Plant assets:
|
|
|
Land and buildings, net
|
160,000
|
|
Investments:
|
|
|
Short term U.S. notes
|
20,000
|
|
Other assets:
|
|
|
Supplies
|
4,000
|
|
Total assets
|
363,000
|
|
Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity
|
|
|
Liabilities:
|
|
|
Bonds payable
|
$123,000
|
|
Accounts payable
|
40,000
|
|
Wages payable
|
10,000
|
|
Total liabilities
|
$173,000
|
|
Stockholders’ equity:
|
|
|
Common stock ($20 par, 20,000 shares
|
|
|
authorized, 6,000 shares outstanding)
|
120,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
50,000
|
|
Redeemable preferred stock
|
20,000
|
|
Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity
|
$363,000
|
Required
Indicate your criticisms of the balance sheet and briefly explain the proper treatment of any item criticized.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following is the balance sheet of McDonald Company:
|
McDONALD COMPANY December 31, 2010
|
|
Assets
|
|
|
|
|
Current assets:
|
|
|
|
|
Cash (including $10,000 restricted for payment of note)
|
$40,000
|
|
|
|
Assets
|
|
|
|
|
Marketable equity securities
|
|
20,000
|
|
|
Accounts receivable, less allowance for doubtful
|
|
70,000
|
|
|
Inventory
|
|
60,000
|
|
|
Total current assets
|
|
|
|
|
Plant assets:
|
|
|
|
|
Land
|
|
$40,000
|
|
|
Buildings, net
|
|
100,000
|
|
|
Equipment
|
$80,000
|
|
|
|
Less: Accumulated depreciation
|
20,000
|
60,000
|
|
|
Patent
|
|
20,000
|
|
|
Organizational costs
|
|
15,000
|
|
| |
|
|
235,000
|
|
Other assets:
|
|
|
|
|
Prepaid insurance
|
|
|
5,000
|
|
Total assets
|
|
|
$430,000
|
|
Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity
|
|
|
|
|
Current liabilities:
|
|
|
|
|
Accounts payable
|
|
$60,000
|
|
|
Wages payable
|
|
10,000
|
|
|
Notes payable, due July 1, 2012
|
|
20,000
|
|
|
Bonds payable, due December 2016
|
|
100,000
|
|
|
Total current liabilities
|
|
|
$190,000
|
|
Dividends payable
|
|
|
4,000
|
|
Deferred tax liability, long term
|
|
|
30,000
|
|
Stockholders’ equity:
|
|
|
|
|
Common stock ($10 par, 10,000 shares authorized, 5,000 shares outstanding)
|
|
$50,000
|
|
|
Retained earnings
|
|
156,000
|
|
|
Total stockholders’ equity
|
|
|
206,000
|
|
Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity
|
|
|
$430,000
|
Required
Indicate your criticisms of the balance sheet and briefly explain the proper treatment of any item criticized.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
You have just started as a staff auditor for a small CPA firm. During the course of the audit, you discover the following items related to a single client firm:
a. During the year, the firm declared and paid $10,000 in dividends.
b. Your client has been named defendant in a legal suit involving a material amount. You have received from the client’s counsel a statement indicating little likelihood of loss.
c. Because of cost control actions and general employee dissatisfaction, it is likely that the client will suffer a costly strike in the near future.
d. Twenty days after closing, the client suffered a major fire in one of its plants.
e. The cash account includes a substantial amount set aside for payment of pension obligations.
f. Marketable securities include a large quantity of shares of stock purchased for control purposes.
g. Land is listed on the balance sheet at its market value of $1,000,000. It cost $670,000 to purchase 12 years ago.
h. During the year, the government of Uganda expropriated a plant located in that country. There was substantial loss.
Required
How would each of these items be reflected in the year end balance sheet, including notes?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Corvallis Corporation owns 80% of the stock of Little Harrisburg, Inc. At December 31, 2010, Little Harrisburg had the following summarized balance sheet:
|
LITTLE HARRISBURG, INC. Balance Sheet December 31, 2010
|
|
Current assets
|
$100,000
|
Current liabilities
|
$50,000
|
| |
|
Long term debt
|
150,000
|
|
Property, plant, and equipment (net)
|
400,000
|
Capital stock
|
50,000
|
| |
$500,000
|
Retained earnings
|
250,000
|
| |
|
|
$500,000
|
The earnings of Little Harrisburg, Inc., for 2010 were $50,000 after tax.
Required
a. What would be the amount of noncontrolling interest on the balance sheet of Corvallis Corporation? How should noncontrolling interest be classified for financial statement analysis purposes?
b. What would be the noncontrolling interest in share of earnings on the income statement of Corvallis Corporation?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A. Which of the following is not a typical current liability?
1. Accounts payable
2. Wages payable
3. Interest payable
4. Pension liabilities
5. Taxes payable
B. Which of the following is a current liability?
1. Unearned rent income
2. Prepaid interest
3. Land
4. Common stock
5. None of the above
C. Treasury stock is best classified as a
1. Current liability.
2. Current asset.
3. Reduction of stockholders’ equity.
4. Contra asset.
5. Contra liability.
D. Considering IFRSs, which of the following statements would be considered false?
1. IFRSs do not require a standard format for the balance sheet.
2. With IFRSs, usually nonconcurrent assets are presented first, followed by current assets.
3. Under IFRS for liabilities and owners’ equity, capital and listed reserves are usually listed first, then noncurrent liabilities, and then current liabilities last.
4. The reserves section of capital and reserves would not be part of U.S. GAAP.
5. All of these items would be considered to be true.
E. Considering IFRSs, which of the following statements would be considered false?
1. When using IFRSs, local laws or securities regulations may specify disclosures in addition to those required by IFRSs.
2. IAS introduced a number of terminology changes. The new titles for the financial statements are not mandatory.
3. The IFRS model consolidated balance sheet, as presented by Deloitte Touche, puts an emphasis on liquidity.
4. Under IFRS, noncontrolling interests are usually presented as the last item in total equity.
5. None of these statements would be considered false.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
READY TO EAT
|
KELLOGG COMPANY AND SUBSIDIARIES* CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEET
|
|
|
|
(Millions, except share data)
|
2008
|
2007
|
|
Current assets
|
|
|
|
Cash and cash equivalents
|
$255
|
$524
|
|
Accounts receivable, net
|
1,143
|
1,011
|
|
Inventories
|
897
|
924
|
|
Other current assets
|
226
|
243
|
|
Total current assets
|
$2,521
|
$2,702
|
|
Property, net
|
2,933
|
2,990
|
|
Goodwill
|
3,637
|
3,515
|
|
Other intangibles, net
|
1,461
|
1,450
|
|
Other assets
|
394
|
740
|
|
Total assets
|
$10,946
|
$11,397
|
|
Current liabilities
|
|
|
|
Current maturities of long term debt
|
$1
|
$466
|
|
Notes payable
|
1,387
|
1,489
|
|
Accounts payable
|
1,135
|
1,081
|
|
Other current liabilities
|
1,029
|
1,008
|
|
Total current liabilities
|
$3,552
|
$4,044
|
|
Long term debt
|
4,068
|
3,270
|
|
Deferred income taxes
|
300
|
647
|
|
Pension liability
|
631
|
171
|
|
Other liabilities
|
947
|
739
|
|
Commitments and contingencies
|
|
|
|
Shareholders’ equity
|
|
|
|
Common stock, $.25 par value, 1,000,000,000 shares authorized Issued: 418,842,707 shares in 2008 and 418,669,193 shares in 2007
|
105
|
105
|
|
Capital in excess of par value
|
438
|
388
|
|
Retained earnings
|
4,836
|
4,217
|
|
Treasury stock at cost 36,981,580 shares in 2008 and 28,618,052 shares in 2007
|
1,790
|
1,357
|
|
Accumulated other comprehensive income (loss)
|
2,141
|
827
|
|
Total shareholders’ equity
|
$1,448
|
$2,526
|
|
Total liabilities and shareholders’ equity
|
$10,946
|
$11,397
|
Revenue Recognition and Measurement
The Company recognizes sales upon delivery of its products to customers net of applicable provisions for discounts, returns, allowances, and various government withholding taxes. Methodologies for determining these provisions are dependent on local customer pricing and promotional practices, which range from contractually fixed percentage price reductions to reimbursement based on actual occurrence or performance. Where applicable, future reimbursements are estimated based on a combination of historical patterns and future expectations regarding specific in market product performance. The Company classifies promotional payments to its customers, the cost of consumer coupons, and other cash redemption offers in net sales. The cost of promotional package inserts is recorded in cost of goods sold. Other types of consumer promotional expenditures are normally recorded in selling, general and administrative (SGA) expense. Advertising The costs of advertising are expensed as incurred and are classified within SGA expense. Research and Development The costs of research and development (R&D) are expensed as incurred and are classified within SGA expense. R&D includes expenditures for new product and process innovation, as well as significant technological improvements to existing products and processes. Total annual expenditures for R&D are disclosed in Note 18 and are principally comprised of internal salaries, wages, consulting, and supplies attributable to time spent on R&D activities. Other costs include depreciation and maintenance of research facilities and equipment, including assets at manufacturing locations that are temporarily engaged in pilot plant activities.
Required
a. 1. The statement is entitled ‘‘Consolidated Balance Sheets.’’ What does it mean to have a consolidate balance sheet?
2. For subsidiaries where control is present, does Kellogg have 100% ownership? Explain.
3. Are there subsidiaries where control is not present? Explain.
b. 1. With this information, can the gross receivables be determined? Explain.
2. What is the estimated amount that will be collected on receivables outstanding at the end of 2008?
c. 1. What is the total amount of inventory at the end of 2008?
2. What indicates that the inventory is stated on a conservative basis?
3. What is the trend in inventory balance? Comment.
d. 1. What is the net property and equipment at the end of 2008?
2. What depreciation method is used for financial reporting purposes? Where permitted, what depreciation methods are used for tax reporting? Comment on why the difference in depreciation methods for financial reporting versus tax reporting.
3. What is the accumulated depreciation on land at the end of 2008?
e. 1. Describe the treasury stock account.
2. What method is used to record treasury stock?
3. Why is treasury stock presented as a reduction in stockholders’ equity?
f. 1. What is the fiscal year?
2. Comment on the difference in length of fiscal year.
g. 1. Comment on the use of estimates.
h. 1. Does it appear that cash and cash equivalents are presented conservatively?
i. 1. Comment on the source of goodwill.
2. How are goodwill and indefinite lived intangibles handled for write offs?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
THE ENTERTAINMENT COMPANY
The Walt Disney Company—2008 Annual Report*
|
CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEETS
(In millions, except per share data)
|
|
ASSETS
|
September 27,
|
|
2008
|
2007
|
|
Current Assets
|
|
|
|
Cash and cash equivalents
|
3,001
|
3,670
|
|
Receivables
|
5,373
|
5,032
|
|
Inventories
|
1,124
|
641
|
|
Television costs
|
541
|
559
|
|
Deferred income taxes
|
1,024
|
862
|
|
Other current assets
|
603
|
550
|
|
Total Current Assets
|
11,666
|
11,314
|
|
Film and television costs
|
5,394
|
5,123
|
|
Investments
|
1,563
|
995
|
|
Parks, resorts and other property, at cost
|
|
|
|
Attractions, buildings and equipment
|
31,493
|
30,260
|
|
Accumulated depreciation
|
(16,310)
|
(15,145)
|
|
|
15,183
|
15,115
|
|
Projects in progress
|
1,169
|
1,147
|
|
Land
|
1,180
|
1,171
|
|
|
17,532
|
17,433
|
|
Intangible assets, net
|
2,428
|
2,494
|
|
Goodwill
|
22,151
|
22,085
|
|
Other assets
|
1,763
|
1,484
|
|
|
62,497
|
60,928
|
|
LIABILITIES AND SHAREHOLDERS’ EQUITY
|
|
Current Liabilities
|
|
|
|
Accounts payable and other accrued liabilities
|
5,980
|
5,949
|
|
Current portion of borrowings
|
3,529
|
3,280
|
|
Unearned royalties and other advances
|
2,082
|
2,162
|
|
Total current liabilities
|
11,591
|
11,391
|
|
Borrowings
|
11,110
|
11,892
|
|
Deferred income taxes
|
2,350
|
2,573
|
|
Other long term liabilities
|
3,779
|
3,024
|
|
Minority interests
|
1,344
|
1,295
|
|
Commitments and contingencies (note 14)
|
|
|
|
Shareholders’ equity
|
|
|
|
Preferred stock, $.01 par value Authorized—100 million shares,
|
|
|
|
Issued—none
|
|
|
|
Common stock, $.01 par value Authorized—3.6 billion shares,
|
|
|
|
Issued—2.6 billion shares
|
26,546
|
24,207
|
|
Retained earnings
|
28,413
|
24,805
|
|
Accumulated other comprehensive loss
|
(81)
|
(157) 48,855
|
|
|
54,878
|
|
Treasury stock, at cost, 777.1 million shares at September 27, 2008 and 637.8 million shares at September 29, 2007
|
|
|
(22,555)
|
(18,102)
|
|
|
32,323
|
30,753
|
|
|
62,497
|
60,928
|
Inventories
Carrying amounts of merchandise, materials and supplies inventories are generally determined on a moving average cost basis and are stated at the lower of cost or market.
|
12. Detail of Certain Balance Sheet Accounts
|
|
|
|
September 27,
2008
|
September 29,
2007
|
|
|
Current receivables
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
5,207
|
4,724
|
|
|
Other
|
414
|
424
|
|
|
Allowance for doubtful amounts
|
(248)
|
(116)
|
|
|
|
5,373
|
5,032
|
|
|
Other current assets
|
|
|
|
|
Prepaid expenses
|
478
|
446
|
|
|
Other
|
125
|
104
|
|
|
|
603
|
550
|
|
|
Parks, resorts and other property, at cost
|
|
|
|
|
Attractions, buildings, and improvements
|
15,444
|
14,857
|
|
|
Leasehold improvements
|
553
|
500
|
|
|
Furniture, fixtures and equipment
|
11,739
|
11,272
|
|
|
Land improvements
|
3,757
|
3,631
|
|
|
|
31,493
|
30,260
|
|
|
Accumulated depreciation
|
(16,310)
|
(15,145)
|
|
|
Projects in progress
|
1,169
|
1,147
|
|
|
Land
|
1,180
|
1,171
|
|
|
|
17,532
|
17,433
|
|
|
Intangible assets
|
|
|
|
|
Copyrights
|
357
|
357
|
|
|
Other amortizable intangible assets
|
282
|
255
|
|
|
Accumulated amortization
|
(198)
|
(143)
|
|
|
Net amortizable intangible assets
|
441
|
469
|
|
|
FCC licenses
|
858
|
897
|
|
|
Trademarks
|
1,109
|
1,108
|
|
|
Other indefinite lived intangible assets
|
20
|
20
|
|
|
|
2,428
|
2,494
|
|
|
Other noncurrent assets
|
|
|
|
|
Receivables
|
801
|
571
|
|
|
Pension related assets
|
215
|
275
|
|
|
Prepaid expenses
|
128
|
120
|
|
|
Other
|
619
|
518
|
|
|
|
1,763
|
1,484
|
|
|
Accounts payable and other accrued liabilities
|
|
|
|
|
Accounts payable
|
4,355
|
4,429
|
|
|
Payroll and employee benefits
|
1,376
|
1,290
|
|
|
Other
|
249
|
230
|
|
|
|
5,980
|
5,949
|
|
|
Other long term liabilities
|
|
|
|
|
Deferred revenues
|
320
|
369
|
|
|
Capital lease obligations
|
241
|
274
|
|
|
Program licenses and rights
|
223
|
288
|
|
|
Participation and residual liabilities
|
378
|
239
|
|
|
Pension and postretirement medical plan liabilities
|
1,157
|
966
|
|
|
Other1
|
1,460 3,779
|
888 3,024
|
|
Required
a. The statement is entitled ‘‘Consolidated Balance Sheets.’’ What does it mean to have a consolidated balance sheet?
b. 1. What is the gross amount of current receivables at September 27, 2008?
2. What is the allowance for doubtful accounts and September 27, 2008?
3. Why are some receivables classified as other noncurrent assets?
c. 1. Parks, resorts, and other property, at cost—what is the total cost amount at September 27, 2008? (Do not include projects in progress or land).
2. Are projects in progress and land depreciated?
d. 1. Intangible assets—why are some amortized and some not amortized?
2. What is the accumulated amortization at September 27, 2008?
e. 1. What is the amount of total assets at September 27, 2008?
2. What are the total current assets at September 27, 2008?
3. What is the total inventory at September 27, 2008? Does the inventory method appear to be conservative? Comment.
f. 1. Comment on the use of estimates.
g. 1. Why are advertising expenses expensed as incurred?
h. 1. Are cash and cash equivalents presented conservatively? Comment.
i. Revenue recognition; comment on the following:
1. Broadcast advertising revenues
2. Revenues from advance theme park ticket sales
3. Revenues from the theatrical distribution of motion pictures
4. Merchandise licensing advances and guarantee royalty payments
5. Why the use of several revenue recognition methods?
6. Are the revenue recognition methods industry specific?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
HEALTH CARE
Abbott Laboratories and Subsidiaries*
|
CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEET (IN PART) (Dollars in thousands)
|
|
Liabilities and Shareholders’ Investment
|
31 Dec
|
|
|
|
Current Liabilities:
|
2008
|
2007
|
2006
|
|
Short term borrowings
|
$1,691,069
|
$1,827,361
|
$5,305,985
|
|
Trade accounts payable
|
1,351,436
|
1,219,529
|
1,175,590
|
|
Salaries, wages, and commissions
|
1,011,312
|
859,784
|
807,283
|
|
Other accrued liabilities
|
4,216,742
|
3,713,104
|
3,850,723
|
|
Dividends payable
|
559,064
|
504,540
|
453,994
|
|
Income taxes payable
|
805,397
|
80,406
|
262,344
|
|
Obligation in connection with conclusion of TAP
|
|
|
|
|
Pharmaceutical Products, Inc. joint venture
|
915,982
|
—
|
—
|
|
Current portion of long term debt
|
1,040,906
|
898,554
|
95,276
|
|
Total Current Liabilities
|
11,591,908
|
9,103,278
|
11,951,195
|
|
Long term Debt
|
8,713,327
|
9,487,789
|
7,009,664
|
|
Postemployment Obligations and Other Long term Liabilities
|
4,634,418
|
3,344,317
|
3,163,127
|
|
Commitments and Contingencies
|
|
|
|
|
Shareholders’ Investment:
|
|
|
|
|
Preferred shares, one dollar par value
|
|
|
|
| |
31 Dec
|
| |
2008
|
2007
|
2006
|
|
Liabilities and Shareholders’ Investment
|
|
|
|
|
Authorized—1,000,000 shares, none issued
|
|
|
|
|
Common shares, without par value
|
|
|
|
|
Authorized—2,400,000,000 shares
|
|
|
|
|
Issued at stated capital amount –
|
|
|
|
|
Shares: 2008: 1,601,580,899; 2007:
|
|
|
|
|
1,580,854,677; 2006: 1,550,590,438
|
7,444,411
|
6,104,102
|
4,290,929
|
|
Common shares held in treasury, at cost –
|
|
|
|
|
Shares: 2008: 49,147,968; 2007: 30,944,537;
|
|
|
|
|
2006: 13, 347,272
|
2,626,404
|
1,213,134
|
195,237
|
|
Earnings employed in the business
|
13,825,383
|
10,805,809
|
9,568,728
|
|
Accumulated other comprehensive income (loss)
|
1,163,839
|
2,081,763
|
389,766
|
|
Total Shareholders’ Investment
|
17,479,551
|
17,778,540
|
14,054,186
|
| |
$42,419,204
|
$39,713,924
|
$36,178,172
|
Required
a. 1. The statement is entitled ‘‘Consolidated Balance Sheet.’’ What does it mean to have a consolidated balance sheet?
b. 1. What current liability decreased the most?
2. What current liability increased the most?
c. 1. How many common shares had been issued as of December 31, 2008?
2. How many shares were held in the treasury at December 31, 2008?
3. How many shares were outstanding at December 31, 2008?
4. What is the treasury stock method?
d. 1. Abbott Laboratories discloses the account ‘‘Earnings employed in the business.’’ What is this account usually called?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
High Tower Security Company had the following transactions during the month of April:
Apr. 4. Purchased office supplies from Office Helper Inc. on account, $420.
Apr 8. Purchased office equipment on account from Best Equipment, Inc., $1,800.
Apr 12. Purchased office supplies from Office Helper Inc. on account, $120.
Apr 21. Purchased office supplies from Paper to Go Inc. on account, $185.
Apr 27. Paid invoice on April 4 purchase from Office Helper Inc.
a. Prepare a purchases journal with the following headings to record the April purchase transactions for High Tower Security Company.
|
PURCHASES JOURNAL
|
|
|
|
|
Accts.
|
Office
|
Other
|
|
|
|
|
|
Post.
|
Payable
|
Supplies
|
Accounts
|
Post.
|
|
|
Date
|
Account Credited
|
Ref.
|
Cr.
|
Dr.
|
Dr.
|
Ref.
|
Amount
|
b. What is the total amount posted to the accounts payable control and office supplies accounts from the purchases journal for April?
c. What is the April 30 balance of the Office Helper Inc. creditor account assuming a zero balance on April 1?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The purchases journal for Keep Kleen Window Cleaners Inc. is shown below. The accounts payable control account has a January 1, 2008, balance of $265 of an amount due from Lawson Co. There were no payments made on creditor invoices during January.
|
PURCHASES JOURNAL
|
|
|
|
|
Accts.
|
Cleaning
|
Other
|
|
|
|
|
|
Post.
|
Payable
|
Supplies
|
Accounts
|
Post.
|
|
|
Date
|
Account Credited
|
Ref.
|
Cr.
|
Dr.
|
Dr.
|
Ref.
|
Amount
|
|
2008
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Jan. 4
|
Best Cleaning Supplies Inc.
|
|
345
|
345
|
|
|
|
|
15
|
Lawson Co.
|
|
285
|
285
|
|
|
|
|
21
|
Office Mate Inc.
|
|
3,400
|
|
Office
|
|
3,400
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Equipment
|
|
|
|
26 31
|
Best Cleaning Supplies Inc.
|
|
310
|
310
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
4,340
|
940
|
|
|
3,400
|
a. Prepare a T account for the accounts payable creditor accounts.
b. Post the transactions from the purchases journal to the creditor accounts, and determine their ending balances.
c. Prepare T accounts for the accounts payable control and cleaning supplies accounts. Post control totals to the two accounts, and determine their ending balances.
d. Verify the equality of the sum of the creditor account balances and the accounts payable control account balance.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The cash payments and purchases journals for Silver Spring Landscaping Co. are shown below. The accounts payable control account has a June 1, 2008 balance of $2,940, consisting of an amount owed to Augusta Sod Co.
|
CASH PAYMENTS JOURNAL
|
|
|
|
|
|
Other
|
Accounts
|
|
|
|
Ck.
|
|
Post.
|
Accounts
|
Payable
|
Cash
|
|
Date
|
No.
|
Account Debited
|
Ref.
|
Dr.
|
Dr.
|
Cr.
|
|
2008
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
June
|
4
|
203
|
Augusta Sod Co.
|
√
|
|
2,940
|
2,940
|
|
|
5
|
204
|
Utilities Expense
|
54
|
325
|
|
325
|
|
|
15
|
205
|
Kimble Lumber Co.
|
√
|
|
5,920
|
5,920
|
|
|
27
|
206
|
Schott’s Fertilizer
|
√
|
|
970
|
970
|
|
|
30
|
|
|
|
325
|
9,830
|
10,155
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
(√)
|
(21)
|
(11)
|
|
PURCHASES JOURNAL
|
|
|
|
|
Accounts
|
Landscaping
|
Other
|
|
|
|
|
|
Post.
|
Payable
|
Supplies
|
Accounts
|
Post.
|
|
|
Date
|
Account Credited
|
Ref.
|
Cr.
|
Dr.
|
Dr.
|
Ref.
|
Amount
|
|
2008
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
June
|
3
|
Kimble Lumber Co.
|
|
5,920
|
5,920
|
|
|
|
|
|
7
|
Gibraltar Insurance Co.
|
|
1,100
|
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
17
|
1,100
|
|
|
14
|
Schott’s Fertilizer
|
|
970
|
970
|
|
|
|
|
|
24
|
Augusta Sod Co.
|
|
6,310
|
6,310
|
|
|
|
|
|
29
|
Kimble Lumber Co.
|
|
3,650
|
3,650
|
|
|
|
|
|
30
|
|
|
17,950
|
16,850
|
|
|
1,100
|
|
|
|
|
|
(21)
|
(14)
|
|
|
(??)
|
Prepare the supplier balance summary report, and determine that the total agrees with the ending balance of the accounts payable control account.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Transactions related to purchases and cash payments completed by Winston Cleaning Services Inc. during the month of December 2008 are as follows:
Dec. 1. Issued Check No. 57 to Liquid Klean Supplies Inc. in payment of account, $205.
Dec 3. Purchased cleaning supplies on account from Industrial Products Inc., $130.
Dec 8. Issued Check No. 58 to purchase equipment from Jefferson Equipment Sales, $2,600.
Dec 12. Purchased cleaning supplies on account from Purcell Products Inc., $190.
Dec 15. Issued Check No. 59 to Maryville Laundry Service in payment of account, $100.
Dec 17. Purchased supplies on account from Liquid Klean Supplies Inc., $245.
Dec 20. Purchased laundry services from Maryville Laundry Service on account, $95.
Dec 25. Issued Check No. 60 to Industrial Products Inc. in payment of December 3rd invoice.
Dec 31. Issued Check No. 61 in payment of salaries, $4,100.
Prepare a purchases journal and a cash payments journal to record these transactions. The forms of the journals are similar to those illustrated in the text. Place a check mark (??) in the Post. Ref. column to indicate when the Accounts Payable subsidiary ledger should be posted. Winston Cleaning Services Inc. uses the following accounts:
|
Cleaning Supplies
|
14
|
|
Equipment
|
18
|
|
Salary Expense
|
51
|
|
Laundry Service Expense
|
53
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Pet Groom Inc. has $685 in the May 1 balance of the accounts payable control account. Transactions related to purchases and cash payments completed by Pet Groom Inc. during the month of May 2008 are as follows:
May 4. Purchased pet supplies from Best Friend Supplies Inc. on account, $265.
May 6. Issued Check No. 345 to Larrimore Inc. in payment of account, $455.
May 11. Purchased pet supplies from Poodle Pals Inc., $675.
May 18. Issued Check No. 346 to Pets Mart Inc. in payment of account, $230.
May 19. Purchased office equipment from Office Helper Inc. on account, $2,400.
May 23. Issued Check No. 347 to Best Friend Supplies Inc. in payment of account from purchase made on May 4.
May 27. Purchased pet supplies from Pets Mart Inc. on account, $410.
May 30. Issued Check No. 348 to Sanders Inc. for cleaning expenses, $45.
a. Prepare a purchases journal and a cash payments journal to record these transactions.
The forms of the journals are similar to those used in the text. Place a check mark (??) in the Post. Ref. column to indicate when the Accounts Payable subsidiary ledger should be posted. Pet Groom Inc. uses the following accounts:
|
Office Equipment
|
13
|
|
Pet Supplies
|
14
|
|
Cleaning Expense
|
54
|
b. Prepare a supplier balance summary report on May 31, 2008. Verify that the total of the supplier balance summary report equals the balance of the accounts payable control account on May 31, 2008.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Discuss the role of each of the following in the formulation of accounting principles:
a. American Institute of Certified Public Accountants
b. Financial Accounting Standards Board
c. Securities and Exchange Commission
How does the concept of consistency aid in the analysis of financial statements? What type of accounting disclosure is required if this concept is not applied?
The president of your firm, Lesky and Lesky, has little background in accounting. Today, he walked into your office and said, ‘‘A year ago we bought a piece of land for $100,000. This year, inflation has driven prices up by 6%, and an appraiser just told us we could easily resell the land for $115,000. Yet our balance sheet still shows it at $100,000. It should be valued at $115,000. That’s what it’s worth. Or, at a minimum, at $106,000.’’ Respond to this statement with specific reference to the accounting principles applicable in this situation.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Identify the accounting principle(s) applicable to each of the following situations:
a. Tim Roberts owns a bar and a rental apartment and operates a consulting service. He has separate financial statements for each.
b. An advance collection for magazine subscriptions is reported as a liability titled Unearned Subscriptions.
c. Purchases for office or store equipment for less than $25 are entered in Miscellaneous Expense.
d. A company uses the lower of cost or market for valuation of its inventory.
e. Partially completed television sets are carried at the sum of the cost incurred to date.
f. Land purchased 15 years ago for $40,500 is now worth $346,000. It is still carried on the books at $40,500.
g. Zero Corporation is being sued for $1 million for breach of contract. Its lawyers believe that the damages will be minimal. Zero reports the possible loss in a note.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Corporation like General Electric has many owners (stockholders). Which concept enables the accountant to account for transactions of General Electric separate and distinct from the personal transactions of the owners of General Electric?
Zebra Company has incurred substantial financial losses in recent years. Because of its financial condition, the ability of the company to keep operating is in question. Management prepares a set of financial statements that conform to generally accepted accounting principles. Comment on the use of GAAP under these conditions.
Because of assumptions and estimates that go into the preparation of financial statements, the statements are inaccurate and are, therefore, not a very meaningful tool to determine the profits or losses of an entity or the financial position of an entity. Comment.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Many important events that influence the prospect for the entity are not recorded in the financial records. Comment and give an example.
Some industry practices lead to accounting reports that do not conform to the general theory that underlies accounting. Comment.
An entity may choose between the use of the accrual basis of accounting and the cash basis. Comment.
Why did the FASB commence the Accounting Standards Codification_ project?
Would an accountant record the personal assets and liabilities of the owners in the accounts of the business? Explain.
At which point is revenue from sales on account (credit sales) commonly recognized?
Elliott Company constructed a building at a cost of $50,000. A local contractor had submitted a bid to construct it for $60,000.
a. At what amount should the building be recorded?
b. Should revenue be recorded for the savings between the cost of $50,000 and the bid of $60,000?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
FASB Statement of Financial Accounting Concepts No. 2 indicates several qualitative characteristics of useful accounting information. Following is a list of some of these qualities, as well as a list of statements and phrases describing the qualities.
a. Benefits > costs
b. Decision usefulness
c. Relevance
d. Reliability
e. Predictive value, feedback value, timeliness
f. Verifiability, neutrality, representational
faithfulness
g. Comparability
h. Materiality
i. Relevance, reliability
1. Without usefulness, there would be no benefits from information to set against its cost.
2. Pervasive constraint imposed on financial accounting information.
3. Constraint that guides the threshold for recognition.
4. A quality requiring that the information be timely and that it also have predictive value, feedback value, or both.
5. A quality requiring that the information have representational faithfulness and that it be verifiable and neutral.
6. These are the two primary qualities that make accounting information useful for decision making.
7. These are the ingredients needed to ensure that the information is relevant.
8. These are the ingredients needed to ensure that the information is reliable.
9. Includes consistency and interacts with relevance and reliability to contribute to the usefulness of information.
Required Place the appropriate letter identifying each quality on the line in front of the statement or phrase describing the quality.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Certain underlying considerations have had an important impact on the development of generally accepted accounting principles. Following is a list of these underlying considerations, as well as a list of statements describing them.
a. Going concern or continuity
b. Monetary unit
c. Conservatism
d. Matching
e. Full disclosure
f. Materiality
g. Transaction approach
h. Accrual basis
i. Industry practices
j. Verifiability
k. Consistency
l. Realization
m. Historical cost
n. Time period
o. Business entity
1. The business for which the financial statements are prepared is separate and distinct from the owners.
2. The assumption is made that the entity will remain in business for an indefinite period of time.
3. Accountants need some standard of measure to bring financial transactions together in a meaningful way.
4. Revenue should be recognized when the earning process is virtually complete and the exchange value can be objectively determined.
5. This concept deals with when to recognize the costs that are associated with the recognized revenue.
6. Accounting reports must disclose all facts that may influence the judgment of an informed reader.
7. This concept involves the relative size and importance of an item to a firm.
8. The accountant is required to adhere as closely as possible to verifiable data.
9. Some companies use accounting reports that do not conform to the general theory that underlies accounting.
10. The accountant records only events that affect the financial position of the entity and, at the same time, can be reasonably determined in monetary terms.
11. Revenue must be recognized when it is realized (realization concept), and expenses are recognized when incurred (matching concept).
12. The entity must give the same treatment to comparable transactions from period to period.
13. The measurement with the least favorable effect on net income and financial position in the current period must be selected.
14. Of the various values that could be used, this value has been selected because it is objective and determinable.
15. With this assumption, inaccuracies of accounting for the entity short of its complete life span are accepted. Required Place the appropriate letter identifying each quality on the line in front of the statement describing the quality.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
What is the underlying concept that supports the immediate recognition of a loss?
1. Matching
2. Consistency
3. Judgment
4. Conservatism
5. Going concern
f. Which statement is not true?
1. The Securities and Exchange Commission is a source of some generally accepted accounting principles.
2. The American Institute of Certified Public Accountants is a source of some generally accepted accounting principles.
3. The Internal Revenue Service is a source of some generally accepted accounting prin1ciples.
4. The Financial Accounting Standards Board is a source of some generally accepted accounting principles.
5. Numbers 1, 2, and 4 are correct.
g. Which pronouncements are not issued by the Financial Accounting Standards Board?
1. Statements of Financial Accounting Standards
2. Statements of Financial Accounting Concepts
3. Technical bulletins
4. Interpretations
5. Opinions
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A. Which of the following does the Financial Accounting Standards Board not issue?
1. SOPs
2. SFASs
3. Interpretations
4. Technical bulletins
5. SFACs
B. According to SFAC No. 6, assets can be defined by which of the following?
1. Probable future sacrifices of economic benefits arising from present obligations of a particular entity to transfer assets or provide services to other entities in the future as a result of past transactions or events
2. Probable future economic benefits obtained or controlled by a particular entity as a result of past transactions or events
3. Residual interest on the assets of an entity that remains after deducting its liabilities
4. Increases in equity of a particular business enterprise resulting from transfers to the enterprise from other entities of something of value to obtain or increase ownership interests (or equity) in it
5. Decrease in equity of a particular business enterprise resulting from transferring assets, rendering services, or incurring liabilities by the enterprise
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A. According to SFAC No. 6, expenses can be defined by which of the following?
1. Inflows or other enhancements of assets of an entity or settlements of its liabilities (or a combination of both) from delivering or producing goods, rendering services, or other activities that constitute the entity’s ongoing major or central operations
2. Outflows or other consumption or using up of assets or incurrences of liabilities (or a combination of both) from delivering or producing goods, rendering services, or carrying out other activities that constitute the entity’s ongoing major or central operations
3. Increases in equity (net assets) from peripheral or incidental transactions of an entity and from all other transactions and other events and circumstances affecting the entity during a period, except those that result from revenues or investments
4. Decreases in equity (net assets) from peripheral or incidental transactions of an entity and from all other transactions and other events and circumstances affecting the entity during a period, except those that result from expenses or distributions to owners
5. Probable future economic benefits obtained or controlled by a particular entity as a result of past transactions or events.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A. SFAC No. 5 indicates that an item, to be recognized, should meet four criteria, subject to the cost benefit constraint and the materiality threshold. Which of the following is not one of the four criteria?
1. The item fits one of the definitions of the elements.
2. The item has a relevant attribute measurable with sufficient reliability.
3. The information related to the item is relevant.
4. The information related to the item is reliable.
5. The item has comparability, including consistency.
B. SFAC No. 5 identifies five different measurement attributes currently used in practice. Which of the following is not one of the measurement attributes currently used in practice?
1. Historical cost
2. Future cost
3. Current market value
4. Net realizable value
5. Present, or discounted, value of future cash flows
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following data relate to Jones Company for the year ended December 31, 2009:
|
Sales on credit
|
$80,000
|
|
Cost of inventory sold on credit
|
65,000
|
|
Collections from customers
|
60,000
|
|
Purchase of inventory on credit
|
50,000
|
|
Payment for purchases
|
55,000
|
|
Cash collections for common stock
|
30,000
|
|
Dividends paid
|
10,000
|
|
Payment to salesclerk
|
10,000
|
Required
a. Determine income on an accrual basis.
b. Determine income on a cash basis.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Matching Acronyms
Required Listed below are phrases with the appropriate acronym. Match the letter that goes with each definition.
a. Generally accepted accounting principles (GAAP)
b. Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC)
c. Financial Reporting Releases (FRRs)
d. American Institute of Certified Public Accountants (AICPA)
e. Certified public accountants (CPAs)
f. Accounting Principles Board (APB)
g. Accounting Principles Board Opinions (APBOs)
h. Accounting Principles Board Statements (APBSs)
i. Financial Accounting Standards Board (FASB)
j. Financial Accounting Foundation (FAF)
k. Financial Accounting Standards Advisory Council (FASAC)
l. Statements of Financial Standards (SFASs)
m. Statements of Financial Accounting Concepts (SFACs)
n. Discussion Memorandum (DM)
o. Exposure Draft (ED)
p. Accounting Standards Executive Committee (AcSEC)
q. Statements of Position (SOP)
r. Emerging Issues Task Force (EITF)
s. Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (PCAOB)
1. Accounting principles that have substantial authoritative support
2. A task force of representatives from the accounting profession created by the FASB to deal with emerging issues of financial reporting
3. A proposed Statement of Financial Accounting Standards
4. Issued by the Accounting Standards Division of the AICPA to influence the development of accounting standards
5. Created by the Securities Exchange Act of 1934
6. A professional accounting organization whose members are certified public accountants.
7. Issued official opinions on accounting standards between 1959 and 1973
8. Represent views of the Accounting Principles Board but not the official opinions.
9. This Board issues four types of pronouncements: (1) Statements of Financial Accounting Standards, (2) Interpretations, (3) Technical bulletins, and (4) Statements of Financial Accounting Concepts
10. Governs the Financial Accounting Standards Board
11. These statements are issued by the Financial Accounting Standards Board and establish GAAP for specific accounting issues
12. Statements issued by the Financial Accounting Standards Board to provide a theoretical foundation on which to base GAAP; they are not part of GAAP
13. Serves as the official voice of the AICPA in matters relating to financial accounting and reporting standards
14. Presents all known facts and points of view on a topic; issued by the FASB
15. Responsible for advising the FASB
16. Represented official positions of the APB
17. An accountant who has received a certificate stating that he or she has met the requirements of state law
18. Issued by the SEC and give the SEC’s official position on matters relating to financial statements
19. Adopts auditing standards
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
STANDARD SETTING: ‘‘A POLITICAL ASPECT’’
This case consists of a letter from Dennis R. Beresford, chairperson of the Financial Accounting Standards Board, to Senator Joseph I. Lieberman. The specific issue was proposed legislation relating to the accounting for employee stock options.
Permission to reprint the following letter was obtained from the Financial Accounting Standards Board.
August 3, 1993
Senator Joseph I. Lieberman
United States Senate
Hart Senate Office Building
Room 316
Washington, DC 20510
Dear Senator Lieberman:
Members of the Financial Accounting Standards Board (the FASB or the Board) and its staff routinely consult with members of Congress, their staffs, and other government officials on matters involving financial accounting. For example, FASB members and staff met with Senator Levin both before and after the introduction of his proposed legislation, Senate Bill 259, which also addresses accounting for employee stock options. The attachment to this letter discusses the accounting issues (we have not addressed the tax issues) raised in your proposed legislation, Senate Bill 1175, and issues raised in remarks introduced in the Congressional Record. My comments in this letter address an issue that is more important than any particular legislation or any particular accounting issue: why we have a defined process for setting financial reporting standards and why it is harmful to the public interest to distort accounting reports in an attempt to attain other worthwhile goals. Financial Reporting
Markets are enormously efficient information processors—when they have the information and that information faithfully portrays economic events. Financial statements are one of the basic tools for communicating that information. The U.S. capital market system is well developed and efficient because of users’ confidence that the financial information they receive is reliable. Common accounting standards for the preparation of financial reports contribute to their credibility. The mission of the FASB, an organization designed to be independent of all other business and professional organizations, is to establish and improve financial accounting and reporting standards in the United States.
Investors, creditors, regulators, and other users of financial reports make business and economic decisions based on information in financial statements. Credibility is critical whether the user is an individual contemplating a stock investment, a bank making lending decisions, or a regulatory agency reviewing solvency. Users count on financial reports that are evenhanded, neutral, and unbiased.
An efficiently functioning economy requires credible financial information as a basis for decisions about allocation of resources. If financial statements are to be useful, they must report economic activity without coloring the message to influence behavior in a particular direction. They must not intentionally favor one party over another. Financial statements must provide a neutral scorecard of the effects of transactions.
Economic Consequences of Accounting Standards The Board often hears that we should take a broader view, that we must consider the economic consequences of a new accounting standard. The FASB should not act, critics maintain, if a new accounting standard would have undesirable economic consequences. We have been told that the effects of accounting standards could cause lasting damage to American companies and their employees. Some have suggested, for example, that recording the liability for retiree health care or the costs for stock based compensation will place U.S. companies at a competitive disadvantage. These critics suggest that because of accounting standards, companies may reduce benefits or move operations overseas to areas where workers do not demand the same benefits. These assertions are usually combined with statements about desirable goals, like providing retiree health care or creating employee incentives. There is a common element in those assertions. The goals are desirable, but the means require that the Board abandon neutrality and establish reporting standards that conceal the financial impact of certain transactions from those who use financial statements. Costs of transactions exist whether or not the FASB mandates their recognition in financial statements. For example, not requiring the recognition of the cost of stock options or ignoring the liabilities for retiree health benefits does not alter the economics of the transactions. It only withholds information from investors, creditors, policy makers, and others who need to make informed decisions and, eventually, impairs the credibility of financial reports.
One need only look to the collapse of the thrift industry to demonstrate the consequences of abandoning neutrality. During the 1970s and 1980s, regulatory accounting principles (RAP) were altered to obscure problems in troubled institutions. Preserving the industry was considered a ‘‘greater good.’’ Many observers believe that the effect was to delay action and hide the true dimensions of the problem. The public interest is best served by neutral accounting standards that inform policy rather than promote it. Stated simply, truth in accounting is always good policy.
Neutrality does not mean that accounting should not influence human behavior. We expect that changes in financial reporting will have economic consequences, just as economic consequences are inherent in existing financial reporting practices. Changes in behavior naturally flow from more complete and representationally faithful financial statements. The fundamental question, however, is whether those who measure and report on economic events should somehow screen the information before reporting it to achieve some objective. In FASB Concepts Statement No. 2, ‘‘Qualitative Characteristics of Accounting Information’’ (paragraph 102), the Board observed:
Indeed, most people are repelled by the notion that some ‘‘big brother,’’ whether government or private, would tamper with scales or speedometers surreptitiously to induce people to lose weight or obey speed limits or would slant the scoring of athletic events or examinations to enhance or decrease someone’s chances of winning or graduating. There is no more reason to abandon neutrality in accounting measurement. The Board continues to hold that view. The Board does not set out to achieve particular economic results through accounting pronouncements. We could not if we tried. Beyond that, it is seldom clear which result we should seek because our constituents often have opposing viewpoints. Governments, and the policy goals they adopt, frequently change. Standard Setting in the Private Sector While the SEC and congressional committees maintain active oversight of the FASB to ensure that the public interest is served, throughout its history the SEC has relied on the Board and its predecessors in the private sector to establish and improve financial accounting and reporting standards. In fulfilling the Board’s mission of improving financial reporting, accounting standards are established through a system of due process and open deliberation.
On all of our major projects, this involves open Board meetings, proposals published for comment, ‘‘field testing’’ of proposals, public hearings, and redeliberation of the issues in light of comments.
Our due process has allowed us to deal with complex and highly controversial accounting issues, ranging from pensions and retiree health care to abandonment of nuclear power plants. This open, orderly process for standard setting precludes placing any particular special interest above the interests of the many who rely on financial information. The Board believes that the public interest is best served by developing neutral accounting standards that result in accounting for similar transactions similarly and different transactions differently.
The resulting financial statements provide as complete and faithful a picture of an entity as possible.
Corporations, accounting firms, users of financial statements, and most other interested parties have long supported the process of establishing accounting standards in the private sector without intervention by Congress or other branches of government. Despite numerous individual issues on which the FASB and many of its constituents have disagreed, that support has continued. The resulting system of accounting standards and financial reporting, while not perfect, is the best in the world.
Conclusion
We understand that there are a number of people who believe that their particular short term interests are more important than an effectively functioning financial reporting system. We sincerely hope, however, that you and others in the Congress will review the reasons that have led generations of lawmakers and regulators to conclude that neutral financial reporting is critical to the functioning of our economic system and that the best way to achieve that end is to allow the existing private sector process to proceed. We respectfully submit that the public interest will be best served by that course. As former SEC Chairman Richard Breeden said in testimony to the Senate Banking Committee in 1990:
The purpose of accounting standards is to assure that financial information is presented in a way that enables decision makers to make informed judgments. To the extent that accounting standards are subverted to achieve objectives unrelated to a fair and accurate presentation, they fail in their purpose.
The attachment to this letter discusses your proposed legislation. It also describes some aspects of our project on stock compensation and the steps in our due process procedures that remain before the project will be completed. In your remarks in the Congressional Record, you said that you will address future issues, including an examination of the current treatment of employee stock options, over the next weeks and months. We would be pleased to meet with you or your staff to discuss these topics and the details of our project.
I will phone your appointments person in the next two weeks to see if it is convenient for you to meet with me.
Sincerely,
Dennis R. Beresford
Dennis R. Beresford
Enclosure
cc: The Honorable Connie Mack
The Honorable Dianne Feinstein
The Honorable Barbara Boxer
The Honorable Carl S. Levin
The Honorable Christopher J. Dodd
The Honorable Arthur J. Levitt
Required
a. ‘‘Financial statements must provide a neutral scorecard of the effects of transactions.’’ Comment.
b. ‘‘Costs of transactions exist whether or not the FASB mandates their recognition in financial statements.’’ Comment.
c. In the United States, standard setting is in the private sector. Comment.
d. Few, if any, accounting standards are without some economic impact. Comment.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
INDEPENDENCE OF ACCOUNTING STANDARD SETTERS
Speech by SEC Chairman:
Remarks before the AICPA National Conference on Current SEC and PCAOB Developments by
Chairman Christopher Cox
U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission
Washington, DC
December 8, 2008
Note: Selected comments from Chairman Christopher Cox’s speech are the basis for this case. Good morning to all of you, and let me add my welcome to the AICPA’s National Conference on Current SEC and PCAOB Developments. It is a pleasure to join you at this Conference once again. And while the Conference topics this year are focused as always on the cutting edge issues that concern you in your practice, more than ever before the subjects that you’ll cover this week are of great importance to our nation and the economy as a whole.
From issues such as fair value measurement, to the future of international accounting and reporting, to corporate governance and MD&A and the SEC’s coming interactive data revolution, the Conference agenda is truly cutting edge and consequential. As leaders in your profession, I am especially grateful that you have taken the time to be here, in order to carry forward this important work and to help confront these challenges that concern not only our nation’s economy but the world’s. I want you to know that the Securities and Exchange Commission is a strong supporter of your efforts, and that’s why not only I, but also a range of top staff from the SEC, including our Chief Accountant, Conrad Hewitt; John White, the Director of the Division of Corporation Finance; Linda Thomsen, Director of the Division of Enforcement; and Jim Kroeker and Paul Beswick, our Deputy Chief Accountants, will be participating with you in this event.
The timing for the presentations you will hear could not be more critical. And since the issues you are addressing in your daily work go far beyond the normal conference agenda, to the very core of the financial turmoil in our financial system, it’s fitting that the people who will be speaking are leading the efforts to help investors and markets manage through that turmoil with sound and consistent accounting standards.
The AICPA’s 121 year history, dating back to 1887, makes this one of the oldest professional organizations in the country. From the founding of the American Association of Public Accountants, as it was then called, with a membership of only a few hundred to your more than a third of a million members today, the accounting profession has been vital to our nation’s economic health and prosperity.
Americans have always entrusted you with great responsibility, both individually and as a profession. And through thick and thin you have maintained their confidence.
Even in the post–Sarbanes Oxley, post–Enron environment, accountants have continued to enjoy a solid reputation among the public, and among business decision makers. That’s a testament to your integrity and professional competence. Business executives—your clients—give you a favorability rating of 95%. At the SEC, where we’re focused on investor protection, we’re most impressed that investors give you a favorability rating of 97%. That’s as close to perfect as you’re likely to get in this life. None of this means that anyone in this room can afford to be complacent. You have a reputation, and a future, to protect. Together, we’ve all got to remain vigilant.
The role of the accounting profession, at its core, is parallel to that of the SEC. We both have the goal of ensuring full and accurate financial information is reported by companies. And in fact, given that the AICPA’s history dates back even further than the SEC’s, it was left for accountants to handle the Panic of 1884 on their own when this market crash hit the country. Like the current global financial turmoil, America’s Panic of 1884 was also precipitated by a credit crisis. When New York’s national banks refused to lend any additional money and began calling in their loans from borrowers in the West and South, at a time when the nation didn’t have the central bank policy levers that are used today, it caused a dramatic spike in interest rates. One contemporary commentator noted that loans at the time ‘‘commanded three percent interest and commission per day on call’’—or a staggering annualized compound interest rate of several hundred thousand percent. Although the aftermath of the panic was less serious than some other economic shocks, nearly 11,000 businesses failed in 1884 alone.
In those the early days of organized accounting in America, the profession was small. A quarter century before, city directories listed just 14 accountants offering services to the public in New York City, four in Philadelphia, and one in Chicago—a far cry from AICPA’s 350,000 members today. As one who formerly taught federal income tax, I’m obliged to point out that what really sparked the growth of the accounting profession in the early 20th century was the ratification of the 16th Amendment to the Constitution in 1913. The adoption of a federal income tax suddenly gave rise to the new field of tax preparation. Accountants quickly asserted their authority in this new field—in competition with law firms, of course, which also touted their expertise.
But the defining moment for the nascent field of modern accounting came in the aftermath of the Great Depression. As some of the largest and most profitable companies in the world fell victim to the crushing financial impact, much of the blame was directed at members of the accounting profession, who were accused in court and in the press of negligence, incompetence, and fraud. In hindsight, we know that the fault did not lie so much with the practitioners of accounting, but with the lack of objective and widely accepted accounting standards. In the absence of industry wide standards, accountants were forced to make ad hoc determinations across a range of business situations. Ten companies in the same industry could, and often did, use ten different standards. Clearly something had to change, and AICPA led the charge.
This history is directly relevant to us today, when accounting standard setting is at the center of the debate over how banks and financial firms got into—and how they can get out of—the current financial turmoil. It was to solve the problem of accounting improvisation that in 1939, AICPA created its own rule making body, the Committee on Accounting Procedure, to help set industry wide standards on contentious issues. The industry also accepted government licensing for CPAs, who were made responsible—and personally liable—for the auditing of publicly traded companies.
The Committee on Accounting Procedure was a huge improvement on the lack of process and procedure that had existed before. But because it dealt with standards on an issue by issue basis as they arose, rather than offering a comprehensive framework for all accounting standards, there was still more work to be done. To address those concerns the AICPA replaced the Committee on Accounting Procedure, 20 years after it was formed, with the Accounting Principles Board, and gave it a broader mandate. It is from the opinions of the Accounting Principles Board between 1959 and 1973 that much of U.S. GAAP has evolved. The Accounting Principles Board, in turn, was succeeded by a fully independent Financial Accounting Standards Board in 1973, under the oversight of the SEC.
The reasons for creating a non governmental body are completely familiar to us today—to be fair and objective, based on expert analysis and judgment, and free of both political and business influence so that accounting standards could be applied consistently across all situations in thousands of different companies. Those reasons for independent private sector standard setting are as relevant and important today as they ever were.
Since then, Congress has consistently restated its purpose in providing the SEC with oversight responsibility for the FASB’s independent standard setting activities. In the Sarbanes Oxley Act of 2002, the Congress recognized the importance of having an independent standard setting process in order to facilitate accurate and effective financial reporting, and to protect investors. In the Emergency Economic Stabilization Act of 2008, the Congress described the SEC’s role as ensuring that accounting standards work in the public interest and are consistent with the protection of investors.
In creating the first body to set such standards, AICPA and the accounting profession helped America emerge from its darkest economic hour, and you and your peers set down a structural foundation for the economic growth and success of the past 70 years. Now we find ourselves in another economic crisis, and once again the role of accounting standards and the accounting profession is being challenged. As we respond to these new challenges, we must continue to protect the independence of the standard setting process.
If we learned one painful lesson from the events of the 1930s, and from the more recent scandals of the S&L crisis in the 1980s and Enron, WorldCom, and the rest in the 1990s and the first part of this decade, it is how vitally important it is to protect the independence of accounting standard setters and ensure that their work remains free of distortions from self serving influences. That priority must also be reflected in any regulatory reform undertaken by the next Congress and the new administration. Accounting standards setting should remain an independent function, and regulatory oversight of the independent private sector standard setter should not become entangled with the competing priorities of evaluating and addressing systemic risk. Accounting standards should not be viewed as a fiscal policy tool to stimulate or moderate economic growth, but rather as a means of producing neutral and objective measurements of the financial performance of public companies.
Accounting standards aren’t just another financial rudder to be pulled when the economic ship drifts in the wrong direction. Instead they are the rivets in the hull, and you risk the integrity of the entire economy by removing them.
There are those who say that independent standard setting is important, and who will agree that private sector standard setting is preferable to ensure that the process is not detached from reality— but who nonetheless say that while these things are true in ordinary times, these are not ordinary times. Therefore, they argue for setting aside the normal approach to standard setting, which identifies issues for consideration, gives the public exposure documents, includes outreach efforts, and then solicits comments on the exposure documents, and finally considers all of the resulting comments in finalizing and issuing new accounting standards. All of that, they say, should be set aside and replaced with a quick fix, whether the standard setters agree or not.
This view gives short shrift not only to the principle of independence, but also to the credibility of the standard setting process and investor confidence in it.
The truth is that the value of independent standard setting is greatest when the going gets tough. The more serious the stresses on the market, the more important it is to maintain investor confidence. A few years ago, during the consideration of a particularly contentious and important accounting rule, the then Comptroller General, David Walker, wrote a letter on this very point to the Chairman and Ranking Member of the Senate Banking Committee, who were then Richard Shelby and Paul Sarbanes. ‘‘[T]he principle of independence,’’ he said, ‘‘both in fact and in appearance, is essential to the credibility of and confidence in any authoritative standard setting processes.’’ And about the FASB’s role as the SEC’s designated independent private sector standard setting body, the GAO had this to say:
This time tested and proven deliberative process has served to strengthen financial reporting and ensure general acceptance of the nation’s accounting standards. This process is especially important given the complexity and controversial nature of some accounting standards. The established process that the GAO was referring to includes important safeguards for all users of financial statements, including obtaining feedback from groups such as financial statement preparers, auditors, individual investors, institutional investors, lenders, creditors, professional analysts, and various other parties. These processes are designed to ensure that the competing interests and demands of the various groups are carefully and independently balanced. And that, in turn, is absolutely essential to ensuring that accounting standards promote transparent, credible, and comparable
financial information.
None of this is to say that standard setters can or should turn a blind eye to the events in the world around us; or ignore the valid criticism and input of leaders in business, politics, and academia; or endlessly debate and deliberate instead of act when action is required. To the contrary, that is what the transparent process is for. It is meant to achieve results, and to keep standards current. Standards must keep pace with the real world to stay relevant, and they must be refined over time to better address weaknesses, as we have recently seen with the problems in valuing assets in illiquid markets. I believe it is critical that FASB complete its analysis of the SEC’s request for expeditious improvement in the impairment model in FAS 115, made formally last October, in accordance with its established independent standard setting process. As we have learned, illiquid markets bring new challenges to the measurement of fair value that could not have been fully appreciated in past years. These challenges have brought into focus the need for further work on improving the tools that companies have at their disposal to achieve transparent, decision useful financial reporting. Transparency is the cornerstone of world class financial reporting. Transparent and unbiased financial reporting allows investors to make informed decisions based on a company’s financial performance and disclosures. A clear, concise, and balanced view into the companies that participate in our capital markets is fundamentally important to those who choose to invest in our markets. Informed decision making results in efficient capital allocation.
Required
a. ‘‘Accounting standards should not be viewed as a fiscal policy tool to stimulate or moderate economic growth, but rather as a means of providing neutral and objective measurements of the financial performance of public companies.’’ Comment.
b. Letter of David Walker, then Comptroller General (in Part).
‘‘This time tested and proven deliberate process has served to strengthen this financial reporting and ensure general acceptance of the nation’s accounting standards. This process is especially important given the complexity and controversial nature of some accounting standards.’’ Comment.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
LOOKING OUT FOR INVESTORS
Speech by SEC Chairman:
Address to the Council of Institutional Investors by Chairman Mary L. Schapiro
U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission
Council of Institutional Investors—Spring 2009 Meeting
Washington, DC
April 6, 2009
Note: Selected comments from Chairman Mary L. Schapiro’s speech are the basis of this case.
Thank you, Joe, for that lovely introduction, and I want to thank you and Ann for inviting me to join you today. It’s really an honor to be here. When I first arrived at the SEC two months ago, I noticed a very large, framed quote prominently displayed outside the Chairman’s Office. It’s a quote from former Chairman (and later Supreme Court Justice) William O. Douglas. And, it says, ‘‘We are the investor’s advocate.’’ Usually, that’s the only part of his quote we ever hear. But the full statement is more enlightening. It reads: We have got brokers’ advocates; we have got Exchange advocates; we have got investment banker advocates; and WE are the investors’ advocate. The date of that quote is 1937. Seventy two years later, there are even more advocates for all of the various participants in our markets, but the SEC remains the only federal agency dedicated to looking out for investors. And surely there has been no time in history that investors have been more in need of an advocate than today. You—the trillions of dollars that are represented in this room—need an advocate that is strong and effective. In our time together this morning, I’d like to share with you my plans for ensuring both. The Role of Regulation in Our Markets Now over the past many months, there’s been much talk in Washington and around the globe, about the need to rethink our regulatory system. It is a discussion that has been given urgency by the financial crisis we face—and the quest for solutions. But as we consider how to address this crisis, I think it is useful to remember that there are myriad reasons for how we got here. The ink on the Sarbanes Oxley Act of 2002 was hardly dry before we began to hear concerns from some quarters about the costs of ‘‘over regulation,’’ the stifling of innovation, and the superior ability of markets to protect themselves from excesses. Over the last 15 years, regulations that had once walled off the less risky from more risky parts of our financial system were incrementally weakened. Competition for market based financing among banks, securities firms and finance companies resulted in a dramatic increase in leverage and risk for both corporate and consumer borrowers. Standards deteriorated and financial activity moved away from regulated and transparent markets and institutions, into ‘‘shadow markets.’’ Regulatory and enforcement resources, most notably at the SEC, declined. Regulatory reform will seek to address these and the many other causes of the weaknesses in our system and the broader economy. The SEC’s Role But, fixing all of these problems—whether it’s the state of our automobile industry, the soundness of our banking system, or the integrity of our credit or derivatives markets—will take time and involve many moving parts. I’d like to outline how I see the SEC’s role and, as I mentioned, my plans for ensuring that the SEC is a strong and effective advocate for investors. Investor protection starts with fair and efficient capital markets. The SEC’s job is to ensure that these markets are: _ First, structured effectively. This means that customer orders are priced, processed, and cleared in an orderly and fair way. _ Second, that they’re fed by timely and reliable information. This is imperative whether that information is provided through words or numbers. _ Third, that they’re well served by financial intermediaries and other market professionals. These professionals must be competent, financially capable, and honest. _ And fourth, that they’re supported by a strong and focused enforcement arm. Returning to former Chairman Douglas’ words, we need to have the ‘‘shotgun behind the door… loaded, well oiled, cleaned, ready for use, but with the hope that it will never have to be used.’’ In each of these four areas, the SEC has recently experienced both successes and challenges.
Required
a. Comment on the costs of overregulation.
b. Comment on the costs of underregulation.
c. In your opinion, will the SEC now move toward overregulation or underregulation?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following revenue transactions occurred during September:
Sept. 9. Issued Invoice No. 121 to Barney Co. for services provided on account, $6,780.
Sept.20. Issued Invoice No. 122 to Triple A Inc. for services provided on account, $5,240.
Sept.24. Issued Invoice No. 123 to Connors Co. for services provided on account, $2,890.
Record these three transactions into the following revenue journal format:
| |
|
REVENUE JOURNAL
|
|
| |
Invoice
|
|
Post.
|
Accts. Rec. Dr.
|
|
Date
|
No.
|
Account Debited
|
Ref.
|
Fees Earned Cr.
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The debits and credits from two transactions are presented in the following customer account:
|
NAME New Generation Products Inc.
|
|
ADDRESS 46 W. Elm St.
|
|
|
|
Post.
|
|
|
|
|
Date
|
Item
|
Ref.
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
Balance
|
|
Jan.
|
1
|
Balance
|
?
|
|
|
1,450
|
|
|
10
|
Invoice 345
|
R45
|
895
|
|
2,345
|
|
|
19
|
Invoice 329
|
CR78
|
|
1,080
|
1,265
|
Describe each transaction and the source of each posting.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The debits and credits from two transactions are presented in the following customer account:
|
NAME Hopewell Communications Inc.
|
|
ADDRESS 76 Oak Ridge Rd.
|
|
|
|
Post.
|
|
|
|
|
Date
|
Item
|
Ref.
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
Balance
|
|
Apr.
|
1
|
Balance
|
?
|
|
|
255
|
|
|
14
|
Invoice 962
|
CR315
|
|
140
|
115
|
|
|
25
|
Invoice 976
|
R240
|
85
|
|
200
|
Describe each transaction and the source of each posting.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following purchase transactions occurred during June for Mahanaim Inc.:
June 4. Purchased office supplies for $85, on account from Office to Go Inc.
June 19. Purchased office equipment for $3,890, on account from Bell Computer Inc.
June 23. Purchased office supplies for $145, on account from Paper Warehouse Inc.
Record these transactions in the following purchases journal format:
|
PURCHASES JOURNAL
|
|
|
|
|
Accounts
|
Office
|
Other
|
|
|
|
|
|
Post.
|
Payable
|
Supplies
|
Accounts
|
Post.
|
|
|
Date
|
Account Credited
|
Ref.
|
Cr.
|
Dr.
|
Dr.
|
Ref.
|
Amount
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The debits and credits from two transactions are presented in the following supplier’s (creditor’s) account:
|
NAME Xavier Inc. ADDRESS 5000 Grand Ave.
|
|
|
|
Post.
|
|
|
|
|
Date
|
Item
|
Ref.
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
Balance
|
|
Dec. 1
|
Balance
|
|
|
|
78
|
|
9
|
Invoice 456
|
CP55
|
54
|
|
24
|
|
18
|
Invoice 475
|
P89
|
|
94
|
118
|
Describe each transaction and the source of each posting.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The debits and credits from two transactions are presented in the following supplier’s (creditor’s) account:
|
NAME Bonitelli Computer Services Inc. ADDRESS 301 St. Bonaventure Ave.
|
|
|
|
Post.
|
|
|
|
|
Date
|
Item
|
Ref.
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
Balance
|
|
Feb. 1
|
Balance
|
|
|
|
8,400
|
|
19
|
Invoice 45
|
P16
|
|
4,250
|
12,650
|
|
26
|
Invoice 39
|
CP36
|
6,700
|
|
5,950
|
Describe each transaction and the source of each posting.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The state of Iowa has a 5% sales tax. Hawkeye Services Inc., an Iowa company, had two revenue transactions as follows:
May 8. Issued Invoice No. 112 to Howerton Inc. for services provided on account, $4,200, plus sales tax.
20. Issued Invoice No. 113 to Tel Optics Inc. for services provided on account, $5,780, plus sales tax.
Record these transactions in a revenue journal using the following format:
|
REVENUE JOURNAL
|
|
|
|
|
|
Accts.
|
Fees
|
Sales Tax
|
|
|
Invoice
|
|
Post.
|
Rec.
|
Earned
|
Payable
|
|
Date
|
No.
|
Account Debited
|
Ref.
|
Dr.
|
Cr.
|
Cr.
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Guardian Security Services Inc. provides both commercial and residential security services on account. Two transactions are identified below.
Mar. 1. Issued Invoice No. 919 to Matrix Inc. for security services provided on account, $350.
Mar 1. Issued Invoice No. 920 to James King, a residential customer, for services provided on account, $75.
Record these transactions in a revenue journal using the following format:
|
REVENUE JOURNAL
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Fees
|
Fees
|
|
|
|
|
|
Accts.
|
Earned—
|
Earned—
|
|
|
Invoice
|
|
Post.
|
Rec.
|
Commercial
|
Residential
|
|
Date
|
No.
|
Account Debited
|
Ref.
|
Dr.
|
Cr.
|
Cr.
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Using the following revenue journal for Omega Services Inc., identify each of the posting references, indicated by a letter, as representing (1) posting to general ledger accounts or (2) posting to subsidiary ledger accounts.
|
REVENUE JOURNAL
|
|
|
Invoice
|
|
Post.
|
Accounts Receivable Dr.
|
|
Date
|
No.
|
Account Debited
|
Ref.
|
Fees Earned Cr.
|
|
2008
|
|
|
|
|
|
Sept. 1
|
772
|
Environmental Safety Co.
|
(a)
|
$2,625
|
|
10
|
773
|
Greenberg Co.
|
(b)
|
1,050
|
|
20
|
774
|
Eco Systems
|
(c)
|
1,400
|
|
27
|
775
|
SSC Corp.
|
(d)
|
965
|
|
30
|
|
|
|
$6,040
|
|
|
|
|
|
(e)
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Assuming the use of a two column (all purpose) general journal, a revenue journal, and a cash receipts journal as illustrated in this chapter, indicate the journal in which each of the following transactions should be recorded:
a. Receipt of cash for rent.
b. Receipt of cash refund from overpayment of taxes.
c. Closing of drawing account at the end of the year.
d. Sale of office supplies on account, at cost, to a neighboring business.
e. Receipt of cash from sale of office equipment.
f. Providing services for cash.
g. Adjustment to record accrued salaries at the end of the year.
h. Receipt of cash on account from a customer.
i. Providing services on account.
j. Investment of additional cash in the business by the owner.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Assuming the use of a two column (all purpose) general journal, a purchases journal, and a cash payments journal as illustrated in this chapter, indicate the journal in which each of the following transactions should be recorded:
a. Adjustment to prepaid insurance at the end of the month.
b. Adjustment to prepaid rent at the end of the month.
c. Purchase of office supplies for cash.
d. Purchase of office supplies on account.
e. Payment of six months’ rent in advance.
f. Purchase of services on account.
g. Adjustment to record depreciation at the end of the month.
h. Adjustment to record accrued salaries at the end of the period.
i. Advance payment of a one year fire insurance policy on the office.
j. Purchase of an office computer on account.
k. Purchase of office equipment for cash.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The debits and credits from three related transactions are presented in the following customer’s account taken from the accounts receivable subsidiary ledger.
|
NAME Impact Graphic Design ADDRESS 1319 Elm Street
|
|
|
|
Post.
|
|
|
|
|
Date
|
Item
|
Ref.
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
Balance
|
|
2008
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Dec. 3
|
|
R50
|
680
|
|
680
|
|
9
|
|
J9
|
|
70
|
610
|
|
13
|
|
CR38
|
|
610
|
—
|
Describe each transaction, and identify the source of each posting.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Gaylord Services Company had the following transactions during the month of May:
May 2. Issued Invoice No. 201 to Townley Corp. for services rendered on account, $320.
May 3. Issued Invoice No. 202 to Mid States Inc. for services rendered on account, $450.
May 12. Issued Invoice No. 203 to Townley Corp. for services rendered on account, $165.
May 24. Issued Invoice No. 204 to Parker Co. for services rendered on account, $665.
May 28. Collected Invoice No. 201 from Townley Corp.
a. Prepare a revenue journal with the following headings to record the May revenue transactions for Gaylord Services Company.
|
REVENUE JOURNAL
|
|
|
Invoice
|
|
Post.
|
Accts. Rec. Dr.
|
|
Date
|
No.
|
Account Debited
|
Ref.
|
Fees Earned Cr.
|
b. What is the total amount posted to the accounts receivable control and fees earned accounts from the revenue journal for May?
c. What is the May 31 balance of the Townley Corp. customer account assuming a zero balance on May 1?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The revenue journal for Tri Star Consulting Inc. is shown below. The accounts receivable control account has a May 1, 2008, balance of $1,200 consisting of an amount due from Ayres Co. There were no collections during May
|
REVENUE JOURNAL
|
|
|
Invoice
|
|
Post.
|
Accts. Rec. Dr.
|
|
Date
|
No.
|
Account Debited
|
Ref.
|
Fees Earned Cr.
|
|
2008
|
|
|
|
|
May 4
|
355
|
Brown Co.
|
2,250
|
|
9
|
356
|
Life Star Inc.
|
3,640
|
|
14
|
357
|
Ayres Co.
|
1,890
|
|
22
|
359
|
Brown Co.
|
2,820
|
|
|
|
|
10,600
|
a. Prepare a T account for the accounts receivable customer accounts.
b. Post the transactions from the revenue journal to the customer accounts, and determine their ending balances.
c. Prepare T accounts for the accounts receivable control and fees earned accounts. Post control totals to the two accounts, and determine the ending balances.
d. Verify the equality of the sum of the customer account balances and the accounts receivable control account balance.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The revenue and cash receipts journals for Star Productions Inc. are shown on the next page. The accounts receivable control account has a September 1, 2008, balance of $5,060, consisting of an amount due from Blockbuster Studios Inc.
|
REVENUE JOURNAL
|
|
|
Invoice
|
|
Post.
|
Accounts Rec. Dr.
|
|
Date
|
No.
|
Account Debited
|
Ref.
|
Fees Earned Cr.
|
|
2008
|
|
|
Central States Broadcasting Co.
|
?
|
1,500
|
|
Sept.
|
6
|
1
|
Gold Coast Media Inc.
|
?
|
6,100
|
|
|
14
|
2
|
Central States Broadcasting Co.
|
?
|
2,450
|
|
|
22
|
3
|
Blockbuster Studios Inc.
|
?
|
1,410
|
|
|
27
|
4
|
Alpha Communications Inc.
|
?
|
2,440
|
|
|
28
|
5
|
Central States Broadcasting Co.
|
?
|
13,900
|
|
|
30
|
|
|
|
(12) (41)
|
|
|
|
|
Fees
|
Accts.
|
|
|
|
|
Post.
|
Earned
|
Rec.
|
Cash
|
|
Date
|
Account Credited
|
Ref.
|
Cr.
|
Cr.
|
Dr.
|
|
2008
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Sept.
|
6
|
Blockbuster Studios Inc.
|
?
|
—
|
5,060
|
5,060
|
|
|
11
|
Fees Earned
|
|
3,400
|
|
3,400
|
|
|
18
|
Central States Broadcasting Co.
|
?
|
—
|
1,500
|
1,500
|
|
|
28
|
Gold Coast Media Inc.
|
?
|
—
|
6,100
|
6,100
|
|
|
30
|
|
|
3,400
|
12,660
|
16,060
|
|
(41)
|
(12)
|
(11)
|
Prepare the customer balance summary report, and determine that the total agrees with the ending balance of the accounts receivable control account.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Transactions related to revenue and cash receipts completed by Fine Tune Inc. during the month of October 2008 are as follows:
Oct. 2. Issued Invoice No. 512 to Bellows Co., $870.
4. Received cash from CMI Inc., on account, for $210.
8. Issued Invoice No. 513 to Gabriel Co., $275.
12. Issued Invoice No. 514 to Drake Inc., $730.
19. Received cash from Drake Inc., on account, $670.
22. Issued Invoice No. 515 to Electronic Central Inc., $180.
27. Received cash from Marshall Inc. for services provided, $105.
29. Received cash from Bellows Co. for invoice of October 2.
31. Received cash from McCleary Co. for services provided, $80.
Prepare a single column revenue journal and a cash receipts journal to record these transactions. Use the following column headings for the cash receipts journal: Fees Earned, Accounts Receivable, and Cash. Place a check mark (??) in the Post. Ref. column to indicate when the Accounts Receivable subsidiary ledger should be posted.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Orion Corp. has $2,490 in the August 1 balance of the accounts receivable account consisting of $1,030 from Dunn Co. and $1,460 from Townley Co. Transactions related to revenue and cash receipts completed by Orion Corp. during the month of August 2008 are as follows:
Aug. 3. Issued Invoice No. 622 for services provided to Phillips Corp., $2,340.
5. Received cash from Dunn Co., on account, for $1,030.
10. Issued Invoice No. 623 for services provided to Sunstream Aviation Inc., $4,260.
15. Received cash from Townley Co., on account, for $1,460.
18. Issued Invoice No. 624 for services provided to Amex Services Inc., $2,900.
23. Received cash from Phillips Corp. for Invoice No. 622.
28. Issued Invoice No. 625 to Townley Co., on account, for $2,380.
30. Received cash from Rogers Co. for services provided, $60.
a. Prepare a single column revenue journal and a cash receipts journal to record these transactions. Use the following column headings for the cash receipts journal: Fees Earned, Accounts Receivable, and Cash. Place a check mark (??) in the Post. Ref. column to indicate when the Accounts Receivable subsidiary ledger should be posted.
b. Prepare a customer balance summary report on August 31, 2008. Verify that the total of the customer balance summary report equals the balance of the accounts receivable control account on August 31, 2008
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Using the following purchases journal, identify each of the posting references, indicated by a letter, as representing (1) a posting to a general ledger account, (2) a posting to a subsidiary ledger account, or (3) that no posting is required.
|
PURCHASES JOURNAL
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Other Accounts Dr.
|
|
|
|
|
Accounts
|
Store
|
Office
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Post.
|
Payable
|
Supplies
|
Supplies
|
|
Post.
|
|
|
Date
|
Account Credited
|
Ref.
|
Cr.
|
Dr.
|
Dr.
|
Account
|
Ref.
|
Amount
|
|
2008
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
June
|
4
|
Corter Supply Co.
|
(a)
|
4,200
|
|
4,200
|
|
|
|
|
|
6
|
Coastal Insurance Co.
|
(b)
|
5,325
|
|
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
(c)
|
5,325
|
|
|
11
|
Office To Go
|
(d)
|
2,000
|
|
|
Office Equipment
|
(e)
|
2,000
|
|
|
13
|
Taylor Products
|
(f)
|
1,675
|
1,400
|
275
|
|
|
|
|
|
20
|
Office To Go
|
(g)
|
5,500
|
|
|
Store Equipment
|
(h)
|
5,500
|
|
|
27
|
Miller Supply Co.
|
(i)
|
2,740
|
2,740
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
30
|
|
|
21,440
|
4,140
|
4,475
|
|
|
12,825
|
|
(j)
|
(k)
|
(l)
|
|
|
(m)
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Using the following cash payments journal, identify each of the posting references, indicated by a letter, as representing (1) a posting to a general ledger account, (2) a posting to a subsidiary ledger account, or (3) that no posting is required.
|
CASH PAYMENTS JOURNAL
|
|
|
|
|
|
Other
|
Accounts
|
|
|
|
Ck.
|
|
Post.
|
Accounts
|
Payable
|
Cash
|
|
Date
|
No.
|
Account Debited
|
Ref.
|
Dr.
|
Dr.
|
Cr.
|
|
2008
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Oct.
|
3
|
611
|
Aquatic Systems Co.
|
(a)
|
|
4,000
|
4,000
|
|
|
5
|
612
|
Utilities Expense
|
(b)
|
325
|
|
325
|
|
|
10
|
613
|
Prepaid Rent
|
(c)
|
3,200
|
|
3,200
|
|
|
17
|
614
|
Advertising Expense
|
(d)
|
640
|
|
640
|
|
|
20
|
615
|
Derby Co.
|
(e)
|
|
1,450
|
1,450
|
|
|
22
|
616
|
Office Equipment
|
(f)
|
3,900
|
|
3,900
|
|
|
25
|
617
|
Office Supplies
|
(g)
|
250
|
|
250
|
|
|
27
|
618
|
Evans Co.
|
(h)
|
|
5,500
|
5,500
|
|
|
31
|
619
|
Salaries Expense
|
(i)
|
1,750
|
|
1,750
|
|
|
31
|
|
|
|
10,065
|
10,950
|
21,015
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
(j)
|
(k)
|
(l)
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The debits and credits from three related transactions are presented in the following creditor’s account taken from the accounts payable ledger.
|
NAME Moore Co. ADDRESS 101 W. Stratford Ave.
|
|
|
|
Post.
|
|
|
|
|
Date
|
Item
|
Ref.
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
Balance
|
|
2008
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Mar. 6
|
|
P34
|
|
12,200
|
12,200
|
|
10
|
|
J10
|
300
|
|
11,900
|
|
16
|
|
CP37
|
11,900
|
|
—
|
Describe each transaction, and identify the source of each posting.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The unadjusted trial balance of Iguana Laundromat at June 30, 2008, the end of the current fiscal year, is shown below.
|
Iguana Laundromat Unadjusted Trial Balance June 30, 2008
|
|
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
|
Balances
|
Balances
|
|
Cash
|
5,500
|
|
|
Laundry Supplies
|
9,450
|
|
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
4,300
|
|
|
Laundry Equipment
|
142,000
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation
|
|
75,200
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
4,900
|
|
Scott Mathis, Capital
|
|
53,800
|
|
Scott Mathis, Drawing
|
4,200
|
|
|
Laundry Revenue
|
|
116,100
|
|
Wages Expense
|
52,000
|
|
|
Rent Expense
|
19,650
|
|
|
Utilities Expense
|
10,200
|
|
|
Miscellaneous Expense
|
2,700
|
|
|
|
250,000
|
250,000
|
The data needed to determine year end adjustments are as follows:
a. Laundry supplies on hand at June 30 are $1,500.
b. Insurance premiums expired during the year are $3,200.
c. Depreciation of equipment during the year is $6,000.
d. Wages accrued but not paid at June 30 are $750.
Instructions
1. For each account listed in the unadjusted trial balance, enter the balance in a T account. Identify the balance as “June 30 Bal.” In addition, add T accounts for Wages Payable, Depreciation Expense, Laundry Supplies Expense, Insurance Expense, and Income Summary.
2. Optional: Enter the unadjusted trial balance on an end of period spreadsheet (work sheet) and complete the spreadsheet. Add the accounts listed in part (1) as needed.
3. Journalize and post the adjusting entries. Identify the adjustments by “Adj.” and the new balances as “Adj. Bal.”
4. Prepare an adjusted trial balance.
5. Prepare an income statement, a statement of owner’s equity (no additional investments were made during the year), and a balance sheet.
6. Journalize and post the closing entries. Identify the closing entries by “Clos.”
7. Prepare a post closing trial balance.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The ledger and trial balance of Wainscot Services Co. as of March 31, 2008, the end of the first month of its current fiscal year, are presented in the working papers. Data needed to determine the necessary adjusting entries are as follows:
a. Service revenue accrued at March 31 is $1,750.
b. Supplies on hand at March 31 are $400.
c. Insurance premiums expired during March are $250.
d. Depreciation of the building during March is $400.
e. Depreciation of equipment during March is $200.
f. Unearned rent at March 31 is $1,000.
g. Wages accrued at March 31 are $500.
Instructions
1. Optional: Complete the end of period spreadsheet (work sheet) using the adjustment data shown above.
2. Journalize and post the adjusting entries, inserting balances in the accounts affected.
3. Prepare an adjusted trial balance.
4. Prepare an income statement, a statement of owner’s equity, and a balance sheet.
5. Journalize and post the closing entries. Indicate closed accounts by inserting a line in both Balance columns opposite the closing entry. Insert the new balance of the capital account.
6. Prepare a post closing trial balance.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The unadjusted trial balance of Quick Repairs at October 31, 2008, the end of the current year, is shown below.
|
Quick Repairs Unadjusted Trial Balance October 31, 2008
|
|
|
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
|
|
|
Balances
|
Balances
|
|
|
11
|
Cash
|
2,950
|
|
|
|
13
|
Supplies
|
12,295
|
|
|
|
14
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
2,735
|
|
|
|
16
|
Equipment
|
95,650
|
|
|
|
17
|
Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment
|
|
21,209
|
|
|
18
|
Trucks
|
36,300
|
|
|
|
19
|
Accumulated Depreciation—Trucks
|
|
7,400
|
|
|
21
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
4,015
|
|
|
31
|
Rhonda Salter, Capital
|
|
67,426
|
|
|
32
|
Rhonda Salter, Drawing
|
6,000
|
|
|
|
41
|
Service Revenue
|
|
99,950
|
|
|
51
|
Wages Expense
|
26,925
|
|
|
|
53
|
Rent Expense
|
9,600
|
|
|
|
55
|
Truck Expense
|
5,350
|
|
|
|
59
|
Miscellaneous Expense
|
2,195
|
|
|
|
|
|
200,000
|
200,000
|
|
The data needed to determine year end adjustments are as follows:
a. Supplies on hand at October 31 are $7,120.
b. Insurance premiums expired during year are $2,000.
c. Depreciation of equipment during year is $4,200.
d. Depreciation of trucks during year is $2,200.
e. Wages accrued but not paid at October 31 are $600.
Instructions
1. For each account listed in the trial balance, enter the balance in the appropriate Balance column of a four column account and place a check mark (??) in the Posting Reference column.
2. Optional: Enter the unadjusted trial balance on an end of period spreadsheet (work sheet) and complete the spreadsheet. Add the accounts listed in part (3) as needed.
3. Journalize and post the adjusting entries, inserting balances in the accounts affected. The following additional accounts from Quick Repair’s chart of accounts should be used:
Wages Payable, 22; Supplies Expense, 52; Depreciation Expense—Equipment, 54; Depreciation Expense—Trucks, 56; Insurance Expense, 57.
4. Prepare an adjusted trial balance.
5. Prepare an income statement, a statement of owner’s equity (no additional investments were made during the year), and a balance sheet.
6. Journalize and post the closing entries. (Income Summary is account #33 in the chart of accounts.) Indicate closed accounts by inserting a line in both Balance columns opposite the closing entry.
7. Prepare a post closing trial balance.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
For the past several years, Dawn Lytle has operated a part time consulting business from her home. As of October 1, 2008, Dawn decided to move to rented quarters and to operate the business, which was to be known as Sky’s The Limit Consulting, on a full time basis. Sky’s The Limit Consulting entered into the following transactions during October:
Oct. 1. The following assets were received from Dawn Lytle: cash, $12,950; accounts receivable, $2,800; supplies, $1,500; and office equipment, $18,750. There were no liabilities received.
1. Paid three months’ rent on a lease rental contract, $3,600.
2. Paid the premiums on property and casualty insurance policies, $2,400.
4. Received cash from clients as an advance payment for services to be provided and recorded it as unearned fees, $4,150.
5. Purchased additional office equipment on account from Office Station Co., $2,500.
6. Received cash from clients on account, $1,900.
10. Paid cash for a newspaper advertisement, $325.
12. Paid Office Station Co. for part of the debt incurred on October 5, $1,250.
12. Recorded services provided on account for the period October 1–12, $3,750.
14. Paid part time receptionist for two weeks’ salary, $750.
17. Recorded cash from cash clients for fees earned during the period October 1–17, $6,250.
18. Paid cash for supplies, $600.
20. Recorded services provided on account for the period October 13–20, $2,100.
24. Recorded cash from cash clients for fees earned for the period October 17–24, $3,850.
26. Received cash from clients on account, $4,450.
27. Paid part time receptionist for two weeks’ salary, $750.
29. Paid telephone bill for October, $250.
31. Paid electricity bill for October, $300.
31. Recorded cash from cash clients for fees earned for the period October 25–31, $2,975.
31. Recorded services provided on account for the remainder of October, $1,500.
31. Dawn withdrew $5,000 for personal use.
Instructions
1. Journalize each transaction in a two column journal, referring to the following chart of accounts in selecting the accounts to be debited and credited. (Do not insert the account numbers in the journal at this time.)
|
11
|
Cash
|
31
|
Dawn Lytle, Capital
|
|
12
|
Accounts Receivable
|
32
|
Dawn Lytle, Drawing
|
|
14
|
Supplies
|
41
|
Fees Earned
|
|
15
|
Prepaid Rent
|
51
|
Salary Expense
|
|
16
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
52
|
Rent Expense
|
|
18
|
Office Equipment
|
53
|
Supplies Expense
|
|
19
|
Accumulated Depreciation
|
54
|
Depreciation Expense
|
|
21
|
Accounts Payable
|
55
|
Insurance Expense
|
|
22
|
Salaries Payable
|
59
|
Miscellaneous Expense
|
|
23
|
Unearned Fees
|
|
|
2. Post the journal to a ledger of four column accounts.
3. Prepare an unadjusted trial balance.
4. At the end of October, the following adjustment data were assembled. Analyze and use these data to complete parts (5) and (6).
a. Insurance expired during October is $200.
b. Supplies on hand on October 31 are $875.
c. Depreciation of office equipment for October is $675.
d. Accrued receptionist salary on October 31 is $150.
e. Rent expired during October is $1,550.
f. Unearned fees on October 31 are $1,150.
5. Optional: Enter the unadjusted trial balance on an end of period spreadsheet (work sheet) and complete the spreadsheet.
6. Journalize and post the adjusting entries.
7. Prepare an adjusted trial balance.
8. Prepare an income statement, a statement of owner’s equity, and a balance sheet.
9. Prepare and post the closing entries. (Income Summary is account #33 in the chart of accounts.) Indicate closed accounts by inserting a line in both the Balance columns opposite the closing entry.
10. Prepare a post closing trial balance.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Last Chance Company offers legal consulting advice to prison inmates. Last Chance Company prepared the end of period spreadsheet (work sheet) at the top of the following page at November 30, 2008, the end of the current fiscal year.
Instructions
1. Prepare an income statement for the year ended November 30.
2. Prepare a statement of owner’s equity for the year ended November 30. No additional investments were made during the year.
3. Prepare a balance sheet as of November 30.
4. On the basis of the end of period spreadsheet (work sheet), journalize the closing entries.
5. Prepare a post closing trial balance.
|
Last Chance Company End of Period Spreadsheet (Work Sheet)
|
|
For the Year Ended November 30, 2008
|
|
|
Unadjusted Trial Balance
|
Adjustments
|
Adjusted Trial Balance
|
Income Statement
|
Balance Sheet
|
|
Account Title
|
Dr.
|
Cr.
|
Dr.
|
Cr.
|
Dr.
|
Cr.
|
Dr.
|
Cr.
|
Dr.
|
Cr.
|
|
Cash
|
4,800
|
|
|
|
4,800
|
|
|
|
4,800
|
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
15,750
|
|
(a) 4,200
|
|
19,950
|
|
|
|
19,950
|
|
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
2,700
|
|
|
(b) 1,450
|
1,250
|
|
|
|
1,250
|
|
|
Supplies
|
2,025
|
|
|
(c) 1,525
|
500
|
|
|
|
500
|
|
|
Land
|
75,000
|
|
|
|
75,000
|
|
|
|
75,000
|
|
|
Building
|
205,000
|
|
|
|
205,000
|
|
|
|
205,000
|
|
|
Acc. Depr.—Building
|
|
76,000
|
|
(d) 2,000
|
|
78,000
|
|
|
|
78,000
|
|
Equipment
|
139,000
|
|
|
|
139,000
|
|
|
|
139,000
|
|
|
Acc. Depr.—Equipment
|
|
54,450
|
|
(e) 5,200
|
|
59,650
|
|
|
|
59,650
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
9,750
|
|
|
|
9,750
|
|
|
|
9,750
|
|
Unearned Rent
|
|
4,500
|
(g) 2,000
|
|
|
2,500
|
|
|
|
2,500
|
|
Corey Evans, Capital
|
|
318,800
|
|
|
|
318,800
|
|
|
|
318,800
|
|
Corey Evans, Drawing
|
15,000
|
|
|
|
15,000
|
|
|
|
15,000
|
|
|
Fees Revenue
|
|
286,500
|
|
(a) 4,200
|
|
290,700
|
|
290,700
|
|
|
|
Salaries & Wages Expense
|
144,300
|
|
(f) 2,700
|
|
147,000
|
|
147,000
|
|
|
|
|
Advertising Expense
|
94,800
|
|
|
|
94,800
|
|
94,800
|
|
|
|
|
Utilities Expense
|
27,000
|
|
|
|
27,000
|
|
27,000
|
|
|
|
|
Travel Expense
|
18,750
|
|
|
|
18,750
|
|
18,750
|
|
|
|
|
Misc. Expense
|
5,875
|
|
|
|
5,875
|
|
5,875
|
|
|
|
|
|
750,000
|
750,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Insurance Expense
|
|
|
(b) 1,450
|
|
1,450
|
|
1,450
|
|
|
|
|
Supplies Expense
|
|
|
(c) 1,525
|
|
1,525
|
|
1,525
|
|
|
|
|
Depr. Exp.—Building
|
|
|
(d) 2,000
|
|
2,000
|
|
2,000
|
|
|
|
|
Depr. Exp.—Equipment
|
|
|
(e) 5,200
|
|
5,200
|
|
5,200
|
|
|
|
|
Sal. & Wages Payable
|
|
|
|
(f) 2,700
|
|
2,700
|
|
|
|
2,700
|
|
Rent Revenue
|
|
|
|
(g) 2,000
|
|
2,000
|
|
2,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
19,075
|
19,075
|
764,100
|
764,100
|
303,600
|
292,700
|
460,500
|
471,400
|
|
Net loss
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
10,900
|
10,900
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
303,600
|
303,600
|
471,400
|
471,400
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Ultra Services Company is a financial planning services firm owned and operated by Chad Tillman. As of July 31, 2008, the end of the current fiscal year, the accountant for The Ultra Services Company prepared an end of period spreadsheet (work sheet), part of which is shown at the top of the next page.
Instructions
1. Prepare an income statement, a statement of owner’s equity (no additional investments were made during the year), and a balance sheet.
2. Journalize the entries that were required to close the accounts at July 31.
3. If the balance of Chad Tillman, Capital decreased $40,000 after the closing entries were posted, and the withdrawals remained the same, what was the amount of net income or net loss?
|
The Ultra Services Company End of Period Spreadsheet (Work Sheet)
|
|
For the Year Ended July 31, 2008
|
|
|
Income Statement
|
Balance Sheet
|
|
Cash
|
|
|
13,950
|
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
|
|
41,880
|
|
|
Supplies
|
|
|
8,400
|
|
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
|
|
7,500
|
|
|
Land
|
|
|
180,000
|
|
|
Buildings
|
|
|
360,000
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation—Buildings
|
|
|
|
217,200
|
|
Equipment
|
|
|
258,270
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment
|
|
|
|
122,700
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
|
|
33,300
|
|
Salaries Payable
|
|
|
|
3,300
|
|
Unearned Rent
|
|
|
|
1,500
|
|
Chad Tillman, Capital
|
|
|
|
340,500
|
|
Chad Tillman, Drawing
|
|
|
30,000
|
|
|
Service Fees
|
|
525,000
|
|
|
|
Rent Revenue
|
|
4,500
|
|
|
|
Salary Expense
|
219,000
|
|
|
|
|
Depreciation Expense—Equipment
|
28,500
|
|
|
|
|
Rent Expense
|
|
25,500
|
|
|
|
|
Supplies Expense
|
|
22,950
|
|
|
|
|
Utilities Expense
|
|
15,900
|
|
|
|
|
Depreciation Expense—Buildings
|
15,600
|
|
|
|
|
Repairs Expense
|
|
12,450
|
|
|
|
|
Insurance Expense
|
|
3,000
|
|
|
|
|
Miscellaneous Expense
|
|
5,100
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
348,000
|
529,500
|
900,000
|
718,500
|
|
Net income
|
|
181,500
|
|
|
181,500
|
|
|
|
529,500
|
529,500
|
900,000
|
900,000
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The unadjusted trial balance of Best Laundry at March 31, 2008, the end of the current fiscal year, is shown below
|
Best Laundry Unadjusted Trial Balance March 31, 2008
|
|
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
|
Balances
|
Balances
|
|
Cash
|
1,450
|
|
|
Laundry Supplies
|
3,750
|
|
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
2,400
|
|
|
Laundry Equipment
|
54,500
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation
|
|
20,500
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
3,100
|
|
Ryan Boyle, Capital
|
|
18,900
|
|
Ryan Boyle, Drawing
|
1,000
|
|
|
Laundry Revenue
|
|
82,500
|
|
Wages Expense
|
35,750
|
|
|
Rent Expense
|
18,000
|
|
|
Utilities Expense
|
6,800
|
|
|
Miscellaneous Expense
|
1,350
|
|
|
|
125,000
|
125,000
|
The data needed to determine year end adjustments are as follows:
a. Laundry supplies on hand at March 31 are $950.
b. Insurance premiums expired during the year are $2,000.
c. Depreciation of equipment during the year is $2,900.
d. Wages accrued but not paid at March 31 are $600.
Instructions
1. For each account listed in the unadjusted trial balance, enter the balance in a T account.
Identify the balance as “Mar. 31 Bal.” In addition, add T accounts for Wages Payable, Depreciation Expense, Laundry Supplies Expense, Insurance Expense, and Income Summary.
2. Optional: Enter the unadjusted trial balance on an end of period spreadsheet (work sheet) and complete the spreadsheet. Add the accounts listed in Part (1) as needed.
3. Journalize and post the adjusting entries. Identify the adjustments by “Adj.” and the new balances as “Adj. Bal.”
4. Prepare an adjusted trial balance.
5. Prepare an income statement, a statement of owner’s equity (no additional investments were made during the year), and a balance sheet.
6. Journalize and post the closing entries. Identify the closing entries by “Clos.”
7. Prepare a post closing trial balance.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The ledger and trial balance of Wainscot Services Co. as of March 31, 2008, the end of the first month of its current fiscal year, are presented in the working papers. Data needed to determine the necessary adjusting entries are as follows:
a. Service revenue accrued at March 31 is $2,000.
b. Supplies on hand at March 31 are $400.
c. Insurance premiums expired during March are $150.
d. Depreciation of the building during March is $625.
e. Depreciation of equipment during March is $200.
f. Unearned rent at March 31 is $1,800.
g. Wages accrued but not paid at March 31 are $600.
Instructions
1. Optional: Complete the end of period spreadsheet (work sheet) using the adjustment data shown above.
2. Journalize and post the adjusting entries, inserting balances in the accounts affected.
3. Prepare an adjusted trial balance.
4. Prepare an income statement, a statement of owner’s equity, and a balance sheet.
5. Journalize and post the closing entries. Indicate closed accounts by inserting a line in both Balance columns opposite the closing entry. Insert the new balance of the capital account.
6. Prepare a post closing trial balance.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The unadjusted trial balance of Reliable Repairs at December 31, 2008, the end of the current year, is shown at the top of the next page. The data needed to determine year end adjustments are as follows:
a. Supplies on hand at December 31 are $6,500.
b. Insurance premiums expired during the year are $2,500.
c. Depreciation of equipment during the year is $4,800.
d. Depreciation of trucks during the year is $3,500.
e. Wages accrued but not paid at December 31 are $1,000.
|
|
Reliable Repairs Unadjusted Trial Balance December 31, 2008
|
|
|
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
|
|
Balances
|
Balances
|
|
11
|
Cash
|
2,825
|
|
|
13
|
Supplies
|
10,820
|
|
|
14
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
7,500
|
|
|
16
|
Equipment
|
54,200
|
|
|
17
|
Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment
|
|
12,050
|
|
18
|
Trucks
|
50,000
|
|
|
19
|
Accumulated Depreciation—Trucks
|
|
27,100
|
|
21
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
12,015
|
|
31
|
Lee Mendoza, Capital
|
|
32,885
|
|
32
|
Lee Mendoza, Drawing
|
5,000
|
|
|
41
|
Service Revenue
|
|
90,950
|
|
51
|
Wages Expense
|
28,010
|
|
|
53
|
Rent Expense
|
8,100
|
|
|
55
|
Truck Expense
|
6,350
|
|
|
59
|
Miscellaneous Expense
|
2,195
|
|
|
|
|
175,000
|
175,000
|
Instructions
1. For each account listed in the unadjusted trial balance, enter the balance in the appropriate Balance column of a four column account and place a check mark (??) in the Posting Reference column.
2. Optional: Enter the unadjusted trial balance on an end of period spreadsheet (work sheet) and complete the spreadsheet. Add the accounts listed in part (3) as needed.
3. Journalize and post the adjusting entries, inserting balances in the accounts affected. The following additional accounts from Reliable’s chart of accounts should be used: Wages Payable, 22; Supplies Expense, 52; Depreciation Expense—Equipment, 54; Depreciation Expense— Trucks, 56; Insurance Expense, 57.
4. Prepare an adjusted trial balance.
5. Prepare an income statement, a statement of owner’s equity (no additional investments were made during the year), and a balance sheet.
6. Journalize and post the closing entries. (Income Summary is account #33 in the chart of accounts.) Indicate closed accounts by inserting a line in both Balance columns opposite the closing entry.
7. Prepare a post closing trial balance.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
For the past several years, Derrick Epstein has operated a part time consulting business from his home. As of June 1, 2008, Derrick decided to move to rented quarters and to operate the business, which was to be known as Luminary Consulting, on a full time basis. Luminary Consulting entered into the following transactions during June:
June 1. The following assets were received from Derrick Epstein: cash, $26,200; accounts receivable, $6,000; supplies, $2,800; and office equipment, $25,000. There were no liabilities received.
1. Paid three months’ rent on a lease rental contract, $5,250.
2. Paid the premiums on property and casualty insurance policies, $2,100.
4. Received cash from clients as an advance payment for services to be provided and recorded it as unearned fees, $2,700.
5. Purchased additional office equipment on account from Office Station Co., $5,000.
6. Received cash from clients on account, $3,000.
10. Paid cash for a newspaper advertisement, $200.
12. Paid Office Station Co. for part of the debt incurred on June 5, $1,000.
12. Recorded services provided on account for the period June 1–12, $5,100.
14. Paid part time receptionist for two weeks’ salary, $800.
17. Recorded cash from cash clients for fees earned during the period June 1–16, $3,500.
June 18. Paid cash for supplies, $750.
20. Recorded services provided on account for the period June 13–20, $1,100.
24. Recorded cash from cash clients for fees earned for the period June 17–24, $4,150.
26. Received cash from clients on account, $4,900.
27. Paid part time receptionist for two weeks’ salary, $800.
29. Paid telephone bill for June, $150.
30. Paid electricity bill for June, $400.
30. Recorded cash from cash clients for fees earned for the period June 25–30, $1,500.
30. Recorded services provided on account for the remainder of June, $1,000.
30. Derrick withdrew $8,000 for personal use.
Instructions
1. Journalize each transaction in a two column journal, referring to the following chart of accounts in selecting the accounts to be debited and credited. (Do not insert the account numbers in the journal at this time.)
|
11
|
Cash
|
31
|
Derrick Epstein, Capital
|
|
12
|
Accounts Receivable
|
32
|
Derrick Epstein, Drawing
|
|
14
|
Supplies
|
41
|
Fees Earned
|
|
15
|
Prepaid Rent
|
51
|
Salary Expense
|
|
16
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
52
|
Rent Expense
|
|
18
|
Office Equipment
|
53
|
Supplies Expense
|
|
19
|
Accumulated Depreciation
|
54
|
Depreciation Expense
|
|
21
|
Accounts Payable
|
55
|
Insurance Expense
|
|
22
|
Salaries Payable
|
59
|
Miscellaneous Expense
|
|
23
|
Unearned Fees
|
|
|
2. Post the journal to a ledger of four column accounts.
3. Prepare an unadjusted trial balance.
4. At the end of June, the following adjustment data were assembled. Analyze and use these data to complete parts (5) and (6).
a. Insurance expired during June is $175.
b. Supplies on hand on June 30 are $2,000.
c. Depreciation of office equipment for June is $500.
d. Accrued receptionist salary on June 30 is $120.
e. Rent expired during June is $1,500.
f. Unearned fees on June 30 are $1,875.
5. Optional: Enter the unadjusted trial balance on an end of period spreadsheet (work sheet) and complete the spreadsheet.
6. Journalize and post the adjusting entries.
7. Prepare an adjusted trial balance.
8. Prepare an income statement, a statement of owner’s equity, and a balance sheet.
9. Prepare and post the closing entries. (Income Summary is account #33 in the chart of accounts.) Indicate closed accounts by inserting a line in both the Balance columns opposite the closing entry.
10. Prepare a post closing trial balance.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The unadjusted trial balance of Dancin Music as of May 31, 2008, along with the adjustment data for the two months ended May 31, 2008, are shown in Chapter 3.
Based upon the adjustment data, the adjusted trial balance shown at the top of the following page was prepared.
Instructions
1. Optional. Using the data from Chapter 3, prepare an end of period spreadsheet (work sheet).
2. Prepare an income statement, a statement of owner’s equity, and a balance sheet. (Note: Kris Payne made investments in Dancin Music on April 1 and May 1, 2008.)
|
Dancin Music Adjusted Trial Balance May 31, 2008
|
|
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
|
Balances
|
Balances
|
|
Cash
|
12,085
|
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
4,250
|
|
|
Supplies
|
160
|
|
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
3,080
|
|
|
Office Equipment
|
5,000
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation—Office Equipment
|
|
100
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
5,750
|
|
Wages Payable
|
|
200
|
|
Unearned Revenue
|
|
2,400
|
|
Kris Payne, Capital
|
|
12,500
|
|
Kris Payne, Drawing
|
1,300
|
|
|
Fees Earned
|
|
18,550
|
|
Wages Expense
|
2,600
|
|
|
Office Rent Expense
|
2,600
|
|
|
Equipment Rent Expense
|
1,300
|
|
|
Utilities Expense
|
910
|
|
|
Music Expense
|
2,565
|
|
|
Advertising Expense
|
1,730
|
|
|
Supplies Expense
|
940
|
|
|
Insurance Expense
|
280
|
|
|
Depreciation Expense
|
100
|
|
|
Miscellaneous Expense
|
600
|
|
|
|
39,500
|
39,500
|
3. Journalize and post the closing entries. The income summary account is #33 in the ledger of Dancin Music. Indicate closed accounts by inserting a line in both Balance columns opposite the closing entry.
4. Prepare a post closing trial balance.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Kelly Pitney began her consulting business, Kelly Consulting, on April 1, 2008. The accounting cycle for Kelly Consulting for April, including financial statements, was illustrated on pages 161–174. During May, Kelly Consulting entered into the following transactions:
May 3. Received cash from clients as an advance payment for services to be provided and recorded it as unearned fees, $1,550.
5. Received cash from clients on account, $1,750.
9. Paid cash for a newspaper advertisement, $100.
13. Paid Office Station Co. for part of the debt incurred on April 5, $400.
15. Recorded services provided on account for the period May 1–15, $5,100.
16. Paid part time receptionist for two weeks’ salary including the amount owed on April 30, $750.
17. Recorded cash from cash clients for fees earned during the period May 1–16, $7,380.
20. Purchased supplies on account, $500.
21. Recorded services provided on account for the period May 16–20, $2,900.
25. Recorded cash from cash clients for fees earned for the period May 17–23, $4,200.
27. Received cash from clients on account, $6,600.
28. Paid part time receptionist for two weeks’ salary, $750.
30. Paid telephone bill for May, $150.
31. Paid electricity bill for May, $225.
31. Recorded cash from cash clients for fees earned for the period May 26–31, $2,875.
31. Recorded services provided on account for the remainder of May, $2,200.
31. Kelly withdrew $7,500 for personal use.
Instructions
1. The chart of accounts for Kelly Consulting is shown on page 163, and the post closing trial balance as of April 30, 2008, is shown on page 169. For each account in the post closing trial balance, enter the balance in the appropriate Balance column of a four column account. Date the balances May 1, 2008, and place a check mark (??) in the Post Reference column. Journalize each of the May transactions in a two column journal using Kelly Consulting’s chart of accounts. (Do not insert the account numbers in the journal at this time.)
2. Post the journal to a ledger of four column accounts.
3. Prepare an unadjusted trial balance.
4. At the end of May, the following adjustment data were assembled. Analyze and use these data to complete parts (5) and (6).
a. Insurance expired during May is $300.
b. Supplies on hand on May 31 are $950.
c. Depreciation of office equipment for May is $330.
d. Accrued receptionist salary on May 31 is $260.
e. Rent expired during May is $1,600.
f. Unearned fees on May 31 are $1,300.
5. Optional: Enter the unadjusted trial balance on an end of period spreadsheet (work sheet) and complete the spreadsheet.
6. Journalize and post the adjusting entries.
7. Prepare an adjusted trial balance.
8. Prepare an income statement, a statement of owner’s equity, and a balance sheet.
9. Prepare and post the closing entries. (Income Summary is account #33 in the chart of accounts.) Indicate closed accounts by inserting a line in both the Balance columns opposite the closing entry.
10. Prepare a post closing trial balance.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following is an excerpt from a telephone conversation between Jan Young, president of Cupboard Supplies Co., and Steve Nisbet, owner of Nisbet Employment Co.
Jan: Steve, you’re going to have to do a better job of finding me a new computer programmer. That last guy was great at programming, but he didn’t have any common sense.
Steve: What do you mean? The guy had a master’s degree with straight A’s.
Jan: Yes, well, last month he developed a new financial reporting system. He said we could do away with manually preparing an end of period spreadsheet (work sheet) and financial statements. The computer would automatically generate our financial statements with “a push of a button.”
Steve: So what’s the big deal? Sounds to me like it would save you time and effort.
Jan: Right! The balance sheet showed a minus for supplies!
Steve: Minus supplies? How can that be?
Jan: That’s what I asked.
Steve: So, what did he say?
Jan: Well, after he checked the program, he said that it must be right. The minuses were greater than the pluses.
Steve: Didn’t he know that Supplies can’t have a credit balance—it must have a debit balance?
Jan: He asked me what a debit and credit were.
Steve: I see your point.
1. Comment on (a) the desirability of computerizing Cupboard Supplies Co.’s financial reporting system, (b) the elimination of the end of period spreadsheet (work sheet) in a computerized accounting system, and (c) the computer programmer’s lack of accounting knowledge.
2. Explain to the programmer why Supplies could not have a credit balance.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Assume that you recently accepted a position with the First Security Bank as an assistant loan officer. As one of your first duties, you have been assigned the responsibility of evaluating a loan request for $80,000 from DiamondJewelry.com, a small proprietorship. In support of the loan application, Marion Zastrow, owner, submitted a “Statement of Accounts” (trial balance) for the first year of operations ended December 31, 2008.
|
DiamondJewelry.com Statement of Accounts December 31, 2008
|
|
Cash
|
2,050
|
|
|
Billings Due from Others
|
15,070
|
|
|
Supplies (chemicals, etc.)
|
7,470
|
|
|
Trucks
|
26,370
|
|
|
Equipment
|
8,090
|
|
|
Amounts Owed to Others
|
|
2,850
|
|
Investment in Business
|
|
23,500
|
|
Service Revenue
|
|
73,650
|
|
Wages Expense
|
30,050
|
|
|
Utilities Expense
|
7,330
|
|
|
Rent Expense
|
2,400
|
|
|
Insurance Expense
|
700
|
|
|
Other Expenses
|
470
|
|
|
|
100,000
|
100,000
|
1. Explain to Marion Zastrow why a set of financial statements (income statement, statement of owner’s equity, and balance sheet) would be useful to you in evaluating the loan request.
2. In discussing the “Statement of Accounts” with Marion Zastrow, you discovered that the accounts had not been adjusted at December 31. Analyze the “Statement of Accounts” and indicate possible adjusting entries that might be necessary before an accurate set of financial statements could be prepared.
3. Assuming that an accurate set of financial statements will be submitted by Marion Zastrow in a few days, what other considerations or information would you require before making a decision on the loan request?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
In groups of three or four, compare the balance sheets of two different companies, and present to the class a summary of the similarities and differences of the two companies. You may obtain the balance sheets you need from one of the following sources:
1. Your school or local library.
2. The investor relations department of each company.
3. The company’s Web site on the Internet.
4. EDGAR (Electronic Data Gathering, Analysis, and Retrieval), the electronic archives of financial statements filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission.
To obtain annual report information, key in a company name in the appropriate space. EdgarScan will list the reports available to you for the company you’ve selected. Select the most recent annual report filing, identified as a 10 K or 10 K405. EdgarScan provides an outline of the report, including the separate financial statements, which can also be selected in an Excel® spreadsheet.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The debits and credits from two transactions are presented in the following customer account:
|
NAME Sweet Tooth Confections
|
|
ADDRESS 1212 Lombard St.
|
|
Date
|
Item
|
Post. Ref.
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
Balance
|
|
July 1
|
Balance
|
|
|
|
625
|
|
7
|
Invoice 35
|
R12
|
86
|
|
711
|
|
31
|
Invoice 31
|
CR4
|
|
122
|
589
|
Describe each transaction and the source of each posting.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The debits and credits from two transactions are presented in the following creditor’s (supplier’s) account:
|
NAME Lassiter Services Inc.
|
|
ADDRESS 301 St. Bonaventure Ave.
|
|
Date
|
Item
|
Post. Ref.
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
Balance
|
|
Aug. 1
|
Balance
|
|
|
|
320
|
|
12
|
Invoice 101
|
CP36
|
200
|
|
120
|
|
22
|
Invoice 106
|
P16
|
|
140
|
260
|
Describe each transaction and the source of each posting.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Selected transactions of O’Malley Co. for the month of May are as follows:
|
a.
|
May
|
1.
|
Issued Check No. 1001 in payment of rent for May, $1,200.
|
|
b.
|
|
2.
|
Purchased office supplies on account from McMillan Co., $3,600.
|
|
c.
|
|
4.
|
Issued Check No. 1003 in payment of freight charges on the supplies purchased
|
|
|
|
|
on May 2, $320.
|
|
d.
|
|
8.
|
Provided services on account to Waller Co., Invoice No. 51, $4,500.
|
|
e.
|
|
9.
|
Issued Check No. 1005 for office supplies purchased, $450.
|
|
f.
|
|
10.
|
Received cash for office supplies sold to employees at cost, $120.
|
|
g.
|
|
11.
|
Purchased office equipment on account from Fender Office Products, $15,000.
|
|
h.
|
|
12.
|
Issued Check No. 1010 in payment of the supplies purchased from
|
|
|
|
|
McMillan Co. on May 2, $3,600.
|
|
i.
|
|
16
|
Provided services on account to Riese Co., Invoice No. 58, $8,000.
|
|
j.
|
|
18.
|
Received $4,500 from Waller Co. in payment of May 8 invoice.
|
|
k.
|
|
20.
|
Invested additional cash in the business, $10,000.
|
|
l.
|
|
25.
|
Provided services for cash, $15,900.
|
|
m.
|
|
30.
|
Issued Check No. 1040 for withdrawal of cash for personal use, $1,000.
|
|
n.
|
|
30.
|
Issued Check No. 1041 in payment of electricity and water invoices, $690.
|
|
o.
|
|
30.
|
Issued Check No. 1042 in payment of office and sales salaries for May, $15,800.
|
|
p.
|
|
31.
|
Journalized adjusting entries from the work sheet prepared for the fiscal
|
O’Malley Co. maintains a revenue journal, a cash receipts journal, a purchases journal, a cash payments journal, and a general journal. In addition, accounts receivable and accounts payable subsidiary ledgers are used.
Instructions
1. Indicate the journal in which each of the preceding transactions, (a) through (p), would be recorded.
2. Indicate whether an account in the accounts receivable or accounts payable subsidiary ledgers would be affected for each of the preceding transactions.
3. Journalize transactions (b), (c), (d), (h), and (j) in the appropriate journals.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
During the current month, the following errors occurred in recording transactions in the purchases journal or in posting from it.
- An invoice for $900 of supplies from Collins Co. was recorded as having been received from Collings Co., another supplier.
- A credit of $840 to Tanner Company was posted as $480 in the subsidiary ledger.
- An invoice for equipment of $6,500 was recorded as $5,500.
- The Accounts Payable column of the purchases journal was overstated by $2,000.
How will each error come to the bookkeeper’s attention, other than by chance discovery?
The Accounts Payable and Cash columns in the cash payments journal were unknowingly overstated by $100 at the end of the month. (a) Assuming no other errors in recording or posting, will the error cause the trial balance totals to be unequal? (b) Will the creditors ledger agree with the accounts payable control account?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following revenue transactions occurred during March:
Mar. 3. Issued Invoice No. 78 to Langley Co. for services provided on account, $450.
Mar 12. Issued Invoice No. 79 to Hitchcock Inc. for services provided on account, $215.
Mar 28. Issued Invoice No. 80 to Sunshine Inc. for services provided on account, $685.
Record these three transactions into the following revenue journal format:
| |
|
REVENUE JOURNAL
|
|
| |
Invoice
|
|
Post.
|
Accts. Rec. Dr.
|
|
Date
|
No.
|
Account Debited
|
Ref.
|
Fees Earned Cr.
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Analyzing capital leases, notes payable, preferred stock, and common stock Your conversation with Mr. Gerrard, which took place in February 2011, continued as follows:
Mr. Gerrard: I’ve been talking with my accountant about our capital expansion needs, which will be considerable during the next couple of years. To stay in a strong competitive position, we’re constantly buying new pieces of earthmoving equipment and replacing machinery that has become obsolete. What it all comes down to is financing, and it’s not easy to raise $10 million to $20 million all at once. There are a number of options, including dealer financing, but the interest rates offered by banks are usually lower.
Your reply: From reviewing your balance sheet, I can see that you’ve got a lot of notes payable already. How is your relationship with your bank?
Mr. Gerrard: Actually we use several banks and we have an excellent credit history, so getting the money is not a major problem. The problem is that we already owe more than $40 million on all of those notes and I don’t want to get overextended.
Your reply: Have you considered long term leases?
Mr. Gerrard: Yes. This is essentially how dealer financing works. Usually it is arranged as a lease with an option to buy the equipment after a number of years.
We’ve been actively looking into this with our Cat dealer for a couple of scrapers that we need to put on a big job immediately. I can show you one of the contracts involved.
Your reply: OK, I’ll have a look at the contract, but this sounds like a long term capital lease.
Mr. Gerrard: Yes, I think that’s what my accountant called it. What matters most to me is that we get the equipment in place ASAP; but if you could explain what the accounting implications would be of entering into these types of arrangements, that might put me at ease about it.
Your reply: No problem; will do. It would impact both your balance sheet and income statement, but in most respects a long term capital lease is treated very much like a long term note payable with a bank. I’ll give you a memo about it.
But what about looking into other sources of equity financing? Have you considered any of these options?
Mr. Gerrard: We’re a family business and want to keep it that way. Our shares are publicly traded, but we’re owned mostly by family members and employees.
We’ve got a lot of retained earnings, but that’s not the same thing as cash, you know. Should we be issuing bonds?
Your reply: Issuing bonds is possible, but I was thinking more on the lines of preferred stock. Are you familiar with this option?
Mr. Gerrard: Oh sure. That’s the cologne I wear! But other than that, I don’t know much about it. Isn’t preferred stock a lot like bonds payable?
Your reply: Maybe this is something else I should include in my memo: an explanation of the differences between common stock, preferred stock, and bonds payable.
Mr. Gerrard: Yes, please do.
Required:
a. When discussing capital leases with Mr. Gerrard, you commented, “It would impact both your balance sheet and income statement, but in most respects a long term capital lease is treated very much like a long term note payable with a bank.” Explain the accounting treatment of capital leases as compared to the accounting treatment of notes payable in terms that a nonaccountant could easily understand. Include in your answer both the balance sheet and income statement effects of capital leases. (Note: You do not need to make reference to the four criteria for capitalizing a lease.)
b. Assume you have reviewed the contract Mr. Gerrard provided concerning the dealer financing agreement for the purchase of two new scrapers. You have determined that the lease agreement would qualify as a capital lease. The present value of the lease payments would be $2 million. Use the horizontal model, or write the journal entry, to show Mr. Gerrard how this lease would affect the financial statements of Gerrard Construction Co.
c. Explain what Mr. Gerrard meant by his statement “We’ve got a lot of retained earnings, but that’s not the same thing as cash, you know.” Review the balance sheet at December 31, 2010, provided in Case 4.26. In which assets are most of the company’s retained earnings invested?
d. Explain to Mr. Gerrard what the similarities and differences are between bonds payable, preferred stock, and common stock.
e. Why would you recommend to Mr. Gerrard that his company consider issuing $10 million to $20 million of preferred stock rather than bonds payable?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Match the appropriate letter for the key term or concept to each definition provided (items 1–10). Note that not all key terms and concepts will be used.
|
a.
|
Revenues
|
k.
|
Freight collect
|
|
b.
|
Realization
|
l.
|
Gross profit (or gross margin)
|
|
c.
|
Earned
|
m.
|
Gross profit ratio (or gross margin ratio)
|
|
d.
|
Sales
|
n.
|
Sales mix
|
|
e.
|
Sales returns and allowances
|
o.
|
Operating expenses
|
|
f.
|
Net sales
|
p.
|
Income from operations
|
|
g.
|
Shipping terms
|
q.
|
Gains
|
|
h.
|
FOB destination
|
r.
|
Income before income taxes
|
|
i.
|
FOB shipping point
|
s.
|
Net income
|
|
j.
|
Freight prepaid
|
t.
|
Income before extraordinary items
|
1. Reductions in sales from product returns or adjustments in selling price.
2. A freight payment alternative meaning that freight is payable when the merchandise arrives at its destination.
3. The difference between gross profit and operating expenses.
4. The description of when title passes and whether buyer or seller is responsible for freight charges.
5. The difference between net sales and cost of goods sold.
6. A revenue recognition criterion that relates to the receipt of cash in exchange for the product or service.
7. Increases in net assets from incidental transactions and other events affecting an entity during a period except those that result from revenues of investments by owners.
8. The shipping term for passage of title from seller to buyer when the merchandise leaves the seller’s premises.
9. Gross sales less sales discounts and sales returns and allowances.
10. The shipping term for passage of title from seller to buyer when the merchandise arrives at its destination.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Match the appropriate letter for the key term or concept to each definition provided (items 1–10). Note that not all key terms and concepts will be used.
|
a.
|
Percentage of completion method
|
k.
|
Dilution
|
|
b.
|
Physical inventory
|
l.
|
Basic earnings per share
|
|
c.
|
Expenses
|
m.
|
Diluted earnings per share
|
|
d.
|
Cost of goods sold
|
n.
|
Extraordinary item
|
|
e.
|
Matching principle
|
o.
|
Discontinued operations
|
|
f.
|
Inventory cost flow assumption
|
p.
|
Net income attributable to
|
|
g.
|
Inventory shrinkage
|
|
noncontrolling interest
|
|
h.
|
Perpetual system
|
q.
|
Single step format
|
|
i.
|
Periodic system
|
r.
|
Multiple step format
|
|
j.
|
Cost of goods sold model
|
s.
|
Statement of cash flows
|
1. The financial statement that explains why cash changed during the fiscal period.
2. Inventory losses resulting from theft, deterioration, and record keeping errors.
3. Outflows or other using up of assets or incurrence of a liability during a period from delivering or producing goods, rendering services, or carrying out other activities that constitute the entity’s major operations.
4. A gain or loss from a transaction that both is unusual in nature and occurs infrequently, and is reported separately on the income statement.
5. An income statement format that includes subtotals for gross profit, operating income, and income before taxes.
6. An expense deducted from net sales to arrive at gross profit.
7. The reduction in earnings per share of common stock that can occur if convertible securities are actually converted to common stock.
8. An income statement item representing the noncontrolling stockholders’ share of the earnings of a subsidiary that have been included in the consolidated income statement.
9. Achieves a fair presentation of the results of a firm’s operations during a period by requiring the deduction of all expenses incurred in generating that period’s revenues from the revenues earned in the period.
10. Net income available to the common stockholders divided by the average number of shares of common stock outstanding during the period.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Calculate basic EPS Ringemup, Inc., had net income of $473,400 for its fiscal year ended October 31, 2010. During the year the company had outstanding 38,000 shares of $4.50, $50 par value preferred stock, and 105,000 shares of common stock.
Required:
Calculate the basic earnings per share of common stock for fiscal 2010.
Calculate basic EPS, and explain the EPS effect of convertible preferred Thrifty Co. reported net income of $465,000 for its fiscal year ended January 31, 2011. At the beginning of that fiscal year, 200,000 shares of common stock were outstanding. On October 31, 2010, an additional 60,000 shares were issued. No other changes in common shares outstanding occurred during the year. Also during the year the company paid the annual dividend on the 25,000 shares of 7%, $40 par value preferred stock that were also outstanding the entire year.
Required:
a. Calculate basic earnings per share of common stock for the year ended January 31, 2011.
b. If Thrifty Co.’s preferred stock were convertible into common stock, what additional calculation would be required?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Accrual to cash flows For each of the following items, calculate the cash sources or cash uses that should be recognized on the statement of cash flows for Baldin Co. for the year ended December 31, 2010:
a. Sales on account (all are collectible) amounted to $760,000, and accounts receivable decreased by $24,000. How much cash was collected from customers?
b. Income tax expense for the year was $148,000, and income taxes payable decreased by $34,000. How much cash was paid for income taxes?
c. Cost of goods sold amounted to $408,000, accounts payable increased by
$19,000, and inventories increased by $14,000. How much cash was paid to suppliers?
d. The net book value of buildings increased by $240,000. No buildings were sold, and depreciation expense for the year was $190,000. How much cash was paid to purchase buildings?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cash flows to accrual For each of the following items, calculate the amount of revenue or expense that should be recognized on the income statement for Pelkey Co. for the year ended December 31, 2010:
a. Cash collected from customers during the year amounted to $365,000, and accounts receivable increased by $30,000. How much were sales on account for the year ended December 31, 2010?
b. Cash payments for income taxes during the year were $232,000, and income taxes payable increased by $36,000. How much was income tax expense?
c. Cash paid to suppliers during the year amounted to $164,000, accounts payable decreased by $23,500, and inventories decreased by $10,000. How much was cost of goods sold?
d. The net book value of buildings increased by $125,000. No buildings were sold, and a new building costing $210,000 was purchased during the year. How much was depreciation expense?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Calculate operating income and net income The following information is available from the accounting records of Manahan Co. for the year ended December 31, 2010:
|
Net cash provided by financing activities
|
$112,000
|
|
Dividends paid.
|
18,000
|
|
Extraordinary loss from flood, net of tax savings of $35,000
|
105,000
|
|
Income tax expense
|
26,000
|
|
Other selling expenses.
|
13,000
|
|
Net sales
|
644,000
|
|
Advertising expense
|
45,000
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
62,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
368,000
|
|
General and administrative expenses.
|
143,000
|
Required:
a. Calculate the operating income for Manahan Co. for the year ended December 31, 2010.
b. Calculate the company’s net income for 2010.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Calculate operating income and net income The following information is available from the accounting records of Spenser Co. for the year ended December 31, 2010:
|
Selling, general, and administrative expenses
|
$ 51,000
|
|
Accounts payable
|
85,000
|
|
Extraordinary gain from lawsuit settlement, net of tax expense of $28,000.
|
104,000
|
|
Research and development expenses
|
37,000
|
|
Loss from discontinued operations net of tax savings of $5,000
|
16,000
|
|
Provision for income taxes.
|
74,000
|
|
Net sales
|
579,000
|
|
Interest expense
|
64,000
|
|
Net cash provided by operations
|
148,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
272,000
|
Required:
a. Calculate the operating income for Spenser Co. for the year ended December 31, 2010.
b. Calculate the company’s net income for 2010.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cash flows from operating, investing, and financing activities—direct method The following information is available from Gray Co.’s accounting records for the year ended December 31, 2010 (amounts in millions):
|
Cash dividends declared and paid.
|
$ 350
|
|
Retirement of bonds payable at maturity
|
200
|
|
Interest and taxes paid
|
150
|
|
Proceeds of common stock issued
|
550
|
|
Proceeds from the sale of land
|
125
|
|
Collections from customers
|
3,175
|
|
Cash paid to suppliers and employees
|
?
|
|
Purchase of buildings and equipment
|
?
|
Required:
a. The net cash provided by operating activities for Gray Co. for the year ended December 31, 2010, is $1,225 million. Calculate the cash paid to suppliers and employees.
b. The increase in cash for the year was $250 million. Calculate the amount of cash used to purchase buildings and equipment. Your answer to part a should be considered in your calculation.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Complete balance sheet and prepare a statement of cash flows—indirect method Following is a partially completed balance sheet for Hoeman, Inc., at December 31, 2011, together with comparative data for the year ended December 31, 2010. From the statement of cash flows for the year ended December 31, 2011, you determine the following:
• Net income for the year ended December 31, 2011, was $94,000.
• Dividends paid during the year ended December 31, 2011, were $67,000.
• Accounts receivable decreased $10,000 during the year ended December 31,
2011.
• The cost of new buildings acquired during 2011 was $125,000.
• No buildings were disposed of during 2011.
• The land account was not affected by any transactions during the year, but the fair market value of the land at December 31, 2011, was $178,000.
|
HOEMAN, INC.
|
|
|
|
Comparative Balance Sheets
|
|
|
|
At December 31, 2011 and 2010
|
|
|
|
2011
|
2010
|
|
Assets
|
|
|
|
Current assets:
|
|
|
Cash
|
$ 52,000
|
$ 46,000
|
|
Accounts receivable.
|
1 34,000
|
|
Inventory
|
156,000
|
176,000
|
|
Total current assets
|
$
|
$ 356,000
|
|
Land
|
$
|
140,000
|
|
Buildings
|
|
290,000
|
|
Less: Accumulated depreciation
|
(120,000)
|
(105,000)
|
|
Total land and buildings
|
$
|
$ 325,000
|
|
Total assets
|
$
|
$ 681,000
|
|
Liabilities
|
|
|
Current liabilities:
|
|
|
Accounts payable
|
$
|
$ 197,000
|
|
Note payable
|
155,000
|
124,000
|
|
Total current liabilities
|
$ 322,000
|
$ 321,000
|
|
Long term debt
|
$
|
$ 139,000
|
|
Owners’ Equity
|
|
|
Common stock
|
$ 50,000
|
$ 45,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
176,000
|
|
Total owners’ equity
|
$
|
$ 221,000
|
|
Total liabilities and owners’ equity
|
$
|
$ 681,000
|
Required:
a. Complete the December 31, 2011, balance sheet.
b. Prepare a statement of cash flows for the year ended December 31, 2011, using the indirect method.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Complete balance sheet and prepare a statement of changes in retained earnings Following is a statement of cash flows (indirect method) for Hartford, Inc., for the year ended December 31, 2011. Also shown is a partially completed comparative balance sheet as of December 31, 2011 and 2010:
|
HARTFORD, INC.
|
|
|
Statement of Cash Flows
|
|
|
For the Year Ended December 31, 2011
|
|
|
Cash Flows from Operating Activities:
|
|
|
Net income $
|
9,000
|
|
Add (deduct) items not affecting cash:
|
|
|
Depreciation expense
|
45,000
|
|
Decrease in accounts receivable
|
23,000
|
|
Increase in inventory
|
(7,000)
|
|
Increase in notes payable
|
12,000
|
|
Decrease in accounts payable
|
(6,000)
|
|
Net cash provided by operating activities.
|
$ 76,000
|
|
Cash Flows from Investing Activities:
|
|
|
Purchase of equipment.
|
$(50,000)
|
|
Purchase of buildings
|
(48,000)
|
|
Net cash used by investing activities
|
$(98,000)
|
|
Cash Flows from Financing Activities:
|
|
|
Proceeds from short term debt.
|
5,000
|
|
Cash used for retirement of long term debt
|
$(25,000)
|
|
Proceeds from issuance of common stock
|
10,000
|
|
Payment of cash dividends on common stock
|
(3,000)
|
|
Net cash used by financing activities
|
$(13,000)
|
|
Net decrease in cash for the year
|
$(35,000)
|
|
HARTFORD, INC.
|
|
|
|
Comparative Balance Sheets
|
|
|
|
At December 31, 2011 and 2010
|
|
|
|
|
2011
|
2010
|
|
Assets
|
|
|
|
Current assets:
|
|
|
|
Cash.
|
$
|
$ 88,000
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
73,000
|
|
Inventory.
|
56,000
|
|
|
Total current assets
|
$
|
$
|
|
Land
|
$
|
$ 40,000
|
|
Buildings and equipment
|
260,000
|
|
|
Less: Accumulated depreciation
|
$
|
(123,000)
|
|
Total land, buildings, and equipment.
|
$
|
$
|
|
Total assets
|
$
|
|
Liabilities
|
|
|
Current liabilities:
|
|
|
Accounts payable.
|
$
|
$ 29,000
|
|
Short term debt
|
32,000
|
|
|
Notes payable
|
$
|
36,000
|
|
Total current liabilities
|
$ 85,000
|
$
|
|
Long term debt
|
$
|
|
Owners’ Equity
|
|
|
Common stock
|
$ 40,000
|
$
|
|
Retained earnings
|
|
|
Total owners’ equity
|
$
|
$
|
|
Total liabilities and owners’ equity
|
$
|
$
|
Required:
a. Complete the December 31, 2011 and 2010, balance sheets.
b. Prepare a statement of changes in retained earnings for the year ended December 31, 2011.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Prepare balance sheet and retained earnings statement using statement of cash flows data Following are a statement of cash flows (indirect method) for Harris, Inc., for the year ended December 31, 2011, and the firm’s balance sheet at December 31, 2010:
|
HARRIS, INC.
|
|
|
Statement of Cash Flows
|
|
|
For the Year Ended December 31, 2011
|
|
|
Cash Flows from Operating Activities:
|
|
|
Net income
|
$ 13,000
|
|
Add (deduct) items not affecting cash:
|
|
|
Depreciation expense
|
29,000
|
|
Increase in accounts receivable
|
(6,000)
|
|
Decrease in merchandise inventory.
|
30,000
|
|
Increase in accounts payable
|
3,000
|
|
Net cash provided by operating activities
|
$ 69,000
|
|
Cash Flows from Investing Activities:
|
|
Purchase of buildings
|
(90,000)
|
|
Proceeds from sale of land at its cost
|
7,000
|
|
Net cash used by investing activities
|
$(83,000)
|
|
Cash Flows from Financing Activities:
|
|
Payment of short term debt
|
(4,000)
|
|
Payment of notes payable
|
(9,000)
|
|
Proceeds from issuance of long term debt
|
15,000
|
|
Proceeds from issuance of common stock
|
8,000
|
|
Payment of cash dividends on common stock
|
(5,000)
|
|
Net cash provided by financing activities
|
$ 5,000
|
|
Net decrease in cash for the year
|
$ (9,000)
|
|
|
|
|
HARRIS, INC.
|
|
|
Balance Sheet
|
|
|
At December 31, 2010
|
|
|
Assets
|
|
|
Cash
|
$ 15,000
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
61,000
|
|
Merchandise inventory
|
76,000
|
|
Total current assets.
|
$152,000
|
|
Land
|
34,000
|
|
Buildings
|
118,000
|
|
Less: Accumulated depreciation.
|
(72,000)
|
|
Total land and buildings
|
$ 80,000
|
|
Total assets
|
$232,000
|
|
Liabilities
|
|
Accounts payable
|
$ 58,000
|
|
Short term debt
|
16,000
|
|
Notes payable
|
33,000
|
|
Total current liabilities
|
$107,000
|
|
Long term debt
|
50,000
|
|
Owners’ Equity
|
|
Common stock, no par
|
$ 20,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
55,000
|
|
Total owners’ equity
|
$ 75,000
|
|
Total liabilities and owners’ equity
|
$232,000
|
|
|
|
Required:
a. Using the preceding information, prepare the balance sheet for Harris, Inc., at December 31, 2011.
b. Prepare a statement of changes in retained earnings for the year ended December 31, 2011.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Prepare statement of cash flows (indirect method) using balance sheet data Following are comparative balance sheets for Millco, Inc., at January 31 and February 28, 2011:
|
MILLCO, INC.
|
|
|
|
Balance Sheets
|
|
|
|
February 28 and January 31, 2011
|
|
|
|
|
February 28
|
January 31
|
|
Assets
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
$ 42,000
|
$ 37,000
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
64,000
|
53,000
|
|
Merchandise inventory
|
81,000
|
94,000
|
|
Total current assets.
|
$187,000
|
$184,000
|
|
Plant and equipment:
|
|
Production equipment
|
166,000
|
152,000
|
|
Less: Accumulated depreciation
|
(24,000)
|
(21,000)
|
|
Total assets
|
$329,000
|
$315,000
|
|
Liabilities
|
|
|
Accounts payable
|
$ 37,000
|
$ 41,000
|
|
Short term debt
|
44,000
|
44,000
|
|
Other accrued liabilities
|
21,000
|
24,000
|
|
Total current liabilities
|
$102,000
|
$109,000
|
|
Long term debt
|
33,000
|
46,000
|
|
Total liabilities
|
$135,000
|
$155,000
|
|
Owners’ Equity
|
|
|
|
Common stock, no par value, 40,000 shares authorized,
|
|
|
|
30,000 and 28,000 shares issued, respectively
|
|
$104,000
|
|
Retained earnings:
|
|
|
Beginning balance
|
$ 64,000
|
$ 43,000
|
|
Net income for month.
|
36,000
|
29,000
|
|
Dividends
|
(10,000)
|
(8,000)
|
|
Ending balance
|
$ 90,000
|
$ 64,000
|
|
Total owners’ equity
|
$194,000
|
$160,000
|
|
Total liabilities and owners’ equity
|
$329,000
|
$315,000
|
Required:
Prepare a statement of cash flows that explains the change that occurred in cash during the month. You may assume that the change in each balance sheet amount is due to a single event (for example, the change in the amount of production equipment is not the result of both a purchase and sale of equipment). Use the space to the right of the January 31 data to enter the difference between the February 28 and January 31 amounts of each balance sheet item; these are the amounts that will be in your solution.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Using cash flow information—The Coca Cola Company Following are comparative statements of cash flows, as reported by The Coca Cola Company in its 2008 annual
|
THE COCA COLA COMPANY AND SUBSIDIARIES
|
|
|
|
|
Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows
|
|
|
|
|
Year Ended December 31 (in millions)
|
|
|
|
|
|
2008
|
2007
|
2006
|
|
Operating Activities (details omitted)
|
|
|
|
|
Net cash provided by operating activities
|
$ 7,571
|
$ 7,150
|
$ 5,957
|
|
Investing Activities
|
|
|
|
|
Acquisitions and investments, principally beverage
|
|
|
|
|
and bottling companies and trademarks
|
(759)
|
(5,653)
|
(901)
|
|
Purchases of other investments
|
(240)
|
(99)
|
(82)
|
|
Proceeds from disposals of bottling companies
|
|
|
|
|
and other investments
|
479
|
448
|
640
|
|
Purchases of property, plant, and equipment
|
(1,968)
|
(1,648)
|
(1,407)
|
|
Proceeds from disposals of property, plant,
|
|
|
|
|
and equipment
|
129
|
239
|
112
|
|
Other investing activities
|
(4)
|
(6)
|
(62)
|
|
Net cash used in investing activities
|
(2,363)
|
(6,719)
|
(1,700)
|
|
Financing Activities
|
|
|
|
|
Issuances of debt
|
4,337
|
9,979
|
617
|
|
Payments of debt
|
(4,308)
|
(5,638)
|
(2,021)
|
|
Issuances of stock
|
586
|
1,619
|
148
|
|
Purchases of stock for treasury
|
(1,079)
|
(1,838)
|
(2,416)
|
|
Dividends
|
(3,521)
|
(3,149)
|
(2,911)
|
|
Net cash provided by (used in) financing activities
|
(3,985)
|
973
|
$ (6,583)
|
|
Effect of Exchange Rate Changes on
|
|
|
|
|
Cash and Cash Equivalents
|
(615)
|
249
|
65
|
|
Cash and Cash Equivalents
|
|
|
|
|
Net increase (decrease) during the year
|
608
|
1,653
|
(2,261)
|
|
Balance at beginning of the year
|
4,093
|
2,440
|
4,701
|
|
Balance at end of year
|
$ 4,701
|
$ 4,093
|
$ 2,440
|
Required:
a. Briefly review the consolidated statements of cash flows, and then provide an overall evaluation of the “big picture” during the three years presented for Coca Cola. Have operating cash flows been sufficient to meet investing needs and to pay dividends? b. Were there significant changes to any of the specific line item details that you think would require further explanation or analysis?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
An accountant prepared the following post closing trial balance:
|
Honest Sam’s Repair Co. Post Closing Trial Balance July 31, 2008
|
|
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
|
Balances
|
Balances
|
|
Cash
|
12,915
|
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
46,620
|
|
|
Supplies
|
|
2,770
|
|
Equipment
|
|
88,200
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment
|
27,970
|
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
15,750
|
|
|
Salaries Payable
|
|
3,780
|
|
Unearned Rent
|
7,560
|
|
|
Samantha Marcus, Capital
|
95,445
|
|
|
|
206,260
|
94,750
|
Prepare a corrected post closing trial balance. Assume that all accounts have normal balances and that the amounts shown are correct.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The steps performed in completing an end of period spreadsheet (work sheet) are listed below in random order.
a. Extend the adjusted trial balance amounts to the Income Statement columns and the Balance Sheet columns.
b. Enter the adjusting entries into the spreadsheet (work sheet), based upon the adjustment data.
c. Add the Debit and Credit columns of the Unadjusted Trial Balance columns of the spreadsheet (work sheet) to verify that the totals are equal.
d. Enter the amount of net income or net loss for the period in the proper Income Statement column and Balance Sheet column.
e. Add the Debit and Credit columns of the Balance Sheet and Income Statement columns of the spreadsheet (work sheet) to verify that the totals are equal.
f. Enter the unadjusted account balances from the general ledger into the Unadjusted Trial Balance columns of the spreadsheet (work sheet).
g. Add or deduct adjusting entry data to trial balance amounts, and extend amounts to the Adjusted Trial Balance columns.
h. Add the Debit and Credit columns of the Adjustments columns of the spreadsheet (work sheet) to verify that the totals are equal.
i. Add the Debit and Credit columns of the Balance Sheet and Income Statement columns of the spreadsheet (work sheet) to determine the amount of net income or net loss for the period.
j. Add the Debit and Credit columns of the Adjusted Trial Balance columns of the spreadsheet (work sheet) to verify that the totals are equal.
Indicate the order in which the preceding steps would be performed in preparing and completing a spreadsheet (work sheet).
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Dakota Services Co. offers cleaning services to business clients. The trial balance for Dakota Services Co. has been prepared on the end of period spreadsheet (work sheet) for the year ended July 31, 2008, shown below.
|
Dakota Services Co. End of Period Spreadsheet (Work Sheet)
|
|
For the Year Ended July 31, 2008
|
|
|
Unadjusted
|
|
Adjusted
|
|
|
Trial Balance
|
Adjustments
|
Trial Balance
|
|
Account Title
|
Dr.
|
Cr.
|
Dr.
|
Cr.
|
Dr.
|
Cr.
|
|
Cash
|
4
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
25
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Supplies
|
4
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
6
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Land
|
25
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Equipment
|
16
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Accum. Depr.—Equipment
|
|
1
|
|
|
|
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
13
|
|
|
|
|
|
Wages Payable
|
|
0
|
|
|
|
|
|
Christina Keene, Capital
|
|
56
|
|
|
|
|
|
Christina Keene, Drawing
|
4
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Fees Earned
|
|
30
|
|
|
|
|
|
Wages Expense
|
8
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Rent Expense
|
4
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Insurance Expense
|
0
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Utilities Expense
|
3
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Depreciation Expense
|
0
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Supplies Expense
|
0
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Miscellaneous Expense
|
1
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
100
|
100
|
|
|
|
|
The data for year end adjustments are as follows:
a. Fees earned, but not yet billed, $5.
b. Supplies on hand, $1.
c. Insurance premiums expired, $4.
d. Depreciation expense, $2.
e. Wages accrued, but not paid, $1.
Enter the adjustment data, and place the balances in the Adjusted Trial Balance columns.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Dakota Services Co. offers cleaning services to business clients. Complete the following end of period spreadsheet (work sheet) for Dakota Services Co.
|
Dakota Services Co. End of Period Spreadsheet (Work Sheet)
|
|
For the Year Ended July 31, 2008
|
|
|
Adjusted
|
Income
|
|
|
|
Trial Balance
|
Statement
|
Balance Sheet
|
|
Account Title
|
Dr.
|
Cr.
|
Dr.
|
Cr.
|
Dr.
|
Cr.
|
|
Cash
|
4
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
30
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Supplies
|
1
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
2
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Land
|
25
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Equipment
|
16
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Accum. Depr.—Equipment
|
|
3
|
|
|
|
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
13
|
|
|
|
|
|
Wages Payable
|
|
1
|
|
|
|
|
|
Christina Keene, Capital
|
|
56
|
|
|
|
|
|
Christina Keene, Drawing
|
4
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Fees Earned
|
|
35
|
|
|
|
|
|
Wages Expense
|
9
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Rent Expense
|
4
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Insurance Expense
|
4
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Utilities Expense
|
3
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Depreciation Expense
|
2
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Supplies Expense
|
3
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Miscellaneous Expense
|
1
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
108
|
108
|
|
|
|
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Blink On Company maintains and repairs warning lights, such as those found on radio towers and lighthouses. Blink On Company prepared the end of period spreadsheet (work sheet) at the top of the following page at March 31, 2008, the end of the current fiscal year:
|
Blink On Company End of Period Spreadsheet (Work Sheet)
|
|
For the Year Ended March 31, 2008
|
| |
Unadjusted
|
|
|
Adjusted
|
|
|
|
|
|
| |
Trial Balance
|
Adjustments
|
Trial Balance
|
Income Statement
|
Balance Sheet
|
|
Account Title
|
Dr.
|
Cr.
|
Dr.
|
Cr.
|
Dr.
|
Cr.
|
Dr.
|
Cr.
|
Dr.
|
Cr.
|
|
Cash
|
6,300
|
|
|
|
6,300
|
|
|
|
6,300
|
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
18,900
|
|
(a) 3,500
|
|
22,400
|
|
|
|
22,400
|
|
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
4,200
|
|
|
(b) 2,800
|
1,400
|
|
|
|
1,400
|
|
|
Supplies
|
2,730
|
|
|
(c) 1,600
|
1,130
|
|
|
|
1,130
|
|
|
Land
|
98,000
|
|
|
|
98,000
|
|
|
|
98,000
|
|
|
Building
|
140,000
|
|
|
|
140,000
|
|
|
|
140,000
|
|
|
Acc. Depr.—Building
|
100,300
|
|
(d) 1,400
|
|
101,700
|
|
|
|
101,700
|
|
Equipment
|
100,500
|
|
|
|
100,500
|
|
|
|
100,500
|
|
|
Acc. Depr.—Equipment
|
85,100
|
|
(e) 3,200
|
|
88,300
|
|
|
|
88,300
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
5,700
|
|
|
|
5,700
|
|
|
|
5,700
|
|
Unearned Rent
|
2,100
|
(g) 1,200
|
|
|
900
|
|
|
|
900
|
|
Amanda Ayers, Capital
|
78,100
|
|
|
|
78,100
|
|
|
|
78,100
|
|
Amanda Ayers, Drawing
|
5,600
|
|
|
|
5,600
|
|
|
|
5,600
|
|
|
Fees Revenue
|
253,700
|
|
(a) 3,500
|
|
257,200
|
|
257,200
|
|
|
|
Salaries & Wages Expense
|
102,500
|
|
(f) 1,800
|
|
104,300
|
|
104,300
|
|
|
|
|
Advertising Expense
|
21,700
|
|
|
|
21,700
|
|
21,700
|
|
|
|
|
Utilities Expense
|
11,400
|
|
|
|
11,400
|
|
11,400
|
|
|
|
|
Repairs Expense
|
8,850
|
|
|
|
8,850
|
|
8,850
|
|
|
|
|
Misc. Expense
|
4,320
|
|
|
|
4,320
|
|
4,320
|
|
|
|
| |
525,000
|
525,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Insurance Expense
|
|
(b) 2,800
|
|
2,800
|
|
2,800
|
|
|
|
|
Supplies Expense
|
|
(c) 1,600
|
|
1,600
|
|
1,600
|
|
|
|
|
Depr. Exp.—Building
|
(d) 1,400
|
|
1,400
|
|
1,400
|
|
|
|
|
Depr. Exp.—Equipment
|
(e) 3,200
|
|
3,200
|
|
3,200
|
|
|
|
|
Salaries & Wages Payable
|
|
(f) 1,800
|
|
1,800
|
|
|
|
1,800
|
|
Rent Revenue
|
|
|
(g) 1,200
|
|
1,200
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
15,500
|
15,500
|
534,900
|
534,900
|
159,570
|
258,400
|
375,330
|
276,500
|
|
Net income
|
|
|
|
|
|
98,830
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|
|
258,400
|
258,400
|
375,330
|
375,330
|
Instructions
1. Prepare an income statement for the year ended March 31.
2. Prepare a statement of owner’s equity for the year ended March 31. No additional investments were made during the year.
3. Prepare a balance sheet as of March 31.
4. Based upon the end of period spreadsheet (work sheet), journalize the closing entries.
5. Prepare a post closing trial balance.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Nevus Company is an investigative services firm that is owned and operated by Stacey Vargas. On April 30, 2008, the end of the current fiscal year, the accountant for The Nevus Company prepared an end of period spreadsheet (work sheet), a part of which is shown at the top of the following page.
Instructions
1. Prepare an income statement, statement of owner’s equity (no additional investments were made during the year), and a balance sheet.
2. Journalize the entries that were required to close the accounts at April 30.
3. If Stacey Vargas, Capital decreased $35,000 after the closing entries were posted, and the withdrawals remained the same, what was the amount of net income or net loss?
|
The Nevus Company End of Period Spreadsheet (Work Sheet)
|
|
For the Year Ended April 30, 2008
|
| |
Income Statement
|
Balance Sheet
|
|
Cash
|
|
|
9,000
|
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
37,200
|
|
|
Supplies
|
|
|
3,500
|
|
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
|
4,800
|
|
|
Equipment
|
|
169,500
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment
|
55,200
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
|
10,500
|
|
Salaries Payable
|
|
|
2,500
|
|
Unearned Rent
|
|
|
3,000
|
|
Stacey Vargas, Capital
|
|
142,800
|
|
Stacey Vargas, Drawing
|
16,000
|
|
|
Service Fees
|
363,000
|
|
|
|
Rent Revenue
|
7,000
|
|
|
|
Salary Expense
|
270,000
|
|
|
|
|
Rent Expense
|
37,000
|
|
|
|
|
Supplies Expense
|
8,000
|
|
|
|
|
Depreciation Expense—Equipment
|
7,000
|
|
|
|
|
Utilities Expense
|
6,400
|
|
|
|
|
Repairs Expense
|
6,200
|
|
|
|
|
Insurance Expense
|
4,800
|
|
|
|
|
Miscellaneous Expense
|
4,600
|
|
|
|
| |
344,000
|
370,000
|
240,000
|
214,000
|
|
Net income
|
26,000
|
|
|
26,000
|
| |
370,000
|
370,000
|
240,000
|
240,000
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Lessons from the Subprime Financial Crisis:
When Are Financial Derivatives Likely to Be a Worldwide Time Bomb? Although financial derivatives can be useful in hedging risk, the AIG blowup discussed in Chapter 8 illustrates that they can pose a real danger to the financial system. Indeed, Warren Buffet warned about the dangers of financial derivatives by characterizing them as “financial weapons of mass destruction.” Particularly scary are the notional amounts of derivatives contracts—more than $500 trillion worldwide. What does the recent subprime financial crisis tell us about when financial derivatives are likely to be a time bomb that could bring down the world financial system? There are two major concerns about financial derivatives. The first is that financial derivatives allow financial institutions to increase their leverage; that is, these institutions can in effect hold an amount of the underlying asset that is many times greater than the amount of money they have had to put up. Increasing their leverage enables them to take huge bets, which if they are wrong can bring down the institution. This is exactly what AIG did, to its great regret, when it plunged into the credit default swap market. Even more of a problem was that AIG’s speculation in the credit default swap (CDS) market had the potential to bring down the whole financial system. An important lesson from the subprime financial crisis is that having one player take huge positions in a derivatives market is highly dangerous. A second concern is that banks have holdings of huge notional amounts of financial derivatives, particularly interest rate and currency swaps, that greatly exceed the amount of bank capital, and so these derivatives expose the banks to serious risk of failure. Banks are indeed major players in the financial derivatives markets, particularly in the interest rate and currency swaps market, where our earlier analysis has shown that they are the natural market makers because they can act as intermediaries between two counterparties who would not make the swap without their involvement. However, looking at the notional amount of interest rate and currency swaps at banks gives a very misleading picture of their risk exposure. Because banks act as intermediaries in the swap markets, they are typically exposed only to credit risk—a default by one of their counterparties. Furthermore, these swaps, unlike loans, do not involve payments of the notional amount but rather the much smaller payments that are based on the notional amounts. For example, in the case of a 7% interest rate, the payment is only $70,000 for a $1 million swap. Estimates of the credit exposure from swap contracts indicate that they are on the order of only 1% of the notional value of the contracts and that credit exposure at banks from derivatives is generally less than a quarter of their total credit exposure from loans. Banks’ credit exposures from their derivative positions are thus not out of line with other credit exposures they face. Furthermore, an analysis by the GAO indicated that actual credit losses incurred by banks in their derivatives contracts have been very small, on the order of 0.2% of their gross credit exposure. Indeed, during the recent subprime financial crisis, in which the financial system was put under great stress, derivatives exposure at banks has not been a serious problem. The conclusion is that recent events indicate that financial derivatives pose serious dangers to the financial system, but some of these dangers have been overplayed. The biggest danger occurs in trading activities of financial institutions, and this is particularly true for credit derivatives, as was illustrated by AIG’s activities in the CDS market. As discussed in Chapter 18, regulators have been paying increased attention to this danger and are continuing to develop new disclosure requirements and regulatory guidelines for how derivatives trading should be done. Of particular concern is the need for financial institutions to disclose their exposure in derivatives contracts, so that regulators can make sure that a large institution is not playing too large a role in these markets and does not have too large an exposure to derivatives relative to its capital, as was the case for AIG. Another concern is that derivatives, particularly credit derivatives, need to have a better clearing mechanism so that the failure of one institution does not bring down many others whose net derivatives positions are small, even though they have many offsetting positions. Better clearing could be achieved either by having these derivatives traded in an organized exchange like a futures market, or by having one clearing organization net out trades. Regulators such as the Federal Reserve Bank of New York have been active in making proposals along these lines. The credit risk exposure posed by interest rate derivatives, by contrast, seems to be manageable with standard methods of dealing with credit risk, both by managers of financial institutions and the institutions’ regulators. New regulations for derivatives markets are sure to come in the wake of the subprime financial crisis. The industry has also had a wake up call as to where the dangers in derivatives products might lie. There is now the hope that the time bomb arising from derivatives can be defused with the appropriate effort on the part of the markets and regulators.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Match the appropriate letter for the key term or concept to each definition provided (items 1–10). Note that not all key terms and concepts will be used.
|
a.
|
Accumulated other comprehensive income (loss)
|
j. k.
|
Cumulative dividend Dividend declaration date
|
|
b.
|
Additional paid in capital
|
l.
|
Dividend record date
|
|
c.
|
Authorized (shares of stock)
|
m.
|
Dividend payment date
|
|
d.
|
Issued (shares of stock)
|
n.
|
Ex dividend date
|
|
e.
|
Outstanding (shares of stock)
|
o.
|
Stock dividend
|
|
f.
|
Treasury stock
|
p.
|
Stock split
|
|
g.
|
Preemptive right
|
q.
|
Cumulative foreign currency translation adjustment
|
|
h.
|
Preferred stock
|
|
|
|
i.
|
Dividend
|
|
|
1. A feature of preferred stock requiring that any missed dividends be paid before dividends can be paid on common stock.
2. The difference between the total amount invested by the owners and the par value or stated value of the stock issued. Often called capital in excess of par value (or stated value) .
3. Shares of a firm’s stock that have been reacquired by the firm.
4. The number of shares of a class of stock that have been sold to stockholders.
5. The class of stock representing ownership of a corporation that has certain preferences relative to the common stock, usually including a priority claim to dividends.
6. The right of a stockholder to purchase shares from any additional shares sold in proportion to the stockholder’s present percentage of ownership.
7. The date used to determine the stockholders who will receive a dividend.
8. A distribution of additional shares to existing stockholders in proportion to their existing holdings. The additional shares issued usually amount to 100% or more of the previously issued shares.
9. The number of shares of a class of stock held by stockholders.
10. A distribution of earnings to the owners of a corporation.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Review exercise—calculate net income At the beginning of the current fiscal year, the balance sheet of Hughey, Inc., showed owners’ equity of $520,000. During the year, liabilities increased by $21,000 to $234,000; paid in capital increased by $40,000 to $175,000; and assets increased by $260,000. Dividends declared and paid during the year were $55,000.
Required:
Calculate net income or loss for the year.
|
|
|
|
|
|
OE
|
|
|
A
|
=
|
L
|
+
|
PIC
|
+
|
RE
|
|
Beginning
|
$
|
=
|
|
+
|
|
+
|
|
|
Changes
|
|
=
|
|
+
|
|
+
|
|
|
Ending
|
|
=
|
|
+
|
|
+
|
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Review exercise—calculate retained earnings From the following data, calculate the Retained Earnings balance as of December 31, 2011:
|
Retained earnings, December 31, 2010
|
$346,400
|
|
Cost of buildings purchased during 2011
|
41,800
|
|
Net income for the year ended December 31, 2011
|
56,900
|
|
Dividends declared and paid in 2011
|
32,500
|
|
Increase in cash balance from January 1, 2011, to December 31, 2011
|
23,000
|
|
Increase in long term debt in 2011
|
44,600
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Review exercise—calculate retained earnings From the following data, calculate the Retained Earnings balance as of December 31, 2010:
|
Retained earnings, December 31, 2011
|
$490,400
|
|
Net decrease in total assets during 2011
|
74,800
|
|
Net increase in accounts receivable in 2011
|
17,200
|
|
Dividends declared and paid in 2011
|
67,200
|
|
Proceeds from issuance of bonds during 2011
|
176,800
|
|
Net loss for the year ended December 31, 2011
|
46,000
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Common stock balance sheet disclosure The balance sheet caption for common stock is the following:
|
Common stock, $5 par value, 2,000,000 shares authorized,
|
|
|
|
1,400,000 shares issued, 1,250,000 shares outstanding
|
$
|
?
|
Required:
a. Calculate the dollar amount that will be presented opposite this caption.
b. Calculate the total amount of a cash dividend of $.15 per share.
c. What accounts for the difference between issued shares and outstanding shares?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Common stock—calculate issue price and dividend amount The balance sheet caption for common stock is the following:
|
Common stock without par value, 2,000,000 shares authorized,
|
|
|
400,000 shares issued, and 360,000 shares outstanding
|
$2,600,000
|
Required:
a. Calculate the average price at which the shares were issued.
b. If these shares had been assigned a stated value of $1 each, show how the caption here would be different.
c. If a cash dividend of $0.60 per share were declared, calculate the total amount of cash that would be paid to stockholders.
d. What accounts for the difference between issued shares and outstanding shares?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cash dividends versus stock dividends Under what circumstances would you (as an investor) prefer to receive cash dividends rather than stock dividends? Under what circumstances would you prefer stock dividends to cash dividends?
Calculate stock dividend shares and cash dividend amounts Assume that you own 3,000 shares of Blueco, Inc.’s, common stock and that you currently receive cash dividends of $.42 per share per year.
Required:
a. If Blueco, Inc., declared a 5% stock dividend, how many shares of common stock would you receive as a dividend?
b. Calculate the cash dividend per share amount to be paid after the stock dividend that would result in the same total cash dividend (as was received before the stock dividend).
c. If the cash dividend remained at $0.42 per share after the stock dividend, what per share cash dividend amount without a stock dividend would have accomplished the same total cash dividend?
d. Why would a company have a dividend policy of paying a $0.10 per share cash dividend and issuing a 5% stock dividend every year?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Common and preferred stock—issuances and dividends Homestead Oil Corp. was incorporated on January 1, 2010, and issued the following stock for cash:
800,000 shares of no par common stock were authorized; 150,000 shares were issued on January 1, 2010, at $19 per share.
200,000 shares of $100 par value, 9.5% cumulative, preferred stock were authorized, and 60,000 shares were issued on January 1, 2010, at $122 per share.
Net income for the years ended December 31, 2010 and 2011, was $1,300,000 and $2,800,000, respectively.
No dividends were declared or paid during 2010. However, on December 28, 2011, the board of directors of Homestead declared dividends of $1,800,000, payable on February 12, 2012, to holders of record as of January 19, 2012.
Required:
a. Use the horizontal model (or write the entry) to show the effects of
1. The issuance of common stock and preferred stock on January 1, 2010.
2. The declaration of dividends on December 28, 2011.
3. The payment of dividends on February 12, 2012.
b. Of the total amount of dividends declared during 2011, how much will be received by preferred shareholders?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Common and preferred stock—issuances and dividends Permabilt Corp. was incorporated on January 1, 2010, and issued the following stock for cash:
3,600,000 shares of no par common stock were authorized; 1,050,000 shares were issued on January 1, 2010, at $46 per share.
1,200,000 shares of $100 par value, 10.5% cumulative, preferred stock were authorized, and 420,000 shares were issued on January 1, 2010, at $132 per share.
Net income for the years ended December 31, 2010, 2011, and 2012, was $15,750,000, $22,350,000, and $26,100,000, respectively.
No dividends were declared or paid during 2010 or 2011. However, on December 17, 2012, the board of directors of Permabilt Corp. declared dividends of $37,200,000, payable on February 9, 2013, to holders of record as of January 4, 2013.
Required:
a. Use the horizontal model (or write the entry) to show the effects of
1. the issuance of common stock and preferred stock on January 1, 2010.
2. the declaration of dividends on December 17, 2012.
3. the payment of dividends on February 9, 2013.
b. Of the total amount of dividends declared during 2012, how much will be received by preferred shareholders?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Treasury stock transactions On May 4, 2010, Docker, Inc., purchased 800 shares of its own common stock in the market at a price of $18.25 per share. On September 19, 2010, 600 of these shares were sold in the open market at a price of $19.50 per share. There were 36,200 shares of Docker common stock outstanding prior to the May 4 purchase of treasury stock. A $0.35 per share cash dividend on the common stock was declared and paid on June 15, 2010.
Required:
Use the horizontal model (or write the entry) to show the effect on Docker’s financial statements of
a. the purchase of the treasury stock on May 4.
b. the declaration and payment of the cash dividend on June 15.
c. the sale of the treasury stock on September 19.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Treasury stock transactions On January 1, 2010, Metco, Inc., had issued an outstanding 574,600 shares of $2 par value common stock. On March 15, 2010, Metco, Inc., purchased for its treasury 4,400 shares of its common stock at a price of $75 per share. On August 10, 2010, 1,400 of these treasury shares were sold for $84 per share. Metco’s directors declared cash dividends of $1.20 per share during the second quarter and again during the fourth quarter, payable on June 30, 2010, and December 31, 2010, respectively. A 2% stock dividend was issued at the end of the year. There were no other transactions affecting common stock during the year.
Required:
a. Use the horizontal model (or write the entry) to show the effect of the treasury stock purchase on March 15, 2010.
b. Calculate the total amount of the cash dividends paid in the second quarter.
c. Use the horizontal model (or write the entry) to show the effect of the sale of the treasury stock on August 10, 2010.
d. Calculate the total amount of cash dividends paid in the fourth quarter.
e. Calculate the number of shares of stock issued in the stock dividend.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Transaction analysis—various accounts Enter the following column headings across the top of a sheet of paper:
|
|
|
Other
|
|
Paid In
|
Retained
|
Treasury
|
Net
|
|
Transaction
|
Cash
|
Assets
|
Liabilities
|
Capital
|
Earnings
|
Stock
|
Income
|
Enter the transaction letter in the first column and show the effect (if any) of each of the following transactions on each financial statement category by entering a plus (+)or minus (−) sign and the amount in the appropriate column. Do not show items that affect net income in the retained earnings column. You may also write the entries to record each transaction.
a. Sold 4,100 shares of $50 par value 9% preferred stock at par.
b. Declared the annual dividend on the preferred stock.
c. Purchased 650 shares of preferred stock for the treasury at $54 per share.
d. Issued 2,000 shares of $1 par value common stock in exchange for land valued at $113,000.
e. Sold 300 shares of the treasury stock purchased in transaction c for $58 per share.
f. Split the common stock 2 for 1.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Transaction analysis—various accounts Enter the following column headings across the top of a sheet of paper:
|
|
|
Other
|
|
Paid In
|
Retained
|
Treasury
|
Net
|
|
Transaction
|
Cash
|
Assets
|
Liabilities
|
Capital
|
Earnings
|
Stock
|
Income
|
Enter the transaction letter in the first column and show the effect (if any) of each of the following transactions on each financial statement category by entering a plus (+)or minus (−) sign and the amount in the appropriate column. Do not show items that affect net income in the retained earnings column. You may also write the entries to record these transactions. You should assume that the transactions occurred in the same chronological sequence as listed here:
a. Sold 5,200 shares of $10 par value preferred stock at $12.50 per share.
b. Declared the annual cash dividend of $3.20 per share on common stock. There were 18,400 shares of common stock issued and outstanding throughout the year.
c. Issued 6,400 shares of $10 par value preferred stock in exchange for a building when the market price of preferred stock was $14 per share.
d. Purchased 300 shares of preferred stock for the treasury at a price of $16 per share.
e. Sold 140 shares of the preferred stock held in treasury (see d) for $17 per share.
f. Declared and issued a 15% stock dividend on the $1 par value common stock when the market price per share was $45.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Transaction analysis—various accounts Enter the following column headings across the top of a sheet of paper:
|
|
|
Other
|
|
Paid In
|
Retained
|
Treasury
|
Net
|
|
Transaction
|
Cash
|
Assets
|
Liabilities
|
Capital
|
Earnings
|
Stock
|
Income
|
Enter the transaction letter in the first column and show the effect (if any) of each of the following transactions on each financial statement category by entering a plus (+)or minus (−) sign and the amount in the appropriate column. Do not show items that affect net income in the retained earnings column. You may also write the entries to record these transactions. You should assume that the transactions occurred in this chronological sequence and that 40,000 shares of previously issued common stock remain outstanding.
a. Sold 5,000 previously unissued shares of $1 par value common stock for $18 per share.
b. Issued 1,000 shares of previously unissued 8% cumulative preferred stock, $40 par value, in exchange for land and a building appraised at $40,000.
c. Declared and paid the annual cash dividend on the preferred stock issued in transaction b.
d. Purchased 250 shares of common stock for the treasury at a total cost of $4,750.
e. Declared a cash dividend of $0.15 per share on the common stock outstanding.
f. Sold 130 shares of the treasury stock purchased in transaction d at a price of $20 per share.
g. Declared and issued a 3% stock dividend on the common stock issued when the market value per share of common stock was $21.
h. Split the common stock 3 for 1.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Transaction analysis—various accounts Enter the following column headings across the top of a sheet of paper:
|
|
|
Other
|
|
Paid In
|
Retained
|
Treasury
|
Net
|
|
Transaction
|
Cash
|
Assets
|
Liabilities
|
Capital
|
Earnings
|
Stock
|
Income
|
Enter the transaction letter in the first column and show the effect (if any) of each of the following transactions on each financial statement category by entering a plus (+)or minus (−) sign and the amount in the appropriate column. Do not show items that affect net income in the retained earnings column. You may also write the entries to record these transactions. You should assume that the transactions occurred in the listed chronological sequence and that no stock had been previously issued.
a. Issued 1,500 shares of $100 par value preferred stock at par.
b. Issued 2,400 shares of $100 par value preferred stock in exchange for land that had an appraised value of $306,000.
c. Issued 69,000 shares of $5 par value common stock for $11 per share.
d. Purchased 13,500 shares of common stock for the treasury at $13 per share.
e. Sold 6,000 shares of the treasury stock purchased in transaction d for $14 per share.
f. Declared a cash dividend of $1.75 per share on the preferred stock outstanding, to be paid early next year.
g. Declared and issued a 5% stock dividend on the common stock when the market price per share of common stock was $15.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Comprehensive problem—calculate missing amounts, dividends, total shares, and per share information Allyn, Inc., has the following owners’ equity section in its November 30, 2010, balance sheet:
|
Paid in capital:
|
|
|
12% preferred stock, $60 par value, 1,500 shares
|
|
|
authorized, issued, and outstanding
|
$ ?
|
|
Common stock, $8 par value, 100,000 shares
|
|
|
authorized, ? shares issued, ? shares outstanding
|
240,000
|
|
Additional paid in capital on common stock.
|
540,000
|
|
Additional paid in capital from treasury stock
|
13,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
97,000
|
|
Less: Treasury stock, at cost (2,000 shares of common)
|
(18,000)
|
|
Total stockholders’ equity
|
$ ?
|
Required:
a. Calculate the amount of the total annual dividend requirement on preferred stock.
b. Calculate the amount that should be shown on the balance sheet for preferred stock.
c. Calculate the number of shares of common stock that are issued and the number of shares of common stock that are outstanding.
d. On January 1, 2010, the firm’s balance sheet showed common stock of $210,000 and additional paid in capital on common stock of $468,750. The only transaction affecting these accounts during 2010 was the sale of some common stock. Calculate the number of shares that were sold and the selling price per share.
e. Describe the transaction that resulted in the additional paid in capital from treasury stock.
f. The retained earnings balance on January 1, 2010, was $90,300. Net income for the past 11 months has been $24,000. Preferred stock dividends for all of 2010 have been declared and paid. Calculate the amount of dividends on common stock during the first 11 months of 2010.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Analytical case (part 1)—calculate missing owners’ equity amounts for 2008 (Note: The information presented in this case. For now you can ignore the 2011 column in the balance sheet; all disclosures presented here relate to the June 30, 2010, balance sheet.) DeZurik Corp. had the following owners’ equity section in its June 30, 2010, balance sheet (in thousands, except share and per share amounts):
|
|
June 30 (in thousands)
|
|
2011
|
2010
|
|
Paid in capital:
|
|
|
|
$4.50 Preferred stock, $ ? par value, cumulative,
|
|
|
|
200,000 shares authorized, 96,000 shares issued
|
|
|
|
and outstanding
|
|
$ 5,760
|
|
Common stock, $5 par value, 4,000,000 shares authorized,
|
|
|
|
3,280,000 shares issued, 3,000,000 shares outstanding
|
|
|
|
Additional paid in capital on common stock
|
|
22,960
|
|
Retained earnings
|
|
|
|
less: Treasury common stock, at cost, ? shares
|
|
|
|
Total owners’ equity
|
$66,168
|
$60,000
|
Required:
a. Calculate the par value per share of preferred stock and determine the preferred stock dividend percentage.
b. Calculate the amount that should be shown on the balance sheet for common stock at June 30, 2010.
c. What was the average issue price of common stock shown on the June 30, 2010, balance sheet?
d. How many shares of treasury stock does DeZurik Corp. own at June 30, 2010?
e. Assume that the treasury shares were purchased for $18 per share. Calculate the amount that should be shown on the balance sheet for treasury stock at June 30, 2010.
f. Calculate the retained earnings balance at June 30, 2010, after you have completed parts a–e.
g. Assume that the Retained Earnings balance on July 1, 2009, was $19,200 (in thousands) and that net income for the year ended June 30, 2010, was $1,152 (in thousands). The 2010 preferred dividends were paid in full, and no other dividend transactions were recorded during the year. Verify that the amount shown in the solution to part f is correct.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Analytical case (part 2)—prepare owners’ equity amounts and disclosures for 2011 using transaction information. The transactions affecting the owners’ equity accounts of DeZurik Corp. for the year ended June 30, 2011, are summarized here:
1. 320,000 shares of common stock were issued at $14.25 per share.
2. 80,000 shares of treasury (common) stock were sold for $18 per share.
3. Net income for the year was $1,280 (in thousands).
4. The fiscal 2011 preferred dividends were paid in full. Assume that all 96,000 shares were outstanding throughout the year ended June 30, 2011.
5. A cash dividend of $.20 per share was declared and paid to common stockholders. Assume that transactions (1) and (2) occurred before the dividend was declared.
6. The preferred stock was split 2 for 1 on June 30, 2011.
Required:
a. Calculate the dollar amounts that DeZurik Corp. would report for each owners’ equity caption on its June 30, 2011, balance sheet after recording the effects of transactions 1–6.. Indicate how the owners’ equity caption details for DeZurik Corp. would change for the June 30, 2011, balance sheet, as compared to the disclosures shown in Case 8.29 for the 2010 balance sheet.
c. What was the average issue price of common stock shown on the June 30, 2011, balance sheet?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Program Trading and Portfolio Insurance:
Were They to Blame for the Stock Market Crash of 1987? In the aftermath of the Black Monday crash on October 19, 1987, in which the stock market declined by over 20% in one day, trading strategies involving stock price index futures markets have been accused (especially by the Brady Commission, which was appointed by President Reagan to study the stock market) of being culprits in the market collapse. One such strategy, called program trading, involves computer directed trading between the stock index futures and the stocks whose prices are reflected in the stock price index. Program trading is a form of arbitrage conducted to keep stock index futures and stock prices in line with each other. For example, when the price of the stock index futures contract is far below the prices of the underlying stocks in the index, program traders buy index futures, thereby increasing their price, and sell the stocks, thereby lowering their price. Critics of program trading assert that the sharp fall in stock index futures prices on Black Monday led to massive selling in the stock market to keep stock prices in line with the stock index futures prices. Some experts also blame portfolio insurance for amplifying the crash because they feel that when the stock market started to fall, uncertainty in the market increased, and the resulting increased desire to hedge stocks led to massive selling of stock index futures. The resulting large price declines in stock index futures contracts then led to massive selling of stocks by program traders to keep prices in line. Because they view program trading and portfolio insurance as causes of the October 1987 market collapse, critics of stock index futures have advocated restrictions on their trading. In response, certain brokerage firms, as well as organized exchanges, have placed limits on program trading. For example, the New York Stock Exchange has curbed computerized program trading when the Dow Jones Industrial Average moves by more than 50 points in one day. However, some prominent finance scholars (among them Nobel laureate Merton Miller of the University of Chicago) do not accept the hypothesis that program trading and portfolio insurance provoked the stock market crash. They believe that the prices of stock index futures primarily reflect the same economic forces that move stock prices—changes in the market’s underlying assessment of the value of stocks.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Why Are Scandinavians So Far Ahead of Americans in Using Electronic Payments and Online Banking?
Americans are the biggest users of checks in the world. Close to 100 billion checks are written every year in the United States, and over three quarters of noncash transactions are conducted with paper. In contrast, in most countries of Europe, more than twothirds of noncash transactions are electronic, with Finland and Sweden having the greatest proportion of online banking customers of any countries in the world. Indeed, if you were Finnish or Swedish, instead of writing a check, you would be far more likely to pay your bills online, using a personal computer or even a mobile phone. Why do Europeans and especially Scandinavians so far outpace Americans in the use of electronic payments? First, Europeans got used to making payments without checks even before the advent of the personal computer. Europeans have long made use of giro payments, in which banks and post offices transfer funds for customers to pay bills. Second, Europeans—and particularly Scandinavians—are much greater users of mobile phones and the Internet than are Americans. Finland has the highest per capita use of mobile phones in the world, and Finland and Sweden lead the world in the percentage of the population that accesses the Internet. Maybe these usage patterns stem from the low population densities of these countries and the cold and dark winters that keep Scandinavians inside at their PCs. For their part, Scandinavians would rather take the view that their high tech culture is the product of their good education systems and the resulting high degree of computer literacy, the presence of top technology companies such as Finland’s Nokia and Sweden’s Ericsson, and government policies promoting the increased use of personal computers, such as Sweden’s tax incentives for companies to provide their employees with home computers. The wired populations of Finland and Sweden are (percentagewise) the biggest users of online banking in the world. Americans are clearly behind the curve in their use of electronic payments, which has imposed a high cost on the U.S. economy. Switching from checks to electronic payments might save the U.S. economy tens of billions of dollars per year, according to some estimates. Indeed, the U.S. federal government is trying to switch all its payments to electronic ones by directly depositing them into bank accounts, in an effort to reduce its expenses. Can Americans be weaned from paper checks and fully embrace the world of high tech electronic payments?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Are We Headed for a Cashless Society?
Predictions of a cashless society have been around for decades, but they have not come to fruition. For example, Business Week predicted in 1975 that electronic means of payment “would soon revolutionize the very concept of money itself,” only to reverse itself several years later. Pilot projects in recent years with smart cards to convert consumers to the use of e money have not been a success. Mondex, one of the widely touted, early stored value cards that was launched in Great Britain in 1995, is only used on a few British university campuses. In Germany and Belgium, millions of people carry bank cards with computer chips embedded in them that enable them to make use of e money, but very few use them. Why has the movement to a cashless society been so slow in coming? Although e money might be more convenient and may be more efficient than a payments system based on paper, several factors work against the disappearance of the paper system. First, it is very expensive to set up the computer, card reader, and telecommunications networks necessary to make electronic money the dominant form of payment. Second, electronic means of payment raise security and privacy concerns. We often hear media reports that an unauthorized hacker has been able to access a computer database and to alter information stored there. Because this is not an uncommon occurrence, unscrupulous persons might be able to access bank accounts in electronic payments systems and steal funds by moving them from someone else’s accounts into their own. The prevention of this type of fraud is no easy task, and a whole new field of computer science has developed to cope with security issues. A further concern is that the use of electronic means of payment leaves an electronic trail that contains a large amount of personal data on buying habits. There are worries that government, employers, and marketers might be able to access these data, thereby encroaching on our privacy. The conclusion from this discussion is that although the use of e money will surely increase in the future, to paraphrase Mark Twain, “The reports of cash’s death are greatly exaggerated.”
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Bruce Bent and the Money Market Mutual Fund Panic of 2008
Bruce Bent, one of the originators of money market mutual funds, almost brought down the industry during the financial crisis in the fall of 2008. Mr. Bent told his shareholders in a letter written in July 2008 that the fund was managed on a basis of “unwavering discipline focused on protecting your principal.” He also wrote the Securities and Exchange Commission in September 2007, “When I first created the money market fund back in 1970, it was designed with the tenets of safety and liquidity.” He added that these principles had “fallen by the wayside as portfolio managers chased the highest yield and compromised the integrity of the money fund.” Alas, Bent did not follow his own advice, and his fund, the Reserve Primary Fund, bought risky assets so that its yield was higher than the industry average. When Lehman Brothers went into bankruptcy on September 15, 2008, the Reserve Primary Fund, with assets over $60 billion, was caught holding the bag on $785 million of Lehman’s debt, which then had to be marked down to zero. The resulting losses meant that on September 16, Bent’s fund could no longer afford to redeem its shares at the par value of $1, a situation known as “breaking the buck.” Bent’s shareholders began to pull their money out of the fund, causing it to lose 90% of its assets. The fear that this could happen to other money market mutual funds led to a classic panic in which shareholders began to withdraw their funds at an alarming rate. The whole money market mutual fund industry looked like it could come crashing down. To prevent this, the Federal Reserve and the U.S. Treasury rode to the rescue on September 19. The Fed set up a facility, discussed in Chapter 8, to make loans to purchase commercial paper from money market mutual funds so they could meet the demands for redemptions from their investors. The Treasury then put in a temporary guarantee for all money market mutual fund redemptions and the panic subsided. Not surprisingly, given the extension of a government safety net to the money market mutual fund industry, there are calls to regulate this industry more heavily. The money market mutual fund industry will never be the same.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Information Technology and Bank Consolidation
Achieving low costs in banking requires huge investments in information technology. In turn, such enormous investments require a business line of very large scale. This has been particularly true in the credit card business in recent years, in which huge technology investments have been made to provide customers with convenient Web sites and to develop better systems to handle processing and risk analysis for both credit and fraud risk. The result has been substantial consolidation: As recently as 1995, the top five banking institutions issuing credit cards held less than 40% of total credit card debt, while today this number is more than 60%. Information technology has also spurred increasing consolidation of the bank custody business. Banks hold the actual certificate for investors when they purchase a stock or bond and provide data on the value of these securities and the amount of risk an investor is facing. Because this business is also computer intensive, it requires very large scale investments in computer technology for the bank to offer these services at competitive rates. The percentage of assets at the top 10 custody banks has therefore risen from 40% in 1990 to more than 90% today. The increasing importance of e finance, in which the computer is playing a more central role in delivering financial services, is bringing tremendous changes to the structure of the banking industry. Although banks are more than willing to offer a full range of products to their customers, they no longer find it profitable to produce all of them. Instead, they are contracting out the business, a practice that will lead to further consolidation of technology intensive banking businesses in the future.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The 2007–2009 Financial Crisis and the Demise of Large, Free Standing Investment Banks
Although the move toward bringing financial service activities into larger, complex banking organizations was inevitable after the demise of Glass Steagall, no one expected it to occur as rapidly as it did in 2008. Over a six month period from March to September of 2008, all five of the largest, free standing investment banks ceased to exist in their old form. When Bear Stearns, the fifth largest investment bank, revealed its large losses from investments in subprime mortgage securities, it had to be bailed out by the Fed in March 2008; the price it paid was a forced sale to J.P. Morgan for less than one tenth what it had been worth only a year or so before. The Bear Stearns bailout made it clear that the government safety net had been extended to investment banks. The trade off is that investment banks will be subject to more regulation, along the lines of commercial banks, in the future. Next to go was Lehman Brothers, the fourth largest investment bank, which declared bankruptcy on September 15. Only one day before, Merrill Lynch, the third largest investment bank, which also suffered large losses on its holdings of subprime securities, announced its sale to Bank of America for less than half of its year earlier price. Within a week Goldman Sachs and Morgan Stanley, the first and second largest investment banks, both of whom had smaller exposure to subprime securities, nevertheless saw the writing on the wall. They realized that they would soon become regulated on a similar basis and decided to become bank holding companies so they could access insured deposits, a more stable funding base. It was the end of an era. Large, free standing investment banking firms are now a thing of the past.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Suppose that you decide that you want to begin investing for retirement. You would probably want to hold some money in a diversified portfolio of stocks. You might want to put some money in bonds. You might even want to hold stock in some foreign companies. Now suppose your budget will only let you invest $25 per week. How are you going to build this retirement fund? You will probably not want to buy individual stocks, and with only $25 to spend at a time, you will not be able to buy bonds. The solution to your problem is to invest in mutual funds. Mutual funds pool the resources of many small investors by selling them shares in the fund and using the proceeds to buy securities. Through the asset transformation process of issuing shares in small denominations and buying large blocks of securities, mutual funds can take advantage of volume discounts on brokerage commissions and can purchase diversified portfolios of securities. Mutual funds allow small investors to obtain the benefits of lower transaction costs in purchasing securities and to take advantage of a reduction in risk by diversifying their portfolios. In this chapter we will study why mutual funds have become so popular in recent years, the types of mutual funds, how mutual funds are regulated, and finally, how conflicts of interest in the mutual fund industry have led to many scandals, fines, and indictments since 2001.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Calculating a Mutual Fund’s Net Asset Value
If you invest in a mutual fund, you will receive periodic statements summarizing the activity in your account. The statement will show funds that were added to your investment balance, funds that were withdrawn, and any earnings that have accrued. One term on the statement that is critical to understanding the investment’s performance is the net asset value (NAV). The net asset value is the total value of the mutual fund’s stocks, bonds, cash, and other assets minus any liabilities such as accrued fees, divided by the number of shares outstanding. An example will make this clear. Suppose that a mutual fund has the following assets and liabilities:
|
Stock (at current market value)
|
$20,000,000
|
|
Bonds (at current market value)
|
$10,000,000
|
|
Cash
|
$ 500,000
|
|
Total value of assets
|
$30,500,000
|
|
Liabilities
|
– $ 300,000
|
|
Net worth
|
$30,200,000
|
The net asset value is computed by dividing the net worth by the number of shares outstanding. If 10 million shares are outstanding, the net asset value is $3.02 ($30,200,000/10,000,000 = $3.02). The net asset value rises and falls as the value of the underlying assets changes. For example, suppose that the value of the stock portfolio held by the mutual fund rises by 10% and the value of the bond portfolio falls by 2% over the course of a year. If the cash and liabilities are unchanged, the new net asset value will be
|
Stock (at current market value)
|
$22,000,000
|
|
Bonds (at current market value)
|
$9,800,000
|
|
Cash
|
$ 500,000
|
|
Total value of assets
|
$32,300,000
|
|
Liabilities
|
– $ 300,000
|
|
Net worth
|
$32,000,000
|
NAV = $32,000,000/10,000,000 = $3.20
The yield on your investment in the mutual fund is then
Yield = $3.20 $3.02/$3.02 = $0.18/$3.02 =5.96%
When you buy and sell shares in the mutual fund, you do so at the current NAV.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Long Term Capital Debacle
Long Term Capital Management was a hedge fund managed by a group that included two Nobel Prize winners and 25 other Ph.D.s. It made headlines in September 1998 because it required a private rescue plan organized by the Federal Reserve Bank of New York. The experience of Long Term Capital Management demonstrates that hedge funds are not risk free, despite their being market neutral. Long Term Capital expected that the spread between long term Treasury bonds and long term corporate bonds would narrow. Many stock markets around the world plunged, causing a flight to quality. Investors bid up the price of Treasury securities while the price of corporate securities fell. This is exactly the opposite of what Long Term Capital Management had predicted. As losses mounted, Long Term Capital’s lenders required that the fund increase its equity position. By mid September, the fund was unable to raise sufficient equity to meet the demands of its creditors. Faced with the potential collapse of the fund, together with its highly leveraged investment portfolio consisting of nearly $80 billion in equities and over $1 trillion of notional value in derivatives, the Federal Reserve stepped in to prevent the fund from failing. The Fed’s rationale was that a sudden liquidation of the Long Term Capital Management portfolio would create unacceptable systemic risk. Tens of billions of dollars’ worth of illiquid securities would be dumped on an already jittery market, causing potentially huge losses to numerous lenders and other institutions. A group consisting of banks and brokerage firms contributed $3.6 billion to a rescue plan that prevented the fund’s failure. The Fed’s involvement in organizing the rescue of Long Term Capital is controversial, despite no public funds being expended. Some critics argue that the intervention increases moral hazard by weakening the discipline imposed by the market on fund managers. However, others say that the tremendous economic damage the fund’s failure would have caused was unacceptable. Hedge funds have continued to fail in the years since the Long Term Capital bailout. In September 2006, Amaranth Advisors lost its bet on natural gas futures and dropped $6 billion in one week. This is currently the largest hedge fund collapse in history. Other funds have suffered significant losses for their investors, including Advanced Investment Management (lost $415 million), Bayou Management, LLC (lost $450 million) and Lipper Convertibles (lost $315 million). Hedge funds are a high risk game for well heeled investors.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
In this chapter we continue our discussion of financial institutions by looking at two nonbank institutions: insurance companies and pension funds. Insurance is an important industry in the United States. Most people hold one or more types of insurance policies (health, life, homeowners, automobile, disability, and so on), and the annual revenues of insurance companies exceed $600 billion. Insurance companies are also a major employer, especially of business majors. Figure 21.1 shows the number of persons employed by the insurance industry between 1960 and 2009. The numbers rose rapidly during the 1960s, 1970s, and early 1980s. (Currently, well over 2 million Americans are employed in the insurance industry.) In recent years, the rate of growth has slowed, however. There are a couple of possible explanations for this. First, technology has streamlined claims processing so that fewer back office workers are needed. Second, competition by other financial institutions such as commercial banks and brokerage houses may be cutting into some of the business traditionally reserved for insurance companies. One major competitor to insurance has been the private, company sponsored pension plan. Better educated and longer lived workers are putting more money into pension funds than ever before. Over 65 million individuals are now invested in a private pension fund. These plans are also reviewed in this chapter. Insurance companies and pension funds are considered financial intermediaries for several reasons. First, they receive investment funds from their customers. For example, when a person buys a whole life insurance policy, the person receives a life insurance benefit and accumulates a cash balance. Many people use insurance companies as their primary investment avenue. Similarly, private pension funds also take in investment dollars from their customers. Second, both of these institutions place their money in a variety of money earning investments. Insurance companies and pension funds make large commercial mortgage loans, invest in stocks, and buy bonds. Thus, these institutions are financial intermediaries in that they take in funds from one sector and invest it in another.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Insurance Agent: The Customer’s Ally
An underwriter working for Prudential Insurance was responsible for a number of agents selling property insurance in Southern California in 1985. One agent sold a large number of fire insurance policies and was always careful to document clearly when a fire hydrant was on the property by including it in a photograph attached to the policy application. The agent made a mistake on one policy, however, when he included his car in a picture of a different view of the property. The picture showed a plastic fire hydrant lying in the open trunk of his car. He had been putting this fire hydrant on property for years when he needed to give a low quote to get business. The agent was neither fired nor sued. He was simply advised to halt the practice, and his policies continued to be accepted by the company.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The AIG Blowup American International Group, better known as AIG,
was a trillion dollar insurance giant and before 2008 was one of the 20 largest companies in the world. A small separate unit, AIG’s Financial Products division, went into the credit default swap business in a big way, insuring over $400 billion of securities, of which $57 billion was debt securities backed by subprime mortgages. Lehman Brother’s troubles and eventual bankruptcy on September 15, 2008, revealed that subprime securities were worth much less than they were being valued on the books, and investors came to the realization that AIG’s losses, which had already been substantial in the first half of the year, could bankrupt the company. Lenders to AIG then pulled back with a vengeance, and AIG could not raise enough capital to stay afloat. On September 16, the Federal Reserve and the U.S. Treasury decided to rescue AIG because its failure was deemed as potentially catastrophic for the financial system. Not only were banks and mutual funds large holders of AIG’s debt, but the bankruptcy of AIG would have rendered all the credit default swaps it had sold worthless, thereby imposing huge losses on financial institutions which had bought them. The Federal Reserve set up an $85 billion credit facility (later raised to $182 billion) to provide liquidity to AIG. The rescue did not come cheap however. AIG was charged a very high interest rate on the loans from the Fed, and the government was given the rights to an 80% stake in the company if it survived. Maurice Greenberg, the former CEO of the company, described the government’s actions as a “nationalization” of AIG. Insurance companies have never been viewed as posing a risk to the financial system as a whole and this is why their regulation has been left to insurance commissions in each state. Since the problems at AIG nearly brought down the U.S. financial system, this view is no longer tenable. The insurance industry will never be the same.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Subprime Financial Crisis and the Monoline Insurers
One spillover from the subprime financial crisis was a hit to the monoline insurers, with spillover effects in the municipal bond market. Unfortunately for the monoline insurers, they not only insured municipal bonds, but also debt securities backed by subprime mortgages. With rising defaults on these mortgages, monoline insurers started to take big losses, resulting in credit downgrades from their AAA status. This weakened the value of their insurance guarantees, not only on subprime securities but on municipal securities as well. As the subprime crisis got into full swing, the markets took the view that monoline insurance was not worth much and so municipal bonds began to trade at lower prices based solely on the municipality’s credit rating. The result was that state and local governments now found their interest costs rising. They were hit by a double whammy from the subprime financial crisis of higher borrowing costs and lower tax revenues because of their state’s weaker economies. The result was not only weaker state and local finances, but cutbacks in spending for roads, schools, and hospitals.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Power to the Pensions
One ramification of the growth of pension plans and other institutional investors is that the managers of these funds have the ability to exercise substantial control over corporate management. Clearly, when a pension fund manager, who controls many thousands of shares, calls a corporate officer, the officer is going to listen. Evidence suggests that fund managers actively apply the power they have to influence corporate management. For example, pension funds recently defeated management sponsored antitakeover proxy proposals at Honeywell. And Texaco agreed to name a director from candidates submitted by the huge California Public Employees Retirement System. In addition, the stated mission of the Council of Institutional Investors is to “encourage trustees to take an active role in assuring that corporate actions are not taken at the expense of shareholders.” It is possible that these actions will work to benefit shareholders, who do not individually wield enough clout to exert control. However, the clout shareholders wield when their shares are placed into a fund manager’s hands may be sufficient to improve corporate management significantly.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
If you decide to take advantage of that hot stock tip you just heard about from your roommate, you may need to interact with a securities company. Similarly as the new CFO of WWCF, a candy manufacturer, you may need a securities company if you are asked to coordinate a bond sale or to issue additional stock. If your grandfather decides to sell his firm to the public, you may need to help him by working with investment bankers at that securities company. Finally, if you are looking for capital to grow a small, but successful, start up company, you may need the help of a venture capital firm. The smooth functioning of securities markets, in which bonds and stocks are traded, involves several financial institutions, including securities brokers and dealers, investment banks, and venture capital firms. None of these institutions were included in our list of financial intermediaries in Chapter 2 because they do not perform the intermediation function of acquiring funds by issuing liabilities and then using the funds to acquire financial assets. Nonetheless, they are important in the process of channeling funds from savers to spenders. To begin our look at how securities markets work, recall the distinction between primary and secondary securities markets discussed in Chapter 2. In a primary market, new issues of a security are sold to buyers by the corporation or government agency ultimately using the funds. A secondary market then trades the securities that have been sold in the primary market (and so are secondhand). Investment banks assist in the initial sale of securities in the primary market; securities brokers and dealers assist in the trading of securities in the secondary markets. Finally, venture capital firms provide funds to companies not yet ready to sell securities to the public.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Example of Using the Limit Order Book
Suppose a trader on the New York Stock Exchange was a specialist responsible for Circuit City stock. The limit order book might look like the following:
|
Unfilled Circuit City Limit Orders
|
|
Buy Orders
|
Sell Orders
|
|
|
37
|
100
|
|
|
|
|
37.12
|
300
|
|
|
|
|
37.25
|
100
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
37.37
|
200
|
|
|
|
|
37.50
|
500
|
|
|
|
|
37.62
|
100
|
|
Listed under Buy Orders are the highest prices investors are willing to pay to buy the stock. Listed under Sell Orders are the lowest prices investors holding Circuit City are willing to accept to sell. Currently, no transactions occur because there are no cross over or common prices. In other words, there is currently no one willing to sell Circuit City at a price anyone is willing to pay. Now suppose the specialist receives a new 200 share market order to buy, an order to be filled at the best market price currently available. The specialist will consult the Sell Orders column and fill the order at 37.37. Next, the specialist receives a 300 share limit order to sell at 37.12. Again, the specialist will consult the book, but this time will look under the Buy Orders column. The limit order will be filled with 100 shares at 37.25 and 200 shares at 37.12. Next, suppose that a limit order to buy 500 shares at 36.88 is received. Since there is no sell order for this amount, the order is added to the book, which looks as follows at this point:
|
Unfilled Circuit City Limit Orders
|
|
Buy Orders
|
Sell Orders
|
|
|
36.88
|
500
|
|
|
|
|
37
|
100
|
|
|
|
|
37.12
|
100
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
37.50
|
500
|
|
|
|
|
37.62
|
100
|
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Venture Capitalists Lose Focus with Internet Companies
Table 22.2 shows that there was a tremendous surge in funds available for venture capitalists in the last half of the 1990s. Much of the investing focus was on the financing of dot com companies. There are two serious ramifications that result. First, it is likely that there are only a certain number of worthy projects to finance at any one time. When too much money is chasing too few deals, firms are going to obtain financing that would be rejected at other times. As result, the average quality of venture fund portfolios falls. A second problem caused by the surge of money into venture funds is that the ability of the partners to provide quality monitoring is reduced. Consider the case of Web van, an Internet grocer that received more than $1 billion in venture financing. Even though it was backed by a group of experienced financiers, including Goldman Sachs and Sequoia Capital, its business plan was fundamentally flawed. In its short life, Web van spent more than $1 billion building automated warehouses and pricey tech gear. This high overhead made it impossible to compete in the grocery business, where average margins are about 1%. Had the investment bankers been actively monitoring the activities of Web van, they might have balked at developing an infrastructure that required 4,000 orders per day per warehouse just to break even. Not surprisingly, Webvan declared bankruptcy in July 2001.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Managing financial institutions has never been an easy task, but in recent years it has become even more difficult because of greater uncertainty in the economic environment. Interest rates have become much more volatile, resulting in substantial fluctuations in profits and in the value of assets and liabilities held by financial institutions. Furthermore, as we have seen in Chapter 5, defaults on loans and other debt instruments have also climbed dramatically, leading to large losses at financial institutions. In light of these developments, it is not surprising that financial institution managers have become more concerned about managing the risk their institutions face as a result of greater interest rate fluctuations and defaults by borrowers. In this chapter we examine how managers of financial institutions cope with credit risk, the risk arising because borrowers may default on their obligations, and with interest rate risk, the risk arising from fluctuations in interest rates. We will look at the tools these managers use to measure risk and the strategies they employ to reduce it.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Using the –$17.5 million gap calculated using Equation 1, what is the change in income if interest rates rise by 1%?
2. The manager of First National Bank notices that the bank balance sheet allows him to put assets and liabilities into more refined maturity buckets that allow him to estimate the potential change in income over the next one to two years. Rate sensitive assets in this period consist of $5 million of securities maturing in one to two years, $10 million of commercial loans maturing in one to two years, and an additional $2 million (20% of fixedrate mortgages) that the bank expects to be repaid. Rate sensitive liabilities in this period consist of $5 million of one to two year CDs, $5 million of one to two year borrowings, $1.5 million of checkable deposits (the 10% of checkable deposits that the bank manager estimates are rate sensitive in this period), and an additional $3 million of savings deposits (the 20% estimate of savings deposits). For the next one to two years, calculate the gap and the change in income if interest rates rise by 1%.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Starting in the 1970s and increasingly in the 1980s and 1990s, the world became a riskier place for financial institutions. Swings in interest rates widened, and the bond and stock markets went through some episodes of increased volatility. As a result of these developments, managers of financial institutions have become more concerned with reducing the risk their institutions face. Given the greater demand for risk reduction, the process of financial innovation described in Chapter 19 came to the rescue by producing new financial instruments that help financial institution managers manage risk better. These instruments, called financial derivatives, have payoffs that are linked to previously issued securities and are extremely useful risk reduction tools. In this chapter we look at the most important financial derivatives that managers of financial institutions use to reduce risk: forward contracts, financial futures, options, and swaps. We examine not only how markets for each of these financial derivatives work but also how each can be used by financial institution managers to reduce risk.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Hunt Brothers and the Silver Crash
In early 1979, two Texas billionaires, W. Herbert Hunt and his brother, Nelson Bunker Hunt, decided that they were going to get into the silver market in a big way. Herbert stated his reasoning for purchasing silver as follows: “I became convinced that the economy of the United States was in a weakening condition. This reinforced my belief that investment in precious metals was wise … because of rampant inflation.” Although the Hunts’ stated reason for purchasing silver was that it was a good investment, others felt that their real motive was to establish a corner in the silver market. Along with other associates, several of them from the Saudi royal family, the Hunts purchased close to 300 million ounces of silver in the form of either actual bullion or silver futures contracts. The result was that the price of silver rose from $6 an ounce to over $50 an ounce by January 1980. Once the regulators and the futures exchanges got wind of what the Hunts were up to, they decided to take action to eliminate the possibility of a corner by limiting to 2,000 the number of contracts that any single trader could hold. This limit, which was equivalent to 10 million ounces, was only a small fraction of what the Hunts were holding, and so they were forced to sell. The silver market collapsed soon afterward, with the price of silver declining back to below $10 an ounce. The losses to the Hunts were estimated to be in excess of $1 billion, and they soon found themselves in financial difficulty. They had to go into debt to the tune of $1.1 billion, mortgaging not only the family’s holdings in the Placid Oil Company but also 75,000 head of cattle, a stable of thoroughbred horses, paintings, jewelry, and even such mundane items as irrigation pumps and lawn mowers. Eventually both Hunt brothers were forced into declaring personal bankruptcy, earning them the dubious distinction of declaring the largest personal bankruptcies ever in the United States. Nelson and Herbert Hunt paid a heavy price for their excursion into the silver market, but at least Nelson retained his sense of humor. When asked right after the collapse of the silver market how he felt about his losses, he said, “A billion dollars isn’t what it used to be.”
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Borrowers Shop the Web for Mortgages
One business area that has been significantly affected by the Web is mortgage banking. Historically, borrowers went to local banks, savings and loans, and mortgage banking companies to obtain mortgage loans. These offices packaged the loans and resold them. In recent years, hundreds of new Web based mortgage banking companies have emerged. The mortgage market is well suited to providing online service for several reasons. First, it is information based and no products have to be shipped or inventoried. Second, the product (a loan) is homogeneous across providers. A borrower does not really care who provides the money as long as it is provided efficiently. Third, because home buyers tend not to obtain mortgage loans very often, they have little loyalty to any local lender. Finally, online lenders can often offer loans at lower cost because they can operate with lower overhead than firms that must greet the public. The online mortgage market makes it much easier for borrowers to shop interest rates and terms. By filling out one application, a borrower can obtain a number of alternative loan options from various Web service companies. Borrowers can then select the option that best suits their requirements. Online mortgage firms, such as Lending Tree, have made mortgage lending more competitive. This may lead to lower rates and better service. It has also led lenders to offer an often confusing array of loan alternatives that most borrowers have difficulty interpreting. This makes comparison shopping more difficult than simply comparing interest rates. Borrowers using online services to shop for loans must be aware that scam artists have found this an easy way to obtain personal information. They set up a bogus loan site and offer extremely attractive interest rates to draw in customers. Once they have collected all the information needed to wipe out your checking, savings, and credit card accounts, they close their site and open another.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
In the mid 1980s, American businesses became less competitive with their foreign counterparts; subsequently, in the 1990s and 2000s, their competitiveness increased. Did this swing in competitiveness occur primarily because American management fell down on the job in the 1980s and then got its act together afterwards? Not really. American business became less competitive in the 1980s because American dollars became worth more in terms of foreign currencies, making American goods more expensive relative to foreign goods. By the 1990s and 2000s, the value of the U.S. dollar had fallen appreciably from its highs in the mid 1980s, making American goods cheaper and American businesses more competitive. The price of one currency in terms of another is called the exchange rate. As you can see in Figure 15.1, exchange rates are highly volatile. The exchange rate affects the economy and our daily lives, because when the U.S. dollar becomes more valuable relative to foreign currencies, foreign goods become cheaper for Americans and American goods become more expensive for foreigners. When the U.S. dollar falls in value, foreign goods become more expensive for Americans and American goods become cheaper for foreigners. We begin our study of international finance by examining the foreign exchange market, the financial market where exchange rates are determined.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Effect of Changes in Interest Rates on the Equilibrium Exchange Rate
Our analysis has revealed the factors that affect the value of the equilibrium exchange rate. Now we use this analysis to take a close look at the response of the exchange rate to changes in interest rates. Changes in domestic interest rates iD are often cited as a major factor affecting exchange rates. For example, we see headlines in the financial press like this one: “Dollar Recovers as Interest Rates Edge Upward.” But is the view presented in this headline always correct? Not necessarily, because to analyze the effects of interest rate changes, we must carefully distinguish the sources of the changes. The Fisher equation (Chapter 3) states that a nominal interest rate such as iD equals the real interest rate plus expected inflation: ?? = ??r + πe. The Fisher equation thus indicates that the interest rate iD can change for two reasons: Either the real interest rate ir changes or the expected inflation rate changes. The effect on the exchange rate is quite different, depending on which of these two factors is the source of the change in the nominal interest rate. Suppose that the domestic real interest rate increases so that the nominal interest rate iD rises while expected inflation remains unchanged. In this case, it is reasonable to assume that the expected appreciation of the dollar will be unchanged because expected inflation is unchanged. In this case, the increase in iD increases the relative expected return on dollar assets, increases the quantity of dollar assets demanded at each level of the exchange rate, and shifts the demand curve to the right. We end up with the situation depicted in Figure 15.4, which analyzes an increase in iD, holding everything else constant. Our model of the foreign exchange market produces the following result: When domestic real interest rates rise, the domestic currency appreciates. When the nominal interest rate rises because of an increase in expected inflation, we get a different result from the one shown in Figure 15.4. The rise in expected domestic inflation leads to a decline in the expected appreciation of the dollar, which is typically thought to be larger than the increase in the domestic interest rate iD.1 As a result, at any given exchange rate, the relative expected return on domestic (dollar) assets falls, the demand curve shifts to the left, and the exchange rate falls from E1 to E2 as shown in Figure 15.7. Our analysis leads to this conclusion: When domestic interest rates rise due to an expected increase in inflation, the domestic currency depreciates. Because this conclusion is completely different from the one reached when the rise in the domestic interest rate is associated with a higher real interest rate, we must always distinguish between real and nominal measures when analyzing the effects of interest rates on exchange rates.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Why Are Exchange Rates So Volatile?
The high volatility of foreign exchange rates surprises many people. Thirty or so years ago, economists generally believed that allowing exchange rates to be determined in the free market would not lead to large fluctuations in their values. Recent experience has proved them wrong. If we return to Figure 15.1, we see that exchange rates over the 1990–2010 period have been very volatile. The asset market approach to exchange rate determination that we have outlined in this chapter gives a straightforward explanation of volatile exchange rates. Because expected appreciation of the domestic currency affects the expected return on foreign deposits, expectations about the price level, inflation, trade barriers, productivity, import demand, export demand, and the money supply play important roles in determining the exchange rate. When expectations about any of these variables change, as they do—and often at that—our model indicates that there will be an immediate effect on the expected return on foreign deposits and therefore on the exchange rate. Because expectations on all these variables change with just about every bit of news that appears, it is not surprising that the exchange rate is volatile. Because earlier models of exchange rate behavior focused on goods markets rather than asset markets, they did not emphasize changing expectations as a source of exchange rate movements, and so these earlier models could not predict substantial fluctuations in exchange rates. The failure of earlier models to explain volatility is one reason why they are no longer so popular. The more modern approach developed here emphasizes that the foreign exchange market is like any other asset market in which expectations of the future matter. The foreign exchange market, like other asset markets such as the stock market, displays substantial price volatility, and foreign exchange rates are notoriously hard to forecast.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Dollar and Interest Rates
In the chapter preview, we mentioned that the dollar was weak in the late 1970s, rose substantially from 1980 to 1985, and declined thereafter. We can use our analysis of the foreign exchange market to understand exchange rate movements and help explain the dollar’s rise in the early 1980s and fall thereafter. Some important information for tracing the dollar’s changing value is presented in Figure 15.8, which plots measures of real and nominal interest rates and the value of the dollar in terms of a basket of foreign currencies (called an effective exchange rate index). We can see that the value of the dollar and the measure of real interest rates tend to rise and fall together. In the late 1970s, real interest rates were at low levels, and so was the value of the dollar. Beginning in 1980, however, real interest rates in the United States began to climb sharply, and at the same time so did the dollar. After 1984, the real interest rate declined substantially, as did the dollar. Our model of exchange rate determination helps explain the rise in the early 1980s and fall thereafter. As Figure 15.4 indicates, a rise in the U.S. real interest rate raises the relative expected return on dollar assets, which leads to purchases of dollar assets that raise the exchange rate. This is exactly what happened in the 1980–1984 period. The subsequent fall in U.S. real interest rates then lowered the relative expected return on dollar assets, which lowered the demand for them and thus lowered the exchange rate. The plot of nominal interest rates in Figure 15.9 also demonstrates that the correspondence between nominal interest rates and exchange rate movements is not nearly as close as that between real interest rates and exchange rate movements. This is also exactly what our analysis predicts. The rise in nominal interest rates in the late 1970s was not reflected in a corresponding rise in the value of the dollar; indeed, the dollar actually fell in the late 1970s. Figure 15.9 explains why the rise in nominal rates in the late 1970s did not produce a rise in the dollar. As a comparison of the real and nominal interest rates in the late 1970s indicates, the rise in nominal interest rates reflected an increase in expected inflation and not an increase in real interest rates. As our analysis in Figure 15.7 demonstrates, the rise in nominal interest rates stemming from a rise in expected inflation should lead to a decline in the dollar, and that is exactly what happened. If there is a moral to the story, it is that a failure to distinguish between real and nominal interest rates can lead to poor predictions of exchange rate movements: The weakness of the dollar in the late 1970s and the strength of the dollar in the early 1980s can be explained by movements in real interest rates but not by movements in nominal interest rates.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Subprime Crisis and the Dollar
With the start of the subprime financial crisis in August 2007, the dollar began an accelerated decline in value, falling by 9% against the euro until mid July of 2008, and 6% against a wider basket of currencies. After hitting an all time low against the euro on July 11, the dollar suddenly shot upward, by over 20% against the euro by the end of October and 15% against a wider basket of currencies. What is the relationship between the subprime crisis and these large swings in the value of the dollar? During 2007, the negative effects of the subprime crisis on economic activity were mostly confined to the United States. The Federal Reserve acted aggressively to lower interest rates to counter the contractionary effects, decreasing the federal funds rate target by 325 basis points from September of 2007 to April of 2008. In contrast, other central banks like the ECB did not see the need to lower interest rates, particularly because high energy prices had led to a surge in inflation. The relative expected return on dollar assets thus declined, shifting the demand curve for dollar assets to the left, as in Figure 15.5, leading to a decline in the equilibrium exchange rate. Our analysis of the foreign exchange market thus explains why the early phase of the subprime crisis led to a decline in the value of the dollar. We now turn to the rise in the value of the dollar. Starting in the summer of 2008, the effects of the subprime crisis on economic activity began to spread more widely throughout the world. Foreign central banks started to cut interest rates, with the expectation that further rate cuts would follow, as indeed did occur. The expected decline in foreign interest rates then increased the relative expected return of dollar assets, leading to a rightward shift in the demand curve, and a rise in the value of the dollar, as shown in Figure 15.4. Another factor driving the dollar upwards was the “flight to quality” when the subprime financial crisis reached a particularly virulent stage in September and October. Both Americans and foreigners now wanted to put their money in the safest assets possible: U.S. Treasury securities. The resulting increase in the demand for dollar assets provided an additional reason for the demand curve for dollar assets to shift out to the right, thereby helping to produce a sharp appreciation of the dollar.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Reading the Wall Street Journal: The “Currency Trading” Column
Now that we have an understanding of how exchange rates are determined, we can use our analysis to understand discussions about developments in the foreign exchange market reported in the financial press. Every day, the Wall Street Journal reports on developments in the foreign exchange market on the previous business day in its “Currency Trading” column, an example of which is presented in the Following the Financial News box, “The ‘Currency Trading’ Column.” The column states that the dollar fell against the euro after the Federal Reserve renewed its commitment to ultralow interest rates as it turned more cautious on the U.S. economic recovery. Our analysis of the foreign exchange market explains why this development led to a weaker dollar. The weaker economy and the Fed’s commitment to keep interest rates low lower the expected return on dollar assets in the future. Therefore, traders in the currency markets will expect that in the future the relative expected return for dollar assets will be lower and, as a result, there will be a smaller quantity of dollar assets demanded at each exchange rate. Thus, they expect that in the future the demand curve for dollar assets will shift to the left, as in Figure 15.5, and the dollar will depreciate in the future. Because currency traders expect a lower future exchange rate for the dollar, the expected appreciation of the dollar falls today. This lowers the expected return for dollar assets relative to foreign assets now, which causes the demand for dollar assets to decline and causes the current exchange rate to fall, as in Figure 15.5. The column also points out that the British pound appreciated because one member of the Bank of England’s Monetary Policy Committee voted to raise interest rates. Again this is what our analysis of the foreign exchange market predicts. The greater likelihood of a rise in domestic (British) interest rates will lead traders to expect the relative expected return for pound assets to be higher, thereby increasing the quantity of pound assets demanded at each exchange rate, shifting the demand curve to the right as in Figure 15.4, and causing the pound to appreciate in the future. The higher expected future exchange rate for the pound raises the expected return for pound assets, which causes the demand for pound assets to rise today and causes the pound to appreciate as in Figure 15.4.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A Day at the Federal Reserve Bank of New York’s Foreign Exchange Desk
Although the U.S. Treasury is primarily responsible for foreign exchange policy, decisions to intervene in the foreign exchange market are made jointly by the U.S. Treasury and the Federal Reserve’s FOMC (Federal Open Market Committee). The actual conduct of foreign exchange intervention is the responsibility of the foreign exchange desk at the Federal Reserve Bank of New York, which is right next to the open market desk. The manager of foreign exchange operations at the New York Fed supervises the traders and analysts who follow developments in the foreign exchange market. Every morning at 7:30, a trader on staff who has arrived at the New York Fed in the predawn hours speaks on the telephone with counterparts at the U.S. Treasury and provides an update on overnight activity in overseas financial and foreign exchange markets. Later in the morning, at 9:30, the manager and his or her staff hold a conference call with senior staff at the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve in Washington. In the afternoon, at 2:30, they have a second conference call, which is a joint briefing of officials at the board and the Treasury. Although by statute the Treasury has the lead role in setting foreign exchange policy, it strives to reach a consensus among all three parties—the Treasury, the Board of Governors, and the Federal Reserve Bank of New York. If they decide that a foreign exchange intervention is necessary that day—an unusual occurrence, as a year may go by without a U.S. foreign exchange intervention—the manager instructs his traders to carry out the agreed on purchase or sale of foreign currencies. Because funds for exchange rate intervention are held separately by the Treasury (in its Exchange Stabilization Fund) and the Federal Reserve, the manager and his or her staff are not trading the funds of the Federal Reserve Bank of New York; rather, they act as an agent for the Treasury and the FOMC in conducting these transactions. As part of their duties, before every FOMC meeting, the staff helps prepare a lengthy document full of data for the FOMC members, other Reserve bank presidents, and Treasury officials. It describes developments in the domestic and foreign markets over the previous five or six weeks, a task that keeps them especially busy right before the FOMC meeting.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Euro’s Challenge to the Dollar
With the creation of the European Monetary System and the euro in 1999, the U.S. dollar is facing a challenge to its position as the key reserve currency in international financial transactions. Adoption of the euro increases integration of Europe’s financial markets, which could help them rival those in the United States. The resulting increase in the use of euros in financial markets will make it more likely that international transactions are carried out in the euro. The economic clout of the European Union rivals that of the United States: Both have a similar share of world GDP (around 20%) and world exports (around 15%). If the European Central Bank can make sure that inflation remains low so that the euro becomes a sound currency, this should bode well for the euro. However, for the euro to eat into the dollar’s position as a reserve currency, the European Union must function as a cohesive political entity that can exert its influence on the world stage. There are serious doubts on this score, however, particularly with the “no” votes on the European constitution by France and the Netherlands in 2005 and the recent fiscal problems in Greece. Most analysts think it will be a long time before the euro beats out the dollar in international financial transactions.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Dollarization Dollarization,
which involves the adoption of another country’s currency, usually the U.S. dollar (but other sound currencies like the euro or the yen are also possibilities), is a more extreme version of a fixed exchange rate than is a currency board. A currency board can be abandoned, allowing a change in the value of the currency, but a change of value is impossible with dollarization: A dollar bill is always worth one dollar whether it is held in the United States or outside of it. Panama has been dollarized since the inception of the country in the early twentieth century, while El Salvador and Ecuador have recently adopted dollarization. Dollarization, like a currency board, prevents a central bank from creating inflation. Another key advantage is that it completely avoids the possibility of a speculative attack on the domestic currency (because there is none) that is still a danger even under a currency board arrangement. However, like a currency board, dollarization does not allow a country to pursue its own monetary policy or have a lender of last resort. Dollarization has one additional disadvantage not characteristic of a currency board: Because a country adopting dollarization no longer has its own currency, it loses the revenue that a government receives by issuing money, which is called seigniorage. Because governments (or their central banks) do not have to pay interest on their currency, they earn revenue (seigniorage) by using this currency to purchase income earning assets such as bonds. In the case of the Federal Reserve in the United States, this revenue is usually in excess of $20 billion dollars per year. If an emerging market country dollarizes and give up its currency, it needs to make up this loss of revenue somewhere, which is not always easy for a poor country.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Foreign Exchange Crisis of September 1992
In the aftermath of German reunification in October 1990, the German central bank, the Bundesbank, faced rising inflationary pressures, with inflation having accelerated from below 3% in 1990 to near 5% by 1992. To get monetary growth under control and to dampen inflation, the Bundesbank raised German interest rates to near double digit levels. Figure 16.3 shows the consequences of these actions by the Bundesbank in the foreign exchange market for British pounds. Note that in the diagram, the pound is the domestic currency and the German mark (deutsche mark, DM, Germany’s currency before the advent of the euro in 1999) is the foreign currency. The increase in German interest rates iF lowered the relative expected return of British pound assets and shifted the demand curve to D2 in Figure 16.3. The intersection of the supply and demand curves at point 2 was now below the lower exchange rate limit at that time (2.778 marks per pound, denoted Epar). To increase the value of the pound relative to the mark and to restore the mark/pound exchange rate to within the exchange rate mechanism limits, one of two things had to happen. The Bank of England would have to pursue a contractionary monetary policy, thereby raising British interest rates sufficiently to shift the demand curve back to D1 so that the equilibrium would remain at point 1, where the exchange rate would remain at Epar. Alternatively, the Bundesbank would have to pursue an expansionary monetary policy, thereby lowering German interest rates. Lower German interest rates would raise the relative expected return on British assets and shift the demand curve back to D1 so the exchange rate would be at Epar. The catch was that the Bundesbank, whose primary goal was fighting inflation, was unwilling to pursue an expansionary monetary policy, and the British, who were facing their worst recession in the postwar period, were unwilling to pursue a contractionary monetary policy to prop up the pound. This impasse became clear when in response to great pressure from other members of the EMS, the Bundesbank was willing to lower its lending rates by only a token amount on September 16 after a speculative attack was mounted on the currencies of the Scandinavian countries. So at some point in the near future, the value of the pound would have to decline to point 2. Speculators now knew that the depreciation of the pound was imminent. As a result, the relative expected return of the pound fell sharply, shifting the demand curve left to D3 in Figure 16.3. As a result of the large leftward shift of the demand curve, there was now a huge excess supply of pound assets at the par exchange rate Epar, which caused a massive sell off of pounds (and purchases of marks) by speculators. The need for the British central bank to intervene to raise the value of the pound now became much greater and required a huge rise in British interest rates. After a major intervention effort on the part of the Bank of England, which included a rise in its lending rate from 10% to 15%, which still wasn’t enough, the British were finally forced to give up on September 16: They pulled out of the ERM indefinitely and allowed the pound to depreciate by 10% against the mark. Speculative attacks on other currencies forced devaluation of the Spanish peseta by 5% and the Italian lira by 15%. To defend its currency, the Swedish central bank was forced to raise its daily lending rate to the astronomical level of 500%! By the time the crisis was over, the British, French, Italian, Spanish, and Swedish central banks had intervened to the tune of $100 billion; the Bundesbank alone had laid out $50 billion for foreign exchange intervention. Because foreign exchange crises lead to large changes in central banks’ holdings of international reserves and thus significantly affect the official reserve asset items in the balance of payments, these crises are also referred to as balance of payments crises. The attempt to prop up the European Monetary System was not cheap for these central banks. It is estimated that they lost $4 to $6 billion as a result of exchange rate intervention during the crisis
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Recent Foreign Exchange Crises in Emerging Market Countries:
Mexico 1994, East Asia 1997, Brazil 1999, and Argentina 2002 Major currency crises in emerging market countries have been a common occurrence in recent years. We can use Figure 16.3 to understand the sequence of events during the currency crises in Mexico in 1994, East Asia in 1997, Brazil in 1999, and Argentina in 2002. To do so, we just need to recognize that dollars are the foreign currency, while the domestic currency was either pesos, baht, or reals. (Note that the exchange rate label on the vertical axis would be in terms of dollars/domestic currency and that the label on the horizontal axis would be the quantity of domestic currency (say, pesos) assets. In Mexico in March 1994, political instability (the assassination of the ruling party’s presidential candidate) sparked investors’ concerns that the peso might be devalued. The result was that the relative expected return on peso assets fell, thus moving the demand curve from D1 to D2 in Figure 16.3. In the case of Thailand in May 1997, the large current account deficit and the weakness of the Thai financial system raised similar concerns about the devaluation of the domestic currency, with the same effect on the demand curve. In Brazil in late 1998 and Argentina in 2001, concerns about fiscal situations that could lead to the printing of money to finance the deficit, and thereby raise inflation, also meant that a devaluation was more likely to occur. The concerns thus lowered the relative expected return on domestic assets and shifted the demand curve from D1 to D2. In all of these cases, the result was that the intersection of the supply and demand curves was below the pegged value of the domestic currency at Epar. To keep their domestic currencies from falling below Epar, these countries’ central banks needed to buy the domestic currency and sell dollars to raise interest rates and shift the demand curve to the right, in the process losing international reserves. At first, the central banks were successful in containing the speculative attacks. However, when more bad news broke, speculators became even more confident that these countries could not defend their currencies. (The bad news was everywhere: In Mexico, there was an uprising in Chiappas and revelations about problems in the banking system; in Thailand, there was a major failure of a financial institution; Brazil had a worsening fiscal situation, along with a threat by a governor to default on his state’s debt; and in Argentina, a full scale bank panic and an actual default on the government debt occurred.) As a result, the relative expected returns on domestic assets fell further, and the demand curve moved much farther to the left to D3, and the central banks lost even more international reserves. Given the stress on the economy from rising interest rates and the loss of reserves, eventually the monetary authorities could no longer continue to defend the currency and were forced to give up and let their currencies depreciate. This scenario happened in Mexico in December 1994, in Thailand in July 1997, in Brazil in January 1999, and in Argentina in January 2002. Concerns about similar problems in other countries then triggered speculative attacks against them as well. This contagion occurred in the aftermath of the Mexican crisis (jauntily referred to as the “Tequila effect”) with speculative attacks on other Latin American currencies, but there were no further currency collapses. In the East Asian crisis, however, fears of devaluation spread throughout the region, leading to a scenario akin to that depicted in Figure 16.3. Consequently, one by one, Indonesia, Malaysia, South Korea, and the Philippines were forced to devalue sharply. Even Hong Kong, Singapore, and Taiwan were subjected to speculative attacks, but because these countries had healthy financial systems, the attacks were successfully averted. As we saw in Chapter 8, the sharp depreciations in Mexico, East Asia, and Argentina led to full scale financial crises that severely damaged these countries’ economies. The foreign exchange crisis that shocked the European Monetary System in September 1992 cost central banks a lot of money, but the public in European countries were not seriously affected. By contrast, the public in Mexico, Argentina, and the crisis countries of East Asia were not so lucky: The collapse of these currencies triggered by speculative attacks led to financial crises, producing severe depressions that caused hardship and political unrest.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
How Did China Accumulate Over $2 Trillion of International Reserves?
By the end of 2010, China had accumulated more than $2 trillion of international reserves, and its international reserves are expected to keep growing in the near future. How did the Chinese get their hands on this vast amount of foreign assets? After all, China is not yet a rich country. The answer is that China pegged its exchange rate to the U.S. dollar at a fixed rate of 8.28 yuan (also called renminbi) to the dollar in 1994. Because of China’s rapidly growing productivity and an inflation rate that is lower than in the United States, the long run value of the yuan has increased, leading to a higher relative expected return for yuan assets and a rightward shift of the demand for yuan assets. As a result, the Chinese have found themselves in the situation depicted in panel (b) of Figure 16.2, in which the yuan is undervalued. To keep the yuan from appreciating above Epar to E1 in the figure, the Chinese central bank has been engaging in massive purchases of U.S. dollar assets. Today the Chinese government is one of the largest holders of U.S. government bonds in the world. The pegging of the yuan to the U.S. dollar has created several problems for Chinese authorities. First, the Chinese now own a lot of U.S. assets, particularly U.S. Treasury securities, which have very low returns. Second, the undervaluation of the yuan has meant that Chinese goods are so cheap abroad that many countries have threatened to erect trade barriers against these goods if the Chinese government does not allow an upward revaluation of the yuan. Third, the Chinese purchase of dollar assets has resulted in a substantial increase in the Chinese monetary base and money supply, which has the potential to produce high inflation in the future. Because the Chinese authorities have created substantial roadblocks to capital mobility, they have been able to sterilize most of their exchange rate interventions while maintaining the exchange rate peg. Nevertheless, they still worry about inflationary pressures. In July 2005, China finally made its peg somewhat more flexible by letting the value of the yuan rise 2.1%. The central bank also indicated that it would no longer fix the yuan to the U.S. dollar, but would instead maintain its value relative to a basket of currencies. However, in 2008 during the global financial crisis, China reimposed the peg, but then dropped it in June of 2010. Why have the Chinese authorities maintained this exchange rate peg for so long despite the problems? One answer is that they want to keep their export sector humming by keeping the prices of their export goods low. A second answer might be that they want to accumulate a large amount of international reserves as a “war chest” that could be sold to buy yuan in the event of a speculative attack against the yuan at some future date. Given the pressure on the Chinese government to further revalue its currency from government officials in the United States and Europe, there are likely to be further adjustments in China’s exchange rate policy in the future.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Because banking plays such a major role in channeling funds to borrowers with productive investment opportunities, this financial activity is important in ensuring that the financial system and the economy run smoothly and efficiently. In the United States, banks (depository institutions) supply more than $6 trillion in credit annually. They provide loans to businesses, help us finance our college educations or the purchase of a new car or home, and provide us with services such as checking and savings accounts. In this chapter, we examine how banking is conducted to earn the highest profits possible: how and why banks make loans, how they acquire funds and manage their assets and liabilities (debts), and how they earn income. Although we focus on commercial banking because this is the most important financial intermediary activity, many of the same principles are applicable to other types of financial intermediation.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
How a Capital Crunch Caused a Credit Crunch in 2008
The dramatic slowdown in the growth of credit in the wake of the financial crisis starting in 2007 triggered a “credit crunch” in which credit was hard to get. As a result, the performance of the economy in 2008 was very poor. What caused the credit crunch? Our analysis of how a bank manages its capital indicates that the 2008 credit crunch was caused, at least in part, by the capital crunch, in which shortfalls of bank capital led to slower credit growth. As we discussed in Chapter 8, there was a major boom and bust in the housing market that led to huge losses for banks from their holdings of securities backed by residential mortgages. In addition, banks had to take back onto their balance sheets many of the structured investment vehicles (SIVs) they had sponsored. The losses that reduced bank capital, along with the need for more capital to support the assets coming back onto their balance sheets, led to capital shortfalls: Banks had to either raise new capital or restrict asset growth by cutting back on lending. Banks did raise some capital but with the growing weakness of the economy, raising new capital was extremely difficult, so banks also chose to tighten their lending standards and reduce lending. Both of these helped produce a weak economy in 2008.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Spread of Government Deposit Insurance Throughout the World:
Is This a Good Thing? For the first 30 years after federal deposit insurance was established in the United States, only six countries emulated the United States and adopted deposit insurance. However, this began to change in the late 1960s, with the trend accelerating in the 1990s, when the number of countries adopting deposit insurance topped 70. Government deposit insurance has taken off throughout the world because of growing concern about the health of banking systems, particularly after the increasing number of banking crises in recent years (documented at the end of this chapter). Has this spread of deposit insurance been a good thing? Has it helped improve the performance of the financial system and prevent banking crises? The answer seems to be no under many circumstances. Research at the World Bank has found that, on average, the adoption of explicit government deposit insurance is associated with less banking sector stability and a higher incidence of banking crises.* Furthermore, on average, it seems to retard financial development. However, the negative effects of deposit insurance appear only in countries with weak institutional environments: an absence of rule of law, ineffective regulation and supervision of the financial sector, and high corruption. This is exactly what might be expected because, as we will see later in this chapter, a strong institutional environment is needed to limit the moral hazard incentives for banks to engage in the excessively risky behavior encouraged by deposit insurance. The problem is that developing a strong institutional environment may be very difficult to achieve in many emerging market countries. This leaves us with the following conclusion: Adoption of deposit insurance may be exactly the wrong medicine for promoting stability and efficiency of banking systems in emerging market countries.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Whither the Basel Accord?
Starting in June 1999, the Basel Committee on Banking Supervision released several proposals to reform the original 1988 Basel Accord. These efforts culminated in what bank supervisors refer to as Basel 2, which is based on three pillars. 1. Pillar 1 links capital requirements for large, internationally active banks more closely to actual risk of three types: market risk, credit risk, and operational risk. It does so by specifying many more categories of assets with different risk weights in its standardized approach. Alternatively, it allows sophisticated banks to pursue an internal ratingsbased approach that permits banks to use their own models of credit risk. 2. Pillar 2 focuses on strengthening the supervisory process, particularly in assessing the quality of risk management in banking institutions and evaluating whether these institutions have adequate procedures to determine how much capital they need. 3. Pillar 3 focuses on improving market discipline through increased disclosure of details about a bank’s credit exposures, its amount of reserves and capital, the officials who control the bank, and the effectiveness of its internal rating system. Although Basel 2 made strides toward limiting excessive risk taking by internationally active banking institutions, it greatly increased the complexity of the accord. The document describing the original Basel Accord was 26 pages, while the final draft of Basel 2 exceeded 500 pages. The original timetable called for the completion of the final round of consultation by the end of 2001, with the new rules taking effect by 2004. However, criticism from banks, trade associations, and national regulators led to several postponements. The final draft was not published until June 2004, and Basel 2 started to be implemented at the beginning of 2008 by European banks, but full implementation in the United States did not occur until 2009. Only the dozen or so largest U.S. banks are subject to Basel 2: All others will be allowed to use a simplified version of the standards it imposes. The financial crisis of 2007 to 2009, however, revealed many limitations of the new accord. First, Basel 2 did not require banks to have sufficient capital to weather the financial disruption during this period. Second, risk weights in the standardized approach are heavily reliant on credit ratings, which proved to be so unreliable in the run up to the financial crisis. Third, Basel 2 is very procyclical. That is, it demands that banks hold less capital when times are good, but more when times are bad, thereby exacerbating credit cycles. Because the probability of default and expected losses for different classes of assets rises during bad times, Basel 2 may require more capital at exactly the time when capital is most short. This has been a particularly serious concern in the aftermath of the 2007–2009 financial crisis. As a result of this crisis, banks’ capital balances eroded, leading to a cutback on lending that was a big drag on the economy. Basel 2 has made this cutback in lending even worse, doing even more harm to the economy. Fourth, Basel 2 did not focus sufficiently on the dangers of a possible drying up of liquidity, which brought financial institutions down during the financial crisis. As a result of these limitations, the Basel Committee has begun work on a new accord, Basel 3. Its goal is to beef up capital standards, make them less procyclical, make new rules on the use of credit ratings, and require financial institutions to have more stable funding so they are better able to withstand liquidity shocks. Measures to achieve these objectives are highly controversial because there are concerns that tightening up capital standards might cause banks to restrict their lending, which would make it harder for economies throughout the world to recover from the recent deep recession. When Basel 3 will be implemented is anybody’s guess.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Electronic Banking: New Challenges for Bank Regulation
The advent of electronic banking has raised new concerns for banking regulation, specifically about security and privacy. Worries about the security of electronic banking and e money are an important barrier to their increased use. With electronic banking, you might worry that criminals can access your bank account and steal your money by moving your balances to someone else’s account. Indeed, a notorious case of this happened in 1995, when a Russian computer programmer got access to Citibank’s computers and moved funds electronically into his and his conspirators’ accounts. Private solutions to deal with this problem have arisen with the development of more secure encryption technologies to prevent this kind of fraud. However, because bank customers are not knowledgeable about computer security issues, there is a role for the government in regulating electronic banking to make sure that encryption procedures are adequate. Similar encryption issues apply to e money, so requirements that banks make it difficult for criminals to engage in digital counterfeiting make sense. To meet these challenges, bank examiners in the United States assess how a bank deals with the special security issues raised by electronic banking and also oversee third party providers of electronic banking platforms. Also, because consumers want to know that electronic banking transactions are executed correctly, bank examiners assess the technical skills of banks in setting up electronic banking services and the bank’s capabilities for dealing with problems. Another security issue of concern to bank customers is the validity of digital signatures. The Electronic Signatures in Global and National Commerce Act of 2000 makes electronic signatures as legally binding as written signatures in most circumstances. Electronic banking also raises serious privacy concerns. Because electronic transactions can be stored on databases, banks are able to collect a huge amount of information about their customers—their assets, creditworthiness, purchases, and so on—that can be sold to other financial institutions and businesses. This potential invasion of our privacy rightfully makes us very nervous. To protect customers’ privacy, the Gramm Leach Bliley Act of 1999 has limited the distribution of these data, but it does not go as far as the European Data Protection Directive, which prohibits the transfer of information about online transactions. How to protect consumers’ privacy in our electronic age is one of the great challenges our society faces, so privacy regulations for electronic banking are likely to evolve over time.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
International Financial Regulation
Because asymmetric information problems in the banking industry are a fact of life throughout the world, financial regulation in other countries is similar to that in the United States. Financial institutions are chartered and supervised by government regulators, just as they are in the United States. Disclosure requirements for financial institutions and corporations issuing securities are similar in other developed countries. Deposit insurance is also a feature of the regulatory systems in most other countries, although its coverage is often smaller than in the United States and is intentionally not advertised. We have also seen that capital requirements are in the process of being standardized across countries with agreements like the Basel Accord. Particular problems in financial regulation occur when financial institutions operate in many countries and thus can readily shift their business from one country to another. Financial regulators closely examine the domestic operations of financial institutions in their country, but they often do not have the knowledge or ability to keep a close watch on operations in other countries, either by domestic institutions’ foreign affiliates or by foreign institutions with domestic branches. In addition, when a financial institution operates in many countries, it is not always clear which national regulatory authority should have primary responsibility for keeping the institution from engaging in overly risky activities. The difficulties inherent in international financial regulation were highlighted by the collapse of the Bank of Credit and Commerce International (BCCI). BCCI, which was operating in more than 70 countries, including the United States and the United Kingdom, was supervised by Luxembourg, a tiny country unlikely to be up to the task. When massive fraud was discovered, the Bank of England closed BCCI down, but not before depositors and stockholders were exposed to huge losses. Cooperation among regulators in different countries and standardization of regulatory requirements provide potential solutions to the problems of international financial regulation. The world has been moving in this direction through agreements like the Basel Accord and oversight procedures announced by the Basel Committee in July 1992, which require a bank’s worldwide operations to be under the scrutiny of a single home country regulator with enhanced powers to acquire information on the bank’s activities. Also, the Basel Committee ruled that regulators in other countries can restrict the operations of a foreign bank if they feel that it lacks effective oversight. Whether agreements of this type will solve the problem of international financial regulation in the future is an open question.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Will “Clicks” Dominate “Bricks” in the Banking Industry?
With the advent of virtual banks (“clicks”) and the convenience they provide, a key question is whether they will become the primary form in which banks do their business, eliminating the need for physical bank branches (“bricks”) as the main delivery mechanism for banking services. Indeed, will stand alone Internet banks be the wave of the future? The answer seems to be no. Internet only banks such as Wingspan (owned by Bank One), First e (Dublin based), and Egg (a British Internet only bank owned by Prudential) have had disappointing revenue growth and profits. The result is that pure online banking has not been the success that proponents had hoped for. Why has Internet banking been a disappointment? There are several strikes against Internet banking. First, bank depositors want to know that their savings are secure, and so are reluctant to put their money into new institutions without a long track record. Second, customers worry about the security of their online transactions and whether their transactions will truly be kept private. Traditional banks are viewed as being more secure and trustworthy in terms of releasing private information. Third, customers may prefer services provided by physical branches. For example, banking customers seem to prefer to purchase long term savings products face to face. Fourth, Internet banking has run into technical problems— server crashes, slow connections over phone lines, mistakes in conducting transactions—that will probably diminish over time as technology improves. The wave of the future thus does not appear to be pure Internet banks. Instead it looks like “clicks and bricks” will be the predominant form of banking, in which online banking is used to complement the services provided by traditional banks. Nonetheless, the delivery of banking services is undergoing massive changes, with more and more banking services delivered over the Internet and the number of physical bank branches likely to decline in the future.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Was the Fed to Blame for the Housing Price Bubble?
Some economists—most prominently, John Taylor of Stanford University—have argued that low interest policies of the Federal Reserve in the 2003 to 2006 period caused the housing price bubble.1 During this period, the Federal Reserve drove the federal funds rate to the very low level of 1%. The low federal funds rate led to low mortgage rates that stimulated housing demand and encouraged the issuance of subprime mortgages, both of which led to rising housing prices and a bubble. In a speech given in January of 2009, the Chairman of the Federal Reserve, Ben Bernanke countered this argument.2 He concluded that monetary policy was not to blame for the housing price bubble. First, he said, it is not at all clear that the federal funds rate was below what the Taylor rule suggested would be appropriate. Rates only seemed low when current values, not forecasts, were used in the output and inflation calculations for the Taylor rule. Rather, the culprits were the proliferation of new mortgage products that lowered mortgage payments, a relaxation of lending standards that brought more buyers into the housing market, and capital inflows from emerging market countries such as China and India. Bernanke’s speech was very controversial, and the debate over whether monetary policy was to blame for the housing price bubble continues to this day.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Ireland and the 2007–2009 Financial Crisis
From 1995 to 2007, Ireland had one of the highest economic growth rates in the world, with real GDP growing at an average annual rate of 6.3%. As a result, Ireland became known as the “Celtic Tiger,” and it became one of Europe’s wealthiest nations, with more Mercedes owners per capita than even Germany. But behind the scenes, soaring real estate prices and a boom in mortgage lending were laying the groundwork for a major financial crisis that hit in 2008, sending the Irish economy into a severe recession. Irish banks eased loan standards, offering to cover a greater share of housing costs and at longer terms. As in the United States, there was a housing price bubble, with Irish home values rising even more rapidly, doubling once between 1995 and 2000, and then again from 2000 to 2007. By 2007, residential construction reached 13% of GDP, twice the average of other wealthy nations, with Irish banks increasing their mortgage loans by 25% a year. With the onset of the financial crisis in late 2007, home prices collapsed—falling nearly 20%, among the steepest in the world. Irish banks were particularly vulnerable because of their exposure to mortgage markets and because they had funded their balance sheet expansions through short term money markets. The combination of tighter funding and falling asset prices led to large losses, and in October 2008, the Irish government guaranteed all deposits. By early 2009, the Irish government had nationalized one of the three largest banks and injected capital into the other two. Banks remained weak into the end of 2009, with the government announcing a plan to shift “toxic” bank assets into a government funding vehicle. The financial crisis in Ireland triggered a painful recession, among the worst in modern Irish history. Unemployment rose from 4.5% pre crisis to 12.5%, while GDP levels tumbled by more than 10%, and aggregate price levels fell. Tax rolls thinned, and the government struggled to close a yawning budget deficit, which reached over 12% in 2009, through higher taxes on income and consumption.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Financial Crises in Mexico, 1994–1995; East Asia, 1997–1998; and Argentina,
2001–2002 When emerging market countries opened up their markets to the outside world in the 1990s, they had high hopes that globalization would stimulate economic growth and eventually make them rich. Instead of leading to high economic growth and reduced poverty, however, many of them experienced financial crises that were every bit as devastating as the Great Depression was in the United States. The most dramatic of these crises were the Mexican crisis, which started in 1994; the East Asian crisis, which started in July 1997; and the Argentine crisis, which started in 2001. We now apply the asymmetric information analysis of the dynamics of financial crises to explain why a developing country can shift dramatically from a path of high growth before a financial crisis—as was true in Mexico and particularly the East Asian countries of Thailand, Malaysia, Indonesia, the Philippines, and South Korea—to a sharp decline in economic activity. Before their crises, Mexico and the East Asian countries had achieved a sound fiscal policy. The East Asian countries ran budget surpluses, and Mexico ran a budget deficit of less than 1% of GDP, a number that most advanced countries, including the United States, would be thrilled to have today. The key precipitating factor driving these crises was the deterioration in banks’ balance sheets because of increasing loan losses. When financial markets in these countries were liberalized and opened to foreign capital markets in the early 1990s, a lending boom ensued. Bank credit to the private nonfinancial business sector accelerated sharply, with lending expanding at 15% to 30% per year. Because of weak supervision by bank regulators, aided and abetted by powerful business interests (see the Global box on “The Perversion of the Financial Liberalization/Globalization Process: Chaebols and the South Korean Crisis”) and a lack of expertise in screening and monitoring borrowers at banking institutions, losses on loans began to mount, causing an erosion of banks’ net worth (capital). As a result of this erosion, banks had fewer resources to lend. This lack of lending led to a contraction of economic activity along the lines outlined in the previous section. In contrast to Mexico and the East Asian countries, Argentina had a well supervised banking system, and a lending boom did not occur before the crisis. The banks were in surprisingly good shape before the crisis, even though a severe recession had begun in 1998. This recession led to declining tax revenues and a widening gap between expenditures and taxes. The subsequent severe fiscal imbalances were so large that the government had trouble getting both citizens and foreigners to buy enough of its bonds, so it coerced banks into absorbing large amounts of government debt. Investors soon lost confidence in the ability of the Argentine government to repay this debt. The price of the debt plummeted, leaving big holes in banks’ balance sheets. This weakening helped lead to a decline in lending and a contraction of economic activity, as in Mexico and East Asia. Consistent with the U.S. experience in the nineteenth and early twentieth centuries, another precipitating factor in the Mexican and Argentine (but not East Asian) financial crises was a rise in interest rates abroad. Before the Mexican crisis, in February 1994, and before the Argentine crisis, in mid 1999, the Federal Reserve
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Perversion of the Financial Liberalization/Globalization Process:
Chaebols and the South Korean Crisis Although there are similarities with the perversion of the financial liberalization/globalization process that occurred in many emerging market economies, South Korea exhibited some particularly extraordinary elements because of the unique role of the chaebols, large, family owned conglomerates. Because of their massive size—sales of the top five chaebols were nearly 50% of GDP right before the crisis—the chaebols were politically very powerful. The chaebols’ influence extended the government safety net far beyond the financial system because the government had a long standing policy of viewing the chaebols as being “too big to fail.” With this policy in place, the chaebols would receive direct government assistance or directed credit if they got into trouble. Not surprisingly, given this guarantee, chaebols borrowed like crazy and were highly leveraged. In the 1990s, the chaebols were in trouble: they weren’t making any money. From 1993 to 1996, the return on assets for the top 30 chaebols was never much more than 3% (a comparable figure for U.S. corporations is 15–20%). In 1996 right before the crisis hit, the rate of return on assets had fallen to 0.2%. Furthermore, only the top 5 chaebols had any profits: the 6th to 30th chaebols never had a rate of return on assets much above 1% and in many years had negative rates of returns. With this poor profitability and the already high leverage, any banker would pull back on lending to these conglomerates if there were no government safety net. Because the banks knew the government would make good on the chaebol’s loans if they were in default, the opposite occurred: banks continued to lend to the chaebols, evergreened their loans, and, in effect, threw good money after bad. Even though the chaebols were getting substantial financing from commercial banks, it was not enough to feed their insatiable appetite for more credit. The chaebols decided that the way out of their troubles was to pursue growth, and they needed massive amounts of funds to do it. Even with the vaunted Korean national savings rate of over 30%, there just were not enough loanable funds to finance the chaebols’ planned expansion. Where could they get it? The answer was in the international capital markets. The chaebols encouraged the Korean government to accelerate the process of opening up Korean financial markets to foreign capital as part of the liberalization process. In 1993, the government expanded the ability of domestic banks to make the loans denominated in foreign currency by expanding the types of loans for which this was possible. At the same time, the Korean government effectively allowed unlimited short term foreign borrowing by financial institutions, but maintained quantity restrictions on long term borrowing as a means of managing capital flows into the country. Opening up short term but not long term to foreign capital flows made no economic sense. It is short term capital flows that make an emerging market economy financially fragile: short term capital can fly out of the country extremely rapidly if there is any whiff of a crisis. Opening up primarily to short term capital, however, made complete political sense: the chaebols needed the money and it is much easier to borrow short term funds at lower interest rates in the international market because long term lending is much riskier for foreign creditors. Keeping restrictions on long term international borrowing, however, allowed the government to say that it was still restricting foreign capital inflows and to claim that it was opening up to foreign capital in a prudent manner. In the aftermath of these changes, Korean banks opened 28 branches in foreign countries that gave them access to foreign funds. Although Korean financial institutions now had access to foreign capital, the chaebols still had a problem. They were not allowed to own commercial banks and so the chaebols might not get all of the bank loans that they needed. What was the answer? The chaebols needed to get their hands on financial institutions that they could own, that were allowed to borrow abroad, and that were subject to very little regulation. The financial institution could then engage in connected lending by borrowing foreign funds and then lending them to the chaebols who owned the institution. An existing type of financial institution specific to South Korea perfectly met the chaebols’ requirements: the merchant bank. Merchant banking corporations were wholesale financial institutions that engaged in underwriting securities, leasing, and short term lending to the corporate sector. They obtained funds for these loans by issuing bonds and commercial paper and by borrowing from interbank and foreign markets. At the time of the Korean crisis, merchant banks were allowed to borrow abroad and were almost virtually unregulated. The chaebols saw their opportunity. Government officials, often lured with bribery and kickbacks, allowed many finance companies (some already owned by the chaebols) that were not allowed to borrow abroad to be converted into merchant banks, which could. In 1990 there were only six merchant banks and all of them were foreign affiliated. By 1997, after the chaebols had exercised their political influence, there were 30 merchant banks, sixteen of which were owned by chaebols, two of which were foreign owned but in which chaebols were major stockholders, and twelve of which were independent of the chaebols but Korean owned. The chaebols were now able to exploit connected lending with a vengeance: the merchant banks channeled massive amounts of funds to their chaebol owners, where they flowed into unproductive investments in steel, automobile production, and chemicals. When the loans went sour, the stage was set for a disastrous financial crisis.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Role of the Research Staff
The Federal Reserve System is the largest employer of economists not just in the United States, but in the world. The system’s research staff has around 1,000 people, about half of whom are economists. Of these 500 economists, approximately 250 are at the Board of Governors, 100 are at the Federal Reserve Bank of New York, and the remainders are at the other Federal Reserve banks. What do all these economists do? The most important task of the Fed’s economists is to follow the incoming data on the economy from government agencies and private sector organizations and provide guidance to the policymakers on where the economy may be heading and what the impact of monetary policy actions on the economy might be. Before each FOMC meeting, the research staff at each Federal Reserve bank briefs its president and the senior management of the bank on its forecast for the U.S. economy and the issues that are likely to be discussed at the meeting. The research staff also provides briefing materials or a formal briefing on the economic outlook for the bank’s region, something that each president discusses at the FOMC meeting. Meanwhile, at the Board of Governors, economists maintain a large econometric model (a model whose equations are estimated with statistical procedures) that helps them produce their forecasts of the national economy, and they, too, brief the governors on the national economic outlook. The research staffers at the banks and the board also provide support for the bank supervisory staff, tracking developments in the banking sector and other financial markets and institutions and providing bank examiners with technical advice that they might need in the course of their examinations. Because the Board of Governors has to decide on whether to approve bank mergers, the research staff at both the board and the bank in whose district the merger is to take place prepare information on what effect the proposed merger might have on the competitive environment. To assure compliance with the Community Reinvestment Act, economists also analyze a bank’s performance in its lending activities in different communities. Because of the increased influence of developments in foreign countries on the U.S. economy, the members of the research staff, particularly at the New York Fed and the Board, produce reports on the major foreign economies. They also conduct research on developments in the foreign exchange market because of its growing importance in the monetary policy process, and to support the activities of the foreign exchange desk. Economists help support the operation of the open market desk by projecting reserve growth and the growth of the monetary aggregates. Staff economists also engage in basic research on the effects of monetary policy on output and inflation, developments in the labor markets, international trade, international capital markets, banking and other financial institutions, financial markets, and the regional economy, among other topics. This research is published widely in academic journals and in Reserve bank publications. (Federal Reserve bank reviews are a good source of supplemental material for finance students.) Another important activity of the research staff primarily at the Reserve banks is in the public education area. Staff economists are called on frequently to make presentations to the board of directors at their banks or to make speeches to the public in their district.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Green, Blue, Teal, and Beige: What Do These Colors Mean at the Fed?
Three research documents play an important role in the monetary policy process and at Federal Open Market Committee meetings. Up until 2010, a detailed national forecast for the next three years, generated by the Federal Reserve Board of Governor’s Research and Statistics Division, was placed between green covers and was thus known as the “green book.” Projections for the monetary aggregates prepared by the Monetary Affairs Division of the Board of Governors, along with typically three alternative scenarios for monetary policy decisions (labeled A, B, and C), were contained in the “blue book” in blue covers. Both books were distributed to all participants in FOMC meetings. Starting in 2010, the green and the blue book were combined into the “teal book” with teal covers: teal is the color that is a combination of green and blue.* The “beige book,” with beige covers, is produced by the Reserve banks and details evidence gleaned either from surveys or from talks with key businesses and financial institutions on the state of the economy in each of the Federal Reserve districts. This is the only one of the books that is distributed publicly, and it often receives a lot of attention in the press.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
How Bernanke’s Style Differs from Greenspan’s
Every Federal Reserve chairman has a different style that affects how policy decisions are made at the Fed. There has been much discussion of how the current chairman of the Fed, Ben Bernanke, differs from Alan Greenspan, who was the Chairman of the Federal Reserve Board for 19 years from 1987 until 2006. Alan Greenspan dominated the Fed like no other prior Federal Reserve chairman. His background was very different from that of Bernanke, who spent most of his professional life in academia at Princeton University. Greenspan, a disciple of Ayn Rand, is a strong advocate for laissez faire capitalism and headed a very successful economic consulting firm, Townsend Greenspan.* Greenspan has never been an economic theorist, but is rather famous for immersing himself in the data—literally so, because he is known to have done this in his bathtub at the beginning of the day—and often focused on rather obscure data series to come up with his forecasts. As a result, Greenspan did not rely exclusively on the Federal Reserve Board staff’s forecast in making his policy decisions. A prominent example occurred during 1997, when the Board staff was forecasting a surge in inflation, which would have required a tightening of monetary policy. Yet Greenspan believed that inflation would not rise and convinced the FOMC not to tighten monetary policy. Greenspan proved to be right and was dubbed the “maestro” by the media. Bernanke, on the other hand, before going to Washington as a governor of the Fed in 2002, and then as the chairman of the Council of Economic Advisors in 2005, and finally back to the Fed as chairman in 2006, spent his entire career as a professor, first at Stanford University’s Graduate School of Business, and then in the Economics Department at Princeton University, where he became chairman. Because Bernanke did not make his name as an economic forecaster, the Board staff’s forecast now plays a much greater role in decision making at the FOMC. In contrast to Greenspan, Bernanke’s background as a top academic economist has meant that he focuses on analytics in making his decisions. The result is a much greater use of model simulations in guiding policy discussions. The style of policy discussions has also changed with the new chairman. Greenspan exercised extensive control of the discussion at the FOMC. During the Greenspan era, the discussion was formal, with each participant speaking after being put on a list by the secretary of the FOMC. Under Bernanke, there is more give and take. Bernanke has encouraged so called two handed interventions. When a participant wants to go out of turn to ask a question or make a point about something that one of the other participants has just said, he or she raises two hands and is then acknowledged by Chairman Bernanke and called on to speak. The order of the discussion at the FOMC has also changed in a very subtle, but extremely important way. Under Greenspan, after the other FOMC participants had expressed their views on the economy, Greenspan would present his views on the state of the economy and then would make a recommendation for what monetary policy action should be taken. This required that the other participants would then just agree or disagree with the chairman’s recommendation in the following round of discussion about monetary policy. In contrast, Bernanke usually does not make a recommendation for monetary policy immediately after other FOMC participants have expressed their views on the economy. Instead, he summarizes what he has heard from the other participants, makes some comments of his own, and then waits until after he has heard the views of all the other participants about monetary policy before making his policy recommendation. The process under Greenspan meant that the chairman was pretty much making the decision about policy, while Bernanke’s procedure is more democratic and enables participants to have greater influence over the chairman’s vote. Another big difference in style is in terms of transparency. Greenspan was famous for being obscure, and even quipped at a Congressional hearing, “I guess I should warn you, if I turn out to be particularly clear, you’ve probably misunderstood what I’ve said.” Bernanke is known for being a particularly clear speaker. Although there were advances in transparency under Greenspan, he adopted more transparent communication reluctantly. Bernanke has been a much stronger supporter of transparency, having advocated that the Fed announce its inflation objective, and having launched a major initiative in 2006 to study Federal Reserve communications that resulted in substantial increases in Fed transparency in November 2007 (as discussed in the Inside the Fed box on the evolution of the Fed’s communication strategy on page 209).
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Evolution of the Fed’s Communication Strategy
As the theory of bureaucratic behavior predicts, the Fed has incentives to hide its actions from the public and from politicians to avoid conflicts with them. In the past, this motivation led to a penchant for secrecy in the Fed, about which one former Fed official remarked that “a lot of staffers would concede that [secrecy] is designed to shield the Fed from political oversight.”* For example, the Fed pursued an active defense of delaying its release of FOMC directives to Congress and the public. However, as we have seen, in 1994 it began to reveal the FOMC directive immediately after each FOMC meeting. In 1999, it also began to immediately announce the “bias” toward which direction monetary policy was likely to go, later expressed as the balance of risks in the economy. In 2002, the Fed started to report the roll call vote on the federal funds rate target taken at the FOMC meeting. In December 2004, it moved up the release date of the minutes of FOMC meetings to three weeks after the meeting from six weeks, its previous policy. The Fed has increased its transparency in recent years, but it has been slower to do so than many other central banks. One important trend toward greater transparency is the announcement by a central bank of a specific numerical objective for inflation, often referred to as an inflation target, which will be discussed in the next chapter. Alan Greenspan was strongly opposed to the Fed’s moving in this direction, but Chairman Bernanke is much more favorably disposed, having advocated the announcement of a specific numerical inflation objective in his writings and in a speech that he gave as a governor in 2004.† In November 2007, the Bernanke Fed announced major enhancements to its communication strategy. First, the forecast horizon for the FOMC’s projections under “appropriate policy” for inflation, unemployment, and GDP growth, which were mandated by the Humphrey Hawkins legislation in 1978, was extended from two calendar years to three, with long run projections added in 2009. Because projections for inflation given appropriate policy should converge to the desired inflation objective eventually, the long run projections provide more information about what individual FOMC participants think should be the objective for inflation. This change therefore moves the FOMC closer to specifying a numerical objective for inflation. Second, the committee now publishes these projections four times a year rather than twice a year. Third, the release of the projections now includes narrative describing FOMC participants’ views of the principal forces shaping the outlook and the sources of risks to that outlook. Although these enhancements to Fed communication are major steps forward, there are strong arguments that further increases in transparency could improve the control of inflation by anchoring inflation expectations more firmly, and help stabilize economic fluctuations as well.‡
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
How the Federal Reserve’s Operating Procedures Limit Fluctuations in the
Federal Funds Rate An important advantage of the Fed’s current procedures for operating the discount window and paying interest on reserves is that they limit fluctuations in the federal funds rate. We can use our supply and demand analysis of the market for reserves to see why. Suppose that initially the equilibrium federal funds rate is at the federal funds rate target of in Figure 10.5. If the demand for reserves has a large unexpected increase, the demand curve would shift to the right to where it now intersects the supply curve for reserves on the flat portion where the equilibrium federal funds rate, , equals the discount rate, id. No matter how far the demand curve shifts to the right, the equilibrium federal funds rate, , will just stay at id because borrowed reserves will just continue to increase, matching the increase in demand. Similarly, if the demand for reserves has a large unexpected decrease, the demand curve would shift to the left to and the supply curve intersects the demand curve on its flat portion where the equilibrium federal funds rate, , equals the interest rate paid on reserves ier. No matter how far the demand curve shifts to the left, the equilibrium federal funds rate will stay at ier because excess reserves will just keep on increasing so that the quantity demanded of reserves equals the quantity of nonborrowed reserves supplied. Our analysis therefore shows that the Federal Reserve’s operating procedures limit the fluctuations of the federal funds rate to between ier and id. If the range between ier and id is kept narrow enough, then the fluctuations around the target rate will be small.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Federal Reserve Lender of Last Resort Facilities During the 2007–2009 Financial Crisis
The onset of the 2007–2009 financial crisis in August of 2007 led to a massive increase in Federal Reserve lender of last resort facilities to contain the crisis. In mid August 2007, the Federal Reserve lowered the discount rate to just 50 basis points (0.5 percentage point) above the federal funds rate target from the normal 100 basis points. In March 2008, it narrowed the spread further by setting the discount rate at only 25 basis points above the federal funds rate target. In September 2007 and March 2008, it extended the term of discount loans: Before the crisis they were overnight or very short term loans; in September the maturity of discount loans was extended to 30 days and to 90 days in March. In December 2007, the Fed set up a temporary Term Auction Facility (TAF) in which it made discount loans at a rate determined through competitive auctions. This facility carried less of a stigma for banks than the normal discount window facility. It was more widely used than the discount window facility because it enabled banks to borrow at a rate less than the discount rate and because the rate was determined competitively, rather than being set at a penalty rate. While the TAF was a new facility for the Fed, the European Central Bank already had a similar facility. The TAF auctions started at amounts of $20 billion, but as the crisis worsened, the amounts were raised dramatically, with a total outstanding of over $400 billion. On March 11, 2008, the Fed created the Term Securities Lending Facility (TSLF) in which it would lend Treasury securities to primary dealers for terms longer than overnight, as in existing lending programs, with the primary dealers pledging other securities. The TSLF’s purpose was to supply more Treasury securities to primary dealers so it had sufficient Treasury securities to act as collateral, thereby helping the orderly functioning of financial markets. On the same day, the Fed authorized increases in reciprocal currency arrangements known as swap lines, in which it lent dollars to foreign central banks (in this case, the European Central Bank and the Swiss National Bank) in exchange for foreign currencies so that these central banks could in turn make dollar loans to their domestic banks. These swap lines were enlarged even further during the course of the crisis. On March 14, 2008, as liquidity dried up for Bear Stearns, the Fed announced that it would in effect buy up $30 billion of Bear Stearns’s mortgage related assets in order to facilitate the purchase of Bear Stearns by J.P. Morgan.* The Fed took this extraordinary action because it believed that Bear Stearns was so interconnected with other financial institutions that its failure would have caused a massive fire sale of assets and a complete seizing up of credit markets. The Fed took this action under an obscure provision of the Federal Reserve Act, section 13(3), that was put into the act during the Great Depression. It allowed the Fed under “unusual and exigent circumstances” to lend money to any individual, partnership, or corporation, as long as certain requirements were met. This broadening of the Fed’s lender of last resort actions outside of its traditional lending to depository institutions was described by Paul Volcker, a former chairman of the Federal Reserve, as the Fed going to the “very edge of its lawful and implied powers.” The broadening of the Fed’s lender of last resort activities using section 13(3) grew as the crisis deepened. On March 16, 2008, the Federal Reserve announced a new temporary credit facility, the Primary Dealer Credit Facility (PDCF), under which primary dealers, many of them investment banks, could borrow on similar terms to depository institutions using the traditional discount window facility. On September 19, 2008, after money market mutual funds were subject to large amounts of redemptions by investors, the Fed announced another temporary facility, the Asset Backed Commercial Paper Money Market Mutual Fund Liquidity Facility (AMLF), in which the Fed would lend to primary dealers so that they could purchase asset backed commercial paper from money market mutual funds. By so doing, money market mutual funds would be able to unload their asset backed commercial paper when they needed to sell it to meet the demands for redemptions from their investors. A similar facility, the Money Market Investor Funding Facility (MMIFF), was set up on October 21, 2008, to lend to special purpose vehicles that could buy a wider range of money market mutual funds assets. On October 7, 2008, the Fed announced another liquidity facility to promote the smooth functioning of the commercial paper market that had also begun to seize up, the Commercial Paper Funding Facility (CPFF). With this facility, the Fed could buy commercial paper directly from issuers at a rate 100 basis points above the expected federal funds rate over the term of the commercial paper. To restrict the facility to rolling over existing commercial paper, the Fed stipulated that each issuer could sell only an amount of commercial paper that was less than or equal to its average amount outstanding in August 2008. Then on November 25, 2008, the Fed announced two new liquidity facilities, the Term Asset Backed Securities Loan Facility (TALF), in which it committed to the financing of $200 billion (later raised to $1 trillion) of asset backed securities for a one year period, and a Government Sponsored Entities Purchase Program, in which the Fed made a commitment to buy $100 billion of debt issued by Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac and other government sponsored enterprises (GSEs), as well as $500 billion of mortgage backed securities guaranteed by these GSEs. In the aftermath of the Lehman Brothers failure, the Fed also extended large amounts of credit directly to financial institutions that needed to be bailed out. In late September, the Fed agreed to lend over $100 billion to prop up AIG and also authorized the Federal Reserve Bank of New York to purchase mortgage backed and other risky securities from AIG to pump more liquidity into the company. In November, the Fed committed over $200 billion to absorb 90% of losses resulting from the federal government’s guarantee of Citigroup’s risky assets, while in January, it did the same thing for Bank of America, committing over $80 billion. The expansion of the Fed’s lender of last resort programs during the 2007–2009 financial crisis was indeed remarkable, expanding the Fed’s balance sheet by over one trillion dollars by the end of 2008, with continuing expansion thereafter. The unprecedented expansion in the Fed’s balance sheet demonstrated the Fed’s commitment to get the financial markets working again.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The European Central Bank’s Monetary Policy Strategy
The European Central Bank (ECB) pursues a hybrid monetary policy strategy that has elements in common with the monetary targeting strategy previously used by the Bundesbank but also includes some elements of inflation targeting.* Like inflation targeting, the ECB has an announced goal for inflation over the medium term of “below, but close to, 2%.” The ECB’s strategy has two key “pillars.” First, monetary and credit aggregates are assessed for “their implications for future inflation and economic growth.” Second, many other economic variables are used to assess the future economic outlook. (Until 2003, the ECB employed something closer to a monetary target, setting a “reference value” for the growth rate of the M3 monetary aggregate.) The ECB’s strategy is somewhat unclear and has been subject to criticism for this reason. Although the “below, but close to, 2%” goal for inflation sounds like an inflation target, the ECB has repeatedly stated that it does not have an inflation target. This central bank seems to have decided to try to “have its cake and eat it, too” by not committing too strongly to either a monetary targeting strategy or an inflation targeting strategy. The resulting difficulty of assessing the ECB’s strategy has the potential to reduce the accountability of the institution.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Chairman Bernanke and Inflation Targeting
Ben Bernanke, the chairman of the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System, is a world renowned expert on monetary policy and, while an academic, wrote extensively on inflation targeting, including articles and a book written with the author of this text.* Bernanke’s writings suggest that he is a strong proponent of inflation targeting and increased transparency in central banks. In an important speech given at a conference at the Federal Reserve Bank of St. Louis in 2004, he described how the Federal Reserve might approach a movement toward inflation targeting: The Fed should announce a numerical value for its long run inflation goal.† Bernanke emphasized that announcing a numerical objective for inflation would be completely consistent with the Fed’s dual mandate of achieving price stability and maximum employment and therefore might be called a mandate consistent inflation objective, because it would be set above zero to avoid deflations, which have harmful effects on employment. In addition, it would not be intended to be a short run target that might lead to excessively tight control of inflation at the expense of overly high employment fluctuations. Since becoming Fed chairman, Bernanke has made it clear that any movement toward inflation targeting must result from a consensus within the FOMC. After Chairman Bernanke set up a subcommittee to discuss Federal Reserve communication, which included discussions about announcing a specific numerical inflation objective, the FOMC made a partial step in the direction of inflation targeting in November of 2007 when it announced a new communication strategy that lengthened the horizon for FOMC participants’ inflation projections to three years, with long run projections for inflation added in 2009. The long run projections under “appropriate policy” will reflect each participant’s inflation objective because at that horizon, inflation would converge to the long run objective. A couple of relatively minor modifications could move the Fed even further toward inflation targeting. The first modification requires lengthening the horizon for the inflation projection. The goal would be to set a time sufficiently far off so that inflation would almost surely converge to its long run value by then. Second, the FOMC participants would need to be willing to reach a consensus on a single value for the mandate consistent inflation objective. With these two modifications, the longer run inflation projections would in effect be an announcement of a specific numerical objective for the inflation rate and so serve as a flexible version of inflation targeting.‡ Whether the Federal Reserve will move in this direction in the future is still highly uncertain.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
If you were to review Microsoft”s annual report for 2009, you would find that the company had over $6 billion in cash and equivalents. The firm also listed $25 billion in short term securities. The firm chose to hold over $30 billion in highly liquid short term assets in order to be ready to take advantage of investment opportunities and to avoid the risks associated with other types of investments. Microsoft will have much of these funds invested in the money markets. Recall that money market securities are short term, low risk, and very liquid. Because of the high degree of safety and liquidity these securities exhibit, they are close to being money, hence their name. The money markets have been active since the early 1800s but have become much more important since 1970, when interest rates rose above historic levels. In fact, the rise in short term rates, coupled with a regulated ceiling on the rate that banks could pay for deposits, resulted in a rapid outflow of funds from financial institutions in the late 1970s and early 1980s. This outflow in turn caused many banks and savings and loans to fail. The industry regained its health only after massive changes were made to bank regulations with regard to money market interest rates. This chapter carefully reviews the money markets and the securities that are traded there. In addition, we discuss why the money markets are important to our financial system.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Treasury Bill Auctions Go Haywire
Every Thursday, the Treasury announces how many 28 day, 91 day, and 182 day Treasury bills it will offer for sale. Buyers must submit bids by the following Monday, and awards are made the next morning. The Treasury accepts the bids offering the highest price. The Treasury auction of securities is supposed to be highly competitive and fair. To ensure proper levels of competition, no one dealer is allowed to purchase more than 35% of any one issue. About 40 primary dealers regularly participate in the auction. In 1991, the disclosure that Salomon Smith Barney had broken the rules to corner the market cast the fairness of the auction in doubt. Salomon Smith Barney purchased 35% of the Treasury securities in its own name by submitting a relatively high bid. It then bought additional securities in the names of its customers, often without their knowledge or consent. Salomon then bought the securities from the customers. As a result of these transactions, Salomon cornered the market and was able to charge a monopoly like premium. The investigation of Salomon Smith Barney revealed that during one auction in May 1991, the brokerage managed to gain control of 94% of an $11 billion issue. During the scandal that followed this disclosure, John Gutfreund, the firm’s chairman, and several other top executives with Salomon retired. The Treasury has instituted new rules since then to ensure that the market remains competitive.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Ironic Birth of the Eurodollar Market
One of capitalism’s great ironies is that the Eurodollar market, one of the most important financial markets used by capitalists, was fathered by the Soviet Union. In the early 1950s, during the height of the Cold War, the Soviets had accumulated a substantial amount of dollar balances held by banks in the United States. Because the Russians feared that the U.S. government might freeze these assets in the United States, they wanted to move the deposits to Europe, where they would be safe from expropriation.(This fear was not unjustified—consider the U.S. freeze on Iranian assets in 1979 and Iraqi assets in 1990.) However, they also wanted to keep the deposits in dollars so that they could be used in their international transactions. The solution was to transfer the deposits to European banks but to keep the deposits denominated in dollars. When the Soviets did this, the Eurodollar was born.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
In the last chapter we identified the capital markets as where long term securities trade. We then examined the bond market and discussed how bond prices are established. In this chapter we continue our investigation of the capital markets by taking a close look at the stock market. The market for stocks is undoubtedly the financial market that receives the most attention and scrutiny. Great fortunes are made and lost as investors attempt to anticipate the market”s ups and downs. We have witnessed an unprecedented period of volatility over the last decade. Stock indexes hit record highs in the late 1990s, largely led by technology companies, and then fell precipitously in 2000. By 2007 they had returned to record highs before falling back to 1997 levels in 2009. In this chapter we look at how this important market works. We begin by discussing the markets where stocks trade. We will then examine the fundamental theories that underlie the valuation of stocks. These theories are critical to an understanding of the forces that cause the value of stocks to rise and fall minute by minute and day by day. We will learn that determining a value for a common stock is very difficult and that it is this difficulty that leads to so much volatility in the stock markets.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The September 11 Terrorist Attack, the Enron Scandal, and the Stock Market
In 2001, two big shocks hit the stock market: the September 11 terrorist attack and the Enron scandal. Our analysis of stock price evaluation, again using the Gordon growth model, can help us understand how these events affected stock prices. The September 11 terrorist attack raised the possibility that terrorism against the United States would paralyze the country. These fears led to a downward revision of the growth prospects for U.S. companies, thus lowering the dividend growth rate g in the Gordon model. The resulting rise in the denominator in Equation 5 should lead to a decline in P0 and hence a decline in stock prices. Increased uncertainty for the U.S. economy would also raise the required return on investment in equity. A higher ke also leads to a rise in the denominator in Equation 5, a decline in P0, and a general fall in stock prices. As the Gordon model predicts, the stock market fell by over 10% immediately after September 11. Subsequently, the U.S. successes against the Taliban in Afghanistan and the absence of further terrorist attacks reduced market fears and uncertainty, causing g to recover and ke to fall. The denominator in Equation 5 then fell, leading to a recovery in P0 and the stock market in October and November. However, by the beginning of 2002, the Enron scandal and disclosures that many companies had overstated their earnings caused many investors to doubt the formerly rosy forecast of earnings and dividend growth for corporations. The resulting revision of g downward, and the rise in ke because of increased uncertainty about the quality of accounting information, should have led to a rise in the denominator in the Gordon Equation 5, thereby lowering P0 for many companies and hence the overall stock market. As predicted by our analysis, this is exactly what happened. The stock market recovery was aborted and it entered a downward slide.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
History of the Dow Jones Industrial Average
The Dow Jones Industrial Average (DJIA) is an index composed of 30 “blue chip” industrial firms. On May 26, 1896, Charles H. Dow added up the prices of 12 of the best known stocks and created an average by dividing by the number of stocks. In 1916, eight more stocks were added, and in 1928, the 30 stock average made its debut. Today the editors of the Wall Street Journal select the firms that make up the DJIA. They take a broad view of the type of firm that is considered “industrial”: In essence, it is almost any company that is not in the transportation or utility business (because there are also Dow Jones averages for those kinds of stocks). In choosing a new company for DJIA, they look among substantial industrial companies with a history of successful growth and wide interest among investors. The components of the DJIA are changed periodically. For example, in 2004, AT&T, Eastman Kodak, and International Paper were replaced with American International Group, Pfizer, and Verizon Communications. Most market watchers agree that the DJIA is not the best indicator of the market’s overall day to day performance. Indeed, it varies substantially from broader based stock indexes in the short run. It continues to be followed so closely primarily because it is the oldest index and was the first to be quoted by other publications. But it tracks the performance of the market reasonably well over the long run.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Part of the classic American dream is to own one”s own home. With the price of the average house now over $235,000, few of us could hope to do this until late in life if we were not able to borrow the bulk of the purchase price. Similarly, businesses rely on borrowed capital far more than on equity investment to finance their growth. Many small firms do not have access to the bond market and must find alternative sources of funds. Consider the state of the mortgage loan markets 100 years ago. They were organized mostly to accommodate the needs of businesses and the very wealthy. Much has changed since then. The purpose of this chapter is to discuss these changes. Chapter 11 discussed the money markets, the markets for short term funds. Chapters 12 and 13 discussed the bond and stock markets. This chapter discusses the mortgage markets, where borrowers—individuals, businesses, and governments—can obtain long term collateralized loans. From one perspective, the mortgage markets form a subcategory of the capital markets because mortgages involve long term funds. But the mortgage markets differ from the stock and bond markets in important ways. First, the usual borrowers in the capital markets are government entities and businesses, whereas the usual borrowers in the mortgage markets are individuals. Second, mortgage loans are made for varying amounts and maturities, depending on the borrowers” needs, features that cause problems for developing a secondary market. In this chapter we will identify the characteristics of typical residential mortgages, discuss the usual terms and types of mortgages available, and review who provides and services these loans. We will also continue the discussion of issues in the mortgage backed security market and the recent crash of the subprime mortgage market begun in Chapter 8.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Discount Point Decision
Suppose that you are offered two loan alternatives. In the first, you pay no discount points and the interest rate is 12%. In the second, you pay 2 discount points but receive a lower interest rate of 11.5%. Which alternative do you choose? To answer this question you must first compute the effective annual rate without discount points. Since the loan is compounded monthly, you pay 1% per month. Because of the compounding, the effective annual rate is greater than the simple annual rate. To compute the effective rate, raise 1 plus the monthly rate to the 12th power and subtract 1. The effective annual rate on the no point loan is thus Effective annual rate =(1.01)12 1 = 0.1268 12.68% Because of monthly compounding, a 12% annual percentage rate has an effective annual rate of 12.68%. On a 30 year, $100,000 mortgage loan, your payment will be $1,028.61 as found on a financial calculator. Now compute the effective annual rate if you pay 2 discount points. Let’s assume that the amount of the loan is still $100,000. If you pay 2 points, instead of receiving $100,000, you will receive only $98,000 ($100,000 – $2000). Your payment is computed on the $100,000, but at the lower interest rate. Using a financial calculator, we find that the monthly payment is $990.29 and your monthly rate is 0.9804%.1 The effective annual rate after compounding is Effective annual rate = (1.009804)12 1 = 0.1242 = 12.42% As a result of paying the 2 discount points, the effective annual rate has dropped from 12.68% to 12.42%. On the surface, it would seem like a good idea to pay the points. The problem is that these calculations were made assuming the loan would be held for the life of the loan, 30 years. What happens if you sell the house before the loan matures? If the loan is paid off early, the borrower will benefit from the lower interest rate for a shorter length of time, and the discount points are spread over a shorter period of time. The result of these two factors is that the effective interest rate rises the shorter the time the loan is held before being paid. This relationship is demonstrated in Table 14.2. If the 2 point loan is held for 15 years, the effective rate is 12.45%. At 10 years, the effective rate is up to 12.52%. Even at 6 years, when the effective rate is 12.65%, paying the discount points has saved the borrower money. However, if the loan is paid off at 5 years, the effective rate is 12.73%, which is higher than the 12.68% effective rate if no points were paid.2
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Changes in the Interest Rate Due to Expected Inflation:
The Fisher Effect We have already done most of the work to evaluate how a change in expected inflation affects the nominal interest rate, in that we have already analyzed how a change in expected inflation shifts the supply and demand curves. Figure 4.4 shows the effect on the equilibrium interest rate of an increase in expected inflation. Suppose that expected inflation is initially 5% and the initial supply and demand Curves BS1 and Bd1 intersect at point 1, where the equilibrium bond price is P1.If expected inflation rises to 10%, the expected return on bonds relative to real assets falls for any given bond price and interest rate. As a result, the demand for bonds falls, and the demand curve shifts to the left from to .The rise in expected inflation also shifts the supply curve. At any given bond price and interest rate, the real cost of borrowing has declined, causing the quantity of bonds supplied to increase, and the supply curve shifts to the right, from Bd1 to Bd2. When the demand and supply curves shift in response to the change in expected inflation, the equilibrium moves from point 1 to point 2, the intersection of Bd1 and BS2. The equilibrium bond price has fallen from P1 to P2, and because the bond price is negatively related to the interest rate, this means that the interest rate has risen. Note that Figure 4.4 has been drawn so that the equilibrium quantity of bonds remains the same for both point 1 and point 2. However, depending on the size of the shifts in the supply and demand curves, the equilibrium quantity of bonds could either rise or fall when expected inflation rises. Bd2
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Changes in the Interest Rate Due to a Business Cycle Expansion
Figure 4.6 analyzes the effects of a business cycle expansion on interest rates. In a business cycle expansion, the amounts of goods and services being produced in the economy increase, so national income increases. When this occurs, businesses will be more willing to borrow, because they are likely to have many profitable investment opportunities for which they need financing. Hence at a given bond price, the quantity of bonds that firms want to sell (that is, the supply of bonds) will increase. This means that in a business cycle expansion, the supply curve for bonds shifts to the right (see Figure 4.6) from BS1 to Bs2. Expansion in the economy will also affect the demand for bonds. As the business cycle expands, wealth is likely to increase, and the theory of asset demand tells us that the demand for bonds will rise as well. We see this in Figure 4.6, where the demand curve has shifted to the right, from Bd1 to Bd2.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Explaining Low Japanese Interest Rates
In the 1990s and early 2000s, Japanese interest rates became the lowest in the world. Indeed, in November 1998, an extraordinary event occurred: Interest rates on Japanese six month Treasury bills turned slightly negative (see Chapter 3). Why did Japanese rates drop to such low levels? In the late 1990s and early 2000s, Japan experienced a prolonged recession, which was accompanied by deflation, a negative inflation rate. Using these facts, analysis similar to that used in the preceding application explains the low Japanese interest rates. Negative inflation caused the demand for bonds to rise because the expected return on real assets fell, thereby raising the relative expected return on bonds and in turn causing the demand curve to shift to the right. The negative inflation also raised the real interest rate and therefore the real cost of borrowing for any given nominal rate, thereby causing the supply of bonds to contract and the supply curve to shift to the left. The outcome was then exactly the opposite of that graphed in Figure 4.4: The rightward shift of the demand curve and leftward shift of the supply curve led to a rise in the bond price and a fall in interest rates. The business cycle contraction and the resulting lack of profitable investment opportunities in Japan also led to lower interest rates, by decreasing the supply of bonds and shifting the supply curve to the left. Although the demand curve also would shift to the left because wealth decreased during the business cycle contraction, we have seen in the preceding application that the demand curve would shift less than the supply curve. Thus, the bond price rose and interest rates fell (the opposite outcome to that in Figure 4.6). Usually, we think that low interest rates are a good thing, because they make it cheap to borrow. But the Japanese example shows that just as there is a fallacy in the adage, “You can never be too rich or too thin” (maybe you can’t be too rich, but you can certainly be too thin and do damage to your health), there is a fallacy in always thinking that lower interest rates are better. In Japan, the low and even negative interest rates were a sign that the Japanese economy was in real trouble, with falling prices and a contracting economy. Only when the Japanese economy returns to health will interest rates rise back to more normal levels.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Reading the Wall Street Journal “Credit Markets” Column
Now that we have an understanding of how supply and demand determine prices and interest rates in the bond market, we can use our analysis to understand discussions about bond prices and interest rates appearing in the financial press. Every day, the Wall Street Journal reports on developments in the bond market on the previous business day in its “Credit Markets” column, an example of which is found in the Following the Financial News box on the next page. Let’s see how statements in the “Credit Markets” column can be explained using our supply and demand framework. The column featured in the Following the Financial News box begins by stating that Treasury prices soared as the euro continued its decline and investors expressed concerns about debt problems in Euro zone. This is exactly what our demand and supply analysis says should happen. The column describes the market as being very nervous and the increase in uncertainty about developments in Europe and elsewhere mean that U.S. Treasuries became less risky relative to foreign assets, which would cause the demand curve for Treasuries to shift to the right. The results would be an increase in the price of Treasury bonds, just as the column suggests.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
In our supply and demand analysis of interest rate behavior in Chapter 4, we examined the determination of just one interest rate. Yet we saw earlier that there are enormous numbers of bonds on which the interest rates can and do differ. In this chapter we complete the interest rate picture by examining the relationship of the various interest rates to one another. Understanding why they differ from bond to bond can help businesses, banks, insurance companies, and private investors decide which bonds to purchase as investments and which ones to sell. We first look at why bonds with the same term to maturity have different interest rates. The relationship among these interest rates is called the risk structure of interest rates, although risk, liquidity, and income tax rules all play a role in determining the risk structure. A bond”s term to maturity also affects its interest rate, and the relationship among interest rates on bonds with different terms to maturity is called the term structure of interest rates. In this chapter we examine the sources and causes of fluctuations in interest rates relative to one another and look at a number of theories that explain these fluctuations.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Subprime Collapse and the Baa Treasury Spread
Starting in August 2007, the collapse of the subprime mortgage market led to large losses in financial institutions (which we will discuss more extensively in Chapter 8). As a consequence of the subprime collapse, many investors began to doubt the financial health of corporations with low credit ratings such as Baa and even the reliability of the ratings themselves. The perceived increase in default risk for Baa bonds made them less desirable at any given interest rate, decreased the quantity demanded, and shifted the demand curve for Baa bonds to the left. As shown in panel (a) of Figure 5.2, the interest rate on Baa bonds should have risen, which is indeed what happened. Interest rates on Baa bonds rose by 280 basis points (2.80 percentage points) from 6.63% at the end of July 2007 to 9.43% at the most virulent stage of the crisis in mid October 2008. But the increase in perceived default risk for Baa bonds after the subprime collapse made default free U.S. Treasury bonds relatively more attractive and shifted the demand curve for these securities to the right—an outcome described by some analysts as a “flight to quality.” Just as our analysis predicts in Figure 5.2, interest rates on Treasury bonds fell by 80 basis points, from 4.78% at the end of July 2007 to 3.98% in mid October 2008. The spread between interest rates on Baa and Treasury bonds rose by 360 basis points from 1.85% before the crisis to 5.45% afterward.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Effects of the Bush Tax Cut and Its Possible Repeal on Bond Interest Rates
The Bush tax cut passed in 2001 scheduled a reduction of the top income tax bracket from 39% to 35% over a 10 year period. What is the effect of this income tax decrease on interest rates in the municipal bond market relative to those in the Treasury bond market? Our supply and demand analysis provides the answer. A decreased income tax rate for wealthy people means that the after tax expected return on tax free municipal bonds relative to that on Treasury bonds is lower, because the interest on Treasury bonds is now taxed at a lower rate. Because municipal bonds now become less desirable, their demand decreases, shifting the demand curve to the left, which lowers their price and raises their interest rate. Conversely, the lower income tax rate makes Treasury bonds more desirable; this change shifts their demand curve to the right, raises their price, and lowers their interest rates. Our analysis thus shows that the Bush tax cut raised the interest rates on municipal bonds relative to the interest rate on Treasury bonds. With the possible repeal of the Bush tax cuts for wealthy people that may occur under President Obama, the analysis would be reversed. Higher tax rates would raise the after tax expected return on tax free municipal bonds relative to Treasury bonds. Demand for municipal bonds would increase, shifting the demand curve to the right, which raises their price and lowers their interest rate. Conversely, the higher tax rate would make Treasury bonds less desirable, shifting their demand curve to the left, lowering their price, and raising their interest rate. Higher tax rates would thus result in lower interest rates on municipal bonds relative to the interest rate on Treasury bonds.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Interpreting Yield Curves, 1980–2010
Figure 5.7 illustrates several yield curves that have appeared for U.S. government bonds in recent years. What do these yield curves tell us about the public’s expectations of future movements of short term interest rates? The steep inverted yield curve that occurred on January 15, 1981, indicated that short term interest rates were expected to decline sharply in the future. For longer term interest rates with their positive liquidity premium to be well below the short term interest rate, short term interest rates must be expected to decline so sharply that their average is far below the current short term rate. Indeed, the public’s expectations of sharply lower short term interest rates evident in the yield curve were realized soon after January 15; by March, three month Treasury bill rates had declined from the 16% level to 13%. The steep upward sloping yield curve on March 28, 1985, and May 13, 2010, indicated that short term interest rates would climb in the future. The long term interest rate is higher than the short term interest rate when short term interest rates are expected to rise because their average plus the liquidity premium will be higher than the current short term rate. The moderately upward sloping yield curves on May 16, 1980, and March 3, 1997, indicated that short term interest rates were expected neither to rise nor to fall in the near future. In this case, their average remains the same as the current short term rate, and the positive liquidity premium for longer term bonds explains the moderate upward slope of the yield curve.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Throughout our discussion of how financial markets work, you may have noticed that the subject of expectations keeps cropping up. Expectations of returns, risk, and liquidity are central elements in the demand for assets; expectations of inflation have a major impact on bond prices and interest rates; expectations about the likelihood of default are the most important factor that determines the risk structure of interest rates; and expectations of future short term interest rates play a central role in determining the term structure of interest rates. Not only are expectations critical in understanding behavior in financial markets, but as we will see later in this book, they are also central to our understanding of how financial institutions operate. To understand how expectations are formed so that we can understand how securities prices move over time, we look at the efficient market hypothesis. In this chapter we examine the basic reasoning behind the efficient market hypothesis in order to explain some puzzling features of the operation and behavior of financial markets. You will see, for example, why changes in stock prices are unpredictable and why listening to a stock broker”s hot tips may not be a good idea. Theoretically, the efficient market hypothesis should be a powerful tool for analyzing behavior in financial markets. But to establish that it is in reality a useful tool, we must compare the theory with the data. Does the empirical evidence support the theory? Though mixed, the available evidence indicates that for many purposes, this theory is a good starting point for analyzing expectations.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
An Exception That Proves the Rule: Ivan Boesky
The efficient market hypothesis indicates that investment advisers should not have the ability to beat the market. Yet that is exactly what Ivan Boesky was able to do until 1986, when he was charged by the Securities and Exchange Commission with making unfair profits (rumored to be in the hundreds of millions of dollars) by trading on inside information. In an out of court settlement, Boesky was banned from the securities business, fined $100 million, and sentenced to three years in jail.(After serving his sentence, Boesky was released from jail in 1990.) If the stock market is efficient, can the SEC legitimately claim that Boesky was able to beat the market? The answer is yes. Ivan Boesky was the most successful of the socalled arbs (short for arbitrageurs) who made hundreds of millions in profits for himself and his clients by investing in the stocks of firms that were about to be taken over by other firms at an above market price. Boesky’s continuing success was assured by an arrangement whereby he paid cash (sometimes in a suitcase) to Dennis Levine, an investment banker who had inside information about when a takeover was to take place because his firm was arranging the financing of the deal. When Levine found out that a firm was planning a takeover, he would inform Boesky, who would then buy the stock of the company being taken over and sell it after the stock had risen. Boesky’s ability to make millions year after year in the 1980s is an exception that proves the rule that financial analysts cannot continually outperform the market; yet it supports the efficient markets claim that only information unavailable to the market enables an investor to do so. Boesky profited from knowing about takeovers before the rest of the market; this information was known to him but unavailable to the market.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Should Foreign Exchange Rates Follow a Random Walk?
Although the efficient market hypothesis is usually applied to the stock market, it can also be used to show that foreign exchange rates, like stock prices, should generally follow a random walk. To see why this is the case, consider what would happen if people could predict that a currency would appreciate by 1% in the coming week. By buying this currency, they could earn a greater than 50% return at an annual rate, which is likely to be far above the equilibrium return for holding a currency. As a result, people would immediately buy the currency and bid up its current price, thereby reducing the expected return. The process would stop only when the predictable change in the exchange rate dropped to near zero so that the optimal forecast of the return no longer differed from the equilibrium return. Likewise, if people could predict that the currency would depreciate by 1% in the coming week, they would sell it until the predictable change in the exchange rate was again near zero. The efficient market hypothesis therefore implies that future changes in exchange rates should, for all practical purposes, be unpredictable; in other words, exchange rates should follow random walks. This is exactly what empirical evidence finds.7
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
What Do the Black Monday Crash of 1987 and the Tech Crash of 2000 Tell Us About the Efficient Market Hypothesis?
On October 19, 1987, dubbed “Black Monday,” the Dow Jones Industrial Average declined more than 20%, the largest one day decline in U.S. history. The collapse of the high tech companies’ share prices from their peaks in March 2000 caused the heavily tech laden NASDAQ index to fall from around 5,000 in March 2000 to around 1,500 in 2001 and 2002, for a decline of well over 60%. These two crashes have caused many economists to question the validity of the efficient market hypothesis. They do not believe that an efficient market could have produced such massive swings in share prices. To what degree should these stock market crashes make us doubt the validity of the efficient market hypothesis? Nothing in the efficient market hypothesis rules out large changes in stock prices. A large change in stock prices can result from new information that produces a dramatic decline in optimal forecasts of the future valuation of firms. However, economists are hard pressed to come up with fundamental changes in the economy that can explain the Black Monday and tech crashes. One lesson from these crashes is that factors other than market fundamentals probably have an effect on stock prices. Hence these crashes have convinced many economists that the stronger version of the efficient market hypothesis, which states that asset prices reflect the true fundamental (intrinsic) value of securities, is incorrect. They attribute a large role in determination of stock prices to market psychology and to the institutional structure of the marketplace. However, nothing in this view contradicts the basic reasoning behind the weaker version of the efficient market hypothesis—that market participants eliminate unexploited profit opportunities. Even though stock market prices may not always solely reflect market fundamentals, this does not mean that the efficient market hypothesis does not hold. As long as stock market crashes are unpredictable, the basic lessons of the theory of rational expectations hold. Some economists have come up with theories of what they call rational bubbles to explain stock market crashes. A bubble is a situation in which the price of an asset differs from its fundamental market value. In a rational bubble, investors can have optimal forecasts that a bubble is occurring because the asset price is above its fundamental value but continue to hold the asset anyway. They might do this because they believe that someone else will buy the asset for a higher price in the future. In a rational bubble, asset prices can therefore deviate from their fundamental value for a long time because the bursting of the bubble cannot be predicted and so there are no unexploited profit opportunities. However, other economists believe that the Black Monday crash of 1987 and the tech crash of 2000 suggest that there may be unexploited profit opportunities and that the theory of rational expectations and the efficient market hypothesis might be fundamentally flawed. The controversy over whether capital markets are efficient continues.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Enron Implosion
Until 2001, Enron Corporation, a firm that specialized in trading in the energy market, appeared to be spectacularly successful. It had a quarter of the energy trading market and was valued as high as $77 billion in August 2000 (just a little over a year before its collapse), making it the seventh largest corporation in the United States at that time. However, toward the end of 2001, Enron came crashing down. In October 2001, Enron announced a third quarter loss of $618 million and disclosed accounting “mistakes.” The SEC then engaged in a formal investigation of Enron’s financial dealings with partnerships led by its former finance chief. It became clear that Enron was engaged in a complex set of transactions by which it was keeping substantial amounts of debt and financial contracts off of its balance sheet. These transactions enabled Enron to hide its financial difficulties. Despite securing as much as $1.5 billion of new financing from J. P. Morgan Chase and Citigroup, the company was forced to declare bankruptcy in December 2001, the largest bankruptcy in U.S. history. The Enron collapse illustrates that government regulation can lessen asymmetric information problems, but cannot eliminate them. Managers have tremendous incentives to hide their companies’ problems, making it hard for investors to know the true value of the firm. The Enron bankruptcy not only increased concerns in financial markets about the quality of accounting information supplied by corporations, but also led to hardship for many of the firm’s former employees, who found that their pensions had become worthless. Outrage against the duplicity of executives at Enron was high, and several were indicted, with some being convicted and sent to jail.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Financial Development and Economic Growth
Recent research has found that an important reason many developing countries or ex communist countries like Russia (which are referred to as transition countries) experience very low rates of growth is that their financial systems are underdeveloped (a situation referred to as financial repression).1 The economic analysis of financial structure helps explain how an underdeveloped financial system leads to a low state of economic development and economic growth. The financial systems in developing and transition countries face several difficulties that keep them from operating efficiently. As we have seen, two important tools used to help solve adverse selection and moral hazard problems in credit markets are collateral and restrictive covenants. In many developing countries, the system of property rights (the rule of law, constraints on government expropriation, absence of corruption) functions poorly, making it hard to use these two tools effectively. In these countries, bankruptcy procedures are often extremely slow and cumbersome. For example, in many countries, creditors (holders of debt) must first sue the defaulting debtor for payment, which can take several years; then, once a favorable judgment has been obtained, the creditor has to sue again to obtain title to the collateral. The process can take in excess of five years, and by the time the lender acquires the collateral, it may well may have been neglected and thus have little value. In addition, governments often block lenders from foreclosing on borrowers in politically powerful sectors such as agriculture. Where the market is unable to use collateral effectively, the adverse selection problem will be worse, because the lender will need even more information about the quality of the borrower so that it can screen out a good loan from a bad one. The result is that it will be harder for lenders to channel funds to borrowers with the most productive investment opportunities. There will be less productive investment, and hence a slower growing economy. Similarly, a poorly developed or corrupt legal system may make it extremely difficult for lenders to enforce restrictive covenants. Thus, they may have a much more limited ability to reduce moral hazard on the part of borrowers and so will be less willing to lend. Again the outcome will be less productive investment and a lower growth rate for the economy. The importance of an effective legal system in promoting economic growth suggests that lawyers play a more positive role in the economy than we give them credit for (see the Mini Case box, “Should We Kill All the Lawyers?”) Governments in developing and transition countries often use their financial systems to direct credit to themselves or to favored sectors of the economy by setting interest rates at artificially low levels for certain types of loans, by creating development finance institutions to make specific types of loans, or by directing existing institutions to lend to certain entities. As we have seen, private institutions have an incentive to solve adverse selection and moral hazard problems and lend to borrowers with the most productive investment opportunities. Governments have less incentive to do so because they are not driven by the profit motive and thus their directed credit programs may not channel funds to sectors that will produce high growth for the economy. The outcome is again likely to result in less efficient investment and slower growth. In addition, banks in many developing and transition countries are owned by their governments. Again, because of the absence of the profit motive, these state owned banks have little incentive to allocate their capital to the most productive uses. Not surprisingly, the primary loan customer of these state owned banks is often the government, which does not always use the funds wisely for productive investments to promote growth. We have seen that government regulation can increase the amount of information in financial markets to make them work more efficiently. Many developing and transition countries have an underdeveloped regulatory apparatus that retards the provision of adequate information to the marketplace. For example, these countries often have weak accounting standards, making it very hard to ascertain the quality of a borrower’s balance sheet. As a result, asymmetric information problems are more severe, and the financial system is severely hampered in channeling funds to the most productive uses. The institutional environment of a poor legal system, weak accounting standards, inadequate government regulation, and government intervention through directed credit programs and state ownership of banks all help explain why many countries stay poor while others, unhindered by these impediments, grow richer.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Should We Kill All the Lawyers?
Lawyers are often an easy target for would be comedians. Countless jokes center on ambulance chasing and shifty filers of frivolous lawsuits. Hostility to lawyers is not just a recent phenomenon: in Shakespeare’s Henry VI, written in the late sixteenth century, Dick the Butcher recommends, “The first thing we do, let’s kill all the lawyers.” Is Shakespeare’s Dick the Butcher right? Most legal work is actually not about ambulance chasing, criminal law, and frivolous lawsuits. Instead, it involves the writing and enforcement of contracts, which is how property rights are established. Property rights are essential to protect investments. A good system of laws, by itself, does not provide incentives to invest, because property rights without enforcement are meaningless. This is where lawyers come in. When someone encroaches on your land or makes use of your property without your permission, a lawyer can stop him or her. Without lawyers, you would be unwilling to invest. With zero or limited investment, there would be little economic growth. The United States has more lawyers per capita than any other country in the world. It is also among the richest countries in the world with a financial system that is superb at getting capital to new productive uses such as the technology sector. Is this just a coincidence? Or could the U.S. legal system actually be beneficial to its economy? Recent research suggests the American legal system, which is based on the Anglo Saxon legal system, is an advantage of the U.S. economy.*
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Is China a Counter Example to the Importance of Financial Development?
Although China appears to be on its way to becoming an economic powerhouse, its financial development remains in the early stages. The country’s legal system is weak so that financial contracts are difficult to enforce, while accounting standards are lax, so that high quality information about creditors is hard to find. Regulation of the banking system is still in its formative stages, and the banking sector is dominated by large state owned banks. Yet the Chinese economy has enjoyed one of the highest growth rates in the world over the last 20 years. How has China been able to grow so rapidly given its low level of financial development? As noted above, China is in an early state of development, with a per capita income that is still less than $5,000, one eighth of the per capita income in the United States. With an extremely high savings rate, averaging around 40% over the last two decades, the country has been able to rapidly build up its capital stock and shift a massive pool of underutilized labor from the subsistence agriculture sector into higher productivity activities that use capital. Even though available savings have not been allocated to their most productive uses, the huge increase in capital combined with the gains in productivity from moving labor out of low productivity, subsistence agriculture have been enough to produce high growth. As China gets richer, however, this strategy is unlikely to continue to work. The Soviet Union provides a graphic example. In the 1950s and 1960s, the Soviet Union shared many characteristics with modern day China: high growth fueled by a high savings rate, a massive buildup of capital, and shifts of a large pool of underutilized labor from subsistence agriculture to manufacturing. During this high growth phase, however, the Soviet Union was unable to develop the institutions needed to allocate capital efficiently. As a result, once the pool of subsistence laborers was used up, the Soviet Union’s growth slowed dramatically and it was unable to keep up with the Western economies. Today no one considers the Soviet Union to have been an economic success story, and its inability to develop the institutions necessary to sustain financial development and growth was an important reason for the demise of this superpower. To move into the next stage of development, China will need to allocate its capital more efficiently, which requires that it must improve its financial system. The Chinese leadership is well aware of this challenge: The government has announced that state owned banks are being put on the path to privatization. In addition, the government is engaged in legal reform to make financial contracts more enforceable. New bankruptcy law is being developed so that lenders have the ability to take over the assets of firms that default on their loan contracts. Whether the Chinese government will succeed in developing a first rate financial system, thereby enabling China to join the ranks of developed countries, is a big question mark.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Demise of Arthur Andersen
In 1913, Arthur Andersen, a young accountant who had denounced the slipshod and deceptive practices that enabled companies to fool the investing public, founded his own firm. Up until the early 1980s, auditing was the most important source of profits within this firm. However, by the late 1980s, the consulting part of the business experienced high revenue growth with high profit margins, while audit profits slumped in a more competitive market. Consulting partners began to assert more power within the firm, and the resulting internal conflicts split the firm in two. Arthur Andersen (the auditing service) and Andersen Consulting were established as separate companies in 2000. During the period of increasing conflict before the split, Andersen’s audit partners had been under increasing pressure to focus on boosting revenue and profits from audit services. Many of Arthur Andersen’s clients that later went bust—Enron, WorldCom, Qwest, and Global Crossing—were also the largest clients in Arthur Andersen’s regional offices. The combination of intense pressure to generate revenue and profits from auditing and the fact that some clients dominated regional offices translated into tremendous incentives for regional office managers to provide favorable audit stances for these large clients. The loss of a client like Enron or WorldCom would have been devastating for a regional office and its partners, even if that client contributed only a small fraction of the overall revenue and profits of Arthur Andersen. The Houston office of Arthur Andersen, for example, ignored problems in Enron’s reporting. Arthur Andersen was indicted in March 2002 and then convicted in June 2002 for obstruction of justice for impeding the SEC’s investigation of the Enron collapse. Its conviction—the first ever against a major accounting firm—barred Arthur Andersen from conducting audits of publicly traded firms. This development contributed to the firm’s demise.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Financial crises are major disruptions in financial markets characterized by sharp declines in asset prices and firm failures. Beginning in August of 2007, defaults in the mortgage market for subprime borrowers (borrowers with weak credit records) sent a shudder through the financial markets, leading to the worst U.S. financial crisis since the Great Depression. Alan Greenspan, former Chairman of the Fed, described the 2007–2009 financial crisis as a “once in a century credit tsunami.” Wall Street firms and commercial banks suffered losses amounting to hundreds of billions of dollars. Households and businesses found they had to pay higher rates on their borrowings—and it was much harder to get credit. World stock markets crashed, with U.S shares falling by as much as half from their peak in October 2007. Many financial firms, including commercial banks, investment banks, and insurance companies, went belly up. A recession began in December 2007. By the fall of 2008, the economy was in a tailspin. Why did this financial crisis occur? Why have financial crises been so prevalent throughout U.S. history, as well as in so many other countries, and what insights do they provide on the current crisis? Why are financial crises almost always followed by severe contractions in economic activity? We will examine these questions in this chapter by developing a framework to understand the dynamics of financial crises. Building on Chapter 7, we make use of agency theory, the economic analysis of the effects of asymmetric information (adverse selection and moral hazard) on financial markets and the economy, to see why financial crises occur and why they have such devastating effects on the economy. We will then apply the analysis to explain the course of events in a number of past financial crises throughout the world, including the most recent subprime crisis.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Mother of All Financial Crises:
The Great Depression In 1928 and 1929, prices doubled in the U.S. stock market. Federal Reserve officials viewed the stock market boom as excessive speculation. To curb it, they pursued a tight monetary policy to raise interest rates; the Fed got more than it bargained for when the stock market crashed in October 1929, falling by 20% (Figure 8.2). Although the 1929 crash had a great impact on the minds of a whole generation, most people forget that by the middle of 1930, more than half of the stock market decline had been reversed. Indeed, credit market conditions remained quite stable and there was little evidence that a major financial crisis was underway. What might have been a normal recession turned into something far different, however, when adverse shocks to the agricultural sector led to bank failures in agricultural regions that then spread to the major banking centers. A sequence of bank panics followed from October 1930 until March 1933. As shown in Figure 8.2, the continuing decline in stock prices after mid 1930 (by mid 1932 stocks had declined to 10% of their value at the 1929 peak) and the increase in uncertainty from the unsettled business conditions created by the economic contraction worsened adverse selection and moral hazard problems in the credit markets. The loss of one third of the banks reduced the amount of financial intermediation. Lenders began charging businesses much higher interest rates to protect themselves from credit losses. Risk premiums (also called credit spreads) widened, with interest rates on corporate bonds with a Baa (medium quality) credit rating rising relative to similar maturity Treasury bonds, which have virtually no credit risk, as shown in Figure 8.3. With so many fewer banks still in business, adverse selection and moral hazard problems intensified. Financial markets struggled to channel funds to firms with productive investment opportunities. The ongoing deflation that started in 1930 eventually led to a 25% decline in the price level. This deflation short circuited the normal recovery process that occurs in most recessions. This huge decline in prices triggered a debt deflation in which net worth fell because of the increased burden of indebtedness borne by firms. The decline in net worth and the resulting increase in adverse selection and moral hazard problems in the credit markets led to a prolonged economic contraction in which unemployment rose to 25% of the labor force. The financial crisis in the Great Depression was the worst ever experienced in the United States, and it explains why this economic contraction was also the most severe ever experienced by the nation.1
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The 2007–2009 Financial Crisis
Most economists thought that financial crises of the type experienced during the Great Depression were a thing of the past for the United States. Unfortunately, the financial crisis that engulfed the world in 2007–2009 proved them wrong. Causes of the 2007–2009 Financial Crisis We begin our look at the 2007–2009 financial crisis by examining three central factors: financial innovation in mortgage markets, agency problems in mortgage markets, and the role of asymmetric information in the credit rating process. Financial Innovation in the Mortgage Markets Before 2000, only the most creditworthy (prime) borrowers could obtain residential mortgages. Advances in computer technology and new statistical techniques, known as data mining, however, led to enhanced, quantitative evaluation of the credit risk for a new class of risky residential mortgages. Households with credit records could now be assigned a numerical credit score, known as a FICO score (named after the Fair Isaac Corporation that developed it), that would predict how likely they would be to default on their loan payments. In addition, by lowering transactions costs, computer technology enabled the bundling together of smaller loans (like mortgages) into standard debt securities, a process known as securitization. These factors made it possible for banks to offer subprime mortgages to borrowers with less than stellar credit records. The ability to cheaply bundle and quantify the default risk of the underlying high risk mortgages in a standardized debt security called mortgage backed securities provided a new source of financing for these mortgages. Financial innovation didn’t stop there. Financial engineering, the development of new, sophisticated financial instruments products, led to structured credit products that are derived from cash flows of underlying assets and tailored to particular risk characteristics that appeal to investors with differing preferences. One of these products, collateralized debt obligations (CDOs) paid out the cash flows from subprime mortgage backed securities into a number of buckets that are referred to as tranches, with the highest rated tranche paying out first, while lower ones paid out less if there were losses on the mortgage backed securities. There were even CDO2s and CDO3s that sliced and diced risk even further, paying out the cash flows from CDOs and CDO2s. Agency Problems in the Mortgage Markets The mortgage brokers that originated the loans often did not make a strong effort to evaluate whether the borrower could pay off the loan, since they would quickly sell the loans to investors in the form of security. This originate to distribute business model was exposed to principal–agent problems (also referred to more simply as agency problems), in which the mortgage brokers acted as agents for investors (the principals) but did not often have the investors’ best interests at heart. Once the mortgage broker earns her fee, why should she care if the borrower makes good on his payment? The more volume the broker originates, the more she makes. Not surprisingly, adverse selection became a major problem. Risk loving investors lined up to obtain loans to acquire houses that would be very profitable if housing prices went up, knowing they could “walk away” if housing prices went down. The principal–agent problem also created incentives for mortgage brokers to encourage households to take on mortgages they could not afford, or to commit fraud by falsifying information on a borrower’s mortgage applications in order to qualify them for their mortgages. Compounding this problem was lax regulation of originators, who were not required to disclose information to borrowers that would have helped them assess whether they could afford the loans. The agency problems went even deeper. Commercial and investment banks, who were earning large fees by underwriting mortgage backed securities and structured credit products like CDOs, also had weak incentives to make sure that the ultimate holders of the securities would be paid off. Large fees from writing financial insurance contracts called credit default swaps, which provide payments to holders of bonds if they default, also drove units of insurance companies like AIG to write hundreds of billions of dollars of these risky contracts. Although financial engineering has the potential benefit to create products and services that match investors’ risk appetites, it too has a dark side. The structured products like CDOs, CDO2s, and CDO3s can get so complicated that it can be hard to value the cash flows of the underlying assets for a security or to determine who actually owns these assets. Indeed, at a speech given in October 2007, Ben Bernanke, the Chairman of the Federal Reserve, joked that he “would like to know what those damn things are worth.” In other words, the increased complexity of structured products can actually destroy information, thereby worsening asymmetric information in the financial system and increasing the severity of adverse selection and moral hazard problems. Asymmetric Information and Credit Rating Agencies Credit rating agencies, who rate the quality of debt securities in terms of the probability of default, were another contributor to asymmetric information in financial markets. The rating agencies advised clients on how to structure complex financial instruments, like CDOs, at the same time they were rating these identical products. The rating agencies were thus subject to conflicts of interest because the large fees they earned from advising clients on how to structure products that they were rating meant that they did not have sufficient incentives to make sure their ratings were accurate. The result was wildly inflated ratings that enabled the sale of complex financial products that were far riskier than investors recognized.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Sherman Company employs 400 production, maintenance, and janitorial workers in eight separate departments. In addition to supervising operations, the supervisors of the departments are responsible for recruiting, hiring, and firing workers within their areas of responsibility. The organization attracts casual labor and experiences a 20 to 30 percent turnover rate in employees per year. Employees clock on and off the job each day to record their attendance on time cards. Each department has its own clock machine located in an unattended room away from the main production area. Each week, the supervisors gather the time cards, review them for accuracy, and sign and submit them to the payroll department for processing. In addition, the supervisors submit personnel action forms to reflect newly hired and terminated employees. From these documents, the payroll clerk prepares payroll checks and updates the employee records. The supervisor of the payroll department signs the paychecks and sends them to the department supervisors for distribution to the employees. A payroll register is sent to accounts payable for approval.
Based on this approval, the cash disbursements clerk transfers funds into a payroll clearing account.
Required
Discuss the risks for payroll fraud in the Sherman Company payroll system. What controls would you implement to reduce the risks? Use the SAS 78/COSO standard of control activities to organize your response.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Holder Co. maintains a large fleet of automobiles, trucks, and vans for their service and sales force. Supervisors in the various departments maintain the fixed asset records for these vehicles, including routine maintenance, repairs, and mileage information. This information is periodically submitted to the fixed asset department, which uses it to calculate depreciation on the vehicle. To ensure a reliable fleet, the company disposes of vehicles when they accumulate 80,000 miles of service. Depending on usage, some vehicles reach this point sooner than others. When a vehicle reaches 80,000 miles, the supervisor is authorized to use it in trade for a new replacement vehicle or to sell it privately. Employees of the company are given the first option to bid on the retired vehicles. Upon disposal of the vehicle, the supervisor submits a disposal report to the fixed asset department, which writes off the asset.
Required
Discuss the potential for abuse and fraud in this system.
Describe the controls that should be implemented to reduce the risks.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The treatment of fixed asset accounting also includes accounting for mineral reserves, such as oil and gas, coal, gold, diamonds, and silver. These costs must be capitalized and depleted over the estimated useful life of the asset. The depletion method used is the units of production method. An example of a source document for an oil and gas exploration firm is presented in the figure for Problem 11. The time to drill a well from start to completion may vary from 3 to 18 months, depending on the location. Further, the costs to drill two or more wells may be difficult to separate. For example, the second well may be easier to drill because more is known about the conditions of the field or reservoir, and the second well may be drilled to help extract the same reserves more quickly or efficiently. Solving this problem may require additional research beyond the readings in the chapter.
Required
a. The source documents for the fixed asset accounting system come from the receiving department and the accounts payable department. For an oil and gas firm, from where would you expect the source documents come?
b. Assume that a second well is drilled to help extract the reserves from the field. How would you allocate the drilling costs?
c. The number of reserves to be extracted is an estimate. These estimates are constantly being revised.
How does this affect the fixed asset department’s job? In what way, if at all, does need to be altered to reflect these adjustments?
d. How does the auditor verify the numbers that the fixed asset department calculates at the end of the period?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
When employees arrive for work at Harlan Manufacturing, they punch their time cards at a time clock in an unsupervised area. Mary, the time keeping clerk, tries to keep track of the employees but is often distracted by other things. Every Friday, she submits the time cards to Marsha, the payroll clerk. Marsha copies all time cards and files the copies in the employees’ folders. She uses employee wage records and tax tables to calculate the net pay for each employee. She sends a copy of the payroll register to the accounts payable department and files a copy in the payroll department. She updates the employee records with the earnings and prepares the payroll summary and sends it to the cash disbursements department along with the paychecks. After receiving the payroll summary, John, an accounts payable clerk, authorizes the cash disbursements department to prepare paychecks. John then updates the cash disbursements journal. The treasurer signs the paychecks and gives them to the supervisors, who distribute them to the employees. Finally, both the accounts payable and cash disbursements departments send a summary of transactions to the general ledger department.
Required
a. Analyze the internal control weaknesses in the system. Model your response according to the six categories of physical control activities specified in the SAS 78/COSO control model.
b. Make recommendations for improving the system.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Fittipaldi Company recently purchased a patent for a radar detection device for $8 million. This radar detection device has been proven to detect three times better than any existing radar detector on the market. Fittipaldi expects four years to pass before any competitor can devise a technology to beat its device. Required
a. Why does the $8 million represent an asset? Should the fixed asset department be responsible for its accounting?
b. Where would the source documents come from?
c. What happens if a competitor comes out with a new model in two years rather than four?
d. How does the auditor verify the numbers that the fixed asset department calculated at the end of the period? Is it the auditor’s responsibility to be aware of external regulatory conditions that might affect the value of the patent? For example, what if seven more states prohibit the use of radar detectors?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Walker Books, Inc., is currently one of the largest book distributors in the United States. Established in 1981 in Palo Alto, California, Walker Books was originally a side project of founder and current president Curtis Walker, who at the time worked for a law firm. At the end of the first year of business, Walker Books had grossed only $20,000 in sales. Seeing potential, however, Curtis Walker made the decision to quit the law firm and concentrate fully on his bookstore. As the years passed, sales increased, more employees were hired, and the business facilities expanded. Although still at the original location in Palo Alto, California, the company now distributes books to each of the 50 states, has 145 employees, and sees sales approaching $105,000,000 per year. Recently the company has experienced an unusually high level of complaints from customers regarding incorrect shipments, disputes with suppliers over incorrect inventory receipts, and the general lack of audit trail information for reviewing transactions. You have been hired as an independent auditor to inspect the internal controls currently in place at Walker Books, Inc. Your focus at this phase of the audit is on the fixed assets and payroll procedures. Fixed Asset and Payroll Procedures In the various Walker Books business departments, employees manually register their hours worked on timesheets, which they keep at their desks until Thursdays, when the manager or supervisor of their department approves them. The manager or supervisor then forwards these timesheets to Debby, the payroll clerk, who manually prepares checks for each employee’s approved timesheet. She then posts to employee records and the payroll register using a laptop computer, which she is allowed to take home for work. A copy of the check is made and filed in the payroll department. The check is then mailed to the employee. Two payroll summaries are then printed. One of these is sent to the accounts payable department and the other is sent to the general ledger department. Users in individual departments verbally report their fixed asset requirements to their respective managers. If the manager approved the request, he or she manually prepares and submits a fixed asset request form to the purchasing department. Upon receipt of the fixed asset request form, the purchasing department clerk manually prepares two copies of a purchase order. One copy is sent to the supplier, and one is filed in the purchasing department. Finally, the purchasing department manually prepares and sends a hard copy fixed asset change report to the fixed asset department. The accounts payable clerk receives the payroll summary and writes a check to the imprest account for the exact amount of the payroll. When fixed assets are received, the receiving clerk reconciles the goods with the packing slip and invoice and then manually prepares a receiving report. The goods are sent to the user department while the packing slip, invoice, and receiving report are forwarded to the accounts payable department. The accounts payable clerk reconciles the documents from receiving, manually writes a check to the supplier, and manually prepares a journal voucher, which she subsequently sends to the general ledger department. The general ledger clerk posts journal vouchers and payroll summaries to the digital general ledger using the department PC.
Required
a. Create a data flow diagram of the current system.
b. Create a system flowchart of the existing system.
c. Analyze the internal control weaknesses in the system. Model your response according to the six categories of physical control activities specified in SAS 78/COSO control model.
d. Prepare a system flowchart of a redesigned computer based system that resolves the control weaknesses you identified. Explain your solution.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A&V Safety, Inc., is a growing company specializing in the sales of safety equipment to commercial entities. It currently employs 200 full time employees, all of whom work out of their headquarters in San Diego, California. During the summer, the company expands to include summer interns who are delegated smaller jobs and other errands. The A&V payroll process is presented in the following paragraphs. A&V Safety, Inc., supervisors collect and review employee time cards, which they forward to the payroll department. During payroll processing, individual employee wage rates are manually pulled from the personnel file based on the employee ID. Interns working for A&V, however, do not receive employee identification cards and numbers because they are at the firm for only 10 weeks. In such cases, the immediate supervisor writes the wage rate on the time cards prior to submission to the payroll department. The payroll clerk then manually prepares the payroll checks, updates the payroll register, and files the time cards in the department. She sends a copy of the payroll register to the accounts payable clerk who updates the accounts payable ledger for wages payable. The payroll clerk then sends a payroll summary to the general ledger. Finally, the payroll clerk sends the paychecks to the cash disbursement department, where they are signed and forwarded to supervisors, who distribute them to their respective employees. The signed copies of the payroll checks are returned to the payroll department, where they are matched to the payroll register and filed locally. The cash disbursements clerk prepares a list of verified recipients. She sends one copy of the list to the accounts payable department. The accounts payable clerk uses the list to update the accounts payable ledger to close out the wages payable account. The cash disbursements clerk sends a second copy of the list of recipients to the general ledger clerk, who reconciles it to the summary report and posts to general ledger.
Required
a. Create a data flow diagram of the current system.
b. Create a system flowchart of the existing system.
c. Analyze the internal control weaknesses in the system. Model your response according to the six categories of physical control activities specified in the SAS 78/COSO control model.
d. Prepare a flowchart of a redesigned computer based system that resolves the control weaknesses you identified. Explain your solution.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Music Source, Inc., is a manufacturer of stereo equipment with six sales offices nationwide and one manufacturing plant in Pennsylvania. Currently, employment is at approximately 200 employees. Music Source focuses on the production of high quality stereo equipment for resale by retailers. Its larger competitors include Sony, Panasonic, and Aiwa. Payroll System The payrolls of all six sales offices and the manufacturing plant are processed centrally from the main office. On Thursday, every two weeks, employees enter their hours worked data from their personally maintained time cards into computer terminals located in each sales office and work area. The computer system validates the employee by checking his or her identification number against the employee history file, which is located in the main plant IT department. This task must be completed by noon on the designated day. At the end of the validation process, the work area (sales office or manufacturing) supervisor prints a personnel action form from the validation terminal and forwards it, along with the employee time cards, to the payroll clerk in the main office payroll department. Upon receipt of the time cards and personnel action forms, the payroll clerk manually updates the employee records and then prepares the payroll register. A copy of the payroll register, along with the time cards, and the personnel action form are filed in the payroll department. A second copy of the payroll register is sent to general ledger clerk, who posts to the general cash account and wages expense for the full amount of the payroll. Next, the payroll clerk prepares the paychecks and sends them to the cash disbursements department. These are signed by the cash disbursements clerk, who then distributes the checks to the employees. Fixed Asset System Asset acquisition begins when the user department manager recognizes the need to obtain new or replace an existing fixed asset. The manager manually prepares two copies of a purchase requisition; one copy is filed temporarily in the department, and one is sent to the purchasing department. From the purchase requisition, the purchasing department clerk manually prepares three copies of a purchase order. One copy is sent to the supplier, another copy is sent to the accounts payable department, and the third copy is filed in the purchasing department. When the asset arrives, the user department receives it along with the packing slip. The packing slip and goods are reconciled with the purchase requisition on file, then the packing slip and requisition are filed permanently in the user department. The accounts payable clerk receives the purchase order from the purchasing department and files it temporarily. Upon receipt of the invoice from the vendor, the accounts payable clerk reconciles it with the purchase order on file. Using the department PC, the accounts payable clerk then sets up an account payable and records the asset in the fixed asset inventory ledger. The clerk then prints a cash disbursements voucher and sends it to the cash disbursements department. At the end of the day, the clerk prints account summaries for accounts payable and fixed asset inventory, which she sends to the general ledger department. The purchase order and invoice are permanently filed in the department. The cash disbursements clerk receives the cash disbursements voucher from accounts payable and manually prepares a check, which he sends to the vendor. The clerk then manually records the check in the check register. At the end of the day, the clerk sends a hardcopy journal voucher to the general ledger department. When an asset has reached the end of its useful life, the user department manager prepares a disposal report and sends it to the accounts payable clerk, who adjusts fixed asset inventory record. The general ledger department clerk reconciles the journal voucher, the accounts payable summary, and the inventory summary that it has received from accounts payable and cash disbursements. These figures are then posted to the general ledger, and the account summaries and journal vouchers are filed in the documents.
Required
a. Create a data flow diagram of the current system.
b. Create a system flowchart of the existing system.
c. Analyze the internal control weaknesses in the system. Model your response according to the six categories of physical control activities specified in SAS 78/COSO.
d. Prepare a system flowchart of a redesigned computer based system that resolves the control weaknesses that you identified. Explain your solution.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
In 1997, J. D. Orbits opened a cell phone accessory manufacturing plant named Orbits. Although the company began its operations at the local level with only 40 employees, 3 vendors, and 5 main customers, it experienced rapid success. By 2001, gross sales tripled and the enterprise expanded its customer, vendor, and employee base, and it now serves all major cell phone manufacturers. Currently, Orbits employs more than 120 individuals, including executives, directors, sales representatives, office personnel, and production workers. Customers: Orbits sells to the outlet stores of distributors such as Verizon, MCI, Cingular, and AT&T cellular phones in the tri state area. Materials and Suppliers: Manufacturing hands free cell phone devices requires a number of different materials, none of which is made in house. Most parts are purchased from 25 vendors. The more complex components used in the manufacturing process are purchased through contracts with vendors. Raw materials are purchased from vendors according to price without a formal contract. Accounting System Orbits accounting system is comprised of manual procedures that are supported by stand alone PC (not networked) in several departments. Key elements of the sales order processing, purchasing, fixed assets, and payroll systems are described in the following paragraphs. Purchases System The process begins in the purchasing and inventory control department. Using the department PC, a clerk monitors the inventory levels in the digital inventory ledger. When the inventory on hand falls below the reorder point, the clerk prints two copies of a purchase requisition. The clerk sends one copy to the accounts payable department, where the accounts payable clerk files it in the accounts payable pending file. The clerk hands the second copy of the requisition to his coworker (the purchasing clerk) in the department, who manually prepares a four part purchase order. The purchasing clerk sends one copy of the purchase order to the accounts payable department (where it is filed in the accounts payable pending file) and two copies to the vendor. The clerk sends the final purchase order copy, along with the original purchase requisition, to another coworker in the department (the inventory control clerk) who, using the department PC, updates the inventory ledger to record the inventory increase. The inventory control clerk then files the requisition and purchase order in the department. When the products arrive, the receiving department clerk inspects, counts, and reconciles them to the packing slip. The clerk then prepares three copies of a receiving report, which contains quantities, prices, and freight charges transcribed from the packing slip. One copy of the receiving report is sent with the inventory to the storeroom. Another copy is sent to the accounts payable department, where it is filed in the accounts payable pending file. The final copy is filed in the receiving department. Once the accounts payable clerk receives the purchase requisition, purchase order, and receiving report, she accesses the department PC, records the liability in the purchases journal, and posts it to the supplier’s account in the accounts payable subsidiary ledger. The clerk then transfers the hard copy purchase requisition, purchase order, and receiving report to the open accounts payable file. The accounts payable clerk then prints a journal voucher from the PC summarizing the transactions in the purchases journal for the period and sends it to general ledger department. The general ledger clerk receives the hard copy journal voucher and the invoice from the vendor. The clerk then uses the department PC to post to the inventory and accounts payable control accounts. Cash Disbursements Process Periodically the accounts payable clerk reviews the hard copy documents in the open accounts payable file and identifies items to be paid. The clerk accesses the department PC, prints a hard copy cash disbursements voucher, and sends it to the cash disbursements department. The clerk then removes the liability from the digital accounts payable subsidiary ledger. Finally, the clerk files the hard copy documents in the closed accounts payable file. Upon receipt of the cash disbursements voucher, the cash disbursements clerk accesses the department PC, prints a vendor check, and records the check in the digital check register. Next, the clerk sends the check to the vendor and sends the hard copy cash disbursement voucher to the general ledger department. The general ledger clerk receives the cash disbursement voucher and posts to the general ledger cash and accounts payable accounts, using the department PC. Finally, the general ledger clerk files the voucher in the department. Payroll System Production Each week the production department supervisor submits employee time cards to the payroll department for processing. The supervisor also sends the job tickets to the cost accounting department, which uses them to allocate labor and manufacturing overhead costs to the work in process account. Payroll The payroll department clerk receives the time cards and uses the department PC to update the employee payroll records. The clerk also prints the employee paychecks and a payroll register. A copy of the payroll register is sent to the accounts payable department, and the paychecks are signed and sent to the supervisors for distribution to the employees. A copy of the payroll register and the time cards are filed in the department. Accounts Payable The accounts payable department uses the payroll register to manually prepare two copies of a cash disbursements voucher. One copy of the voucher and the payroll register are sent to the cash disbursements department. The second copy of the voucher is sent to the general ledger department. Cash Disbursements The cash disbursements department uses the payroll register and the cash disbursements voucher to manually prepare a check for the total payroll. The payroll check is signed and sent to the bank for deposit into the payroll imprest account. The voucher, the payroll check copy, and payroll register are filed in the department. General Ledger The general ledger uses the cash disbursements voucher to update digital general ledger payroll account from the department PC. The voucher is then filed in the department. Fixed Asset System Purchasing At Orbits, the purchasing department is responsible for ordering fixed assets for user departments based on a user generated purchase requisition. When the purchasing department clerk receives the purchase requisition from the user department, she creates a purchase order and sends it to the vendor. The purchase requisition is filed in the purchasing department. When the asset shipped, the vendor sends the invoice to the accounts payable department and delivers the asset directly to the user department, where it is reconciled to the packing slip and placed into service. The user then sends the packing slip to the fixed asset department. Accounts Payable Upon receipt of the invoice from the vendor, the accounts payable clerk accesses the department PC, determines a due date for payment, records the liability in the accounts payable subsidiary ledger, and files the invoice in the open accounts payable file. Periodically, the clerk reviews the open accounts payable file for items to be paid. When an accounts payable is due, the clerk accesses the department PC, prints a hard copy cash disbursements voucher, and sends it to the cash disbursements department. The clerk then removes the liability from the digital accounts payable subsidiary ledger. Finally, the clerk files the hard copy invoice in the closed accounts payable file. Cash Disbursement Upon receipt of the cash disbursement voucher, the cash disbursements clerk accesses the department PC, prints a vendor check, and records the check in the digital check register. Next, the clerk sends the check to the vendor and sends the hard copy cash disbursement voucher to the general ledger department. Fixed Asset Department When the fixed asset department clerk receives the packing slip from the user department, he accesses the department computer and records the asset in the fixed asset subsidiary ledger. Periodically, the clerk prepares an account summary that he sends to the general ledger. NOTE: The fixed asset department has additional procedures to manage the maintenance and disposal of fixed assets. These procedures are not part of this assignment. General Ledger Department The general ledger clerk receives the cash disbursement voucher and from the cash disbursements department and the account summary from the fixed assets department. The general ledger clerk then accesses the department PC and posts to the cash, accounts payable control, and fixed asset control accounts. Finally, the general ledger clerk files the voucher and account summary in the department. Sales Order System The sales department receives customer orders via fax, mail, and e mail. A sales clerk using the sales department PC records the orders in the sales order file and prints a stock release, invoice, ledger copy, and packing slip. These documents are distributed as follows: _ The invoice and ledger copy are sent to billing, where the clerk records the sale in the digital sales journal from the department computer. The clerk then sends the invoice to the customer and the ledger copy to the accounts receivable department. _ The stock release is sent to the warehouse, where the goods are picked and the warehouse clerk updates the stock records from the department PC. The clerk then sends the stock release and the goods to the shipping department. _ The packing slip is sent to the shipping department, where it is reconciled to the stock release. The shipping clerk then manually prepares a bill of lading and records the shipment in the shipping log. The clerk sends the bill of lading, the product, and packing slip to the carrier. The stock release is sent to the purchasing and inventory control department, where it is used to update the inventory subsidiary ledger. The inventory control clerk then files the stock release and prepares an account summary, which is sent to the general ledger department. The accounts receivable clerk receives a ledger copy document. The clerk then accesses the department PC to update the accounts receivable subsidiary ledger. The clerk then files the ledger copy and prepares an account summary, which she sends to the general ledger department. Cash Receipts System The mail room receives envelopes containing customer checks and remittance advices. The checks are sent to the cash receipts department, and the remittance advices are sent to the accounts receivable department. The cash receipts department records the cash receipts in the cash receipts journal. The clerk then prepares a bank deposit slip and sends the checks and two copies of the deposit slip to the bank. Periodically, the bank returns a deposit slip to the cash receipts department, where it is reconciled with the cash account. The accounts receivable department reviews the remittance advices and updates the accounts receivable subsidiary ledger. The clerk files the remittance advice and prepares an account summary, which she sends to the general ledger. General Ledger Department The general ledger clerk receives account summaries from the accounts receivable and the purchasing and inventory control departments. The general ledger clerk accesses the department PC and posts to the inventory control, AR control, and cash accounts. Finally, the general ledger clerk files the account summaries in the department.
Required
Your public accounting firm has been retained to document Orbits’ accounting system and review its internal controls. Your task is to:
a. Create a separate data flow diagram for each major subsystem described here (purchase, payroll, fixed assets, and sales orders).
b. Create a separate system flowchart for each major subsystem.
c. Analyze the internal control weaknesses of each major subsystem. Model your response according to the six categories of physical control activities specified in the SAS 78/COSO control model.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Which of the following is not an advantageous reason to reduce inventories?
a. Inventories provide a competitive advantage.
b. Inventories can invite overproduction.
c. Inventories are expensive to maintain.
d. Inventories may conceal problems.
e. All of these are good reasons to reduce inventories.
2. The fundamental EOQ model
a. provides for fluctuating lead times during reorder cycles.
b. is relatively insensitive to errors in demand, procurement costs, and carrying costs.
c. focuses on the trade off between production costs and carrying costs.
d. is stochastic in nature.
e. is best used in conjunction with a periodic inventory system.
3. Refer to the equation for the EOQ in the text. Car Country, a local Ford dealer, sells 1,280 small SUVs each year. Keeping a car on the lot costs Car Country $200 per month, so the company prefers to order as few SUVs as is economically feasible. However, each time an order is placed, the company incurs total costs of $300. Of this $300, $240 is fixed and $60 is variable. Determine the company’s economic order quantity.
a. 8
b. 16
c. 18
d. 56
e. 62
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Which of the following is NOT a principle of lean manufacturing?
a. Products are pushed from the production end to the customer.
b. All activities that do not add value and maximize the use of scarce resources must be eliminated.
c. Achieve high inventory turnover rate.
d. A lean manufacturing firm must have established and cooperative relationships with vendors.
e. All of the above are lean manufacturing principles.
2. All of the following are problems with traditional accounting information EXCEPT:
a. Managers in a JIT setting require immediate information.
b. The measurement principle tends to ignore standards other than money.
c. Variance analysis may yield insignificant values.
d. The overhead component in a manufacturing company is usually very large.
e. All of these are problems associated with traditional accounting information.
3. Which of the following is NOT a problem associated with standard cost accounting?
a. Standard costing motivates management to produce large batches of products and build inventory.
b. Applying standard costing leads to product cost distortions in a lean environment.
c. Standard costing data are associated with excessive time lags that reduce its usefulness.
d. The financial orientation of standard costing may promote bad decisions.
e. All of the above are problems with standard costing.
4. Which one of the following statements is true? a. ERP evolved directly from MRP.
b. ERP evolved into MRP and MRP evolved into MRP II.
c. MRP II evolved from MRP and MRP II evolved into ERP.
d. None of the above is true.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A bank customer will be going to London in June to purchase £100,000 in new inventory. The current spot and futures exchange rates are as follows:
|
Exchange Rate (Dollars/Pound)
|
|
Period
|
Rate
|
|
Spot
|
1.5342
|
|
March
|
1.6212
|
|
June
|
1.6901
|
|
September
|
1.7549
|
|
December
|
1.8416
|
The customer enters into a position in June futures to fully hedge her position. When June arrives, the actual exchange rate is $1.725 per pound. How much did she save?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. A banker commits to a two year $5,000,000 commercial loan and expects to fulfill the agreement in 30 days. The interest rate will be determined at that time. Currently, rates are 7.5% for such loans. To hedge against rates falling, the banker buys a 30 day interest rate floor with a floor rate of 7.5% on a notional amount of $10,000,000. After 30 days, actual rates fall to 7.2%. What is the expected interest income from the loan each year? How much did the option pay?
2. A trust manager for a $100,000,000 stock portfolio wants to minimize short term downside risk using Dow put options. The options expire in 60 days, have a strike price of 9,700, and a premium of $50. The Dow is currently at 10,100. How many options should she use? Long or short? How much will this cost? If the portfolio is perfectly correlated with the Dow, what is the portfolio value when the option expires, including the premium paid?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
On the evening news you have just heard that the bond market has been booming. Does this mean that interest rates will fall so that it is easier for you to finance the purchase of a new computer system for your small retail business? Will the economy improve in the future so that it is a good time to build a new building or add to the one you are in? Should you try to raise funds by issuing stocks or bonds, or instead go to the bank for a loan? If you import goods from abroad, should you be concerned that they will become more expensive? This book provides answers to these questions by examining how financial markets (such as those for bonds, stocks, and foreign exchange) and financial institutions (banks, insurance companies, mutual funds, and other institutions) work. Financial markets and institutions not only affect your everyday life but also involve huge flows of funds—trillions of dollars—throughout our economy, which in turn affect business profits, the production of goods and services, and even the economic well being of countries other than the United States. What happens to financial markets and institutions is of great concern to politicians and can even have a major impact on elections. The study of financial markets and institutions will reward you with an understanding of many exciting issues. In this chapter we provide a road map of the book by outlining these exciting issues and exploring why they are worth studying.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Suppose that you want to start a business that manufactures a recently invented low cost robot that cleans the house (even does windows), mows the lawn, and washes the car, but you have no funds to put this wonderful invention into production. Walter has plenty of savings that he has inherited. If you and Walter could get together so that he could provide you with the funds, your company”s robot would see the light of day, and you, Walter, and the economy would all be better off: Walter could earn a high return on his investment, you would get rich from producing the robot, and we would have cleaner houses, shinier cars, and more beautiful lawns. Financial markets (bond and stock markets) and financial intermediaries (banks, insurance companies, pension funds) have the basic function of getting people such as you and Walter together by moving funds from those who have a surplus of funds (Walter) to those who have a shortage of funds (you). More realistically, when Apple invents a better iPod, it may need funds to bring it to market. Similarly, when a local government needs to build a road or a school, it may need more funds than local property taxes provide. Well functioning financial markets and financial intermediaries are crucial to our economic health. To study the effects of financial markets and financial intermediaries on the economy, we need to acquire an understanding of their general structure and operation. In this chapter we learn about the major financial intermediaries and the instruments that are traded in financial markets. This chapter offers a preliminary overview of the fascinating study of financial markets and institutions. We will return to a more detailed treatment of the regulation, structure, and evolution of financial markets and institutions in Parts 3 through 7.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Are U.S. Capital Markets Losing Their Edge?
Over the past few decades the United States lost its international dominance in a number of manufacturing industries, including automobiles and consumer electronics, as other countries became more competitive in global markets. Recent evidence suggests that financial markets now are undergoing a similar trend: Just as Ford and General Motors have lost global market share to Toyota and Honda, U.S. stock and bond markets recently have seen their share of sales of newly issued corporate securities slip. By 2006 the London and Hong Kong stock exchanges each handled a larger share of initial public offerings (IPOs) of stock than did the New York Stock Exchange, which had been by far the dominant exchange in terms of IPO value just three years before. Likewise, the portion of new corporate bonds issued worldwide that are initially sold in U.S. capital markets has fallen below the share sold in European debt markets in each of the past two years.* Why do corporations that issue new securities to raise capital now conduct more of this business in financial markets in Europe and Asia? Among the factors contributing to this trend are quicker adoption of technological innovation by foreign financial markets, tighter immigration controls in the United States following the terrorist attacks in 2001, and perceptions that listing on American exchanges will expose foreign securities issuers to greater risks of lawsuits. Many people see burdensome financial regulation as the main cause, however, and point specifically to the Sarbanes Oxley Act of 2002. Congress passed this act after a number of accounting scandals involving U.S. corporations and the accounting firms that audited them came to light. Sarbanes Oxley aims to strengthen the integrity of the auditing process and the quality of information provided in corporate financial statements. The costs to corporations of complying with the new rules and procedures are high, especially for smaller firms, but largely avoidable if firms choose to issue their securities in financial markets outside the United States. For this reason, there is much support for revising Sarbanes Oxley to lessen its alleged harmful effects and induce more securities issuers back to United States financial markets. However, there is not conclusive evidence to support the view that Sarbanes Oxley is the main cause of the relative decline of U.S. financial markets and therefore in need of reform. Discussion of the relative decline of U.S. financial markets and debate about the factors that are contributing to it likely will continue. Chapter 7 provides more detail on the Sarbanes Oxley Act and its effects on the U.S. financial system.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Importance of Financial Intermediaries Relative to Securities Markets:
An International Comparison Patterns of financing corporations differ across countries, but one key fact emerges: Studies of the major developed countries, including the United States, Canada, the United Kingdom, Japan, Italy, Germany, and France, show that when businesses go looking for funds to finance their activities, they usually obtain them indirectly through financial intermediaries and not directly from securities markets.* Even in the United States and Canada, which have the most developed securities markets in the world, loans from financial intermediaries are far more important for corporate finance than securities markets are. The countries that have made the least use of securities markets are Germany and Japan; in these two countries, financing from financial intermediaries has been almost 10 times greater than that from securities markets. However, after the deregulation of Japanese securities markets in recent years, the share of corporate financing by financial intermediaries has been declining relative to the use of securities markets. Although the dominance of financial intermediaries over securities markets is clear in all countries, the relative importance of bond versus stock markets differs widely across countries. In the United States, the bond market is far more important as a source of corporate finance: On average, the amount of new financing raised using bonds is 10 times the amount raised using stocks. By contrast, countries such as France and Italy make more use of equities markets than of the bond market to raise capital.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Interest rates are among the most closely watched variables in the economy. Their movements are reported almost daily by the news media because they directly affect our everyday lives and have important consequences for the health of the economy. They affect personal decisions such as whether to consume or save, whether to buy a house, and whether to purchase bonds or put funds into a savings account. Interest rates also affect the economic decisions of businesses and households, such as whether to use their funds to invest in new equipment for factories or to save their money in a bank. Before we can go on with the study of financial markets, we must understand exactly what the phrase interest rates means. In this chapter, we see that a concept known as the yield to maturity is the most accurate measure of interest rates; the yield to maturity is what financial economists mean when they use the term interest rate. We discuss how the yield to maturity is measured on credit market instruments and how it is used to value these instruments. We also see that a bond”s interest rate does not necessarily indicate how good an investment the bond is because what it earns (its rate of return) does not necessarily equal its interest rate. Finally, we explore the distinction between real interest rates, which are adjusted for changes in the price level, and nominal interest rates, which are not. Although learning definitions is not always the most exciting of pursuits, it is important to read carefully and understand the concepts presented in this chapter. Not only are they continually used throughout the remainder of this text, but a firm grasp of these terms will give you a clearer understanding of the role that interest rates play in your life as well as in the general economy.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Negative T Bill Rates?
It Can Happen We normally assume that interest rates must always be positive. Negative interest rates would imply that you are willing to pay more for a bond today than you will receive for it in the future (as our formula for yield to maturity on a discount bond demonstrates). Negative interest rates therefore seem like an impossibility because you would do better by holding cash that has the same value in the future as it does today. Events in Japan in the late 1990s and in the United States during 2008 during the global financial crisis have demonstrated that this reasoning is not quite correct. In November 1998, interest rates on Japanese six month Treasury bills became negative, yielding an interest rate of –0.004%. In September 2008, interest rates on three month T bills fell very slightly below zero for a very brief period. Negative interest rates are an extremely unusual event. How could this happen? As we will see in Chapter 4, the weakness of the economy and a flight to quality during a financial crisis can drive interest rates to low levels, but these two factors can’t explain the negative rates. The answer is that large investors found it more convenient to hold these Treasury bills as a store of value rather than holding cash because the bills are denominated in larger amounts and can be stored electronically. For that reason, some investors were willing to hold them, despite their negative rates, even though in monetary terms the investors would be better off holding cash. Clearly, the convenience of T bills goes only so far, and thus their interest rates can go only a little bit below zero.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
In the early 1950s, nominal interest rates on three month Treasury bills were about 1% at an annual rate; by 1981, they had reached over 15%, then fell to 3% in 1993, rose above 5% by the mid 1990s, dropped to near 1% in 2003, began rising again to over 5% by 2007, and then fell to zero in 2008. What explains these substantial fluctuations in interest rates? One reason we study financial markets and institutions is to provide some answers to this question. In this chapter we examine why the overall level of nominal interest rates (which we refer to simply as “interest rates”) changes and the factors that influence their behavior. We learned in Chapter 3 that interest rates are negatively related to the price of bonds, so if we can explain why bond prices change, we can also explain why interest rates fluctuate. Here we will apply supply and demand analysis to examine how bond prices and interest rates change.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Bait ’n Reel was established in 1983 by Jamie Roberts, an avid fisherman and environmentalist. Growing up in Pennsylvania’s Pocono Mountains region, Roberts was lucky enough to have a large lake right down the road, where he found himself fishing throughout the year. Unfortunately, he had to drive more than 15 miles to purchase his fishing supplies, such as lines, hooks, and bait, among other things. Throughout his early adulthood, Roberts frequently overheard other fishermen vocalizing their displeasure at not having a local fishing store to serve their needs. Because of this, Roberts vowed to himself that he would open his own store if he could ever save up enough money. By 1983, he had sufficient funds and the opportunity arose when a local grocery store went up for sale. He purchased the building and converted it into the ‘‘Bait ’n Reel’’ fishing store. His early business involved cash only transactions with local fishermen. By the mid 1990s, however, the building expanded into a superstore that sold a wide range of sporting products and camping gear. People from all over the county shopped at Bait ’n Reel as Roberts increased his advertising efforts, emphasizing his ability to provide excellent service and the wide range of products. Roberts moved away from a cash only business and began offering store credit cards to consumers and became a regional wholesaler to many smaller sporting goods stores. With the help of a friend, Roberts also installed a computer network. Although these computers did help to automate the company’s business processes and facilitated the sharing of data between departments, much interdepartmental communication continued to be via hard copy documents. Revenue increased sharply during the four years after the implementation of the computer system. In spite of this, Roberts had some questions about the quality of processes, as many of the subsidiary accounts did not match the general ledger control accounts. This didn’t prove to be a material problem, however, until recently when the computers began listing supplies on hand that were not actually on the shelves. This created problems as customers became frustrated by stock outs. Roberts knew something was wrong, but he couldn’t put his finger on it. You have been hired by Roberts to evaluate Bait ’n Reel’s processes and internal controls and make recommendations for improvement. Bait ’n Reel’s revenue cycle relating to the credit based wholesale portion of the business is described in the following paragraphs. Revenue Cycle Sales Order Processing Procedures Wholesale customer orders are mailed or faxed to the sales department. When the order is received the sales clerk checks the customer’s creditworthiness from a computer terminal. After the customer’s credit is verified, the clerk then keys in the sales orders into his computer terminal. A digital copy of the order is distributed to the warehouse and the shipping department terminals for further processing. The computer system automatically records the sale in the sales journal. Finally, the clerk files the hard copy of the customer order in the sales department. Prompted by receipt of the digital sales order, the warehouse manager prints out two copies of it: the stock release and a shipping notice. Using the stock release copy, the warehouse clerk picks the selected goods from the shelves. The goods, accompanied by both documents, are sent to the shipping department. The manager then updates the inventory subsidiary ledger and the general ledger from his computer terminal. Once the shipping clerk receives the goods, the stock release, and the shipping notice, he matches them to the corresponding digital sales order from his terminal. Assuming everything matches, he prints out three hard copies of the bill of lading and a packing slip. Two of the bill of lading copies and the packing slip are sent, along with the goods, to the carrier. The stock release copy and the shipping notice are sent to the accounts receivable department. The third bill of lading copy is filed in the shipping department. When the accounts receivable clerk receives the stock release and shipping notice he manually creates a hard copy invoice, which is immediately mailed to the customer. After mailing the invoice, the clerk goes to his terminal and updates the accounts receivable subsidiary ledger and general ledger from the information on the stock release. After the records are updated, the clerk files the stock release and shipping notice in the accounts receivable department. Cash Receipts Procedures Customer payments come directly to the general mail room along with other mail items. The mail clerk sorts through the mail, opens the customer payment envelope, removes the customer’s check and remittance advice, and reconciles the two documents. To control the checks and remittance advices the clerk manually prepares two hard copies of a remittance list. He sends one copy to the accounts receivable department along with the corresponding remittance advices. The other copy of the remittance list accompanies the checks to the cash receipts department. Once the checks and remittance list arrive in the cash receipts department, the treasurer reconciles the documents, signs the check, and manually prepares three hard copies of the deposit slip. He then updates the cash receipts journal and the general ledger on his computer terminal. Next the treasurer sends checks and two copies of the deposit slip are sent to the bank. Finally, he files the third copy of the deposit slip and the remittance in the department. When the accounts receivable clerk receives the remittance list and remittance advices from the mail room, he reconciles the two documents. Then, from his terminal, he updates the accounts receivable subsidiary ledger and the general ledger. Finally, the two documents are filed in the department.
Required
a. Create a data flow diagram of the current system.
b. Create a system flowchart of the existing system.
c. Analyze the internal control weaknesses in the system. Model your response according to the six categories of physical control activities specified in SAS 78/COSO.
d. Prepare a system flowchart of a redesigned computer based system that resolves the control weaknesses you identified. Explain your solution.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Green Mountain Coffee Roasters, Inc., was founded in 1981 and began as a small cafe in Waitsfield, Vermont, roasting and serving premium coffee on the premises. Green Mountain blends and distributes coffee to a variety of customers, including cafes, delis, and restaurants, and currently has about 6,700 customer accounts reaching states across the nation. As the company has grown, several beverages have been added to their product line, including signature blends, light and heavy roasts, decaffeinated coffee and teas, and herbal teas. Green Mountain Coffee Roasters, Inc., has been publicly traded since 1993. Green Mountain Coffee has a warehouse and manufacturing plant located in Wilton, Vermont, where it presently employees 250 full time and part time workers. The company receives its beans in bulk from a select group of distributors located across the world, with their largest supplier being Columbia Beans Co. Green Mountain Coffee also sells accessories that complement their products, including mugs, thermoses, and coffee containers that they purchase from their supplier, Coffee Lovers, Inc. In addition, Green Mountain purchases paper products such as coffee bags, coffee cups, and stirrers, which they distribute to their customers. Green Mountain’s accounting system consists of manual procedures supported by stand alone PCs located in various departments. Because these computers are not networked they cannot share data digitally, and all interdepartmental communication is through hard copy documents. Green Mountain is a new audit client for your CPA firm and as manager on the assignment you are examining their internal controls. The revenue cycle is described in the following paragraphs. Sales Order System The sales process begins when a customer sends a customer order to the sales clerk who does a credit check by manually reviewing the hard copy customer sales history records. From the approved customer order, the sales clerk then manually prepares several hard copies of a sales order. These include a customer copy, a stock release, two file copies, a packing slip, an invoice, and a ledger copy. The invoice, ledger copy, and a file copy are sent to the billing department. The second file copy and the stock release are sent to Sara in the warehouse. The packing slip is sent to the shipping department. The clerk files the approved customer order in the department. The billing department clerk reviews the source documents that she received from sales and adds prices to the invoice. Using the department PC, the clerk then enters the billing information into the computer to record the sale in the sales journal. The invoice is mailed to the customer, the ledger copy is sent to the accounts receivable clerk in the accounting department, and the file copy is filed in the billing department. At the end of the day a journal voucher is printed from the PC and sent to Vic, the general ledger clerk. Sara in the warehouse uses the stock release and file copies to pick the goods from the shelf. She files the file copy in the warehouse. Guided by the information on the stock release copy, she then updates the digital inventory subsidiary ledger from the warehouse PC. Next, she sends the stock release copy, along with the goods, to the shipping department. At the end of the day, Sara prepares a journal voucher from the PC and sends it to the general ledger clerk. The shipping clerk reconciles the stock release copy with the packing slip from sales. The clerk then manually prepares a hard copy bill of lading and records the shipment into the hard copy shipping log. The bill of lading, packing slip, and goods are sent to the carrier and the stock release copy is filed in the shipping department. In the accounting department, relevant information taken from the ledger copy (sent from billing) is entered into the computer to update the accounts receivable records. A summary (end of day) is sent to Vic. The ledger copy is then filed in the accounting department. Vic reconciles the accounts receivable summary with the journal vouchers and then updates the digital general ledger from the department PC. All documents are then filed. Cash Receipts System The mail room clerk receives the checks and remittance advices from the customer. He reconciles the checks with the remittance advices and prepares two copies of a remittance list. The checks and a remittance list are then sent to John, in the accounts receivable department. John uses a PC to process the cash receipts, update the cash receipts journal, and prepare a journal voucher and three deposit slips. The journal voucher is sent to Vic, the general ledger clerk. The checks and two deposit slips are sent to the bank to be deposited into Green Mountain Coffee’s account. The third deposit slip and the remittance list are filed. The second remittance list and the remittance advices are sent to Mary, another accounts receivable clerk who, using the same PC, updates the accounts receivable subsidiary ledger and prepares an account summary, which is sent to Vic. The remittance list and the remittance advice are then filed. Vic uses the journal voucher and the account summary to update the general ledger. These two documents are then filed.
Required
a. Create a data flow diagram of the current system.
b. Create a system flowchart of the existing system.
c. Analyze the internal control weaknesses in the system. Model your response according to the six categories of physical control activities specified in SAS 78/COSO.
d. Prepare a system flowchart of a redesigned computer based system that resolves the control weaknesses you identified. Explain your solution.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
USA Cycle Company is one of the fastest growing bicycle distributors in the United States, with headquarters in Chicago, Illinois. Their primary business is distribution of bicycles assembled in China, but they also have a smaller, custom order business for which they build bicycles from parts purchased from various suppliers. Their product line includes mountain, road, and comfort bikes as well as a juvenile line with up to 24 inch frames. They also distribute BMX bicycles as well as tricycles and trailer bikes. In addition, they distribute various bicycle accessories such as helmets, clothing, lights, and spare parts for all of the models they carry. Established in 1985, the company’s first warehouses were in Illinois and Wisconsin and supplied retail bicycle outlets primarily in the Midwest. One year ago, USA Cycle Company expanded, adding two additional facilities in Sacramento, California, and Redmond, Washington, to meet the growing demand for their bicycles. They now also sell customized bicycles direct to retailers through the Internet as well as by conventional means. The company’s expansion to the West Coast was coupled with a planned increase in reliance on suppliers in China. Even though this resulted in decreased costs, some problems regarding inventory levels arose because of unexpected delays in shipping, primarily attributable to miscommunication and shipping conditions. Because the company does not want to carry excess inventory, they are sometimes forced to seek local suppliers at an increased cost. Initially, USA Cycle Company was a family owned business. In need of capital, however, the company went public when they added the two facilities on the West Coast. The number of employees rose from 100 to 200 during the expansion. USA Cycle Company uses limited computer technology to process business transactions and record accounting data. Each of its facilities is similarly configured: The various departments in the facility employ manual procedures that are supported by non networked PCs. Because this type of configuration does not permit departments to share data digitally, most interdepartmental communication is accomplished via hard copy documents. Since the expansion, USA Cycle has been plagued by inefficiency and accounting errors. You have been hired to evaluate their processes and internal controls for compliance with the Sarbanes Oxley Act. The revenue cycle of one of its facilities is described in the following paragraphs. Description of Sales Order Procedures The USA Cycle Company sales order process begins when a sales representative takes an order from the customer over the phone or fax (for established customers) and prepares the customer order. The sales clerk uses a PCs to input the customer order into one of two different data files, either the custom design order file or the regular order file. The system manager in the sales department periodically checks the Web server for orders that come in through the Internet and prints these orders for the sales clerk to enter as sales orders. At the end of the day, the sales clerk updates the customer file from the regular sales order file and the custom design sales order file and prints three copies of the sales orders, including a factory order for each custom design order. The clerk forwards the sales orders to the warehouse, where goods are retrieved from inventory and shipped to the customer. The clerk also sends the factory orders for custom design bicycles to the factory for assembly. One copy of the sales order is filed in the open customer order file for use in answering customer in quires. The last copy of the sales order is sent to the billing department for preparation of the sales invoice. Once the warehouse receives a sales order, a warehouse worker retrieves the goods and accesses the warehouse department PC to update the inventory subsidiary ledger using an inventory management application program. Another worker packs the goods and prepares two copies of the bill of lading as well as a packing slip. The packing slip is attached to the shipping container, and the two copies of the bill of lading are sent to the shipping company along with the goods. The worker also prepares a shipping notice that is sent to the billing department along with a bill of lading, sales order, and a factory order (if the goods were for a custom designed bicycle). When the factory receives a factory order for a custom designed bicycle from the sales department, a factory worker prepares a material release form and sends it to the warehouse for the materials. After the worker assembles the product according to the order specifications, the factory order and the finished product are sent to the warehouse, where the shipping documents are prepared, and the goods are shipped to the customer in the same way as other sales orders. After receiving the sales order from the sales department, the billing/accounts receivable department clerk files it in a temporary file until the shipping notice, the bill of lading, and the sales order or factory order have arrived from the warehouse. Once the shipping notice and other documents have arrived, the clerk reviews these documents along with the sales order from the temporary file and prepares two copies of the sales invoice using the billing/accounts receivable department PC, which automatically records the sale in the sales journal and updates the accounts receivable subsidiary ledger and the general ledger. One copy of the sales invoice is mailed to the customer and the other is forwarded to the sales department, which closes the open customer order file. After closing the open customer order file, all documents in the file are sent to the billing/ accounts receivable department. These documents are then filed in the accounts receivable pending file along with other documents the billing/accounts receivable department receives to await customer payment. Description of Sales Return Procedures When goods are returned to the receiving department, the receiving clerk counts and inspects the returned goods and then prepares two returned goods slips. Following this, the manager in the receiving department evaluates the circumstances of the return and decides whether to grant credit and stamps the slips accordingly. Afterward, the goods are sent to the warehouse with one of the stamped return slips. In the warehouse, a warehouse employee enters the information on the warehouse department PC, which updates the inventory subsidiary ledger records. The second stamped slip is sent to the billing/accounts receivable department, where the sales journal, accounts receivable subsidiary ledger, and general ledger are automatically updated by crediting the customer account. Both return slips are filed by billing/accounts receivable in the returned goods file for future business evaluation. Description of Cash Receipts Procedures All of USA Cycle’s mail arrives in the mail room in the cash receipts department. A cash receipts clerk in the mail room opens all the mail, separates the checks and remittance advices, and endorses all the checks ‘‘For Deposit Only.’’ Afterward, the clerk records each check on a remittance list and sends one copy of the remittance list to the billing/accounts receivable department along with the remittance advices. Then the clerk prepares a bank deposit slip and updates the cash receipts journal on the cash receipts department’s PC. Later that day, the cash receipts manager deposits the checks in the bank. In the billing/accounts receivable department, a clerk updates customer accounts on the department’s PC with the information from the remittance advices, which automatically updates the accounts receivable subsidiary and general ledger control accounts. The billing/ accounts receivable clerk also closes the accounts receivable pending file for invoices that have been paid in full. Finally, the clerk files all source documents along with the remittance list and remittance advices in the sales history file.
Required
a. Create a data flow diagram of the current system.
b. Create a system flowchart of the existing system.
c. Analyze the internal control weaknesses in the system. Model your response according to the six categories of physical control activities specified in SAS 78/COSO.
d. Prepare a system flowchart of a redesigned computer based system that resolves the control weaknesses you identified. Explain your solution.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Which document helps to ensure that the receiving clerks actually count the number of goods received?
a. packing list
b. blind copy of purchase order
c. shipping notice
d. invoice
2. When the goods are received and the receiving report has been prepared, which ledger may be updated?
a. standard cost inventory ledger
b. inventory subsidiary ledger
c. general ledger
d. accounts payable subsidiary ledger
3. Which statement is NOT correct for an expenditure system with proper internal controls?
a. Cash disbursements maintain the check register.
b. Accounts payable maintains the accounts payable subsidiary ledger.
c. Accounts payable is responsible for paying invoices.
d. Accounts payable is responsible for authorizing invoices.
4. Which duties should be segregated?
a. matching purchase requisitions, receiving reports, and invoices and authorizing payment
b. authorizing payment and maintaining the check register
c. writing checks and maintaining the check register
d. authorizing payment and maintaining the accounts payable subsidiary ledger
5. Which documents would an auditor most likely choose to examine closely to ascertain that all expenditures incurred during the accounting period have been recorded as
a liability?
a. invoices
b. purchase orders
c. purchase requisitions
d. receiving reports
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Which task must still require human intervention in an automated purchases/cash disbursements system?
a. determination of inventory requirements
b. preparation of a purchase order
c. preparation of a receiving report
d. preparation of a check register
2. Which one of the following departments does not have a copy of the purchase order?
a. the purchasing department
b. the receiving department
c. accounts payable
d. general ledger
3. Which document typically triggers the process of recording a liability?
a. purchase requisition
b. purchase order
c. receiving report
d. supplier’s invoice
4. Which of the following tasks should the cash disbursement clerk NOT perform?
a. review the supporting documents for completeness and accuracy
b. prepare checks
c. approve the liability
d. mark the supporting documents paid
5. Which of the following is true?
a. The cash disbursement function is part of accounts payable.
b. Cash disbursements is an independent accounting function.
c. Cash disbursements is a treasury function.
d. The cash disbursement function is part of the general ledger department.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
City company that buys a product from a manufacturer in Los Angeles. The buyer closes its books on June 30.
Assume the following details:
Terms of trade FOB shipping point
June 10, buyer sends purchase order to seller
June 15, seller ships goods
July 5, buyer receives goods
July 10, buyer receives seller’s invoice
Required
a. Could this transaction have resulted in an unrecorded liability in the buyer’s financial statements?
b. If yes, what documents provide audit trail evidence of the liability?
c. On what date did the buyer realize the liability?
d. On what date did the buyer recognize the liability?
New assumption:
Terms of trade free on board destination
e. Could this transaction have resulted in an unrecorded liability in the buyer’s financial statements?
f. If yes, what documents provide audit trail evidence of the liability?
g. On what date did the buyer realize the liability?
h. On what date did the buyer recognize the liability?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Create the appropriate documents (purchase requisition, purchase order, receiving report, inventory record, and disbursement voucher), and prepare any journal entries needed to process the following business events for Jethro’s Boot & Western Wear Manufacturing Company (this is a manual system).
a. On October 28, 2005, the inventory subsidiary ledger for Item 2278, metal pins, indicates that the quantity on hand is 4,000 units (valued at $76), the reorder point is 4,750, and units are on order. The economic order quantity is 6,000 units. The supplier is Jed’s Metal Supply Company (vendor number 83682). The customer number is 584446. The current price per unit is $0.02. Inventory records are kept at cost. The goods should be delivered to Inventory Storage Room 2.
b. On November 8, the goods were received (the scales indicated that 4,737 units were received).
c. On November 12, an invoice (number 9886) was received for the above units, which included freight of $6. The terms were 1/10, net 30. Jethro’s likes to keep funds available for use as long as possible without missing any discounts.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Estimate the amount of money accounts payable and cash disbursements departments could save if a basic batch processing system were implemented. Assume that the clerical workers cost the firm $12 per hour, that 13,000 vouchers are prepared, and that 5,000 checks are written per year. Assume that total cash disbursements to vendors amount to $5 million per year. Because of sloppy bookkeeping, the current system takes advantage of only about 25 percent of the discounts vendors offer for timely payments. The average discount is 2 percent if payment is made within 10 days. Payments are currently made on the 15th day after the invoice is received. Make your own assumptions (and state them) regarding how long specific tasks will take. Also discuss any intangible benefits of the system. (Don’t worry about excessive paper documentation costs.)
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following is a description of manufacturing company’s purchasing procedures. All computers in the company are networked to a centralized accounting system so that each terminal has full access to a common database. The inventory control clerk periodically checks inventory levels from a computer terminal to identify items that need to be ordered. Once the clerk feels inventory is too low, he chooses a supplier and creates a purchase order from the terminal by adding a record to the purchase order file. The clerk prints a hard copy of the purchase order and mails it to the vendor. An electronic notification is also sent to accounts payable and receiving, giving the clerks of each department access to the purchase order from their respective terminals. When the raw materials arrive at the unloading dock, a receiving clerk prints a copy of the purchase order from his terminal and reconciles it to the packing slip. The clerk then creates a receiving report on a computer system. An electronic notification is sent to accounts payable and inventory control, giving the respective clerks access to the receiving report. The inventory control clerk then updates the inventory records. When the accounts payable clerk receives a hardcopy invoice from the vendor, she reconciles the invoice with the digital purchase order and receiving report and prepares a paper cash disbursements voucher. The cash disbursements voucher and invoice are placed in the open accounts payable file in a filing cabinet until the due date. The clerk also updates the accounts payable subsidiary ledger and records the liability amount in the purchase journal from the department computer terminal. The accounts payable clerk periodically reviews the cash disbursement file for items due and, when they are identified, prepares a check for the amount due. Finally, using the department terminal, the clerk removes the liability from the accounts payable subsidiary file and posts the disbursement to the cash account.
Required
a. Create a system flowchart of the system.
b. Analyze the internal control weaknesses in the system. Model your response according to the six categories of physical control activities specified in SAS 78/COSO.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Smith’s Market (Small Business Cash Sales Accounting System)
In 1989 Robert Smith opened a small fruit and vegetable market in Bethlehem, Pennsylvania. Originally Smith sold only produce grown on his family farm and orchard. As the market’s popularity grew, however, he added bread, canned goods, fresh meats, and a limited supply of frozen goods. Today Smith’s Market is a full range farmers’ market with a strong local customer base. Indeed, the market’s reputation for low prices and high quality draws customers from other Pennsylvania cities and even from the neighboring state of New Jersey. Currently Smith’s has 40 employees. These include sales staff, shelf stockers, farm laborers, shift supervisors, and clerical staff. Recently Smith has noticed a decline in profits and sales, while his purchases of products for resale have continued to rise. Although the company does not prepare audited financial statements, Robert Smith has commissioned your public accounting firm to assess his company’s sales procedures and internal controls. Smith’s Market expenditure cycle procedures are described below: Expenditure Cycle The expenditure cycle begins in the warehouse adjacent to the market where Smith’s keeps their inventory of nonperishable goods such as canned goods and paper products. They also maintain a one day inventory of produce and other perishable products in the warehouse where they can quickly restock the shelves when necessary. At close of business each evening the warehouse clerk reviews the market shelves for items that need to be replenished. The clerk restocks the shelves and adjusts the digital stock records accordingly from the warehouse PC. At this time the clerk takes note of what needs to be reordered from the suppliers and prints purchase orders from the PC. Depending upon the nature of the product and urgency of the need, the clerk either mails the purchase order to the supplier or orders by phone. Phone orders are followed up by faxing the purchase order to the supplier. When the goods arrive from the vendor the warehouse clerk reviews the packing slip, restocks the warehouse shelves, and updates the stock records from the PC. At the end of the day the clerk prepares a hard copy purchases summary from the PC and sends it to the treasury clerk for posting to general ledger. The vendor’s invoice is sent to the accounting clerk. She examines it for correctness and files it in a temporary file until it is due to be paid. The clerk reviews the temporary file daily looking for invoices to be paid. Using the accounting department PC, the clerk prints a check and records it in the digital check register. She then files the invoice and mails the check to the supplier. At the end of the day she prints a hard copy journal voucher from the PC, which summarizes the day’s cash disbursements, and sends it to the treasury clerk for posting to the general ledger. Using the department PC, the treasury clerk posts the journal voucher and purchases summary information to the appropriate general ledger accounts. Required
a. Create a data flow diagram of the current system.
b. Create a system flowchart of the current system.
c. Analyze the internal control weaknesses in the system. Model your response according to the six categories of physical control activities specified in SAS 78/COSO.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Spice Is Right was established in 1990 in Boston where they began importing exotic spices and cooking sauces from India and China. They distribute these specialty foods to ethnic food shops, cafes, and restaurants across the country. In addition to their Boston headquarters and warehouse, the company has a distribution center in Elizabeth, New Jersey. Spice Is Right currently employs over 100 people, has dozens of suppliers, and trades in hundreds of ethnic and exotic foods from all over the world. Recently, Spice Is Right has been receiving complaints from customers and suppliers about billing, shipping, and payment errors. Management believes that these complaints stem, in part, from an antiquated computer system. Spice’s current information system includes manual procedures supported by independent (non networked) PC in each department, which cannot communicate with each other. Document flows between the departments is entirely in hard copy form. The following is a description of their expenditure cycle at the Boston headquarters office. Purchasing Process The purchasing agent monitors the inventory levels by reviewing the inventory subsidiary ledger from his department computer. He decides which items need to be replenished and selects a supplier. He then enters this information into the computer terminal to create a digital purchase order. The computer terminal generates three hard copies of the purchase order. The purchasing agent sends one copy to the supplier, one copy to the accounts payable department where it is filed temporarily, and files the third copy in the purchasing department. When the goods are received, the receiving department inspects and verifies them using the packing slip, which is attached to the goods. The receiving clerk manually prepares two hard copies of a receiving report. One copy accompanies the goods to the warehouse for storage. The receiving clerk sends the second copy to the purchasing agent who uses it to update the inventory subsidiary ledger and to close the open purchase order. The purchase agent then files the receiving report in the department. Accounts Payable and Cash Disbursements Procedures The accounts payable clerk receives the supplier’s invoice and reconciles it with the purchase order in the temporary file. From her computer terminal the clerk records the purchase in the purchases journal and records the liability by creating a cash disbursement voucher. The clerk then updates the inventory control and accounts payable control accounts in the general ledger. The purchases order and invoice are then filed in the department. Each day, the clerk visually searches the cash disbursements voucher file from her terminal for open invoices that are due to be paid. From her computer terminal, the clerk prepares the check and records it in the check register. The negotiable portion of the check is mailed to the vendor, and a check copy is filed. The clerk then closes the voucher register and updates the accounts payable control and cash accounts in the general ledger.
Required
a. Create a data flow diagram of the current system.
b. Create a system flowchart of the existing system.
c. Analyze the internal control weaknesses in the system. Model your response according to the six categories of physical control activities specified in SAS 78/COSO.
d. Prepare a system flowchart of a redesigned computer based system that resolves the control weaknesses you identified. Explain your solution.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
ABE Plumbing, Inc., opened its doors in 1979 as a wholesale supplier of plumbing equipment, tools, and parts to hardware stores, home improvement centers, and professional plumbers in the Allentown Bethlehem Easton metropolitan area. Over the years they have expanded their operations to serve customer across the nation and now employ over 200 people as technical representatives, buyers, warehouse workers, and sales and office staff. Most recently ABE has experienced fierce competition from the large online discount stores such as Harbor Freight and Northern Supply. In addition the company is suffering from operational inefficiencies related to its archaic information system. ABE’s expenditure cycle procedures are described in the following paragraphs. Expenditure Cycle ABE uses a centralized accounting system for managing inventory purchases and recording transactions. The system is almost entirely paperless. Each department has a computer terminal that is networked to the ‘‘Purchases/ Accounts Payable System’’ that is run from a small data processing department. All accounting records are maintained on centralized computer files that are stored on a file server in the data processing department. Purchasing The process begins in the purchasing department. Each morning the purchasing agent reviews the inventory levels from his department terminal and searches for items that have fallen to their reorder points and need to be replenished. The purchasing agent then selects the vendors and creates digital purchase orders in the purchase order file. He then prints two hard copies of each purchase order and sends them to the respective vendors. Receiving When the items are received, the receiving department clerk reconciles the goods with the attached packing slip and the digital purchase order, which he accesses from his computer terminal. The clerk then creates a digital receiving report, stating the condition of the materials received. The system automatically closes the purchase order previously created by the purchasing agent. In addition, the receiving clerk prints a hard copy of the receiving report, which he sends with the inventory to the warehouse where the items are stored. Warehouse Upon receipt of the inventory, the warehouse clerk reconciles the items with the receiving report and updates the inventory subsidiary ledger. The accounting system automatically and immediately updates the inventory control account in the general ledger. Accounts Payable Once the accounts payable clerk receives the vendor’s invoice, she reconciles it with the purchase order and receiving report from her terminal. The clerk then creates a digital cash disbursement voucher record and sets a due date for payment. The system automatically updates the AP control account in the general ledger. Daily, the accounts payable clerk reviews the open cash disbursement voucher records from her terminal looking for items that need to be paid. The clerk then creates a record for the payment in the digital check register and closes the open cash disbursement voucher. Finally, the clerk prints a hard copy of the check and sends it to the vendor. The system automatically updates the accounts payable and cash general ledger accounts. Required
a. Create a data flow diagram of the current system.
b. Create a system flowchart of the existing system.
c. Identify the internal control weaknesses in the system. Model your response according to the six categories of physical control activities specified in SAS 78/COSO.
d. Prepare a system flowchart of a redesigned computer based system that resolves the control weaknesses you identified. Explain your solution.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Walker Books, Inc., is one of the fastest growing book distributors in the United States. Established in 1981 in Palo Alto, California, Walker Books was originally a side project of founder and current president Curtis Walker, who at the time was employed by a local law firm. Because reading was much more than just a hobby of his, he decided to use some of his savings to buy an abandoned restaurant and convert it into a neighborhood bookstore, mainly selling used books that were donated and obtained from flea markets. When the doors first opened, Walker’s wife, Lauren, was the only employee during the week and Curtis worked weekends. At the end of the first fiscal year, Walker Books had grossed $20,000 in sales. As the years passed, Curtis Walker quit the law firm and began concentrating fully on his bookstore. More employees were hired, more books were traded in, and more sales were attained each year that passed. During the mid 1990s, however, Walker was faced with two problems: many large, upscale bookstores were being built in the area, and the use of the Internet for finding and ordering books was becoming cheaper and more popular for current customers. In 1995, Walker’s sales started to decline. Deciding to take a risk because of the newfound competition, he closed his doors to the neighborhood, invested more money to expand the current property, and transformed his company from simply selling used books to being a distributor of new books. His business model was to obtain books from publishers at a discount, store them in his warehouse, and resell them to large bookstore chains. Walker Books, Inc., has rapidly become one of the largest book distributors in the country. Although they are still at their original location in Palo Alto, California, they distribute books to all 50 states and because of that, the company now sees gross sales of about $105,000,000 per year. When Mr. Walker is asked about his fondest memory, he always responds that he will never forget how the little bookstore, with two employees, has expanded to now have more than 145 employees. Under his current business model, all of Walker’s customers are large chain bookstores who themselves see many millions of dollars in revenue per year. Some of these customers, however, are now experiencing problems with Walker Books that threaten their business relationship. Such problems as books being ordered but not sent, poor inventory management by Walker causing stock outs, and the inability of Walker to provide legitimate documentation of transactions have become common. One potential source of these problems rests with Walker’s antiquated accounting system, which is a combination of manual procedures supported by stand alone PC workstations. These computers are not networked and cannot share data between departments. All interdepartmental communication takes place through hardcopy documents. You have been hired as an independent expert to express an opinion on the appropriateness of Walker Books’ business processes and internal controls. The expenditure cycle is described next. Expenditure Cycle Purchases System The purchases process begins with the purchasing agent, who monitors the levels of books available via a computer terminal listing current inventory. Upon noticing deficiencies in inventory levels, the agent manually generates four hard copies of a purchase order: one is sent to accounts payable, one is sent to the vendor, one is sent to the receiving department, and the last is filed within the department. Vendors will generally ship the products within five business days of the order. When goods arrive in the receiving department, the corresponding packing slip always accompanies them. The receiving department clerk unloads the goods and then reconciles the packing slip with the purchase order. After unloading the goods, the clerk manually prepares three hard copies of the receiving report. One copy goes with the goods to the warehouse, another is sent to the purchasing department, and the final copy is filed in the receiving department. In the warehouse, the copy is simply filed once the goods are stored on the shelves. In the purchasing department, the clerk receives this copy of the receiving report and files it with the purchase order. When the accounts payable department receives the purchase order, it is temporarily filed until the respective invoice arrives from the vendor. Upon receipt of the invoice, the accounts payable clerk removes the purchase order from the temporary file and reconciles the two documents. The clerk then manually records the liability in the hard copy accounts payable subsidiary ledger. Finally, the clerk files the purchase order and invoice in the open accounts payable file in the department. At the end of the day, the clerk prepares a hardcopy journal voucher and sends it to the general ledger department. Once the general ledger department receives the journal voucher, the clerk examines it for any obvious errors and then enters the relevant data into the department PC to update the appropriate digital general ledger accounts. Cash Disbursements System The accounts payable clerk periodically reviews the open accounts payable file for liabilities that are due. To maximize returns on invested cash yet still take advantage of vendor discounts, the clerk will pull the invoice two days before its applicable due date. Upon finding an open accounts payable file in need of payment, the clerk manually prepares a check for the amount due as per the invoice. The hard copy accounts payable ledger is also updated by the accounts payable clerk. The check number, dollar amount, and other pertinent data are manually recorded in the hard copy check register. The check is then sent to the cash disbursements department. Finally, the invoice is discarded as it no longer has any relevant information that hasn’t already been recorded elsewhere. When the cash disbursements clerk receives the unsigned check, she examines it to ensure that no one has tampered with any of the information and that no errors have been made. Because she is familiar with all of the vendors with whom Walker deals, she can identify any false vendors or any payment amounts that seem excessive. Assuming everything appears in order, she signs the check using a signature block that displays the name of the assistant treasurer, Tyler Matthews. Only Matthews’ signature can validate a vendor check. The cash disbursements clerk then photocopies the check for audit trail purposes. Once the check is signed, it is sent directly to the supplier. The photocopy of the check is marked as paid and then filed in the cash disbursements department. The clerk then creates a journal voucher, which is sent to the general ledger department. Once the general ledger department receives the journal voucher, the clerk examines it for any obvious errors and then enters the relevant data into the department PC to update the appropriate digital general ledger accounts.
Required
a. Create a data flow diagram of the current system.
b. Create a system flowchart of the existing system.
c. Analyze the internal control weaknesses in the system. Model your response according to the six categories of physical control activities specified in SAS 78/COSO.
d. Prepare a system flowchart of a redesigned computer based system that resolves the control weaknesses you identified. Explain your solution.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A&V Safety, Inc., is a growing company specializing in the sales of safety equipment to commercial entities. It currently employs 200 full time employees all of whom work out of their headquarters in San Diego, California. During the summer, the company expands to include about 10 summer interns who are delegated smaller jobs and other errands. A&V currently competes with Office Safety, Inc., and X Safe, who lead the industry. Suppliers for A&V include Halotron Extinguishers, Kadelite, and Exit Signs, Inc. A&V attempts to maintain inventory levels sufficient to service two weeks of sales. This level has shown to avoid stock outs, and the excess inventory is held in a warehouse in a suburb of San Diego. A&V has a legacy accounting system that employs a combination of manual procedures supported by standalone PC in the various departments. Recently they have experienced business inefficiencies that have been linked to their antiquated accounting system. You have been retained by A&V management to review their procedures for compliance with the Sarbanes Oxley Act and to provide recommendations for improvement. The A&V expenditure cycle is presented in the following paragraphs. Expenditure Cycle The company purchases safety devices such as fire extinguishers, exit signs, and sensors from many different suppliers. When the quantity on hand of a particular product falls to a low level, the warehouse clerk selects a vendor and manually prepares three hard copies of a purchase order. The clerk sends one copy of the purchase order to the vendor, one copy to the general ledger department, and the third to the receiving department to be used to verify the goods when they arrive. When the goods arrive from the vendor, they first go to the receiving department. The receiving clerk matches the packing slip in the shipment to the purchase order that the warehouse clerk had previously sent. After comparing the quantities and products on the packing slip to those specified on the purchase order, the receiving clerk signs the purchase order and sends it to the accounting department. The receiving clerk then manually prepares a hard copy receiving report, which he sends with the goods to the warehouse. From his department PC, the warehouse clerk uses the receiving report to update the inventory subsidiary ledger to reflect the receipt of the goods. Subsequently, the accounting department’s accounts payable clerk receives the supplier’s invoice, which she matches and reconciles to the previously received purchase order from the receiving clerk. From her department PC the accounts payable clerk then updates the digital accounts payable subsidiary ledger to reflect the new liability and records the event in the digital purchases journal. Cash Disbursements Procedures The accounts payable clerk in the accounting department reviews the liabilities that are due by searching the accounts payable subsidiary ledger from the department PC. The clerk then prints out a hard copy cash disbursement voucher for each item due for payment. The clerk then sends cash disbursements voucher to the cash disbursements department for payment. At the end of the day the clerk prints a hard copy accounts payable summary from the department PC and sends it to the general ledger department. From his department PC, the cash disbursement clerk uses the cash disbursement voucher to record the payment in the digital check register and then prints a three part check. The clerk signs the negotiable portion of the check and sends it to the vendor. One check copy is filed in the department and the clerk sends the second check copy, along with the original cash disbursement voucher, to the accounting department accounts payable clerk. At the end of the day the clerk prints a hard copy summary of the check register and sends it to the general ledger department. From the accounting department PC, the accounts payable clerk uses the check copy and cash disbursement voucher to record the payment in the digital check register and to close out the liability in the digital accounts payable subsidiary ledger. The clerk then files the hard copy cash disbursement voucher and check copy in the department. From the department PC, the general ledger clerk posts the summaries received from the accounting and cash disbursement departments to the appropriate general ledger accounts. The clerk files the hard copy summaries in the general ledger department.
Required
a. Create a data flow diagram of the current system.
b. Create a system flowchart of the existing system.
c. Analyze the internal control weaknesses in the system. Model your response according to the six categories of physical control activities specified in SAS 78/COSO.
d. Prepare a system flowchart of a redesigned computer based system that resolves the control weaknesses you identified. Explain your solution.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Bait ’n Reel was established in 1983 by Jamie Roberts, an avid fisherman and environmentalist. Growing up in Pennsylvania’s Pocono Mountains region, Roberts was lucky enough to have a large lake right down the road, where he found himself fishing throughout the year. Unfortunately, he had to drive more than 15 miles to purchase his fishing supplies, such as lines, hooks, and bait, among other things. Throughout his early adulthood, Jamie frequently overheard other fishermen vocalizing their displeasure at not having a local fishing store to serve their needs. Because of this, Roberts vowed to himself that he would open his own store if he could ever save up enough money. By 1983, he had sufficient funds and the opportunity arose when a local grocery store went up for sale. He purchased the building and converted it into the ‘‘Bait ’n Reel’’ fishing store. His early business involved cash only transactions with local fishermen. By the mid 1990s, however, the building expanded into a superstore that sold a wide range of sporting products and camping gear. People from all over the county shopped at Bait ’n Reel as Roberts increased his advertising efforts, emphasizing his ability to provide excellent service and the wide range of products. Roberts moved away from a cash only business and began offering store credit cards to consumers and became a regional wholesaler to many smaller sporting goods stores. With the help of a friend, Roberts also installed a computer network. Even though these computers did help to automate the company’s business processes and facilitated the sharing of data between departments, much interdepartmental communication continued to be via hard copy documents. Revenue increased sharply during the four years after the implementation of the computer system. In spite of this, Roberts had some questions about the quality of processes, as many of the subsidiary accounts did not match the general ledger control accounts. This didn’t prove to be a material problem, however, until recently when the computers began listing supplies on hand that were not actually on the shelves. This created problems as customers became frustrated by stock outs. Roberts knew something was wrong, but he couldn’t put his finger on it. You have been hired by Roberts to evaluate Bait ’n Reel’s processes and internal controls and make recommendations for improvement. Bait ’n Reel’s expenditure cycle is described in the following paragraphs. Expenditure Cycle Purchases System The process begins when the purchasing manager checks the inventory subsidiary ledger on his computer terminal each morning. When inventory is deemed to be too low, he reviews the valid vendor file, also from his terminal, to select vendors for items to be purchased. Once a vendor is found, he prepares an electronic version of the purchase order, in addition to two hard copies of the purchase order. One hard copy is sent to the vendor immediately, while the other is filed in the department. Immediately after this event, the electronic version of the purchase order is sent out to two terminals: one in the receiving department and one in the accounts payable department. When the clerk in the receiving department receives the electronic purchase order, he reads over it once to make sure it seems correct. When the goods arrive, he makes a detailed inspection of them and reconciles the goods to the corresponding information contained in the electronic purchase order. If everything looks correct, the clerk manually prepares two hard copies of the receiving report. One of these copies accompanies the goods to the inventory control/storage department, where the clerk updates the inventory subsidiary account from his terminal; it is then filed after the goods are placed on the shelves. The other copy of the receiving report is sent to the accounts payable department. Upon receipt of the receiving report, the accounts payable clerk matches it to the respective electronic purchase order on his terminal. He then updates the accounts payable subsidiary ledger from his terminal to reflect the transaction. The clerk temporarily files the receiving report until the invoice arrives from the vendor. Typically, vendors provide a photocopy of the original purchase order along with the invoice so any discrepancies can immediately be identified. When the accounts payable clerk receives the invoice and purchase order copy, he pulls the receiving report from the temporary file and reconciles the three documents. At this time, the clerk updates the accounts payable control and the inventory control accounts in the general ledger on his terminal. The clerk the sends the invoice, receiving report, and the purchase order copy to the cash disbursements department. Cash Disbursements System Upon receipt of the documents from the accounts payable department, the cash disbursements clerk prepares a check for the invoiced amount. Once this is completed, he updates the check register, accounts payable subsidiary account, and the general ledger from his terminal. The three documents, along with the check, are then passed on to the assistant treasurer. As an additional control, the assistant treasurer reviews the supporting documents and makes a photocopy of the check for record keeping purposes. The treasurer then signs the check, which is immediately sent to the vendor for payment. The invoice, purchase order copy, receiving report, and check copy are filed in the department.
Required
a. Create a data flow diagram of the current system.
b. Create a system flowchart of the existing system.
c. Analyze the internal control weaknesses in the system. Model your response according to the six categories of physical control activities specified in SAS 78/COSO.
d. Prepare a system flowchart of a redesigned computer based system that resolves the control weaknesses you identified. Explain your solution.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Green Mountain Coffee Roasters, Inc., was founded in 1981 and began as a small cafe in Waitsfield, Vermont, roasting and serving premium coffee on the premises. Green Mountain blends and distributes coffee to a variety of customers, including cafes, delis, and restaurants, and currently has about 6,700 customer accounts reaching states across the nation. As the company has grown, several beverages have been added to their product line, including signature blends, light and heavy roasts, decaffeinated coffee and teas, and herbal teas. Green Mountain Coffee Roasters, Inc., has been publicly traded since 1993. Green Mountain Coffee has a warehouse and manufacturing plant located in Wilton, Vermont, where it presently employees 250 full time and part time workers. The company receives its beans in bulk from a select group of distributors located across the world, with their largest supplier being Columbia Beans Co. Green Mountain Coffee also sells accessories that complement their products, including mugs, thermoses, and coffee containers that they purchase from their supplier, Coffee Lovers, Inc. In addition, Green Mountain purchases paper products such as coffee bags, coffee cups, and stirrers, which they distribute to their customers. Green Mountain’s accounting system consists of manual procedures supported by stand alone PC located in various departments. Because these computers are not networked they cannot share data digitally, and all interdepartmental communication is through hard copy documents. Green Mountain is a new audit client for your CPA firm and as manager on the assignment you are examining their internal controls. The expenditure cycle is described in the following paragraphs. Purchases System Green Mountain Coffee purchases beans and blends from manufactures and then sells them to customer stores. Sara is in charge of inventory management in the warehouse. From her PC, she reviews the inventory ledger to identify inventory needs. When items fall to their pre established reorder point, she prepares a purchase requisition. She keeps a copy in her department for use later, files one in the open purchase requisition file, and sends a copy to accounts payable. At the end of the day, she uses the purchase requisitions to prepare a four part purchase order. One copy is filed, two copies are sent to the supplier, and one copy is sent to Fayth in the accounts payable department. When the goods arrive, Sara inspects and counts them and sends the packing slip to accounts payable. Using a PC, Sara updates the inventory subsidiary ledger and, at the end of day, sends an account summary to Vic in the general ledger department. After checking that the purchase requisition and purchase order exist to support the packing slip, Fayth files the documents in the accounts payable pending file. The supplier’s invoice is mailed directly to Fayth, who checks it against the documents in the pending file. Using a computer system, she updates the accounts payable subsidiary ledger and records the transaction in the purchases journal. She then files the purchase requisition, purchase order, packing slip, and invoice in the open accounts payable file. At the end of the day, she prepares a journal voucher, which is sent to Vic in the general ledger department. Using a separate computer system, Vic updates the control accounts affected by the transactions and files the summary and journal vouchers. Cash Disbursements System Summary Fayth reviews the open accounts payable file for items due for payment, waiting until the last date to make a payment and still take advantage of the discount. From her PC, she then updates (closes) the appropriate accounts payable subsidiary record, prints a two part check, and records the payment in the check register file. At the close of day, Fayth mails the check to the supplier, files a copy, and prepares a journal voucher, which goes to Vic. Vic records the transaction in the affected general ledger accounts and files the journal voucher.
Required
a. Create a data flow diagram of the current system.
b. Create a system flowchart of the existing system.
c. Analyze the internal control weaknesses in the system. Model your response according to the six categories of physical control activities specified in SAS 78/COSO.
d. Prepare a system flowchart of a redesigned computer based system that resolves the control weaknesses you identified. Explain your solution.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
USA Cycle Company is one of the fastest growing bicycle distributors in the United States, with headquarters in Chicago, Illinois. Their primary business is distribution of bicycles assembled in China, but they also have a smaller, custom order business for which they build bicycles from parts purchased from various suppliers. Their product line includes mountain, road, and comfort bikes as well as a juvenile line with up to 24 inch frames. They also distribute BMX bicycles as well as tricycles and trailer bikes. In addition, they distribute various bicycle accessories such as helmets, clothing, lights, and spare parts for all of the models they carry. Established in 1985, the company’s first warehouses were in Illinois and Wisconsin and supplied retail bicycle outlets primarily in the Midwest. One year ago, USA Cycle Company expanded, adding two additional facilities in Sacramento, California, and Redmond, Washington, to meet the growing demand for their bicycles. They now also sell customized bicycles direct to retailers through the Internet as well as by conventional means. The company’s expansion to the West Coast was coupled with a planned increase in reliance on suppliers in China. Although this resulted in decreased costs, some problems regarding inventory levels arose because of unexpected delays in shipping, primarily attributable to miscommunication and shipping conditions. Because the company does not want to carry excess inventory, they are sometimes forced to seek local suppliers at an increased cost. Initially, USA Cycle Company was a family owned business. In need of capital, however, the company went public when they added the two facilities on the West Coast. The number of employees rose from 100 to 200 during the expansion. USA Cycle Company uses limited computer technology to process business transactions and record accounting data. Each of its facilities is similarly configured: The various departments in the facility employ manual procedures that are supported by non networked PC. Because this type of configuration does not permit departments to share data digitally, most interdepartmental communication is accomplished via hard copy documents. Since the expansion, USA Cycle has been plagued by inefficiency, and accounting errors. You have been hired to evaluate their processes and internal controls for compliance with the Sarbanes Oxley Act. The expenditure cycle of one of its facilities is described in the following paragraphs. Description of Purchases Procedures The purchases process begins when a clerk in the warehouse reviews the inventory subsidiary ledger from his PC. When inventory is needed, the clerk creates a digital record in the purchase order file. Four copies of the purchase order are printed. One copy is filed in the open purchase order file, two copies are sent to the supplier, and one copy is forwarded to the accounts payable department and filed in the accounts payable pending file. When the goods are received in the warehouse, the purchase order is pulled from the open purchase order file and a clerk inspects, counts, and reconciles the goods to the packing slip and what was ordered. The clerk places the goods on the warehouse shelves and uses the computer to prepare the receiving report. The information is saved in the digital receiving record file, and two hard copies of the receiving report are printed. One copy is forwarded to the accounts payable department. The second copy, along with the purchase order and packing slip, is used to update the digital inventory subsidiary records from the department PC. The purchase order, packing slip, and receiving report are then filed in the closed purchase order file. When the receiving report is received in the accounts payable department, it is filed in the accounts payable pending file with the purchase order. Upon receipt of the invoice from the supplier, the accounts payable clerk pulls the receiving report and purchase order from the accounts payable pending file. The clerk uses these documents to add a digital record to the purchases journal and to post the liability to the accounts payable subsidiary ledger from the department PC. The accounts payable computer system automatically updates the appropriate accounts in the general ledger. The purchase order, receiving report, and invoice are then filed in the open accounts payable file. Description of Cash Disbursements Process Using the open accounts payable file, in which the source documents are arranged by payment date, a clerk in the accounts payable department searches for accounts coming due. When payments are due, the clerk removes the purchase order, receiving report, and invoice from the file to manually prepare the vendor check and check copy. Using these documents, the clerk updates the digital check register and accounts payable subsidiary ledger from the department PC. The general ledger is automatically updated by the system. The check is signed and mailed to the supplier. The check copy along with the purchase order, receiving report, and invoice are filed in the closed accounts payable file. Required
a. Create a data flow diagram of the current system.
b. Create a system flowchart of the existing system.
c. Analyze the internal control weaknesses in the system. Model your response according to the six categories of physical control activities specified in SAS 78/COSO.
d. Prepare a system flowchart of a redesigned computer based system that resolves the control weaknesses you identified. Explain your solution.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
New Born Candy Company is the manufacturer and marketer of a premier line of candies. James Born, the current CEO of New Born Candy Company, took control of the family run business in the 1970s, although New Born Candy Company has been in existence since the mid 1930s. The company has grown to two plants on the East Coast and 209 employees across the country. As of the fiscal year ended 2008, New Born Candy Company experienced gross sales of almost $100 million. In spite of its success, the CEO and management team are concerned about recent cost overruns and production problems. For example, the rate of increase in cost of goods sold has been disproportionate with growth in sales. Additionally, they have experienced raw material stock outs that have occasionally shut down production lines or prevented them from producing to capacity. To get to the bottom of these issues James Born and his management team have hired GMD Consulting Group to review New Born’s business processes and accounting system. The following describes the relevant business cycles under review. Revenue Cycle Description New Born Candy Company receives orders from one of two places: they are delivered to the mail room where they are received and sorted, or the sales personnel receive them directly. After the mail is received and sorted by the mail room, sales orders are passed to the sales personnel. GMD Consulting looked further into mail room procedures and operations and made some interesting findings. Jonathan, the supervisor of the mail room, explained to GMD Consulting that there are so many orders (due to the rapid growth of the business and the 6,000 plus customers) that they have trouble sorting through all of the mail and getting it to the appropriate department. Jonathan explained that people in the mail room have been working considerable overtime to process the mail, but they still frequently fall behind. In talking with Suzanne, a veteran salesperson for New Born Candy Company, it was discovered that sales orders often take several days to get from the mail room to the sales department. She also told GMD Consulting that during busy times, it is very difficult to process all of the daily orders. After receiving the customer order, the sales personnel manually prepare several copies of a sales order and perform a credit check. When completed, the credit copy of the sales order is filed along with the customer order. The billing copy of the sales order is sent to the computer department, and the stock release, packing slip, shipping notice, and file copy are sent to the warehouse. The goods are picked and sent to shipping along with the supporting documents. Shipping then reconciles the file copy, shipping notice, packing slip, and stock release with the goods. The shipping clerk signs the shipping notice, and manually prepares three hard copies of a bill of lading. Two copies of the bill of lading, along with a packing slip, are given to the carrier for shipment to the customer. The file copy, stock release copy, and a copy of the bill of lading are placed in a shipping file. It is important to note that in examining the shipping department, it was found that they have been receiving an increasing number of complaints from customers. Some key documents (found on pages 260–263) shed some light on this issue. The billing copy that was generated by the sales department is now in the computer department. Here, via a keystroke operation, a clerk produces a digital sales order file. The sales order file is then processed by a batch edit program to identify errors. After the edit run, the batch sales application posts the sales orders to the sales journal, accounts receivable subsidiary file, the inventory subsidiary file, and the control accounts in the general ledger file. The system then prepares various management reports including sales and shipping reports. Also, the customer invoice is printed and sent to the customer. Expenditure Cycle Description Twice each week, a computer program in New Born Candy Company’s computer department reviews the digital inventory file. From this review the computer prints a requisition list of items that need to be replenished. The list is sent to the purchasing department and used to manually prepare hard copy purchase orders. Two purchase orders are sent to the vendor, and one is filed in the department along with the requisition list. When the vendor receives the order from purchasing, it ships the goods along with a copy of New Born’s original purchase order and a formal packing slip to the receiving department. There the purchase order and packing slip are used to assist the receiving clerk in manually preparing three hard copies of a receiving report. The purchase order and packing slip are then filed in the department. One copy of the receiving report is sent to the purchasing department, where it is filed; another copy is sent to accounts payable, where it is filed until the vendor’s invoice arrives. The third copy accompanies the good to the stores area. When accounts payable receives the vendor’s invoice, the accounts payable clerk matches it to the filed copy of the receiving report. The clerk then manually prepares a cash disbursement voucher to authorize payment and files the invoice in the accounts payable department. The disbursement voucher is sent to the computer department, where it is used in a keystroke operation to create an accounts payable record. Once the digital accounts payable is created the hard copy cash disbursement voucher is destroyed in the computer center. At the end of the day the accounts payable clerk prepares a hard copy journal voucher that is sent to the computer department and used to update the general ledger computer file. The journal voucher is filed in the computer department. Cash Disbursements Process At the end of the week the cash disbursement system (a batch computer application) scans the accounts payable file for items that need to be paid. The system closes the open accounts payable record and adds a new record to the check register to record the payment. The system then prints the check, which is sent to the vendor, and prepares a cash disbursement report that goes to management. Required
a. Create data flow diagrams of the revenue and expenditure procedures.
b. Create system flowcharts of the current revenue and expenditure procedures.
c. Analyze the internal control and operational weaknesses in the system.
d. Prepare system flowcharts of a redesigned system that resolves the control and operational weaknesses you have identified. Explain your solution.
|
CASH DISBURSEMENTS REPORT FOR MONTHS MAY AND JUNE
|
|
Date
|
Vendor Name
|
Check No
|
Invoice No
|
Invoice Amount
|
Payment Discount
|
Amount
|
|
5/1/09
|
Hall Sugar Company
|
601
|
121
|
$5,200
|
|
$5,200
|
|
5/8/09
|
Ray Packaging
|
602
|
782
|
$1,200
|
$180
|
$1,020
|
|
5/15/09
|
Brown Chemicals
|
603
|
52
|
$1,875
|
|
$1,875
|
|
5/16/09
|
Sinclair Labs
|
604
|
122
|
$2,300
|
|
$2,300
|
|
5/23/09
|
Sinclair Labs
|
605
|
132
|
$2,300
|
$345
|
$1,995
|
|
5/30/09
|
Sugar Suppliers, Inc.
|
606
|
888
|
$1,275
|
|
$1,725
|
|
5/30/09
|
Hallies Sugar Company
|
607
|
212
|
$5,275
|
|
$5,272
|
|
6/1/09
|
Color Candies, Inc.
|
608
|
222
|
$1,000
|
|
$1,000
|
|
6/8/09
|
Hall Sugar Company
|
609
|
121
|
$5,200
|
|
$5,200
|
|
6/15/09
|
Candy Wrappers & Co.
|
610
|
787
|
$1,150
|
|
$1,150
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. The document that captures the total amount of time that individual workers spend on each production job is called a
a. time card.
b. job ticket.
c. personnel action form.
d. labor distribution form.
2. An important reconciliation in the payroll system is when
a. the general ledger department compares the labor distribution summary from cost accounting to the disbursement voucher from accounts payable.
b. the personnel department compares the number of employees authorized to receive a paycheck to the number of paychecks prepared.
c. the production department compares the number of hours reported on job tickets to the number of hours reported on time cards.
d. the payroll department compares the labor distribution summary to the hours reported on time cards.
3. Which internal control is not an important part of the payroll system?
a. supervisors verify the accuracy of employee time cards
b. paychecks are distributed by an independent paymaster
c. the accounts payable department verifies the accuracy of the payroll register before transferring payroll funds to the general checking account
d. the general ledger department reconciles the labor distribution summary and the payroll disbursement voucher
4. The department responsible for approving pay rate changes is
a. payroll
b. treasurer
c. personnel
d. cash disbursements
5. Which function should distribute paychecks?
a. personnel
b. timekeeping
c. paymaster
d. payroll
6. Which transaction is not processed in the fixed asset system?
a. purchase of building
b. repair of equipment
c. purchase of raw materials
d. sale of company van
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Depreciation
a. is calculated by the department that uses the fixed asset.
b. allocates the cost of the asset over its useful life.
c. is recorded weekly.
d. results in book value approximating fair market value.
2. Depreciation records include all of the following information about fixed assets EXCEPT the
a. economic benefit of purchasing the asset.
b. cost of the asset.
c. depreciation method being used.
d. location of the asset.
3. Which control is not a part of the fixed asset system?
a. formal analysis of the purchase request
b. review of the assumptions used in the capital budgeting model
c. development of an economic order quantity model
d. estimates of anticipated cost savings
4. Objectives of the fixed asset system do NOT include
a. authorizing the acquisition of fixed assets.
b. recording depreciation expense.
c. computing gain and/or loss on the disposal of fixed assets.
d. maintaining a record of the fair market value of all fixed assets.
5. Which of the following is NOT a characteristic of the fixed asset system?
a. acquisitions are routine transactions requiring general authorization
b. retirements are reported on an authorized disposal report form
c. acquisition cost is allocated over the expected life of the asset
d. transfer of fixed assets among departments is recorded in the fixed asset subsidiary ledger
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Devise a coding scheme using block and sequential codes for the following chart of accounts for Jensen Camera Distributors.
Cash
Accounts Receivable
Office Supplies Inventory
Prepaid Insurance
Inventory
Investments in Marketable Securities
Delivery Truck
Accumulated Depreciation—Delivery Truck
Equipment
Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment
Furniture and Fixtures
Accumulated Depreciation—Furniture and Fixtures
Building
Accumulated Depreciation—Building
Land
Accounts Payable
Wages Payable
Taxes Payable
Notes Payable
Bonds Payable
Common Stock
Paid In Capital in Excess of Par
Treasury Stock
Retained Earnings
Sales
Sales Returns and Allowances
Dividend Income
Cost of Goods Sold
Wages Expense
Utility Expense
Office Supplies Expense
Insurance Expense
Depreciation Expense
Advertising Expense
Fuel Expense
Interest Expense
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
For the following situations, indicate the most appropriate type of file organization. Explain your choice. a. A local utility company has 80,000 residential customers and 10,000 commercial customers. The monthly billings are staggered throughout the month and, as a result, the cash receipts are fairly uniform throughout the month. For 99 percent of all accounts, one check per month is received. These receipts are recorded in a batch file, and the customer account records are updated biweekly. In a typical month, customer inquiries are received at the rate of about 20 per day.
b. A national credit card agency has 12 million customer accounts. On average, 30 million purchases and 700,000 receipts of payments are processed per day. Additionally, the customer support hotline provides information to approximately 150,000 credit card holders and 30,000 merchants per day.
c. An airline reservations system assumes that the traveler knows the departing city. From that point, fares and flight times are examined based on the destination. When a flight is identified as being acceptable to the traveler, the availability is checked and, if necessary, a seat is reserved. The volume of transactions exceeds one half million per day.
d. A library system stocks over 2 million books and has 30,000 patrons. Each patron is allowed to check out five books. On average, there are 1.3 copies of each title in the library. Over 3,000 books are checked out each day, with approximately the same amount being returned daily. The checked out books are posted immediately, as well as any returns of overdue books by patrons who wish to pay their fines.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A company creates its sales order transaction file in batches. Once a day, a sales clerk compiles a transaction file by entering data from the previous day’s sales orders to the transaction file. When these transactions have all been entered and the transaction file passes editing, the transaction file is used to destructively update both the sales and the accounts receivable master files. Each of these master files is then backed up to a magnetic tape. The magnetic tapes are stored (offline) in a remote location. Now consider what might happen if, in the middle of an update of the sales master file, lightning hit the company’s building, resulting in a power failure that caused the computer to corrupt both the transaction file and the master files.
a. Which, if any, files contain non corrupted data (transaction file, accounts receivable master file, sales master file, or backup master files)?
b. Will a clerk have to re enter any data? If so, what data will have to be re entered?
c. What steps will the company have to take to obtain non corrupted master files that contain the previous day’s sales data?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
If detective controls signal error flags, why shouldn’t these types of controls automatically make a correction in the identified error? Why are corrective controls necessary?
Discuss the non accounting services that external auditors are no longer permitted to render to audit clients.
Discuss whether a firm with fewer employees than there are incompatible tasks should rely more heavily on general authority than specific authority.
An organization’s internal audit department is usually considered an effective control mechanism for evaluating the organization’s internal control structure. The Birch Company’s internal auditing function reports directly to the controller. Comment on the effectiveness of this organizational structure.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Management can expect various benefits to follow from implementing a system of strong internal control. Which of the following benefits is least likely to occur?
a. reduction of cost of an external audit
b. prevention of employee collusion to commit fraud
c. availability of reliable data for decision making purposes
d. some assurance of compliance with the Foreign Corrupt Practices Act of 1977
e. some assurance that important documents and records are protected
2. Which of the following situations is NOT a segregation of duties violation?
a. The treasurer has the authority to sign checks but gives the signature block to the assistant treasurer to run the check signing machine.
b. The warehouse clerk, who has custodial responsibility over inventory in the warehouse, selects the vendor and authorizes purchases when inventories are low.
c. The sales manager has the responsibility to approve credit and the authority to write off accounts.
d. The department time clerk is given the undistributed payroll checks to mail to absent employees.
e. The accounting clerk who shares the recordkeeping responsibility for the accounts receivable subsidiary ledger performs the monthly reconciliation of the subsidiary ledger and the control account.
3. The underlying assumption of reasonable assurance regarding implementation of internal control means that
a. auditor is reasonably assured that fraud has not occurred in the period.
b. auditors are reasonably assured that employee carelessness can weaken an internal control structure.
c. implementation of the control procedure should not have a significant adverse effect on efficiency or profitability.
d. management assertions about control effectiveness should provide auditors with reasonable assurance.
e. a control applies reasonably well to all forms of computer technology.
4. To conceal the theft of cash receipts from customers in payment of their accounts, which of the following journal entries should the bookkeeper make?
|
DR
|
CR
|
|
a. Miscellaneous Expense
|
Cash
|
|
b. Petty Cash
|
Cash
|
|
c. Cash Accounts
|
Receivable
|
|
d. Sales Returns
|
Accounts Receivable
|
|
e. None of the above
|
5. Which of the following controls would best prevent the lapping of accounts receivable?
a. Segregate duties so that the clerk responsible for recording in the accounts receivable subsidiary ledger has no access to the general ledger.
b. Request that customers review their monthly statements and report any unrecorded cash payments.
c. Require customers to send payments directly to the company’s bank.
d. Request that customers make checks payable to the company.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Providing timely information about transactions in sufficient detail to permit proper classification and financial reporting is an example of
a. the control environment.
b. risk assessment.
c. information and communication.
d. monitoring.
2. Ensuring that all material transactions processed by the information system are valid and in accordance with management’s objectives is an example of
a. transaction authorization.
b. supervision.
c. accounting records.
d. independent verification.
3. Which of the following is often called a compensating control?
a. transaction authorization
b. supervision
c. accounting records
d. independent verification
4. Which of the following is NOT an element of the fraud triangle?
a. ethics
b. justifiable reliance
c. situational pressure
d. opportunity
5. The fraud scheme that is similar to the ‘‘borrowing from Peter to pay Paul’’ scheme is
a. expense account fraud.
b. bribery.
c. lapping.
d. transaction fraud.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Sarat Sethi, a professional criminal, took a job as a mail room clerk at Benson & Abernathy and Company, a large department store. The mail room was an extremely hectic work environment consisting of a supervisor and 45 clerks. The clerks were responsible for handling promotional mailings, catalogs, and interoffice mail, as well as receiving and distributing a wide range of outside correspondence to various internal departments. One of Sethi’s jobs was to open cash receipts envelopes from customers making payments on their credit card balances. He separated the remittance advices (the bills) and the checks into two piles. He then sent remittance advices to the accounts receivable department, where the customer accounts were updated to reflect the payment. He sent the checks to the cash receipts department, where they were recorded in the cash journal and then deposited in the bank. Batch totals of cash received and accounts receivable updated were reconciled each night to ensure that everything was accounted for. Nevertheless, over a one month period Sethi managed to steal $100,000 in customer payments and then left the state without warning. The fraud occurred as follows: Because the name of the company was rather long, some people had adopted the habit of making out checks simply to Benson. Sethi had a false identification prepared in the name of John Benson. Whenever he came across a check made out to Benson, he would steal it along with the remittance advice. Sometimes people would even leave the payee section on the check blank. He also stole these checks. He would then modify the checks to make them payable to J. Benson and cash them. Because the accounts receivable department received no remittance advice, the end of day reconciliation with cash received disclosed no discrepancies. Required
a. This seems like a foolproof scheme. Why did Sethi limit himself to only one month’s activity before leaving town?
b. What controls could Benson & Abernathy implement to prevent this from happening again?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
While auditing the financial statements of Petty Corporation, the certified public accounting firm of True blue and Smith discovered that its client’s legal expense account was abnormally high. Further investigation of the records indicated the following: _ Since the beginning of the year, several disbursements totaling $15,000 had been made to the law firm of Swindle, Fox, and Kreip. _ Swindle, Fox, and Kreip were not Petty Corporation’s attorneys. _ A review of the canceled checks showed that they had been written and approved by Mary Boghas, the cash disbursements clerk. _ Boghas’s other duties included performing the end of month bank reconciliation. _ Subsequent investigation revealed that Swindle, Fox, and Kreip are representing Mary Boghas in an unrelated embezzlement case in which she is the defendant. The checks had been written in payment of her personal legal fees.
Required
a. What control procedures could Petty Corporation have employed to prevent this unauthorized use of cash? Classify each control procedure in accordance with the SAS 78/COSO framework (authorization, segregation of functions, supervision, and so on).
b. Comment on the ethical issues in this case.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Harold Jones, the financial aid officer at a small university, manages all aspects of the financial aid program. Jones receives requests for aid from students, determines whether the students meet the aid criteria, authorizes aid payments, notifies the applicants that their request has been either approved or denied, writes the financial aid checks on the account he controls, and requires that the students come to his office to receive the checks in person. For years, Jones has used his position of authority to perpetrate the following fraud. Jones encourages students who clearly will not qualify to apply for financial aid. Although the students do not expect aid, they apply on the off chance that it will be awarded. Jones modifies the financial information in the students’ applications so that it falls within the established guidelines for aid. He then approves aid and writes aid checks payable to the students. The students, however, are informed that aid was denied. Because the students expect no aid, the checks in Jones’s office are never collected. Jones forges the students’ signatures and cashes the checks.
Required
Identify the internal control procedures (classified per SAS 78/COSO) that could prevent or detect this fraud.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Gaurav Mirchandaniis is the warehouse manager for a large office supply wholesaler. Mirchandaniis receives two copies of the customer sales order from the sales department. He picks the goods from the shelves and sends them and one copy of the sales order to the shipping department. He then files the second copy in a temporary file. At the end of the day, Mirchandaniis retrieves the sales orders from the temporary file and updates the inventory subsidiary ledger from a terminal in his office. At that time, he identifies items that have fallen to low levels, selects a supplier, and prepares three copies of a purchase order. One copy is sent to the supplier, one is sent to the accounts payable clerk, and one is filed in the warehouse. When the goods arrive from the supplier, Mirchandaniis reviews the attached packing slip, counts and inspects the goods, places them on the shelves, and updates the inventory ledger to reflect the receipt. He then prepares a receiving report and sends it to the accounts payable department.
Required
a. Prepare a systems flowchart of the procedures previously described.
b. Identify any control problems in the system.
c. What sorts of fraud are possible in this system?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Bern Fly Rod Company is a small manufacturer of high quality graphite fly fishing rods. It sells its products to fly fishing shops throughout the United States and Canada. Bern began as a small company with four salespeople, all family members of the owner. Because of the high popularity and recent growth of fly fishing, Bern now employs a seasonal, nonfamily, sales force of 16. The salespeople travel around the country giving fly casting demonstrations of their new models to fly fishing shops. When the fishing season ends in October, the temporary salespeople are laid off until the following spring. Once the salesperson takes an order, it is sent directly to the cash disbursement department, where commission is calculated and promptly paid. Sales staff compensation is tied directly to their sales (orders taken) figures. The order is then sent to the billing department, where the sale is recorded, and finally to the shipping department for delivery to the customer. Sales staff are also compensated for travel expenses. Each week they submit a hard copy spreadsheet of expenses incurred to the cash disbursements clerk. The clerk immediately writes a check to the salesperson for the amount indicated in the spreadsheet. Bern’s financial statements for the December yearend reflect an unprecedented jump in sales for the month of October (35 percent higher than the same period in the previous year). On the other hand, the statements show a high rate of product returns in the months of November and December, which virtually offset the jump in sales. Furthermore, travel expenses for the period ending October 31 were disproportionately high compared with previous months.
Required
Analyze Bern’s situation and assess any potential internal control issues and exposures. Discuss some preventive measures this firm may wish to implement.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following facts relate to an actual embezzlement case. Someone stole more than $40,000 from a small company in less than two months. Your job is to study the following facts, try to figure out who was responsible for the theft, how it was perpetrated, and (most important) suggest ways to prevent something like this from happening again. Facts Location of company: a small town on the eastern shore of Maryland. Type of company: crabmeat processor, selling crabmeat to restaurants located in Maryland. Characters in the story (names are fictitious): _ John Smith, president and stockholder (husband of Susan). Susan Smith, vice president and stockholder (wife of John). Tommy Smith, shipping manager (son of John and Susan). Debbie Jones, office worker. She began working part time for the company six months before the theft. (At that time, she was a high school senior and was allowed to work afternoons through a school internship program.) Upon graduation from high school (several weeks before the theft was discovered), she began working full time. Although she is not a member of the family, the Smiths have been close friends with Debbie’s parents for more than 10 years.
Accounting Records
All accounting records are maintained on a microcomputer. The software being used consists of the following modules:
1. A general ledger system, which keeps track of all balances in the general ledger accounts and produces a trial balance at the end of each month.
2. A purchases program, which keeps track of purchases and maintains detailed records of accounts payable.
3. An accounts receivable program, which keeps track of sales and collections on account and maintains individual detailed balances of accounts receivable.
4. A payroll program. The modules are not integrated (that is, data are not transferred automatically between modules). At the end of the accounting period, summary information generated by the purchases, accounts receivable, and payroll programs must be entered into the general ledger program to update the accounts affected by these programs. Sales The crabmeat processing industry in this particular town was unusual in that selling prices for crabmeat were set at the beginning of the year and remained unchanged for the entire year. The company’s customers, all restaurants located within 100 miles of the plant, ordered the same quantity of crabmeat each week. Because prices for the crabmeat remained the same all year and the quantity ordered was always the same, the weekly invoice to each customer was always for the same dollar amount. Manual sales invoices were produced when orders were taken, although these manual invoices were not pre numbered. One copy of the manual invoice was attached to the order shipped to the customer. The other copy was used to enter the sales information into the computer. When the customer received the order, the customer would send a check to the company for the amount of the invoice. Monthly bills were not sent to customers unless the customer was behind in payments (that is, did not make a payment for the invoiced amount each week). Note: The industry was unique in another way: many of the companies paid their workers with cash each week (rather than by check). Therefore, it was not unusual for companies to request large sums of cash from the local banks. When Trouble Was Spotted Shortly after the May 30 trial balance was run, Susan began analyzing the balances in the various accounts. The balance in the cash account agreed with the cash balance she obtained from a reconciliation of the company’s bank account. However, the balance in the accounts receivable control account in the general ledger did not agree with the total of the accounts receivable subsidiary ledger (which shows a detail of the balances owed by each customer). The difference was not very large, but the balances should be in 100 percent agreement. At this point, Susan hired a fraud auditor to help her locate the problem. In reviewing the computerized accounts receivable subsidiary ledger, the auditor noticed the following: 1. The summary totals from this report were not the totals that were entered into the general ledger program at month end. Different amounts had been entered. No one could explain why this had happened. 2. Some sheets in the computer listing had been ripped apart at the bottom. (In other words, the listing of the individual accounts receivable balances was not a continuous list but had been split at several points.) 3. When an adding machine tape of the individual account balances was run, the individual balances did not add up to the total at the bottom of the report. Susan concluded that the accounts receivable program was not running properly. The auditor’s recommendation was that an effort be made to find out why the accounts receivable control account and the summary totals per the accounts receivable subsidiary ledger were not in agreement and why there were problems with the accounts receivable listing. Because the accounts receivable subsidiary and accounts receivable control account in the general ledger had been in agreement at the end of April, the effort should begin with the April ending balances for each customer by manually updating all of the accounts. The manually adjusted May 30 balances should then be compared with the computer generated balances and any differences investigated. After doing this, Susan and John found several differences. The largest difference was the following: Although they found the manual sales invoice for Sale 2, Susan and John concluded (based on the computer records) that Sale 2 did not take place. The auditor was not sure and recommended that they call this customer and ask him the following: 1. Did he receive this order?
2. Did he receive an invoice for it?
3. Did he pay for the order?
4. If so, did he have a copy of his canceled check?
Although John thought that this would be a waste of time, he called the customer. He received an affirmative answer to all of his questions. In addition, he found that the customer’s check was stamped on the back with an address stamp giving only the company’s name and city rather than the usual ‘‘for deposit only’’ company stamp. When questioned, Debbie said that she sometimes used this stamp. Right after this question, Debbie, who was sitting nearby at the computer, called Susan to the computer and showed her the customer’s account. She said that the payment for $5,000 was in fact recorded in the customer’s account. The payments were listed on the computer screen like this:
|
Amount
|
Date of Payment
|
|
$5,000
|
May 3
|
|
$5,000
|
May 17
|
|
$5,000
|
May 23
|
|
$5,000
|
May 10
|
The auditor questioned the order of the payments—why was a check supposedly received on May 10 entered in the computer after checks received on May 17 and 23? About 30 seconds later, the computer malfunctioned and the accounts receivable file was lost. Every effort to retrieve the file gave the message ‘‘file not found.’’ About five minutes later, Debbie presented Susan with a copy of a bank deposit ticket dated May 10 with several checks listed on it, including the check that the customer said had been sent to the company. The deposit ticket, however, was not stamped by the bank (which would have verified that the deposit had been received by the bank) and did not add up to the total at the bottom of the ticket (it was off by 20 cents). At this point, being very suspicious, the auditor gathered all of the documents he could and left the company to work on the problem at home, away from any potential suspects. He received a call from Susan about four hours later saying that she felt much better. She and Debbie had gone to RadioShack (the maker of their computer program) and RadioShack had confirmed Susan’s conclusion that the computer program was malfunctioning. She and Debbie were planning to work all weekend reentering transactions into the computer. She said that everything looked fine and not to waste more time and expense working on the problem. The auditor felt differently. How do you feel?
|
Performance of Key Functions by Individual(s)
|
| |
Individual(s) Performing Task
|
| |
Most of the Time
|
Sometimes
|
|
1. Receiving order from customers
|
John
|
All others
|
|
2. Overseeing production of crabmeat
|
John or Tommy
|
—
|
|
3. Handling shipping
|
Tommy
|
John
|
|
4. Billing customers (entering sales into accounts receivable program)
|
Debbie
|
Susan
|
|
5. Opening mail
|
John
|
All others
|
|
6. Preparing bank deposit tickets and making bank deposits
|
Susan or Debbie
|
All others
|
|
7. Recording receipt of cash and checks (entering collections of accounts receivable into accounts receivable program)
|
Debbie
|
Susan
|
|
8. Preparing checks (payroll checks and payments of accounts payable)
|
Susan or Debbie
|
—
|
|
9. Signing checks
|
John
|
—
|
|
10. Preparing bank reconciliations
|
John
|
—
|
|
11. Preparing daily sales reports showing sales by type of product
|
Susan
|
—
|
|
12. Summarizing daily sales reports to obtain monthly sales report by type of product
|
Susan or Debbie
|
—
|
|
13. Running summaries of AR program, AP program, and payroll program at month end and inputting summaries into GL program
|
Susan or Debbie
|
—
|
|
14. Analyzing trial balance at month end and analyzing open balances in accounts receivable and accounts payable
|
Susan
|
—
|
|
CUSTOMER ACCOUNT PER MANUAL RECONSTRUCTION
|
|
Dr.
|
Cr.
|
|
Sale 1
|
5,000
|
Pmt. #1
|
5,000
|
|
Sale 2
|
5,000
|
Pmt. #2
|
5,000
|
|
Sale 3
|
5,000
|
Pmt. #3
|
5,000
|
|
Sale 4
|
5,000
|
|
|
|
Ending Balance
|
5,000
|
|
|
|
CUSTOMER ACCOUNT PER MANUAL RECONSTRUCTION
|
|
Dr.
|
Cr.
|
|
Sale 1
|
5,000
|
Pmt. #1
|
5,000
|
|
Sale 2
|
5,000
|
Pmt. #2
|
5,000
|
|
Sale 3
|
5,000
|
Pmt. #3
|
5,000
|
|
Ending balance
|
0
|
|
|
Required
a. If you were asked to help this company, could you conclude from the evidence presented that embezzlement took place? What would you do next?
b. Who do you think was the embezzler?
c. How was the embezzlement accomplished?
d. What improvements would you recommend in internal control to prevent this from happening again? In answering this question, try to identify at least one suggestion from each of the six classes of internal control activities discussed in this chapter (in the Control Activities section): transaction authorization, segregation of duties, supervision, accounting records, access control, and independent verification.
e. Would the fact that the records were maintained on a microcomputer aid in this embezzlement scheme?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Which document is NOT prepared by the sales department?
a. packing slip
b. shipping notice
c. bill of lading
d. stock release
2. Which document triggers the update of the inventory subsidiary ledger?
a. bill of lading
b. stock release
c. sales order
d. shipping notice
3. Which function should the billing department NOT perform?
a. record the sales in the sales journal
b. send the ledger copy of the sales order to accounts receivable
c. send the stock release document and the shipping notice to the billing department as proof of shipment
d. send the stock release document to inventory control
4. When will a credit check approval most likely require specific authorization by the credit department?
a. when verifying that the current transaction does not exceed the customer’s credit limit
b. when verifying that the current transaction is with a valid customer
c. when a valid customer places a materially large order
d. when a valid customer returns goods
5. Which type of control is considered a compensating control?
a. segregation of duties
b. access control
c. supervision
d. accounting records
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Which of the following is NOT an independent verification control?
a. The shipping department verifies that the goods sent from the warehouse are correct in type and quantity.
b. General ledger clerks reconcile journal vouchers that were independently prepared in various departments.
c. The use of pre numbered sales orders.
d. The billing department reconciles the shipping notice with the sales invoice to ensure that customers are billed for only the quantities shipped.
2. Which function or department below records the decrease in inventory due to a sale?
a. warehouse
b. sales department
c. billing department
d. inventory control
3. Which situation indicates a weak internal control structure?
a. the AR clerk authorizes the write off of bad debts
b. the record keeping clerk maintains both AR and AP subsidiary ledgers
c. the inventory control clerk authorizes inventory purchases
d. the AR clerk prepares customer statements every month
4. The bill of lading is prepared by the
a. sales clerk.
b. warehouse clerk.
c. shipping clerk.
d. billing clerk.
5. Which of following functions should be segregated?
a. opening the mail and recording cash receipts in the journal
b. authorizing credit and determining reorder quantities
c. shipping goods and preparing the bill of lading
d. providing information on inventory levels and reconciling the bank statement
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Describe the procedures, documents, and departments involved when insufficient inventory is available to fill a customer’s approved order.
Which, if any, of the following situations represent improper segregation of functions?
a. The billing department prepares the customers’ invoices, and the accounts receivable department posts to the customers’ accounts.
b. The sales department approves sales credit memos as the result of product returns, and subsequent adjustments to the customer accounts are performed by the accounts receivable department.
c. The shipping department ships goods that have been retrieved from stock by warehouse personnel.
d. The general accounting department posts to the general ledger accounts after receiving journal vouchers that are prepared by the billing department.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Internal Controls
Jem Clothes, Inc., is a 25 store chain concentrated in the northeastern United States that sells ready to wear clothes for young men and women. Each store has a fulltime manager and an assistant manager, both of whom are paid a salary. The cashiers and sales personnel are typically young people working part time who are paid an hourly wage plus a commission based on sales volume. The accompanying flowchart for Problem 5 depicts the flow of a sales transaction through the organization of a typical store. The company uses unsophisticated cash registers with four part sales invoices to record each transaction. These sales invoices are used regardless of the payment type (cash, check, or bank card). On the sales floor, the salesperson manually records his or her employee number and the transaction (clothes, class, description, quantity, and unit price), totals the sales invoice, calculates the discount when appropriate, calculates the sales tax, and prepares the grand total. The salesperson then gives the sales invoice to the cashier, retaining one copy in the sales book. The cashier reviews the invoice and inputs the sale. The cash register mechanically validates the invoice, automatically assigning a consecutive number to the transaction. The cashier is also responsible for getting credit approval on charge sales and approving sales paid by check. The cashier gives one copy of the invoice to the customer and retains the second copy as a store copy and the third for a bank card, if a deposit is needed. Returns are handled in exactly the reverse manner, with the cashier issuing a return slip. At the end of each day, the cashier sequentially orders the sales invoices and takes cash register totals for cash, bank card, and check sales, and cash and bank card returns. These totals are reconciled by the assistant manager to the cash register tapes, the total of the consecutively numbered sales invoices, and the return slips. The assistant manager prepares a daily reconciliation report for the store manager’s review. The manager reviews cash, check, and bank card sales and then prepares the daily bank deposit (bank card sales invoices are included in the deposit). The manager makes the deposit at the bank and files the validated deposit slip. The cash register tapes, sales invoices, and return slips are forwarded daily to the central data processing department at corporate headquarters for processing. The data processing department returns a weekly sales and commission activity report to the manager for review.
Required
a. Identify six strengths in the Jem Clothes system for controlling sales transactions.
b. For each strength identified, explain what problem(s) Jem Clothes has avoided by incorporating the strength in the system for controlling sales transactions.
Use the following format in preparing your answer.
1. Strength
2. Problem(s) Avoided
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Spice Is Right was established in 1990 in Boston where they began importing exotic spices and cooking sauces from India and China. They distribute these specialty foods to ethnic food shops, cafes, and restaurants across the country. In addition to their Boston headquarters and warehouse, the company has a distribution center in Elizabeth, New Jersey. Spice Is Right currently employs over 100 people, has dozens of suppliers, and trades in hundreds of ethnic and exotic foods from all over the world. Recently Spice Is Right has been receiving complaints from customers and suppliers about billing, shipping, and payment errors. Management believes that these complaints stem, in part, from an antiquated computer system. Spice’s current information system includes manual procedures supported by independent (non networked) PCs in each department, which cannot communicate with each other. Document flow between the departments is entirely in hard copy form. The following is a description of their revenue cycle at the Boston headquarters office. Sales Procedures Spice Is Right’s revenue cycle begins when a customer places an order with a sales representative by phone or fax. A sales department employee enters the customer order into a standard sales order format using a word processor installed on a PC to produces six documents: three copies of sales orders, a stock release, a shipping notice, and a packing slip. The accounting department receives a copy of the sales order, the warehouse receives the stock release and a copy of the sales order, and the shipping department receives a shipping notice and packing slip. The sales clerk files a copy of the sales order in the department. Upon receipt of the sales order, the accounting department clerk manually prepares an invoice and sends it to the customer. Using data from the sales order the clerk then enters the sale in the department PC and records the sale in the sales journal and in the AR subsidiary ledger. At the end of the day the clerk prepares a hard copy sales journal voucher, which is sent to the general ledger department. The warehouse receives a copy of the sales order and stock release. A warehouse employee picks the product and sends it to the shipping department along with the stock release. A warehouse clerk updates the inventory records on the warehouse PC and files the sales order in the warehouse. At the end of the day the clerk prepares a hard copy AR account summary and sends it to the general ledger department. The shipping department receives a shipping notice and packing slip from the sales department. The shipping notice is filed. Upon receipt of the stock release, the shipping clerk prepares the two copies of a bill of lading using a word processor. The bills of lading and the packing slip are sent with the product to the carrier. The clerk then files the stock release in the department. The general ledger clerk posts the journal voucher and inventory summary to the general ledger, which is stored on the department PC, the clerk then files these documents in the general ledger department. Cash Receipts Procedure The mail room has five employees who open and sort all mail. Each employee has two bins, one for remittance advices and one for checks. Before separating the two documents and putting them in their respective bins, the clerks reconcile the amounts on the checks and remittance advices. The remittance advices are sent to the accounting department where a clerk records each remittance advice on a remittance list. The remittance list is then sent to the cash receipts department. Using the remittance advices, the accounting clerk updates the customer accounts receivable on the department PC and files the advice in the department. At the end of the day the clerk prepares an account summery on the PC. A hard copy of the summary is sent to the general ledger department. The mail room clerk sends the checks to the cash receipts department, where a clerk endorses each check with the words ‘‘For Deposit Only.’’ Next the clerk reconciles the checks with the remittance list and records the cash receipts in the cash receipts journal on the department PC. Finally, the clerk prepares a deposit slip and sends it and the checks to the bank. The general ledger posts the accounts receivable summary to general ledger and files it in the general ledger department.
Required
a. Create a data flow diagram of the current system.
b. Create a system flowchart of the existing system.
c. Identify the internal control weaknesses in the system. Use the six categories of physical control activities specified in SAS 78/COSO for your analysis.
d. Prepare a system flowchart of a redesigned computer based system that resolves the control weaknesses that you identified. Explain your solution.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Walker Books, Inc., is the fastest growing book distributor in the United States. Established in 1981 in Palo Alto, California, Walker Books was originally a side project of founder and current president Curtis Walker, who at the time was employed by a local law firm. Because reading was much more than just a hobby of his, he decided to use some of his savings to buy an abandoned restaurant and convert it into a neighborhood bookstore, mainly selling used books that were donated and obtained from flea markets. When the doors first opened, Walker’s wife, Lauren, was the only employee during the week and Curtis worked weekends. At the end of the first fiscal year, Walker Books had grossed $20,000 in sales. As the years passed, Curtis Walker quit the law firm and began concentrating fully on his bookstore. More employees were hired, more books were traded in, and more sales were attained each year that passed. During the mid 1990s, however, Walker was faced with two problems: many large, upscale bookstores were being built in the area, and the use of the Internet for finding and ordering books was becoming cheaper and more popular for current customers. In 1995, Walker’s sales started to decline. Deciding to take a risk because of the newfound competition, he closed his doors to the neighborhood, invested more money to expand the current property, and transformed his company from simply selling used books to being a distributor of new books. His business model was to obtain books from publishers at a discount, store them in his warehouse, and resell them to large bookstore chains. Walker Books, Inc., has rapidly become one of the largest book distributors in the country. Although they are still at their original location in Palo Alto, California, they distribute books to all 50 states and because of that, the company now sees gross sales of about $105,000,000 per year. When Mr. Walker is asked about his fondest memory, he always responds that he will never forget how the little bookstore, with two employees, has expanded to now have more than 145 employees. Under his current business model, all of Walker’s customers are large chain bookstores who themselves see many millions of dollars in revenue per year. Some of these customers, however, are now experiencing problems with Walker Books that threaten their business relationship. Such problems as books being ordered but not sent, poor inventory management by Walker causing stock outs, and the inability of Walker to provide legitimate documentation of transactions have become common. One potential source of these problems rests with Walker’s antiquated accounting system, which is a combination of manual procedures supported by stand alone PC work stations. These computers are not networked and cannot share data between departments. All interdepartmental communication takes place through hardcopy documents. You have been hired as an independent expert to express an opinion on the appropriateness of Walker Books’ business processes and internal controls. The revenue cycle is described below: Revenue Cycle Sales Order Processing System The sales order process begins when a customer calls in his or her order to an experienced sales representative, who then manually transcribes the necessary customer information, ISBN, and quantity and type of books requested onto a formal customer order document. Because of recent problems the company has been having with uncollectable accounts, Walker Books has set up a computer terminal in the department for the sales representative to check the customer’s credit with an online credit bureau. If the credit rating falls below the sales representative’s expectations, the transaction is disallowed; if the sales representative concludes, however, that the credit rating is acceptable, he proceeds to manually prepare five hard copies of the sales order. Once prepared, one copy of the sales order is sent over to the warehouse to be used as the stock release. Another copy of the sales order, the shipping notice, is sent to the shipping department. Two of the copies (invoice and ledger copies) are sent to the billing department, and the final copy of the sales order is stapled to the corresponding customer order, which is then filed in the sales department. Once the documents are sent to their designated locations, the sales representative manually updates the hard copy sales journal to record the transaction. At the end of the day the sales representative manually prepares a hard copy journal voucher and sends it to the general ledger department. When the warehouse clerk receives the stock release copy, he reviews the document for clerical accuracy. He then manually records the appropriate decrease in inventory in the hard copy inventory subsidiary records that are maintained in the warehouse. Once recorded, he picks the goods and sends them and the stock release document to the shipping department. At the end of day, the warehouse clerk prepares a hard copy account summary that he sends to the general ledger department. The shipping clerk receives the shipping notice from the sales department and the stock release and goods from the warehouse. The clerk reconciles the documents with the books being shipped and, if all is correct, the clerk creates a digital bill of lading record using the shipping department PC. The computer automatically prints out a hard copy packing slip and bill of lading, which accompany the goods to the carrier. The shipping notice is then sent to the billing department and the stock release is filed in the shipping department. The billing department clerk receives the customer invoice and ledger copy of the sales order from the sales department and the shipping notice from the shipping department. The billing clerk then adds prices and other charges to the invoice, which she sends to the customer. The clerk files the shipping notice in the department and sends the ledger copy to the accounts receivable department. The clerk in the AR department receives ledger copy of the sales order and uses it to manually update the hard copy AR subsidiary ledger. The clerk then files the ledger copy in the department. At the end of day, the AR clerk prepares an account summary and sends it to the general ledger department. Upon the receipt of the journal vouchers and the AR summary, the general ledger department clerk reconciles the documents and updates the appropriate control accounts in the digital general ledger via his computer terminal. The documents are then filed in the department. Cash Receipts System The cash receipts process begins in the mail room, which is staffed with many employees who have the responsibility of receiving and opening both routine mail (catalogs, advertisements) and mail containing customer payments. Each mail clerk opens the envelope and separates the check and remittance advice. The clerk reconciles the two and then manually adds each receipt to a common remittance list. When all customer payments have been so processed, the finished remittance lists and the associated checks are sent to the cash receipts department. The remittance advices are sent to the accounts receivable department. The cash receipts clerk receives the checks and the remittance list, which he reconciles. At that time he endorses each check ‘‘For Deposit Only’’ and manually records it in the hard copy cash receipts journal. He then sends the signed checks and remittance list to the accounts receivable department. At the end of day the clerk manually prepares a journal voucher summarizing the cash receipts and sends it to the general ledger department. The AR clerk receives the remittance advices, the checks, and the remittance list. He reconciles them and manually posts the amounts received to the customer accounts in the hard copy AR subsidiary ledger. The clerk files the remittance advices and the remittance list in the department. He next prepares a deposit slip and sends it, along with the checks, to the bank. Finally, the clerk manually prepares a hard copy account summary, which he sends to the general ledger department. The general ledger department receives the account summary and the journal voucher from the AR department and cash receipts, respectively. The clerk reviews the two documents and updates the control accounts in the digital general ledger via the department PC. Finally, the clerk files the account summary and journal voucher in the department. Required
a. Create a data flow diagram of the current system.
b. Create a system flowchart of the existing system.
c. Analyze the internal control weaknesses in the system. Model your response according to the six categories of physical control activities specified in SAS 78/COSO.
d. Prepare a system flowchart of a redesigned computer based system that resolves the control weaknesses you identified. Explain your solution.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A&V Safety, Inc., is a growing company specializing in the sales of safety equipment to commercial entities. It currently employs 200 full time employees, all of whom work out of their headquarters in San Diego, California. During the summer, the company expands to include about 10 summer interns who are delegated smaller jobs and other errands. A&V currently competes with Office Safety, Inc., and X Safe, who lead the industry. Suppliers for A&V include Halotron Extinguishers, Kadelite, and Exit Signs, Inc. A&V attempts to maintain inventory levels sufficient to service two weeks of sales. This level has shown to avoid stock outs, and the excess inventory is held in a warehouse in a suburb of San Diego. A&V has a legacy accounting system that employs a combination of manual procedures supported by standalone PCs in the various departments. Recently they have experienced business inefficiencies that have been linked to their antiquated accounting system. You have been retained by A&V management to review their procedures for compliance with the Sarbanes Oxley Act and to provide recommendations for improvement. The A&V expenditure cycle is presented in the following paragraphs. Revenue Cycle A&V Safety, Inc., has one sales department at its headquarters in San Diego. Sales representatives visit current and potential clients in sales districts and all customer orders go through a sales representative. The orders are faxed, mailed, or delivered in person to the sales department by the representative at the end of each day. In the sales department a sales clerk receives the orders and manually prepares a three part hard copy sales order. The clerk sends one sales order copy to the billing department, the stock release copy to the warehouse, and the packing slip copy to the shipping department. The original customer order is filed in the sales department. Upon receipt of the sales order, the billing clerk records the sale in the digital sales journal using the department PC. The clerk then prints a hard copy invoice, which is sent to the customer. Next, the clerk sends the sales order to the accounts receivable department for further processing. At the end of the day the clerk prints a hard copy sales journal voucher from the PC and sends it to the general ledger. The warehousing clerk uses the stock release copy to pick the goods from the shelves and then updates the digital inventory subsidiary ledger using the warehouse PC. Next the clerk sends the good and the stock release to the shipping department. At the end of the business day the clerk prints an inventory summary from the PC and sends it to the general ledger department. The shipping clerk reconciles the packing slip sent from the sales department with the stock release and goods received from the warehouse. If all is correct, the clerk manually prepares a hard copy bill of lading. He then attaches the packing slip and bill of lading to the goods, which go to the carrier for delivery to the customer. Finally, the clerk files the stock release in the department. The accounts receivable clerk receives the sales order from the billing department and uses it to update the digital AR sub ledger from the department PC. The sales order is then filed in the department. At the end of the day the clerk prints an AR summary from the PC and sends it to the general ledger department. Customer payments come into the mail room where mail clerks open the envelopes and send the checks and remittance advices to the accounts payable department. The accounts receivable clerk reconciles the remittance advice with the check and updates the customer’s account in the digital accounts receivable subsidiary ledger. The clerk then files the remittance advices in the department and sends the checks to the cash receipts department. As previously mentioned, at the end of the day the accounts receivable clerk prints a hard copy accounts receivable summary from the department PC and sends it to the general ledger department. The cash receipt clerk receives the checks and records the payments in the digital cash receipts journal. The clerk then manually prepares a hard copy deposit slip and sends the checks and deposit slip to the bank. At the end of the day the clerk prints a cash receipt journal voucher from the department PC and sends it to the general ledger department. The general ledger clerk receives the sales journal voucher, cash receipts journal voucher, the accounts receivable summary, and the inventory summary. The clerk reconciles these documents and posts to the appropriate control accounts in the digital general ledger from the department PC. Finally, the general ledger clerk files the summaries and journal vouchers in the department. Required
a. Create a data flow diagram of the current system.
b. Create a system flowchart of the existing system.
c. Identify the internal control weaknesses in the system. Model your response according to the six categories of physical control activities specified in SAS 78/COSO.
d. Prepare a system flowchart of a redesigned computer based system that resolves the control weaknesses you identified. Explain your solution.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Premier Sports Memorabilia is a medium sized, rapidly growing online and catalogue based retailer centered in Brooklyn, New York. The company was founded in 1990 and specializes in providing its customers with authentic yet affordable sports memorabilia from their favorite players and teams, past and present. Traditionally the company’s customers were located in the northeast region of the United States. Recently, however, Premier launched a successful ad campaign to expand its customer base. This has increased sales, which has in turn placed a strain on the organization’s operational resources. The company currently employs 205 employees who are spread out among its three warehouses and two offices in the tri state area. The firm purchases from a large number of manufacturers and memorabilia dealers around the country and is always looking for additional contacts that have new or rare items to offer. The company has a computer network installed, which, until recently, has served it well. The firm is now, however, experiencing operational inefficiencies and accounting errors. Your firm has been hired to evaluate Premier’s business processes and internal controls. The revenue cycle is described in the following paragraphs. Premier’s revenue process is initiated when a customer places an order either online, by mail, or through a telephone representative. The order is then manually entered into the computer system for mail or telephone orders, while online orders are automatically entered upon arrival. When the customer order is entered, the system automatically performs an online credit check. If credit is approved, the sales process continues. If credit is denied, the process ends and the customer is notified of the automatic rejection. For approved order, the clerk manually prepares four hard copies of each sales order. One copy is entered into the terminal in the sales department and filed. The approved sale is automatically posted to the digital sales journal. A second copy is sent to the billing department, where it is further processed. A third copy is sent to the warehouse. A final copy is sent to the customer as a receipt stating that the order has been received and processed. At the warehouse, the sales order is used as a stock release, authorizing a warehouse clerk to physically pick the requested items from the shelves. The clerk then manually prepares a bill of lading and packing slip, which accompany the goods to the carrier. The warehouse clerk then accesses the computer terminal and creates a digital shipping notice for the billing department. Finally, the clerk files the stock release hard copy in the warehouse. From a terminal, the billing department clerk reconciles the hard copy sales order and the digital shipping notice and prints two hard copies of an invoice. One copy is sent to the customer as a bill and the other is sent to the accounts receivable department. The clerk then files the sales order copy in the department. Upon receipt of the hard copy invoice, the accounts receivable clerk creates a digital record in the accounts receivable subsidiary ledger from his terminal. The clerk then files the invoice copy in the department. Customer payments and remittance advices come into the mail room. A clerk separates the documents and sends the remittance advice to accounts receivable and the checks to the cash receipts department. Upon receipt of the remittance advice, the accounts receivable clerk accesses the customer’s account in the accounts receivable subsidiary ledger from a terminal and adjusts the balance accordingly. The clerk files the remittance advices in the department. The cash receipts clerk receives the checks and posts them to the cash receipts journal from her terminal. The clerk then manually prepares a hard copy deposit slip and sends it with the cash to the bank. Finally, at the end of each day the system prepares batch totals of all sales and cash receipts transactions and posts them automatically to the control accounts in the digital general ledger.
Required
a. Create a data flow diagram of the current system.
b. Create a system flowchart of the existing system.
c. Analyze the internal control weaknesses in the system. Model your response according to the six categories of physical control activities specified in SAS 78/COSO.
d. Prepare a system flowchart of a redesigned computer based system that resolves the control weaknesses you identified. Explain your solution.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Hayes Company
Inadequate inventories could result in temporary shutdowns of production. Because of its close proximity to suppliers,
Hayes Company maintains an ending inventory of raw materials equal to 10% of the next quarter’s production requirements.
The manufacture of each Kitchen Mate requires 2 pounds of raw materials, and the expected cost per pound is $4.
Assume that the desired ending direct materials amount is 1,020 pounds for the fourth quarter of 2011.
Prepare a Direct Materials Budget.
|
HAYES COMPANY Sales Budget For the Year Ending December 31,2011
|
|
|
Quarter
|
|
|
|
1
|
2
|
3
|
4
|
Year
|
|
Expected unit sales
|
3,000
|
3,500
|
4,000
|
4,500
|
15,000
|
|
Unit Selling price
|
×$60
|
×$60
|
×$60
|
×$60
|
×$60
|
|
Total sales
|
$180,000
|
$210,000
|
$240,000
|
$270,000
|
$900,000
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Soriano Company is preparing its master budget for 2011. Relevant data pertaining to its sales, production, and direct materials budgets are as follows: Sales: Sales for the year are expected to total 1,200,000 units. Quarterly sales are 20%, 25%, 30%, and 25% respectively. The sales price is expected to be $50 per unit for the first three quarters and $55 per unit beginning in the fourth quarter. Sales in the first quarter of 2012 are expected to be 10% higher than the budgeted sales for the first quarter of 2011.Production: Management desires to maintain ending finished goods inventories at 25% of next quarter’s budgeted sales volume. Direct materials: Each unit requires 3 pounds of raw materials at a cost of $5 per pound. Management desires to maintain raw materials inventories at 5% of the next quarter’s production requirements. Assume the production requirements for the first quarter of 2012 are 810,000 pounds.
Prepare the sales, production, and direct materials budgets by quarters for 2011.
Prepare the sales, production, and direct materials budgets by quarters for 2011.
Prepare the sales, production, and direct materials budgets by quarters for 2011.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Direct labor hours are determined from the production budget. At Hayes Company, two hours of direct labor are required to produce each unit of finished goods. The anticipated hourly wage rate is $10.
|
HAYES COMPANY Sales Budget For the Year Ending December 31,2011
|
|
|
Quarter
|
|
|
|
1
|
2
|
3
|
4
|
Year
|
|
Units to be produced
|
3,100
|
3,600
|
4,100
|
4,600
|
15,000
|
|
Direct labor time(hours) per unit
|
×2
|
×2
|
×2
|
×2
|
×$60
|
|
Total required direct labor hours
|
6,200
|
7,200
|
8,200
|
9,200
|
|
|
Direct labor cost per hour
|
×$10
|
×$10
|
×$10
|
×$10
|
|
Shows the expected manufacturing overhead costs for the budget period.
Distinguishes between fixed and variable overhead costs.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Hayes Company expects variable costs to fluctuate with production volume on the basis of the following rates per direct labor hour: indirect materials $1.00, indirect labor $1.40, utilities $0.40, and maintenance $0.20. Thus, for the 6,200 direct labor hours to produce 3,100 units, budgeted indirect materials are $6,200 (6,200 x $1), and budgeted indirect labor is $8,680 (6,200 x $1.40). Hayes also recognizes that some maintenance is fixed. The amounts reported for fixed costs are assumed. Prepare a Manufacturing Overhead Budget.
|
HAYES COMPANY Sales Budget For the Year Ending December 31,2011
|
|
|
Quarter
|
|
|
|
1
|
2
|
3
|
4
|
Year
|
|
Expected unit sales
|
3,000
|
3,500
|
4,000
|
4,500
|
15,000
|
|
Unit Selling price
|
×$60
|
×$60
|
×$60
|
×$60
|
×$60
|
|
Total sales
|
$180,000
|
$210,000
|
$240,000
|
$270,000
|
$900,000
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Hayes Company Assumptions
1. The January 1, 2011, cash balance is expected to be $38,000. Hayes wishes to maintain a balance of at least $15,000.
2. Sales (Illustration 9 3): 60% are collected in the quarter sold and 40% are collected in the following quarter. Accounts receivable of $60,000 at December 31, 2010, are expected to be collected in full in the first quarter of 2011.
3. Short term investments are expected to be sold for $2,000 cash in the first quarter.
4. Direct materials (Illustration 9 7): 50% are paid in the quarter purchased and 50% are paid in the following quarter. Accounts payable of $10,600 at December 31, 2010, are expected to be paid in full in the first quarter of 2011.
5. Direct labor (Illustration 9 9): 100% is paid in the quarter incurred.
6. Manufacturing overhead (Illustration 9 10) and selling and administrative expenses (Illustration 9 11): All items except depreciation are paid in the quarter incurred.
7. Management plans to purchase a truck in the second quarter for $10,000 cash.
8. Hayes makes equal quarterly payments of its estimated annual income taxes.
9. Loans are repaid in the earliest quarter in which there is sufficient cash (that is, when the cash on hand exceeds the $15,000 minimum required balance).
Prepare a schedule of collections from customers.
Prepare a schedule of cash payments for direct materials.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Budget and actual sales data for the Kitchen Mate product in the first and second quarters of 2011 are as follows.
|
Sales
|
First Quarter
|
Second Quarter
|
Total
|
|
Budgeted
|
$180,000
|
$210,000
|
$390,000
|
|
Actual
|
179,000
|
199,500
|
378,500
|
|
Difference
|
$1,000
|
$10,500
|
$11,500
|
Compute Sales budget report for Hayes Company’s first quarter and Budget report for the second quarter.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Analyzing the budget data for these costs at 10,000 units, you arrive at the following per unit results.
|
Item
|
Total Cost
|
Per Unit
|
|
Indirect Materials
|
$250,000
|
$25
|
|
Indirect Labor
|
260,000
|
26
|
|
Utilities
|
190,000
|
19
|
|
|
$700,000
|
$70
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Midwest Division operates as a profit center. It reports the following for the year:
|
|
Budgeted
|
Actual
|
|
Sales
|
$1,500,000
|
$1,700,000
|
|
Variable Costs
|
700,000
|
800,000
|
|
Controllable fixed costs
|
400,000
|
400,000
|
|
Non Controllable fixed costs
|
200,000
|
200,000
|
Prepare a responsibility report for December 31, 2011.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The service division of Metro Industries reported the following results for 2011.
|
Sales
|
$400,000
|
|
Variable costs
|
320,000
|
|
Controllable fixed costs
|
40,800
|
|
Average operating assets
|
280,000
|
Management is considering the following independent courses of action in 2012 in order to maximize the return on investment.
1. Reduce average operating assets by $80,000, with no change in controllable margin.
2. Increase sales $80,000, with no change in the contribution margin percentage.
a. Compute controllable margin and the return on investment for 2011.
b. Compute controllable margin and the expected return on investment.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
To produce Tracker, operating assets will have to increase $2,000,000. Tracker is expected to generate an additional $260,000 of controllable margin. How will the Tracker effect ROI?
|
|
Without tracker
|
Tracker
|
With Tracker
|
|
Controllable margin
|
$1,000,000
|
$260,000
|
$1,260,000
|
|
Average operating assets
|
$5,000,000
|
$2,000,000
|
$7,000,000
|
The problem with this ROI analysis is that it ignores the minimum rate of return on a company’s operating assets.
To evaluate performance using minimum rate of return, companies use the residual income approach. Residual income is the income that remains after subtracting from the controllable margin the minimum rate of return on a company’s average operating assets.
How does residual income change as the additional investment is made?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
To produce Tracker, the Electronics Division used $2,000,000 of average operating assets to generate $260,000 of controllable margin. Assume a different division produced a product called Sea Dog, which used $4,000,000 to generate $460,000 of controllable margin.
|
|
Tracker
|
Sea Dog
|
|
Controllable margin
|
$260,000
|
$460,000
|
|
Average operating assets *10%
|
200,000
|
400,000
|
Sea Dog required twice as many operating assets to achieve the same level of residual income.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Which statement is NOT true?
a. Business activities begin with the acquisition of materials, property, and labor in exchange for cash.
b. The conversion cycle includes the task of determining raw materials requirements.
c. Manufacturing firms have a conversion cycle but retail firms do not.
d. A payroll check is an example of a product document of the payroll system.
e. A journal voucher is actually a special source document.
A documentation tool that depicts the physical flow of information relating to a particular transaction through an organization is a
a. system flowchart.
b. program flowchart.
c. decision table.
d. work distribution analysis.
e. systems survey.
Sequential file processing will not permit a. data to be edited on a separate computer run.
b. the use of a database structure.
c. data to be edited in an offline mode.
d. batch processing to be initiated from a terminal.
e. data to be edited on a real time basis.
The production subsystem of the conversion cycle includes all of the following EXCEPT
a. determining raw materials requirements.
b. make or buy decisions on component parts.
c. release of raw materials into production.
d. scheduling the goods to be produced.
Which of the following files is a temporary file?
a. transaction file
b. master file
c. reference file
d. none of the above
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A documentation tool used to represent the logical elements of a system is a(n)
a. programming flowchart.
b. entity relationship diagram.
c. system flowchart.
d. data flow diagram.
Which of the following is NOT an advantage of real time processing files over batch processing?
a. shorter transaction processing time
b. reduction of inventory stocks
c. improved customer service
d. all are advantages
Which statement is NOT correct?
a. Legacy systems may process financially significant transactions.
b. Some legacy systems use database technology.
c. Mainframes are exclusive to legacy systems, while modern systems use only the client server model.
d. All the above are true.
Which statement is NOT correct?
a. Indexed random files are dispersed throughout the storage device without regard for physical proximity with related records.
b. Indexed random files use disk storage space efficiently.
c. Indexed random files are efficient when processing a large portion of a file at one time.
d. Indexed random files are easy to maintain in terms of adding records.
Which statement is NOT correct? The indexed sequential access method
a. is used for very large files that need both direct access and batch processing.
b. may use an overflow area for records.
c. provides an exact physical address for each record.
d. is appropriate for files that require few insertions or deletions.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Which statement is true about a hashing structure?
a. The same address could be calculated for two records.
b. Storage space is used efficiently.
c. Records cannot be accessed rapidly.
d. A separate index is required.
In a hashing structure
a. two records can be stored at the same address.
b. pointers are used to indicate the location of all records.
c. pointers are used to indicate location of a record with the same address as another record.
d. all locations on the disk are used for record storage.
An advantage of a physical address pointer is that
a. it points directly to the actual disk storage location.
b. it is easily recovered if it is inadvertently lost.
c. it remains unchanged when disks are reorganized.
d. all of the above are advantages of the physical address pointer.
Which of the following is NOT true of a turnaround document?
a. They may reduce the number of errors made by external parties.
b. They are commonly used by utility companies (gas, power, water).
c. They are documents used by internal parties only.
d. They are both input and output documents.
Which of the following is NOT a true statement?
a. Transactions are recorded on source documents and are posted to journals.
b. Transactions are recorded in journals and are posted to ledgers.
c. Infrequent transactions are recorded in the general journal.
d. Frequent transactions are recorded in special journals.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Which of the following is true of the relationship between subsidiary ledgers and general ledger accounts?
a. The two contain different and unrelated data.
b. All general ledger accounts have subsidiaries.
c. The relationship between the two provides an audit trail from the financial statements to the source documents.
d. The total of subsidiary ledger accounts usually exceeds the total in the related general ledger account.
Real time systems might be appropriate for all of the following EXCEPT
a. airline reservations.
b. payroll.
c. point of sale transactions.
d. air traffic control systems.
e. all of these applications typically utilize real time processing.
is the system flowchart symbol for:
a. on page connector.
b. off page connector.
c. home base.
d. manual operation.
e. document.
A chart of accounts would best be coded using
a(n) ______________ coding scheme.
a. alphabetic
b. mnemonic
c. block
d. sequential
Which of the following statements is NOT true?
a. Sorting records that are coded alphabetically tends to be more difficult for users than sorting numeric sequences.
b. Mnemonic coding requires the user to memorize codes.
c. Sequential codes carry no information content beyond their order in the sequence.
d. Mnemonic codes are limited in their ability to represent items within a class.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following describes the expenditure cycle manual procedures for a hypothetical company. The inventory control clerk examines the inventory records for items that must be replenished and prepares a two part purchase requisition. Copy 1 of the requisition is sent to the purchasing department, and Copy 2 is filed. Upon receipt of the requisition, the purchasing clerk selects a supplier from the valid vendor file (reference file) and prepares a three part purchase order. Copy 1 is sent to the supplier, Copy 2 is sent to the accounts payable department where it is filed temporarily, and Copy 3 is filed in the purchases department. A few days after the supplier ships the order, the goods arrive at the receiving department. They are inspected, and the receiving clerk prepares a three part receiving report describing the number and quality of the items received. Copy 1 of the receiving report accompanies the goods to the stores, where they are secured. Copy 2 is sent to inventory control, where the clerk posts it to the inventory records and files the document. Copy 3 is sent to the accounts payable department, where it is filed with the purchase order. A day or two later, the accounts payable clerk receives the supplier’s invoice (bill) for the items shipped. The clerk pulls the purchase order and receiving report from the temporary file and compares the quantity ordered, quantity received, and the price charged. After reconciling the three documents, the clerk enters the purchase in the purchases journal and posts the amount owed to the accounts payable subsidiary account. On the payment due date, the accounts payable clerk posts to the accounts payable subsidiary account to remove the liability and prepares a voucher authorizing payment to the vendor. The voucher is then sent to the cash disbursements clerk. Upon receipt of the voucher, the cash disbursements clerk prepares a check and sends it to the supplier. The clerk records the check in the check register and files a copy of the check in the department filing cabinet.
Required
Prepare a data flow diagram and a system flowchart of the expenditure cycle procedures previously described.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following describes the payroll procedures for a hypothetical company. Every Thursday, the timekeeping clerk sends employee time cards to the payroll department for processing. Based on the hours worked reflected on the time cards, the employee pay rate and withholding information in the employee file, and the tax rate reference file, the payroll clerk calculates gross pay, withholdings, and net pay for each employee. The clerk then manually prepares paychecks for each employee, files hard copies of the paychecks in the payroll department, and posts the earnings to the hard copy employee records. Finally, the clerk manually prepares a payroll summary and sends it and the paychecks to the cash disbursements department. The cash disbursements clerk reconciles the payroll summary with the paychecks and manually records the transaction in the hard copy cash disbursements journal. The clerk then files the payroll summary and sends the paychecks to the treasurer for signing. The signed checks are then sent to the paymaster, who distributes them to the employees on Friday morning.
Required
Prepare a data flow diagram and a system flowchart of the payroll procedures previously described.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following describes the payroll procedures for a hypothetical company. Every Thursday, the timekeeping clerk sends employee time cards to the payroll department for processing. Based on the hours worked reflected on the time cards, the employee pay rate and withholding information in the employee file, and the tax rate reference file, the payroll clerk calculates gross pay, withholdings, and net pay for each employee. The clerk then manually prepares paychecks for each employee, files hard copies of the paychecks in the payroll department, and posts the earnings to the hard copy employee records. Finally, the clerk manually prepares a payroll summary and sends it and the paychecks to the cash disbursements department. The cash disbursements clerk reconciles the payroll summary with the paychecks and manually records the transaction in the hard copy cash disbursements journal. The clerk then files the payroll summary and sends the paychecks to the treasurer for signing. The signed checks are then sent to the paymaster, who distributes them to the employees on Friday morning.
Required
Uses database files and computer processing procedures, prepare a data flow diagram, an entity relationship diagram, and a systems flowchart.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following describes the revenue cycle procedures for a hypothetical company. The sales department clerk receives hard copy customer orders and manually prepares a six part hardcopy sales order. Copies of the sales order are distributed to various departments as follows: Copies 1, 2, and 3 go to the shipping department, and Copies 4, 5, and 6 are sent to the billing department where they are temporarily filed by the billing clerk. Upon receipt of the sales order copies, the shipping clerk picks the goods from the warehouse shelves and ships them to the customer. The clerk sends Copy 1 of the sales order along with the goods to the customer. Copy 2 is sent to the billing department, and Copy 3 is filed in the shipping department. When the billing clerk receives Copy 2 from the warehouse, she pulls the other copies from the temporary file and completes the documents by adding prices, taxes, and freight charges. Then, using the department PC, the billing clerk records the sale in the digital Sales Journal, sends Copy 4 (customer bill) to the customer, and sends Copies 5 and 6 to the AR and inventory control departments, respectively. Upon receipt of the documents from the billing clerk, the accounts receivable and inventory control clerks post the transactions to the AR Subsidiary and Inventory Subsidiary ledgers, respectively, using their department PCs. Each clerk then files the respective sales order copies in the department. On the payment due date, the customer sends a check for the full amount and a copy of the bill (the remittance advice) to the company. These documents are received by the mailroom clerk who distributes them as follows:
1. The check goes to the cash receipts clerk, who manually records it in the hard copy cash receipts journal and prepares two deposit slips. One deposit slip and the check are sent to the bank; the other deposit slip is filed in the cash receipts department.
2. The remittance advice is sent to the AR clerk, who posts to the digital subsidiary accounts and then files the document.
Required
Prepare a data flow diagram and a system flowchart of the revenue cycle procedures previously described.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following describes the expenditure cycle for a hypothetical company. The company has a centralized computer system with terminals located in various departments. The terminals are networked to a computer application, and digital accounting records are hosted on a server in the data processing department. Each day, the computer in the data processing center scans the inventory records looking for items that must be replenished. For each item below its reorder point, the system creates a digital purchase order and prints two hard copies. A technician in the data center sends the purchase orders to the purchasing department clerk. Upon receipt of the purchase orders, the purchasing clerk reviews and signs them. He sends Copy 1 to the supplier and files Copy 2 in the purchases department. A few days later, the supplier ships the order and the goods arrive at the receiving department. The receiving clerk reviews the digital purchase order from his terminal, inspects the goods, creates a digital Receiving Report record, and prints two hard copies of the receiving report. The system automatically updates the inventory records to reflect the receipt of goods. The clerk sends Copy 1 of the receiving report with the goods to the stores, where they are secured. Copy 2 is filed in the receiving department. A day or two later, the accounts payable clerk receives a hard copy supplier’s invoice (bill) for the items shipped. The clerk accesses the digital receiving report and purchase order from her terminal. She then reconciles these documents with the supplier’s invoice. If all aspects of the order reconcile, the clerk records the purchase in the digital purchases journal and posts the amount owed to the accounts payable subsidiary account from her terminal. Each day, the computer application in the data processing department automatically scans the accounts payable subsidiary file for items that are due for payment and prints a two part check. The system closes out the accounts payable record and creates a record in the digital cash disbursements journal. A data processing clerk then sends the check to the Cash Disbursement department where it is approved, signed, and distributed to the supplier. The check copy is filed in the Cash Disbursements department.
Required
Prepare a data flow diagram and a system flowchart of the expenditure cycle procedures previously described.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) A rise in the price level causes the demand for money to ________ and the interest rate to ________, everything else held constant.
A) decrease; decrease
B) decrease; increase
C) increase; decrease
D) increase; increase
2) When the price level falls, the ________ curve for nominal money ________, and interest rates ________, everything else held constant.
A) demand; decreases; fall
B) demand; increases; rise
C) supply; increases; rise
D) supply; decreases; fall
3) A decline in the expected inflation rate causes the demand for money to ________ and the demand curve to shift to the ________, everything else held constant.
A) decrease; right
B) decrease; left
C) increase; right
D) increase; left
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) When the Fed decreases the money stock, the money supply curve shifts to the ________ and the interest rate ________, everything else held constant.
A) right; rises
B) right; falls
C) left; falls
D) left; rises
2) When the Fed ________ the money stock, the money supply curve shifts to the ________ and the interest rate ________, everything else held constant.
A) decreases; right; rises
B) increases; right; falls
C) decreases; left; falls
D) increases; left; rises
3) ________ in the money supply creates excess ________ money, causing interest rates to ________, everything else held constant.
A) A decrease; demand for; rise
B) An increase; demand for; fall
C) An increase; supply of; rise
D) A decrease; supply of; fall
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) Milton Friedman called the response of lower interest rates resulting from an increase in the money supply the ________ effect.
A) liquidity
B) price level
C) expected inflation
D) income generally, the
2) In the liquidity preference framework, a one time increase in the money supply results in a price level effect. The maximum impact of the price level effect on interest rates occurs
A) at the moment the price level hits its peak (stops rising) because both the price level and expected inflation effects are at work.
B) immediately after the price level begins to rise, because both the price level and expected inflation effects are at work.
C) at the moment the expected inflation rate hits its peak.
D) at the moment the inflation rate hits it peak.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) Of the four effects on interest rates from an increase in the money supply, the one that works in the opposite direction of the other three is the
A) liquidity effect.
B) income effect.
C) price level effect.
D) expected inflation effect.
2) It is possible that when the money supply rises, interest rates may ________ if the ________ effect is more than offset by changes in income, the price level, and expected inflation.
A) fall; liquidity
B) fall; risk
C) rise; liquidity
D) rise; risk
3) When the growth rate of the money supply increases, interest rates end up being permanently lower if
A) the liquidity effect is larger than the other effects.
B) there is fast adjustment of expected inflation.
C) there is slow adjustment of expected inflation.
D) the expected inflation effect is larger than the liquidity effect.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) When the growth rate of the money supply is increased, interest rates will fall immediately if the liquidity effect is ________ than the other money supply effects and there is ________ adjustment of expected inflation.
A) larger; fast
B) larger; slow
C) smaller; slow
D) smaller; fast
2) If the Fed wants to permanently lower interest rates, then it should raise the rate of money growth if
A) there is fast adjustment of expected inflation.
B) there is slow adjustment of expected inflation.
C) the liquidity effect is smaller than the expected inflation effect.
D) the liquidity effect is larger than the other effects.
3) If the liquidity effect is smaller than the other effects, and the adjustment to expected inflation is slow, then the
A) interest rate will fall.
B) interest rate will rise.
C) interest rate will initially fall but eventually climb above the initial level in response to an increase in money growth.
D) interest rate will initially rise but eventually fall below the initial level in response to an increase in money growth.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) If the liquidity effect is smaller than the other effects, and the adjustment to expected inflation is immediate, then the
A) interest rate will fall.
B) interest rate will rise.
C) interest rate will fall immediately below the initial level when the money supply grows.
D) interest rate will rise immediately above the initial level when the money supply grows.
2) In the figure above, illustrates the effect of an increased rate of money supply growth at time period 0. From the figure, one can conclude that the
A) liquidity effect is smaller than the expected inflation effect and interest rates adjust quickly to changes in expected inflation.
B) liquidity effect is larger than the expected inflation effect and interest rates adjust quickly to changes in expected inflation.
C) liquidity effect is larger than the expected inflation effect and interest rates adjust slowly to changes in expected inflation.
D) liquidity effect is smaller than the expected inflation effect and interest rates adjust slowly to changes in expected inflation.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) In the figure above, illustrates the effect of an increased rate of money supply growth at time period 0. From the figure, one can conclude that the
A) Fisher effect is dominated by the liquidity effect and interest rates adjust slowly to changes in expected inflation.
B) liquidity effect is dominated by the Fisher effect and interest rates adjust slowly to changes in expected inflation.
C) liquidity effect is dominated by the Fisher effect and interest rates adjust quickly to changes in expected inflation.
D) Fisher effect is smaller than the expected inflation effect and interest rates adjust quickly to changes in expected inflation.
2) The figure above illustrates the effect of an increased rate of money supply growth at time period T0. From the figure, one can conclude that the
A) liquidity effect is smaller than the expected inflation effect and interest rates adjust quickly to changes in expected inflation.
B) liquidity effect is larger than the expected inflation effect and interest rates adjust quickly to changes in expected inflation.
C) liquidity effect is larger than the expected inflation effect and interest rates adjust slowly to changes in expected inflation.
D) liquidity effect is smaller than the expected inflation effect and interest rates adjust slowly to changes in expected inflation.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) The figure above illustrates the effect of an increased rate of money supply growth at time period T0. From the figure, one can conclude that the
A) Fisher effect is dominated by the liquidity effect and interest rates adjust slowly to changes in expected inflation.
B) liquidity effect is dominated by the Fisher effect and interest rates adjust slowly to changes in expected inflation.
C) liquidity effect is dominated by the Fisher effect and interest rates adjust quickly to changes in expected inflation.
D) Fisher effect is smaller than the expected inflation effect and interest rates adjust quickly to changes in expected inflation.
2) The figure above illustrates the effect of an increased rate of money supply growth at time period T0. From the figure, one can conclude that the
A) liquidity effect is smaller than the expected inflation effect and interest rates adjust quickly to changes in expected inflation.
B) liquidity effect is larger than the expected inflation effect and interest rates adjust quickly to changes in expected inflation.
C) liquidity effect is larger than the expected inflation effect and interest rates adjust slowly to changes in expected inflation.
D) liquidity effect is smaller than the expected inflation effect and interest rates adjust slowly to changes in expected inflation.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) The figure above illustrates the effect of an increased rate of money supply growth at time period T0. From the figure, one can conclude that the
A) Fisher effect is dominated by the liquidity effect and interest rates adjust slowly to change in expected inflation.
B) liquidity effect is dominated by the Fisher effect and interest rates adjust slowly to changes in expected inflation.
C) liquidity effect is dominated by the Fisher effect and interest rates adjust quickly to changes in expected inflation.
D) Fisher effect is smaller than the expected inflation effect and interest rates adjust quickly to changes in expected inflation.
2) Interest rates increased continuously during the 1970s. The most likely explanation is
A) banking failures that reduced the money supply.
B) a rise in the level of income.
C) the repeated bouts of recession and expansion.
D) increasing expected rates of inflation.
3) Using the liquidity preference framework, what will happen to interest rates if the Fed increases the money supply?
4) Using the liquidity preference framework, show what happens to interest rates during a business cycle recession.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Applying the Asset Market Approach to a Commodity Market: The Case of Gold
1) When stock prices become more volatile, the ________ curve for gold shifts right and gold prices ________, everything else held constant.
A) demand; increase
B) demand; decrease
C) supply; increase
D) supply; decrease
2) A return to the gold standard, that is, using gold for money will ________ the ________ for gold, ________ its price, everything else held constant.
A) increase; demand; increasing
B) decrease; demand; decreasing
C) increase; supply; increasing
D) decrease; supply; increasing
3) When gold prices become more volatile, the ________ curve for gold shifts to the ________; ________ the price of gold.
A) supply; right; increasing
B) supply; left; increasing
C) demand; right; decreasing
D) demand; left; decreasing
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Profit, Risk Taking, and Entrepreneurs
a. What is one measure of the success of a business?
b. What is an entrepreneur? List two characteristics of an entrepreneur.
Types of Business Operations
a. Name and describe the three types of business operations.
b. What is the major difference between a merchandising business and a manufacturing business?
Forms of Business Organization
a. Describe each of the three forms of business organization.
b. What is the purpose of a partnership agreement?
Advantages and Disadvantages of Forms of Business Organization
a. List two advantages and two disadvantages of each business form.
b. What disadvantage do a sole proprietorship and partnership share?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Understanding Accounting
Assumptions In your working papers, indicate the assumption from the list below that best matches each numbered statement.
- Accounting Period
- Business Entity
- Going Concern
1. Accounting reports may cover a month, a quarter, or a year.
2. Accountants expect a business to last indefinitely.
3. The personal property of a business owner is not included in the accounting records of the business.
4. The business has been in operation for several years and is expected to continue.
5. An owner’s personal activities or properties are not mixed with the business activities or properties.
6. The accountant’s report shows how much profit the business earned for one month.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cleanmore Products, Inc. is in the process of setting a selling price on its new top of the line, 3 horsepower, 16 gallon, variable speed wet/dry shop vacuum. The per unit variable cost estimates for the new shop vacuum are as follows.
|
|
Per Unit
|
|
Direct Materials
|
$23
|
|
Direct Labor
|
17
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead
|
12
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead
|
8
|
In addition, Cleanmore has the following fixed costs per unit at a budgeted sales volume of 10,000 units.
Cleanmore has decided to price its new shop vacuum to earn a 20% return on its investment (ROI) of $1,000,000.
Compute the markup percentage to achieve a desired ROI of $20 per unit:
Compute the target selling price:
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
KRC Air Corporation produces air purifiers. Using a 45% markup percentage on total per unit cost, compute the target selling price.
|
Direct Materials
|
$16
|
|
Direct Labor
|
18
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead
|
11
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead
|
10
|
|
Variable selling and administrative expenses
|
6
|
|
Fixed selling and administrative expenses
|
10
|
|
Total unit cost
|
$71
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Assume the following data for Lake Holiday Marina, a boat and motor repair shop.
|
LAKE HOLIDAY MARINA Budgeted Costs for the Year 2011
|
|
|
Time Charges
|
Material Loading Charges
|
|
Mechanics wages and benefits
|
$103,500
|
|
|
Parts manager’s salary and benefits
|
|
$11,500
|
|
Office employee’s salary and benefits
|
20,700
|
2,300
|
|
Other Overhead(supplies, depreciation, property taxes, advertising, utilities)
|
26,800
|
14,400
|
|
Total budgeted costs
|
$151,000
|
$28,200
|
Using time and material pricing involves three steps:
1) Calculate the per hour labor charge,
2) Calculate the charge for obtaining and holding materials, and
3) Calculate the charges for a particular job.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Presented below are data for Harmon Electrical Repair Shop for next year. The desired profit margin per labor hour is $10. The material loading charge is 40% of invoice cost. Harmon estimates that 8,000 labor hours will be worked next year. Compute the rate charged per hour of labor.
|
|
Total Cost
|
|
Repair technician’s wages
|
$130,000
|
|
Fringe benefits
|
30,000
|
|
Overhead
|
20,000
|
|
|
$180,000
|
If Harmon repairs a TV that takes 4 hours to repair and uses parts of $50, compute the bill for this job.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Alberta Company sells hiking boots as well as soles for work & hiking boots.
Two Divisions:
Sole Division sells soles externally.
Boot Division makes leather uppers for hiking boots which are attached to purchased soles.
Each Division Manager compensated on division profitability.
Management now wants Sole Division to provide at least some soles to the Boot Division.
Computation of the contribution margin per unit for each division when the Boot Division purchases soles from an outside supplier.
|
Boot Division
|
Sole Division
|
|
Selling price of hiking boots
|
$90
|
Selling price of sole
|
$18
|
|
Variable cost of manufacturing boot(not including sole)
|
35
|
Variable cost per sole
|
11
|
|
Cost of sole purchased from outside suppliers
|
17
|
|
|
What would be a fair transfer price if the Sole Division sold 10,000 soles to the Boot Division?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Alberta Company requires the division to use a transfer price based on the variable cost of the sole. With no excess capacity, the contribution margins per unit for the two divisions are:
Cost based transfer price—10,000 units
|
Boot Division
|
Sole Division
|
|
Selling price of hiking boots
|
$90
|
Selling price of sole
|
$18
|
|
Variable cost of manufacturing boot(not including sole)
|
35
|
Variable cost per sole
|
11
|
|
Cost of sole purchased from outside suppliers
|
17
|
|
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Alberta’s Boot Division is located in a country with a corporate tax rate of 10%, and the Sole Division is located in a country with a tax rate of 30%. The following illustrates the after tax contribution margin per unit under alternative transfer prices $18 and $11.
|
Boot Division
|
Sole Division
|
|
Selling price of hiking boots
|
$90
|
Selling price of sole
|
$18
|
|
Variable cost of manufacturing boot(not including sole)
|
35
|
Variable cost per sole
|
11
|
|
Cost of sole purchased internally
|
18
|
|
|
Why do the after tax contribution margins differ?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Use this list of terms to complete the sentences that follow.
|
Long range planning
|
Participative Budgeting
|
|
Sales forecast
|
Operating budgets
|
|
Master Budget
|
Financial budgets
|
1. A shows potential sales for the industry and a company’s expected share of such sales.
2. are used as the basis for the preparation of the budgeted income statement.
3. The is a set of interrelated budgets that constitutes a plan of action for a specified time period.
4. identifies long term goals, selects strategies to achieve these goals, and develops policies and plans to implement the strategies.
5. Lower level managers are more likely to perceive results as fair and achievable under a approach.
6. focus primarily on the cash resources needed to fund expected operations and planned capital expenditures.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) When the ________ interest rate is low, there are greater incentives to ________ and fewer incentives to ________.
A) nominal; lend; borrow
B) real; lend; borrow
C) real; borrow; lend
D) market; lend; borrow
2) The interest rate that describes how well a lender has done in real terms after the fact is called
The
A) ex post real interest rate.
B) ex ante real interest rate.
C) ex post nominal interest rate.
D) ex ante nominal interest rate.
3) The ________ states that the nominal interest rate equals the real interest rate plus the expected rate of inflation.
A) Fisher equation
B) Keynesian equation
C) Monetarist equation
D) Marshall equation
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) Assuming the same coupon rate and maturity length, the difference between the yield on a
Treasury Inflation Protected Security and the yield on a nonindexed Treasury security provides insight into
A) the nominal interest rate.
B) the real interest rate.
C) the nominal exchange rate.
D) the expected inflation rate.
2) Assuming the same coupon rate and maturity length, when the interest rate on a Treasury
Inflation Protected Security is 3 percent, and the yield on a nonindexed Treasury bond is 8 percent, the expected rate of inflation is
A) 3 percent.
B) 5 percent.
C) 8 percent.
D) 11 percent.
3) Would it make sense to buy a house when mortgage rates are 14% and expected inflation is 15%? Explain your answer.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) Everything else held constant, a decrease in wealth
A) increases the demand for stocks.
B) increases the demand for bonds.
C) reduces the demand for silver.
D) increases the demand for gold.
2) An increase in an asset”s expected return relative to that of an alternative asset, holding everything else constant, ________ the quantity demanded of the asset.
A) increases
B) decreases
C) has no effect on
D) erases
3) Everything else held constant, if the expected return on ABC stock rises from 5 to 10 percent and the expected return on CBS stock is unchanged, then the expected return of holding CBS stock ________ relative to ABC stock and the demand for CBS stock ________.
A) rises; rises
B) rises; falls
C) falls; rises
D) falls; falls
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) Everything else held constant, if the expected return on U.S. Treasury bonds falls from 10 to 5 percent and the expected return on GE stock rises from 7 to 8 percent, then the expected return of holding GE stock ________ relative to U.S. Treasury bonds and the demand for GE stock ________.
A) rises; rises
B) rises; falls
C) falls; rises
D) falls; falls
2) If housing prices are expected to increase, then, other things equal, the demand for houses will ________ and that of Treasury bills will ________.
A) increase; increase
B) increase; decrease
C) decrease; decrease
D) decrease; increase
3) If stock prices are expected to drop dramatically, then, other things equal, the demand for stocks will ________ and that of Treasury bills will ________.
A) increase; increase
B) increase; decrease
C) decrease; decrease
D) decrease; increase
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) Everything else held constant, if the expected return on RST stock declines from 12 to 9 percent and the expected return on XYZ stock declines from 8 to 7 percent, then the expected return of holding RST stock ________ relative to XYZ stock and demand for XYZ stock _______.
A) rises; rises
B) rises; falls
C) falls; rises
D) falls; falls
2) Everything else held constant, if the expected return on U.S. Treasury bonds falls from 8 to 7 percent and the expected return on corporate bonds falls from 10 to 8 percent, then the expected return of corporate bonds ________ relative to U.S. Treasury bonds and the demand for corporate bonds ________.
A) rises; rises
B) rises; falls
C) falls; rises
D) falls; falls
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) If gold becomes acceptable as a medium of exchange, the demand for gold will ________ and the demand for bonds will ________, everything else held constant.
A) decrease; decrease
B) decrease; increase
C) increase; increase
D) increase; decrease
2) The demand for Picasso paintings rises (holding everything else equal) when
A) stocks become easier to sell.
B) people expect a boom in real estate prices.
C) Treasury securities become riskier.
D) people expect gold prices to rise.
3) The demand for silver decreases, other things equal, when
A) the gold market is expected to boom.
B) the market for silver becomes more liquid.
C) wealth grows rapidly.
D) interest rates are expected to rise.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) You would be less willing to purchase U.S. Treasury bonds, other things equal, if
A) you inherit $1 million from your Uncle Harry.
B) you expect interest rates to fall.
C) gold becomes more liquid.
D) stock prices are expected to fall.
2) You would be more willing to buy AT&T bonds (holding everything else constant) if
A) the brokerage commissions on bond sales become cheaper.
B) interest rates are expected to rise.
C) your wealth has decreased.
D) you expect diamonds to appreciate in value.
3) The demand for gold increases, other things equal, when
A) the market for silver becomes more liquid.
B) interest rates are expected to rise.
C) interest rates are expected to fall.
D) real estate prices are expected to increase.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) Holding everything else constant,
A) if asset A”s risk rises relative to that of alternative assets, the demand will increase for asset A.
B) the more liquid is asset A, relative to alternative assets, the greater will be the demand for asset A.
C) the lower the expected return to asset A relative to alternative assets, the greater will be the demand for asset A.
D) if wealth increases, demand for asset A increases and demand for alternative assets decreases.
2) Holding all other factors constant, the quantity demanded of an asset is
A) positively related to wealth.
B) negatively related to its expected return relative to alternative assets.
C) positively related to the risk of its returns relative to alternative assets.
D) negatively related to its liquidity relative to alternative assets.
3) Everything else held constant, would an increase in volatility of stock prices have any impact on the demand for rare coins? Why or why not?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Supply and Demand in the Bond Market
1) In the bond market, the bond demanders are the ________ and the bond suppliers are the ________.
A) lenders; borrowers
B) lenders; advancers
C) borrowers; lenders
D) borrowers; advancers
2) The demand curve for bonds has the usual downward slope, indicating that at ________ prices of the bond, everything else equal, the ________ is higher.
A) higher; demand
B) higher; quantity demanded
C) lower; demand
D) lower; quantity demanded
3) The supply curve for bonds has the usual upward slope, indicating that as the price ________, ceteris paribus, the ________ increases.
A) falls; supply
B) falls; quantity supplied
C) rises; supply
D) rises; quantity supplied
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) When the interest rate on a bond is above the equilibrium interest rate, in the bond market there is excess ________ and the interest rate will ________.
A) demand; rise
B) demand; fall
C) supply; fall
D) supply; rise
2) When the interest rate on a bond is ________ the equilibrium interest rate, in the bond market there is excess ________ and the interest rate will ________.
A) above; demand; rise
B) above; demand; fall
C) below; supply; fall
D) above; supply; rise
3) A situation in which the quantity of bonds supplied exceeds the quantity of bonds demanded is called a condition of excess supply; because people want to sell ________ bonds than others want to buy, the price of bonds will ________.
A) fewer; fall
B) fewer; rise
C) more; fall
D) more; rise
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) Everything else held constant, when households save less, wealth and the demand for bonds________ and the bond demand curve shifts ________.
A) increase; right
B) increase; left
C) decrease; right
D) decrease; left
2) Everything else held constant, if interest rates are expected to fall in the future, the demand for long term bonds today ________ and the demand curve shifts to the ________.
A) rises; right
B) rises; left
C) falls; right
D) falls; left
3) Holding the expected return on bonds constant, an increase in the expected return on common stocks would ________ the demand for bonds, shifting the demand curve to the ________.
A) decrease; left
B) decrease; right
C) increase; left
D) increase; right
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) Everything else held constant, an increase in expected inflation, lowers the expected return on ________ compared to ________ assets.
A) bonds; financial
B) bonds; real
C) physical; financial
D) physical; real
2) Everything else held constant, an increase in the riskiness of bonds relative to alternative assets causes the demand for bonds to ________ and the demand curve to shift to the ________.
A) rise; right
B) rise; left
C) fall; right
D) fall; left
3) Everything else held constant, when stock prices become less volatile, the demand curve for bonds shifts to the ________ and the interest rate ________.
A) right; rises
B) right; falls
C) left; falls
D) left; rises
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) Everything else held constant, when stock prices become ________ volatile, the demand curve for bonds shifts to the ________ and the interest rate ________.
A) more; right; rises
B) more; right; falls
C) less; left; falls
D) less; left; does not change
2) Everything else held constant, an increase in the liquidity of bonds results in a ________ in demand for bonds and the demand curve shifts to the ________.
A) rise; right
B) rise; left
C) fall; right
D) fall; left
3) Everything else held constant, when bonds become less widely traded, and as a consequence the market becomes less liquid, the demand curve for bonds shifts to the ________ and the interest rate ________.
A) right; rises
B) right; falls
C) left; falls
D) left; rises
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) In a business cycle expansion, the ________ of bonds increases and the ________ curve shifts to the ________ as business investments are expected to be more profitable.
A) supply; supply; right
B) supply; supply; left
C) demand; demand; right
D) demand; demand; left
2) When the expected inflation rate increases, the real cost of borrowing ________ and bond supply ________, everything else held constant.
A) increases; increases
B) increases; decreases
C) decreases; increases
D) decreases; decreases
3) An increase in the expected inflation rate causes the supply of bonds to ________ and the supply curve to shift to the ________, everything else held constant.
A) increase; left
B) increase; right
C) decrease; left
D) decrease; right
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) Deflation causes the demand for bonds to ________, the supply of bonds to ________, and bond prices to ________, everything else held constant.
A) increase; increase; increase
B) increase; decrease; increase
C) decrease; increase; increase
D) decrease; decrease; increase
2) In the 1990s Japan had the lowest interest rates in the world due to a combination of
A) inflation and recession.
B) deflation and expansion.
C) inflation and expansion.
D) deflation and recession.
3) When the interest rate changes,
A) the demand curve for bonds shifts to the right.
B) the demand curve for bonds shifts to the left.
C) the supply curve for bonds shifts to the right.
D) it is because either the demand or the supply curve has shifted.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) The interest rate falls when either the demand for bonds ________ or the supply of bonds________.
A) increases; increases
B) increases; decreases
C) decreases; decreases
D) decreases; increases
2) When the government has a surplus, as occurred in the late 1990s, the ________ curve of bonds shifts to the ________, everything else held constant.
A) supply; right
B) supply; left
C) demand; right
D) demand; left
3) A decrease in the brokerage commissions in the housing market from 6% to 5% of the sales price will shift the ________ curve for bonds to the ________, everything else held constant.
A) demand; right
B) demand; left
C) supply; right
D) supply; left
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) If stock prices are expected to climb next year, everything else held constant, the ________ curve for bonds shifts ________ and the interest rate ________.
A) demand; left; rises
B) demand; right; rises
C) demand; left; falls
D) supply; left; rises
2) If prices in the bond market become more volatile, everything else held constant, the demand curve for bonds shifts ________ and interest rates ________.
A) left; rise
B) left; fall
C) right; rise
D) right; fall
3) If brokerage commissions on stocks fall, everything else held constant, the demand for bonds ________, the price of bonds ________, and the interest rate ________.
A) decreases; decreases; increases
B) decreases; decreases; decreases
C) increases; decreases; increases
D) increases; increases; increases
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) In the figure above, a factor that could cause the demand for bonds to decrease (shift to the left) is:
A) an increase in the expected return on bonds relative to other assets.
B) a decrease in the expected return on bonds relative to other assets.
C) an increase in wealth.
D) a reduction in the riskiness of bonds relative to other assets.
2) In the figure above, a factor that could cause the supply of bonds to increase (shift to the right) is:
A) a decrease in government budget deficits.
B) a decrease in expected inflation.
C) expectations of more profitable investment opportunities.
D) a business cycle recession.
3) In the figure above, a factor that could cause the demand for bonds to shift to the right is:
A) an increase in the riskiness of bonds relative to other assets.
B) an increase in the expected rate of inflation.
C) expectations of lower interest rates in the future.
D) a decrease in wealth.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) The bond supply and demand framework is easier to use when analyzing the effects of changes in ________, while the liquidity preference framework provides a simpler analysis of the effects from changes in income, the price level, and the supply of ________.
A) expected inflation; bonds
B) expected inflation; money
C) government budget deficits; bonds
D) government budget deficits; money
2) Keynes assumed that money has ________ rate of return.
A) a positive
B) a negative
C) a zero
D) an increasing
3) In his Liquidity Preference Framework, Keynes assumed that money has a zero rate of return; thus,
A) when interest rates rise, the expected return on money falls relative to the expected return on bonds, causing the demand for money to fall.
B) when interest rates rise, the expected return on money falls relative to the expected return on bonds, causing the demand for money to rise.
C) when interest rates fall, the expected return on money falls relative to the expected return on bonds, causing the demand for money to fall.
D) when interest rates fall, the expected return on money falls relative to the expected return on bonds, causing the demand for money to rise.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) A business cycle expansion increases income, causing money demand to ________ and interest rates to ________, everything else held constant.
A) increase; increase
B) increase; decrease
C) decrease; decrease
D) decrease; increase
2) In the Keynesian liquidity preference framework, a rise in the price level causes the demand for money to ________ and the demand curve to shift to the ________, everything else held constant.
A) increase; left
B) increase; right
C) decrease; left
D) decrease; right
3) When the price level ________, the demand curve for money shifts to the ________ and the interest rate ________, everything else held constant.
A) falls; left; falls
B) rises; right; falls
C) falls; left; rises
D) rises; right; rises
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) The agency that was created to protect depositors after the banking failures of 1930 1933 is the
A) Federal Reserve System.
B) Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation.
C) Treasury Department.
D) Office of the Comptroller of the Currency.
2) Savings and loan associations are regulated by the
A) Federal Reserve System.
B) Securities and Exchange Commission.
C) Office of the Comptroller of the Currency.
D) Office of Thrift Supervision.
3) The regulatory agency that sets reserve requirements for all banks is
A) the Federal Reserve System.
B) the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation.
C) the Office of Thrift Supervision.
D) the Securities and Exchange Commission.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) When we say that money is a stock variable, we mean that
A) the quantity of money is measured at a given point in time.
B) we must attach a time period to the measure.
C) it is sold in the equity market.
D) money never loses purchasing power.
2) The difference between money and income is that
A) money is a flow and income is a stock.
B) money is a stock and income is a flow.
C) there is no difference?money and income are both stocks.
D) there is no difference?money and income are both flows.
3) Which of the following is a true statement?
A) Money and income are flow variables.
B) Money is a flow variable.
C) Income is a flow variable.
D) Money and income are stock variables.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) Compared to an economy that uses a medium of exchange, in a barter economy
A) transaction costs are higher.
B) transaction costs are lower.
C) liquidity costs are higher.
D) liquidity costs are lower.
2) When compared to exchange systems that rely on money, disadvantages of the barter system include:
A) the requirement of a double coincidence of wants.
B) lowering the cost of exchanging goods over time.
C) lowering the cost of exchange to those who would specialize.
D) encouraging specialization and the division of labor.
3) The conversion of a barter economy to one that uses money
A) increases efficiency by reducing the need to exchange goods and services.
B) increases efficiency by reducing the need to specialize.
C) increases efficiency by reducing transactions costs.
D) does not increase economic efficiency.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) Which of the following statements best explains how the use of money in an economy increases economic efficiency?
A) Money increases economic efficiency because it is costless to produce.
B) Money increases economic efficiency because it discourages specialization.
C) Money increases economic efficiency because it decreases transactions costs.
D) Money cannot have an effect on economic efficiency.
2) When economists say that money promotes ________, they mean that money encourages specialization and the division of labor.
A) bargaining
B) contracting
C) efficiency
D) greed
3) Money ________ transaction costs, allowing people to specialize in what they do best.
A) reduces
B) increases
C) enhances
D) eliminates
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) For a commodity to function effectively as money it must be
A) easily standardized, making it easy to ascertain its value.
B) difficult to make change.
C) deteriorate quickly so that its supply does not become too large.
D) hard to carry around.
2) All of the following are necessary criteria for a commodity to function as money except
A) it must deteriorate quickly.
B) it must be divisible.
C) it must be easy to carry.
D) it must be widely accepted.
3) Whatever a society uses as money, the distinguishing characteristic is that it must
A) be completely inflation proof.
B) be generally acceptable as payment for goods and services or in the repayment of debt.
C) contain gold.
D) be produced by the government.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) A problem with barter exchange when there are many goods is that in a barter system
A) transactions costs are minimized.
B) there exists a multiple number of prices for each good.
C) there is only one store of value.
D) exchange of services is impossible.
2) In a barter economy the number of prices in an economy with N goods is
A) [N(N 1)]/2.
B) N(N/2).
C) 2N.
D) N(N/2) 1.
3) If there are five goods in a barter economy, one needs to know ten prices in order to exchange one good for another. If, however, there are ten goods in a barter economy, then one needs to know ________ prices in order to exchange one good for another.
A) 20
B) 25
C) 30
D) 45
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) A fall in the level of prices
A) does not affect the value of money.
B) has an uncertain effect on the value of money.
C) increases the value of money.
D) reduces the value of money.
2) A hyperinflation is
A) a period of extreme inflation generally greater than 50% per month.
B) a period of anxiety caused by rising prices.
C) an increase in output caused by higher prices.
D) impossible today because of tighter regulations.
3) During hyperinflations,
A) the value of money rises rapidly.
B) money no longer functions as a good store of value and people may resort to barter transactions on a much larger scale.
C) middle class savers benefit as prices rise.
D) money”s value remains fixed to the price level; that is, if prices double so does the value of money.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Evolution of the Payments System
1) The payments system is
A) the method of conducting transactions in the economy.
B) used by union officials to set salary caps.
C) an illegal method of rewarding contracts.
D) used by your employer to determine salary increases.
2) As the payments system evolves from barter to a monetary system,
A) commodity money is likely to precede the use of paper currency.
B) transaction costs increase.
C) the number of prices that need to be calculated increase rather dramatically.
D) specialization decreases.
3) A disadvantage of ________ is that it is very heavy and hard to transport from one place to another.
A) commodity money
B) fiat money
C) electronic money
D) paper money
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) Compared to checks, paper currency and coins have the major drawbacks that they
A) are easily stolen.
B) are hard to counterfeit.
C) are not the most liquid assets.
D) must be backed by gold.
2) Introduction of checks into the payments system reduced the costs of exchanging goods and services. Another advantage of checks is that
A) they provide convenient receipts for purchases.
B) they can never be stolen.
C) they are more widely accepted than currency.
D) the funds from a deposited check are available for use immediately.
3) The evolution of the payments system from barter to precious metals, then to fiat money, then to checks can best be understood as a consequence of
A) government regulations designed to improve the efficiency of the payments system.
B) government regulations designed to promote the safety of the payments system.
C) innovations that reduced the costs of exchanging goods and services.
D) competition among firms to make it easier for customers to purchase their products.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) B) checks take longer to process, meaning that it may take several days before the depositor can get her cash.
C) fraud may be more difficult to commit when paper receipts are eliminated.
D) legal liability is more clearly defined.
2) Which of the following sequences accurately describes the evolution of the payments system?
A) Barter, coins made of precious metals, paper currency, checks, electronic funds transfers
B) Barter, coins made of precious metals, checks, paper currency, electronic funds transfers
C) Barter, checks, paper currency, coins made of precious metals, electronic funds transfers
D) Barter, checks, paper currency, electronic funds transfers
3) During the past two decades an important characteristic of the modern payments system has been the rapidly increasing use of
A) checks and decreasing use of currency.
B) electronic fund transfers.
C) commodity monies.
D) fiat money.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Measuring Money
1) Recent financial innovation makes the Federal Reserve”s job of conducting monetary policy
A) easier, since the Fed now knows what to consider money.
B) more difficult, since the Fed now knows what to consider money.
C) easier, since the Fed no longer knows what to consider money.
D) more difficult, since the Fed no longer knows what to consider money.
2) Defining money becomes ________ difficult as the pace of financial innovation ________.
A) less; quickens
B) more; quickens
C) more; slows
D) more; stops
3) Monetary aggregates are
A) measures of the money supply reported by the Federal Reserve.
B) measures of the wealth of individuals.
C) never redefined since “money” never changes.
D) reported by the Treasury Department annually.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) If an individual redeems a U.S. savings bond for currency
A) M1 stays the same and M2 decreases.
B) M1 increases and M2 increases.
C) M1 increases and M2 stays the same.
D) M1 stays the same and M2 stays the same.
2) If an individual moves money from a small denomination time deposit to a demand deposit account,
A) M1 increases and M2 stays the same.
B) M1 stays the same and M2 increases.
C) M1 stays the same and M2 stays the same.
D) M1 increases and M2 decreases.
3) If an individual moves money from a demand deposit account to a money market deposit account,
A) M1 decreases and M2 stays the same.
B) M1 stays the same and M2 increases.
C) M1 stays the same and M2 stays the same.
D) M1 increases and M2 decreases.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
How Reliable are the Money Data?
1) The Fed revises its estimates of the monetary aggregates, sometimes by large amounts, because
A) large depository institutions need only report their deposits infrequently.
B) weekly monetary data need to be adjusted for the “weekend effect.”
C) monthly monetary data need to be adjusted for the “payday effect.”
D) seasonal adjustments become more precise only as more data becomes available.
2) The Fed estimates initial monetary aggregate reports because ________ depository institutions report the amount of their deposits infrequently.
A) all
B) small
C) large
D) state
3) The increase in holiday spending is not the same every year causing the Fed”s adjustment for ________ to be revised as more data becomes available.
A) seasonal variation
B) reporting discrepancy
C) market churning
D) transactions discrepancy
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) An examination of revised money supply statistics, when compared to the initial statistics, suggests that the initial statistics
A) are pretty good.
B) do not provide a good guide to short run movements in the money supply.
C) provide a poor guide of monetary policy because they are usually underestimates of the revised statistics.
D) provide a good guide of monetary policy, though they are usually underestimates of the revised statistics.
2) Generally, the initial money supply data reported by the Fed
A) is not a reliable guide to the short run behavior of the money supply.
B) is not a reliable guide to the long run behavior of the money supply.
C) is a reliable guide to the short run behavior of the money supply.
D) usually underestimate the revised statistics.
3) The initial money supply data reported by the Fed are not a reliable guide to short –run movements in the money supply such as a ________, but are reasonably reliable for longer periods such as a ________.
A) month; year
B) day; month
C) year; decade
D) decade; century
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) A bond that is bought at a price below its face value and the face value is repaid at a maturity date is called a
A) simple loan.
B) fixed payment loan.
C) coupon bond.
D) discount bond.
2) A ________ is bought at a price below its face value, and the ________ value is repaid at the maturity date.
A) coupon bond; discount
B) discount bond; discount
C) coupon bond; face
D) discount bond; face
3) A discount bond
A) pays the bondholder a fixed amount every period and the face value at maturity.
B) pays the bondholder the face value at maturity.
C) pays all interest and the face value at maturity.
D) pays the face value at maturity plus any capital gain.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) The present value of a fixed payment loan is calculated as the ________ of the present value of all cash flow payments.
A) sum
B) difference
C) multiple
D) log
2) Which of the following are true for a coupon bond?
A) When the coupon bond is priced at its face value, the yield to maturity equals the coupon rate.
B) The price of a coupon bond and the yield to maturity are positively related.
C) The yield to maturity is greater than the coupon rate when the bond price is above the par value.
D) The yield is less than the coupon rate when the bond price is below the par value.
3) The price of a coupon bond and the yield to maturity are ________ related; that is, as the yield to maturity ________, the price of the bond ________.
A) positively; rises; rises
B) negatively; falls; falls
C) positively; rises; falls
D) negatively; rises; falls
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Distinction Between Interest Rates and Returns
1) The ________ is defined as the payments to the owner plus the change in a security”s value expressed as a fraction of the security”s purchase price.
A) yield to maturity
B) current yield
C) rate of return
D) yield rate
2) Which of the following are true concerning the distinction between interest rates and returns?
A) The rate of return on a bond will not necessarily equal the interest rate on that bond.
B) The return can be expressed as the difference between the current yield and the rate of capital gains.
C) The rate of return will be greater than the interest rate when the price of the bond falls between time t and time t + 1.
D) The return can be expressed as the sum of the discount yield and the rate of capital gains.
3) The sum of the current yield and the rate of capital gain is called the
A) rate of return.
B) discount yield.
C) pertuity yield.
D) par value.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) Suppose you are holding a 5 percent coupon bond maturing in one year with a yield to maturity of 15 percent. If the interest rate on one year bonds rises from 15 percent to 20 percent over the course of the year, what is the yearly return on the bond you are holding?
A) 5 percent
B) 10 percent
C) 15 percent
D) 20 percent
2) If the interest rates on all bonds rise from 5 to 6 percent over the course of the year, which bond would you prefer to have been holding?
A) A bond with one year to maturity
B) A bond with five years to maturity
C) A bond with ten years to maturity
D) A bond with twenty years to maturity
3) An equal decrease in all bond interest rates
A) increases the price of a five year bond more than the price of a ten year bond.
B) increases the price of a ten year bond more than the price of a five year bond.
C) decreases the price of a five year bond more than the price of a ten year bond.
D) decreases the price of a ten year bond more than the price of a five year bond.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) An equal increase in all bond interest rates
A) increases the return to all bond maturities by an equal amount.
B) decreases the return to all bond maturities by an equal amount.
C) has no effect on the returns to bonds.
D) decreases long term bond returns more than short term bond returns.
2) Which of the following are generally true of bonds?
A) The only bond whose return equals the initial yield to maturity is one whose time to maturity is the same as the holding period.
B) A rise in interest rates is associated with a fall in bond prices, resulting in capital gains on bonds whose terms to maturity are longer than the holding periods.
C) The longer a bond”s maturity, the smaller is the size of the price change associated with an interest rate change.
D) Prices and returns for short term bonds are more volatile than those for longer term bonds.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) Which of the following are generally true of all bonds?
A) The longer a bond”s maturity, the greater is the rate of return that occurs as a result of the increase in the interest rate.
B) Even though a bond has a substantial initial interest rate, its return can turn out to be negative if interest rates rise.
C) Prices and returns for short term bonds are more volatile than those for longer term bonds.
D) A fall in interest rates results in capital losses for bonds whose terms to maturity are longer than the holding period.
2) The riskiness of an asset”s returns due to changes in interest rates is
A) exchange rate risk.
B) price risk.
C) asset risk.
D) interest rate risk.
3) Interest rate risk is the riskiness of an asset”s returns due to
A) interest rate changes.
B) changes in the coupon rate.
C) default of the borrower.
D) changes in the asset”s maturity.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following account balances were taken from the adjusted trial balance for Admiral Messenger Service, a delivery service firm, for the current fiscal year ended April 30, 2008:
|
Depreciation Expense
|
$ 5,000
|
Rent Expense
|
$ 43,400
|
|
Fees Earned
|
375,500
|
Salaries Expense
|
125,600
|
|
Insurance Expense
|
1,500
|
Supplies Expense
|
2,750
|
|
Miscellaneous Expense
|
1,250
|
Utilities Expense
|
11,500
|
Prepare an income statement.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following revenue and expense account balances were taken from the ledger of Cupcake Services Co. after the accounts had been adjusted on October 31, 2008, the end of the current fiscal year:
|
Depreciation Expense
|
$10,000
|
Service Revenue
|
$163,375
|
|
Insurance Expense
|
6,000
|
Supplies Expense
|
2,875
|
|
Miscellaneous Expense
|
4,750
|
Utilities Expense
|
18,750
|
|
Rent Expense
|
51,500
|
Wages Expense
|
92,800
|
Prepare an income statement.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
FedEx Corporation had the following revenue and expense account balances (in millions) at its fiscal year end of May 31, 2005:
|
Depreciation
|
$1,462
|
Purchased Transportation
|
$ 2,935
|
|
Fuel
|
2,317
|
Rentals and Landing Fees
|
2,314
|
|
Maintenance and Repairs
|
1,680
|
Revenues
|
29,363
|
|
Other Expenses
|
4,379
|
Salaries and Employee Benefits
|
11,963
|
|
Provision for Income Taxes
|
864
|
|
|
a. Prepare an income statement.
b. Compare your income statement with the related income statement that is available at the FedEx Corporation What similarities and differences do you see?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Icon Systems Co. offers its services to residents in the Pasadena area. Selected accounts from the ledger of Icon Systems Co. for the current fiscal year ended August 31, 2008, are as follows:
|
Josh Winfrey, Capital
|
Josh Winfrey, Drawing
|
|
Aug. 31
|
16,000
|
Sept. 1 (2007)
|
573,750
|
Nov. 30
|
4,000
|
Aug. 31
|
16,000
|
|
|
|
Aug. 31
|
95,000
|
Feb. 28
|
4,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
May 31
|
4,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Aug. 31
|
4,000
|
|
|
|
Income Summary
|
|
Aug. 31
|
380,000
|
Aug. 31
|
475,000
|
|
31
|
95,000
|
|
|
Prepare a statement of owner’s equity for the year.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Selected accounts from the ledger of Aspen Sports for the current fiscal year ended June 30, 2008, are as follows:
|
Tammy Eddy, Capital
|
|
Tammy Eddy, Drawing
|
|
June 30
|
30,000
|
July 1 (2007)
|
190,800
|
Sept. 30
|
7,500
|
June 30
|
30,000
|
|
30
|
32,550
|
|
|
Dec. 31
|
7,500
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
May 31
|
7,500
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
June 30
|
7,500
|
|
|
|
Income Summary
|
|
June 30
|
348,150
|
June 30
|
315,600
|
|
|
|
30
|
32,550
|
Prepare a statement of owner’s equity for the year.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Healthy & Trim Co. offers personal weight reduction consulting services to individuals.
After all the accounts have been closed on November 30, 2008, the end of the current fiscal year, the balances of selected accounts from the ledger of Healthy & Trim Co. are as follows:
|
Accounts Payable
|
$ 17,250
|
Equipment
|
$350,000
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
41,560
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
9,600
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation—
|
|
Prepaid Rent
|
6,000
|
|
Equipment
|
51,950
|
Salaries Payable
|
6,750
|
|
Cash
|
?
|
Supplies
|
1,040
|
|
Cindy DeLoach, Capital
|
346,000
|
Unearned Fees
|
5,000
|
Prepare a classified balance sheet that includes the correct balance for Cash.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Function of Financial Markets
1) Every financial market has the following characteristic:
A) It determines the level of interest rates.
B) It allows common stock to be traded.
C) It allows loans to be made.
D) It channels funds from lenders savers to borrowers spenders.
2) Financial markets have the basic function of
A) getting people with funds to lend together with people who want to borrow funds.
B) assuring that the swings in the business cycle are less pronounced.
C) assuring that governments need never resort to printing money.
D) providing a risk free repository of spending power.
3) Financial markets improve economic welfare because
A) they channel funds from investors to savers.
B) they allow consumers to time their purchase better.
C) they weed out inefficient firms.
D) eliminate the need for indirect finance.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) Which of the following can be described as involving indirect finance?
A) You make a loan to your neighbor.
B) You buy shares in a mutual fund.
C) You buy a U.S. Treasury bill from the U.S. Treasury.
D) A corporation buys a short term security issued by another corporation in the primary market.
2) Securities are ________ for the person who buys them, but are ________ for the individual or firm that issues them.
A) assets; liabilities
B) liabilities; assets
C) negotiable; nonnegotiable
D) nonnegotiable; negotiable
3) With ________ finance, borrowers obtain funds from lenders by selling them securities in the financial markets.
A) active
B) determined
C) indirect
D) direct
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Structure of Financial Markets
1) Which of the following statements about the characteristics of debt and equity is false?
A) They can both be long term financial instruments.
B) They can both be short term financial instruments.
C) They both involve a claim on the issuer”s income.
D) They both enable a corporation to raise funds.
2) Which of the following statements about the characteristics of debt and equities is true?
A) They can both be long term financial instruments.
B) Bond holders are residual claimants.
C) The income from bonds is typically more variable than that from equities.
D) Bonds pay dividends.
3) Which of the following statements about financial markets and securities is true?
A) A bond is a long term security that promises to make periodic payments called dividends to the firm”s residual claimants.
B) A debt instrument is intermediate term if its maturity is less than one year.
C) A debt instrument is intermediate term if its maturity is ten years or longer.
D) The maturity of a debt instrument is the number of years (term) to that instrument”s expiration date.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) Forty or so dealers establish a “market” in these securities by standing ready to buy and sell them.
A) Secondary stocks
B) Surplus stocks
C) U.S. government bonds
D) Common stocks
2) Which of the following statements about financial markets and securities is true?
A) Many common stocks are traded over the counter, although the largest corporations usually have their shares traded at organized stock exchanges such as the New York Stock Exchange.
B) As a corporation gets a share of the broker”s commission, a corporation acquires new funds whenever its securities are sold.
C) Capital market securities are usually more widely traded than shorter term securities and so tend to be more liquid.
D) Because of their short terms to maturity, the prices of money market instruments tend to fluctuate wildly.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Financial Market Instruments
1) Prices of money market instruments undergo the least price fluctuations because of
A) the short terms to maturity for the securities.
B) the heavy regulations in the industry.
C) the price ceiling imposed by government regulators.
D) the lack of competition in the market.
2) U.S. Treasury bills pay no interest but are sold at a ________. That is, you will pay a lower purchase price than the amount you receive at maturity.
A) premium
B) collateral
C) default
D) discount
3) U.S. Treasury bills are considered the safest of all money market instruments because there is no risk of ________.
A) defeat
B) default
C) desertion
D) demarcation
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Internationalization of Financial Markets
1) Equity of U.S. companies can be purchased by
A) U.S. citizens only.
B) foreign citizens only.
C) U.S. citizens and foreign citizens.
D) U.S. mutual funds only.
2) One reason for the extraordinary growth of foreign financial markets is
A) decreased trade.
B) increases in the pool of savings in foreign countries.
C) the recent introduction of the foreign bond.
D) slower technological innovation in foreign markets.
3) Bonds that are sold in a foreign country and are denominated in the country”s currency in which they are sold are known as
A) foreign bonds.
B) Eurobonds.
C) equity bonds.
D) country bonds.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Function of Financial Intermediaries: Indirect Finance
1) The process of indirect finance using financial intermediaries is called
A) direct lending.
B) financial intermediation.
C) resource allocation.
D) financial liquidation.
2) In the United States, loans from ________ are far ________ important for corporate finance than are securities markets.
A) government agencies; more
B) government agencies; less
C) financial intermediaries; more
D) financial intermediaries; less
3) The time and money spent in carrying out financial transactions are called
A) economies of scale.
B) financial intermediation.
C) liquidity services.
D) transaction costs.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) Economies of scale enable financial institutions to
A) reduce transactions costs.
B) avoid the asymmetric information problem.
C) avoid adverse selection problems.
D) reduce moral hazard.
2) An example of economies of scale in the provision of financial services is
A) investing in a diversified collection of assets.
B) providing depositors with a variety of savings certificates.
C) spreading the cost of borrowed funds over many customers.
D) spreading the cost of writing a standardized contract over many borrowers.
3) Financial intermediaries provide customers with liquidity services. Liquidity services
A) make it easier for customers to conduct transactions.
B) allow customers to have a cup of coffee while waiting in the lobby.
C) are a result of the asymmetric information problem.
D) are another term for asset transformation.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) If bad credit risks are the ones who most actively seek loans and, therefore, receive them from financial intermediaries, then financial intermediaries face the problem of
A) moral hazard.
B) adverse selection.
C) free riding.
D) costly state verification.
2) The problem created by asymmetric information before the transaction occurs is called ________, while the problem created after the transaction occurs is called ________.
A) adverse selection; moral hazard
B) moral hazard; adverse selection
C) costly state verification; free riding
D) free riding; costly state verification
3) Adverse selection is a problem associated with equity and debt contracts arising from
A) the lender”s relative lack of information about the borrower”s potential returns and risks of his investment activities.
B) the lender”s inability to legally require sufficient collateral to cover a 100% loss if the borrower defaults.
C) the borrower”s lack of incentive to seek a loan for highly risky investments.
D) the borrower”s lack of good options for obtaining funds.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) An example of the problem of ________ is when a corporation uses the funds raised from selling bonds to fund corporate expansion to pay for Caribbean cruises for all of its employees and their families.
A) adverse selection
B) moral hazard
C) risk sharing
D) credit risk
2) Studies of the major developed countries show that when businesses go looking for funds to finance their activities they usually obtain these funds from
A) government agencies.
B) equities markets.
C) financial intermediaries.
D) bond markets.
3) The countries that have made the least use of securities markets are ________ and ________; in these two countries finance from financial intermediaries has been almost ten times greater than that from securities markets.
A) Germany; Japan
B) Germany; Great Britain
C) Great Britain; Canada
D) Canada; Japan
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) An important feature of money market mutual fund shares is
A) deposit insurance.
B) the ability to write checks against shareholdings.
C) the ability to borrow against shareholdings.
D) claims on shares of corporate stock.
2) The primary assets of money market mutual funds are
A) stocks.
B) bonds.
C) money market instruments.
D) deposits.
3) An investment bank helps ________ issue securities.
A) a corporation
B) the United States government
C) the SEC
D) foreign governments
4) An investment bank purchases securities from a corporation at a predetermined price and then resells them in the market. This process is called
A) underwriting.
B) underhanded.
C) understanding.
D) undertaking.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Regulation of the Financial System
1) Which of the following is not a goal of financial regulation?
A) Ensuring the soundness of the financial system
B) Reducing moral hazard
C) Reducing adverse selection
D) Ensuring that investors never suffer losses
2) Increasing the amount of information available to investors helps to reduce the problems of ________ and ________ in the financial markets.
A) adverse selection; moral hazard
B) adverse selection; risk sharing
C) moral hazard; transactions costs
D) adverse selection; economies of scale
3) A goal of the Securities and Exchange Commission is to reduce problems arising from
A) competition.
B) banking panics.
C) risk.
D) asymmetric information.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) The purpose of the disclosure requirements of the Securities and Exchange Commission is to
A) increase the information available to investors.
B) prevent bank panics.
C) improve monetary control.
D) protect investors against financial losses.
2) Government regulations to reduce the possibility of financial panic include all of the following except
A) transactions costs.
B) restrictions on assets and activities.
C) disclosure.
D) deposit insurance.
3) Which of the following do not provide charters?
A) The Office of the Comptroller of the Currency
B) The Federal Reserve System
C) The National Credit Union Administration
D) State banking and insurance commissions
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) A restriction on bank activities that was repealed in 1999 was
A) the prohibition of the payment of interest on checking deposits.
B) restrictions on credit terms.
C) minimum down payments on loans to purchase securities.
D) separation of commercial banking from the securities industries.
2) In order to reduce risk and increase the safety of financial institutions, commercial banks and other depository institutions are prohibited from
A) owning municipal bonds.
B) making real estate loans.
C) making personal loans.
D) owning common stock.
3) The primary purpose of deposit insurance is to
A) improve the flow of information to investors.
B) prevent banking panics.
C) protect bank shareholders against losses.
D) protect bank employees from unemployment.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Selected account balances before adjustment for Foxboro Realty at December 31, 2008, the end of the current year, are as follows:
|
|
Debits
|
Credits
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
$18,250
|
|
|
Equipment
|
72,500
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation
|
|
$ 11,900
|
|
Prepaid Rent
|
7,500
|
|
|
Supplies
|
2,050
|
|
|
Wages Payable
|
|
—
|
|
Unearned Fees
|
|
8,500
|
|
Fees Earned
|
|
187,950
|
|
Wages Expense
|
60,100
|
|
|
Rent Expense
|
—
|
|
|
Depreciation Expense
|
—
|
|
|
Supplies Expense
|
—
|
|
Data needed for year end adjustments are as follows:
a. Unbilled fees at December 31, $1,650.
b. Supplies on hand at December 31, $200.
c. Rent expired, $5,000.
d. Depreciation of equipment during year, $1,150.
e. Unearned fees at December 31, $1,500.
f. Wages accrued but not paid at December 31, $3,150.
Instructions
Journalize the six adjusting entries required at December 31, based upon the data presented.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Danville Company specializes in the repair of music equipment and is owned and operated by Harry Nagel. On April 30, 2008, the end of the current year, the accountant for Danville Company prepared the following trial balances:
|
Danville Company Trial Balance April 30, 2008
|
|
|
Unadjusted
|
Adjusted
|
|
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
|
Balances
|
Balances
|
Balances
|
Balances
|
|
Cash
|
12,750
|
|
12,750
|
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
36,500
|
|
36,500
|
|
|
Supplies
|
3,750
|
|
900
|
|
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
4,750
|
|
1,500
|
|
|
Equipment
|
120,150
|
|
120,150
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment
|
|
31,500
|
|
34,000
|
|
Automobiles
|
36,500
|
|
36,500
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation—Automobiles
|
|
18,250
|
|
20,400
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
8,310
|
|
8,800
|
|
Salaries Payable
|
|
—
|
|
2,000
|
|
Unearned Service Fees
|
|
6,000
|
|
2,900
|
|
Harry Nagel, Capital
|
|
131,340
|
|
131,340
|
|
Harry Nagel, Drawing
|
25,000
|
|
25,000
|
|
|
Service Fees Earned
|
|
244,600
|
|
247,700
|
|
Salary Expense
|
172,300
|
|
174,300
|
|
|
Rent Expense
|
18,000
|
|
18,000
|
|
|
Supplies Expense
|
—
|
|
2,850
|
|
|
Depreciation Expense—Equipment
|
—
|
|
2,500
|
|
|
Depreciation Expense—Automobiles
|
—
|
|
2,150
|
|
|
Utilities Expense
|
4,300
|
|
4,790
|
|
|
Taxes Expense
|
2,725
|
|
2,725
|
|
|
Insurance Expense
|
—
|
|
3,250
|
|
|
Miscellaneous Expense
|
3,275
|
|
3,275
|
|
|
|
440,000
|
440,000
|
447,140
|
447,140
|
Instructions
Journalize the seven entries that adjusted the accounts at April 30. None of the accounts were affected by more than one adjusting entry.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cambridge Company is a small editorial services company owned and operated by Dave Maier. On December 31, 2008, the end of the current year, Cambridge Company’s accounting clerk prepared the unadjusted trial balance shown at the top of the following page. The data needed to determine year end adjustments are as follows:
a. Unexpired insurance at December 31, $2,700.
b. Supplies on hand at December 31, $480.
c. Depreciation of building for the year, $1,600.
d. Depreciation of equipment for the year, $4,400.
e. Rent unearned at December 31, $3,250.
f. Accrued salaries and wages at December 31, $2,800.
g. Fees earned but unbilled on December 31, $6,200.
Instructions
1. Journalize the adjusting entries. Add additional accounts as needed.
2. Determine the balances of the accounts affected by the adjusting entries, and prepare an adjusted trial balance.
|
Cambridge Company Unadjusted Trial Balance December 31, 2008
|
|
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
|
Balances
|
Balances
|
|
Cash
|
5,550
|
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
28,350
|
|
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
7,200
|
|
|
Supplies
|
1,980
|
|
|
Land
|
112,500
|
|
|
Building
|
212,250
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation—Building
|
|
137,550
|
|
Equipment
|
135,300
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment
|
|
97,950
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
12,150
|
|
Unearned Rent
|
|
6,750
|
|
Dave Maier, Capital
|
|
201,000
|
|
Dave Maier, Drawing
|
15,000
|
|
|
Fees Earned
|
|
294,600
|
|
Salaries and Wages Expense
|
143,370
|
|
|
Utilities Expense
|
42,375
|
|
|
Advertising Expense
|
22,800
|
|
|
Repairs Expense
|
17,250
|
|
|
Miscellaneous Expense
|
6,075
|
|
|
|
750,000
|
750,000
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
At the end of June, the first month of operations, the following selected data were taken from the financial statements of Teryse Weire, an attorney:
|
Net income for June
|
$155,000
|
|
Total assets at June 30
|
350,000
|
|
Total liabilities at June 30
|
120,000
|
|
Total owner’s equity at June 30
|
230,000
|
In preparing the financial statements, adjustments for the following data were overlooked:
a. Supplies used during June, $1,800.
b. Unbilled fees earned at June 30, $11,600.
c. Depreciation of equipment for June, $4,950.
d. Accrued wages at June 30, $2,250.
Instructions
1. Journalize the entries to record the omitted adjustments.
2. Determine the correct amount of net income for June and the total assets, liabilities, and owner’s equity at June 30. In addition to indicating the corrected amounts, indicate the effect of each omitted adjustment by setting up and completing a columnar table similar to the following. Adjustment (a) is presented as an example.
|
|
Net
|
Total
|
Total
|
Total
|
|
|
Income
|
Assets
|
Liabilities
|
Owner’s Equity
|
|
Reported amounts
|
$155,000
|
$350,000
|
$120,000
|
$230,000
|
|
Corrections:
|
1,800
|
1,800
|
0
|
1,800
|
|
Adjustment (a)
|
|
|
|
|
|
Adjustment (b)
|
|
|
|
|
|
Adjustment (c)
|
|
|
|
|
|
Adjustment (d)
|
|
|
|
|
|
Corrected amounts
|
|
|
|
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
On October 31, 2008, the following data were accumulated to assist the accountant in preparing the adjusting entries for Twin Bluffs Realty:
a. Fees accrued but unbilled at October 31 are $11,385.
b. The supplies account balance on October 31 is $2,973. The supplies on hand at October 31 are $740.
c. Wages accrued but not paid at October 31 are $1,500.
d. The unearned rent account balance at October 31 is $9,450, representing the receipt of an advance payment on October 1 of three months’ rent from tenants.
e. Depreciation of office equipment is $2,650.
Instructions
1. Journalize the adjusting entries required at October 31, 2008.
2. Briefly explain the difference between adjusting entries and entries that would be made to correct errors.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Selected account balances before adjustment for Green Lake Realty at August 31, 2008, the end of the current year, are shown below.
|
Debits
|
Credits
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
$38,250
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation
|
|
$ 26,900
|
|
Depreciation Expense
|
—
|
|
|
Equipment
|
90,500
|
|
|
Fees Earned
|
|
275,500
|
|
Prepaid Rent
|
9,750
|
|
|
Rent Expense
|
—
|
|
|
Supplies
|
2,145
|
|
|
Supplies Expense
|
—
|
|
|
Unearned Fees
|
|
6,175
|
|
Wages Expense
|
81,500
|
|
|
Wages Payable
|
|
—
|
Data needed for year end adjustments are as follows:
a. Supplies on hand at August 31, $500.
b. Depreciation of equipment during year, $1,375.
c. Rent expired during year, $4,525.
d. Wages accrued but not paid at August 31, $2,200.
e. Unearned fees at August 31, $1,500.
f. Unbilled fees at August 31, $6,780.
Instructions
Journalize the six adjusting entries required at August 31, based upon the data presented.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Lincoln Service Co., which specializes in appliance repair services, is owned and operated by Molly Jordan. Lincoln Service Co.’s accounting clerk prepared the following unadjusted trial balance at December 31, 2008, shown below.
|
Lincoln Service Co. Unadjusted Trial Balance December 31, 2008
|
|
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
|
Balances
|
Balances
|
|
Cash
|
2,100
|
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
10,300
|
|
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
3,000
|
|
|
Supplies
|
1,725
|
|
|
Land
|
50,000
|
|
|
Building
|
80,750
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation—Building
|
|
37,850
|
|
Equipment
|
44,000
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment
|
|
17,650
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
3,750
|
|
Unearned Rent
|
|
3,600
|
|
Molly Jordan, Capital
|
|
83,550
|
|
Molly Jordan, Drawing
|
2,500
|
|
|
Fees Earned
|
|
128,600
|
|
Salaries and Wages Expense
|
50,900
|
|
|
Utilities Expense
|
14,100
|
|
|
Advertising Expense
|
7,500
|
|
|
Repairs Expense
|
6,100
|
|
|
Miscellaneous Expense
|
2,025
|
|
|
|
275,000
|
275,000
|
The data needed to determine year end adjustments are as follows:
a. Depreciation of building for the year, $3,500.
b. Depreciation of equipment for the year, $2,300.
c. Accrued salaries and wages at December 31, $1,100.
d. Unexpired insurance at December 31, $750.
e. Fees earned but unbilled on December 31, $3,250.
f. Supplies on hand at December 31, $525.
g. Rent unearned at December 31, $1,500.
Instructions
1. Journalize the adjusting entries. Add additional accounts as needed.
2. Determine the balances of the accounts affected by the adjusting entries and prepare an adjusted trial balance.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The unadjusted trial balance that you prepared for Dancin Music at the end of Chapter 2 should appear as follows:
|
Dancin Music Unadjusted Trial Balance May 31, 2008
|
|
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
|
Balances
|
Balances
|
|
Cash
|
12,085
|
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
2,850
|
|
|
Supplies
|
920
|
|
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
3,360
|
|
|
Office Equipment
|
5,000
|
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
5,750
|
|
Unearned Revenue
|
|
4,800
|
|
Kris Payne, Capital
|
|
12,500
|
|
Kris Payne, Drawing
|
1,300
|
|
|
Fees Earned
|
|
14,750
|
|
Wages Expense
|
2,400
|
|
|
Office Rent Expense
|
2,600
|
|
|
Equipment Rent Expense
|
1,300
|
|
|
Utilities Expense
|
910
|
|
|
Music Expense
|
2,565
|
|
|
Advertising Expense
|
1,730
|
|
|
Supplies Expense
|
180
|
|
|
Miscellaneous Expense
|
600
|
|
|
|
37,800
|
37,800
|
The data needed to determine adjustments for the two month period ending May 31, 2008, are as follows:
a. During May, Dancin Music provided guest disc jockeys for KPRG for a total of 115 hours. For information on the amount of the accrued revenue to be billed to KPRG, see the contract described in the May 3, 2008, transaction at the end of Chapter 2.
b. Supplies on hand at May 31, $160.
c. The balance of the prepaid insurance account relates to the May 1, 2008, transaction at the end of Chapter 2.
d. Depreciation of the office equipment is $100.
e. The balance of the unearned revenue account relates to the contract between Dancin Music and KPRG, described in the May 3, 2008, transaction at the end of Chapter 2.
f. Accrued wages as of May 31, 2008, were $200.
Instructions
1. Prepare adjusting journal entries. You will need the following additional accounts:
18 Accumulated Depreciation—Office Equipment
22 Wages Payable
57 Insurance Expense
58 Depreciation Expense
2. Post the adjusting entries, inserting balances in the accounts affected.
3. Prepare an adjusted trial balance.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Annette Kagel opened Harre Real Estate Co. on January 1, 2007. At the end of the first year, the business needed additional capital. On behalf of Harre Real Estate, Annette applied to Lake County State Bank for a loan of $200,000. Based on Harre Real Estate’s financial statements, which had been prepared on a cash basis, the Lake County State Bank loan officer rejected the loan as too risky.
After receiving the rejection notice, Annette instructed her accountant to prepare the financial statements on an accrual basis. These statements included $31,500 in accounts receivable and $10,200 in accounts payable. Annette then instructed her accountant to record an additional $10,000 of accounts receivable for commissions on property for which a contract had been signed on December 28, 2007, but which would not be formally “closed” and the title transferred until January 5, 2008.
Annette then applied for a $200,000 loan from First National Bank, using the revised financial statements. On this application, Annette indicated that she had not previously been rejected for credit.
Discuss the ethical and professional conduct of Annette Kagel in applying for the loan from First National Bank.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following is an excerpt from a conversation between Sybil Towns and Greg Gibbs just before they boarded a flight to London on American Airlines. They are going to London to attend their company’s annual sales conference.
Sybil: Greg, aren’t you taking an introductory accounting course at college?
Greg: Yes, I decided it’s about time I learned something about accounting. You know, our annual bonuses are based upon the sales figures that come from the accounting department.
Sybil: I guess I never really thought about it.
Greg: You should think about it! Last year, I placed a $500,000 order on December 28. But when I got my bonus, the $500,000 sale wasn’t included. They said it hadn’t been shipped until January 3, so it would have to count in next year’s bonus.
Sybil: A real bummer!
Greg: Right! I was counting on that bonus including the $500,000 sale.
Sybil: Did you complain?
Greg: Yes, but it didn’t do any good. Ashley, the head accountant, said something about matching revenues and expenses. Also, something about not recording revenues until the sale is final. I figure I’d take the accounting course and find out whether she’s just jerking me around.
Sybil: I never really thought about it. When do you think American Airlines will record its revenues from this flight?
Greg: Mmm . . . I guess it could record the revenue when it sells the ticket . . . or . . . when the boarding passes are taken at the door . . . or . . . when we get off the plane . . . or when our company pays for the tickets . . . or . . . I don’t know. I’ll ask my accounting instructor.
Discuss when American Airlines should recognize the revenue from ticket sales to properly match revenues and expenses.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Several years ago, your brother opened Pomona Television Repair. He made a small initial investment and added money from his personal bank account as needed. He withdrew money for living expenses at irregular intervals. As the business grew, he hired an assistant. He is now considering adding more employees, purchasing additional service trucks, and purchasing the building he now rents. To secure funds for the expansion, your brother submitted a loan application to the bank and included the most recent financial statements (shown below) prepared from accounts maintained by a part time bookkeeper.
|
Pomona Television Repair Income Statement For the Year Ended July 31, 2008
|
|
Service revenue
|
$90,000
|
|
Less: Rent paid
|
$30,000
|
|
|
Wages paid
|
28,500
|
|
|
Supplies paid
|
5,100
|
|
|
Utilities paid
|
3,175
|
|
|
Insurance paid
|
2,400
|
|
|
Miscellaneous payments
|
3,600
|
72,775
|
|
Net income
|
|
$17,225
|
|
Pomona Television Repair Balance Sheet July 31, 2008
|
|
Assets
|
|
|
Cash .
|
$10,600
|
|
Amounts due from customers .
|
12,500
|
|
Truck
|
36,900
|
|
Total assets .
|
$60,000
|
|
Equities
|
|
|
Owner’s capital .
|
$60,000
|
After reviewing the financial statements, the loan officer at the bank asked your brother if he used the accrual basis of accounting for revenues and expenses. Your brother responded that he did and that is why he included an account for “Amounts Due from Customers.” The loan officer then asked whether or not the accounts were adjusted prior to the preparation of the statements. Your brother answered that they had not been adjusted.
a. Why do you think the loan officer suspected that the accounts had not been adjusted prior to the preparation of the statements?
b. Indicate possible accounts that might need to be adjusted before an accurate set of financial statements could be prepared.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
After the accounts have been adjusted at July 31, the end of the fiscal year, the following balances are taken from the ledger of Cabriolet Services Co.:
|
Terry Lambert, Capital
|
$615,850
|
|
Terry Lambert, Drawing
|
25,000
|
|
Fees Earned
|
380,450
|
|
Wages Expense
|
250,000
|
|
Rent Expense
|
65,000
|
|
Supplies Expense
|
18,250
|
|
Miscellaneous Expense
|
6,200
|
Journalize the four entries required to close the accounts.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The fiscal years for several well known companies are as follows:
|
Company
|
Fiscal Year Ending
|
Company
|
Fiscal Year Ending
|
|
Kmart
|
January 30
|
Toys “R” Us, Inc.
|
February 3
|
|
JCPenney
|
January 26
|
Federated Department
|
February 3
|
|
|
|
Stores, Inc.
|
|
|
Target Corp.
|
January 28
|
The Limited, Inc.
|
February 2
|
What general characteristic shared by these companies explains why they do not have fiscal years ending December 31?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
After the accounts have been adjusted at October 31, the end of the fiscal year, the following balances were taken from the ledger of Velocity Delivery Services Co.:
|
Lisa Jordon, Capital
|
$318,500
|
|
Lisa Jordon, Drawing
|
36,000
|
|
Fees Earned
|
475,150
|
|
Wages Expense
|
390,000
|
|
Rent Expense
|
85,000
|
|
Supplies Expense
|
38,350
|
|
Miscellaneous Expense
|
12,675
|
Journalize the four entries required to close the accounts.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
After the accounts have been adjusted at April 30, the end of the fiscal year, the following balances were taken from the ledger of Magnolia Landscaping Co.:
|
Jayme Carmichael, Capital
|
$528,900
|
|
Jayme Carmichael, Drawing
|
60,000
|
|
Fees Earned
|
690,500
|
|
Wages Expense
|
410,000
|
|
Rent Expense
|
75,000
|
|
Supplies Expense
|
48,650
|
|
Miscellaneous Expense
|
19,700
|
Journalize the four entries required to close the accounts.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following accounts were taken from the unadjusted trial balance of Hartford Co., a congressional lobbying firm. Indicate whether or not each account would normally require an adjusting entry. If the account normally requires an adjusting entry, use the following notation to indicate the type of adjustment:
AE—Accrued Expense
AR—Accrued Revenue
PE—Prepaid Expense
UR—Unearned Revenue
|
Account
|
Answer
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
Normally requires adjustment (AR).
|
|
Cash
|
|
|
Charmaine Hollis, Drawing
|
|
|
Interest Payable
|
|
|
Interest Receivable
|
|
|
Land
|
|
|
Office Equipment
|
|
|
Prepaid Rent
|
|
|
Supplies
|
|
|
Unearned Fees
|
|
|
Wages Expense
|
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The supplies and supplies expense accounts at December 31, after adjusting entries have been posted at the end of the first year of operations, are shown in the following T accounts:
|
Supplies
|
Supplies Expense
|
|
Bal.
|
279
|
|
Bal.
|
1,261
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Determine the amount of supplies purchased during the year.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The wages payable and wages expense accounts at March 31, after adjusting entries have been posted at the end of the first month of operations, are shown in the following T accounts:
| |
Wages Payable
|
|
Wages Expense
|
|
| |
Bal.
|
6,480
|
Bal.
|
72,150
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Determine the amount of wages paid during the month.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The accountant for Sweetwater Laundry prepared the following unadjusted and adjusted trial balances. Assume that all balances in the unadjusted trial balance and the amounts of the adjustments are correct. Identify the errors in the accountant’s adjusting entries.
|
Tomahawk Services Co. Trial Balance July 31, 2008
|
|
|
Unadjusted
|
Adjusted
|
| |
Debit
|
Credit
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
| |
Balances
|
Balances
|
Balances
|
Balances
|
|
Cash
|
7,500
|
|
7,500
|
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
18,250
|
|
22,000
|
|
|
Laundry Supplies
|
3,750
|
|
5,500
|
|
|
Prepaid Insurance*
|
5,200
|
|
1,400
|
|
|
Laundry Equipment
|
140,000
|
|
134,000
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation
|
|
48,000
|
|
48,000
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
9,600
|
|
9,600
|
|
Wages Payable
|
|
|
|
1,200
|
|
Mattie Ivy, Capital
|
|
60,300
|
|
60,300
|
|
Mattie Ivy, Drawing
|
|
|
28,775
|
|
|
Laundry Revenue
|
24
|
182,100
|
|
182,100
|
|
Wages Expense
|
49,200
|
|
49,200
|
|
|
Rent Expense
|
25,575
|
|
25,575
|
|
|
Utilities Expense
|
18,500
|
|
18,500
|
|
|
Depreciation Expense
|
|
|
6,000
|
|
|
Laundry Supplies Expense
|
|
|
1,750
|
|
|
Insurance Expense
|
|
|
800
|
|
|
Miscellaneous Expense
|
3,250
|
|
3,250
|
|
| |
300,000
|
300,000
|
304,250
|
301,200
|
*$3,800 of insurance expired during the year.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
On July 31, 2008, the following data were accumulated to assist the accountant in preparing the adjusting entries for Fremont Realty:
a. The supplies account balance on July 31 is $1,975. The supplies on hand on July 31 are $625.
b. The unearned rent account balance on July 31 is $3,750, representing the receipt of an advance payment on July 1 of three months’ rent from tenants.
c. Wages accrued but not paid at July 31 are $1,000.
d. Fees accrued but unbilled at July 31 are $12,275.
e. Depreciation of office equipment is $850.
Instructions
1. Journalize the adjusting entries required at July 31, 2008.
2. Briefly explain the difference between adjusting entries and entries that would be made to correct errors.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Andry Corporation uses activity based costing to determine product costs for external financial reports. The company has provided the following data concerning its activity based costing system:
|
Activity Cost Pools (and Activity Measures)
|
Estimated Overhead Cost
|
|
Machine related (machine hours)
|
$177,000
|
|
Batch setup (setups)
|
$453,600
|
|
General factory (direct labor hours)
|
$227,000
|
|
|
Expected Activity
|
|
Activity Cost Pools
|
Total
|
Product X
|
Product Y
|
|
Machine related
|
10,000
|
7,000
|
3,000
|
|
Batch setup
|
7,000
|
5,000
|
2,000
|
|
General factory
|
10,000
|
6,000
|
4,000
|
The activity rate for the batch setup activity cost pool is closest to:
A) $122.50
B) $226.80
C) $90.70
D) $64.80
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Andry Corporation uses activity based costing to determine product costs for external financial reports. The company has provided the following data concerning its activity based costing system:
|
Activity Cost Pools (and Activity Measures)
|
Estimated Overhead Cost
|
|
Machine related (machine hours)
|
$177,000
|
|
Batch setup (setups)
|
$453,600
|
|
General factory (direct labor hours)
|
$227,000
|
|
|
Expected Activity
|
|
Activity Cost Pools
|
Total
|
Product X
|
Product Y
|
|
Machine related
|
10,000
|
7,000
|
3,000
|
|
Batch setup
|
7,000
|
5,000
|
2,000
|
|
General factory
|
10,000
|
6,000
|
4,000
|
Assuming that actual activity turns out to be the same as expected activity, the total amount of overhead cost allocated to Product X would be closest to:
A) $613,000
B) $454,000
C) $428,800
D) $584,100
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Carsten Wedding Fantasy Company makes very elaborate wedding cakes to order. The owner of the company has provided the following data concerning the activity rates in its activity based costing system:
|
Activity Cost Pools
|
Activity Rate
|
|
Size related
|
$0.75 per guest
|
|
Complexity related
|
$34.41 per tier
|
|
Order related
|
$84.03 per order
|
The measure of activity for the size related activity cost pool is the number of planned guests at the wedding reception. The greater the number of guests, the larger the cake. The measure of complexity is the number of tiers in the cake. The activity measure for the order related cost pool is the number of orders. (Each wedding involves one order.) The activity rates include the costs of raw ingredients such as flour, sugar, eggs, and shortening. The activity rates do not include the costs of purchased decorations such as miniature statues and wedding bells, which are accounted for separately.
Data concerning two recent orders appear below:
|
|
Ruise Wedding
|
Karmo Wedding
|
|
Number of reception guests
|
79
|
164
|
|
Number of tiers on the cake
|
2
|
4
|
|
Cost of purchased decorations for cake
|
$17.30
|
$56.86
|
Assuming that all of the costs listed above are avoidable costs in the event that an order is turned down, what amount would the company have to charge for the Ruise wedding cake to just break even?
A) $229.40
B) $84.03
C) $277.57
D) $17.30
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Carsten Wedding Fantasy Company makes very elaborate wedding cakes to order. The owner of the company has provided the following data concerning the activity rates in its activity based costing system:
|
Activity Cost Pools
|
Activity Rate
|
|
Size related
|
$0.75 per guest
|
|
Complexity related
|
$34.41 per tier
|
|
Order related
|
$84.03 per order
|
The measure of activity for the size related activity cost pool is the number of planned guests at the wedding reception. The greater the number of guests, the larger the cake. The measure of complexity is the number of tiers in the cake. The activity measure for the order related cost pool is the number of orders. (Each wedding involves one order.) The activity rates include the costs of raw ingredients such as flour, sugar, eggs, and shortening. The activity rates do not include the costs of purchased decorations such as miniature statues and wedding bells, which are accounted for separately.
Data concerning two recent orders appear below:
|
|
Ruise Wedding
|
Karmo Wedding
|
|
Number of reception guests
|
79
|
164
|
|
Number of tiers on the cake
|
2
|
4
|
|
Cost of purchased decorations for cake
|
$17.30
|
$56.86
|
Assuming that the company charges $485.85 for the Karmo wedding cake, what would be the overall margin on the order?
A) $84.32
B) $141.18
C) $401.53
D) $168.35
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Thoen Nuptial Bakery makes very elaborate wedding cakes to order. The company has an activity based costing system with three activity cost pools. The activity rate for the Size Related activity cost pool is $0.96 per guest. (The greater the number of guests, the larger the cake.) The activity rate for the Complexity Related cost pool is $54.24 per tier. (Cakes with more tiers are more complex.) Finally, the activity rate for the Order Related activity cost pool is $56.44 per order. (Each wedding involves one order for a cake.) The activity rates include the costs of raw ingredients such as flour, sugar, eggs, and shortening. The activity rates do not include the costs of purchased decorations such as miniature statues and wedding
bells, which are accounted for separately.
Data concerning two recent orders appear below:
|
|
Nie Wedding
|
Strobl Wedding
|
|
Number of reception guests
|
67
|
129
|
|
Number of tiers on the cake
|
3
|
5
|
|
Cost of purchased decorations for cake
|
$23.50
|
$31.31
|
Assuming that all of the costs listed above are avoidable costs in the event that an order is turned down, what amount would the company have to charge for the Nie wedding cake to just break even?
A) $56.44
B) $306.98
C) $23.50
D) $371.45
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Thoen Nuptial Bakery makes very elaborate wedding cakes to order. The company has an activity based costing system with three activity cost pools. The activity rate for the Size Related activity cost pool is $0.96 per guest. (The greater the number of guests, the larger the cake.) The activity rate for the Complexity Related cost pool is $54.24 per tier. (Cakes with more tiers are more complex.) Finally, the activity rate for the Order Related activity cost pool is $56.44 per order. (Each wedding involves one order for a cake.) The activity rates include the costs of raw ingredients such as flour, sugar, eggs, and shortening. The activity rates do not include the costs of purchased decorations such as miniature statues and wedding
bells, which are accounted for separately.
Data concerning two recent orders appear below:
|
|
Nie Wedding
|
Strobl Wedding
|
|
Number of reception guests
|
67
|
129
|
|
Number of tiers on the cake
|
3
|
5
|
|
Cost of purchased decorations for cake
|
$23.50
|
$31.31
|
Assuming that the company charges $584.18 for the Strobl wedding cake, what would be the overall margin on the order?
A) $157.83
B) $101.39
C) $132.70
D) $482.79
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Grip Catering uses activity based costing for its overhead costs. The company has provided the following data concerning the activity rates in its activity based costing system:
|
|
Preparing
|
Arranging
|
|
Activity Cost Pools
|
Meals
|
Functions
|
|
Wages
|
$0.65
|
$145.00
|
|
Supplies
|
$0.40
|
$170.00
|
|
Other expenses
|
$0.20
|
$80.00
|
The number of meals served is the measure of activity for the Preparing Meals activity cost pool. The number of functions catered is used as the activity measure for the Arranging Functions activity cost pool.
Management would like to know whether the company made any money on a recent function at which 50 meals were served. The company catered the function for a fixed price of $22.00 per meal. The cost of the raw ingredients for the meals was $12.60 per meal. This cost is in addition to the costs of wages, supplies, and other expenses detailed above. For the purposes of preparing action analyses, management has assigned ease of adjustment codes to the costs as follows: wages are classified as a Yellow cost; supplies and raw ingredients as a Green cost; and other expenses as a Red cost.
According to the activity based costing system, what was the total cost (including the costs of raw ingredients) of the function mentioned above? (Round to the nearest whole dollar.)
A) $1,088
B) $1,288
C) $588
D) $438
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Grip Catering uses activity based costing for its overhead costs. The company has provided the following data concerning the activity rates in its activity based costing system:
|
|
Preparing
|
Arranging
|
|
Activity Cost Pools
|
Meals
|
Functions
|
|
Wages
|
$0.65
|
$145.00
|
|
Supplies
|
$0.40
|
$170.00
|
|
Other expenses
|
$0.20
|
$80.00
|
The number of meals served is the measure of activity for the Preparing Meals activity cost pool. The number of functions catered is used as the activity measure for the Arranging Functions activity cost pool.
Management would like to know whether the company made any money on a recent function at which 50 meals were served. The company catered the function for a fixed price of $22.00 per meal. The cost of the raw ingredients for the meals was $12.60 per meal. This cost is in addition to the costs of wages, supplies, and other expenses detailed above. For the purposes of preparing action analyses, management has assigned ease of adjustment codes to the costs as follows: wages are classified as a Yellow cost; supplies and raw ingredients as a Green cost; and other expenses as a Red cost.
Suppose an action analysis report is prepared for the function mentioned above. What would be the “yellow margin” in the action analysis report? (Round to the nearest whole dollar.)
A) $178
B) $228
C) $103
D) $283
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Grisim Catering uses activity based costing for its overhead costs. The company has provided the following data concerning the activity rates in its activity based costing system:
|
|
Preparing
|
Arranging
|
|
Activity Cost Pools
|
Meals
|
Functions
|
|
Wages
|
$0.75
|
$175.00
|
|
Supplies
|
$0.50
|
$280.00
|
|
Other expenses
|
$0.35
|
$130.00
|
The number of meals served is the measure of activity for the Preparing Meals activity cost pool. The number of functions catered is used as the activity measure for the Arranging Functions activity cost pool.
Management would like to know whether the company made any money on a recent function at which 130 meals were served. The company catered the function for a fixed price of $11.00 per meal. The cost of the raw ingredients for the meals was $6.90 per meal. This cost is in addition to the costs of wages, supplies, and other expenses detailed above.
For the purposes of preparing action analyses, management has assigned ease of adjustment codes to the costs as follows: wages are classified as a Yellow cost; supplies and raw ingredients as a Green cost; and other expenses as a Red cost.
Suppose an action analysis report is prepared for the function mentioned above. What would be the “red margin” in the action analysis report? (Round to the nearest whole dollar.)
A) $(110)
B) $(360)
C) $(410)
D) $(260)
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Grisim Catering uses activity based costing for its overhead costs. The company has provided the following data concerning the activity rates in its activity based costing system:
|
|
Preparing
|
Arranging
|
|
Activity Cost Pools
|
Meals
|
Functions
|
|
Wages
|
$0.75
|
$175.00
|
|
Supplies
|
$0.50
|
$280.00
|
|
Other expenses
|
$0.35
|
$130.00
|
The number of meals served is the measure of activity for the Preparing Meals activity cost pool. The number of functions catered is used as the activity measure for the Arranging Functions activity cost pool.
Management would like to know whether the company made any money on a recent function at which 130 meals were served. The company catered the function for a fixed price of $11.00 per meal. The cost of the raw ingredients for the meals was $6.90 per meal. This cost is in addition to the costs of wages, supplies, and other expenses detailed above.
For the purposes of preparing action analyses, management has assigned ease of adjustment codes to the costs as follows: wages are classified as a Yellow cost; supplies and raw ingredients as a Green cost; and other expenses as a Red cost.
Suppose an action analysis report is prepared for the function mentioned above. What would be the “yellow margin” in the action analysis report? (Round to the nearest whole dollar.)
A) $(10)
B) $40
C) $95
D) $(85)
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Swagg Jewelry Corporation manufactures custom jewelry. In the past, Swagg has been using a traditional overhead allocation system based solely on direct labor hours. Sensing that this system was distorting costs and selling prices, Swagg has decided to switch to an activity based costing system using three activity cost pools. Information on these activity cost pools are as follows:
|
Activity Cost Pool
|
Estimated Activity
|
Estimated Overhead Cost
|
|
Labor related
|
8,000 direct labor hours
|
$40,000
|
|
Machine related
|
12,500 machine hours
|
$50,000
|
|
Quality control
|
800 number of inspections
|
$12,000
|
Job #309 incurred $900 of direct material, 30 hours of direct labor at $40 per hour, 80 machine hours, and 5 inspections.
Required:
a. What is the cost of the job under the activity based costing system?
b. Relative to the activity based costing system, would Job #309 have been overcosted or undercosted under the traditional system and by how much?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Imai Draperies makes custom draperies for homes and businesses. The company uses an activity based costing system for its overhead costs. The company has provided the following data concerning its annual overhead costs and its activity cost pools.
|
Overhead costs:
|
Estimated Activity
|
|
Production overhead
|
$240,000
|
|
Office expense
|
160,000
|
|
Total
|
$400,000
|
Distribution of resource consumption:
|
|
Making
|
Job
|
|
|
|
Activity Cost Pools
|
Drapes
|
Support
|
Other
|
Total
|
|
Production overhead
|
35%
|
45%
|
20%
|
100%
|
|
Office expense
|
15%
|
55%
|
30%
|
100%
|
The “Other” activity cost pool consists of the costs of idle capacity and organization sustaining costs.
The amount of activity for the year is as follows:
|
Activity Cost Pool
|
Annual Activity
|
|
Making drapes
|
4,000 yards
|
|
Job support
|
100 jobs
|
|
Other
|
Not applicable
|
Required:
a. Prepare the first stage allocation of overhead costs to the activity cost pools by filling in the table below:
|
|
Making
|
Job
|
|
|
|
|
Drapes
|
Support
|
Other
|
Total
|
|
Production overhead
|
|
|
|
|
|
Office expense
|
|
|
|
|
|
Total
|
|
|
|
|
b. Compute the activity rates (i.e., cost per unit of activity) for the Making Drapes and Job Support activity cost pools by filling in the table below:
|
|
Making
|
Job
|
|
|
Drapes
|
Support
|
|
Production overhead
|
|
|
|
Office expense
|
|
|
|
Total
|
|
|
c. Prepare an action analysis report in good form of a job that involves making 53 yards of drapes and has direct materials and direct labor cost of $1,480. The sales revenue from this job is $5,200. For purposes of this action analysis report, direct materials and direct labor should be classified as a Green cost; production overhead as a Red cost; and office expense as a Yellow cost.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Hastings Hardwood Floors installs oak and other hardwood floors in homes and businesses. The company uses an activity based costing system for its overhead costs. The company has provided the following data concerning its annual overhead costs and its activity based costing system:
|
Overhead costs:
|
|
|
Production overhead
|
$110,000
|
|
Office expense
|
130,000
|
|
Total
|
$240,000
|
Distribution of resource consumption:
|
|
Installing
|
Job
|
|
|
|
|
Floors
|
Support
|
|
|
|
Activity Cost Pools
|
50%
|
30%
|
Other
|
Total
|
|
Production overhead
|
5%
|
65%
|
20%
|
100%
|
|
Office expense
|
Installing
|
Job
|
30%
|
100%
|
The “Other” activity cost pool consists of the costs of idle capacity and organization sustaining costs.
The amount of activity for the year is as follows:
|
Activity Cost Pool
|
Annual Activity
|
|
Installing floors
|
400 squares
|
|
Job support
|
100 jobs
|
|
Other
|
Not applicable
|
A “square” is a measure of area that is roughly equivalent to 1,000 square feet.
Required:
a. Prepare the first stage allocation of overhead costs to the activity cost pools by filling in the table below:
|
|
Installing
|
Job
|
|
|
|
|
Floors
|
Support
|
Other
|
Total
|
|
Production overhead
|
|
|
|
|
|
Office expense
|
|
|
|
|
|
Total
|
|
|
|
|
b. Compute the activity rates (i.e., cost per unit of activity) for the Installing Floors and Job Support activity cost pools by filling in the table below:
|
|
Installing
|
Job
|
|
|
Floors
|
Support
|
|
Production overhead
|
|
|
|
Office expense
|
|
|
|
Total
|
|
|
c. Compute the overhead cost, according to the activity based costing system, of a job that involves installing 1.8 squares.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Goldbard Company, a wholesale distributor, uses activity based costing for its overhead costs. The company has provided the following data concerning its annual overhead costs and its activity based costing system:
|
Overhead costs:
|
|
|
Wages and salaries
|
$540,000
|
|
Nonwage expenses
|
220,000
|
|
Total
|
$760,000
|
Distribution of resource consumption:
|
|
Filling
|
Product
|
|
|
|
Activity Cost Pools
|
Orders
|
Support
|
Other
|
Total
|
|
Wages and salaries
|
55%
|
35%
|
10%
|
100%
|
|
Nonwage expenses
|
15%
|
65%
|
20%
|
100%
|
The “Other” activity cost pool consists of the costs of idle capacity and organization sustaining costs.
The amount of activity for the year is as follows:
|
Activity Cost Pool
|
Annual Activity
|
|
Filling orders
|
3,000 orders
|
|
Product support
|
30 products
|
|
Other
|
Not applicable
|
Required:
Compute the activity rates (i.e., cost per unit of activity) for the Filling Orders and Product Support activity cost pools by filling in the table below:
|
|
Filling
|
Product
|
|
|
Orders
|
Support
|
|
Wages and salaries
|
|
|
|
Nonwage expenses
|
|
|
|
Total
|
|
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Fields & Maaner PLC, a consulting firm, uses an activity based costing in which there are three activity cost pools. The company has provided the following data concerning its costs and its activity based costing system:
|
Costs:
|
|
|
Wages and salaries
|
$560,000
|
|
Travel expenses
|
140,000
|
|
Other expenses
|
140,000
|
|
Total
|
$840,000
|
Distribution of resource consumption:
|
|
Working On
|
Business
|
|
|
|
Activity Cost Pools
|
Engagements
|
Development
|
Other
|
Total
|
|
Wages and salaries
|
45%
|
25%
|
30%
|
100%
|
|
Travel expenses
|
60%
|
30%
|
10%
|
100%
|
|
Other expenses
|
30%
|
30%
|
40%
|
100%
|
Required:
a. How much cost, in total, would be allocated to the Working On Engagements activity cost pool?
b. How much cost, in total, would be allocated to the Business Development activity cost pool?
c. How much cost, in total, would be allocated to the Other activity cost pool?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Duckhorn Housecleaning provides housecleaning services to its clients. The company uses an activity based costing system for its overhead costs. The company has provided the following data from its activity based costing system.
|
|
Total
|
|
|
Activity Cost Pool
|
Cost
|
Total Activity
|
|
Cleaning
|
$645,576
|
72,700 hours
|
|
Job support
|
$129,546
|
5,400 jobs
|
|
Client support
|
$ 20,900
|
760 clients
|
|
Other
|
$110,000
|
Not applicable
|
|
Total
|
$906,022
|
|
The “Other” activity cost pool consists of the costs of idle capacity and organization sustaining
costs. One particular client, the Lumbard family, requested 31 jobs during the year that required a total of 62 hours of housecleaning. For this service, the client was charged $1,620
Required:
a. Compute the activity rates (i.e., cost per unit of activity) for the activity cost pools. Round off all calculations to the nearest whole cent.
b. Using the activity based costing system, compute the customer margin for the Lumbard family. Round off all calculations to the nearest whole cent.
c. Assume the company decides instead to use a traditional costing system in which ALL costs are allocated to customers on the basis of cleaning hours. Compute the margin for the Lumbard family. Round off all calculations to the nearest whole cen
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Jardon Painting paints the interiors and exteriors of homes and commercial buildings. The company uses an activity based costing system for its overhead costs. The company has provided the following data concerning its activity based costing
|
Activity Cost Pool
|
Activity Measure
|
Annual Activity
|
|
Painting overhead
|
Square meters
|
10,000 square meters
|
|
Job support
|
Jobs
|
200 jobs
|
|
Other
|
None
|
Not applicable
|
The “Other” activity cost pool consists of the costs of idle capacity and organization sustaining costs.
The company has already finished the first stage of the allocation process in which costs were allocated to the activity cost centers. The results are listed below:
|
|
|
Job
|
|
|
|
|
Painting
|
Support
|
Other
|
Total
|
|
Painting overhead
|
$ 99,000
|
$ 77,000
|
$44,000
|
$220,000
|
|
Office expense
|
14,000
|
84,000
|
42,000
|
140,000
|
|
Total
|
$113,000
|
$161,000
|
$86,000
|
$360,000
|
Required:
a. Compute the activity rates (i.e., cost per unit of activity) for the Painting and Job Support activity cost pools by filling in the table below. Round off all calculations to the nearest whole cent.
|
|
|
Job
|
|
|
Painting
|
Support
|
|
Painting overhead
|
|
|
|
Office expense
|
|
|
|
Total
|
|
|
b. Prepare an action analysis report in good form of a job that involves painting 69 square meters and has direct materials and direct labor cost of $2,190. The sales revenue from this job is $3,400. For purposes of this action analysis report, direct materials and direct labor should be classified as a Green cost; painting overhead as a Red cost; and office expense as a Yellow cost.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cabalo Company manufactures two products, Product C and Product D. The company estimated it would incur $130,890 in manufacturing overhead costs during the current period. Overhead currently is applied to the products on the basis of direct labor hours. Data concerning the current period”s operations appear below:
|
|
Product C
|
Product D
|
|
Estimated unit production
|
400 units
|
1,200 units
|
|
Direct labor hours per unit
|
0.70 hour
|
1.20 hours
|
|
Direct materials cost per unit
|
$10.70
|
$16.70
|
|
Direct labor cost per unit
|
$11.20
|
$19.20
|
Required:
a. Compute the predetermined overhead rate under the current method, and determine the unit product cost of each product for the current year.
b. The company is considering using an activity based costing system to compute unit product costs for external financial reports instead of its traditional system based on direct labor hours. The activity based costing system would use three activity cost pools. Data relating to these activities for the current period are given below:
|
|
Estimated
|
Expected Activity
|
|
|
Overhead
|
Product C
|
Product D
|
Total
|
|
Activity Cost Pool
|
Costs
|
100
|
130
|
230
|
|
Machine setups
|
$ 13,570
|
810
|
1,270
|
2,080
|
|
Purchase orders
|
91,520
|
280
|
1,440
|
1,720
|
|
General factory
|
25,800
|
|
|
|
|
|
$130,890
|
|
|
|
Determine the unit product cost of each product for the current period using the activity based costing approach.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Danno Company manufactures two products, Product F and Product G. The company expects to produce and sell 600 units of Product F and 6,000 units of Product G during the current year. The company uses activity based costing to compute unit product costs for external reports. Data relating to the company”s three activity cost pools are given below for the current year:
|
|
Estimated
|
Expected Activity
|
|
|
Overhead
|
|
|
|
|
Activity Cost Pool
|
Costs
|
Product F
|
Product G
|
Total
|
|
Machine setups
|
$5,250
|
60
|
150
|
210
|
|
Purchase orders
|
$74,100
|
620
|
1,280
|
1,900
|
|
General factory
|
$89,880
|
840
|
12,000
|
12,840
|
Required:
Using the activity based costing approach, determine the overhead cost per unit for each product.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Three years ago, T. Roderick organized Harbor Realty. At July 31, 2008, the end of the current year, the unadjusted trial balance of Harbor Realty appears as shown below.
|
Harbor Realty Unadjusted Trial Balance July 31, 2008
|
| |
Debit
|
Credit
|
| |
Balances
|
Balances
|
|
Cash
|
3,42,500
|
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
7,00,000
|
|
|
Supplies
|
1,27,000
|
|
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
62,000
|
|
|
Office Equipment
|
51,65,000
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation
|
|
9,70,000
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
92,500
|
|
Wages Payable
|
|
000
|
|
Unearned Fees
|
|
1,25,000
|
|
T. Roderick, Capital
|
|
29,00,000
|
|
T. Roderick, Drawing
|
5,20,000
|
|
|
Fees Earned
|
|
59,12,500
|
|
Wages Expense
|
22,41,500
|
|
|
Depreciation Expense
|
000
|
|
|
Rent Expense
|
4,20,000
|
|
|
Utilities Expense
|
2,71,500
|
|
|
Supplies Expense
|
000
|
|
|
Insurance Expense
|
000
|
|
|
Miscellaneous Expense
|
1,50,500
|
|
| |
10,000,000
|
10,000,000
|
The data needed to determine year end adjustments are as follows:
a. Supplies on hand at July 31, 2008, $380.
b. Insurance premiums expired during the year, $315.
c. Depreciation of equipment during the year, $4,950.
d. Wages accrued but not paid at July 31, 2008, $440.
e. Accrued fees earned but not recorded at July 31, 2008, $1,000.
f. Unearned fees on July 31, 2008, $750.
Instructions
1. Prepare the necessary adjusting journal entries. Include journal entry explanations.
2. Determine the balance of the accounts affected by the adjusting entries, and prepare an adjusted trial balance.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Foro Florist specializes in large floral bouquets for hotels and other commercial spaces. The company has provided the following data concerning its annual overhead costs and its activity based costing system:
|
Overhead costs:
|
|
|
Wages and salaries
|
$ 80,000
|
|
Other expenses
|
40,000
|
|
Total
|
$120,000
|
Distribution of resource consumption:
|
|
Activity Cost Pools
|
|
|
Making Bouquets
|
Delivery
|
Other
|
Total
|
|
Wages and salaries
|
50%
|
40%
|
10%
|
100%
|
|
Other expenses
|
60%
|
10%
|
30%
|
100%
|
The “Other” activity cost pool consists of the costs of idle capacity and organization sustaining costs.
The amount of activity for the year is as follows:
|
Activity Cost Pool
|
Activity
|
|
Making bouquets
|
20,000 bouquets
|
|
Delivery
|
6,000 deliveries
|
What would be the total overhead cost per delivery according to the activity based costing system? In other words, what would be the overall activity rate for the deliveries activity cost pool? (Round to the nearest whole cent.)
A) $8.00
B) $5.00
C) $6.00
D) $2.00
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Dimaio Company uses an activity based costing system with three activity cost pools. The company has provided the following data concerning its costs and its activity based costing system:
|
Overhead costs:
|
|
|
Manufacturing overhead
|
$580,000
|
|
Selling and administrative expenses v
|
240,000
|
|
Total
|
$820,000
|
Distribution of resource consumption:
|
|
Activity Cost Pools
|
|
|
Order Size
|
Customer Support
|
Other
|
Total
|
|
Manufacturing overhead
|
50%
|
40%
|
10%
|
100%
|
|
Selling and administrative expenses
|
5%
|
75%
|
20%
|
100%
|
The “Other” activity cost pool consists of the costs of idle capacity and organization sustaining costs.
You have been asked to complete the first stage allocation of costs to the activity cost pools.
How much cost, in total, would be allocated in the first stage allocation to the Order Size activity cost pool?
A) $302,000
B) $41,000
C) $225,500
D) $410,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Dimaio Company uses an activity based costing system with three activity cost pools. The company has provided the following data concerning its costs and its activity based costing system:
|
Overhead costs:
|
|
|
Manufacturing overhead
|
$580,000
|
|
Selling and administrative expenses v
|
240,000
|
|
Total
|
$820,000
|
Distribution of resource consumption:
|
|
Activity Cost Pools
|
|
|
Order Size
|
Customer Support
|
Other
|
Total
|
|
Manufacturing overhead
|
50%
|
40%
|
10%
|
100%
|
|
Selling and administrative expenses
|
5%
|
75%
|
20%
|
100%
|
The “Other” activity cost pool consists of the costs of idle capacity and organization sustaining costs.
You have been asked to complete the first stage allocation of costs to the activity cost pools.
How much cost, in total, would be allocated in the first stage allocation to the Customer Support activity cost pool?
A) $328,000
B) $412,000
C) $471,500
D) $615,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Njombe Corporation manufactures a variety of products. In the past, Njombe has been using a traditional costing system in which the predetermined overhead rate was 150% of direct labor cost. Selling prices had been set by multiplying total product cost by 200%. Sensing that this system was distorting costs and selling prices, Njombe has decided to switch to an activity based costing system for manufacturing overhead costs using three activity cost pools. Selling prices are still to be set at 200% of unit product cost under the new system. Information on these cost pools for next year are as follows:
|
Activity Cost Pool
|
Estimated Activity
|
Estimated Overhead Cost
|
|
Machine Setups
|
400 Number of setups
|
$150,000
|
|
Quality Control
|
1,500 Number of inspections
|
$180,000
|
|
Other Overhead
|
30,000 Machine hours
|
$480,000
|
Information (on a per unit basis) related to three popular products at Njombe are as follows:
|
|
Model #19
|
Model #36
|
Model #58
|
|
Direct material cost
|
$400
|
$540
|
$310
|
|
Direct labor cost
|
$810
|
$600
|
$220
|
|
Number of setups
|
2
|
3
|
1
|
|
Number of inspections
|
1
|
3
|
1
|
|
Number of machine hours
|
4
|
8
|
10
|
Under the traditional system, what would be the selling price of one unit of Model
#36?
A) $2,536
B) $2,712
C) $4,080
D) $5,506
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Njombe Corporation manufactures a variety of products. In the past, Njombe has been using a traditional costing system in which the predetermined overhead rate was 150% of direct labor cost. Selling prices had been set by multiplying total product cost by 200%. Sensing that this system was distorting costs and selling prices, Njombe has decided to switch to an activity based costing system for manufacturing overhead costs using three activity cost pools. Selling prices are still to be set at 200% of unit product cost under the new system. Information on these cost pools for next year are as follows:
|
Activity Cost Pool
|
Estimated Activity
|
Estimated Overhead Cost
|
|
Machine Setups
|
400 Number of setups
|
$150,000
|
|
Quality Control
|
1,500 Number of inspections
|
$180,000
|
|
Other Overhead
|
30,000 Machine hours
|
$480,000
|
Information (on a per unit basis) related to three popular products at Njombe are as follows:
|
|
Model #19
|
Model #36
|
Model #58
|
|
Direct material cost
|
$400
|
$540
|
$310
|
|
Direct labor cost
|
$810
|
$600
|
$220
|
|
Number of setups
|
2
|
3
|
1
|
|
Number of inspections
|
1
|
3
|
1
|
|
Number of machine hours
|
4
|
8
|
10
|
Under the activity based costing system, what would be the selling price of one unit of Model #36?
A) $2,536
B) $2,712
C) $4,080
D) $5,506
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Njombe Corporation manufactures a variety of products. In the past, Njombe has been using a traditional costing system in which the predetermined overhead rate was 150% of direct labor cost. Selling prices had been set by multiplying total product cost by 200%. Sensing that this system was distorting costs and selling prices, Njombe has decided to switch to an activity based costing system for manufacturing overhead costs using three activity cost pools. Selling prices are still to be set at 200% of unit product cost under the new system. Information on these cost pools for next year are as follows:
|
Activity Cost Pool
|
Estimated Activity
|
Estimated Overhead Cost
|
|
Machine Setups
|
400 Number of setups
|
$150,000
|
|
Quality Control
|
1,500 Number of inspections
|
$180,000
|
|
Other Overhead
|
30,000 Machine hours
|
$480,000
|
Information (on a per unit basis) related to three popular products at Njombe are as follows:
|
|
Model #19
|
Model #36
|
Model #58
|
|
Direct material cost
|
$400
|
$540
|
$310
|
|
Direct labor cost
|
$810
|
$600
|
$220
|
|
Number of setups
|
2
|
3
|
1
|
|
Number of inspections
|
1
|
3
|
1
|
|
Number of machine hours
|
4
|
8
|
10
|
In comparing the traditional system with the activity based costing system, which of Njombe’s Models had higher unit product costs under the traditional system?
A) #19
B) #58
C) #19 and #58
D) #36 and #58
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Acklin Company has two products: A and B. Annual production and sales are 600 units of Product A and 900 units of Product B. The company has traditionally used direct labor hours as the basis for applying all manufacturing overhead to products. Product A requires 0.5 direct labor hours per unit and Product B requires 0.3 direct labor hours per unit. The total estimated overhead for next period is $63,322. The company is considering switching to an activity based costing system for the purpose of computing unit product costs for external reports. The new activity based costing system would have three overhead activity cost pools—Activity 1, Activity 2, and General Factory— with estimated overhead costs and expected activity as follows:
|
|
Estimated
|
|
|
|
|
|
Overhead
|
Expected Activity
|
|
Activity Cost Pool
|
Cost
|
Product A
|
Product B
|
Total
|
|
Activity 1
|
$18,900
|
700
|
200
|
900
|
|
Activity 2
|
15,631
|
1,000
|
100
|
1,100
|
|
General factory
|
28,791
|
300
|
270
|
570
|
|
Total
|
$63,322
|
|
|
|
The predetermined overhead rate under the traditional costing system is closest to:
A) $21.00
B) $14.21
C) $111.09
D) $50.51
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Acklin Company has two products: A and B. Annual production and sales are 600 units of Product A and 900 units of Product B. The company has traditionally used direct labor hours as the basis for applying all manufacturing overhead to products. Product A requires 0.5 direct labor hours per unit and Product B requires 0.3 direct labor hours per unit. The total estimated overhead for next period is $63,322. The company is considering switching to an activity based costing system for the purpose of computing unit product costs for external reports. The new activity based costing system would have three overhead activity cost pools—Activity 1, Activity 2, and General Factory— with estimated overhead costs and expected activity as follows:
|
|
Estimated
|
|
|
|
|
|
Overhead
|
Expected Activity
|
|
Activity Cost Pool
|
Cost
|
Product A
|
Product B
|
Total
|
|
Activity 1
|
$18,900
|
700
|
200
|
900
|
|
Activity 2
|
15,631
|
1,000
|
100
|
1,100
|
|
General factory
|
28,791
|
300
|
270
|
570
|
|
Total
|
$63,322
|
|
|
|
The overhead cost per unit of Product A under the traditional costing system is closest to:
A) $10.50
B) $55.55
C) $25.26
D) $7.11
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Acklin Company has two products: A and B. Annual production and sales are 600 units of Product A and 900 units of Product B. The company has traditionally used direct labor hours as the basis for applying all manufacturing overhead to products. Product A requires 0.5 direct labor hours per unit and Product B requires 0.3 direct labor hours per unit. The total estimated overhead for next period is $63,322. The company is considering switching to an activity based costing system for the purpose of computing unit product costs for external reports. The new activity based costing system would have three overhead activity cost pools—Activity 1, Activity 2, and General Factory— with estimated overhead costs and expected activity as follows:
|
|
Estimated
|
|
|
|
|
|
Overhead
|
Expected Activity
|
|
Activity Cost Pool
|
Cost
|
Product A
|
Product B
|
Total
|
|
Activity 1
|
$18,900
|
700
|
200
|
900
|
|
Activity 2
|
15,631
|
1,000
|
100
|
1,100
|
|
General factory
|
28,791
|
300
|
270
|
570
|
|
Total
|
$63,322
|
|
|
|
The predetermined overhead rate (i.e., activity rate) for Activity 1 under the activity based costing system is closest to:
A) $27.00
B) $94.50
C) $21.00
D) $70.36
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Acklin Company has two products: A and B. Annual production and sales are 600 units of Product A and 900 units of Product B. The company has traditionally used direct labor hours as the basis for applying all manufacturing overhead to products. Product A requires 0.5 direct labor hours per unit and Product B requires 0.3 direct labor hours per unit. The total estimated overhead for next period is $63,322. The company is considering switching to an activity based costing system for the purpose of computing unit product costs for external reports. The new activity based costing system would have three overhead activity cost pools—Activity 1, Activity 2, and General Factory— with estimated overhead costs and expected activity as follows:
|
|
Estimated
|
|
|
|
|
|
Overhead
|
Expected Activity
|
|
Activity Cost Pool
|
Cost
|
Product A
|
Product B
|
Total
|
|
Activity 1
|
$18,900
|
700
|
200
|
900
|
|
Activity 2
|
15,631
|
1,000
|
100
|
1,100
|
|
General factory
|
28,791
|
300
|
270
|
570
|
|
Total
|
$63,322
|
|
|
|
The overhead cost per unit of Product A under the activity based costing system is closest to:
A) $25.26
B) $73.44
C) $42.21
D) $55.55
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Abbe Company uses activity based costing. The company has two products: A and B. The annual production and sales of Product A is 800 units and of Product B is 600 units. There are three activity cost pools, with estimated costs and expected activity as follows:
|
|
|
Expected Activity
|
|
Activity Cost Pool
|
Estimated Cost
|
Product A
|
Product B
|
Total
|
|
Activity 1
|
$17,460
|
600
|
600
|
1,200
|
|
Activity 2
|
$19,987
|
1,700
|
600
|
2,300
|
|
Activity 3
|
$29,884
|
400
|
120
|
520
|
The cost per unit of Product B is closest to:
A) $25.90
B) $11.49
C) $34.73
D) $48.09
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The controller of Hartis Company estimates the amount of materials handling overhead cost that should be allocated to the company”s two products using the data that are given below:
|
|
Wall Mirrors
|
Specialty Windows
|
|
Total expected units produced
|
8,000
|
7,000
|
|
Total expected material moves
|
300
|
900
|
|
Expected direct labor hours per unit
|
5
|
7
|
The total materials handling cost for the year is expected to be $38,448.00.
If the materials handling cost is allocated on the basis of direct labor hours, how much of the total materials handling cost should be allocated to the wall mirrors? (Round off your answer to the nearest whole dollar.)
A) $19,696
B) $16,020
C) $19,224
D) $17,280
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The controller of Hartis Company estimates the amount of materials handling overhead cost that should be allocated to the company”s two products using the data that are given below:
|
|
Wall Mirrors
|
Specialty Windows
|
|
Total expected units produced
|
8,000
|
7,000
|
|
Total expected material moves
|
300
|
900
|
|
Expected direct labor hours per unit
|
5
|
7
|
The total materials handling cost for the year is expected to be $38,448.00.
If the materials handling cost is allocated on the basis of material moves, how much of the total materials handling cost should be allocated to the specialty windows? (Round off your answer to the nearest whole dollar.)
A) $18,752
B) $19,224
C) $22,428
D) $28,836
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The controller of Kleyman Company estimates the amount of materials handling overhead cost that should be allocated to the company”s two products using the data that are givenbelow:
|
|
Wall Mirrors
|
Wall Mirrors
|
|
Total expected units produced
|
4,000
|
4,000
|
|
Total expected material moves
|
500
|
500
|
|
Expected direct labor hours per unit
|
7
|
7
|
The total materials handling cost for the year is expected to be $28,400.40.
If the materials handling cost is allocated on the basis of direct labor hours, how much of the total materials handling cost should be allocated to the wall mirrors? (Round off your answer to the nearest whole dollar.)
A) $15,293
B) $16,176
C) $17,287
D) $14,200
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The controller of Kleyman Company estimates the amount of materials handling overhead cost that should be allocated to the company”s two products using the data that are givenbelow:
|
|
Wall Mirrors
|
Wall Mirrors
|
|
Total expected units produced
|
4,000
|
4,000
|
|
Total expected material moves
|
500
|
500
|
|
Expected direct labor hours per unit
|
7
|
7
|
The total materials handling cost for the year is expected to be $28,400.40.
If the materials handling cost is allocated on the basis of material moves, how much of the total materials handling cost should be allocated to the specialty windows? (Roundoff your answer to the nearest whole dollar.)
A) $12,622
B) $13,108
C) $12,224
D) $14,200
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
In the past, Casiopia Hospital allocated all of its overhead costs to patients based on nursing time. Casiopia has decided to switch to an activity based costing system using three activity cost pools. Information related to the new system is as follows:
|
|
|
Estimated Overhead
|
|
|
Activity Cost Pool
|
Activity Measure
|
Cost
|
Estimated Activity
|
|
Registration
|
Number of patients
|
$75,000
|
1,000 patients
|
|
Patient care
|
Nursing time
|
$900,000
|
150,000 hours
|
|
Billing
|
Number of bills
|
$120,000
|
2,500 bills
|
Data concerning two patients follows:
|
Patient
|
Nursing time
|
Number of bills
|
|
Wells
|
100 hours
|
2
|
|
Muncie
|
60 hours
|
3
|
Under the new activity based costing system, how much overhead cost would be assigned to each patient?
|
|
Wells
|
Muncie
|
|
A)
|
$696
|
$504
|
|
B)
|
$723
|
$483
|
|
C)
|
$730
|
$438
|
|
D)
|
$771
|
$579
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
In the past, Casiopia Hospital allocated all of its overhead costs to patients based on nursing time. Casiopia has decided to switch to an activity based costing system using three activity cost pools. Information related to the new system is as follows:
|
|
|
Estimated Overhead
|
|
|
Activity Cost Pool
|
Activity Measure
|
Cost
|
Estimated Activity
|
|
Registration
|
Number of patients
|
$75,000
|
1,000 patients
|
|
Patient care
|
Nursing time
|
$900,000
|
150,000 hours
|
|
Billing
|
Number of bills
|
$120,000
|
2,500 bills
|
Data concerning two patients follows:
|
Patient
|
Nursing time
|
Number of bills
|
|
Wells
|
100 hours
|
2
|
|
Muncie
|
60 hours
|
3
|
To determine a price for its services, Casiopia Hospital takes the total cost assigned to a patient and multiplies that number by two. Compared to the old system, which patients above will be charged more under the new activity based costing system?
A) neither patient will be charged more
B) Wells
C) Muncie
D) both Wells and Muncie
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Abrams Company uses activity based costing. The company has two products: A and B. The annual production and sales of Product A is 300 units and of Product B is 1,000 units. There are three activity cost pools, with estimated costs and expected activity as follows:
|
|
|
Expected Activity
|
|
Activity Cost Pool
|
Estimated Cost
|
Product A
|
Product B
|
Total
|
|
Activity 1
|
$7,356
|
200
|
200
|
400
|
|
Activity 2
|
$30,555
|
1,400
|
700
|
2,100
|
|
Activity 3
|
$16,169
|
90
|
300
|
390
|
The cost per unit of Product A is closest to:
A) $41.60
B) $92.60
C) $12.44
D) $68.00
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Anesni Corporation uses activity based costing to determine product costs for external financial reports. The company has provided the following data concerning its activity based costing system:
|
Activity Cost Pools (and Activity Measures)
|
Estimated Overhead Cost
|
|
Machine related (machine hours)
|
$242,100
|
|
Batch setup (setups)
|
$713,900
|
|
General factory (direct labor hours)
|
$256,500
|
|
|
Expected Activity
|
|
Activity Cost Pools
|
Total
|
Product X
|
Product Y
|
|
Machine related
|
9,000
|
6,000
|
3,000
|
|
Batch setup
|
11,000
|
6,000
|
5,000
|
|
General factory
|
9,000
|
1,000
|
8,000
|
The activity rate for the batch setup activity cost pool is closest to:
A) $142.80
B) $64.90
C) $110.20
D) $119.00
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Anesni Corporation uses activity based costing to determine product costs for external financial reports. The company has provided the following data concerning its activity based costing system:
|
Activity Cost Pools (and Activity Measures)
|
Estimated Overhead Cost
|
|
Machine related (machine hours)
|
$242,100
|
|
Batch setup (setups)
|
$713,900
|
|
General factory (direct labor hours)
|
$256,500
|
|
|
Expected Activity
|
|
Activity Cost Pools
|
Total
|
Product X
|
Product Y
|
|
Machine related
|
9,000
|
6,000
|
3,000
|
|
Batch setup
|
11,000
|
6,000
|
5,000
|
|
General factory
|
9,000
|
1,000
|
8,000
|
Assuming that actual activity turns out to be the same as expected activity, the total amount of overhead cost allocated to Product X would be closest to:
A) $606,250
B) $579,300
C) $714,000
D) $661,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Hochberg Corporation uses an activity based costing system with the following three activity cost pools:
|
Activity Cost Pool
|
Total Activity
|
|
Fabrication
|
30,000 machine hours
|
|
Order processing
|
300 orders
|
|
Other
|
Not applicable
|
The Other activity cost pool is used to accumulate costs of idle capacity and organization sustaining costs.
The company has provided the following data concerning its costs:
|
Wages and salaries
|
$340,000
|
|
Depreciation
|
160,000
|
|
Occupancy
|
220,000
|
|
Total
|
$720,000
|
The distribution of resource consumption across activity cost pools is given below:
|
|
Activity Cost Pools
|
|
|
Fabrication
|
Order Processing
|
Other
|
Total
|
|
Wages and salaries
|
30%
|
60%
|
10%
|
100%
|
|
Depreciation
|
15%
|
50%
|
35%
|
100%
|
|
Occupancy
|
15%
|
55%
|
30%
|
100%
|
The activity rate for the Fabrication activity cost pool is closest to:
A) $5.30 per machine hour
B) $3.60 per machine hour
C) $7.20 per machine hour
D) $4.80 per machine hour
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Hettich Corporation uses an activity based costing system with the following three activity cost pools:
|
Activity Cost Pool
|
Total Activity
|
|
Fabrication
|
20,000 machine hours
|
|
Order processing
|
200 orders
|
|
Other
|
Not applicable
|
The Other activity cost pool is used to accumulate costs of idle capacity and organization sustaining costs.
The company has provided the following data concerning its costs:
|
Wages and salaries
|
$480,000
|
|
Depreciation
|
120,000
|
|
Occupancy
|
200,000
|
|
Total
|
$800,000
|
The distribution of resource consumption across activity cost pools is given below:
|
|
Activity Cost Pools
|
|
|
Fabrication
|
Order Processing
|
Other
|
Total
|
|
Wages and salaries
|
55%
|
20%
|
25%
|
100%
|
|
Depreciation
|
10%
|
45%
|
45%
|
100%
|
|
Occupancy
|
25%
|
40%
|
35%
|
100%
|
The activity rate for the Order Processing activity cost pool is closest to:
A) $1,400 per order
B) $1,600 per order
C) $1,150 per order
D) $800 per order
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Orzel Corporation has provided the following data concerning its overhead costs for the coming year:
|
Wages and salaries
|
$240,000
|
|
Depreciation
|
120,000
|
|
Occupancy
|
180,000
|
|
Total
|
$540,000
|
The company has an activity based costing system with the following three activity cost pools and estimated activity for the coming year:
|
Activity Cost Pool
|
Total Activity
|
|
Assembly
|
10,000 labor hours
|
|
Order processing
|
500 orders
|
|
Other
|
Not applicable
|
The Other activity cost pool does not have a measure of activity; it is used to accumulate costs of idle capacity and organization sustaining costs.
The distribution of resource consumption across activity cost pools is given below:
|
|
Activity Cost Pools
|
|
|
Assembly
|
Order Processing
|
Other
|
Total
|
|
Wages and salaries
|
30%
|
50%
|
20%
|
100%
|
|
Depreciation
|
15%
|
35%
|
50%
|
100%
|
|
Occupancy
|
5%
|
65%
|
30%
|
100%
|
The activity rate for the Assembly activity cost pool is closest to:
A) $2.70 per labor hour
B) $9.00 per labor hour
C) $9.90 per labor hour
D) $16.20 per labor hour
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
3Poskey Corporation uses an activity based costing system with three activity cost pools. The company has provided the following data concerning its costs and its activity based costing system:
|
Costs
|
|
|
Wages and salaries
|
$400,000
|
|
Depreciation
|
160,000
|
|
Rent .
|
100,000
|
|
Total
|
$660,000
|
Distribution of resource consumption:
|
|
Activity Cost Pools
|
|
|
Assembly
|
Setting Up
|
Other
|
Total
|
|
Wages and salaries
|
40%
|
40%
|
20%
|
100%
|
|
Depreciation
|
20%
|
35%
|
45%
|
100%
|
|
Utilities
|
25%
|
55%
|
20%
|
100%
|
How much cost, in total, would be allocated in the first stage allocation to the Assembly activity cost pool?
A) $187,000
B) $264,000
C) $217,000
D) $165,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Ginger Corporation uses an activity based costing system with three activity cost pools. The company has provided the following data concerning its costs and its activity based costing system:
|
Costs
|
|
|
Wages and salaries
|
$360,000
|
|
Depreciation
|
140,000
|
|
Utilities
|
160,000
|
|
Total
|
$660,000
|
Distribution of resource consumption:
|
|
Activity Cost Pools
|
|
|
Assembly
|
Setting Up
|
Other
|
Total
|
|
Wages and salaries
|
10%
|
80%
|
10%
|
100%
|
|
Depreciation
|
5%
|
50%
|
45%
|
100%
|
|
Utilities
|
15%
|
60%
|
25%
|
100%
|
How much cost, in total, would be allocated in the first stage allocation to the Setting Up activity cost pool?
A) $528,000
B) $454,000
C) $418,000
D) $396,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Grandolfo Corporation uses an activity based costing system with three activity cost pools. The company has provided the following data concerning its costs and its activity based costing system:
|
Costs
|
|
|
Wages and salaries
|
$300,000
|
|
Depreciation
|
200,000
|
|
Utilities
|
140,000
|
|
Total
|
$640,000
|
Distribution of resource consumption:
|
|
Activity Cost Pools
|
|
|
Assembly
|
Setting Up
|
Other
|
Total
|
|
Wages and salaries
|
45%
|
35%
|
20%
|
100%
|
|
Depreciation
|
20%
|
40%
|
40%
|
100%
|
|
Utilities
|
15%
|
55%
|
30%
|
100%
|
How much cost, in total, would be allocated in the first stage allocation to the Other activity cost pool?
A) $192,000
B) $182,000
C) $128,000
D) $192,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Futter Corporation uses an activity based costing system with three activity cost pools. The company has provided the following data concerning its costs:
|
Costs
|
|
|
Wages and salaries
|
$440,000
|
|
Depreciation
|
180,000
|
|
Utilities
|
220,000
|
|
Total
|
$840,000
|
The distribution of resource consumption across the three activity cost pools is given below:
|
|
Activity Cost Pools
|
|
|
Fabricating
|
Order Processing
|
Other
|
Total
|
|
Wages and salaries
|
55%
|
35%
|
10%
|
100%
|
|
Depreciation
|
20%
|
35%
|
45%
|
100%
|
|
Utilities
|
10%
|
50%
|
40%
|
100%
|
How much cost, in total, would be allocated in the first stage allocation to the xFabricating activity cost pool?
A) $84,000
B) $300,000
C) $238,000
D) $462,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Duerr Corporation uses an activity based costing system with three activity cost pools. The company has provided the following data concerning its costs:
|
Wages and salaries
|
$400,000
|
|
Depreciation
|
180,000
|
|
Occupancy
|
200,000
|
|
Total
|
$780,000
|
The distribution of resource consumption across the three activity cost pools is given below:
|
|
Activity Cost Pools
|
|
|
Fabricating
|
Order Processing
|
Other
|
Total
|
|
Wages and salaries
|
55%
|
20%
|
25%
|
100%
|
|
Depreciation
|
10%
|
50%
|
40%
|
100%
|
|
Occupancy
|
35%
|
40%
|
25%
|
100%
|
How much cost, in total, would be allocated in the first stage allocation to the Order Processing activity cost pool?
A) $250,000
B) $286,000
C) $156,000
D) $312,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Grammer Corporation uses an activity based costing system with three activity cost pools. The company has provided the following data concerning its costs:
|
Wages and salaries
|
$240,000
|
|
Depreciation
|
160,000
|
|
Occupancy
|
140,000
|
|
Total
|
$540,000
|
The distribution of resource consumption across the three activity cost pools is given below:
|
|
Activity Cost Pools
|
|
|
Fabricating
|
Order Processing
|
Other
|
Total
|
|
Wages and salaries
|
30%
|
45%
|
25%
|
100%
|
|
Depreciation
|
20%
|
35%
|
45%
|
100%
|
|
Occupancy
|
5%
|
65%
|
30%
|
100%
|
How much cost, in total, would be allocated in the first stage allocation to the Other activity cost pool?
A) $135,000
B) $174,000
C) $162,000
D) $180,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Radakovich Corporation has provided the following data from its activity based costing system:
|
Activity Cost Pool
|
Total Cost
|
Total Activity
|
|
Assembly
|
$436,240
|
28,000 machine hours
|
|
Processing orders
|
$60,896
|
1,600 orders
|
|
Inspection
|
$82,767
|
1,410 inspection hours
|
The company makes 230 units of product F60N a year, requiring a total of 480 machine hours, 50 orders, and 30 inspection hours per year. The product”s direct materials cost is $12.70 per unit and its direct labor cost is $45.93 per unit. The product sells for $126.60 per unit.
According to the activity based costing system, the product margin for product F60N is:
A) $6,251.70 per unit
B) $4,490.70 per unit
C) $6,393.70 per unit
D) $15,633.10 per unit
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Rosenbrook Corporation has provided the following data from its activity based costing system:
|
Activity Cost Pool
|
Total Cost
|
Total Activity
|
|
Assembly
|
$710,770
|
37,000 machine hours
|
|
Processing orders
|
$39,690
|
1,800 orders
|
|
Inspection
|
$119,116
|
1,940 inspection hours
|
Data concerning one of the company’s products, Product H73N, appear below:
|
Selling price per unit
|
$125.10
|
|
Direct materials cost per unit
|
$34.94
|
|
Direct labor cost per unit
|
$49.21
|
|
Annual unit production and sales
|
460
|
|
Annual machine hours
|
510
|
|
Annual orders
|
80
|
|
Annual inspections
|
10
|
|
Selling price per unit
|
$125.10
|
According to the activity based costing system, the product margin for product H73N is:
A) $7,275.90 per unit
B) $6,661.90 per unit
C) $18,837.00 per unit
D) $8,425.90 per unit
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Belsky Corporation has provided the following data from its activity based costing system:
|
Activity Cost Pool
|
Total Cost
|
Total Activity
|
|
Assembly
|
$313,490
|
29,000 machine hours
|
|
Processing orders
|
$49,476
|
1,400 orders
|
|
Inspection
|
$73,882
|
1,060 inspection hours
|
The company makes 490 units of product Q19S a year, requiring a total of 1,080 machine hours, 60 orders, and 20 inspection hours per year. The product”s direct materials cost is $46.42 per unit and its direct labor cost is $20.22 per unit.
According to the activity based costing system, the average cost of product Q19S is closest to:
A) $97.64 per unit
B) $66.64 per unit
C) $93.31 per unit
D) $94.79 per unit
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Ravelo Corporation has provided the following data from its activity based costing system:
|
Activity Cost Pool
|
Total Cost
|
Total Activity
|
|
Assembly
|
$498,520
|
44,000 machine hours
|
|
Processing orders
|
$54,263
|
1,100 orders
|
|
Inspection
|
$77,589
|
1,110 inspection hours
|
Data concerning the company’s product L19B appear below:
|
Annual unit production and sales
|
430
|
|
Annual machine hours
|
990
|
|
Annual number of orders
|
70
|
|
Annual inspection hours
|
20
|
|
Direct materials cost
|
$37.74 per unit
|
|
Direct labor cost
|
$10.45 per unit
|
According to the activity based costing system, the average cost of product L19B is closest to:
A) $48.19 per unit
B) $82.31 per unit
C) $85.56 per unit
D) $77.53 per unit
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Esmail Company is a wholesale distributor that uses activity based costing for all of its overhead costs. The company has provided the following data concerning its annual overhead costs and its activity based costing system:
|
Overhead costs:
|
|
|
Wages and salaries
|
$380,000
|
|
Other expenses
|
220,000
|
|
Total
|
$600,000
|
Distribution of resource consumption:
|
|
Activity Cost Pools
|
|
|
Filling Orders
|
Customer Support
|
Other
|
Total
|
|
Wages and salaries
|
55%
|
35%
|
10%
|
100%
|
|
Other expenses
|
25%
|
55%
|
20%
|
100%
|
The “Other” activity cost pool consists of the costs of idle capacity and organization sustaining costs.
The amount of activity for the year is as follows:
|
Activity Cost Pool
|
Activity
|
|
Filling orders
|
4,000 orders
|
|
Customer support
|
60 customers
|
What would be the total overhead cost per order according to the activity based costing system? In other words, what would be the overall activity rate for the filling orders activity cost pool? (Round to the nearest whole cent.)
A) $60.00
B) $66.00
C) $82.50
D) $37.50
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Esmail Company is a wholesale distributor that uses activity based costing for all of its overhead costs. The company has provided the following data concerning its annual overhead costs and its activity based costing system:
|
Overhead costs:
|
|
|
Wages and salaries
|
$380,000
|
|
Other expenses
|
220,000
|
|
Total
|
$600,000
|
Distribution of resource consumption:
|
|
Activity Cost Pools
|
|
|
Filling Orders
|
Customer Support
|
Other
|
Total
|
|
Wages and salaries
|
55%
|
35%
|
10%
|
100%
|
|
Other expenses
|
25%
|
55%
|
20%
|
100%
|
The “Other” activity cost pool consists of the costs of idle capacity and organization sustaining costs.
The amount of activity for the year is as follows:
|
Activity Cost Pool
|
Activity
|
|
Filling orders
|
4,000 orders
|
|
Customer support
|
60 customers
|
What would be the total overhead cost per customer according to the activity based costing system? In other words, what would be the overall activity rate for the customer support activity cost pool? (Round to the nearest whole dollar.)
A) $3,500
B) $5,500
C) $4,233
D) $4,500
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Esmail Company is a wholesale distributor that uses activity based costing for all of its overhead costs. The company has provided the following data concerning its annual overhead costs and its activity based costing system:
|
Overhead costs:
|
|
|
Wages and salaries
|
$380,000
|
|
Other expenses
|
220,000
|
|
Total
|
$600,000
|
Distribution of resource consumption:
|
|
Activity Cost Pools
|
|
|
Filling Orders
|
Customer Support
|
Other
|
Total
|
|
Wages and salaries
|
55%
|
35%
|
10%
|
100%
|
|
Other expenses
|
25%
|
55%
|
20%
|
100%
|
The “Other” activity cost pool consists of the costs of idle capacity and organization sustaining costs.
The amount of activity for the year is as follows:
|
Activity Cost Pool
|
Activity
|
|
Filling orders
|
4,000 orders
|
|
Customer support
|
60 customers
|
To the nearest whole dollar, how much wages and salaries cost would be allocated to a customer who made 6 orders in a year?
A) $2,264
B) $2,530
C) $1,998
D) $3,995
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Eskenazy Company is a wholesale distributor that uses activity based costing for all of its overhead costs. The company has provided the following data concerning its annual overhead costs and its activity based costing system:
|
Overhead costs:
|
|
|
Wages and salaries
|
$580,000
|
|
Other expenses
|
120,000
|
|
Total
|
$700,000
|
Distribution of resource consumption:
|
|
Activity Cost Pools
|
|
|
Filling Orders
|
Customer Support
|
Other
|
Total
|
|
Wages and salaries
|
15%
|
75%
|
10%
|
100%
|
|
Other expenses
|
55%
|
25%
|
20%
|
100%
|
The “Other” activity cost pool consists of the costs of idle capacity and organization sustaining costs.
The amount of activity for the year is as follows:
|
Activity Cost Pool
|
Activity
|
|
Filling orders
|
2,000 orders
|
|
Customer support
|
20 customers
|
What would be the total overhead cost per order according to the activity based costing system? In other words, what would be the overall activity rate for the filling orders activity cost pool? (Round to the nearest whole cent.)
A) $52.50
B) $76.50
C) $122.50
D) $192.50
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Eskenazy Company is a wholesale distributor that uses activity based costing for all of its overhead costs. The company has provided the following data concerning its annual overhead costs and its activity based costing system:
|
Overhead costs:
|
|
|
Wages and salaries
|
$580,000
|
|
Other expenses
|
120,000
|
|
Total
|
$700,000
|
Distribution of resource consumption:
|
|
Activity Cost Pools
|
|
|
Filling Orders
|
Customer Support
|
Other
|
Total
|
|
Wages and salaries
|
15%
|
75%
|
10%
|
100%
|
|
Other expenses
|
55%
|
25%
|
20%
|
100%
|
The “Other” activity cost pool consists of the costs of idle capacity and organization sustaining costs.
The amount of activity for the year is as follows:
|
Activity Cost Pool
|
Activity
|
|
Filling orders
|
2,000 orders
|
|
Customer support
|
20 customers
|
To the nearest whole dollar, how much wages and salaries cost would be allocated to a customer who made 7 orders in a year?
A) $22,055
B) $17,682
C) $13,309
D) $26,618
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Fornia Florist specializes in large floral bouquets for hotels and other commercial spaces. The
company has provided the following data concerning its annual overhead costs and its activity based costing system:
|
Overhead costs:
|
|
|
Wages and salaries
|
$ 70,000
|
|
Other expenses
|
60,000
|
|
Total
|
$130,000
|
Distribution of resource consumption:
|
|
Activity Cost Pools
|
|
|
Making
Bouquets
|
Delivery
|
Other
|
Total
|
|
Wages and salaries
|
70%
|
20%
|
10%
|
100%
|
|
Other expenses
|
45%
|
25%
|
30%
|
100%
|
The “Other” activity cost pool consists of the costs of idle capacity and organization sustaining costs.
The amount of activity for the year is as follows:
|
Activity Cost Pool
|
Activity
|
|
Making bouquets
|
40,000 bouquets
|
|
Delivery
|
4,000 deliveries
|
What would be the total overhead cost per bouquet according to the activity based costing system? In other words, what would be the overall activity rate for the making bouquets activity cost pool? (Round to the nearest whole cent.)
A) $1.46
B) $1.90
C) $1.87
D) $2.28
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Fornia Florist specializes in large floral bouquets for hotels and other commercial spaces. The
company has provided the following data concerning its annual overhead costs and its activity based costing system:
|
Overhead costs:
|
|
|
Wages and salaries
|
$ 70,000
|
|
Other expenses
|
60,000
|
|
Total
|
$130,000
|
Distribution of resource consumption:
|
|
Activity Cost Pools
|
|
|
Making
Bouquets
|
Delivery
|
Other
|
Total
|
|
Wages and salaries
|
70%
|
20%
|
10%
|
100%
|
|
Other expenses
|
45%
|
25%
|
30%
|
100%
|
The “Other” activity cost pool consists of the costs of idle capacity and organization sustaining costs.
The amount of activity for the year is as follows:
|
Activity Cost Pool
|
Activity
|
|
Making bouquets
|
40,000 bouquets
|
|
Delivery
|
4,000 deliveries
|
What would be the total overhead cost per delivery according to the activity based costing system? In other words, what would be the overall activity rate for the deliveries activity cost pool? (Round to the nearest whole cent.)
A) $7.25
B) $7.31
C) $8.13
D) $6.50
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Other accrued liabilities—payroll taxes At March 31, 2010, the end of the first year of operations at Jaryd, Inc., the firm’s accountant neglected to accrue payroll taxes of $4,800 that were applicable to payrolls for the year then ended.
Required:
a. Use the horizontal model (or write the journal entry) to show the effect of the accrual that should have been made as of March 31, 2010.
b. Determine the income statement and balance sheet effects of not accruing payroll taxes at March 31, 2010.
c. Assume that when the payroll taxes were paid in April 2010, the payroll tax expense account was charged. Assume that at March 31, 2011, the accountant again neglected to accrue the payroll tax liability, which was $5,000 at that date.
Determine the income statement and balance sheet effects of not accruing payroll taxes at March 31, 2011.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Bonds payable—record issuance and premium amortization Kaye Co. issued $1 million face amount of 11%, 20 year bonds on April 1, 2010. The bonds pay interest on an annual basis on March 31 each year.
Required:
a. Assume that market interest rates were slightly lower than 11% when the bonds were sold. Would the proceeds from the bond issue have been more than, less than, or equal to the face amount? Explain.
b. Independent of your answer to part a, assume that the proceeds were $1,080,000.
Use the horizontal model (or write the journal entry) to show the effect of issuing the bonds.
c. Calculate the interest expense that Kaye Co. will show with respect to these bonds in its income statement for the fiscal year ended September 30, 2010, assuming that the premium of $80,000 is amortized on a straight line basis.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Transaction analysis—various accounts Enter the following column headings across the top of a sheet of paper:
|
Transaction/
|
Current
|
Current
|
Long Term
|
Net
|
|
Adjustment
|
Assets
|
Liabilities
|
Debt
|
Income
|
Enter the transaction/adjustment letter in the first column and show the effect, if any, of each of the transactions/adjustments on the appropriate balance sheet category or on the income statement by entering the amount and indicating whether it is an addition (+) or a subtraction ( ). You may also write the journal entries to record each transaction/adjustment.
a. Wages of $867 for the last three days of the fiscal period have not been accrued.
b. Interest of $170 on a bank loan has not been accrued.
c. Interest on bonds payable has not been accrued for the current month. The company has outstanding $240,000 of 8.5% bonds.
d. The discount related to the bonds in part c has not been amortized for the current month. The current month amortization is $50.
e. Product warranties were honored during the month; parts inventory items valued at $830 were sent to customers making claims, and cash refunds of $410 were also made.
f. During the fiscal period, advance payments from customers totaling $1,500 were received and recorded as sales revenues. The items will not be delivered to the customers until the next fiscal period. Record the appropriate adjustment.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Transaction analysis—various accounts Enter the following column headings across the top of a sheet of paper:
|
Transaction/
|
Current
|
Current
|
Long Term
|
Net
|
|
Adjustment
|
Assets
|
Liabilities
|
Debt
|
Income
|
Enter the transaction/adjustment letter in the first column, and show the effect, if any, of each of the transactions/adjustments on the appropriate balance sheet category or on the income statement by entering the amount and indicating whether it is an addition (+) or a subtraction (−). You may also write the journal entries to record each transaction/adjustment.
a. Wages of $768 accrued at the end of the prior fiscal period were paid this fiscal period.
b. Real estate taxes of $2,400 applicable to the current period have not been accrued.
c. Interest on bonds payable has not been accrued for the current month. The company has outstanding $360,000 of 7.5% bonds.
d. The premium related to the bonds in part c has not been amortized for the current month. The current month amortization is $70.
e. Based on past experience with its warranty program, the estimated warranty expense for the current period should be 0.2% of sales of $918,000.
f. Analysis of the company’s income taxes indicates that taxes currently payable are $76,000 and that the deferred tax liability should be increased by $21,000.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Transaction analysis—various accounts Enter the following column headings across the top of a sheet of paper:
|
Transaction/
|
Current
|
Noncurrent
|
Current
|
Noncurrent
|
Owners
|
Net
|
|
Adjustment
|
Assets
|
Assets
|
Liabilities
|
Liabilities
|
Equity
|
Income
|
Enter the transaction/adjustment letter in the first column and show the effect, if any, of each transaction/adjustment on the appropriate balance sheet category or on net income by entering for each category affected the account name and amount, and indicating whether it is an addition (+) or a subtraction (−). Items that affect net income should not also be shown as affecting owners’ equity. You may also write the journal entries to record each transaction/adjustment.
a. Income tax expense of $700 for the current period is accrued. Of the accrual, $200 represents deferred income taxes.
b. Bonds payable with a face amount of $5,000 are issued at a price of 99.
c. Of the proceeds from the bonds in part b, $3,000 is used to purchase land for future expansion.
d. Because of warranty claims, finished goods inventory costing $64 is sent to customers to replace defective products.
e. A three month, 12% note payable with a face amount of $20,000 was signed.
The bank made the loan on a discount basis.
f. The next installment of a long term serial bond requiring an annual principal repayment of $35,000 will become due within the current year.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Transaction analysis—various accounts Enter the following column headings across the top of a sheet of paper:
|
Transaction/
|
Current
|
Noncurrent
|
Current
|
Noncurrent
|
Owners
|
Net
|
|
Adjustment
|
Assets
|
Assets
|
Liabilities
|
Liabilities
|
Equity
|
Income
|
Enter the transaction/adjustment letter in the first column and show the effect, if any, of each transaction/adjustment on the appropriate balance sheet category or on net income by entering for each category affected the account name and amount, and indicating whether it is an addition
or a subtraction (−). Items that affect net income should not also be shown as affecting owners’ equity. You may also write the journal entries to record each transaction/adjustment.
a. Recorded the financing (capital) lease of a truck. The present value of the lease payments is $32,000; the total of the lease payments to be made is $58,000.
b. Paid, within the discount period, an account payable of $1,500 on which terms were 1/15, n30. The purchase had been recorded at the gross amount.
c. Issued $7,000 of bonds payable at a price of 102.
d. Adjusted the estimated liability under a warranty program by reducing previously accrued warranty expense by $2,500.
e. Retired bonds payable with a carrying value of $3,000 by calling them at a redemption value of 101.
f. Accrued estimated health care costs for retirees; $24,000 is expected to be paid within a year, and $310,000 is expected to be paid in more than a year.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Unearned revenues—rent On November 1, 2010, Gordon Co. collected $25,200 in cash from its tenant as an advance rent payment on its store location. The six month lease period ends on April 30, 2011, at which time the contract may be renewed.
Required:
a. Use the horizontal model (or write the journal entries) to record the effects of the following items for Gordon Co.:
1. The six months of rent collected in advance on November 1, 2010.
2. The adjustment that will be made at the end of every month to show the amount of rent “earned” during the month.
b. Calculate the amount of unearned rent that should be shown on the December 31, 2010, balance sheet with respect to this lease.
c. Suppose the advance collection received on November 1, 2010, covered an 18 month lease period at the same amount of rent per month. How should Gordon Co. report the unearned rent amount on its December 31, 2010, balance sheet?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Unearned revenues—subscription fees Evans Ltd. publishes a monthly newsletter for retail marketing managers and requires its subscribers to pay $50 in advance for a one year subscription. During the month of September 2010, Evans Ltd. sold 200 one year subscriptions and received payments in advance from all new subscribers. Only 120 of the new subscribers paid their fees in time to receive the September newsletter; the other subscriptions began with the October newsletter.
Required:
a. Use the horizontal model (or write the journal entries) to record the effects of the following items:
1. Subscription fees received in advance during September 2010.
2. Subscription revenue earned during September 2010.
b. Calculate the amount of subscription revenue earned by Evans Ltd. during the year ended December 31, 2010, for these 200 subscriptions.
Evans Ltd. is now considering the possibility of offering a lifetime membership option to its subscribers. Under this proposal, subscribers could receive the monthly newsletter throughout their lives by paying a flat fee of $600. The one year subscription rate of $50 would continue to apply to new and existing subscribers who choose to subscribe on an annual basis. Assume that the average age of Evans Ltd.’s current subscribers is 38, and their average life expectancy is 78 years. Evans Ltd.’s average interest rate on long term debt is 12%.
c. Using the information given, determine whether it would be profitable for Evans Ltd. to sell lifetime subscriptions.
d. What additional factors should Evans Ltd. consider in determining whether to offer a lifetime membership option? Explain your answer as specifically as possible.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Other accrued liabilities—payroll The following summary data for the payroll period ended on November 14, 2009, are available for Brac Construction Ltd.:
|
Gross pay
|
$ ?
|
|
FICA tax withholdings
|
?
|
|
Income tax withholdings
|
13,760
|
|
Medical insurance contributions.
|
1,120
|
|
Union dues
|
640
|
|
Total deductions
|
21,640
|
|
Net pay
|
58,360
|
Required:
a. Calculate the missing amounts and then determine the FICA tax withholding percentage.
b. Use the horizontal model (or write the journal entry) to show the effects of the payroll accrual.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Other accrued liabilities—payroll and payroll taxes The following summary data for the payroll period ended December 27, 2009, are available for Cayman Coating Co.:
|
Gross pay
|
$53,000
|
|
FICA tax withholdings
|
?
|
|
Income tax withholdings
|
7,680
|
|
Group hospitalization insurance
|
960
|
|
Employee contributions to pension plan
|
?
|
|
Total deductions
|
14,088
|
|
Net pay
|
?
|
Additional information
- FICA tax rates for 2009 were 7.65% on the first $106,800 of each employee’s annual earnings and 1.45% on any earnings in excess of $106,800. However, no employees had accumulated earnings for the year in excess of the $106,800 limit. The FICA tax rates are levied against both employers and employees.
- The federal and state unemployment compensation tax rates are 0.8% and 5.4%, respectively. These rates are levied against the employer for the first $7,000 of each employee’s annual earnings. Only $7,500 of the gross pay amount for the December 27, 2009, pay period was owed to employees who were still under the annual limit.
Required :
Assuming that Cayman Coating Co.’s payroll for the last week of the year is to be paid on January 3, 2010, use the horizontal model (or write the journal entry) to record the effects of the December 27, 2009, entries for
a. Accrued payroll.
b. Accrued payroll taxes.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Bonds payable—calculate issue price and amortize discount On January 1, 2010, Drennen, Inc., issued $3 million face amount of 10 year, 14% stated rate bonds when market interest rates were 12%. The bonds pay semiannual interest each June 30 and December 31 and mature on December 31, 2019.
Required:
a. Using the present value tables in Chapter 6, calculate the proceeds (issue price) of Drennen, Inc.’s, bonds on January 1, 2010, assuming that the bonds were sold to provide a market rate of return to the investor.
b. Assume instead that the proceeds were $2,950,000. Use the horizontal model (or write the journal entry) to record the payment of semiannual interest and the related discount amortization on June 30, 2010, assuming that the discount of $50,000 is amortized on a straight line basis.
c. If the discount in part b were amortized using the compound interest method, would interest expense for the year ended December 31, 2010, be more than, less than, or equal to the interest expense reported using the straight line method of discount amortization? Explain.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Bonds payable—calculate issue price and amortize premium On January 1, 2010, Learned, Inc., issued $60 million face amount of 20 year, 14% stated rate bonds when market interest rates were 16%. The bonds pay interest semiannually each June 30 and December 31 and mature on December 31, 2029.
Required:
a. Using the present value tables in Chapter 6, calculate the proceeds (issue price) of Learned, Inc.’s, bonds on January 1, 2010, assuming that the bonds were sold to provide a market rate of return to the investor.
b. Assume instead that the proceeds were $62,000,000. Use the horizontal model (or write the journal entry) to record the payment of semiannual interest and the related premium amortization on June 30, 2010, assuming that the premium of $2,000,000 is amortized on a straight line basis.
c. If the premium in part b were amortized using the compound interest method, would interest expense for the year ended December 31, 2010, be more than, less than, or equal to the interest expense reported using the straight line method of premium amortization? Explain.
d. In reality, the difference between the stated interest rate and the market rate would be substantially less than 2%. The dramatic difference in this problem was designed so that you could use present value tables to answer part a. What causes the stated rate to be different from the market rate, and why is the difference likely to be much less than depicted in this problem?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Other accrued liabilities—interest A review of the accounting records at Corless Co. revealed the following information concerning the company’s liabilities that were outstanding at December 31, 2011, and 2010, respectively:
|
|
|
Year End
|
|
Year End
|
|
|
|
Interest
|
|
Interest
|
|
Debt (Thousands)
|
2011
|
Rate
|
2010
|
Rate
|
|
Short term debt:
|
|
|
|
|
|
Working capital loans
|
$250
|
8%
|
$190
|
7%
|
|
Current maturities of
|
|
|
|
|
|
long term debt
|
80
|
6%
|
80
|
6%
|
|
Long term debt:
|
|
|
|
|
|
Debenture bonds due in 2031
|
400
|
9%
|
400
|
9%
|
|
Serial bonds due in equal
|
|
|
|
|
|
annual installments
|
240
|
6%
|
320
|
6%
|
Required:
a. Corless Co. has not yet made an adjustment to accrue the interest expense related to its working capital loans for the year ended December 31, 2011. Assume that the amount of interest to be accrued can be accurately estimated using an
average for the year interest rate applied to the average liability balance. Use the horizontal model (or write the journal entry) to record the effect of the 2011 interest accrual for working capital loans.
b. Note that the dollar amount and interest rate of the current maturities of longterm debt have not changed from 2010 to 2011. Does this mean that the $80,000 amount owed at the end of 2010 still has not been paid as of December 31, 2011?
c. Assume that the debenture bonds were originally issued at their face amount.
However, the market rate of interest for bonds of similar risk has decreased significantly in recent years and is 7% at December 31, 2011. If the debenture bonds were both callable by Corless Co. and convertible by its bondholders, which event is more likely to occur? Explain your answer.
d. Assume the same facts as in part c. Would the market value of Corless Co.’s debenture bonds be more than or less than the $400,000 reported amount? Is this good news or bad news to the management of Corless Co.?
e. When the Serial Bonds account decreased during the year, what other account was affected, and how was it affected? Use the horizontal model (or write the journal entry) to record the effect of this transaction.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Analysis of long term debt Assume that Home and Office City, Inc., provided the following comparative data concerning long term debt in the notes to its 2011 annual report (amounts in millions):
|
|
December
|
December
|
|
|
31, 2011
|
31, 2010
|
|
3¼% Convertible Subordinated Notes, due October 1, 2012;
|
|
|
|
converted into shares of common stock of the Company at a
|
|
|
|
conversion price of $15.3611 per share in October 2010
|
$ —
|
$1,103
|
|
6½% Senior Notes, due September 15, 2015; interest payable
|
|
|
|
semiannually on March 15 and September 15 beginning
|
|
|
|
in 2011
|
500
|
—
|
|
Commercial Paper; weighted average interest rate of 4.8% at
|
|
|
|
1 Jan 10
|
—
|
246
|
|
Capital Lease Obligations; payable in varying installments
|
|
|
|
through January 31, 2038
|
216
|
180
|
|
Installment Notes Payable; interest imputed at rates between
|
|
|
|
5.2% and 10.0%; payable in varying installments
|
|
|
|
through 2029
|
45
|
27
|
|
Unsecured Bank Loan; floating interest rate averaging 6.05%
|
|
|
|
in fiscal 2011 and 5.90% in fiscal 2010; payable in
|
|
|
|
Aug 13
|
15
|
15
|
|
Variable Rate Industrial Revenue Bonds; secured by letters of
|
|
|
|
credit or land; interest rates averaging 2.9% during fiscal 2011
|
|
|
|
and 3.8% during fiscal 2010; payable in varying installments
|
|
|
|
through 2021
|
3
|
9
|
|
Total long term debt
|
$779
|
$1,580
|
|
Less current installments
|
29
|
14
|
|
Long term debt, excluding current installments
|
$750
|
$1,566
|
Required:
a. As indicated, Home and Office City’s 31⁄4% Convertible Subordinated Notes were converted into shares of common stock in October 2010. How many shares of stock were issued in conversion of these notes?
b. Regarding the 61⁄2% Senior Notes, Home and Office City, Inc., also disclosed that “The Company, at its option, may redeem all or any portion of the Senior Notes by notice to the holder. The Senior Notes are redeemable at a redemption price, plus accrued interest, equal to the greater of (1) 100% of the principal amount of the Senior Notes to be redeemed or (2) the sum of the present values of the remaining scheduled payments of principal and interest on the Senior Notes to maturity.”
Redeemable fixed rate notes, such as those described here, are similar to callable term bonds. Thinking of the 61⁄2% Senior Notes on this basis, would it have been possible for Home and Office City, Inc., to redeem (“call”) these notes for an amount
1. Below face value (at a discount)?
2. Above face value (at a premium)?
3. Equal to face value (at par)?
What circumstances would have been most likely to prompt Home and Office City to redeem these notes?
c. Recall from the discussion of Cash and Cash Equivalents in Chapter 5 that commercial paper is like an IOU issued by a very creditworthy corporation. Home and Office City’s note disclosures concerning commercial paper reveal that “The company has a back up credit facility with a consortium of banks for up to $800 million. The credit facility contains various restrictive covenants, none of which is expected to materially impact the company’s liquidity or capital resources.” What do you think is meant by this statement? d. What other information would you have wanted to know about Home and Office City’s “Capital Lease Obligations” when making an assessment of the company’s overall liquidity and leverage?
e. Regarding the “Installment Notes Payable,” what is meant by “interest imputed at rates between 5.2% and 10%”?
f. Why do you suppose that Home and Office City’s “Unsecured Bank Loan” was immaterial in relation to the company’s total long term debt?
g. Note that the “current installments” due on Home and Office City’s long term debt were immaterial in amount for both years presented. Based on the data presented in this case, explain why this is likely to change over the next five years.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Hanks Company produces a single product. Operating data for the company and its absorption costing income statements for the last two years are presented below:
|
|
Year 1
|
Year 2
|
|
Units in beginning inventory
|
0
|
1,000
|
|
Units produced
|
9,000
|
9,000
|
|
Units sold
|
8,000
|
10,000
|
|
|
Year 1
|
Year 2
|
|
Sales
|
$80,000
|
$100,000
|
|
Less cost of goods sold:
|
|
|
|
Beginning inventory
|
0
|
6,000
|
|
Add cost of goods manufactured
|
54,000
|
54,000
|
|
Goods available for sale
|
54,000
|
60,000
|
|
Less ending inventory
|
6,000
|
0
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
48,000
|
60,000
|
|
Gross margin
|
32,000
|
40,000
|
|
Less selling & admin. expenses
|
28,000
|
30,000
|
|
Net operating income
|
$ 4,000
|
$ 10,000
|
Variable manufacturing costs are $4 per unit. Fixed factory overhead totals $18,000 in each year. This overhead was applied at a rate of $2 per unit. Variable selling and administrative expenses were $1 per unit sold. Required:
a. What was the unit product cost in each year under variable costing?
b. Prepare new income statements for each year using variable costing.
c. Reconcile the absorption costing and variable costing net operating income for each year.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Qasimi Company, which has only one product, has provided the following data concerning its most recent month of operations:
|
Selling price
|
$121
|
|
Units in beginning inventory
|
0
|
|
Units produced
|
4,300
|
|
Units sold
|
4,000
|
|
Units in ending inventory
|
300
|
|
Variable costs per unit:
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
$44
|
|
Direct labor
|
$35
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead
|
$7
|
|
Variable selling and administrative
|
$5
|
|
Fixed costs:
|
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead
|
$34,400
|
|
Fixed selling and administrative
|
$72,000
|
Required:
a. What is the unit product cost for the month under variable costing?
b. Prepare an income statement for the month using the contribution format and the variable costing method.
c. Without preparing an income statement, determine the absorption costing net operating income for the month. (Hint: Use the reconciliation method.)
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Netro Company, which has only one product, has provided the following data concerning its most recent month of operations:
|
Selling price
|
$91
|
|
Units in beginning inventory
|
100
|
|
Units produced
|
1,800
|
|
Units sold
|
1,400
|
|
Units in ending inventory
|
500
|
|
Variable costs per unit:
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
$49
|
|
Direct labor
|
$13
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead
|
$2
|
|
Variable selling and administrative
|
$7
|
|
Fixed costs:
|
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead
|
$14,400
|
|
Fixed selling and administrative
|
$7,000
|
The company produces the same number of units every month, although the sales I units vary from month to month. The company”s variable costs per unit and total fixed costs have been constant from month to month.
Required:
a. Prepare an income statement for the month using the contribution format and the variable costing method.
b. Prepare an income statement for the month using the absorption costing method.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Oakford Company, which has only one product, has provided the following data concerning its most recent month of operations:
|
Selling price
|
$143
|
|
Units in beginning inventory
|
0
|
|
Units produced
|
1,200
|
|
Units sold
|
1,000
|
|
Units in ending inventory
|
200
|
|
Variable costs per unit:
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
$33
|
|
Direct labor
|
$52
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead
|
$1
|
|
Variable selling and administrative
|
$7
|
|
Fixed costs:
|
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead
|
$38,400
|
|
Fixed selling and administrative
|
$4,000
|
Required:
a. Prepare an income statement for the month using the contribution format and the variable costing method.
b. Prepare an income statement for the month using the absorption costing method.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Vitamin T Shirts, Inc. budgeted the following costs for its first year of manufacturing operations. These costs are based on a volume of 50,000 T shirts produced and sold:
|
|
Total variable
|
Total fixed
|
|
|
cost per year
|
cost per year
|
|
Direct materials
|
$36,000
|
–
|
|
Direct labor
|
$24,000
|
–
|
|
Manufacturing overhead
|
$60,000
|
$72,000
|
|
Selling and administrative
|
$12,000
|
$48,000
|
|
Direct materials
|
|
|
During the first year of operations, Vitamin actually produced 50,000 T shirts but only sold 48,000 T shirts. Actual costs did not fluctuate from the cost behavior patterns described above. The 48,000 T shirts were sold for $10 per T shirt.
Required:
Using the variable costing method, prepare Vitamin T Shirts” income statement for the year.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. The costs of activities that are classified as unit level should be proportional to the number of units produced.
2. Batch level activities are performed each time a batch is handled or processed, regardless of how many units are in the batch.
3. Product level activities relate to specific products and typically must be carried out regardless of how many batches are run or units of product are made.
4. Activity based management seeks to eliminate waste by allocating costs to products that waste resources.
5. Activity based costing may supplement, rather than replace, a company”s formal cost accounting system.
6. In activity based costing, nonmanufacturing costs as well as manufacturing costs may be assigned to products.
7. When activity based costing is used for internal decision making, the costs of idle capacity should be considered period costs that flow through to the income statement as an expense of the current period.
8. A transaction driver provides a simple count of the number of times that an activity occurs.
9. In activity based costing, all manufacturing costs must be included in product costs.
10. The first stage allocation in activity based costing is the process by which overhead costs are assigned to activity cost pools.
11. The activity rates computed in activity based costing can provide valuable clues concerning where there is waste and scope for improvement in an organization.
12. In the second stage allocation in activity based costing, costs that were not allocated in the first stage are assigned to the company”s most profitable products.
13. If a product has a negative product margin (i.e., loss) according to an activity based costing system, it should be dropped.
14. When a company implements activity based costing system, manufacturing overhead cost is often shifted from low volume products to high volume products, with a higher unit cost resulting for the high volume products.
15. An action analysis report provides more detail about costs and how they might adjust to changes in activity than a conventional activity based costing analysis.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Effects of inventory errors Following are condensed income statements for Uncle Bill’s Home Improvement Center for the years ended December 31, 2011, and 2010:
|
|
2011
|
2010
|
|
Sales
|
$541,200
|
$523,600
|
|
Cost of Goods Sold:
|
|
|
|
Beginning inventory
|
$ 91,400
|
$ 85,300
|
|
Cost of goods purchased
|
393,000
|
366,500
|
|
Cost of goods available for sale
|
$484,400
|
$451,800
|
|
Less: ending inventory
|
(79,800)
|
(91,400)
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
(404,600)
|
(360,400)
|
|
Gross profit
|
$136,600
|
$163,200
|
|
Operating expenses
|
(103,700)
|
(94,700)
|
|
Net income (ignoring income taxes)
|
$ 32,900
|
$ 68,500
|
Uncle Bill was concerned about the operating results for 2011 and asked his recently hired accountant, “If sales increased in 2011, why was net income less than half of what it was in 2010?” In February of 2012, Uncle Bill got his answer: “The ending inventory reported in 2010 was overstated by $23,500 for merchandise that we were holding on consignment on behalf of Kirk’s Servistar. We still keep some of their appliances in stock, but the value of these items was not included in the 2011 inventory count because we don’t own them.”
a. Recast the 2010 and 2011 income statements to take into account the correction of the 2010 ending inventory error.
b. Calculate the combined net income for 2010 and 2011 before and after the correction of the error. Explain to Uncle Bill why the error was corrected in 2011 before it was actually discovered in 2012.
c. What effect, if any, will the error have on net income and owners’ equity in 2012?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Comparative analysis of current asset structures The 2008 annual reports of Pearson plc and The McGraw Hill Companies, Inc. , two publishing and information services companies, included the following selected data as at December 31, 2008, and 2007:
|
PEARSON PLC
|
|
|
|
(Amounts in millions)
|
2008
|
2007
|
|
Cash and cash equivalents
|
£ 685
|
£ 560
|
|
Trade and other receivables, net of provisions for bad and doubtful
|
|
|
|
debts, and sales returns of £ 444 in 2008 and £ 333 in 2007
|
1,342
|
946
|
|
Inventories
|
501
|
368
|
|
Financial assets—marketable securities and derivative
|
|
|
|
financial instruments
|
57
|
68
|
|
Noncurrent assets classified as held for sale
|
—
|
117
|
|
Total current assets
|
£2,585
|
£2,059
|
|
|
|
|
|
THE McGRAW HILL COMPANIES, INC
|
|
|
|
(Amounts in thousands)
|
2008
|
2007
|
|
Cash and cash equivalents
|
$ 471,671
|
$ 396,096
|
|
Accounts receivable (net of allowances for doubtful accounts
|
|
|
|
and sales returns of $268,685 in 2008 and $267,681 in 2007)
|
1,060,858
|
1,189,205
|
|
Total inventories
|
369,679
|
350,668
|
|
Deferred income taxes
|
285,364
|
280,525
|
|
Prepaid and other current assets
|
115,151
|
127,172
|
|
Total current assets
|
$ 2,302,723
|
$ 2,343,666
|
Required:
a. Do you notice anything unusual about the data presented for Pearson? Comment specifically about some of the difficulties you would expect to encounter when comparing financial statement data of a U.S. based company to data of a non–U.S. based company.
b. Review the current asset data presented for each company. Comment briefly about your first impressions concerning the relative composition of current assets within each company.
c. Pearson’s revenues are derived from educational publishing (65%) including Prentice Hall and Addison Wesley, consumer publishing (19%) including Penguin Books, newsprint (8%) such as Financial Times , and information and media services (8%). McGraw Hill’s revenues are derived from educational publishing (42%), financial services such as Standard & Poor’s (42%), and information and media services (16%) such as J.D. Power and Associates and Business Week . How can these data help you make sense of your observations in part b?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Match the appropriate letter for the key term or concept to each definition provided (items 1–15). Note that not all key terms and concepts will be used.
|
a. Capitalize
|
l. Discount rate
|
|
b. Depletion
|
m. Annuity
|
|
c. Net book value
|
n. Intangible asset
|
|
d. Depreciation
|
o. Leasehold
|
|
e. Units of production depreciation
|
p. Patent
|
|
f. Straight line depreciation
|
q. Trademark
|
|
g. Declining balance depreciation
|
r. Goodwill
|
|
h. Modified Accelerated Cost Recovery System (MACRS)
|
s. Amortization
|
|
i. Operating lease
|
t. Leasehold improvement
|
|
j. Capital lease
|
u. Copyright
|
|
k. Present value
|
|
1. The receipt or payment of a constant amount over some period of time.
2. The process of spreading the cost of an intangible asset over its useful life.
3. An intangible asset represented by the legally granted protection against unauthorized copying of a creative work.
4. The value now of an amount to be received or paid at some future point, recognizing an interest (or discount) rate for the period.
5. An accelerated depreciation method in which the amount to be depreciated is multiplied by a rate that declines each year.
6. The accounting process recognizing that the cost of a natural resource asset is used up as the natural resource is consumed.
7. An intangible asset arising from the purchase of a business for more than the fair market value of the net assets acquired.
8. A depreciation method based on periodic use and life expressed in terms of asset utilization.
9. An intangible asset represented by the right to use property that is not owned.
10. The difference between the cost of an asset and the accumulated depreciation related to the asset.
11. An intangible asset represented by a government sanctioned monopoly over the use of a product or process.
12. The interest rate used in a present value calculation.
13. An accelerated depreciation method prescribed in the Internal Revenue Code and used for income tax purposes.
14. A lease that has the effect of financing the acquisition of an asset; “financing lease.”
15. Calculation of periodic depreciation expense by dividing the amount to be depreciated by the number of periods over which the asset is to be depreciated.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Basket purchase allocation Dorsey Co. has expanded its operations by purchasing a parcel of land with a building on it from Bibb Co. for $90,000. The appraised value of the land is $20,000, and the appraised value of the building is $80,000.
Required:
a. Assuming that the building is to be used in Dorsey Co.’s business activities, what cost should be recorded for the land?
b. Explain why, for income tax purposes, management of Dorsey Co. would want as little of the purchase price as possible allocated to land.
c. Assuming that the building is razed at a cost of $10,000 so the land can be used for employee parking, what cost should Dorsey Co. record for the land?
d. Explain why Dorsey Co. allocated the cost of assets acquired based on appraised values at the purchase date rather than on the original cost of the land and building to Bibb Co.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Depreciation calculation methods Kleener Co. acquired a new delivery truck at the beginning of its current fiscal year. The truck cost $26,000 and has an estimated useful life of four years and an estimated salvage value of $4,000.
Required:
a. Calculate depreciation expense for each year of the truck’s life using
1. Straight line depreciation.
2. Double declining balance depreciation.
b. Calculate the truck’s net book value at the end of its third year of use under each depreciation method.
c. Assume that Kleener Co. had no more use for the truck after the end of the third year and that at the beginning of the fourth year it had an offer from a buyer who was willing to pay $6,200 for the truck. Should the depreciation method used by Kleener Co. affect the decision to sell the truck?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Goodwill effect on ROI Assume that fast food restaurants generally provide an ROI of 15%, but that such a restaurant near a college campus has an ROI of 18% because its relatively large volume of business generates an above average turnover (sales/assets). The replacement value of the restaurant’s plant and equipment is $200,000. If you were to invest that amount in a restaurant elsewhere in town, you could expect a 15% ROI.
Required:
a. Would you be willing to pay more than $200,000 for the restaurant near the campus? Explain your answer.
b. If you purchased the restaurant near the campus for $240,000 and the fair value of the assets you acquired was $200,000, what balance sheet accounts would be used to record the cost of the restaurant?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Goodwill—effect on ROI and operating income Goodwill arises when one firm acquires the net assets of another firm and pays more for those net assets than their current fair market value. Suppose that Target Co. had operating income of $90,000 and net assets with a fair market value of $300,000. Takeover Co. pays $450,000 for Target Co.’s net assets and business activities.
Required:
a. How much goodwill will result from this transaction?
b. Calculate the ROI for Target Co. based on its present operating income and the fair market value of its net assets.
c. Calculate the ROI that Takeover Co. will earn if the operating income of the acquired net assets continues to be $90,000.
d. What reasons can you think of to explain why Takeover Co. is willing to pay $150,000 more than fair market value for the net assets acquired from Target Co.?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Transaction analysis—various accounts Prepare an answer sheet with the following column headings. For each of the following transactions or adjustments, indicate the effect of the transaction or adjustment on assets, liabilities, and net income by entering for each account affected the account name and amount and indicating whether it is an addition (_) or a subtraction (_). Transaction a has been done as an illustration. Net income is not affected by every transaction. In some cases, only one column may be affected because all of the specific accounts affected by the transaction are included in that category.
|
|
Assets
|
Liabilities
|
Net Income
|
|
Recorded $200
|
Accumulated
|
|
Depreciation
|
|
of depreciation
|
Depreciation
|
|
Expense
|
|
expense.
|
200
|
|
200
|
b. Sold land that had originally cost $26,000 for $22,800 in cash.
c. Recorded a $136,000 payment for the cost of developing and registering a patent.
d. Recognized periodic amortization for the patent (in part c) using the maximum statutory useful life.
e. Capitalized $6,400 of cash expenditures made to extend the useful life of production equipment.
f. Expensed $3,600 of cash expenditures incurred for routine maintenance of production equipment.
g. Sold a used machine for $18,000 in cash. The machine originally cost $60,000 and had been depreciated for the first two years of its five year useful life using the double declining balance method.
h. Purchased a business for $640,000 in cash. The fair market values of the net assets acquired were as follows: Land, $80,000; Buildings, $400,000; Equipment, $200,000; and Long Term Debt, $140,000.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Capitalizing versus expensing—effect on ROI and operating income During the first month of its current fiscal year, Green Co. incurred repair costs of $20,000 on a machine that had five years of remaining depreciable life. The repair cost was inappropriately capitalized. Green Co. reported operating income of $160,000 for the current year.
Required:
a. Assuming that Green Co. took a full year’s straight line depreciation expense in the current year, calculate the operating income that should have been reported for the current year.
b. Assume that Green Co.’s total assets at the end of the prior year and at the end of the current year were $940,000 and $1,020,000, respectively. Calculate ROI (based on operating income) for the current year using the originally reported data and then using corrected data.
c. Explain the effect on ROI of subsequent years if the error is not corrected.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Capitalizing versus expensing—effect on ROI Early in January 2010, Tellco, Inc., acquired a new machine and incurred $100,000 of interest, installation, and overhead costs that should have been capitalized but were expensed. The company earned net operating income of $1,000,000 on average total assets of $8,000,000 for 010. Assume that the total cost of the new machine will be depreciated over 10 years sing the straight line method.
Required:
a. Calculate the ROI for Tellco, Inc., for 2010.
b. Calculate the ROI for Tellco, Inc., for 2010, assuming that the $100,000 had been capitalized and depreciated over 10 years using the straight line method.
c. Given your answers to a and b, why would the company want to account for this expenditure as an expense?
d. Assuming that the $100,000 is capitalized, what will be the effect on ROI for 2011 and subsequent years, compared to expensing the interest, installation, and overhead costs in 2010? Explain your answer.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Partial year depreciation calculations—straight line and double declining balance methods Porter, Inc., acquired a machine that cost $720,000 on October 1, 2010. The machine is expected to have a four year useful life and an estimated salvage value of $80,000 at the end of its life. Porter, Inc., uses the calendar year for financial reporting. Depreciation expense for one fourth of a year was recorded in 2010.
Required:
a. Using the straight line depreciation method, calculate the depreciation expense to be recognized in the income statement for the year ended December 31, 2012, and the balance of the Accumulated Depreciation account as of December 31, 2012. (Note: This is the third calendar year in which the asset has been used.)
b. Using the double declining balance depreciation method, calculate the depreciation expense for the year ended December 31, 2012, and the net book value of the machine at that date.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Identify depreciation methods used Grove Co. acquired a production machine on January 1, 2010, at a cost of $240,000. The machine is expected to have a four year useful life, with a salvage value of $40,000. The machine is capable of producing 50,000 units of product in its lifetime. Actual production was as follows: 11,000 units in 2010; 16,000 units in 2011; 14,000 units in 2012; and 9,000 units in 2013.
Following is the comparative balance sheet presentation of the net book value of the production machine at December 31 for each year of the asset’s life, using three alternative depreciation methods (items a–c):
|
Production Machine, Net of Accumulated Depreciation
|
|
|
|
|
At December 31
|
|
|
Depreciation
|
|
|
|
|
|
Method?
|
2013
|
2012
|
2011
|
2010
|
|
____________________
|
40,000
|
76,000
|
132,000
|
196,000
|
|
____________________
|
40,000
|
40,000
|
60,000
|
120,000
|
|
____________________
|
40,000
|
90,000
|
140,000
|
190,000
|
Required:
Identify the depreciation method used for each of the preceding comparative balance sheet presentations (items a–c). If a declining balance method is used, be sure to indicate the percentage (150% or 200%).
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Identify depreciation methods used Moyle Co. acquired a machine on January 1, 2010, at a cost of $320,000. The machine is expected to have a five year useful life, with a salvage value of $20,000. The machine is capable of producing 300,000 units of product in its lifetime. Actual production was as follows: 60,000 units in 2010; 40,000 units in 2011; 80,000 units in 2012; 50,000 units in 2013; and 70,000 units in 2014.
Required:
Identify the depreciation method that would result in each of the following annual credit amount patterns to accumulated depreciation. If a declining balance method is used, indicate the percentage (150% or 200%).
|
a.
|
|
c.
|
|
|
|
|
60,000
|
12/31/10
|
|
|
128,000
|
12/31/10
|
|
|
40,000
|
12/31/11
|
|
|
76,800
|
12/31/11
|
|
|
80,000
|
12/31/12
|
|
|
46,080
|
12/31/12
|
|
|
50,000
|
12/31/13
|
|
|
27,648
|
12/31/13
|
|
|
70,000
|
12/31/14
|
|
|
16,588
|
12/31/14
|
|
b.
|
|
d.
|
|
|
|
|
96,000
|
12/31/10
|
|
|
60,000
|
12/31/10
|
|
|
67,200
|
12/31/11
|
|
|
60,000
|
12/31/11
|
|
|
47,020
|
12/31/12
|
|
|
60,000
|
12/31/12
|
|
|
32,928
|
12/31/13
|
|
|
60,000
|
12/31/13
|
|
|
23,050
|
12/31/14
|
|
|
60,000
|
12/31/14
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Determine depreciation method used and date of asset acquisition; record disposal of asset The balance sheets of HiROE, Inc., showed the following at December 31, 2011, and 2010:
|
|
December 31, 2011
|
December 31, 2010
|
|
Machine, less accumulated depreciation
|
|
|
|
of $283,500 at December 31, 2011, and
|
|
|
|
$202,500 at December 31, 2010.
|
$364,500
|
$445,500
|
Required:
a. If there have not been any purchases, sales, or other transactions affecting this equipment account since the equipment was first acquired, what is the amount of the depreciation expense for 2011?
b. Assume the same facts as in part a, and assume that the estimated useful life of the equipment to HiROE, Inc., is eight years and that there is no estimated salvage value. Determine:
1. What the original cost of the equipment was.
2. What depreciation method is apparently being used. Explain your answer.
3. When the equipment was acquired.
c. Assume that this equipment account represents the cost of 10 identical machines. Calculate the gain or loss on the sale of one of the machines on January 2, 2012, for $40,500. Use the horizontal model (or write the journal entry) to show the effect of the sale of the machine.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Accounting for capital leases versus purchased assets Ambrose Co. has the option of purchasing a new delivery truck for $28,200 in cash or leasing the truck for $6,100 per year, payable at the end of each year for six years. The truck also has a useful life of six years and will be depreciated on a straight line basis with no salvage value. The interest rate used by the lessor to determine the annual payments was 8%.
Required:
a. Assume that Ambrose Co. purchased the delivery truck and signed a six year, 8% note payable for $28,200 in satisfaction of the purchase price. Show in a horizontal model or write the entry that Ambrose should make to record the purchase transaction.
b. Assume instead that Ambrose Co. agreed to the terms of the lease. Show in a horizontal model or write the entry that Ambrose should make to record the capital lease transaction. Round your answer up to the nearest $1.
c. Show in a horizontal model or write the entry that Ambrose Co. should make at the end of the year to record the first annual lease payment of $6,100. Do not round your answers.
d. What expenses (include amounts) should Ambrose Co. recognize on the income statement for the first year of the lease?
e. How much would the annual payments be for the note payable signed by Ambrose Co. in part a?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Present value calculation—capital lease Renter Co. acquired the use of a machine by agreeing to pay the manufacturer of the machine $900 per year for 10 years. At the time the lease was signed, the interest rate for a 10 year loan was 12%.
Required:
a. Use the appropriate factor from Table 6 5 to calculate the amount that Renter Co. could have paid at the beginning of the lease to buy the machine outright.
b. What causes the difference between the amount you calculated in part a and the total of $9,000 ($900 per year for 10 years) that Renter Co. will pay under the terms of the lease?
c. What is the appropriate amount of cost to be reported in Renter Co.’s balance sheet (at the time the lease was signed) with respect to this asset?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Analyzing accounts receivable, property, plant and equipment, and other related accounts
You have been approached by Gary Gerrard, President and CEO of Gerrard Construction Co., who would like your advice on a number of business and accounting related matters.
Your conversation with Mr. Gerrard, which took place in February 2011, proceeded as follows:
Mr. Gerrard: “The accounts receivable shown on the balance sheet for 2010 are nearly $10 million and the funny thing is, we just collected a bunch of the big accounts in early December but had to reinvest most of that money in new equipment. At one point last year, more than $20 million of accounts were outstanding!
I had to put some pressure on our regular clients who keep falling behind. Normally, I don’t bother with collections, but this is our main source of cash flows. My daughter Anna deals with collections and she’s just too nice to people. I keep telling her that the money is better off in our hands than in someone else’s! Can you have a look at our books? Some of these clients are really getting on my nerves.”
Your reply: “That does seem like a big problem. I’ll look at your accounts receivable details and get back to you with some of my ideas and maybe some questions you can help me with. What else did you want to ask me about?”
Mr. Gerrard: “The other major problem is with our long term asset management.
We don’t have much in the way of buildings, just this office you’re sitting in and the service garage where we keep most of the earthmoving equipment.
That’s where the expense of running this business comes in. I’ve always said that I’d rather see a dozen guys standing around leaning against shovels than to see one piece of equipment sit idle for even an hour of daylight! There is nothing complicated about doing ‘dirt work,’ but we’ve got one piece of equipment that would cost over $2 million to replace at today’s prices. And that’s just it— either you spend a fortune on maintenance or else you’re constantly in the market for the latest and greatest new ‘Cat.’ ” Your reply: “So how can I help?”
Mr. Gerrard: “Now that you know a little about our business, I’ll have my son Nathan show you the equipment records. He’s our business manager. We’ve got to sell and replace some of our light duty trucks. We need to get a handle on the value of some of the older equipment. What the books say, and what it’s really worth, are two different things. I’d like to know what the accounting consequences of selling various pieces of equipment would be because I don’t want to be selling anything at a loss.”
Your reply: “Thanks, Gary. I’ll have a chat with Anna and Nathan and get back to you.”
After your discussion with Anna, you analyzed the accounts receivable details and prepared the following aging schedule:
|
Number of Days
|
Number of Accounts
|
Total Amount
|
|
Outstanding
|
Outstanding
|
Outstanding
|
|
0–30
|
20
|
$2,240,000
|
|
31–60
|
9
|
1,600,000
|
|
61–120
|
6
|
1,320,000
|
|
121–180
|
4
|
1,080,000
|
|
>180
|
11
|
3,560,000
|
You’ve noted that Gerrard Construction Co. has not written off any accounts receivable as uncollectible during the past several years. The Allowance for Bad Debts account is included in the chart of accounts but has never been used. No cash discounts have been offered to customers, and the company does not employ a collection agency. Reminder invoices are sent to customers with outstanding balances at the end of every quarter.
After your discussion with Nathan, you analyzed the equipment records related to the Record transactions and adjustments
|
|
|
|
|
|
Estimated
|
|
Item
|
Date of
|
|
Accumulated
|
Book
|
Market
|
|
Description
|
Purchase
|
Cost
|
Depreciation
|
Value
|
Value
|
|
2000 Ford F350
|
Mar 2000
|
$ 57,200
|
$ 38,600
|
$ 18,600
|
$ 14,000
|
|
2002 Cat DR9
|
June 2002
|
510,000
|
272,100
|
237,900
|
295,000
|
|
2004 Cat 345B L II
|
Sept 2004
|
422,700
|
226,500
|
196,200
|
160,000
|
Nathan explained that Gerrard Construction Co. uses the units of production depreciation method and estimates usage on the basis of hours in service for earthmoving equipment and miles driven for all on road vehicles. You have recalculated the annual depreciation adjustments through December 31, 2010, and are satisfied that the company has made the proper entries. The estimated market values were recently obtained through the services of a qualified, independent appraiser that you had recommended to Nathan.
Required:
a. Explain what Mr. Gerrard meant when he said, “I keep telling her that the money is better off in our hands than in someone else’s!”
b. What is your overall reaction concerning Gerrard Construction Co.’s management of accounts receivable? What suggestions would you make to Mr. Gerrard that may prove helpful in the collection process?
c. What accounting advice would you give concerning the accounts receivable balance of $9,800,000 at December 31, 2010?
d. What impact (increase, decrease, or no effect) would any necessary adjustment(s) have on the company’s working capital and current ratio?
e. Explain what Mr. Gerrard meant when he said, “We need to get a handle on the value of some of the older equipment. What the books say, and what it’s really worth, are two different things.”
f. Use the horizontal model, or write the journal entries, to show the effect of selling each of the three assets for their respective estimated market values. Partial year depreciation adjustments for 2011 can be ignored.
g. Explain to Mr. Gerrard why his statement that “I don’t want to be selling anything at a loss” does not make economic sense.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Match the appropriate letter for the key term or concept to each definition provided (items 1–10). Note that not all key terms and concepts will be used.
|
a. Working capital loan
|
j. Mortgage bond
|
|
b. Maturity date
|
k. Collateral trust bond
|
|
c. Revolving line of credit
|
l. Serial bond
|
|
d. Straight interest
|
m. Callable
|
|
e. Discount interest
|
n. Call premium
|
|
f. Annual percentage rate (APR)
|
o. Convertible bond
|
|
g. Prime rate
|
p. Face amount of bond
|
|
h. Bond discount
|
q. Stated interest rate
|
|
i. Current maturities of long term debt
|
r. Bond premium
|
1. The interest rate used to calculate the amount of interest payable on a bond. Sometimes called the coupon rate.
2. A loan on which regular payments are to be made but which can be increased up to a predetermined limit as additional funds need to be borrowed.
3. A short term loan that is expected to be repaid from collections of accounts receivable.
4. The interest rate charged by banks on loans to large and most creditworthy customers; a benchmark interest rate.
5. The date when a loan is scheduled to be repaid.
6. A bond secured by the pledge of securities or other intangible property.
7. Principal payments on long term debt that are scheduled to be paid within one year of the balance sheet date.
8. The principal amount of a bond.
9. An amount paid in excess of the face amount of a bond when the bond is repaid prior to its established maturity date.
10. Refers to the bond issuer’s right to redeem bonds prior to the established maturity date, or to a corporation’s right to redeem its preferred stock.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Match the appropriate letter for the key term or concept to each definition provided (items 1–10). Note that not all key terms and concepts will be used.
|
a. Accounts payable
|
i. Registered bonds
|
|
b. Unearned revenue
|
j. Contra liability
|
|
c. Debenture bond
|
k. Proceeds
|
|
d. Long term debt
|
l. Carrying value
|
|
e. Leverage
|
m. Coupon bond
|
|
f. Bond payable
|
n. Deferred tax liabilities
|
|
g. Bond indenture
|
o. Consolidated financial statements
|
|
h. Trustee of bonds
|
|
1. A bond for which the owner’s name and address are recorded by the issuer and/or trustee.
2. A liability arising from receipt of cash before the related revenue has been earned.
3. The agent who coordinates activities between the bond issuer and the investor in bonds.
4. A long term liability with a stated interest rate and maturity date, usually in denominations of $1,000.
5. The amount of cash received in a transaction.
6. A bond for which the owner’s name and address are not known by the issuer and/or trustee. Interest is received by clipping and submitting to the issuer interest coupons that are attached to the bond.
7. The use of borrowed money on which the interest cost is different from the rate of return on the investment of the borrowed funds.
8. A long term liability that arises because of timing differences in the recognition of items (principally depreciation expense) for book purposes and tax purposes.
9. An account that normally has a debit balance and that is subtracted from a related liability on the balance sheet.
10. A bond secured by the general credit of the issuer and not secured by specific assets.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Kasap, Inc., has been authorized to issue $30 million of 14%, 20 year bonds payable. Interest will be paid on a semiannual basis on June 30 and December 31 each year. At the date the bonds were to be issued, the market rate of interest for this quality of bond was 14.7%. On the basis of these facts, it might be expected that
a. Kasap, Inc., will not be able to sell the bonds because it offers less interest than is paid on similar bonds in the market.
b. because of legal considerations, the bonds will be issued at par and investors will be paid the 14.7% market rate of interest.
c. the bonds will be issued at a discount.
d. the bonds will be issued at a premium.
e. based on the facts presented, the issue price is indeterminable.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. On January 1, the shares and prices for a mutual fund at 4:00 PM are as follows:
|
Stock
|
Shares owned
|
Price
|
|
1
|
1,000
|
$1.92
|
|
2
|
5,000
|
$51.18
|
|
3
|
2,800
|
$29.08
|
|
4
|
9,200
|
$67.19
|
|
5
|
3,000
|
$4.51
|
|
Cash
|
n.a.
|
$5,353.40
|
Stock 3 announces record earnings, and the price of stock 3 jumps to $32.44 in after market trading. If the fund (illegally) allows investors to buy at the current NAV, how many shares will $25,000 buy? If the fund waits until the price adjusts, how many shares can be purchased? What is the gain to such illegal trades? Assume 5,000 shares are outstanding.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
On January 1, a mutual fund has the following assets and prices at 4:00 PM.
|
Stock
|
Shares owned
|
Price
|
|
1
|
1,000
|
$1.97
|
|
2
|
5,000
|
$48.26
|
|
3
|
1,000
|
$26.44
|
|
4
|
10,000
|
$67.49
|
|
5
|
3,000
|
$2.59
|
Calculate the net asset value (NAV) for the fund.
Assume that 8,000 shares are outstanding for the fund.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. An investor sends the fund a check for $50,000. If there is no front end load, calculate the new number of shares and price per share. Assume the manager purchases 1,800 shares of stock 3, and the rest is held as cash.
2. On January 2, the prices at 4:00 PM are as follows:
|
Stock
|
Shares owned
|
Price
|
|
1
|
1,000
|
$2.03
|
|
2
|
5,000
|
$51.37
|
|
3
|
2,800
|
$29.08
|
|
4
|
10,000
|
$67.19
|
|
5
|
3,000
|
$4.42
|
|
Cash
|
n.a.
|
$2,408.00
|
Calculate the net asset value (NAV) for the fund.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Kio Outfitters estimated the following losses and probabilities from past experience:
|
Loss
|
Probability (%)
|
|
$30,000
|
0.25
|
|
$15,000
|
0.75
|
|
$10,000
|
1.50
|
|
$5,000
|
2.50
|
|
$1,000
|
5.00
|
|
$250
|
15.00
|
|
$0
|
75.00
|
What is the probability Kio will experience a loss of $5,000 or greater? If an insurance company offers a loss policy with a $1,500 deductible, what is the most Kio will pay?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
2. The limit order book for a security is as follows:
|
Unfilled Limit Orders
|
|
Buy Orders
|
Sell Orders
|
|
|
25.12
|
100
|
25.36
|
300
|
|
|
25.20
|
500
|
25.38
|
200
|
|
|
25.23
|
200
|
25.41
|
200
|
|
The specialist receives the following, in order:
? Market order to sell 300 shares
? Limit order to buy 100 shares at 25.38
? Limit order to buy 500 shares at 25.30
How, if at all, are these orders filled? What does the limit order book look like after these orders?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Bad debts analysis—Allowance account On January 1, 2010, the balance in Tabor Co.’s Allowance for Bad Debts account was $13,400. During the first 11 months of the year, bad debts expense of $21,462 was recognized. The balance in the Allowance for Bad Debts account at November 30, 2010, was $9,763.
Required:
a. What was the total of accounts written off during the first 11 months?
b. As the result of a comprehensive analysis, it is determined that the December 31, 2010, balance of the Allowance for Bad Debts account should be $9,500. Show the adjustment required in the horizontal model or in journal entry format.
c. During a conversation with the credit manager, one of Tabor’s sales representatives learns that a $1,230 receivable from a bankrupt customer has not been written off but was considered in the determination of the appropriate year end balance of the Allowance for Bad Debts account balance. Write a brief explanation to the sales representative explaining the effect that the write off of this account receivable would have had on 2010 net income.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
LIFO versus FIFO—impact on ROI Natco, Inc., uses the FIFO inventory cost flow assumption. In a year of rising costs and prices, the firm reported net income of $480,000 and average assets of $3,000,000. If Natco had used the LIFO cost flow assumption in the same year, its cost of goods sold would have been $80,000 more than under FIFO, and its average assets would have been $80,000 less than under FIFO.
Required:
a. Calculate the firm’s ROI under each cost flow assumption.
b. Suppose that two years later costs and prices were falling. Under FIFO, net income and average assets were $576,000 and $3,600,000, respectively. If LIFO had been used through the years, inventory values would have been $100,000 less than under FIFO, and current year cost of goods sold would have been $40,000 less than under FIFO. Calculate the firm’s ROI under each cost flow assumption.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Prepaid expenses—rent
On November 1, 2010, Wenger Co. paid its landlord $25,200 in cash as an advance rent payment on its store location. The six month lease period ends on April 30, 2011, at which time the contract may be renewed
Required:
a. Use the horizontal model or write the journal entry to record the six month advance rent payment on November 1, 2010.
b. Use the horizontal model or write the adjusting entry that will be made at the end of every month to show the amount of rent “used” during the month.
c. Calculate the amount of prepaid rent that should be reported on the December 31, 2010, balance sheet with respect to this lease.
d. If the advance payment made on November 1, 2010, had covered an 18 month lease period at the same amount of rent per month, how should Wenger Co. report the prepaid amount on its December 31, 2010, balance sheet?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Transaction analysis—various accounts Prepare an answer sheet with the column headings shown here. For each of the following transactions or adjustments, indicate the effect of the transaction or adjustment on the appropriate balance sheet category and on net income by entering for each account affected the account name and amount and indicating whether it is an addition (+) or a subtraction ( ).
Transaction a has been done as an illustration. Net income is not affected by every transaction. In some cases only one column may be affected because all of the specific accounts affected by the transaction are included in that category.
|
|
|
Current
|
Current
|
Owners’
|
Net
|
|
|
|
Assets
|
Liabilities
|
Equity
|
Income
|
|
a.
|
Accrued interest
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
income of
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
$15 on a note
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
receivable.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Interest
|
|
|
Interest
|
|
|
|
Receivable
|
|
|
Income
|
|
|
|
+ 15
|
|
|
+ 15
|
b. Determined that the Allowance for Bad Debts account balance should be increased by $2,200.
c. Recognized bank service charges of $30 for the month.
d. Received $25 cash for interest accrued in a prior month.
e. Purchased five units of a new item of inventory on account at a cost of $35 each. Perpetual inventory is maintained.
f. Purchased 10 more units of the same item at a cost of $38 each. Perpetual inventory is maintained.
g. Sold eight of the items purchased (in e and f ) and recognized the cost of goods sold using the FIFO cost flow assumption. Perpetual inventory is maintained.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Transaction analysis—various accounts Prepare an answer sheet with the column headings shown here. For each of the following transactions or adjustments, indicate the effect of the transaction or adjustment on the appropriate balance sheet category and on net income by entering for each account affected the account name and amount and indicating whether it is an addition (+) or a subtraction ( ).
Transaction a has been done as an illustration. Net income is not affected by every transaction. In some cases only one column may be affected because all of the specific accounts affected by the transaction are included in that category.
|
|
|
Current
|
Current
|
Owners’
|
Net
|
|
|
|
Assets
|
Liabilities
|
Equity
|
Income
|
|
a.
|
Accrued interest
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
income of
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
$15 on a note
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
receivable.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Interest
|
|
|
Interest
|
|
|
|
Receivable
|
|
|
Income
|
|
|
|
+ 15
|
|
|
+ 15
|
b. Determined that the Allowance for Bad Debts account balance should be decreased by $3,200 because expense during the year had been overestimated.
c. Wrote off an account receivable of $1,440.
d. Received cash from a customer in full payment of an account receivable of $500 that was paid within the 2% discount period. A Cash Discount Allowance account is maintained.
e. Purchased eight units of a new item of inventory on account at a cost of $40 each. Perpetual inventory is maintained.
f. Purchased 17 more units of the above item at a cost of $38 each. Perpetual inventory is maintained.
g. Sold 20 of the items purchased (in e and f ) and recognized the cost of goods sold using the LIFO cost flow assumption. Perpetual inventory is maintained.
h. Paid a one year insurance premium of $480 that applied to the next fiscal year.
i. Recognized insurance expense related to the preceding policy during the first month of the fiscal year to which it applied.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Transaction analysis—various accounts Prepare an answer sheet with the column headings shown here. For each of the following transactions or adjustments, indicate the effect of the transaction or adjustment on the appropriate balance sheet category and on net income by entering for each account affected the account name and amount and indicating whether it is an addition (+) or a subtraction ( ).
Transaction a has been done as an illustration. Net income is not affected by every transaction. In some cases only one column may be affected because all of the specific accounts affected by the transaction are included in that category.
|
|
|
Current
|
Current
|
Owners’
|
Net
|
|
|
|
Assets
|
Liabilities
|
Equity
|
Income
|
|
a.
|
Accrued interest
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
income of
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
$15 on a note
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
receivable.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Interest
|
|
|
Interest
|
|
|
|
Receivable
|
|
|
Income
|
|
|
|
+ 15
|
|
|
+ 15
|
b. Paid $2,800 in cash as an advance rent payment for a short term lease that covers the next four months.
c. Recorded an adjustment at the end of the first month (of b) to show the amount of rent “used” in the month.
d. Inventory was acquired on account and recorded for $820. Perpetual inventory is maintained.
e. It was later determined that the amount of inventory acquired on account (in d) was erroneously recorded. The actual amount purchased was only $280. No payments have been made. Record the correction of this error.
f. Purchased 12 units of inventory at a cost of $40 each and then 8 more units of the same inventory item at $44 each. Perpetual inventory is maintained.
g. Sold 15 of the items purchased (in f ) for $60 each and received the entire amount in cash. Record the sales transaction and the cost of goods sold using the LIFO cost flow assumption. Perpetual inventory is maintained.
h. Assume the same facts (in g) except that the company uses the FIFO cost flow assumption. Record only the cost of goods sold.
i. Assume the same facts (in g) except that the company uses the weighted average cost flow assumption. Record only the cost of goods sold.
j. Explain why the sales transaction in h and i would be recorded in exactly the same way it was in g.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Bank reconciliation—compute Cash account balance and bank statement balance before reconciling items Beckett Co. received its bank statement for the month ending June 30, 2010, and reconciled the statement balance to the June 30, 2010, balance in the Cash account. The reconciled balance was determined to be $4,800. The reconciliation recognized the following items:
1. Deposits in transit were $2,100.
2. Outstanding checks totaled $3,000.
3. Bank service charges shown as a deduction on the bank statement were $50.
4. An NSF check from a customer for $400 was included with the bank statement. The firm had not been previously notified that the check had been returned NSF.
5. Included in the canceled checks was a check actually written for $890. However, it had been recorded as a disbursement of $980.
Required:
a. What was the balance in Beckett Co.’s Cash account before recognizing any of the preceding reconciling items?
b. What was the balance shown on the bank statement before recognizing any of the preceding reconciling items?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Bank reconciliation—compute Cash account balance and bank statement balance before reconciling items Branson Co. received its bank statement for the month ending May 31, 2010, and reconciled the statement balance to the May 31, 2010, balance in the Cash account. The reconciled balance was determined to be $18,600. The reconciliation recognized the following items:
1. A deposit made on May 31 for $10,200 was included in the Cash account balance but not in the bank statement balance.
2. Checks issued but not returned with the bank statement were No. 673 for $2,940 and No. 687 for $5,100.
3. Bank service charges shown as a deduction on the bank statement were $240.
4. Interest credited to Branson Co.’s account but not recorded on the company’s books amounted to $144.
5. Returned with the bank statement was a “debit memo” stating that a customer’s check for $1,920 that had been deposited on May 23 had been returned because the customer’s account was overdrawn.
6. During a review of the checks that were returned with the bank statement, it was noted that the amount of check No. 681 was $960 but that in the company’s records supporting the Cash account balance, the check had been erroneously recorded in the amount of $96.
Required:
a. What was the balance in Branson Co.’s Cash account before recognizing any of these reconciling items?
b. What was the balance shown on the bank statement before recognizing any of these reconciling items?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Bad debts analysis—Allowance account and financial statement effect The following is a portion of the current assets section of the balance sheets of Avanti’s, Inc., at December 31, 2011 and 2010:
|
|
12/31/11
|
12/31/10
|
|
Accounts receivable, less allowance for bad debts
|
|
|
|
of $9,500 and $17,900, respectively
|
$173,200
|
$236,400
|
Required:
a. If $11,800 of accounts receivable were written off during 2011, what was the amount of bad debts expense recognized for the year?
b. The December 31, 2011, Allowance account balance includes $3,100 for a past due account that is not likely to be collected. This account has not been written off. If it had been written off , what would have been the effect of the write off on
1. Working capital at December 31, 2011?
2. Net income and ROI for the year ended December 31, 2011?
c. What do you suppose was the level of Avanti’s sales in 2011, compared to 2010? Explain your answer.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Bad debts analysis—Allowance account and financial statement effects The following is a portion of the current asset section of the balance sheets of HiROE o., at December 31, 2011 and 2010:
|
|
December 31, 2011
|
December 31, 2010
|
|
Accounts receivable, less allowance for
|
|
|
|
uncollectible accounts of $54,000 and
|
|
|
|
$18,000, respectively
|
906,000
|
722,000
|
Required:
a. Describe how the allowance amount at December 31, 2011, was most likely determined.
b. If bad debts expense for 2011 totaled $48,000, what was the amount of accounts receivable written off during the year?
c. The December 31, 2011, Allowance account balance includes $21,000 for a past due account that is not likely to be collected. This account has not been written off. If it had been written off , what would have been the effect of the write off on
1. Working capital at December 31, 2011?
2. Net income and ROI for the year ended December 31, 2011?
d. What do you suppose was the level of HiROE’s sales in 2011, compared to 2010? Explain your answer.
e. Calculate the ratio of the Allowance for Uncollectible Accounts balance to the Accounts Receivable balance at December 31, 2010, and 2011. What factors might have caused the change in this ratio?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Analysis of accounts receivable and allowance for bad debts—determine beginning balances A portion of the current assets section of the December 31, 2011, balance sheet for Carr Co. is presented here:
|
Accounts receivable
|
$50,000
|
|
|
Less: Allowance for bad debts
|
(7,000)
|
$43,000
|
The company’s accounting records revealed the following information for the year ended December 31, 2011:
|
Sales (all on account)
|
$400,000
|
|
Cash collections from customers
|
410,000
|
|
Accounts written off
|
15,000
|
|
Bad debts expense (accrued at 12/31/11)
|
12,000
|
Required:
Using the information provided for 2011, calculate the net realizable value of accounts receivable at December 31, 2010, and prepare the appropriate balance sheet presentation for Carr Co., as of that point in time.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Analysis of accounts receivable and allowance for bad debts—determine ending balances A portion of the current assets section of the December 31, 2010, balance sheet for Gibbs Co. is presented here:
|
Accounts receivable
|
$63,000
|
|
|
Less: Allowance for bad debts
|
(9,000)
|
$54,000
|
The company’s accounting records revealed the following information for the year ended December 31, 2011:
|
Sales (all on account)
|
$480,000
|
|
Cash collections from customers
|
435,000
|
|
Accounts written off
|
10,500
|
|
Bad debts expense (accrued at 12/31/11)
|
16,500
|
Required:
Calculate the net realizable value of accounts receivable at December 31, 2011, and prepare the appropriate balance sheet presentation for Gibbs Co., as of that point in time.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cost flow assumptions—FIFO and LIFO using a periodic system Mower Blower Sales Co. started business on January 20, 2010. Products sold were snow blowers and lawn mowers. Each product sold for $350. Purchases during 2010 were as follows:
|
|
Blowers
|
Mowers
|
|
January 21
|
20 @ $200
|
|
|
February 3
|
40 @ 195
|
|
|
February 28
|
30 @ 190
|
|
|
March 13
|
20 @ 190
|
|
|
April 6
|
|
20 @ $210
|
|
May 22
|
|
40 @ 215
|
|
June 3
|
|
40 @ 220
|
|
June 20
|
|
60 @ 230
|
|
August 15
|
|
20 @ 215
|
|
September 20
|
|
20 @ 210
|
|
November 7
|
20 @ 200
|
|
The December 31, 2010, inventory included 10 blowers and 25 mowers. Assume the company uses a periodic inventory system.
Required:
a. What will be the difference between ending inventory valuation at December 31, 2010, and cost of goods sold for 2010, under the FIFO and LIFO cost flow assumptions?
b. If the cost of mowers had increased to $240 each by December 1, and if management had purchased 30 mowers at that time, which cost flow assumption was probably being used by the firm? Explain your answer.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cost flow assumptions—FIFO and LIFO using periodic and perpetual systems The inventory records of Kuffel Co. reflected the following information for the year ended December 31, 2010:
|
|
|
Number
|
Unit
|
Total
|
|
Date
|
Transaction
|
of Units
|
Cost
|
Cost
|
|
1/1
|
Beginning inventory
|
150
|
$30
|
$4,500
|
|
2/22
|
Purchase
|
70
|
33
|
2,310
|
|
3/7
|
Sale
|
(100)
|
—
|
—
|
|
4/15
|
Purchase
|
90
|
35
|
3,150
|
|
6/11
|
Purchase
|
140
|
36
|
5,040
|
|
9/28
|
Sale
|
(100)
|
—
|
—
|
|
10/13
|
Purchase
|
50
|
38
|
1,900
|
|
12/4
|
Sale
|
(100)
|
—
|
—
|
Required:
a. Assume that Kuffel Co. uses a periodic inventory system. Calculate cost of goods sold and ending inventory under FIFO and LIFO.
b. Assume that Kuffel Co. uses a perpetual inventory system. Calculate cost of goods sold and ending inventory under FIFO and LIFO.
c. Explain why the FIFO results for cost of goods sold and ending inventory are the same in your answers to parts a and b, but the LIFO results are different.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cost flow assumptions—FIFO and LIFO using periodic and perpetual systems The inventory records of Cushing, Inc., reflected the following information for the year ended December 31, 2010:
|
|
Number
|
Unit
|
Total
|
|
|
of Units
|
Cost
|
Cost
|
|
Inventory, January 1
|
200
|
$13
|
$ 2,600
|
|
Purchases:
|
|
|
|
|
30 May
|
320
|
15
|
4,800
|
|
28 Sep
|
400
|
16
|
6,400
|
|
Goods available for sale
|
920
|
|
$13,800
|
|
Sales:
|
|
|
|
|
22 Feb
|
(140)
|
|
|
|
11 Jun
|
(300)
|
|
|
|
1 Nov
|
(380)
|
|
|
|
Inventory, December 31
|
100
|
|
|
Required:
a. Assume that Cushing, Inc., uses a periodic inventory system. Calculate cost of goods sold and ending inventory under FIFO and LIFO.
b. Assume that Cushing, Inc., uses a perpetual inventory system. Calculate cost of goods sold and ending inventory under FIFO and LIFO.
c. Explain why the FIFO results for cost of goods sold and ending inventory are the same in your answers to parts a and b, but the LIFO results are different.
d. Explain why the results from the LIFO periodic calculations in part a cannot possibly represent the actual physical flow of inventory items.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Vargo makes DVD players and TVs. Machine capacity is limited to 3,600 hours per month.
|
|
DVD Players
|
TVs
|
|
Contribution margin per unit
|
$200
|
$500
|
|
Machine hours required per unit
|
0.2
|
0.625
|
Calculate the contribution margin per unit of limited resource.
If Vargo is able to increase machine capacity from 3,600 hours to 4,200 hours, the additional 600 hours could be used to produce either the DVD players or TVs.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Vargo Video and one of its competitors, New Wave Company, both make DVD players. Vargo Video uses a traditional, labor intensive manufacturing process. New Wave Company has invested in a completely automated system. The factory employees are involved only in setting up, adjusting, and maintaining the machinery.
| |
Vargo Video
|
New Wave Company
|
|
Sales
|
$800,000
|
$800,000
|
|
Variable costs
|
480,000
|
160,000
|
|
Contribution margin
|
320,000
|
640,000
|
|
Fixed costs
|
200,000
|
520,000
|
|
Net income
|
$120,000
|
$120,000
|
Calculate the break even point.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Baron Company incurs the following annual costs in producing 25,000 ignition switches for motor scooters.
|
Direct Materials
|
$50,000
|
|
Direct Labor
|
75,000
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead
|
40,000
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead
|
60,000
|
|
Total manufacturing costs
|
$225,000
|
Instead of making its own switches, Baron Company might purchase the ignition switches at a price of $8 per unit. “What should management do?”
Assume that through buying the switches, Baron Company can use the released productive capacity to generate additional income of $28,000 from producing a different product. This lost income is an additional cost of continuing to make the switches in the make or buy decision.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Wood masters Inc. makes tables. The cost to manufacture an unfinished table is $35. The selling price per unfinished unit is $50. Management concludes that some of the unused capacity may be used to finish the tables and sell them at $60 per unit. For a finished table, direct materials will increase $2 and direct labor costs will increase $4. Variable manufacturing overhead costs will increase by $2.40 (60% of direct labor). No increase is anticipated in fixed manufacturing overhead.
|
Direct Materials
|
$15
|
|
Direct Labor
|
10
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead
|
6
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead
|
4
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Jeff coat Company is considering replacing a factory machine with a new machine.
Assessment of replacement of factory machine:
| |
Old Machine
|
New Machine
|
|
Book Value
|
$ 40,000
|
|
|
Cost
|
|
$120,000
|
|
Remaining useful life
|
four years
|
four years
|
|
Salvage value
|
0
|
0
|
Variable manufacturing costs decrease from $160,000 to $125,000 if new machine purchased.
Prepare the incremental analysis for the four year period.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Illustration: Martina Company manufactures three models of tennis rackets:
Profitable lines: Pro and Master
Unprofitable line: Champ
|
|
Pro
|
Master
|
Champ
|
Total
|
|
Sales
|
$800,000
|
$300,000
|
$100,000
|
$1,200,000
|
|
Variable Expenses
|
520,000
|
210,000
|
90,000
|
820,000
|
|
Contribution Margin
|
280,000
|
90,000
|
10,000
|
320,000
|
|
Fixed Expenses
|
80,000
|
50,000
|
30,000
|
160,000
|
|
Net Income
|
$200,000
|
$40,000
|
$(20,000)
|
$220,000
|
Should Champ be eliminated?
Prepare income data after eliminating Champ product line. Assume fixed costs are allocated 2/3 to Pro and 1/3 to Master.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
- The following table lists foreign exchange rates between U.S. dollars and British pounds (GBP) during April.
|
Date
|
U.S. Dollars per GBP
|
|
4/1
|
1.9564
|
|
4/4
|
1.9293
|
|
4/5
|
1.914
|
|
4/6
|
1.9374
|
|
4/7
|
1.961
|
|
4/8
|
1.8925
|
|
4/11
|
1.8822
|
|
4/12
|
1.8558
|
|
4/13
|
1.796
|
|
4/14
|
1.7902
|
|
4/15
|
1.7785
|
|
4/18
|
1.7504
|
|
4/19
|
1.7255
|
|
4/20
|
1.6914
|
|
4/21
|
1.672
|
|
4/22
|
1.6684
|
|
4/25
|
1.6674
|
|
4/26
|
1.6857
|
|
4/27
|
1.6925
|
|
4/28
|
1.7201
|
|
4/29
|
1.7512
|
Which day would have been the best day to convert $200 into British pounds? Which day would have been the worst day? What would be the difference in pounds?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Calculate the present value of a $1,000 zero coupon bond with five years to maturity if the yield to maturity is 6%.
2. A lottery claims its grand prize is $10 million, payable over 20 years at $500,000 per year. If the first payment is made immediately, what is this grand prize really worth? Use an interest rate of 6%.
3. Consider a bond with a 7% annual coupon and a face value of $1,000. Complete the following table.
|
Year to Maturity
|
Yield to Maturity
|
Current Price
|
|
3
|
5
|
|
|
3
|
7
|
|
|
6
|
7
|
|
|
9
|
7
|
|
|
9
|
9
|
|
What relationships do you observe between maturity and discount rate and the current price?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Consider a bond that promises the following cash flows. The yield to maturity is 12%.
|
Year
|
0
|
1
|
2
|
3
|
4
|
|
Promised
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Payments
|
160
|
160
|
170
|
180
|
230
|
You plan to buy this bond, hold it for 2.5 years, and then sell the bond.
a. What total cash will you receive from the bond after the 2.5 years? Assume that periodic cash flows are reinvested at 12%.
b. If immediately after buying this bond all market interest rates drop to 11% (including your reinvestment rate), what will be the impact on your total cash flow after 2.5 years? How does this compare to part (a)?
c. Assuming all market interest rates are 12%, what is the duration of this bond?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
You own a $1,000 par zero coupon bond that has five years of remaining maturity. You plan on selling the bond in one year, and believe that the required yield next year will have the following probability distribution:
|
Probability
|
Required Yield %
|
|
0.1
|
6.60%
|
|
0.2
|
6.75%
|
|
0.4
|
7.00%
|
|
0.2
|
7.20%
|
|
0.1
|
7.45%
|
a. What is your expected price when you sell the bond?
b. What is the standard deviation of the bond price?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Last month, corporations supplied $250 billion in oneyear discount bonds to investors at an average market rate of 11.8%. This month, an additional $25 billion in one year discount bonds became available, and market rates increased to 12.2%. Assuming that the demand curve remained constant, derive a linear equation for the demand for bonds, using prices instead of interest rates.
2. An economist has concluded that, near the point of equilibrium, the demand curve and supply curve for one year discount bonds can be estimated using the following equations:
Bd: Price = 2/5 Quantity + 940
Bs: Price = Quantity + 500
a. What is the expected equilibrium price and quantity of bonds in this market?
b. Given your answer to part (a), which is the expected interest rate in this market?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Government economists have forecasted one year T bill rates for the following five years, as follows:
|
Year
|
1 year rate (%)
|
|
1
|
4.25
|
|
2
|
5.15
|
|
3
|
5.5
|
|
4
|
6.25
|
|
5
|
7.1
|
You have a liquidity premium of 0.25% for the next two years and 0.50% thereafter. Would you be willing to purchase a four year T bond at a 5.75% interest rate?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. A company has just announced a 3 for 1 stock split, effective immediately. Prior to the split, the company had a market value of $5 billion with 100 million shares outstanding. Assuming that the split conveys no new information about the company, what is the value of the company, the number of shares outstanding, and price per share after the split? If the actual market price immediately following the split is $17.00 per share, what does this tell us about market efficiency?
2. If the public expects a corporation to lose $5 a share this quarter and it actually loses $4, which is still the largest loss in the history of the company, what does the efficient market hypothesis say will happen to the price of the stock when the $4 loss is announced?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
You wish to hire Ricky to manage your Dallas operations. The profits from the operations depend partially on how hard Ricky works, as follows.
|
Probabilities
|
|
|
Profit = $10,000
|
Profit =$50,000
|
|
Lazy
|
60%
|
40%
|
|
Hard worker
|
20%
|
80%
|
If Ricky is lazy, he will surf the Internet all day, and he views this as a zero cost opportunity. However, Ricky would view working hard as a personal cost” valued at $1,000. What fixed percentage of the profits should you offer Ricky? Assume Ricky only cares about his expected payment less any personal cost.”
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Consider a bank policy to maintain 12% of deposits as reserves. The bank currently has $10 million in deposits and holds $400,000 in excess reserves. What is the required reserve on a new deposit of $50,000?
2. Estimates of unemployment for the upcoming year have been developed as follows:
|
Economy
|
Probability
|
Unemployment Rate (%)
|
|
Bust
|
0.15
|
20
|
|
Average
|
0.5
|
10
|
|
Good
|
0.2
|
5
|
|
Boom
|
0.15
|
1
|
What is the expected unemployment rate? The standard deviation?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Consider the following options available to a mortgage borrower:
| |
Loan Amount
|
Interest Rate (%)
|
Type of Mortgage
|
Discount Points
|
|
Option 1
|
$100,000
|
6.75
|
30 year fixed
|
none
|
|
Option 2
|
$150,000
|
6.25
|
30 year fixed
|
1
|
|
Option 3
|
$125,000
|
6
|
30 year fixed
|
2
|
What is the effective annual rate for each option?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Consider a shared appreciation mortgage (SAM) on a $250,000 mortgage with yearly payments. Current market mortgage rates are high, running at 13%, of which 10% is annual inflation. Under the terms of the SAM, a 15 year mortgage is offered at 5%. After 15 years, the house must be sold, and the bank retains $400,000 of the sale price. If inflation remains at 10%, what are the cash flows to the bank? To the owner?
2. Consider a 30 year graduated payment mortgage on a $250,000 mortgage with yearly payments. The stated interest rate on the mortgage is 6%, but the first annual payment is calculated assuming a 3% rate for the life of the loan. Thereafter, the annual payment will grow by 3.151222%. Develop an amortization table for this loan, assuming the initial payment is based on 30 years and the loan pays off in 15.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
You are working with a pool of 1,000 mortgages. Each mortgage is for $100,000 and has a stated annual interest rate (nominal) of 6.00%. The mortgages are all 30 year fixed rate and fully amortizing. Mortgage servicing fees are currently 0.25% annually. Complete the following table.
| |
(1) Beginning Balance
|
(2) Required Payment
|
(3) Interest
|
(4) Principal
|
(5) Expected Prepayment
|
(6) Servicing Fees
|
(7) Ending Balance
|
|
Month
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
1
|
100,000,000
|
|
500,000
|
99,551
|
16,665
|
|
|
|
2
|
|
|
|
|
33,322
|
|
99,750,430
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Consider a failing bank. A deposit of $150,000 is worth how much if the FDIC uses the payoff method? The purchase and assumption method? Which is more costly to taxpayers?
2. Consider a bank with the following balance sheet:
|
Assets
|
Liabilities
|
|
Required Reserves
|
$8 million
|
Checkable Deposits
|
$100 million
|
|
Excess Reserves
|
$3 million
|
Bank Capital
|
$6 million
|
|
T bills
|
$45 million
|
|
|
|
Commercial Loans
|
$50 million
|
|
|
Calculate the bank’s risk weighted assets.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Consider a bank with the following balance sheet:
|
Assets
|
Liabilities
|
|
Required Reserves
|
$8 million
|
Checkable Deposits
|
$100 million
|
|
Excess Reserves
|
$3 million
|
Bank Capital
|
$6 million
|
|
T bills
|
$45 million
|
|
|
|
Commercial Loans
|
$50 million
|
|
|
The bank commits to a loan agreement for $10 million to a commercial customer. Calculate the bank’s capital ratio before and after the agreement. Calculate the bank’s risk weighted assets before and after the agreement. Problems 4 through 11 relate to a sequence of transactions at Oldhat Financial.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1 A rising stock market index due to higher share prices
A) increases people”s wealth, but is unlikely to increase their willingness to spend.
B) increases people”s wealth and as a result may increase their willingness to spend.
C) decreases the amount of funds that business firms can raise by selling newly issued stock.
D) decreases people”s wealth, but is unlikely to increase their willingness to spend.
2 When stock prices fall
A) an individual”s wealth is not affected nor is their willingness to spend.
B) a business firm will be more likely to sell stock to finance investment spending.
C) an individual”s wealth may decrease but their willingness to spend is not affected.
D) an individual”s wealth may decrease and their willingness to spend may decrease.
3 Changes in stock prices
A) do not affect people”s wealth and their willingness to spend.
B) affect firms” decisions to sell stock to finance investment spending.
C) occur in regular patterns.
D) are unimportant to decision makers.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1 An increase in stock prices ________ the size of people”s wealth and may ________ their willingness to spend, everything else held constant.
A) increases; increase
B) increases; decrease
C) decreases; increase
D) decreases; decrease
1 Low stock market prices might ________ consumers willingness to spend and might ________ businesses willingness to undertake investment projects.
A) increase; increase
B) increase; decrease
C) decrease; decrease
D) decrease; increase
3 Fear of a major recession causes stock prices to fall, everything else held constant, which in turn causes consumer spending to
A) increase.
B) remain unchanged.
C) decrease.
D) cannot be determined.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1 Banks, savings and loan associations, mutual savings banks, and credit unions
A) are no longer important players in financial intermediation.
B) since deregulation now provide services only to small depositors.
C) have been adept at innovating in response to changes in the regulatory environment.
D) produce nothing of value and are therefore a drain on society”s resources.
2 Financial institutions search for ________ has resulted in many financial innovations.
A) higher profits
B) regulations
C) respect
D) higher risk
3 Banks and other financial institutions engage in financial intermediation, which
A) can hurt the performance of the economy.
B) can benefit economic performance.
C) has no effect on economic performance.
D) involves borrowing from investors and lending to savers.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
4) During a recession, output declines resulting in
A) lower unemployment in the economy.
B) higher unemployment in the economy.
C) no impact on the unemployment in the economy.
D) higher wages for the workers.
5) Prior to all recessions since 1900, there has been a drop in
A) inflation.
B) the money stock.
C) the growth rate of the money stock.
D) interest rates.
6) Evidence from business cycle fluctuations in the United States indicates that
A) a negative relationship between money growth and general economic activity exists.
B) recessions have been preceded by declines in share prices on the stock exchange.
C) recessions have been preceded by dollar depreciation.
D) recessions have been preceded by a decline in the growth rate of money.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1 If ten years ago the prices of the items bought last month by the average consumer would have been much higher, then one can likely conclude that
A) the aggregate price level has declined during this ten year period.
B) the average inflation rate for this ten year period has been positive.
C) the average rate of money growth for this ten year period has been positive.
D) the aggregate price level has risen during this ten year period.
2 From 1950 2008 the price level in the United States increased more than ________.
A) twofold
B) threefold
C) sixfold
D) ninefold
3 Complete Milton Friedman”s famous statement, “Inflation is always and everywhere a ________
phenomenon.”
A) recessionary
B) discretionary
C) repressionary
D) monetary
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Which of the following is most likely to result from a stronger dollar?
A) U.S. goods exported aboard will cost less in foreign countries, and so foreigners will buy more of them.
B) U.S. goods exported aboard will cost more in foreign countries and so foreigners will buy
more of them.
C) U.S. goods exported abroad will cost more in foreign countries, and so foreigners will buy fewer of them.
D) Americans will purchase fewer foreign goods.
Everything else held constant, a weaker dollar will likely hurt
A) textile exporters in South Carolina.
B) wheat farmers in Montana that sell domestically.
C) automobile manufacturers in Michigan that use domestically produced inputs.
D) furniture importers in California.
Everything else held constant, a stronger dollar benefits ________ and hurts ________.
A) American businesses; American consumers
B) American businesses; foreign businesses
C) American consumers; American businesses
D) foreign businesses; American consumers
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
When in 1985 a British pound cost approximately $1.30, a Shetland sweater that cost 100 British pounds would have cost $130. With a weaker dollar, the same Shetland sweater would have cost
A) less than $130.
B) more than $130.
C) $130, since the exchange rate does not affect the prices that American consumers pay for foreign goods.
D) $130, since the demand for Shetland sweaters will decrease to prevent an increase in price due to the stronger dollar.
Everything else held constant, a decrease in the value of the dollar relative to all foreign currencies means that the price of foreign goods purchased by Americans
A) increases
B) decreases.
C) remains unchanged.
D) either increases, decreases, or remains unchanged.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Prepare journal entries for each type of manufacturing cost.
(a) Raw material purchases of $4,200 on account.
|
Raw Materials Inventory
|
4,200
|
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
4,200
|
(b)Incurs factory labor of $18,000. Of that amount, $15,000 relates to wages payable and $3,000 relates to payroll taxes payable.
|
Factory Labor
|
18,000
|
|
|
Factory Wages Payable
|
|
15,000
|
|
Employer Payroll Taxes Payable
|
|
3,000
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Prepare journal entries for each type of manufacturing cost.
Factory utilities of $2,200 are payable, prepaid factory insurance of $1,800 has expired, and depreciation on the factory building is $3,500.
|
Manufacturing Overhead
|
7,500
|
|
|
Utilities Payable
|
|
2,200
|
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
|
1,800
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation
|
|
3,500
|
Review Question
When incurred, factory labor costs are debited to:
a.Work in Process.
b. Factory Wages Expense.
c. Factory Labor.
d. Factory Wages Payable.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The three summary entries are:
|
Work in Process Inventory
|
9,600
|
|
|
Raw Materials Inventory
|
|
9,600
|
|
Work in Process Inventory
|
6,000
|
|
|
Factory Labor
|
|
6,000
|
|
Work in Process Inventory
|
7,500
|
|
|
Manufacturing Overhead
|
|
7,500
|
Prepare the entry to record of the assignment.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Which of the following items is not a characteristic of a process cost system:
a. Once production begins, it continues until the finished product emerges.
b. The focus is on continually producing homogenous products.
c. When the finished product emerges, all units have precisely the same amount of materials, labor, and overhead.
d. The products produced are heterogeneous in nature.
Indicate which of the following statements is not correct:
a. Both a job order and a process cost system track the same three manufacturing cost elements –direct materials, direct labor, and manufacturing overhead.
b. In a job order cost system, only one work in process account is used, whereas in a process cost system, multiple work in process accounts are used.
c. Manufacturing costs are accumulated the same way in a job order and in a process cost system.
d. Manufacturing costs are assigned the same way in a job order and in a process cost system.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Journalize the transfer of units as appropriate.
To Record Transfer of Units to the Bottling Department:
|
Work in Process—Bottling
|
19,000
|
|
|
Work in Process—Blending
|
|
19,000
|
To Record Transfer of Units to Finished Goods:
|
Finished Goods Inventory
|
11,000
|
|
|
Work in Process—Bottling
|
|
11,000
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Suppose you have a work study job in the office of your college’s president, and she asks you to compute the cost of instruction per full time equivalent student at your college. The college’s vice president for finance provides the following information.
|
Costs:
|
|
|
Total cost of instruction
|
$9,000,000
|
|
Student population:
|
|
|
Full time students
|
900
|
|
Part time students
|
1,000
|
Part time students take 60% of the classes of a full time student during the year. To compute the number of full time equivalent students per year.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The fabricating department has the following production and cost data for the current month.
|
Beginning
|
Units
|
Ending
|
|
Work in Process
|
Transferred Out
|
Work in Process
|
|
–0–
|
15,000
|
10,000
|
Compute the equivalent units of production for (a) materials and (b) conversion costs.
|
Units transferred out
|
15,000
|
|
Ending work in process units
|
10,000
|
|
|
25,000
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The fabricating department has the following production and cost data for the current month.
|
Beginning
|
Units
|
Ending
|
|
Work in Process
|
Transferred Out
|
Work in Process
|
|
–0–
|
15,000
|
10,000
|
Compute the equivalent units of production for (a) materials and (b) conversion costs.
|
Units transferred out
|
15,000
|
|
Equivalent unit in ending WIP (10,000 x 30%)
|
3,000
|
|
|
18,000
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
In March, K Christel Manufacturing had the following unit production costs: materials $6 and conversion costs $9. On March 1, it had zero work in process. During March, K Christel transferred out 12,000 units. As of March 31, 800 units that were 25 percent complete as to conversion costs and 100 percent complete as to materials were in ending work in process. Assign the costs to the units transferred out and in process.
|
Costs transferred out
|
|
$180,000
|
|
Work in process, March 31
|
|
|
|
Materials (800 x $6)
|
$4,800
|
|
|
Conversion costs (200 x $9)
|
1,800
|
|
|
Total costs
|
|
$186,600
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Lift Jack Company has seven activity cost pools and two products. It expects to produce 200,000 units of its automobile scissors jack and 80,000 units of its truck hydraulic jack. Having identified its activity cost pools and the cost drivers for each cost pool, Lift Jack Company accumulated the following data relative to those activity cost pools and cost drivers.
|
Annual Overhead Data
|
|
Activity Cost Pools
|
|
Cost Drivers
|
Estimated Overhead
|
|
Ordering and receiving
Machine setup
Machining
Assembling
Inspecting and testing
Painting
Supervising
|
|
Purchase orders
Setups
Machine hours
Parts
Tests
Parts
Direct labor hours
|
|
$ 200,000
600,000
2,000,000
1,800,000
700,000
300,000
1,200,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
$6,800,000
|
|
|
Expected Use of Cost Drivers per Product
|
|
Expected Use of Cost Drivers per Activity
|
Scissors Jacks
|
Hydraulic Jacks
|
|
2,500 orders
|
1,000
|
1,500
|
|
1,200 setups
|
500
|
700
|
|
800,000 hours
|
300,000
|
500,000
|
|
3,000,000 parts
|
1,800,000
|
1,200,000
|
|
35,000 tests
|
20,000
|
15,000
|
|
3,000,000 parts
|
1,800,000
|
1,200,000
|
|
200,000 hours
|
130,000
|
70,000
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Variable costs are costs that:
a. Vary in total directly and proportionately with changes in the activity level.
b. Remain the same per unit at every activity level.
c. Neither of the above.
d. Both (a) and (b) above.
The relevant range is:
a. The range of activity in which variable costs will be curvilinear.
b. The range of activity in which fixed costs will be curvilinear.
c. The range over which the company expects to operate during a year.
d. Usually from zero to 100% of operating capacity.
Mixed costs consist of a:
a. Variable cost element and a fixed cost element.
b. Fixed cost element and a controllable cost element.
c. Relevant cost element and a controllable cost element.
d. Variable cost element and a relevant cost element.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
K Christel, LLP, accumulates the following data concerning a mixed cost, using units produced as the activity level.
|
|
Units Produced
|
Total Cost
|
|
March
|
9,800
|
$ 14,740
|
|
April
|
8,500
|
13,250
|
|
May
|
7,000
|
11,100
|
|
June
|
7,600
|
12,000
|
|
July
|
8,100
|
12,460
|
(a)Compute the variable and fixed cost elements using the high low method.
(b)Estimate the total cost if the company produces 6,000 units.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Vargo Video sells not only DVD players but TV sets as well. Vargo sells its two products in the following amounts: 1,500 DVD players and 500 TVs. The sales mix, expressed as a function of total units sold, is as follows.
Kale Garden Supply Company has two divisions—Indoor Plants and Outdoor Plants. Each division has hundreds of different types of plants and plant care products.
| |
Indoor Plant Division
|
|
Outdoor Plant Division
|
|
Total
|
|
|
Sales
|
$200,000
|
|
$800,000
|
|
$1,000,000
|
|
|
Variable costs
|
120,000
|
|
560,000
|
|
680,000
|
|
|
Contribution margin
|
$80,000
|
|
$240,000
|
|
$320,000
|
|
|
Sales mix percentage(Division sales ± Total sales)
|
$200,000/$1,000,000
|
0.20
|
$800,000/$1,000,000
|
0.80
|
|
|
|
Contribution margin ratio(Contribution margin ± Sales)
|
$80,000/$200,000
|
0.40
|
$240,000/$800,000
|
0.30
|
$320,000/$1,000,000
|
0.32
|
|
Total fixed costs = $300,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
First, determine the weighted average contribution margin.
Second, calculate break even point in dollars.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
OBGYN Consulting Inc., organized February 1, 2004, is operated by Dr. Cline. How many errors can you find in the following financial statements for OBGYN Consulting Inc., prepared after its first month of operations?
|
OBGYN Consulting Inc.
Income Statement
February 29, 2004
|
|
Fees earned
|
|
$18,500
|
|
Operating expenses:
|
|
|
|
Office salaries expense
|
$8,500
|
|
|
Rent expense
|
2,500
|
|
|
Automobile expense
|
1,750
|
|
|
Dividends
|
1,000
|
|
|
Miscellaneous expense
|
550
|
|
|
Total operating expenses
|
|
15,500
|
|
Net income
|
|
$ 3,000
|
|
OBGYN Consulting Inc.
Retained Earnings Statement
February 29, 2005
|
|
Net income for the month
|
$3,000
|
|
Retained earnings, February 29, 2004
|
$3,000
|
|
Dr. Cline
Balance Sheet Inc.
For the Month Ended February 29, 2004
|
|
Assets
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
|
$ 6,200
|
|
Notes payable
|
|
10,000
|
|
Total assets
|
|
$16,200
|
|
Liabilities
|
|
|
|
Land
|
|
$13,000
|
|
Stockholders’ Equity
|
|
|
|
Capital stock
|
$5,000
|
|
|
Retained earnings
|
3,000
|
8,000
|
|
Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity
|
|
$21,000
|
|
Statement of Cash Flows
|
|
February 29, 2004
|
|
Cash flows from operating activities:
|
|
|
Cash receipts from fees earned
|
$18,500
|
|
Net cash from operating activities
|
$18,500
|
|
Cash flows from investing activities:
|
|
|
Cash payments for land
|
13,000
|
|
Cash flows from financing activities:
|
|
|
Cash receipts from issuance of capital stock
|
5,000
|
|
Net increase in cash during February
|
$36,500
|
|
Cash as of February 1, 2004
|
0
|
|
Cash as of February 29, 2004
|
$36,500
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Condensed financial statements for Wm. J. Wrigley Jr. Company for 2001 and 2000 are shown in. Based upon these financial statements, answer the following questions:
1. Using the accounting equation, Assets = Liabilities + Stockholders’ Equity, fill in the amounts for 2000. Express the amounts in thousands.
2. If during 2001, assets increased by $190,908 and liabilities increased by $47,608, determine the increase or decrease in stockholders’ equity during 2001.
3. Based upon your answers to (1) and (2), determine the total stockholders’ equity as of December 31, 2001. Does this amount agree with Wrigley’s balance sheet shown in Exhibit 7?
4. Based upon , what percent of Wrigley’s total assets was financed by debt during 2001? Assuming you are a long term creditor of Wrigley, interpret this percent in terms of the chances that you will be repaid by Wrigley.
5. Assuming that in (4) you are a short term creditor of Wrigley, would your interpretation and analysis of your chances of being repaid change?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Megan Peroni and Shannon Haley both graduated from State University in May 2004. After graduation, Shannon took a job as a staff accountant in the Atlanta office of PricewaterhouseCoopers, an international public accounting firm. Megan began working as a manager in Arrow Electronics, a wholesale computer hardware and software company, but left after only six months to start her own consulting business. The following conversation took place between Megan and Shannon at their first annual alumni function:
Megan: Shannon, good to see you again.
Shannon: Yes. It doesn’t seem like it’s been almost a year since we graduated. Megan: That’s for sure. It seems like only yesterday we were listening to that boring commencement speaker. I don’t even remember her name . . . Monica somebody.
Are you still working for PricewaterhouseCoopers?
Shannon: Yes, it’s been a great year. I’ve worked on thirteen companies . . . it’s been a fantastic learning experience. Each client has a different culture, management team, strategy, problems, and personality. I’ve learned something new every day. How about you? Are you still working for Arrow Electronics?
Megan: No, I quit after six months. My customers really didn’t know what they needed for computer systems . . . so . . . I quit and started a consulting business. I feel like I’m helping my customers more now than I did before. Besides, I like being my own boss.
Shannon: What’s the name of your business?
Megan: I Chor Consulting. It’s been amazing. I started with my savings of $10,000 six months ago. My last bank statement showed I’ve got more than $120,000—”pure profit” of $110,000 in only six months.
Shannon: That’s unbelievable! If you ever need a CPA firm, keep us in mind.
Megan: Sure. What are friends for anyway?
1. Comment on Megan’s statement that she’s earned $110,000 “pure profit” in only six months.
2. Would the cash basis or the accrual basis of accounting be most appropriate for I Chor?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The increasing complexity of the current business and regulatory environment has created an increased demand for accountants who can analyze business transactions and interpret their effects on the financial statements. In addition, a basic ability to analyze the effects of transactions is necessary to be successful in all fields of business as well as in other disciplines, such as law. To better understand the importance of accounting in today’s environment, search the Internet or your local newspaper for job opportunities. Then do one of the following:
1. Print a listing of at least two ads for accounting jobs. Alternatively, bring to class at least two newspaper ads for accounting jobs.
2. Print a listing of at least two ads for nonaccounting jobs for which some knowledge of accounting is preferred or necessary. Alternatively, bring to class at least two newspaper ads for such jobs.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The accountant for Maxim Medical Co., a medical services consulting firm, mistakenly omitted adjustments for (a) unearned revenue ($10,390) and (b) accrued wages ($2,440). (a) Indicate the effect of each error, considered individually, on the income statement for the current year ended December 31. Also indicate the effect of each error on the December 31 balance sheet. Set up a table similar to the following, and record your answers by inserting the dollar amount in the appropriate spaces. Insert a zero if the error does not affect the item.
|
|
Error (a)
|
Error (b)
|
|
|
Over stated
|
Under stated
|
Over stated
|
Under stated
|
|
1. Revenue for the year would be
|
$
|
$
|
$
|
$
|
|
2. Expenses for the year would be
|
$
|
$
|
$
|
$
|
|
3. Net income for the year would be
|
$
|
$
|
$
|
$
|
|
4. Assets at December 31 would be
|
$
|
$
|
$
|
$
|
|
5. Liabilities at December 31 would be
|
$
|
$
|
$
|
$
|
|
6. Stockholders’ equity at December 31 would be
|
$
|
$
|
$
|
$
|
(b) If the net income for the current year had been $437,720, what would be the correct net income if the proper adjustments had been made?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Purification Company is a consulting firm specializing in pollution control. The following adjustments were made for The Purification Company:
|
|
Adjustments
|
|
Account
|
Increase (Decrease)
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
$ 5,100
|
|
Supplies
|
(1,225)
|
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
(1,000)
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment
|
1,800
|
|
Wages Payable
|
900
|
|
Unearned Rent
|
(2,500)
|
|
Fees Earned
|
5,100
|
|
Wages Expense
|
900
|
|
Supplies Expense
|
1,225
|
|
Rent Revenue
|
2,500
|
|
Insurance Expense
|
1,000
|
|
Depreciation Expense
|
1,800
|
Identify each of the six pairs of adjustments. For each adjustment, indicate the account, whether the account is increased or decreased, and the amount of the adjustment. No account is affected by more than one adjustment. Use the following format. The first adjustment is shown as an example.
|
Adjustment
|
Account
|
Increase or Decrease
|
Amount
|
|
1.
|
Accounts Receivable
|
Increase
|
$5,100
|
|
|
Fees Earned
|
Increase
|
5,100
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Shoshone Co. offers personal weight reduction consulting services to individuals. After all the accounts have been closed on June 30, 2004, the end of the current fiscal year, the balances of selected accounts from the ledger of Shoshone Co. are as follows:
|
Accounts Payable
|
$ 8,750
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
$ 3,100
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
18,725
|
Prepaid Rent
|
2,400
|
|
Accum. Depr.—Equipment
|
21,100
|
Retained Earnings
|
59,850
|
|
Capital Stock
|
25,000
|
Salaries Payable
|
1,750
|
|
Cash
|
2,150
|
Supplies
|
675
|
|
Equipment
|
90,600
|
Unearned Fees
|
1,200
|
Prepare a classified balance sheet.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
La Z Boy Inc. is one of the world’s largest manufacturers of furniture that is best known for its reclining chairs. The following data (in thousands) were adapted from the 2001 annual report of La Z Boy Inc.:
|
Accounts payable
|
$ 92,830
|
|
Accounts receivables
|
380,867
|
|
Accumulated depreciation
|
252,027
|
|
Capital stock
|
267,530
|
|
Cash
|
23,565
|
|
Income taxes payable*
|
$ 11,490
|
|
Intangible assets
|
247,422
|
|
Inventories
|
257,887
|
|
Long term debt*
|
5,304
|
|
Long term debt**
|
196,923
|
|
Other assets*
|
46,457
|
|
Other assets**
|
35,964
|
|
Other liabilities*
|
51,361
|
|
Other long term liabilities**
|
80,519
|
|
Notes payable*
|
10,380
|
|
Payroll payable*
|
78,550
|
|
Property, plant, and equipment
|
482,368
|
|
Retained earnings
|
427,616
|
For the preceding items, (*) indicates that the item is current in nature, while (**) indicates that the item is long term in nature. Prepare a classified balance sheet as of April 28, 2001.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Image Services Co. offers its services to individuals desiring to improve their personal images. After the accounts have been adjusted at January 31, the end of the fiscal year, the following balances were taken from the ledger of Image Services Co.:
|
Retained Earnings
|
$325,750
|
Rent Expense
|
$74,000
|
|
Dividends
|
45,000
|
Supplies Expense
|
15,500
|
|
Fees Earned
|
380,700
|
Miscellaneous Expense
|
4,500
|
|
Wages Expense
|
205,300
|
|
|
Perform the closing process for (a) revenues, (b) expenses, and (c) dividends. Indicate each account closed, whether the account is increased or decreased, and the amount of the increase or decrease. Close all expenses with one transfer to retained earnings.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
At the end of April, the first month of operations, the following selected data were taken from the financial statements of Phil Olson, P.C., a professional services corporation owned and operated by Phil Olson, an attorney at law:
|
Net income for April
|
$187,500
|
|
Total assets at April 30
|
498,300
|
|
Total liabilities at April 30
|
67,800
|
|
Total stockholders’ equity at April 30
|
430,500
|
In preparing the statements, adjustments for the following data were overlooked:
a. Unbilled fees earned at April 30, $21,500.
b. Depreciation of equipment for April, $6,000.
c. Accrued wages at April 30, $2,900.
d. Supplies used during April, $1,875.
Instructions
Determine the correct amount of net income for April and the total assets, liabilities, and stockholders’ equity at April 30. In addition to indicating the corrected amounts, indicate the effect of each omitted adjustment by setting up and completing a columnar table similar to the following. Adjustment (a) is presented as an example.
|
|
|
|
Total
|
|
Net
|
Total
|
Total
|
Stockholders’
|
|
Income
|
Assets
|
Liabilities
|
Equity
|
|
Reported amounts
|
$187,500
|
$498,300
|
$67,800
|
$430,500
|
|
Corrections:
|
|
|
|
|
|
Adjustment (a)
|
_21,500
|
_21,500
|
0
|
_21,500
|
|
Adjustment (b)
|
________
|
________
|
________
|
________
|
|
Adjustment (c)
|
________
|
________
|
________
|
________
|
|
Adjustment (d)
|
________
|
________
|
________
|
________
|
|
Corrected amounts
|
________
|
________
|
________
|
________
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Osmosis Health Care Inc. is owned and operated by Dr. Chris Ballard, the sole stockholder. During August, Osmosis Health Care entered into the following transactions:
|
Aug. 2
|
Received $9,000 from BFX Company as rent for the use of a vacant office in Osmosis Health Care’s building. BFX prepays the rent six months in advance.
|
|
2
|
Paid $3,600 for an insurance premium on a one year, general business policy.
|
|
3
|
Purchased supplies of $1,450 on account.
|
|
6
|
Collected $5,500 for services provided to customers on account.
|
|
9
|
Paid creditors $2,400 on account.
|
|
18
|
Invested an additional $10,000 in the business in exchange for capital stock.
|
|
23
|
Billed patients $11,500 for services provided on account.
|
|
25
|
Received $4,800 for services provided to customers who paid cash.
|
|
30
|
Paid expenses as follows: wages, $10,250; utilities, $3,800; rent on medical equipment, $2,500; interest, $125; miscellaneous, $340.
|
|
31
|
Paid dividends of $2,000 to stockholders (Dr. Ballard).
|
Instructions
Analyze and record the August transactions for Osmosis Health Care Inc. Using the following format, record each transaction by date and as a plus or minus in the appropriate accounts. The August 1, 2004 balances are shown in the form.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
At the end of March, the first month of operations, the following selected data were taken from the financial statements of Rita Abbott, P.C., a professional services corporation owned and operated by Rita Abbott, an attorney at law:
|
Net income for March
|
$372,300
|
Total liabilities at March 31
|
158,500
|
|
Total assets at March 31
|
862,000
|
Total stockholders’ equity at March 31
|
703,500
|
In preparing the statements, adjustments for the following data were overlooked:
a. Unbilled fees earned at March 31, $10,100.
b. Depreciation of equipment for March, $7,500.
c. Accrued wages at March 31, $2,100.
d. Supplies used during March, $1,375.
Instructions
Determine the correct amount of net income for March and the total assets, liabilities, and stockholders’ equity at March 31. In addition to indicating the corrected amounts, indicate the effect of each omitted adjustment by setting up and completing a columnar table similar to the following. Adjustment (a) is presented as an example.
|
|
|
|
Total
|
|
Net
|
Total
|
Total
|
Stockholders’
|
|
Income
|
Assets
|
Liabilities
|
Equity
|
|
Reported amounts
|
$372,300
|
$862,000
|
$158,500
|
$703,500
|
|
Corrections:
|
|
|
|
|
|
Adjustment (a)
|
_10,100
|
_10,100
|
0
|
_10,100
|
|
Adjustment (b)
|
________
|
________
|
________
|
________
|
|
Adjustment (c)
|
________
|
________
|
________
|
________
|
|
Adjustment (d)
|
________
|
________
|
________
|
________
|
|
Corrected amounts
|
________
|
________
|
________
|
________
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following operating data (in thousands) were adapted from the 2001 SEC 10 K filings of Walgreen and CVS:
|
|
|
CVS
|
Walgreen
|
|
2001
|
2000
|
2001
|
2000
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
|
$ 966,200
|
$ 824,500
|
$ 798,300
|
$ 614,500
|
|
Accounts payable
|
|
1,535,800
|
1,351,500
|
1,546,800
|
1,364,000
|
|
Accrued expenses payable
|
|
1,267,900
|
1,001,400
|
937,500
|
847,700
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|
|
1. Using the preceding data, adjust the operating income for CVS and Walgreen shown in Case 3–1 to an adjusted cash basis. Hint: To convert to a cash basis, you need to compute the change in each accrual accounting item shown above and then either add or subtract the change to the operating income.
2. Compute the net difference between the operating income under the accrual and cash bases.
3. Express the net difference in (2) as a percent of operating income under the accrual basis.
4. Which company’s operating income, CVS’s or Walgreen’s, is closer to the cash basis? 5. Do you think most analysts focus on operating income or net income in assessing the long term profitability of a company? Explain.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
On September 11, 2001, two United Air Lines aircraft were hijacked and destroyed in terrorist attacks on the World Trade Center in New York City and in a crash near Johnstown,Pennsylvania. In addition to the loss of all passengers and crew on board the aircraft, these attacks resulted in numerous deaths and injuries to persons on the ground and massive property damage. In the immediate ftermath of the attacks, the FAA ordered all aircraft operating in the United States grounded immediately. This grounding effectively lasted for three days, and United was able to operate only a portion of its scheduled flights for several days thereafter. Passenger traffic and yields on United’s flights declined significantly when flights were permitted to resume, and United refunded significant numbers of tickets for the period from September 11 to September 25.
The following data for United were adapted (in millions) from the Securities and Exchange Commission 10 K filing for the years ending December 31, 2000 and 1999:
|
Year Ending December 31,
|
|
|
|
|
2000
|
1999
|
|
Operating income
|
$ 673
|
$1,342
|
|
Net income
|
52
|
1,204
|
|
Net cash flows from operating activities
|
2,358
|
2,415
|
1. Based upon the preceding data, develop an expectation of what you believe the operating income, net income, and net cash flows from operating activities would be for United Air Lines for the year ending December 31, 2001. Use the following format for your answers:
|
Year Ending December 31, 2001
|
|
Operating income
|
$___________________________
|
|
Net income
|
$___________________________
|
|
Net cash flows from operating activities
|
$___________________________
|
2. Would you report the loss related to the terrorist attacks separately in the income statement? If so, how?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following data (millions) for 2001, 2000, and 1999 were taken from 10 K filings with the Securities and Exchange Commission:
|
Company A
|
|
|
|
|
Revenues
|
$20,092
|
$19,889
|
$19,284
|
|
Operating income
|
5,352
|
3,691
|
3,982
|
|
Net income
|
3,969
|
2,177
|
2,431
|
|
Net cash flows from operating activities
|
4,110
|
3,585
|
3,883
|
|
Net cash flows from investing activities
|
(1,188)
|
(1,165)
|
(3,421)
|
|
Net cash flows from financing activities
|
(2,830)
|
(2,072)
|
(471)
|
|
Total assets
|
22,417
|
20,834
|
21,623
|
|
Company B
|
|
|
|
|
Revenues
|
$13,879
|
$16,741
|
$14,883
|
|
Operating income (loss)
|
(1,602)
|
1,637
|
1,318
|
|
Net income (loss)
|
(1,216)
|
828
|
1,208
|
|
Net cash flows from operating activities
|
236
|
2,898
|
2,647
|
|
Net cash flows from investing activities
|
(2,696)
|
(3,396)
|
(3,962)
|
|
Net cash flows from financing activities
|
3,306
|
239
|
2,270
|
|
Total assets
|
23,605
|
21,931
|
19,942
|
|
Company C
|
|
|
|
|
Revenues
|
$ 3,122
|
$ 2,762
|
$ 1,640
|
|
Operating income (loss)
|
(412)
|
(864)
|
(606)
|
|
Net income (loss)
|
(567)
|
(1,411)
|
(720)
|
|
Net cash flows from operating activities
|
(120)
|
(130)
|
(91)
|
|
Net cash flows from investing activities
|
(253)
|
164
|
(952)
|
|
Net cash flows from financing activities
|
107
|
693
|
1,104
|
|
Total assets
|
1,638
|
2,135
|
2,466
|
|
Company D
|
|
|
|
|
Revenues
|
$49,000
|
$45,352
|
$43,082
|
|
Operating income (loss)
|
2,183
|
1,739
|
1,534
|
|
Net income (loss)
|
877
|
613
|
247
|
|
Net cash flows from operating activities
|
2,281
|
1,548
|
1,838
|
|
Net cash flows from investing activities
|
(1,523)
|
(1,810)
|
(1,465)
|
|
Net cash flows from financing activities
|
(878)
|
280
|
(257)
|
|
Total assets
|
18,190
|
17,932
|
16,641
|
1. Match each of the following companies with the data for Company A, B, C, or D:
Amazon.com
Coca Cola Inc.
Delta Air Lines
Kroger
2. Explain the logic underlying your matches.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Home Depot and Lowe’s operate national chains of home improvement stores that sell a wide assortment of building materials and home improvement, lawn, and garden products, such as lumber, paint, wall coverings, lawn mowers, plumbing, and electrical supplies. Home Depot operates approximately 1,300 stores, while Lowe’s operates approximately 740 stores. The following operating data (in thousands) were adapted from the 2002 SEC 10 K filings of Home Depot and Lowe’s:
|
|
Home Depot
|
Lowe’s
|
|
Net sales
|
$53,553,000
|
$22,111,108
|
|
Cost of sales
|
37,406,000
|
15,743,267
|
|
Gross profit
|
$16,147,000
|
$ 6,367,841
|
|
Operating expenses
|
11,215,000
|
4,570,053
|
|
Operating income
|
$ 4,932,000
|
$ 1,797,788
|
|
Other income and expense
|
25,000
|
(173,537) $ 1,624,251
|
|
Income before taxes
|
$ 4,957,000
|
|
Income taxes
|
1,913,000
|
600,989
|
|
Net income
|
$ 3,044,000
|
$ 1,023,262
|
1. Prepare common sized income statements for Home Depot and Lowe’s.
2. Compute the average sales per store for Home Depot and Lowe’s. Round to thousands.
3. Analyze and comment on your results in (1) and (2).
|
Strong
|
1
|
|
Buy
|
2
|
|
Hold
|
3
|
|
Sell
|
4
|
|
Strong Sell
|
5
|
Based upon your answer to (3), would you expect that the average broker recommendation for Home Depot to be higher (less favorable) or lower (more favorable) than for Lowe’s? To find the broker recommendation, enter the stock symbols for Home Depot (HD) and Lowe’s (LOW) and click on “research.” Appendix C at the end of the text provides more details about using Yahoo Finance for research.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Several years ago, your father opened Derby Television Repair Inc. He made a small initial investment and added money from his personal bank account as needed. He withdrew money for living expenses at irregular intervals. As the business grew, he hired an assistant. He is now considering adding more employees, purchasing additional service trucks, and purchasing the building he now rents. To secure funds for the expansion, your father submitted a loan application to the bank and included the most recent financial statements (as follows) prepared from accounts maintained by a part time bookkeeper.
|
Derby Television Repair Inc.
Income Statement
For the Year Ended December 31, 2004
|
|
Service revenue
|
|
$66,900
|
|
Less: Rent paid
|
$18,000
|
|
|
Wages paid
|
16,500
|
|
|
Supplies paid
|
7,000
|
|
|
Utilities paid
|
3,100
|
|
|
Insurance paid
|
3,000
|
|
|
Miscellaneous payments
|
2,150
|
49,750
|
|
Net income
|
|
$17,150
|
|
Derby Television Repair Inc.
Balance Sheet
December 31, 2004
|
|
Assets
|
|
|
Cash
|
$ 3,750
|
|
Amounts due from customers
|
2,100
|
|
Truck
|
25,000
|
|
Total assets
|
$30,850
|
|
|
|
Equities
|
|
|
Stockholders’ equity
|
$30,850
|
After reviewing the financial statements, the loan officer at the bank asked your father if he used the accrual basis of accounting for revenues and expenses. Your father responded that he did, and that is why he included an account for “Amounts Due from Customers.” The loan officer then asked whether or not the accounts were adjusted prior to the preparation of the statements. Your father answered that they had not been adjusted.
a. Why do you think the loan officer suspected that the accounts had not been adjusted prior to the preparation of the statements?
b. Indicate possible accounts that might need to be adjusted before an accurate set of financial statements could be prepared.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Compare the balance sheets of two different companies, and present to the class a summary of the similarities and differences of the two companies. You may obtain the balance sheets you need from one of the following sources:
1. Your school or local library.
2. The investor relations department of each company.
3. The company’s Web site on the Internet.
4. EDGAR (Electronic Data Gathering, Analysis, and Retrieval), the electronic archives of financial statements filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission. The EDGAR address is Type in a company name on the “EDGAR Company Search” form. EDGAR will list the reports available for the selected company. A company’s annual report (along with other information) is provided in its annual 10 K report to the SEC. Click on the 10 K (or 10 K405) report for the year you wish to download. If you wish, you can save the whole 10 K report to a file and then open it with your word processor. Appendix C at the end of the text provides more details about using EDGAR for research.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Assume that you and two friends are debating whether to open an automotive and service retail chain that will be called Auto Mart. Initially, Auto Mart will open three stores locally, but the business plan anticipates going nationwide within five years. Currently, you and your future business partners are debating whether to focus Auto Mart on a “do it yourself” or “do it for me” business strategy. A “do it yourself” business strategy emphasizes the sale of retail auto parts that customers will use themselves to repair and service their cars. A “do it for me” business strategy emphasizes the offering of maintenance and service for customers.
1. In groups of three or four, discuss whether to implement a “do it yourself” or “do it for me” business strategy. List the advantages of each strategy and arrive at a conclusion as to which strategy to implement.
2. Provide examples of real world businesses that use “do it yourself” or “do it forme” business strategies.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1 Compared to interest rates on long term U.S. government bonds, interest rates on three month Treasury bills fluctuate ________ and are ________ on average.
A) more; lower
B) less; lower
C) more; higher
D) less; higher
2 The interest rate on Baa (medium quality) corporate bonds is ________, on average, than other interest rates, and the spread between it and other rates became ________ in the 1970s.
A) lower; smaller
B) lower; larger
C) higher; smaller
D) higher; larger
3 Everything else held constant, a decline in interest rates will cause spending on housing to
A) fall.
B) remain unchanged.
C) either rise, fall, or remain the same.
D) rise.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Beth Sumner established an insurance agency on April 1, 2004, and completed the following transactions during April:
a. Opened a business bank account in the name of Sumner Insurance Inc. with a deposit of $15,000 in exchange for capital stock.
b. Borrowed $8,000 by issuing a note payable.
c. Received cash from fees earned, $11,500.
d. Paid rent on office and equipment for the month, $3,500.
e. Paid automobile expenses for month, $650, and miscellaneous expenses, $300.
f. Paid office salaries, $1,400.
g. Paid interest on the note payable, $60.
h. Purchased land as a future building site, $20,000.
i. Paid dividends, $1,000.
Instructions
1. Indicate the effect of each transaction and the balances after each transaction, using the following tabular headings:
|
Assets = Liabilities + Stockholders’ Equity
|
|
Cash + Land = Notes Payable +Capital Stock + Retained Earnings
|
Explain the nature of each increase and decrease in stockholders’ equity by an appropriate notation at the right of the amount.
2. Prepare an income statement and retained earnings statement for April.
3. Prepare a balance sheet as of April 30, 2004.
4. Prepare a statement of cash flows for April.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Assume that Blitzkrieg Realty Inc. borrowed $25,000 from First Union Bank and Trust. In recording the transaction, Blitzkrieg erroneously recorded the receipt of $25,000 as an increase in cash, $25,000, and an increase in fees earned, $25,000.
(a) How would this error affect the equality of the accounting equation?
(b) How would this error affect the income statement, retained earnings statement, balance sheet, and statement of cash flows?
2. Assume that as of January 1, 2004, Palmetto Consulting has total assets of $450,000 and total liabilities of $280,000. As of December 31, 2004, Palmetto has total liabilities of $300,000 and total stockholders’ equity of $225,000.
(a) What was Palmetto’s stockholders’ equity as of December 31, 2003?
(b) Assume that Palmetto did not pay any dividends during 2004. What was the amount of net income for 2004?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Determine the missing amount for each of the following:
|
Assets
|
=
|
Liabilities
|
+
|
Stockholders’ Equity
|
|
a.
|
X
|
=
|
$30,500
|
+
|
$ 50,000
|
|
b.
|
$360,000
|
=
|
X
|
+
|
100,000
|
|
c.
|
225,000
|
=
|
45,000
|
+
|
X
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The assets and liabilities (in millions) of Walt Disney Company as of September 30, 2000, were as follows:
|
Assets
|
$45,027
|
|
Liabilities
|
20,927
|
a. Determine the stockholders’ equity of Walt Disney as of September 30, 2000.
b. If assets decreased by $1,328 and stockholders’ equity decreased by $1,428, what was the increase or decrease in liabilities for the year ending September 30, 2001?
c. What were the total assets, liabilities, and stockholders’ equity as of September 30, 2001?
d. Based upon your answer to (c), does the accounting equation balance?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The assets and liabilities (in millions) of Campbell Soup Co. as of July 29, 2000, were as follows:
|
Assets
|
$5,196
|
|
Liabilities
|
5,059
|
a. Determine the stockholders’ equity of Campbell Soup as of July 29, 2000.
b. If assets increased by $731 and liabilities increased by $1,115, what was the increase or decrease in stockholders’ equity for the year ending July 29, 2001?
c. What were the total assets, liabilities, and stockholders’ equity as of July 29, 2001?
d. Based upon your answer to (c), does the accounting equation balance?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
One item is omitted in each of the following summaries of balance sheet and income statement data (in millions) for General Motors and Coca Cola as of December 31, 2001 and 2000.
|
General
|
Coca
|
|
Motors
|
Cola
|
|
December 31, 2000:
|
|
|
|
Assets
|
$323,969
|
(e)
|
|
Liabilities
|
(a)
|
(f)
|
|
Stockholders’ equity
|
(b)
|
$ 9,316
|
|
Increase (Decrease) in Assets, Liabilities, and Stockholders’ Equity
|
|
|
|
During 2001:
|
|
|
|
Assets
|
$ (20,869)
|
(g)
|
|
Liabilities
|
(31,437)
|
$ (467)
|
|
Stockholders’ equity
|
10,568
|
(h)
|
|
December 31, 2001:
|
|
|
|
Assets
|
(c)
|
$22,417
|
|
Liabilities
|
$272,079
|
(i)
|
|
Stockholders’ equity
|
(d)
|
11,366
|
Determine the amounts of the missing items (a) through (i).
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Jason Seagle is the sole stockholder and operator of Go For It, a motivational consulting business. At the end of its accounting period, December 31, 2004, Go For It has assets of $325,000 and liabilities of $142,000. Using the accounting equation and considering each case independently, determine the following amounts:
a. Stockholders’ equity as of December 31, 2004.
b. Stockholders’ equity as of December 31, 2005, assuming that assets increased by
$84,000 and liabilities increased by $37,000 during 2005.
c. Stockholders’ equity as of December 31, 2005, assuming that assets decreased by $8,000 and liabilities increased by $17,000 during 2005.
d. Stockholders’ equity as of December 31, 2005, assuming that assets increased by $75,000 and liabilities decreased by $17,500 during 2005.
e. Net income (or net loss) during 2005, assuming that as of December 31, 2005, assets were $425,000, liabilities were $105,000, and there were no additional investments or dividends.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following selected transactions were completed by Speedy Delivery Service during May:
1. Received cash for capital stock, $25,000.
2. Borrowed $15,000 from a local bank.
3. Paid advertising expense, $800.
4. Paid rent for May, $2,500.
5. Received cash from customers, $7,250.
6. Paid creditors, $500.
7. Paid interest on note payable, $400.
8. Purchased land for future building site by paying cash of $20,000.
9. Paid a customer a $200 refund for an overcharge of services.
10. Paid cash dividends, $1,000.
Indicate the effect of each transaction on the accounting equation by listing the numbers identifying the transactions, (1) through (10), in a vertical column, and inserting at the right of each number the appropriate letter from the following list:
a. Increase in an asset, decrease in another asset.
b. Increase in an asset, increase in a liability.
c. Increase in an asset, increase in stockholders’ equity.
d. Decrease in an asset, decrease in a liability.
e. Decrease in an asset, decrease in stockholders’ equity.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Four different corporations, A, B, C, and D, show the same balance sheet data at the beginning and end of a year. These data, exclusive of the amount of stockholders’ equity, are summarized as follows:
|
|
Total
|
Total
|
|
|
Assets
|
Liabilities
|
|
Beginning of the year
|
$525,000
|
$220,000
|
|
End of the year
|
970,000
|
425,000
|
On the basis of the above data and the following additional information for the year, determine the net income (or loss) of each company for the year. (Suggestion: First determine the amount of increase or decrease in stockholders’ equity during the year.)
Company A: No additional capital stock was issued, and no dividends were paid.
Company B: No additional capital stock was issued, but dividends of $50,000 were paid.
Company C: Capital stock of $75,000 was issued, but no dividends were paid.
Company D: Capital stock of $75,000 was issued, and dividends of $50,000 were paid.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
One item is omitted in each of the following summaries of balance sheet and income statement data for four different corporations, I, II, III, and IV.
|
|
I
|
II
|
III
|
IV
|
|
Beginning of the year:
|
|
|
|
|
|
Assets
|
$400,000
|
$ 95,000
|
$100,000
|
(d)
|
|
Liabilities
|
260,000
|
45,000
|
80,000
|
$150,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
End of the year:
|
|
|
|
|
|
Assets
|
900,000
|
125,000
|
120,000
|
310,000
|
|
Liabilities
|
500,000
|
35,000
|
105,000
|
170,000
|
|
During the year:
|
|
|
|
|
|
Additional issue of
|
|
|
|
|
|
capital stock
|
(a)
|
22,000
|
10,000
|
50,000
|
|
Dividends
|
40,000
|
8,000
|
(c)
|
75,000
|
|
Revenue
|
250,000
|
(b)
|
175,000
|
140,000
|
|
Expenses
|
180,000
|
52,000
|
177,000
|
160,000
|
Determine the amounts of the missing items, identifying them by letter. (Suggestion: First determine the amount of increase or decrease in stockholders’ equity during the year.)
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Woods Interiors uses the cash basis of accounting. Financial information related to Woods Interiors for September and October of 2004 is as follows:
|
|
September 30, 2004
|
October 31, 2004
|
|
Notes payable
|
$10,000
|
$15,000
|
|
Land
|
17,000
|
25,000
|
|
Capital stock
|
6,000
|
9,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
?
|
?
|
|
Cash
|
18,000
|
27,000
|
a. Prepare balance sheets for Woods Interiors as of September 30 and as of October 31, 2004.
b. Determine the amount of net income for October, assuming that dividends of $2,000 were paid.
c. Determine the net cash flows from operating activities.
d. Determine the net cash flows from investing activities.
e. Determine the net cash flows for financing activities.
f. Determine the net increase or decrease in cash.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
After its first month of operations, the following amounts were taken from the accounting records of Mata Hari Realty Inc. as of April 30, 2004. Mata Hari Realty uses the cash basis of accounting.
|
Capital stock
|
$ 5,000
|
Notes payable
|
$15,000
|
|
Cash
|
10,750
|
Rent expense
|
3,000
|
|
Dividends
|
2,000
|
Retained earnings
|
0
|
|
Interest expense
|
1,000
|
Salaries expense
|
4,500
|
|
Land
|
18,500
|
Sales commissions
|
24,750
|
|
Miscellaneous expense
|
1,250
|
Utilities expense
|
3,750
|
Prepare an income statement for the month ending April 30, 2004.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Jay Marsh established an insurance agency on May 1, 2004, and completed the following transactions during May:
a. Opened a business bank account in the name of Frontier Insurance Inc. with a deposit of $30,000 in exchange for capital stock.
b. Borrowed $10,000 by issuing a note payable.
c. Received cash from fees earned, $8,100.
d. Paid rent on office and equipment for the month, $1,000.
e. Paid automobile expenses for month, $800, and miscellaneous expenses, $250.
f. Paid office salaries, $1,500.
g. Paid interest on the note payable, $75.
h. Purchased land as a future building site, $15,000.
i. Paid dividends, $2,000.
Instructions
1. Indicate the effect of each transaction and the balances after each transaction, using the following tabular headings:
|
Assets = Liabilities + Stockholders’ Equity
|
|
Cash + Land = Notes Payable + Capital Stock + Retained Earnings
|
Explain the nature of each increase and decrease in stockholders’ equity by an appropriate notation at the right of the amount.
2. Briefly explain why the stockholders’ investments and revenues increased stockholders’ equity, while dividends and expenses decreased stockholders’ equity.
3. Prepare an income statement and retained earnings statement for May.
4. Prepare a balance sheet as of May 31, 2004.
5. Prepare a statement of cash flows for May.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Scott Douma established Top Notch Computer Services on July 1, 2004. The effect of each transaction and the balances after each transaction for July are shown in the table at the top of the following page.
Instructions
1. Prepare an income statement for the month ended July 31, 2004.
2. Prepare a retained earnings statement for the month ended July 31, 2004.
3. Prepare a balance sheet as of July 31, 2004.
4. Prepare a statement of cash flows for the month ended July 31, 2004.
|
Assets
|
=
|
Liabilities
|
+
|
Stockholders’ Equity
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Notes
|
|
Capital
|
|
Retained
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
+
|
Land
|
=
|
Payable
|
+
|
Stock
|
+
|
Earnings
|
|
|
a.
|
+18,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
+18,000
|
|
|
Investment
|
|
b.
|
+12,250
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
12,250
|
Fees earned
|
|
Bal.
|
30,250
|
|
|
|
|
|
18,000
|
12,250
|
|
|
|
c.
|
2,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2,000
|
|
Rent expense
|
|
Bal.
|
28,250
|
|
|
|
|
|
18,000
|
|
10,250
|
|
|
d.
|
+10,000
|
|
|
|
+10,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Bal.
|
38,250
|
|
|
|
10,000
|
|
18,000
|
|
10,250
|
|
|
e.
|
25,000
|
|
+25,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Bal.
|
13,250
|
|
25,000
|
|
10,000
|
|
18,000
|
|
10,250
|
|
|
f.
|
1,150
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
800
|
Auto expense
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
350
|
Misc. expense
|
|
Bal.
|
12,100
|
|
25,000
|
|
10,000
|
|
18,000
|
|
9,100
|
|
|
g.
|
2,500
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2,500
|
Salaries expense
|
|
Bal.
|
9,600
|
|
25,000
|
|
10,000
|
|
18,000
|
|
6,600
|
|
|
h.
|
1,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
1,000
|
Dividends
|
|
Bal.
|
8,600
|
|
25,000
|
|
10,000
|
|
18,000
|
|
|
5,600
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following amounts were taken from the accounting records of Nutrition Services Inc. as of December 31, 2004. Nutrition Services began its operations on January 1, 2004, and uses the cash basis of accounting.
|
Capital stock
|
$ 10,000
|
|
Cash
|
27,500
|
|
Dividends
|
5,000
|
|
Fees earned
|
229,500
|
|
Interest expense
|
1,200
|
|
Land
|
75,000
|
|
Miscellaneous expense
|
6,800
|
|
Notes payable
|
15,000
|
|
Rent expense
|
24,000
|
|
Salaries expense
|
65,000
|
|
Taxes expense
|
18,000
|
|
Utilities expense
|
32,000
|
Instructions
1. Prepare an income statement for the year ending December 31, 2004.
2. Prepare a retained earnings statement for the year ending December 31, 2004.
3. Prepare a balance sheet as of December 31, 2004.
4. Prepare a statement of cash flows for the year ending December 31, 2004.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
After its second year of operations, the following amounts were taken from the accounting records of Nutrition Services Inc. as of December 31, 2005. Nutrition Services began its operations on January 1, 2004 (see Problem 2–3A) and uses the cash basis of accounting.
|
Capital stock
|
$ 25,000
|
|
Cash
|
?
|
|
Dividends
|
15,000
|
|
Fees earned
|
254,100
|
|
Interest expense
|
1,600
|
|
Land
|
140,000
|
|
Miscellaneous expense
|
7,000
|
|
Notes payable
|
20,000
|
|
Rent expense
|
28,000
|
|
Salaries expense
|
70,000
|
|
Taxes expense
|
20,000
|
|
Utilities expense
|
36,000
|
Instructions
1. Prepare an income statement for the year ending December 31, 2005.
2. Prepare a retained earnings statement for the year ending December 31, 2005. Note: The Retained Earnings at January 1, 2005, was $77,500.
3. Prepare a balance sheet as of December 31, 2005.
4. Prepare a statement of cash flows for the year ending December 31, 2005.
Hint: You should compare the asset and liability amounts of December 31, 2005 with those of December 31, 2004, to determine cash used in investing and financing activities. for the December 31, 2004 balance sheet amounts.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The financial statements at the end of Harvest Realty Inc.’s first month of operations are shown below. By analyzing the interrelationships between the financial statements, fill in the proper amounts for (a) through (s).
|
Harvest Realty Inc.
Income Statement
For the Month Ended March 31, 2004
|
|
Fees earned
|
|
$ (a)
|
|
Operating expenses:
|
|
|
|
Wages expense
|
$3,680
|
|
|
Rent expense
|
2,000
|
|
|
Utilities expense
|
(b)
|
|
|
Interest expense
|
200
|
|
|
Miscellaneous expenses
|
440
|
|
|
Total operating expenses
|
|
7,500
|
|
Net income
|
|
$ (c)
|
|
Harvest Realty Inc.
Retained Earnings Statement
For the Month Ended March 31, 2004
|
|
Retained earnings, March 1, 2004
|
|
$
|
(d)
|
|
Net income for March
|
$5,500
|
|
|
|
Less dividends
|
(e)
|
|
(f)
|
|
Retained earnings, March 31, 2004
|
|
$
|
(g)
|
|
Harvest Realty Inc.
Balance Sheet
March 31, 2004
|
|
Assets
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
|
$ (h)
|
|
Land
|
|
20,000
|
|
Total assets
|
|
$26,500
|
|
Liabilities
|
|
|
|
Notes payable
|
|
$12,000
|
|
Stockholders’ Equity
|
|
|
|
Capital stock
|
$ (i)
|
|
|
Retained earnings
|
(j)
|
(k)
|
|
Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity
|
|
$ (l)
|
|
Harvest Realty Inc.
Statement of Cash Flows
For the Month Ended March 31, 2004
|
|
Cash flows from operating activities:
|
|
|
|
Cash received from customers
|
|
$ 13,000
|
|
Deduct cash payments for expenses
|
|
7,500
|
|
Net cash flows from operating activities
|
|
$ (m)
|
|
Cash flows from investing activities:
|
|
|
|
Cash payment for purchase of land
|
|
$(20,000)
|
|
Cash flows from financing activities:
|
|
|
|
Cash received from sale of capital stock
|
$10,000
|
|
|
Cash received from notes payable
|
(n)
|
$ (o)
|
|
Deduct cash dividends
|
|
1,000
|
|
Net cash flows from financing activities
|
|
(p)
|
|
Net increase in cash
|
|
$ (q)
|
|
March 1, 2004 cash balance
|
|
(r)
|
|
March 31, 2004 cash balance .
|
|
$ (s)
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Spring Creek Realty Inc., organized July 1, 2004, is operated by Bob Gibbs. How many errors can you find in the following financial statements for Spring Creek Realty Inc., prepared after its first month of operations?
|
Spring Creek Realty Inc.
Income Statement
July 31, 2004
|
|
Sales commissions
|
|
$46,100
|
|
Operating expenses
|
|
|
|
Office salaries expense
|
$8,150
|
|
|
Rent expense
|
3,800
|
|
|
Automobile expense
|
1,750
|
|
|
Dividends
|
1,000
|
|
|
Miscellaneous expense
|
775
|
|
|
Total operating expenses
|
|
15,475
|
|
Net income
|
|
$20,625
|
|
Bob Gibbs
|
|
Retained Earnings Statement
|
|
July 31, 2003
|
|
Net income for the month
|
$20,625
|
|
Retained earnings, July 31, 2004
|
$20,625
|
|
Balance Sheet Inc.
For the Month Ended July 31, 2004
|
|
Assets
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
|
$30,425
|
|
Notes payable
|
|
10,000
|
|
Total assets
|
|
$40,425
|
|
Liabilities
|
|
|
|
Land
|
|
$20,200
|
|
Stockholders’ Equity
|
|
|
|
Capital stock
|
$10,000
|
|
|
Retained earnings
|
20,625
|
30,625
|
|
Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity
|
|
$50,825
|
|
Spring Creek Realty Inc.
Statement of Cash Flows
July 31, 2004
|
|
Cash flows from operating activities:
|
|
|
Cash receipts from sales commissions
|
$ 46,100
|
|
Cash flows from investing activities:
|
|
|
Cash payments for land
|
(20,200)
|
|
Cash flows from financing activities:
|
|
|
Cash receipts from retained earnings
|
40,625
|
|
Net increase in cash during July
|
$ 66,525
|
|
Cash as of July 1, 2004
|
0
|
|
Cash as of July 31, 2004
|
$ 66,525
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following amounts were taken from the accounting records of Mallard Consulting Services Inc. as of December 31, 2004. Mallard Consulting Services began its operations on January 1, 2004, and uses the cash basis of accounting.
|
Capital stock
|
$ 10,000
|
|
Cash
|
39,500
|
|
Dividends
|
25,000
|
|
Fees earned
|
338,300
|
|
Interest expense
|
4,800
|
|
Land
|
125,500
|
|
Miscellaneous expense
|
7,500
|
|
Notes payable
|
40,000
|
|
Rent expense
|
36,000
|
|
Salaries expense
|
80,000
|
|
Taxes expense
|
30,000
|
|
Utilities expense
|
40,000
|
Instructions
1. Prepare an income statement for the year ending December 31, 2004.
2. Prepare a retained earnings statement for the year ending December 31, 2004.
3. Prepare a balance sheet as of December 31, 2004.
4. Prepare a statement of cash flows for the year ending December 31, 2004.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
After its second year of operations, the following amounts were taken from the accounting records of Mallard Consulting Services Inc. as of December 31, 2005. Mallard Consulting Services began its operations on January 1, 2004, and uses the cash basis of accounting.
|
Capital stock
|
$ 20,000
|
|
Cash
|
?
|
|
Dividends
|
20,000
|
|
Fees earned
|
289,000
|
|
Interest expense
|
6,000
|
|
Land
|
171,000
|
|
Miscellaneous expense
|
8,000
|
|
Notes payable
|
50,000
|
|
Rent expense
|
40,000
|
|
Salaries expense
|
90,000
|
|
Taxes expense
|
20,000
|
|
Utilities expense
|
45,000
|
Instructions
1. Prepare an income statement for the year ending December 31, 2005.
2. Prepare a retained earnings statement for the year ending December 31, 2005.
Note: The Retained Earnings at January 1, 2005, was $115,000.
3. Prepare a balance sheet as of December 31, 2005.
4. Prepare a statement of cash flows for the year ending December 31, 2005.
Hint: You should compare the asset and liability amounts of December 31, 2005, with those of December 31, 2004, to determine cash used in investing and financing activities. for the December 31, 2004 balance sheet amounts.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cremation Services was organized on January 1, 2004. A summary of cash flows for January is shown below.
|
Cash receipts:
|
|
|
Cash received from customers
|
$23,500
|
|
Cash received for capital stock
|
90,000
|
|
Cash received from note payable
|
10,000
|
|
Cash payments:
|
|
Cash paid out for expenses
|
$ 8,350
|
|
Cash paid out for purchase of furnace
|
75,000
|
|
Cash paid as dividends
|
5,000
|
Prepare a statement of cash flows for the month ended January 31, 2004.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
company’s stakeholders often differ in their financial statement focus. For example, some stakeholders focus primarily on the income statement, while others may focus primarily on the statement of cash flows or the balance sheet. For each of the following situations, indicate which financial statement would be the likely focus for the stakeholder. Choose either the income statement, balance sheet, or the statement of cash flows and justify your choice.
Situation One: Assume that you are a banker for Citigroup (capital market stakeholder), considering whether to grant a major credit line (loan) to Wal Mart. The credit line will allow Wal Mart to borrow up to $400 million for a five year period at the market rate of interest.
Situation Two: Assume that you are employed by Sara Lee Corporation (product market stakeholder) and are considering whether to extend credit for a 60 day period to a new grocery store chain that has recently opened throughout the Midwest. Situation Three: Assume that you are considering investing in Amazon.com (capital market stakeholder). Situation Four: Assume that you are considering taking a job (internal stakeholder) with either Sears or JC Penney.
Situation Five: Assume that you are considering purchasing a personal computer from Gateway.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Starbucks Corporation purchases and roasts high quality whole bean coffees and sells them, along with fresh, rich brewed coffees and a variety of other complementary items, primarily through company operated retail stores. The following items were adapted from the annual report of Starbucks Corporation for the period ending September 30, 2001:
| |
In thousands
|
|
1. Accounts payable
|
$ 127,905
|
|
2. Accounts receivable
|
90,455
|
|
3. Accrued expenses payable
|
244,724
|
|
4. Additions to property, plant, and equipment
|
384,215
|
|
5. Checks drawn in excess of bank balance
|
61,987
|
|
6. Cost of sales
|
1,112,785
|
|
7. General and administrative expenses
|
151,416
|
|
8. Income tax expense
|
107,712
|
|
9. Net cash provided by operating activities
|
460,826
|
|
10. Net sales
|
2,648,980
|
|
11. Other income (loss)
|
36,443
|
|
12. Other operating expenses
|
256,827
|
|
13. Property, plant, and equipment
|
1,135,784
|
|
14. Retained earnings (September 30, 2001)
|
589,713
|
|
15. Store operating expenses
|
875,473
|
Using the following notations, indicate on which financial statement you would find each of the above items. (Note: An item may appear on more than one statement.)
|
IS
|
Income statement
|
BS
|
Balance sheet
|
|
RE
|
Retained earnings statement
|
SCF
|
Statement of cash flows
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Though the McDonald’s menu of hamburgers, cheeseburgers, the Big Mac®, Quarter Pounder®, the Filet O Fish®, and Chicken McNuggets® is easily recognized, McDonald’s financial statements may not be as familiar. The following items were adapted from a recent annual report of McDonald’s Corporation:
1. Accounts payable
2. Accrued interest payable
3. Capital stock outstanding
4. Cash
5. Cash provided by operations
6. Food and packaging costs used in operations
7. Income tax expense
8. Interest expense
9. Inventories
10. Long term debt payable
11. Net income
12. Net increase in cash
13. Notes payable
14. Notes receivable
15. Occupancy and rent expense
16. Payroll expense
17. Prepaid expenses not yet used in operations
18. Property and equipment
19. Retained earnings
20. Sales
Identify the financial statement on which each of the preceding items would appear. An item may appear on more than one statement. Use the following notations:
|
IS
|
Income statement
|
|
RE
|
Retained earnings statement
|
|
BS
|
Balance sheet
|
|
SCF
|
Statement of cash flows
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Match each of the following statements with the appropriate accounting concept. Some concepts may be used more than once, while others may not be used at all. Use the notations below to indicate the appropriate accounting concept.
|
Accounting Concept
|
Notation
|
|
Accounting period concept
|
P
|
|
Adequate disclosure concept
|
D
|
|
Business entity concept
|
B
|
|
Cost concept
|
C
|
|
Going concern concept
|
G
|
|
Matching concept
|
M
|
|
Objectivity concept
|
O
|
|
Unit of measure concept
|
U
|
Statements
1. The changes in financial condition are reported for November.
2. Personal transactions of owners are kept separate from the business.
3. Land worth $500,000 is reported at its original purchase price of $120,000.
4. Assume that a business will continue forever.
5. This concept supports relying on an independent actuary (statistician), rather than the chief operating officer of the corporation, to estimate a pension liability.
6. This concept justifies recording only transactions that are expressed in dollars.
7. Material litigation involving the corporation is described in a footnote.
8. December utilities costs are reported as expenses along with the December revenues.
9. If this concept was ignored, the confidence of users in the financial statements could not be maintained.
10. Changes in the use of accounting methods from one period to the next are described in the notes to the financial statements.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Bag One Sports Inc. sells hunting and fishing equipment and provides guided hunting and fishing trips. Bag One Sports Inc. is owned and operated by Marc Trailer, a well known sports enthusiast and hunter. Marc’s wife, Robin, owns and operates Red Bird Boutique Inc., a women’s clothing store. Marc and Robin have established a trust fund to finance their children’s college education. The trust fund is maintained by First Wyoming Bank in the name of the children, Sparrow and Trout. For each of the following transactions, identify which of the entities listed should record the transaction in its records.
|
Entities
|
|
B
|
Bag One Sports Inc.
|
|
F
|
First Wyoming Bank
|
|
R
|
Red Bird Boutique Inc.
|
|
X
|
None of the above
|
1. Marc received a cash advance from customers for a guided hunting trip.
2. Robin deposited a $5,000 personal check in the trust fund at First Wyoming Bank.
3. Robin purchased three dozen spring dresses from a Denver designer for a special spring sale.
4. Marc paid a local doctor for his annual physical, which was required by the workmen’s compensation insurance policy carried by Bag One Sports Inc.
5. Marc paid for an advertisement in a hunters’ magazine.
6. Robin purchased mutual fund shares as an investment for the children’s trust.
7. Marc paid for dinner and a movie to celebrate their tenth wedding anniversary.
8. Robin donated several dresses from inventory for a local charity auction for the benefit of a women’s abuse shelter.
9. Marc paid a breeder’s fee for an English springer spaniel to be used as a hunting guide dog.
10. Robin paid her dues to the Cheyenne Garden Club.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Following are the amounts of the assets and liabilities of Fly Away Travel Agency at December 31, 2004, the end of the current year, and its revenue and expenses for the year.
The retained earnings were $4,500 and the capital stock was $10,000 on January 1, 2004, the beginning of the current year. During the current year, dividends of $30,000 were paid.
|
Accounts payable
|
$ 3,200
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
19,500
|
|
Cash
|
7,200
|
|
Fees earned
|
117,480
|
|
Miscellaneous expense
|
1,750
|
|
Rent expense
|
27,000
|
|
Prepaid expenses
|
1,865
|
|
Utilities expense
|
12,365
|
|
Wages expense
|
35,500
|
Instructions
1. Prepare an income statement for the current year ended December 31, 2004.
2. Prepare a retained earnings statement for the current year ended December 31, 2004.
3. Prepare a balance sheet as of December 31, 2004.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following financial data were adapted from the annual report of Best Buy Inc. for the period ending March 31, 2001:
|
In thousands
|
|
Accounts payable
|
$ 1,772,722
|
|
Accrued liabilities
|
827,036
|
|
Capital stock
|
493,786
|
|
Cash
|
746,879
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
12,267,459
|
|
Income taxes
|
245,640
|
|
Interest income
|
37,171
|
|
Inventories
|
1,766,934
|
|
Goodwill
|
385,355
|
|
Other assets
|
183,370
|
|
Other liabilities
|
417,901
|
|
Property, plant, and equipment
|
1,444,172
|
|
Receivables
|
209,031
|
|
Sales
|
15,326,552
|
|
Selling, general, and administrative expenses
|
2,454,785
|
Instructions
1. Prepare Best Buy’s income statement for the year ending March 31, 2001.
2. Prepare Best Buy’s retained earnings statement for the year ending March 31,2001.
Note: The Retained Earnings at February 26, 2000, was $828,457. During the year, Best Buy did not pay any dividends.
3. Prepare a balance sheet as of March 31, 2001, for Best Buy.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following cash data were adapted from the annual report of Best Buy Inc. for the period ending March 31, 2001. The cash balance as of April 1, 2000, was $750,723 (in thousands).
|
In thousands
|
|
Receipts from issuing capital stock
|
$235,379
|
|
Payments for property, plant, and equipment
|
657,706
|
|
Payments for purchase of other long term assets
|
372,096
|
|
Payments for long term debt
|
17,625
|
|
Net cash flows from operating activities
|
808,204
|
Instructions
Prepare Best Buy’s statement of cash flows for the year ending March 31, 2001.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Lamar Corporation began operations on January 1, 2004, as an online retailer of computer software and hardware. The following financial statement data were taken from Lamar’s records at the end of its first year of operations, December 31, 2004.
|
Accounts payable
|
$ 30,000
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
48,000
|
|
Capital stock
|
250,000
|
|
Cash
|
?
|
|
Cash payments for operating activities
|
700,000
|
|
Cash receipts from operating activities
|
837,000
|
|
Cost of sales
|
400,000
|
|
Dividends
|
25,000
|
|
Income tax expense
|
140,000
|
|
Income taxes payable
|
20,000
|
|
Interest expense
|
15,000
|
|
Inventories
|
90,000
|
|
Note payable due in 2010
|
100,000
|
|
Property, plant, and equipment
|
378,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
?
|
|
Sales
|
885,000
|
|
Selling and administrative expense
|
105,000
|
Instructions
1. Prepare an income statement for the year ending December 31, 2004.
2. Prepare a retained earnings statement for the year ending December 31, 2004.
3. Prepare a balance sheet as of December 31, 2004.
4. Prepare a statement of cash flows for the year ending December 31, 2004.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Below are the amounts of the assets and liabilities of Hiawatha Travel Service at April 30, 2004, the end of the current year, and its revenue and expenses for the year. The retained earnings were $13,000 and the capital stock was $12,000 at May 1, 2003, the beginning of the current year. During the current year, dividends of $15,000 were paid.
|
Accounts payable
|
$ 6,100
|
Rent expense
|
$ 18,900
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
15,675
|
Prepaid expenses
|
1,675
|
|
Cash
|
26,525
|
Taxes expense
|
2,800
|
|
Fees earned
|
131,600
|
Utilities expense
|
14,800
|
|
Miscellaneous expense
|
1,475
|
Wages expense
|
65,850
|
Instructions
1. Prepare an income statement for the current year ended April 30, 2004.
2. Prepare a retained earnings statement for the current year ended April 30, 2004.
3. Prepare a balance sheet as of April 30, 2004.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The financial statements at the end of Ruby River Realty’s first month of operations are shown below.
|
Ruby River Realty
|
|
Income Statement
|
|
For the Month Ended June 30, 2004
|
|
|
|
|
|
Fees earned . .
|
|
$23,500
|
|
Operating expenses:
|
|
|
|
Wages expense .
|
$ (a)
|
|
|
Rent expense . .
|
4,400
|
|
|
Utilities expense
|
1,350
|
|
|
Miscellaneous expense .
|
825
|
|
|
Total operating expenses .
|
|
11,950
|
|
Net income . .
|
|
$ (b)
|
|
Ruby River Realty
|
|
Retained Earnings Statement
|
|
For the Month Ended June 30, 2004
|
|
Net income for June . .
|
$ (c)
|
|
|
Less dividends
|
(d)
|
|
|
Retained earnings, June 30, 2004 .
|
|
$ (e)
|
|
|
|
Ruby River Realty
|
|
Balance Sheet
|
|
June 30, 2004
|
|
Assets
|
|
|
|
Cash .
|
|
$14,750
|
|
Prepaid expenses .
|
|
1,000
|
|
Land .
|
|
(f )
|
|
Total assets . .
|
|
$ (g)
|
|
Liabilities
|
|
|
|
Accounts payable .
|
|
$ 1,200
|
|
Stockholders’ Equity
|
|
|
|
Capital stock .
|
$ (h)
|
|
|
Retained earnings .
|
(i)
|
(j)
|
|
Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity . .
|
|
$ (k)
|
|
Ruby River Realty Statement of Cash Flows
|
|
For the Month Ended June 30, 2004
|
|
Cash flows from operating activities:
|
|
|
|
Cash received from customers
|
$ (l)
|
|
|
Deduct cash payments for expenses and payments to creditors
|
11,750
|
|
|
Net cash flow from operating activities
|
|
$ (m)
|
|
Cash flows from investing activities:
|
|
|
|
Cash payments for acquisition of land
|
|
$ 36,000)
|
|
Cash flows from financing activities:
|
|
|
|
Cash received from issuing capital stock
|
$45,000
|
|
|
Deduct dividends
|
6000
|
|
|
Net cash flow from financing activities
|
|
(n)
|
|
Net cash flow and June 30, 2004 cash balance
|
|
$(0)
|
Instructions
1. Would you classify a realty business like Ruby River as a manufacturing, merchandising, or service business?
2. By analyzing the interrelationships among the four financial statements, determine the proper amounts for (a) through (o).
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following financial data were adapted from the annual report of Circuit City Stores Inc. for the period ending May 30, 2001.
|
In thousands
|
|
Accounts payable
|
$ 821,591
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
594,228
|
|
Accrued liabilities
|
154,795
|
|
Capital stock
|
768,662
|
|
Cash
|
404,501
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
2,112,121
|
|
Dividends
|
3,621
|
|
Income taxes
|
10,400
|
|
Interest expense
|
2,992
|
|
Inventories
|
1,731,833
|
|
Other assets
|
103,154
|
|
Other liabilities
|
459,038
|
|
Property, plant, and equipment
|
981,031
|
|
Sales
|
2,678,474
|
|
Selling, general, and administrative expenses
|
535,994
|
Instructions
1. Prepare Circuit City’s income statement for the year ending May 30, 2001.
2. Prepare Circuit City’s retained earnings statement for the year ending May 30, 2001.
Note: The Retained Earnings at May 31, 2000, was $1,597,315.
3. Prepare a balance sheet as of May 30, 2001 for Circuit City.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following cash data were adapted from the annual report of Circuit City Stores Inc. for the period ending May 30, 2001. The cash balance as of May 31, 2000, was $446,131 (in thousands).
|
In thousands
|
|
Cash receipts from issuing capital stock
|
$ 7,102
|
|
Cash receipts from issuing debt
|
1,640
|
|
Cash receipts from selling property, plant, and equipment
|
3,248
|
|
Cash payments for capital stock repurchases
|
187
|
|
Cash payments for debt
|
275
|
|
Cash payments for dividends
|
3,621
|
|
Cash payments for other investing activities
|
5,460
|
|
Cash payments for property, plant, and equipment
|
32,852
|
|
Net cash flows used in operating activities
|
(11,225)
|
Instructions
Prepare Circuit City’s statement of cash flows for the year ending May 30, 2001.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Rigby Corporation began operations on June 1, 2004, as an online retailer of camping and outdoor recreational equipment. The following financial statement data were taken from Rigby’s records at the end of its first year of operations, May 31, 2005:
|
Accounts payable
|
$ 54,000
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
86,400
|
|
Cash
|
?
|
|
Cash receipts from operating activities
|
1,506,600
|
|
Cash payments for operating activities
|
1,260,000
|
|
Capital stock
|
450,000
|
|
Cost of sales
|
720,000
|
|
Dividends
|
45,000
|
|
Income tax expense
|
252,000
|
|
Income taxes payable
|
36,000
|
|
Interest expense
|
27,000
|
|
Inventories
|
162,000
|
|
Note payable due in 2010
|
180,000
|
|
Property, plant, and equipment
|
680,400
|
|
Retained earnings
|
?
|
|
Sales
|
1,593,000
|
|
Selling and administrative expense
|
189,000
|
Instructions
1. Prepare an income statement for the year ending May 31, 2005.
2. Prepare a retained earnings statement for the year ending May 31, 2005.
3. Prepare a balance sheet as of May 31, 2005.
4. Prepare a statement of cash flows for the year ending May 31, 2005.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following data (in thousands of dollars) were adapted from the December 31, 2001 financial statements of Tootsie Roll Industries Inc.:
|
Sales
|
$423,496
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
216,657
|
|
Net income
|
65,687
|
1. What is Tootsie Roll’s percent of the cost of sales to sales? Round to one decimal point.
2. The percent a company adds to its cost of sales to determine selling price is called a markup. What is Tootsie Roll’s markup percent? Round to one decimal point.
3. What is the percentage of net income to sales for Tootsie Roll? Round to one decimal point.
4. Compare your answers to (2) and (3) with those of Hershey Foods Corporation in. What are your conclusions?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following data (in millions of dollars) were adapted from the January 31, 2001 and 2000 financial statements of Kmart Corporation:
|
For year ending
|
2001
|
2000
|
|
Sales
|
$37,028
|
$35,925
|
|
Cost of sales
|
29,658
|
28,111
|
|
Selling, general, and administrative expenses
|
7,415
|
6,514
|
1. Prepare a horizontal analysis income statement for Kmart Corporation that includes gross profit and operating income before taxes. Round to one decimal place.
2. Comment on the results of your horizontal analysis of Kmart.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The telecommunications industry suffered a severe business downturn during the early part of this decade. Lucent Technologies is one of the major equipment providers to this industry. At the top of the next page are the comparative income statements for Lucent Technologies for the fiscal years ended September 30, 2001 and 2000.
1. Prepare a horizontal analysis income statement for Lucent Technologies.
2. Interpret your analysis.
|
Lucent Technologies Inc.
Consolidated Statements of Income
For the Years Ended September 30, 2000 and 2001
|
|
|
In millions
|
|
|
9/30/01
|
9/30/00
|
|
Revenues
|
$ 21,294
|
$28,904
|
|
Costs
|
19,236
|
17,190
|
|
Gross profit
|
$ 2,058
|
$11,714
|
|
Operating expenses:
|
|
|
|
Selling, general and administrative
|
$ 7,410
|
$ 5,610
|
|
Research and development
|
3,520
|
3,179
|
|
Other operating and restructuring expenses
|
10,157
|
559
|
|
Total operating expenses
|
$ 21,087
|
$ 9,348
|
|
Operating income (loss)
|
$(19,029)
|
$ 2,366
|
|
Other income (expense)—net
|
(357)
|
333
|
|
Interest expense
|
518
|
342
|
|
Income (loss) from continuing operations before
|
|
|
|
income tax expense (benefit)
|
$(19,904)
|
$ 2,357
|
|
Income tax expense (benefit)
|
(5,734)
|
924
|
|
Income (loss) from continuing operations
|
$(14,170)
|
$ 1,433
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Enron Corporation, headquartered in Houston, Texas, provides products and services for natural gas, electricity, and communications to wholesale and retail customers. Enron’s operations are conducted through a variety of subsidiaries and affiliates that involve transporting gas through pipelines, transmitting electricity, and managing energy commodities. The following data were taken from Enron’s December 31, 2000, financial statements.
|
In millions
|
|
Total revenues
|
$100,789
|
|
Total costs and expenses
|
98,836
|
|
Operating income
|
1,953
|
|
Net income
|
979
|
|
Total assets
|
65,503
|
|
Total liabilities
|
54,033
|
|
Total stockholders’ equity
|
11,470
|
|
Net cash flows from operating activities
|
4,779
|
|
Net cash flows from investing activities
|
(4,264)
|
|
Net cash flows from financing activities
|
571
|
|
Net increase in cash
|
1,086
|
At the end of 2000, the market price of Enron’s stock was approximately $83 per share. As of March 15, 2002, Enron’s stock was selling for $0.22 per share. Review the preceding financial statement data and search the Internet for articles on Enron Corporation. Briefly explain why Enron’s stock dropped so dramatically in such a short time.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Assume that you are the chief executive officer for Gold Kist Inc., a national poultry producer. The company’s operations include hatching chickens through the use of breeder stock and feeding, raising, and processing the mature chicks into finished products. The finished products include breaded chicken nuggets and patties and deboned, skinless, and marinated chicken. Gold Kist sells its products to schools, military services, fast food chains, and grocery stores. In groups of four or five, discuss the following business strategy and risk issues:
1. In a commodity business like poultry production, what do you think is the dominant business strategy? What are the implications in this dominant strategy for how you would run Gold Kist?
2. Identify at least two major business risks for operating Gold Kist.
3. How could Gold Kist try to differentiate its products?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Understanding financial statement relationships The information presented here represents selected data from the December 31, 2010, balance sheets and income statements for the year then ended for three firms:
| |
Firm A
|
Firm B
|
Firm C
|
|
Total assets, 12/31/10
|
?
|
$435,000
|
$155,000
|
|
Total liabilities, 12/31/10
|
$80,000
|
?
|
75,000
|
|
Paid in capital, 12/31/10
|
55,000
|
59,000
|
45,000
|
|
Retained earnings, 12/31/10
|
?
|
186,000
|
?
|
|
Net income for 2010
|
68,000
|
110,000
|
25,500
|
|
Dividends declared and paid during 2010
|
12,000
|
?
|
16,500
|
|
Retained earnings, 1/1/10
|
50,000
|
124,000
|
?
|
Required:
Calculate the missing amounts for each firm.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Calculate retained earnings From the following data, calculate the retained earnings balance as of December 31, 2010:
|
Retained earnings, December 31, 2009
|
$311,800
|
|
Cost of equipment purchased during 2010
|
32,400
|
|
Net loss for the year ended December 31, 2010
|
4,700
|
|
Dividends declared and paid in 2010
|
18,500
|
|
Decrease in cash balance from January 1, 2010, to December 31, 2010
|
13,600
|
|
Decrease in long term debt in 2010
|
14,800
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Calculate retained earnings From the following data, calculate the retained earnings balance as of December 31, 2009:
|
Retained earnings, December 31, 2010
|
$841,200
|
|
Decrease in total liabilities during 2010
|
183,200
|
|
Gain on the sale of buildings during 2010
|
64,400
|
|
Dividends declared and paid in 2010
|
18,000
|
|
Proceeds from sale of common stock in 2010
|
197,600
|
|
Net income for the year ended December 31, 2010
|
90,400
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Calculate cash available upon liquidation of business Kimber Co. is in the process of liquidating and going out of business. The firm’s accountant has provided the following balance sheet and additional information:
|
Assets
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
$18,400
|
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
62,600
|
|
|
Merchandise inventory
|
114,700
|
|
|
Total current assets
|
|
$195,700
|
|
Land
|
$51,000
|
|
|
Buildings & equipment
|
343,000
|
|
|
Less: Accumulated depreciation
|
195,000
|
|
|
Total land, buildings, & equipment
|
|
199,000
|
|
Total assets
|
|
$394,700
|
|
Liabilities and Owners’ Equity
|
|
|
|
Accounts payable
|
$46,700
|
|
|
Notes payable
|
58,500
|
|
|
Total current liabilities
|
|
$105,200
|
|
Long term debt
|
|
64,800
|
|
Owners’ Equity
|
|
|
|
Common stock, no par
|
$110,000
|
|
|
Retained earnings
|
114,700
|
|
|
Total owners’ equity
|
|
224,700
|
|
Total liabilities and owners’ equity
|
|
$394,700
|
It is estimated that all but 12% of the accounts receivable can be collected, and that the merchandise inventory can be disposed of in a liquidation sale for 85% of its cost. Buildings and equipment can be sold at $40,000 above book value (the difference between original cost and accumulated depreciation shown on the balance sheet), and the land can be sold at its current appraisal value of $65,000. In addition to the liabilities included in the balance sheet, $2,400 is owed to employees for their work since the last pay period, and interest of $5,250 has accrued on notes payable and long term debt.
Required:
a. Calculate the amount of cash that will be available to the stockholders if the accounts receivable are collected, the other assets are sold as described, and all liabilities and other claims are paid in full.
b. Briefly explain why the amount of cash available to stockholders (computed in part a) is different from the amount of total owners’ equity shown in the balance sheet.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Understanding and analyzing financial statement relationships—sales / service organization Pope’s Garage had the following accounts and amounts in its financial statements on December 31, 2010. Assume that all balance sheet items reflect account balances at December 31, 2010, and that all income statement items reflect activities that occurred during the year then ended.
|
Accounts receivable
|
$33,000
|
|
Depreciation expense
|
12,000
|
|
Land
|
27,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
90,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
59,000
|
|
Cash
|
9,000
|
|
Equipment
|
71,000
|
|
Supplies
|
6,000
|
|
Accounts payable
|
23,000
|
|
Service revenue
|
20,000
|
|
Interest expense
|
4,000
|
|
Common stock
|
10,000
|
|
Income tax expense
|
12,000
|
|
Accumulated depreciation
|
45,000
|
|
Long term debt
|
40,000
|
|
Supplies expense
|
14,000
|
|
Merchandise inventory
|
31,000
|
|
Sales revenue
|
140,000
|
Required:
a. Calculate the total current assets at December 31, 2010.
b. Calculate the total liabilities and owners’ equity at December 31, 2010.
c. Calculate the earnings from operations (operating income) for the year ended December 31, 2010.
d. Calculate the net income (or loss) for the year ended December 31, 2010.
e. What was the average income tax rate for Pope’s Garage for 2010?
f. If $16,000 of dividends had been declared and paid during the year, what was the January 1, 2010, balance of retained earnings?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Prepare an income statement, balance sheet, and statement of changes in owners’ equity; analyze results The following information was obtained from the records of Breanna, Inc.:
|
Accounts receivable
|
$10,000
|
|
Accumulated depreciation
|
52,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
128,000
|
|
Income tax expense
|
8,000
|
|
Cash
|
65,000
|
|
Sales
|
200,000
|
|
Equipment
|
120,000
|
|
Selling, general, and administrative expenses
|
34,000
|
|
Common stock (9,000 shares)
|
90,000
|
|
Accounts payable
|
15,000
|
|
Retained earnings, 1/1/10
|
23,000
|
|
Interest expense
|
6,000
|
|
Merchandise inventory
|
37,000
|
|
Long term debt
|
40,000
|
|
Dividends declared and paid during 2010
|
12,000
|
Except as otherwise indicated, assume that all balance sheet items reflect account balances at December 31, 2010, and that all income statement items reflect activities that occurred during the year ended December 31, 2010. There were no changes in paid in capital during the year.
Required:
a. Prepare an income statement and statement of changes in owners’ equity for the year ended December 31, 2010, and a balance sheet at December 31, 2010, for Breanna, Inc. Based on the financial statements that you have prepared for part a, answer the questions in parts b–e. Provide brief explanations for each of your answers and state any assumptions you believe are necessary to ensure that your answers are correct.
b. What is the company’s average income tax rate?
c. What interest rate is charged on long term debt?
d. What is the par value per share of common stock?
e. What is the company’s dividend policy (i.e., what proportion of the company’s earnings are used for dividends)?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Prepare an income statement, balance sheet, and statement of changes in owners’ equity; analyze results The following information was obtained from the records of Shae, Inc.:
|
Merchandise inventory
|
$264,000
|
|
Notes payable (long term)
|
300,000
|
|
Sales
|
900,000
|
|
Buildings and equipment
|
504,000
|
|
Selling, general, and administrative expenses
|
72,000
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
120,000
|
|
Common stock (42,000 shares)
|
210,000
|
|
Income tax expense
|
84,000
|
|
Cash
|
192,000
|
|
Retained earnings, 1/1/10
|
129,000
|
|
Accrued liabilities
|
18,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
540,000
|
|
Accumulated depreciation
|
216,000
|
|
Interest expense
|
48,000
|
|
Accounts payable
|
90,000
|
|
Dividends declared and paid during 2010
|
39,000
|
Except as otherwise indicated, assume that all balance sheet items reflect account balances at December 31, 2010, and that all income statement items reflect activities that occurred during the year ended December 31, 2010. There were no changes in paid in capital during the year.
Required:
a. Prepare an income statement and statement of changes in owners’ equity for the year ended December 31, 2010, and a balance sheet at December 31, 2010, for Shae, Inc.
Based on the financial statements that you have prepared for part a, answer the questions in parts b–e. Provide brief explanations for each of your answers and state any assumptions you believe are necessary to ensure that your answers are correct.
b. What is the company’s average income tax rate?
c. What interest rate is charged on long term debt?
d. What is the par value per share of common stock?
e. What is the company’s dividend policy (i.e., what proportion of the company’s earnings is used for dividends)?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Transaction analysis—nonquantitative Indicate the effect of each of the following transactions on total assets, total liabilities, and total owners’ equity. Use + for increase, − for decrease, and (NE) for no effect. The first transaction is provided as an illustration.
| |
|
Assets
|
Liabilities
|
Owners’ Equity
|
|
a.
|
Borrowed cash on a bank loan
|
+
|
+
|
NE
|
|
b.
|
Paid an account payable
|
|
|
|
|
c.
|
Sold common stock
|
|
|
|
|
d.
|
Purchased merchandise inventory on account
|
|
|
|
|
e.
|
Declared and paid dividends
|
|
|
|
|
f.
|
Collected an account receivable
|
|
|
|
|
g.
|
Sold merchandise inventory on account at a profit
|
|
|
|
|
h.
|
Paid operating expenses in cash
|
|
|
|
|
i.
|
Repaid principal and interest on a bank loan
|
|
|
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Complete the balance sheet using cash flow data Following is a partially completed balance sheet for Epsico, Inc., at December 31, 2010, together with comparative data for the year ended December 31, 2009. From the statement of cash flows for the year ended December 31, 2010, you determine the following:
Net income for the year ended December 31, 2010, was $26. Dividends paid during the year ended December 31, 2010, were $8. Cash increased $8 during the year ended December 31, 2010. The cost of new equipment acquired during 2010 was $15; no equipment was disposed of. There were no transactions affecting the land account during 2010, but it is estimated that the fair market value of the land at December 31, 2010, is $42.
Required:
Complete the balance sheet at December 31, 2010.
|
EPSICO, INC. Balance Sheets December 31, 2010 and 2009
|
| |
2010
|
2009
|
|
2010
|
2009
|
|
Assets
|
|
|
Liabilities and Owners’ Equity
|
|
|
|
Current assets:
|
|
|
Current liabilities:
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
$
|
$30
|
Note payable
|
$49
|
$40
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
126
|
120
|
Accounts payable
|
123
|
110
|
|
Inventory
|
241
|
230
|
|
|
|
|
Total current assets
|
$
|
$380
|
Total current liabilities
|
$172
|
$150
|
| |
|
|
Long term debt
|
|
80
|
|
Land
|
$
|
$25
|
Total liabilities
|
$
|
$230
|
|
Equipment
|
|
375
|
Owners’ Equity
|
|
|
|
Less: Accumulated depreciation
|
180
|
$160
|
Common stock
|
$200
|
$200
|
|
Total land & equipment
|
$
|
$240
|
Retained earnings
|
|
190
|
| |
|
|
Total owners’ equity
|
$
|
$390
|
|
Total assets
|
$
|
$620
|
Total liabilities and owners’ equity
|
$
|
$620
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Understanding income statement relationships—Levi Strauss & Co. Following are selected data from the November 30, 2008, and November 25, 2007, consolidated balance sheets and income statements for the years then ended for Levi Strauss & Co. and Subsidiaries. All amounts are reported in thousands.
| |
2008
|
2007
|
|
Net revenues
|
$4,400,914
|
$
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
?
|
2,318,883
|
|
Gross profit
|
2,139,802
|
2,042,046
|
|
Selling, general, administrative, and other operating expenses, net
|
?
|
1,401,005
|
|
Operating income
|
?
|
?
|
|
Interest expense and other expenses, net
|
156,903
|
265,415
|
|
Income before income taxes
|
368,169
|
?
|
|
Income tax expense (benefit)
|
?
|
84,759
|
|
Net income
|
$229,285
|
$460,385
|
|
As at November 30 and 25, respectively:
|
|
|
|
Total assets
|
$2,776,875
|
$ ?
|
|
Total liabilities
|
3,125,800
|
3,244,575
|
|
Total stockholders’ deficit
|
?
|
393,909
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Understanding income statement relationships—Apple Inc. Selected data from the September 27, 2008, and September 29, 2007, consolidated balance sheets and income statements for the years then ended for Apple Inc. follow. All amounts are reported in millions.
| |
2008
|
2007
|
|
Net Sales
|
$32,479
|
$24,006
|
|
Cost of sales
|
21,334
|
15,852
|
|
Research and development expenses
|
1,109
|
782
|
|
Selling, general, and administrative expenses
|
3,761
|
2,963
|
|
Operating income
|
?
|
?
|
|
Other income, net
|
?
|
599
|
|
Provision for income taxes
|
2,061
|
?
|
|
Net income
|
$4,834
|
$3,496
|
Required:
a. Calculate the amount of Apple’s gross profit for each year. Has gross profit as a percentage of sales changed significantly during the past year?
b. Calculate the amount of Apple’s operating income for each year. Has operating income as a percentage of sales changed significantly during the past year?
c. After completing parts a and b, calculate the other missing amounts for each year.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Prepare a personal balance sheet and projected income statement; explain financial statement relationships.
a. Prepare a personal balance sheet for yourself as of today. Work at identifying your assets and liabilities; use rough estimates for amounts.
b. Prepare a projected income statement for yourself for the current semester. Work at identifying your revenues and expenses, again using rough estimates for amounts.
c. Explain how your projected income statement for the semester is likely to impact your financial position (i.e., balance sheet) at the end of the semester. (Note: You are not required to prepare a projected balance sheet.)
d. Identify the major sources (and uses) of cash that you are expecting to receive (and spend) this semester. (Note: You are not required to prepare a projected statement of cash flows.)
e. Give three possible explanations why a full time college student might incur a substantial net loss during the fall semester of her junior year, yet have more cash at the end of the semester than she had at the beginning.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The financial statements at the end of Spratlin Consulting’s first month of operations are shown below.
|
Spratlin Consulting Income Statement For the Month Ended June 30, 2004
|
|
Fees earned
|
|
$36,000
|
|
Operating expenses:
|
|
|
|
Wages expense
|
$12,000
|
|
|
Rent expense
|
7,640
|
|
|
Utilities expense
|
(a)
|
|
|
Miscellaneous expense
|
1,320
|
|
|
Total operating expenses
|
|
23,120
|
|
Net income
|
|
(b)
|
|
Spratlin Consulting Retained Earnings Statement For the Month Ended June 30, 2004
|
|
Net income for June
|
(c)
|
|
Less dividends
|
(d)
|
|
Retained earnings, June 30, 2004
|
(e)
|
|
Spratlin Consulting Balance Sheet June 30, 2004
|
|
Assets
|
|
|
Cash
|
$ 5,600
|
|
Land
|
50,000
|
|
Total assets
|
(f )
|
|
Liabilities
|
|
Accounts payable
|
$ 1,920
|
|
Stockholders’ Equity
|
|
|
Capital stock
|
(g)
|
|
Retained earnings
|
(h)
|
|
Total stockholders’ equity
|
( i )
|
|
Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity
|
j
|
|
Spratlin Consulting Statement of Cash Flows For the Month Ended June 30, 2004
|
|
Cash flows from operating activities:
|
|
|
|
Cash received from customers .
|
$36,000
|
|
|
Deduct cash payments for operating expenses
|
(k)
|
|
|
Net cash flow from operating activities . .
|
|
$14,160
|
|
Cash flows from investing activities:
|
|
|
|
Cash payments for acquisition of land .
|
|
( l )
|
|
Cash flows from financing activities:
|
|
|
|
Cash received from issuing capital stock .
|
$48,000
|
|
|
Deduct dividends . .
|
7,200
|
|
|
Net cash flow from financing activities . .
|
|
(m)
|
|
Net cash flow and June 30, 2004 cash balance
|
|
(n)
|
Instructions
By analyzing the interrelationships among the four financial statements, determine the proper amounts for (a) through (n).
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The total assets and total liabilities of Toys“R”Us Inc. and Estee Lauder Companies Inc. are shown below.
| |
Toys“R”Us (in millions)
|
Estee Lauder Companies (in millions)
|
|
Assets
|
$8,003
|
$3,219
|
|
Liabilities
|
4,585
|
1,867
|
Determine the stockholders’ equity of each company.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Determine the missing amount for each of the following:
|
Assets=
|
Liabilities+
|
Stockholders’ Equity
|
|
a. X=
|
$20,000+
|
$31,500
|
|
b. $62,750=
|
X+
|
$10,000
|
|
c. $57,000=
|
$38,000+
|
X
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Determine the missing amounts (in millions) for the 2001 balance sheets (summarized below) for The Limited Inc., Federal Express Corporation, and Eastman Kodak Co.
| |
The Limited
|
Federal Express
|
Eastman Kodak
|
|
Assets
|
$4,088
|
(b)
|
$13,362
|
|
Liabilities
|
(a)
|
$5,323
|
10,468
|
|
Stockholders’ equity
|
2,317
|
4,248
|
(c)
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Staples, Inc., is a leading office products distributor, with a total of 1,307 retail stores in the United States, Canada, the United Kingdom, the Netherlands, and Portugal. The following financial statement data were taken from Staples’ financial statements as of February3, 2001 and 2000:
| |
2001 (in thousands)
|
2000 in (thousands)
|
|
Total assets
|
$3,989,413
|
$3,846,076
|
|
Total liabilities
|
(1)
|
2,017,263
|
|
Total stockholders’ equity
|
1,763,830
|
(2)
|
|
Retained earnings
|
1,008,021
|
948,309
|
|
Sales
|
$10,673,671
|
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
8,097,166
|
|
|
Operating and other expenses
|
2,332,320
|
|
|
Income tax expense
|
184,473
|
|
a. Determine the missing data indicated for (1) and (2).
b. Using the income statement data for 2001, determine the amount of net income or loss.
c. Did Staples pay any dividends to stockholders during 2001? Hint: Compare the change in retained earnings to your answer for (b).
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Surgery Services was organized on April 1, 2003. A summary of the revenue and expense transactions for April follows:
|
Fees earned
|
$165,800
|
|
Wages expense
|
74,750
|
|
Miscellaneous expense
|
2,250
|
|
Rent expense
|
25,000
|
Prepare an income statement for the month ended April 30.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
One item is omitted in each of the following summaries of balance sheet and income statement data for four different corporations, I, II, III, and IV.
|
Beginning of the year:
|
1
|
2
|
3
|
4
|
|
Assets
|
$600,000
|
$125,000
|
$100,000
|
(d)
|
|
Liabilities
|
360,000
|
65,000
|
76,000
|
$150,000
|
|
End of the year:
|
|
|
|
|
|
Assets
|
745,000
|
175,000
|
90,000
|
310,000
|
|
Liabilities
|
325,000
|
55,000
|
80,000
|
170,000
|
|
During the year:
|
|
|
|
|
|
Additional issue of capital stock
|
(a)
|
25,000
|
10,000
|
50,000
|
|
Dividends
|
40,000
|
8,000
|
(c)
|
75,000
|
|
Revenue
|
197,750
|
(b)
|
115,000
|
140,000
|
|
Expenses
|
108,000
|
32,000
|
122,500
|
160,000
|
Determine the missing amounts, identifying them by letter. (Hint: First determine the amount of increase or decrease in stockholders’ equity during the year.)
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Financial information related to Revival Interiors for August and September of the current year is as follows:
| |
August 31, 2004
|
September 30, 2004
|
|
Accounts payable
|
$ 3,850
|
$ 4,150
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
8,500
|
9,780
|
|
Capital stock
|
10,000
|
10,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
?
|
?
|
|
Cash
|
15,000
|
25,500
|
|
Prepaid expenses
|
750
|
600
|
a. Prepare balance sheets for Revival Interiors as of August 31 and as of September 30.
b. Determine the amount of net income for September, assuming that no additional capital stock was issued and no dividends were paid.
c. Determine the amount of net income for September, assuming that no additional capital stock was issued, but dividends of $7,500 were paid.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Dazzle School is a newly organized business that teaches people how to inspire and influence others. The list of accounts to be opened in the general ledger is as follows:
|
Accounts Payable
|
Miscellaneous Expense
|
Supplies
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
Supplies Expense
|
|
Cash
|
Rebecca Wimmer, Capital
|
Unearned Rent
|
|
Equipment
|
Rebecca Wimmer, Drawing
|
Wages Expense
|
|
Fees Earned
|
Rent Expense
|
|
List the accounts in the order in which they should appear in the ledger of Dazzle School and assign account numbers. Each account number is to have two digits: the first digit is to indicate the major classification (1 for assets, etc.), and the second digit is to identify the specific account within each major classification (11 for Cash, etc.).
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following table summarizes the rules of debit and credit. For each of the items (a)
through (l), indicate whether the proper answer is a debit or a credit.
|
|
|
|
Normal
|
|
|
Increase
|
Decrease
|
Balance
|
|
Balance sheet accounts:
|
|
|
|
|
Asset
|
(a)
|
Credit
|
(b)
|
|
Liability
|
(c)
|
(d)
|
Credit
|
|
Owner’s equity:
|
|
|
|
|
Capital
|
Credit
|
(e)
|
(f)
|
|
Drawing
|
(g)
|
(h)
|
Debit
|
|
Income statement accounts:
|
|
|
|
|
Revenue
|
(i)
|
(j)
|
(k)
|
|
Expense
|
Debit
|
(l)
|
Debit
|
| |
|
|
|
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Boa Co. has the following accounts in its ledger: Cash; Accounts Receivable; Supplies; Office Equipment; Accounts Payable; Alfonso Finley, Capital; Alfonso Finley, Drawing; Fees Earned; Rent Expense; Advertising Expense; Utilities Expense; Miscellaneous Expense.
Journalize the following selected transactions for October 2007 in a two column journal.
Journal entry explanations may be omitted.
Oct. 1. Paid rent for the month, $2,500.
3. Paid advertising expense, $1,100.
4. Paid cash for supplies, $725.
6. Purchased office equipment on account, $7,500.
10. Received cash from customers on account, $3,600.
12. Paid creditor on account, $600.
20. Withdrew cash for personal use, $1,000.
27. Paid cash for repairs to office equipment, $500.
30. Paid telephone bill for the month, $195.
31. Fees earned and billed to customers for the month, $20,150.
31. Paid electricity bill for the month, $315.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The accounts in the ledger of Matice Co. as of July 31, 2008, are listed in alphabetical order as follows. All accounts have normal balances. The balance of the cash account has been intentionally omitted.
|
Accounts Payable
|
$ 56,130
|
Notes Payable
|
$120,000
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
112,500
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
9,000
|
|
Cash
|
?
|
Rent Expense
|
180,000
|
|
Fees Earned
|
930,000
|
Supplies
|
6,300
|
|
Insurance Expense
|
18,000
|
Supplies Expense
|
23,700
|
|
Land
|
255,000
|
Unearned Rent
|
27,000
|
|
Milton Adair, Capital
|
259,920
|
Utilities Expense
|
124,500
|
|
Milton Adair, Drawing
|
60,000
|
Wages Expense
|
525,000
|
|
Miscellaneous Expense
|
26,700
|
|
|
Prepare an unadjusted trial balance, listing the accounts in their proper order and inserting the missing figure for cash.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Indicate which of the following errors, each considered individually, would cause the trial balance totals to be unequal:
a. A fee of $2,350 earned and due from a client was not debited to Accounts Receivable or credited to a revenue account, because the cash had not been received.
b. A payment of $1,500 to a creditor was posted as a debit of $1,500 to Accounts Payable and a debit of $1,500 to Cash.
c. A payment of $6,000 for equipment purchased was posted as a debit of $600 to Equipment and a credit of $600 to Cash.
d. Payment of a cash withdrawal of $12,000 was journalized and posted as a debit of $21,000 to Salary Expense and a credit of $12,000 to Cash.
e. A receipt of $750 from an account receivable was journalized and posted as a debit of $750 to Cash and a credit of $750 to Fees Earned.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following preliminary unadjusted trial balance of Awesome Co., a sports ticket agency, does not balance:
|
Awesome Co. Unadjusted Trial Balance December 31, 2008
|
| |
Debit
|
Credit
|
| |
Balances
|
Balances
|
|
Cash
|
94,700
|
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
44,200
|
|
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
|
16,000
|
|
Equipment
|
15,000
|
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
25,960
|
|
Unearned Rent
|
|
5,800
|
|
Sean Milner, Capital
|
164,840
|
|
|
Sean Milner, Drawing
|
20,000
|
|
|
Service Revenue
|
|
167,500
|
|
Wages Expense
|
|
84,000
|
|
Advertising Expense
|
14,400
|
|
|
Miscellaneous Expense
|
|
2,850
|
| |
353,140
|
302,110
|
When the ledger and other records are reviewed, you discover the following: (1) the debits and credits in the cash account total $94,700 and $67,950, respectively; (2) a billing of $5,000 to a customer on account was not posted to the accounts receivable account; (3) a payment of $3,600 made to a creditor on account was not posted to the accounts payable account; (4) the balance of the unearned rent account is $8,500; (5) the correct balance of the equipment account is $150,000; and (6) each account has a normal balance. Prepare a corrected unadjusted trial balance.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following errors occurred in posting from a two column journal:
1. A credit of $5,125 to Accounts Payable was not posted.
2. A debit of $675 to Accounts Payable was posted as a credit.
3. A debit of $1,375 to Supplies was posted twice.
4. A debit of $3,575 to Wages Expense was posted as $3,557.
5. An entry debiting Accounts Receivable and crediting Fees Earned for $6,000 was not posted.
6. A credit of $350 to Cash was posted as $530.
7. A debit of $1,000 to Cash was posted to Miscellaneous Expense.
Considering each case individually (i.e., assuming that no other errors had occurred), indicate: (a) by “yes” or “no” whether the trial balance would be out of balance; (b) if answer to (a) is “yes,” the amount by which the trial balance totals would differ; and (c) whether the debit or credit column of the trial balance would have the larger total. Answers should be presented in the following form, with error (1) given as an example:
| |
(a)
|
(b)
|
©
|
|
Error
|
Out of Balance
|
Difference
|
Larger Total
|
|
1
|
yes
|
$5,125
|
debit
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Identify the errors in the following trial balance. All accounts have normal balances.
|
Hybrid Co. Unadjusted Trial Balance For the Month Ending October 31, 2008
|
|
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
| |
Balances
|
Balances
|
|
Cash
|
22,500
|
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
|
49,200
|
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
10,800
|
|
|
Equipment
|
150,000
|
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
5,550
|
|
|
Salaries Payable .
|
|
3,750
|
|
Nolan Towns, Capital
|
|
129,600
|
|
Nolan Towns, Drawing
|
|
18,000
|
|
Service Revenue
|
|
236,100
|
|
Salary Expense
|
98,430
|
|
|
Advertising Expense
|
|
21,600
|
|
Miscellaneous Expense
|
4,470
|
|
| |
458,250
|
458,250
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Matching Following is a list of the key terms and concepts introduced in the chapter, along with a list of corresponding definitions. Match the appropriate letter for the key term or concept to each definition provided (items 1–15). Note that not all key terms and concepts will be used. Solutions are provided at the end of this chapter.
|
a. Accumulated depreciation
|
p. Earnings per share of common stock
|
|
b. Balance sheet
|
q. Paid in capital
|
|
c. Accrued liabilities
|
r. Common stock
|
|
d. Current assets
|
s. Additional paid in capital
|
|
e. Current liabilities
|
t. Retained earnings
|
|
f. Merchandise inventory
|
u. Dividends
|
|
g. Revenues
|
v. Par value
|
|
h. Expenses
|
w. Going concern concept
|
|
i. Gains
|
x. Matching concept
|
|
j. Losses
|
y. Accrual concept
|
|
k. Net sales
|
z. Opportunity cost
|
|
l. Cost of goods sold
|
aa. Annual report
|
|
m. Gross profit
|
bb. Income statement
|
|
n. Income from operations
|
|
|
o. Net income
|
|
1. The difference between the total amount invested by the owners and the par value or stated value of the stock issued.
2. Outflows or using up of assets or incurrence of liabilities during a period from delivering or producing goods, rendering services, or carrying out other activities that constitute the entity’s major operations.
3. The financial statement that is a list of the entity’s assets, liabilities, and owners’ equity at a point in time.
4. A document distributed to stockholders that contains the financial statements for the fiscal year of the reporting firm with the report of the external auditor’s examination of the financial statements.
5. A distribution of earnings to the owners of a corporation.
6. An arbitrary value assigned to a share of stock when the corporation is organized.
7. Net income available to the common stockholders divided by the average number of shares of common stock outstanding during the period.
8. Items held by an entity for sale to potential customers in the normal course of business.
9. Inflows of cash or increases in other assets, or settlement of liabilities during a period from delivering or producing goods, rendering services, or other activities that constitute the entity’s major operations.
10. Cash and those assets likely to be converted to cash or used to benefit the entity within one year of the balance sheet date.
11. Cumulative net income that has not been distributed to the owners of a corporation as dividends.
12. The difference between gross profit and operating expenses. Also referred to as operating income and earnings from operations.
13. Increases in net assets from incidental transactions and other events affecting an entity during a period except those that result from revenues or investments by owners.
14. A presumption that the entity will continue in existence for the indefinite future.
15. Net sales less cost of goods sold.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The principle stating that all expenses incurred while earning revenues should be identified with the revenues when they are earned and reported for the same time period is the
a. cost principle.
b. revenue principle.
c. expense principle.
d. matching principle.
e. timing principle.
Corporate annual reports do not ordinarily include
a. a transmittal letter from the president or chairman of the board of directors.
b. financial statements for the most recent year.
c. explanatory notes and comments about the financial statements.
d. the internal auditor’s report and opinion about the financial statements.
e. a historical summary of selected financial data for the past five years or more.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Understanding financial statement relationships The information presented here represents selected data from the December 31, 2010, balance sheets and income statements for the year then ended for three firms:
| |
Firm A
|
Firm B
|
Firm C
|
|
Total assets, 12/31/10
|
$420,000
|
$540,000
|
$325,000
|
|
Total liabilities, 12/31/10
|
215,000
|
145,000
|
?
|
|
Paid in capital, 12/31/10
|
75,000
|
?
|
40,000
|
|
Retained earnings, 12/31/10
|
?
|
310,000
|
?
|
|
Net income for 2010
|
?
|
83,000
|
113,000
|
|
Dividends declared and paid during 2010
|
50,000
|
19,000
|
65,000
|
|
Retained earnings, 1/1/10
|
78,000
|
?
|
42,000
|
Required:
Calculate the missing amounts for each firm.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The financial statements at the end of Harp Realty’s first month of operations are shown below and on the next page.
|
Harp Realty
|
|
Income Statement
|
|
For the Month Ended April 30, 2008
|
|
Fees earned
|
|
$28,200
|
|
Expenses:
|
|
|
|
Wages expense
|
$ (a)
|
|
|
Rent expense
|
2,880
|
|
|
Supplies expense
|
2,400
|
|
|
Utilities expense
|
1,620
|
|
|
Miscellaneous expense
|
990
|
|
|
Total expenses
|
|
14,340
|
|
Net income
|
|
(b)
|
|
Harp Realty
|
|
Statement of Owner’s Equity
|
|
For the Month Ended April 30, 2008
|
|
Iris Sigrist, capital, April 1, 2008
|
|
$ (c)
|
|
Investment on April 1, 2008
|
|
$ (d)
|
|
|
Net income for April
|
|
(e)
|
|
| |
|
(f)
|
|
|
Less withdrawals
|
|
(g)
|
|
|
Increase in owner’s equity
|
|
(h)
|
|
Iris Sigrist, capital, April 30, 2008
|
|
(i)
|
|
Harp Realty
|
|
Balance Sheet
|
|
30 Apr 08
|
|
Assets
|
Liabilities
|
|
Cash
|
$17,700
|
Accounts payable
|
$1,440
|
|
Supplies
|
1,200
|
Owner’s Equity
|
|
|
Land
|
(j)
|
Iris Sigrist, capital
|
(l)
|
| |
|
Total liabilities and
|
|
|
Total assets
|
(k)
|
owner’s equity
|
(m)
|
|
Harp Realty
|
|
Statement of Cash Flows
|
|
For the Month Ended April 30, 2008
|
|
Cash flows from operating activities:
|
|
|
Cash received from customers
|
$ (n)
|
|
|
Deduct cash payments for expenses and
|
|
|
|
payments to creditors
|
14,100
|
|
|
Net cash flow from operating activities
|
|
$ (o)
|
|
Cash flows from investing activities:
|
|
|
Cash payments for acquisition of land
|
|
(43,200)
|
|
Cash flows from financing activities:
|
|
|
Cash received as owner’s investment
|
$54,000
|
|
|
Deduct cash withdrawal by owner
|
7,200
|
|
|
Net cash flow from financing activities
|
|
(p)
|
|
Net cash flow and June 30, 2008, cash balance
|
|
(q)
|
Instructions
By analyzing the interrelationships among the four financial statements, determine the proper amounts for (a) through (q).
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Kris Payne enjoys listening to all types of music and owns countless CDs and tapes. Over the years, Kris has gained a local reputation for knowledge of music from classical to rap and the ability to put together sets of recordings that appeal to all ages. During the last several months, Kris served as a guest disc jockey on a local radio station. In addition, Kris has entertained at several friends’ parties as the host deejay. On April 1, 2008, Kris established a proprietorship known as Dancin Music. Using an extensive collection of CDs and tapes, Kris will serve as a disc jockey on a fee basis for weddings, college parties, and other events. During April, Kris entered into the following transactions:
April 1. Deposited $10,000 in a checking account in the name of Dancin Music.
2. Received $2,500 from a local radio station for serving as the guest disc jockey for April.
2. Agreed to share office space with a local real estate agency, Cash Realty. Dancin Music will pay one fourth of the rent. In addition, Dancin Music agreed to pay a portion of the salary of the receptionist and to pay one fourth of the utilities. Paid $1,000 for the rent of the office.
4. Purchased supplies (blank CDs, poster board, extension cords, etc.) from Richt Office Supply Co. for $350. Agreed to pay $100 within 10 days and the remainder by May 3, 2008.
6. Paid $750 to a local radio station to advertise the services of Dancin Music twice daily for two weeks.
8. Paid $800 to a local electronics store for renting digital recording equipment.
12. Paid $300 (music expense) to Rocket Music for the use of its current music demos to make various music sets.
13. Paid Richt Office Supply Co. $100 on account.
16. Received $350 from a dentist for providing two music sets for the dentist to play for her patients.
22. Served as disc jockey for a wedding party. The father of the bride agreed to pay $1,350 the 1st of May.
25. Received $500 from a friend for serving as the disc jockey for a cancer charity ball hosted by the local hospital.
29. Paid $240 (music expense) to Score Music for the use of its library of music demos.
30. Received $1,000 for serving as disc jockey for a local club’s monthly dance.
30. Paid Cash Realty $400 for Dancin Music’s share of the receptionist’s salary for April.
30. Paid Cash Realty $350 for Dancin Music’s share of the utilities for April.
30. Determined that the cost of supplies on hand is $170. Therefore, the cost of supplies used during the month was $180.
30. Paid for miscellaneous expenses, $150.
30. Paid $800 royalties (music expense) to Federated Clearing for use of various artists’ music during the month.
30. Withdrew $300 of cash from Dancin Music for personal use.
Instructions
1. Indicate the effect of each transaction and the balances after each transaction, using the
following tabular headings:
| |
Assets
|
|
= Liabilities +
|
|
|
|
|
|
Owner’s Equity
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
Kris
|
Kris
|
|
|
Office
|
Equipment
|
|
|
|
|
|
| |
Accounts
|
|
Accounts
|
Payne,
|
Payne,
|
Fees
|
Music
|
Rent
|
Rent
|
Advertising
|
Wages
|
Utilities
|
Supplies
|
Misc.
|
|
Cash+
|
Receivable+
|
Supplies=
|
Payable+
|
Capital
|
Drawing+
|
Earned
|
Expense
|
Expense
|
Expense
|
Expense
|
Expense
|
Expense
|
Expense
|
Expense
|
2. Prepare an income statement for Dancin Music for the month ended April 30, 2008.
3. Prepare a statement of owner’s equity for Dancin Music for the month ended April 30, 2008.
4. Prepare a balance sheet for Dancin Music as of April 30, 2008.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Chester Hunter, president of Jackrabbit Enterprises, applied for a $250,000 loan from Belgrade National Bank. The bank requested financial statements from Jackrabbit Enterprises as a basis for granting the loan. Chester has told his accountant to provide the bank with a balance sheet. Chester has decided to omit the other financial statements because there was a net loss during the past year.
In groups of three or four, discuss the following questions:
1. Is Chester behaving in a professional manner by omitting some of the financial statements?
2. a. What types of information about their businesses would owners be willing to provide bankers? What types of information would owners not be willing to provide?
b. What types of information about a business would bankers want before extending a loan?
c. What common interests are shared by bankers and business owners?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
On July 7, 2007, Dr. Jennifer Dejong established Second Opinion, a medical practice organized as a proprietorship. The following conversation occurred the following January between Dr. Dejong and a former medical school classmate, Dr. James Tomlin, at an American Medical Association convention in Paris.
|
Dr.
|
Tomlin:
|
Jennifer, good to see you again. Why didn’t you call when you were in
|
| |
|
Chicago? We could have had dinner together.
|
|
Dr.
|
Dejong:
|
Actually, I never made it to Chicago this year. My husband and kids went up
|
| |
|
to our Aspen condo twice, but I got stuck in Boston. I opened a new consulting practice
|
| |
|
this July and haven’t had any time for myself since.
|
|
Dr.
|
Tomlin:
|
I heard about it . . . Second . . . something . . . right?
|
|
Dr.
|
Dejong:
|
Yes, Second Opinion. My husband chose the name.
|
|
Dr.
|
Tomlin:
|
I’ve thought about doing something like that. Are you making any money? I
|
| |
|
mean, is it worth your time?
|
|
Dr.
|
Dejong:
|
You wouldn’t believe it. I started by opening a bank account with $50,000,
|
| |
|
and my December bank statement has a balance of $140,000. Not bad for six
|
| |
|
months—all pure profit.
|
|
Dr.
|
Tomlin:
|
Maybe I’ll try it in Chicago! Let’s have breakfast together tomorrow and you
|
| |
|
can fill me in on the details.
|
Comment on Dr. Dejong’s statement that the difference between the opening bank balance ($50,000) and the December statement balance ($140,000) is pure profit.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Kathy Hoss, a junior in college, has been seeking ways to earn extra spending money. As an active sports enthusiast, Kathy plays tennis regularly at the Racquet Club, where her family has a membership. The president of the club recently approached Kathy with the proposal that she manage the club’s tennis courts. Kathy’s primary duty would be to supervise the operation of the club’s four indoor and six outdoor courts, including court reservations.
In return for her services, the club would pay Kathy $150 per week, plus Kathy could keep whatever she earned from lessons and the fees from the use of the ball machine. The club and Kathy agreed to a one month trial, after which both would consider an arrangement for the remaining two years of Kathy’s college career. On this basis, Kathy organized Advantage. During June 2007, Kathy managed the tennis courts and entered into the following transactions:
a. Opened a business account by depositing $1,500.
b. Paid $250 for tennis supplies (practice tennis balls, etc.).
c. Paid $160 for the rental of videotape equipment to be used in offering lessons during June.
d. Arranged for the rental of two ball machines during June for $200. Paid $140 in advance, with the remaining $60 due July 1.
e. Received $1,600 for lessons given during June.
f. Received $350 in fees from the use of the ball machines during June.
g. Paid $600 for salaries of part time employees who answered the telephone and took reservations while Kathy was giving lessons.
h. Paid $150 for miscellaneous expenses.
i. Received $600 from the club for managing the tennis courts during June.
j. Determined that the cost of supplies on hand at the end of the month totaled $150; therefore, the cost of supplies used was $100.
k. Withdrew $500 for personal use on June 30.
As a friend and accounting student, you have been asked by Kathy to aid her in assessing
the venture.
1. Indicate the effect of each transaction and the balances after each transaction, using the
following tabular headings:
|
Assets
|
|
=
|
Liabilities +
|
|
|
|
Owner’s Equity
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
Kathy
|
Kathy
|
|
Office
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
Accounts
|
Hoss,
|
Hoss,
|
Service
|
Salaries
|
Rent
|
Supplies
|
Misc.
|
|
Cash +
|
Supplies
|
=
|
Payable +
|
Capital
|
Drawing +
|
Revenue
|
Expense
|
Expense
|
Expense
|
Expense
|
2. Prepare an income statement for June.
3. Prepare a statement of owner’s equity for June.
4. Prepare a balance sheet as of June 30.
5. a. Assume that Kathy Hoss could earn $8 per hour working 30 hours a week as a waitress. Evaluate which of the two alternatives, working as a waitress or operating Advantage, would provide Kathy with the most income per month.
b. Discuss any other factors that you believe Kathy should consider before discussing a long term arrangement with the Racquet Club.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Amazon.com, an Internet retailer, was incorporated and began operation in the mid 90s. On the statement of cash flows, would you expect Amazon.com’s net cash flows from operating, investing, and financing activities to be positive or negative for its first three years of operations? Use the following format for your answers, and briefly explain your logic.
|
First Year
|
Second Year
|
Third Year
|
|
Net cash flows from operating activities
|
negative
|
|
|
Net cash flows from investing activities
|
|
|
|
Net cash flows from financing activities
|
|
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The now defunct Enron Corporation, once headquartered in Houston, Texas, provided products and services for natural gas, electricity, and communications to wholesale and retail customers. Enron’s operations were conducted through a variety of subsidiaries and affiliates that involved transporting gas through pipelines, transmitting electricity, and managing energy commodities. The following data were taken from Enron’s financial statements.
|
In millions
|
|
Total revenues
|
$100,789
|
|
Total costs and expenses
|
98,836
|
|
Operating income
|
1,953
|
|
Net income
|
979
|
|
Total assets
|
65,503
|
|
Total liabilities
|
54,033
|
|
Total owners’ equity
|
11,470
|
|
Net cash flows from operating activities
|
4,779
|
|
Net cash flows from investing activities
|
(4,264)
|
|
Net cash flows from financing activities
|
571
|
|
Net increase in cash
|
1,086
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
J. F. Outz, M.D., has been practicing as a cardiologist for three years. During April, 2007, Outz completed the following transactions in her practice of cardiology.
Apr. 1. Paid office rent for April, $800.
3. Purchased equipment on account, $2,100.
5. Received cash on account from patients, $3,150.
8. Purchased X ray film and other supplies on account, $245.
9. One of the items of equipment purchased on April 3 was defective. It was returned with the permission of the supplier, who agreed to reduce the account for the amount charged for the item, $325.
12. Paid cash to creditors on account, $1,250.
17. Paid cash for renewal of a six month property insurance policy, $370.
20. Discovered that the balances of the cash account and the accounts payable account as of April 1 were overstated by $200. A payment of that amount to a creditor in March had not been recorded. Journalize the $200 payment as of April 20.
24. Paid cash for laboratory analysis, $545.
27. Paid cash from business bank account for personal and family expenses, $1,250.
30. Recorded the cash received in payment of services (on a cash basis) to patients during April, $1,720.
30. Paid salaries of receptionist and nurses, $1,725.
30. Paid various utility expenses, $360.
30. Recorded fees charged to patients on account for services performed in April, $5,145.
30. Paid miscellaneous expenses, $132.
Outz’s account titles, numbers, and balances as of April 1 (all normal balances) are listed as follows: Cash, 11, $4,123; Accounts Receivable, 12, $6,725; Supplies, 13, $290; Prepaid Insurance, 14, $465; Equipment, 18, $19,745; Accounts Payable, 22, $765; J. F. Outz, Capital, 31, $30,583; J. F. Outz, Drawing, 32; Professional Fees, 41; Salary Expense, 51; Rent Expense, 53; Laboratory Expense, 55; Utilities Expense, 56; Miscellaneous Expense, 59.
Instructions
1. Open a ledger of standard four column accounts for Dr. Outz as of April 1. Enter the balances in the appropriate balance columns and place a check mark (??) in the posting reference column. (Hint: Verify the equality of the debit and credit balances in the ledger before proceeding with the next instruction.)
2. Journalize each transaction in a two column journal.
3. Post the journal to the ledger, extending the month end balances to the appropriate balance columns after each posting.
4. Prepare an unadjusted trial balance as of April 30.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Match each account number with its most likely account in the list below. The account numbers are 11, 12, 13, 21, 31, 32, 41, 51, 52, and 53.
|
Accounts Payable
|
Fees Earned
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
Land
|
|
Angie Stowe, Capital
|
Miscellaneous Expense
|
|
Angie Stowe, Drawing
|
Supplies Expense
|
|
Cash
|
Wages Expense
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A summary of cash flows for Herat Travel Service for the year ended June 30, 2008, is shown
below.
|
Cash receipts:
|
|
|
Cash received from customers
|
$350,000
|
|
Cash received from additional investment of owner
|
20,000
|
|
Cash payments:
|
|
|
Cash paid for operating expenses
|
270,000
|
|
Cash paid for land
|
60,000
|
|
Cash paid to owner for personal use
|
12,000
|
The cash balance as of July 1, 2007, was $42,800. Prepare a statement of cash flows for Herat Travel Service for the year ended June 30, 2008.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A summary of cash flows for Leotard Travel Service for the year ended February 28, 2008, is shown below.
|
Cash receipts:
|
|
|
Cash received from customers
|
$350,000
|
|
Cash received from additional investment of owner
|
18,000
|
|
Cash payments:
|
|
|
Cash paid for operating expenses
|
365,000
|
|
Cash paid for land
|
27,000
|
|
Cash paid to owner for personal use
|
10,000
|
The cash balance as of March 1, 2007, was $56,700. Prepare a statement of cash flows for Leotard Travel Service for the year ended February 28, 2008.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Frontier Sports sells hunting and fishing equipment and provides guided hunting and fishing trips. Frontier Sports is owned and operated by Wally Schnee, a well known sports enthusiast and hunter. Wally’s wife, Helen, owns and operates Blue Sky Boutique, a women’s clothing store. Wally and Helen have established a trust fund to finance their children’s college education. The trust fund is maintained by First Bank in the name of the children, Anna and Conner.
For each of the following transactions, identify which of the entities listed should record
the transaction in its records.
|
Entities
|
|
F
|
Frontier Sports
|
|
B
|
First Bank Trust Fund
|
|
S
|
Blue Sky Boutique
|
|
X
|
None of the above
|
1. Wally paid a breeder’s fee for an English springer spaniel to be used as a hunting guide dog.
2. Helen paid her dues to the YWCA.
3. Helen purchased two dozen spring dresses from a Denver designer for a special spring sale.
4. Helen deposited a $3,500 personal check in the trust fund at First Bank.
5. Wally paid for an advertisement in a hunters’ magazine.
6. Helen authorized the trust fund to purchase mutual fund shares.
7. Wally paid for dinner and a movie to celebrate their tenth wedding anniversary.
8. Helen donated several dresses from inventory for a local charity auction for the benefit of a women’s abuse shelter.
9. Wally received a cash advance from customers for a guided hunting trip.
10. Wally paid a local doctor for his annual physical, which was required by the workmen’s compensation insurance policy carried by Frontier Sports.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The total assets and total liabilities of Coca Cola and PepsiCo are shown below.
|
|
Coca Cola
|
PepsiCo
|
|
|
(in millions)
|
(in millions)
|
|
Assets
|
$31,327
|
$27,987
|
|
Liabilities
|
15,392
|
14,415
|
Determine the owners’ equity of each company.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The total assets and total liabilities of eBay and Google are shown below.
|
|
eBay
|
Google
|
|
|
(in millions)
|
(in millions)
|
|
Assets
|
$7,991
|
$3,313
|
|
Liabilities
|
1,263
|
384
|
Determine the owners’ equity of each company.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Determine the missing amount for each of the following:
| |
Assets
|
=
|
Liabilities
|
+
|
Owner’s Equity
|
|
a.
|
X
|
=
|
$85,000
|
+
|
$215,600
|
|
b.
|
$93,500
|
=
|
X
|
+
|
6,150
|
|
c.
|
42,500
|
=
|
11,275
|
+
|
X
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Hector Lopez is the owner and operator of Centillion, a motivational consulting business. At the end of its accounting period, December 31, 2007, Centillion has assets of $950,000 and liabilities of $300,000. Using the accounting equation and considering each case independently, determine the following amounts:
a. Hector Lopez, capital, as of December 31, 2007.
b. Hector Lopez, capital, as of December 31, 2008, assuming that assets increased by $150,000 and liabilities increased by $90,000 during 2008.
c. Hector Lopez, capital, as of December 31, 2008, assuming that assets decreased by $75,000 and liabilities increased by $27,000 during 2008.
d. Hector Lopez, capital, as of December 31, 2008, assuming that assets increased by $125,000 and liabilities decreased by $48,000 during 2008.
e. Net income (or net loss) during 2008, assuming that as of December 31, 2008, assets were $1,200,000, liabilities were $195,000, and there were no additional investments or withdrawals.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Otto Egan operates his own catering service. Summary financial data for August are presented in equation form as follows. Each line designated by a number indicates the effect of a transaction on the equation. Each increase and decrease in owner’s equity, except transaction (5), affects net income.
|
|
Assets
|
|
|
= Liabilities +
|
|
Owner’s Equity
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Accounts
|
Otto Egan,
|
Otto Egan,
|
Fees
|
|
|
|
Cash +
|
Supplies+
|
Land =
|
= Payable +
|
Capital
|
Drawing +
|
Earned
|
Expenses
|
|
Bal.
|
27,000
|
3,000
|
100,000
|
15,000
|
115,000
|
|
|
|
|
1.
|
+45,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
45,000
|
|
|
2.
|
20,000
|
|
+20,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
3.
|
16,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
–16,000
|
|
4.
|
|
+3,000
|
|
+ 3,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
5.
|
5,000
|
|
|
|
|
–5,000
|
|
|
|
6.
|
12,000
|
|
|
12,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
7.
|
|
2,500
|
|
|
|
|
|
–2,500
|
|
Bal.
|
19,000
|
3,500
|
120,000
|
6,000
|
115,000
|
–5,000
|
45,000
|
–18,500
|
a. Describe each transaction.
b. What is the amount of net decrease in cash during the month?
c. What is the amount of net increase in owner’s equity during the month?
d. What is the amount of the net income for the month?
e. How much of the net income for the month was retained in the business?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Four different proprietorships, Alpha, Bravo, Charlie, and Delta, show the same balance sheet data at the beginning and end of a year. These data, exclusive of the amount of owner’s equity, are summarized as follows:
|
|
Total
|
Total
|
|
|
Assets
|
Liabilities
|
|
Beginning of the year
|
$1,350,000
|
$540,000
|
|
End of the year
|
2,160,000
|
900,000
|
On the basis of the above data and the following additional information for the year, determine the net income (or loss) of each company for the year. (Hint: First determine the amount of increase or decrease in owner’s equity during the year.)
Alpha: The owner had made no additional investments in the business and had made no withdrawals from the business.
Bravo: The owner had made no additional investments in the business but had withdrawn $120,000.
Charlie: The owner had made an additional investment of $270,000 but had made no withdrawals.
Delta: The owner had made an additional investment of $270,000 and had withdrawn $120,000.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Giblet Services was organized on February 1, 2008. A summary of the revenue and expense transactions for February follows:
|
Fees earned
|
$479,280
|
|
Wages expense
|
310,600
|
|
Rent expense
|
60,000
|
|
Supplies expense
|
6,200
|
|
Miscellaneous expense
|
11,150
|
Prepare an income statement for the month ended February 28.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Financial information related to the proprietorship of Burst Interiors for March and April
2008 is as follows:
|
|
March 31, 2008
|
April 30, 2008
|
|
Accounts payable
|
$18,480
|
$ 19,920
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
40,800
|
46,950
|
|
Gary Deming, capital
|
?
|
?
|
|
Cash
|
72,000
|
122,400
|
|
Supplies
|
3,600
|
3,000
|
a. Prepare balance sheets for Burst Interiors as of March 31 and as of April 30, 2008.
b. Determine the amount of net income for April, assuming that the owner made no additional investments or withdrawals during the month.
c. Determine the amount of net income for April, assuming that the owner made no additional investments but withdrew $15,000 during the month.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Each of the following items is shown in the financial statements of Exxon Mobil Corporation. Identify the financial statement (balance sheet or income statement) in which each item would appear.
|
a.
|
Accounts payable
|
i.
|
Marketable securities
|
|
b. Cash equivalents
|
j.
|
Notes and loans payable
|
|
c.
|
Crude oil inventory
|
k.
|
Notes receivable
|
|
d. Equipment
|
l.
|
Operating expenses
|
|
e.
|
Exploration expenses
|
m. Prepaid taxes
|
|
f.
|
Income taxes payable
|
n.
|
Sales
|
|
g. Investments
|
o.
|
Selling expenses
|
|
h. Long term debt
|
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A summary of cash flows for Webster Consulting Group for the year ended July 31, 2008, is shown below.
|
Cash receipts:
|
|
|
Cash received from customers
|
$495,000
|
|
Cash received from additional investment of owner
|
20,000
|
|
Cash payments:
|
|
|
Cash paid for operating expenses
|
371,500
|
|
Cash paid for land
|
40,000
|
|
Cash paid to owner for personal use
|
9,000
|
The cash balance as of August 1, 2007, was $46,750. Prepare a statement of cash flows for Webster Consulting Group for the year ended July 31, 2008.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
On June 1 of the current year, Doni Gilmore established a business to manage rental property. She completed the following transactions during June:
a. Opened a business bank account with a deposit of $25,000 from personal funds.
b. Purchased supplies (pens, file folders, and copy paper) on account, $1,150.
c. Received cash from fees earned for managing rental property, $4,500.
d. Paid rent on office and equipment for the month, $1,500.
e. Paid creditors on account, $600.
f. Billed customers for fees earned for managing rental property, $2,250.
g. Paid automobile expenses (including rental charges) for month, $400, and miscellaneous expenses, $180.
h. Paid office salaries, $1,200.
i. Determined that the cost of supplies on hand was $380; therefore, the cost of supplies used was $770.
j. Withdrew cash for personal use, $1,000.
Instructions
1. Indicate the effect of each transaction and the balances after each transaction, using the following tabular headings:
| |
Assets
|
|
|
= Liabilities +
|
|
|
Owner’s Equity
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
Doni
|
Doni
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| |
Accounts
|
|
Accounts
|
Gilmore,
|
Gilmore,
|
Fees
|
Rent
|
Salaries
|
Supplies
|
Auto
|
Misc.
|
|
Cash+
|
Receivable+
|
Supplies=
|
Payable+
|
Capital
|
Drawing+
|
Earned
|
Expense
|
Expense
|
Expense
|
Expense
|
Expense
|
2. Briefly explain why the owner’s investment and revenues increased owner’s equity, while withdrawals and expenses decreased owner’s equity.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
On March 1, 2008, Ginny Tyler established Seltzer Realty. Ginny completed the following transactions during the month of March:
a. Opened a business bank account with a deposit of $30,000 from personal funds.
b. Purchased supplies (pens, file folders, paper, etc.) on account, $2,650.
c. Paid creditor on account, $1,500.
d. Earned sales commissions, receiving cash, $36,750.
e. Paid rent on office and equipment for the month, $5,200.
f. Withdrew cash for personal use, $8,000.
g. Paid automobile expenses (including rental charge) for month, $2,500, and miscellaneous expenses, $1,200.
h. Paid office salaries, $9,250.
i. Determined that the cost of supplies on hand was $900; therefore, the cost of supplies used was $1,750.
Instructions
1. Indicate the effect of each transaction and the balances after each transaction, using the
following tabular headings:
|
Assets
|
|
=
|
Liabilities +
|
|
|
|
Owner’s Equity
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
Ginny
|
Ginny
|
|
Office
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
Accounts
|
Tyler,
|
Tyler,
|
Sales
|
Salaries
|
Rent
|
Auto
|
Supplies
|
Misc.
|
|
Cash +
|
Supplies
|
=
|
Payable +
|
Capital
|
Drawing +
|
Commissions
|
Expense
|
Expense
|
Expense
|
Expense
|
Expense
|
2. Prepare an income statement for March, a statement of owner’s equity for March, and a balance sheet as of March 31.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Argon Dry Cleaners is owned and operated by Kerry Ulman. A building and equipment are currently being rented, pending expansion to new facilities. The actual work of dry cleaning is done by another company at wholesale rates. The assets and the liabilities of the business on July 1, 2008, are as follows: Cash, $8,500; Accounts Receivable, $15,500; Supplies, $1,600; Land, $18,000; Accounts Payable, $5,200. Business transactions during July are summarized as follows:
a. Kerry Ulman invested additional cash in the business with a deposit of $30,000 in the business bank account.
b. Paid $22,000 for the purchase of land as a future building site.
c. Received cash from cash customers for dry cleaning sales, $17,900.
d. Paid rent for the month, $3,000.
e. Purchased supplies on account, $1,550.
f. Paid creditors on account, $4,950.
g. Charged customers for dry cleaning sales on account, $12,350.
h. Received monthly invoice for dry cleaning expense for July (to be paid on August 10), $7,880.
i. Paid the following: wages expense, $5,100; truck expense, $1,200; utilities expense, $800; miscellaneous expense, $950.
j. Received cash from customers on account, $13,200.
k. Determined that the cost of supplies on hand was $1,275; therefore, the cost of supplies used during the month was $1,875.
l. Withdrew $5,000 cash for personal use.
Instructions
1. Determine the amount of Kerry Ulman’s capital as of July 1 of the current year.
2. State the assets, liabilities, and owner’s equity as of July 1 in equation form similar to that shown in this chapter. In tabular form below the equation, indicate increases and decreases resulting from each transaction and the new balances after each transaction.
3. Prepare an income statement for July, a statement of owner’s equity for July, and a balance sheet as of July 31.
4. (Optional). Prepare a statement of cash flows for July.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The financial statements at the end of Cayenne Realty’s first month of operations are shown below.
|
Cayenne Realty
|
|
Income Statement
|
|
For the Month Ended June 30, 2008
|
|
Fees earned
|
|
$ (a)
|
|
Expenses:
|
|
|
|
Wages expense
|
$34,000
|
|
|
Rent expense
|
12,800
|
|
|
Supplies expense
|
(b)
|
|
|
Utilities expense
|
7,200
|
|
|
Miscellaneous expense
|
4,400
|
|
|
Total expenses
|
|
70,400
|
|
Net income
|
|
$49,600
|
|
Cayenne Realty
|
|
Statement of Owner’s Equity
|
|
For the Month Ended June 30, 2008
|
|
Andrea Merkel, capital, June 1, 2008
|
$ (c)
|
|
Investment on June 1, 2008
|
$160,000
|
|
|
Net income for June
|
(d)
|
|
| |
(e)
|
|
|
Less withdrawals
|
24,000
|
|
|
Increase in owner’s equity
|
(f)
|
|
Andrea Merkel, capital, June 30, 2008
|
(g)
|
|
Cayenne Realty
|
|
Balance Sheet
|
|
30 Jun 08
|
|
Assets
|
Liabilities
|
|
Cash
|
$17,800
|
Accounts payable
|
$6,400
|
|
Supplies
|
14,200
|
Owner’s Equity
|
|
Land
|
160,000
|
Andrea Merkel, capital
|
(i)
|
| |
|
Total liabilities and
|
|
Total assets
|
(h)
|
owner’s equity
|
(j)
|
|
Cayenne Realty
|
|
Statement of Cash Flows
|
|
For the Month Ended June 30, 2008
|
|
Cash flows from operating activities:
|
|
Cash received from customers
|
$ (k)
|
|
|
Deduct cash payments for expenses and
|
|
|
|
payments to creditors
|
78,200
|
|
|
Net cash flow from operating activities
|
$ (l)
|
|
Cash flows from investing activities:
|
|
Cash payments for acquisition of land
|
(m)
|
|
Cash flows from financing activities:
|
|
Cash received as owner’s investment
|
(n)
|
|
|
Deduct cash withdrawal by owner
|
(o)
|
|
|
Net cash flow from financing activities
|
(p)
|
|
Net cash flow and June 30, 2008, cash balance
|
(q)
|
Instructions
By analyzing the interrelationships among the four financial statements, determine the proper amounts for (a) through (q).
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Ana Urbin established an insurance agency on March 1 of the current year and completed the following transactions during March:
a. Opened a business bank account with a deposit of $40,000 from personal funds.
b. Purchased supplies on account, $1,500.
c. Paid creditors on account, $800.
d. Received cash from fees earned on insurance commissions, $7,250.
e. Paid rent on office and equipment for the month, $2,500.
f. Paid automobile expenses for month, $1,000, and miscellaneous expenses, $400.
g. Paid office salaries, $2,000.
h. Determined that the cost of supplies on hand was $400; therefore, the cost of supplies used was $1,100.
i. Billed insurance companies for sales commissions earned, $9,350.
j. Withdrew cash for personal use, $3,000.
Instructions
1. Indicate the effect of each transaction and the balances after each transaction, using the
following tabular headings:
| |
Assets
|
|
|
= Liabilities +
|
|
|
Owner’s Equity
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
Doni
|
Doni
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| |
Accounts
|
|
Accounts
|
Gilmore,
|
Gilmore,
|
Fees
|
Rent
|
Salaries
|
Supplies
|
Auto
|
Misc.
|
|
Cash+
|
Receivable+
|
Supplies=
|
Payable+
|
Capital
|
Drawing+
|
Earned
|
Expense
|
Expense
|
Expense
|
Expense
|
Expense
|
2. Briefly explain why the owner’s investment and revenues increased owner’s equity,while withdrawals and expenses decreased owner’s equity.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The amounts of the assets and liabilities of Abyss Travel Service at June 30, 2008, the end of the current year, and its revenue and expenses for the year are listed below. The capital of Megan Koch, owner, was $60,000 at July 1, 2007, the beginning of the current year, and the owner withdrew $50,000 during the current year.
|
Accounts payable
|
$ 12,500
|
Supplies
|
$ 4,250
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
48,750
|
Supplies expense
|
8,250
|
|
Cash
|
99,500
|
Taxes expense
|
6,400
|
|
Fees earned
|
375,000
|
Utilities expense
|
31,200
|
|
Miscellaneous expense
|
3,150
|
Wages expense
|
145,400
|
|
Rent expense
|
50,600
|
|
|
Instructions
1. Prepare an income statement for the current year ended June 30, 2008.
2. Prepare a statement of owner’s equity for the current year ended June 30, 2008.
3. Prepare a balance sheet as of June 30, 2008.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Skivvy Dry Cleaners is owned and operated by Jean Potts. A building and equipment are currently being rented, pending expansion to new facilities. The actual work of dry cleaning is done by another company at wholesale rates. The assets and the liabilities of the business on November 1, 2008, are as follows: Cash, $17,200; Accounts Receivable, $19,000; Supplies, $3,750; Land, $30,000; Accounts Payable, $8,200. Business transactions during November are summarized as follows:
a. Jean Potts invested additional cash in the business with a deposit of $50,000 in the business bank account.
b. Purchased land for use as a parking lot, paying cash of $45,000.
c. Paid rent for the month, $4,500.
d. Charged customers for dry cleaning sales on account, $15,250.
e. Paid creditors on account, $5,800.
f. Purchased supplies on account, $3,200.
g. Received cash from cash customers for dry cleaning sales, $22,900.
h. Received cash from customers on account, $17,250.
i. Received monthly invoice for dry cleaning expense for November (to be paid on December 10), $16,380.
j. Paid the following: wages expense, $6,200; truck expense, $1,875; utilities expense, $1,575; miscellaneous expense, $850.
k. Determined that the cost of supplies on hand was $2,500; therefore, the cost of supplies used during the month was $4,450.
l. Withdrew $6,000 for personal use.
Instructions
1. Determine the amount of Jean Potts’s capital as of November 1.
2. State the assets, liabilities, and owner’s equity as of November 1 in equation form similar to that shown in this chapter. In tabular form below the equation, indicate increases and decreases resulting from each transaction and the new balances after each transaction.
3. Prepare an income statement for November, a statement of owner’s equity for November, and a balance sheet as of November 30.
4. (Optional). Prepare a statement of cash flows for November.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Gadzuk Company, which has only one product, has provided the following data concerning its most recent month of operations:
|
Selling price
|
$123
|
|
Units in beginning inventory
|
0
|
|
Units produced
|
1,900
|
|
Units sold
|
1,600
|
|
Units in ending inventory .
|
300
|
|
Variable costs per unit:
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
$32
|
|
Direct labor
|
$55
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead
|
$1
|
|
Variable selling and administrative
|
$6
|
|
Fixed costs:
|
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead
|
$43,700
|
|
Fixed selling and administrative
|
$1,600
|
What is the total period cost for the month under the variable costing approach?
A) $43,700
B) $54,900
C) $45,300
D) $11,200
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Gadzuk Company, which has only one product, has provided the following data concerning its most recent month of operations:
|
Selling price
|
$123
|
|
Units in beginning inventory
|
0
|
|
Units produced
|
1,900
|
|
Units sold
|
1,600
|
|
Units in ending inventory .
|
300
|
|
Variable costs per unit:
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
$32
|
|
Direct labor
|
$55
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead
|
$1
|
|
Variable selling and administrative
|
$6
|
|
Fixed costs:
|
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead
|
$43,700
|
|
Fixed selling and administrative
|
$1,600
|
What is the total period cost for the month under the absorption costing approach?
A) $1,600
B) $43,700
C) $11,200
D) $54,900
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Eliason Company, which has only one product, has provided the following data concerning its most recent month of operations:
|
Selling price
|
$72
|
|
Units in beginning inventory
|
0
|
|
Units produced
|
7,300
|
|
Units sold
|
7,200
|
|
Units in ending inventory .
|
100
|
|
Variable costs per unit:
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
$12
|
|
Direct labor
|
$24
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead
|
$3
|
|
Variable selling and administrative
|
$8
|
|
Fixed costs:
|
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead
|
$138,700
|
|
Fixed selling and administrative
|
$36,000
|
What is the net operating income for the month under variable costing?
A) $7,200
B) $1,900
C) $5,300
D) $1,400
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Elgin Company, which has only one product, has provided the following data concerning its most recent month of operations:
|
Selling price
|
$126
|
|
Units in beginning inventory
|
0
|
|
Units produced
|
1,400
|
|
Units sold
|
1,000
|
|
Units in ending inventory .
|
400
|
|
Variable costs per unit:
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
$27
|
|
Direct labor
|
$49
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead
|
$6
|
|
Variable selling and administrative
|
$9
|
|
Fixed costs:
|
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead
|
$28,000
|
|
Fixed selling and administrative
|
$3,000
|
What is the net operating income for the month under variable costing?
A) $8,000
B) $4,000
C) $12,000
D) ($28,800)
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Elgin Company, which has only one product, has provided the following data concerning its most recent month of operations:
|
Selling price
|
$126
|
|
Units in beginning inventory
|
0
|
|
Units produced
|
1,400
|
|
Units sold
|
1,000
|
|
Units in ending inventory .
|
400
|
|
Variable costs per unit:
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
$27
|
|
Direct labor
|
$49
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead
|
$6
|
|
Variable selling and administrative
|
$9
|
|
Fixed costs:
|
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead
|
$28,000
|
|
Fixed selling and administrative
|
$3,000
|
What is the net operating income for the month under absorption costing?
A) ($28,800)
B) $4,000
C) $12,000
D) $8,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Kezner Company, which has only one product, has provided the following data concerning its most recent month of operations:
|
Selling price
|
$105
|
|
Units in beginning inventory
|
500
|
|
Units produced
|
4,700
|
|
Units sold
|
4,900
|
|
Units in ending inventory .
|
300
|
|
Variable costs per unit:
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
$14
|
|
Direct labor
|
$43
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead
|
$1
|
|
Variable selling and administrative
|
$9
|
|
Fixed costs:
|
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead
|
$173,900
|
|
Fixed selling and administrative
|
$9,800
|
The company produces the same number of units every month, although the sales in units vary from month to month. The company”s variable costs per unit and total fixed costs have been constant from month to month.
What is the net operating income for the month under variable costing?
A) ($4,900)
B) $11,100
C) $14,100
D) $2,500
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Kezner Company, which has only one product, has provided the following data concerning its most recent month of operations:
|
Selling price
|
$105
|
|
Units in beginning inventory
|
500
|
|
Units produced
|
4,700
|
|
Units sold
|
4,900
|
|
Units in ending inventory .
|
300
|
|
Variable costs per unit:
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
$14
|
|
Direct labor
|
$43
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead
|
$1
|
|
Variable selling and administrative
|
$9
|
|
Fixed costs:
|
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead
|
$173,900
|
|
Fixed selling and administrative
|
$9,800
|
The company produces the same number of units every month, although the sales in units vary from month to month. The company”s variable costs per unit and total fixed costs have been constant from month to month.
What is the net operating income for the month under absorption costing?
A) $2,500
B) $14,100
C) $11,100
D) ($4,900)
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Khidir Company, which has only one product, has provided the following data concerning its most recent month of operations:
|
Selling price
|
$121
|
|
Units in beginning inventory
|
300
|
|
Units produced
|
3,200
|
|
Units sold
|
3,400
|
|
Units in ending inventory .
|
100
|
|
Variable costs per unit:
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
$45
|
|
Direct labor
|
$45
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead
|
$1
|
|
Variable selling and administrative
|
$7
|
|
Fixed costs:
|
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead
|
$70,400
|
|
Fixed selling and administrative
|
$6,800
|
The company produces the same number of units every month, although the sales in units vary from month to month. The company”s variable costs per unit and total fixed costs have been constant from month to month.
What is the net operating income for the month under variable costing?
A) ($3,400)
B) $2,200
C) $1,000
D) $19,200
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Khidir Company, which has only one product, has provided the following data concerning its most recent month of operations:
|
Selling price
|
$121
|
|
Units in beginning inventory
|
300
|
|
Units produced
|
3,200
|
|
Units sold
|
3,400
|
|
Units in ending inventory .
|
100
|
|
Variable costs per unit:
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
$45
|
|
Direct labor
|
$45
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead
|
$1
|
|
Variable selling and administrative
|
$7
|
|
Fixed costs:
|
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead
|
$70,400
|
|
Fixed selling and administrative
|
$6,800
|
The company produces the same number of units every month, although the sales in units vary from month to month. The company”s variable costs per unit and total fixed costs have been constant from month to month.
What is the net operating income for the month under absorption costing?
A) ($3,400)
B) $19,200
C) $1,000
D) $2,200
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
HJ Turner Corporation produces a single product. Data concerning the company”s operations last year appear below:
|
Units in beginning inventory
|
0
|
|
Units produced
|
10,000
|
|
Units sold
|
9,000
|
|
Selling price per unit
|
$60
|
|
Variable costs per unit:
|
0
|
|
Direct materials
|
|
|
Direct labor
|
$15
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead
|
$5
|
|
Variable selling and administrative
|
$2
|
|
Fixed costs in total:
|
$4
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead
|
|
|
Fixed selling and administrative
|
$200,000
|
|
Units in beginning inventory
|
$70,000
|
Assume direct labor is a variable cost.
Required:
a. Compute the unit product cost under both absorption and variable costing.
b. Prepare an income statement for the year using absorption costing.
c. Prepare an income statement for the year using variable costing.
d. Prepare a report reconciling the difference in net operating income between absorption and variable costing for the year.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Legaz Company, which has only one product, has provided the following data concerning its most recent month of operations:
|
Selling Price
|
$120
|
|
Units in beginning inventory
|
100
|
|
Units produced
|
3,900
|
|
Units sold
|
3,600
|
|
Units in ending inventory
|
400
|
|
Variable costs per unit:
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
$31
|
|
Direct labor
|
$54
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead
|
$5
|
|
Variable selling and administrative
|
$8
|
|
Fixed costs in total:
|
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead
|
$54,600
|
|
Fixed selling and administrative
|
$21,600
|
The company produces the same number of units every month, although the sales in units vary from month to month. The company”s variable costs per unit and total fixed costs have been constant from month to month.
Required:
a. What is the unit product cost for the month under variable costing?
b. What is the unit product cost for the month under absorption costing?
c. Prepare an income statement for the month using the contribution format and the variable costing method.
d. Prepare an income statement for the month using the absorption costing method.
e. Reconcile the variable costing and absorption costing net operating incomes for the month.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Magnani Company, which has only one product, has provided the following data concerning its most recent month of operations:
|
Selling Price
|
$97
|
|
Units in beginning inventory
|
0
|
|
Units produced
|
6,600
|
|
Units sold
|
6,200
|
|
Units in ending inventory
|
400
|
|
Variable costs per unit:
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
$40
|
|
Direct labor
|
$10
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead
|
$4
|
|
Variable selling and administrative
|
$9
|
|
Fixed costs in total:
|
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead
|
$184,800
|
|
Fixed selling and administrative
|
$12,400
|
Required:
a. What is the unit product cost for the month under variable costing?
b. What is the unit product cost for the month under absorption costing?
c. Prepare an income statement for the month using the contribution format and the variable costing method.
d. Prepare an income statement for the month using the absorption costing method.
e. Reconcile the variable costing and absorption costing net operating incomes for the month.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Duif Company”s absorption costing income statements for the last two years are presented below:
|
|
Year 1
|
Year 2
|
|
Sales
|
$70,000
|
$90,000
|
|
Less cost of goods sold:
|
|
|
|
Beginning inventory
|
0
|
6,000
|
|
Add cost of goods manufactured
|
48,000
|
48,000
|
|
Goods available for sale
|
48,000
|
54,000
|
|
Less ending inventory
|
6,000
|
0
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
42,000
|
54,000
|
|
Gross margin
|
28,000
|
36,000
|
|
Less selling & admin. expenses
|
25,000
|
31,000
|
|
Net operating income
|
$ 3,000
|
$ 5,000
|
Data on units produced and sold in each of these years are given below:
|
|
Year 1
|
Year 2
|
|
Units in beginning inventory
|
0
|
1,000
|
|
Units produced
|
8,000
|
8,000
|
|
Units sold
|
7,000
|
9,000
|
Fixed factory overhead totaled $16,000 in each year. This overhead was applied to products at a rate of $2 per unit. Variable selling and administrative expenses were $3 per unit sold.
Required:
a. Compute the unit product cost in each year under variable costing.
b. Prepare new income statements for each year using variable costing.
c. Reconcile the absorption costing and variable costing net operating income for each year.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Salvo Delivery Service is owned and operated by Joel Salvo. The following selected transactions were completed by Salvo Delivery Service during February:
1. Received cash from owner as additional investment, $35,000.
2. Paid creditors on account, $1,800.
3. Billed customers for delivery services on account, $11,250.
4. Received cash from customers on account, $6,740.
5. Paid cash to owner for personal use, $1,000.
Indicate the effect of each transaction on the accounting equation elements (Assets, Liabilities, Owner’s Equity, Drawing, Revenue, and Expense) by listing the numbers identifying the transactions, (1) through (5).
Also, indicate the specific item within the accounting equation element that is affected. To illustrate, the answer to (1) is shown below.
(1) Asset (Cash) increases by $35,000; Owner’s Equity (Joel Salvo, Capital) increases by $35,000.
(2) Asset (Cash) decreases by $1,800; Liability (Accounts Payable) decreases by $1,800.
(3) Asset (Accounts Receivable) increases by $11,250; Revenue (Delivery Service Fees) increases by $11,250.
(4) Asset (Cash) increases by $6,740; Asset (Accounts Receivable) decreases by $6,740.
(5) Asset (Cash) decreases by $1,000; Drawing (Joel Salvo, Drawing) increases by $1,000.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The assets and liabilities of Chickadee Travel Service at April 30, 2008, the end of the current year, and its revenue and expenses for the year are listed below. The capital of the owner, Adam Cellini, was $80,000 at May 1, 2007, the beginning of the current year.
|
Accounts payable
|
$ 12,200
|
Miscellaneous expense
|
$ 12,950
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
31,350
|
Office expense
|
63,000
|
|
Cash
|
53,050
|
Supplies
|
3,350
|
|
Fees earned
|
263,200
|
Wages expense
|
131,700
|
|
Land
|
80,000
|
|
|
Prepare an income statement for the current year ended April 30, 2008.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Using the data for Chickadee Travel Service shown in Example Exercise 1 4, prepare a statement of owner’s equity for the current year ended April 30, 2008. Adam Cellini invested an additional $50,000 in the business during the year and withdrew cash of $30,000 for personal use.
A summary of cash flows for Chickadee Travel Service for the year ended April 30, 2008, is shown below.
|
Cash receipts:
|
|
|
Cash received from customers
|
$251,000
|
|
Cash received from additional investment of owner
|
50,000
|
|
Cash payments:
|
|
|
Cash paid for expenses
|
210,000
|
|
Cash paid for land
|
80,000
|
|
Cash paid to owner for personal use
|
30,000
|
The cash balance as of May 1, 2007, was $72,050.
Prepare a statement of cash flows for Chickadee Travel Service for the year ended April 30, 2008.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cecil Jameson, Attorney at Law, is a proprietorship owned and operated by Cecil Jameson. On July 1, 2007, Cecil Jameson, Attorney at Law, has the following assets and liabilities: cash, $1,000; accounts receivable, $3,200; supplies, $850; land, $10,000; accounts payable, $1,530. Office space and office equipment are currently being rented, pending the construction of an office complex on land purchased last year. Business transactions during July are summarized as follows:
a. Received cash from clients for services, $3,928.
b. Paid creditors on account, $1,055.
c. Received cash from Cecil Jameson as an additional investment, $3,700.
d. Paid office rent for the month, $1,200.
e. Charged clients for legal services on account, $2,025.
f. Purchased office supplies on account, $245.
g. Received cash from clients on account, $3,000.
h. Received invoice for paralegal services from Legal Aid Inc. for July (to be paid on August 10), $1,635.
i. Paid the following: wages expense, $850; answering service expense, $250; utilities expense, $325; and miscellaneous expense, $75.
j. Determined that the cost of office supplies on hand was $980; therefore, the cost of supplies used during the month was $115.
k. Jameson withdrew $1,000 in cash from the business for personal use.
Instructions
1. Determine the amount of owner’s equity (Cecil Jameson’s capital) as of July 1, 2007.
2. State the assets, liabilities, and owner’s equity as of July 1 in equation form similar to that shown in this chapter. In tabular form below the equation, indicate the increases and decreases resulting from each transaction and the new balances after each transaction.
3. Prepare an income statement for July, a statement of owner’s equity for July, and a balance sheet as of July 31, 2007.
4. (Optional). Prepare a statement of cash flows for July.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Quicken Delivery Service is owned and operated by Zoey Tucker. The following selected transactions were completed by Quicken Delivery Service during July:
1. Received cash from owner as additional investment, $9,000.
2. Paid advertising expense, $674.
3. Purchased supplies on account, $280.
4. Billed customers for delivery services on account, $4,800.
5. Received cash from customers on account, $1,150.
Indicate the effect of each transaction on the accounting equation elements (Assets, Liabilities, Owner’s Equity, Drawing, Revenue, and Expense) by listing the numbers identifying the transactions, (1) through (5). Also, indicate the specific item within the accounting equation element that is affected. To illustrate, the answer to (1) is shown below.
(1) Asset (Cash) increases by $9,000; Owner’s Equity (Zoey Tucker, Capital) increases by $9,000.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The assets and liabilities of Herat Travel Service at June 30, 2008, the end of the current year, and its revenue and expenses for the year are listed below. The capital of the owner, Lola Stahn, was $75,000 at July 1, 2007, the beginning of the current year.
|
Accounts payable
|
$ 15,300
|
Miscellaneous expense
|
$ 3,150
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
24,350
|
Office expense
|
91,350
|
|
Cash
|
70,800
|
Supplies
|
5,350
|
|
Fees earned
|
378,200
|
Wages expense
|
181,500
|
|
Land
|
100,000
|
|
|
Prepare an income statement for the current year ended June 30, 2008.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The assets and liabilities of Leotard Travel Service at February 28, 2008, the end of the current year, and its revenue and expenses for the year are listed below. The capital of the owner, Harry Thompson, was $190,000 at March 1, 2007, the beginning of the current year.
|
Accounts payable
|
$ 21,000
|
Miscellaneous expense
|
$ 6,350
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
37,750
|
Office expense
|
156,650
|
|
Cash
|
22,700
|
Supplies
|
2,550
|
|
Fees earned
|
377,000
|
Wages expense
|
225,000
|
|
Land
|
145,000
|
|
|
Prepare an income statement for the current year ended February 28, 2008.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Rebel Company manufactures a single product and has the following cost structure:
|
Variable costs per unit:
|
|
|
Production
|
$5
|
|
Selling and administrative
|
$3
|
|
Fixed costs in total:
|
|
|
Production
|
$32,000
|
|
Selling and administrative
|
$16,000
|
Last year there were no beginning inventories, 8,000 units were produced, and 7,800 units were sold.
Under variable costing, the unit product cost would be:
A) $5
B) $8
C) $9
D) $11
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Rebel Company manufactures a single product and has the following cost structure:
|
Variable costs per unit:
|
|
|
Production
|
$5
|
|
Selling and administrative
|
$3
|
|
Fixed costs in total:
|
|
|
Production
|
$32,000
|
|
Selling and administrative
|
$16,000
|
Last year there were no beginning inventories, 8,000 units were produced, and 7,800 units were sold.
The carrying value on the balance sheet of the ending inventory under variable costing would be:
A) $1,400 higher than under absorption costing.
B) $1,400 less than under absorption costing.
C) $800 less than under absorption costing.
D) the same as under absorption costing.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Rebel Company manufactures a single product and has the following cost structure:
|
Variable costs per unit:
|
|
|
Production
|
$5
|
|
Selling and administrative
|
$3
|
|
Fixed costs in total:
|
|
|
Production
|
$32,000
|
|
Selling and administrative
|
$16,000
|
Last year there were no beginning inventories, 8,000 units were produced, and 7,800 units were sold.
Under absorption costing, the cost of goods sold would be:
A) $62,400
B) $70,200
C) $71,000
D) $39,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Bayat Company, which has only one product, has provided the following data concerning its most recent month of operations:
|
Selling price
|
$82
|
|
Units in beginning inventory
|
0
|
|
Units produced
|
6,000
|
|
Units sold
|
5,700
|
|
Units in ending inventory .
|
300
|
|
Variable costs per unit:
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
$46
|
|
Direct labor
|
$15
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead
|
$3
|
|
Variable selling and administrative
|
$10
|
|
Fixed costs:
|
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead
|
$30,000
|
|
Fixed selling and administrative
|
$5,700
|
What is the unit product cost for the month under variable costing?
A) $79
B) $64
C) $74
D) $69
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Bayat Company, which has only one product, has provided the following data concerning its most recent month of operations:
|
Selling price
|
$82
|
|
Units in beginning inventory
|
0
|
|
Units produced
|
6,000
|
|
Units sold
|
5,700
|
|
Units in ending inventory .
|
300
|
|
Variable costs per unit:
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
$46
|
|
Direct labor
|
$15
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead
|
$3
|
|
Variable selling and administrative
|
$10
|
|
Fixed costs:
|
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead
|
$30,000
|
|
Fixed selling and administrative
|
$5,700
|
What is the unit product cost for the month under absorption costing?
A) $69
B) $74
C) $79
D) $64
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Beanston Company, which has only one product, has provided the following data concerning its most recent month of operations:
|
Selling price
|
$104
|
|
Units in beginning inventory
|
0
|
|
Units produced
|
2,800
|
|
Units sold
|
2,500
|
|
Units in ending inventory .
|
300
|
|
Variable costs per unit:
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
$18
|
|
Direct labor
|
$44
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead
|
$4
|
|
Variable selling and administrative
|
$6
|
|
Fixed costs:
|
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead
|
$50,400
|
|
Fixed selling and administrative
|
$22,500
|
What is the unit product cost for the month under variable costing?
A) $90
B) $66
C) $72
D) $84
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Beanston Company, which has only one product, has provided the following data concerning its most recent month of operations:
|
Selling price
|
$104
|
|
Units in beginning inventory
|
0
|
|
Units produced
|
2,800
|
|
Units sold
|
2,500
|
|
Units in ending inventory .
|
300
|
|
Variable costs per unit:
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
$18
|
|
Direct labor
|
$44
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead
|
$4
|
|
Variable selling and administrative
|
$6
|
|
Fixed costs:
|
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead
|
$50,400
|
|
Fixed selling and administrative
|
$22,500
|
What is the unit product cost for the month under absorption costing?
A) $66
B) $72
C) $90
D) $84
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following data were provided by Trusty Corp., which produces a single product:
|
|
Year 1
|
Year 2
|
Year 3
|
|
Units produced
|
6,000
|
7,000
|
5,000
|
|
Units sold
|
6,000
|
6,000
|
6,000
|
The selling price per unit, variable costs per unit, and total fixed costs are the same for each year.
If variable costing is in use, one would expect:
A) net operating income to be erratic over the three year period.
B) net operating income to be the same for each year.
C) the break even point to be lower in Year 2 than in Year 3.
D) net operating income to be higher in Year 2 than in Year 1.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following data were provided by Trusty Corp., which produces a single product:
|
|
Year 1
|
Year 2
|
Year 3
|
|
Units produced
|
6,000
|
7,000
|
5,000
|
|
Units sold
|
6,000
|
6,000
|
6,000
|
The selling price per unit, variable costs per unit, and total fixed costs are the same for each year.
Taking the three years together, one would expect total net operating income to be:
A) the same under either absorption or variable costing.
B) higher under absorption costing than under variable costing.
C) lower under absorption costing than under variable costing.
D) none of these.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Clifton Company, which has only one product, has provided the following data concerning its most recent month of operations:
|
Selling price
|
$63
|
|
Units in beginning inventory
|
0
|
|
Units produced
|
1,500
|
|
Units sold
|
1,100
|
|
Units in ending inventory .
|
400
|
|
Variable costs per unit:
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
$14
|
|
Direct labor
|
$15
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead
|
$1
|
|
Variable selling and administrative
|
$7
|
|
Fixed costs:
|
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead
|
$16,500
|
|
Fixed selling and administrative
|
$5,500
|
The total contribution margin for the month under the variable costing approach is:
A) $28,600
B) $36,300
C) $12,100
D) $24,200
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Clifton Company, which has only one product, has provided the following data concerning its most recent month of operations:
|
Selling price
|
$63
|
|
Units in beginning inventory
|
0
|
|
Units produced
|
1,500
|
|
Units sold
|
1,100
|
|
Units in ending inventory .
|
400
|
|
Variable costs per unit:
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
$14
|
|
Direct labor
|
$15
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead
|
$1
|
|
Variable selling and administrative
|
$7
|
|
Fixed costs:
|
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead
|
$16,500
|
|
Fixed selling and administrative
|
$5,500
|
The total gross margin for the month under the absorption costing approach is:
A) $28,600
B) $24,200
C) $40,600
D) $11,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Clissold Company, which has only one product, has provided the following data concerning its most recent month of operations:
|
Selling price
|
$120
|
|
Units in beginning inventory
|
0
|
|
Units produced
|
3,900
|
|
Units sold
|
3,500
|
|
Units in ending inventory .
|
400
|
|
Variable costs per unit:
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
$46
|
|
Direct labor
|
$47
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead
|
$7
|
|
Variable selling and administrative
|
$4
|
|
Fixed costs:
|
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead
|
$42,900
|
|
Fixed selling and administrative
|
$3,500
|
The total contribution margin for the month under the variable costing approach is:
A) $31,500
B) $13,100
C) $56,000
D) $70,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Clissold Company, which has only one product, has provided the following data concerning its most recent month of operations:
|
Selling price
|
$120
|
|
Units in beginning inventory
|
0
|
|
Units produced
|
3,900
|
|
Units sold
|
3,500
|
|
Units in ending inventory .
|
400
|
|
Variable costs per unit:
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
$46
|
|
Direct labor
|
$47
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead
|
$7
|
|
Variable selling and administrative
|
$4
|
|
Fixed costs:
|
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead
|
$42,900
|
|
Fixed selling and administrative
|
$3,500
|
The total gross margin for the month under the absorption costing approach is:
A) $31,500
B) $56,000
C) $14,000
D) $75,900
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Deac Company, which has only one product, has provided the following data concerning its most recent month of operations:
|
Selling price
|
$159
|
|
Units in beginning inventory
|
0
|
|
Units produced
|
7,800
|
|
Units sold
|
7,700
|
|
Units in ending inventory .
|
100
|
|
Variable costs per unit:
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
$47
|
|
Direct labor
|
$50
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead
|
$2
|
|
Variable selling and administrative
|
$9
|
|
Fixed costs:
|
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead
|
$304,200
|
|
Fixed selling and administrative
|
$84,700
|
What is the total period cost for the month under the variable costing approach?
A) $458,200
B) $388,900
C) $304,200
D) $154,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Deac Company, which has only one product, has provided the following data concerning its most recent month of operations:
|
Selling price
|
$159
|
|
Units in beginning inventory
|
0
|
|
Units produced
|
7,800
|
|
Units sold
|
7,700
|
|
Units in ending inventory .
|
100
|
|
Variable costs per unit:
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
$47
|
|
Direct labor
|
$50
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead
|
$2
|
|
Variable selling and administrative
|
$9
|
|
Fixed costs:
|
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead
|
$304,200
|
|
Fixed selling and administrative
|
$84,700
|
What is the total period cost for the month under the absorption costing approach?
A) $154,000
B) $304,200
C) $458,200
D) $84,700
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Dealey Company, which has only one product, has provided the following data concerning its most recent month of operations:
|
Selling price
|
$63
|
|
Units in beginning inventory
|
0
|
|
Units produced
|
4,600
|
|
Units sold
|
4,400
|
|
Units in ending inventory .
|
200
|
|
Variable costs per unit:
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
$20
|
|
Direct labor
|
$16
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead
|
$2
|
|
Variable selling and administrative
|
$4
|
|
Fixed costs:
|
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead
|
$36,800
|
|
Fixed selling and administrative
|
$48,400
|
What is the total period cost for the month under the variable costing approach?
A) $66,000
B) $36,800
C) $102,800
D) $85,200
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Dealey Company, which has only one product, has provided the following data concerning its most recent month of operations:
|
Selling price
|
$63
|
|
Units in beginning inventory
|
0
|
|
Units produced
|
4,600
|
|
Units sold
|
4,400
|
|
Units in ending inventory .
|
200
|
|
Variable costs per unit:
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
$20
|
|
Direct labor
|
$16
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead
|
$2
|
|
Variable selling and administrative
|
$4
|
|
Fixed costs:
|
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead
|
$36,800
|
|
Fixed selling and administrative
|
$48,400
|
What is the total period cost for the month under the absorption costing approach?
A) $102,800
B) $66,000
C) $36,800
D) $48,400
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Gaines Company, which has only one product, has provided the following data concerning its most recent month of operations:
|
Selling price
|
$74
|
|
Units in beginning inventory
|
0
|
|
Units produced
|
8,800
|
|
Units sold
|
8,600
|
|
Units in ending inventory .
|
200
|
|
Variable costs per unit:
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
$12
|
|
Direct labor
|
$32
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead
|
$2
|
|
Variable selling and administrative
|
$6
|
|
Fixed costs:
|
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead
|
$176,000
|
|
Fixed selling and administrative
|
$8,600
|
The total contribution margin for the month under the variable costing approach is:
A) $13,200
B) $240,800
C) $68,800
D) $189,200
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Gaines Company, which has only one product, has provided the following data concerning its most recent month of operations:
|
Selling price
|
$74
|
|
Units in beginning inventory
|
0
|
|
Units produced
|
8,800
|
|
Units sold
|
8,600
|
|
Units in ending inventory .
|
200
|
|
Variable costs per unit:
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
$12
|
|
Direct labor
|
$32
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead
|
$2
|
|
Variable selling and administrative
|
$6
|
|
Fixed costs:
|
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead
|
$176,000
|
|
Fixed selling and administrative
|
$8,600
|
What is the total period cost for the month under the absorption costing approach?
A) $60,200
B) $8,600
C) $236,200
D) $176,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Gadzuk Company, which has only one product, has provided the following data concerning its most recent month of operations:
|
Selling price
|
$123
|
|
Units in beginning inventory
|
0
|
|
Units produced
|
1,900
|
|
Units sold
|
1,600
|
|
Units in ending inventory .
|
300
|
|
Variable costs per unit:
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
$32
|
|
Direct labor
|
$55
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead
|
$1
|
|
Variable selling and administrative
|
$6
|
|
Fixed costs:
|
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead
|
$43,700
|
|
Fixed selling and administrative
|
$1,600
|
The total gross margin for the month under the absorption costing approach is:
A) $19,200
B) $46,400
C) $52,500
D) $8,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Jamil Company, which has only one product, has provided the following data concerning its most recent month of operations:
|
Selling price
|
$71
|
|
Units in beginning inventory
|
400
|
|
Units produced
|
8,100
|
|
Units sold
|
8,200
|
|
Units in ending inventory
|
300
|
|
Variable costs per unit:
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
$20
|
|
Direct labor
|
$15
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead
|
$6
|
|
Variable selling and administrative
|
$4
|
|
Fixed costs:
|
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead
|
$64,800
|
|
Fixed selling and administrative
|
$139,400
|
The company produces the same number of units every month, although the sales in units vary from month to month. The company”s variable costs per unit and total fixed costs have been constant from month to month.
What is the net operating income for the month under variable costing?
A) $9,000
B) $13,100
C) $8,200
D) $2,400
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Jamil Company, which has only one product, has provided the following data concerning its most recent month of operations:
|
Selling price
|
$71
|
|
Units in beginning inventory
|
400
|
|
Units produced
|
8,100
|
|
Units sold
|
8,200
|
|
Units in ending inventory
|
300
|
|
Variable costs per unit:
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
$20
|
|
Direct labor
|
$15
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead
|
$6
|
|
Variable selling and administrative
|
$4
|
|
Fixed costs:
|
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead
|
$64,800
|
|
Fixed selling and administrative
|
$139,400
|
The company produces the same number of units every month, although the sales in units vary from month to month. The company”s variable costs per unit and total fixed costs have been constant from month to month.
What is the net operating income for the month under absorption costing?
A) $13,100
B) $9,000
C) $8,200
D) $2,400
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Jameson Company, which has only one product, has provided the following data concerning its most recent month of operations:
|
Selling price
|
$80
|
|
Units in beginning inventory
|
600
|
|
Units produced
|
8,400
|
|
Units sold
|
8,600
|
|
Units in ending inventory
|
400
|
|
Variable costs per unit:
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
$24
|
|
Direct labor
|
$33
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead
|
$3
|
|
Variable selling and administrative
|
$5
|
|
Fixed costs:
|
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead
|
$117,600
|
|
Fixed selling and administrative
|
$8,600
|
The company produces the same number of units every month, although the sales in units vary from month to month. The company”s variable costs per unit and total fixed costs have been constant from month to month.
What is the unit product cost for the month under variable costing?
A) $79
B) $60
C) $74
D) $65
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Jameson Company, which has only one product, has provided the following data concerning its most recent month of operations:
|
Selling price
|
$80
|
|
Units in beginning inventory
|
600
|
|
Units produced
|
8,400
|
|
Units sold
|
8,600
|
|
Units in ending inventory
|
400
|
|
Variable costs per unit:
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
$24
|
|
Direct labor
|
$33
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead
|
$3
|
|
Variable selling and administrative
|
$5
|
|
Fixed costs:
|
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead
|
$117,600
|
|
Fixed selling and administrative
|
$8,600
|
The company produces the same number of units every month, although the sales in units vary from month to month. The company”s variable costs per unit and total fixed costs have been constant from month to month.
What is the unit product cost for the month under absorption costing?
A) $74
B) $60
C) $79
D) $65
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Jameson Company, which has only one product, has provided the following data concerning its most recent month of operations:
|
Selling price
|
$80
|
|
Units in beginning inventory
|
600
|
|
Units produced
|
8,400
|
|
Units sold
|
8,600
|
|
Units in ending inventory
|
400
|
|
Variable costs per unit:
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
$24
|
|
Direct labor
|
$33
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead
|
$3
|
|
Variable selling and administrative
|
$5
|
|
Fixed costs:
|
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead
|
$117,600
|
|
Fixed selling and administrative
|
$8,600
|
The company produces the same number of units every month, although the sales in units vary from month to month. The company”s variable costs per unit and total fixed costs have been constant from month to month.
What is the net operating income for the month under absorption costing?
A) $5,600
B) $2,800
C) $14,800
D) $0
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Habib Company, which has only one product, has provided the following data concerning its most recent month of operations:
|
Selling price
|
$141
|
|
Units in beginning inventory
|
0
|
|
Units produced
|
3,700
|
|
Units sold
|
3,500
|
|
Units in ending inventory
|
200
|
|
Variable costs per unit:
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
$38
|
|
Direct labor
|
$55
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead
|
$5
|
|
Variable selling and administrative
|
$9
|
|
Fixed costs:
|
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead
|
$51,800
|
|
Fixed selling and administrative
|
$66,500
|
What is the unit product cost for the month under variable costing?
A) $107
B) $98
C) $112
D) $121
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Habib Company, which has only one product, has provided the following data concerning its most recent month of operations:
|
Selling price
|
$141
|
|
Units in beginning inventory
|
0
|
|
Units produced
|
3,700
|
|
Units sold
|
3,500
|
|
Units in ending inventory
|
200
|
|
Variable costs per unit:
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
$38
|
|
Direct labor
|
$55
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead
|
$5
|
|
Variable selling and administrative
|
$9
|
|
Fixed costs:
|
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead
|
$51,800
|
|
Fixed selling and administrative
|
$66,500
|
The total contribution margin for the month under the variable costing approach is:
A) $67,200
B) $101,500
C) $119,000
D) $150,500
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Habib Company, which has only one product, has provided the following data concerning its most recent month of operations:
|
Selling price
|
$141
|
|
Units in beginning inventory
|
0
|
|
Units produced
|
3,700
|
|
Units sold
|
3,500
|
|
Units in ending inventory
|
200
|
|
Variable costs per unit:
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
$38
|
|
Direct labor
|
$55
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead
|
$5
|
|
Variable selling and administrative
|
$9
|
|
Fixed costs:
|
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead
|
$51,800
|
|
Fixed selling and administrative
|
$66,500
|
What is the total period cost for the month under the variable costing approach?
A) $149,800
B) $98,000
C) $51,800
D) $118,300
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Habib Company, which has only one product, has provided the following data concerning its most recent month of operations:
|
Selling price
|
$141
|
|
Units in beginning inventory
|
0
|
|
Units produced
|
3,700
|
|
Units sold
|
3,500
|
|
Units in ending inventory
|
200
|
|
Variable costs per unit:
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
$38
|
|
Direct labor
|
$55
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead
|
$5
|
|
Variable selling and administrative
|
$9
|
|
Fixed costs:
|
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead
|
$51,800
|
|
Fixed selling and administrative
|
$66,500
|
What is the net operating income for the month under variable costing?
A) $2,800
B) $700
C) ($18,900)
D) $3,500
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Haas Company, which has only one product, has provided the following data concerning its most recent month of operations:
|
Selling price
|
$99
|
|
Units in beginning inventory
|
0
|
|
Units produced
|
2,400
|
|
Units sold
|
2,100
|
|
Units in ending inventory
|
300
|
|
Variable costs per unit:
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
$12
|
|
Direct labor
|
$57
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead
|
$7
|
|
Variable selling and administrative
|
$10
|
|
Fixed costs:
|
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead
|
$19,200
|
|
Fixed selling and administrative
|
$2,100
|
The total contribution margin for the month under the variable costing approach is:
A) $48,300
B) $27,300
C) $8,100
D) $31,500
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Haas Company, which has only one product, has provided the following data concerning its most recent month of operations:
|
Selling price
|
$99
|
|
Units in beginning inventory
|
0
|
|
Units produced
|
2,400
|
|
Units sold
|
2,100
|
|
Units in ending inventory
|
300
|
|
Variable costs per unit:
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
$12
|
|
Direct labor
|
$57
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead
|
$7
|
|
Variable selling and administrative
|
$10
|
|
Fixed costs:
|
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead
|
$19,200
|
|
Fixed selling and administrative
|
$2,100
|
What is the total period cost for the month under the variable costing approach?
A) $23,100
B) $42,300
C) $19,200
D) $21,300
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Haas Company, which has only one product, has provided the following data concerning its most recent month of operations:
|
Selling price
|
$99
|
|
Units in beginning inventory
|
0
|
|
Units produced
|
2,400
|
|
Units sold
|
2,100
|
|
Units in ending inventory
|
300
|
|
Variable costs per unit:
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
$12
|
|
Direct labor
|
$57
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead
|
$7
|
|
Variable selling and administrative
|
$10
|
|
Fixed costs:
|
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead
|
$19,200
|
|
Fixed selling and administrative
|
$2,100
|
What is the net operating income for the month under variable costing?
A) $2,400
B) ($16,800)
C) $8,400
D) $6,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Illa Company, which has only one product, has provided the following data concerning its most recent month of operations:
|
Selling price
|
$131
|
|
Units in beginning inventory
|
0
|
|
Units produced
|
5,700
|
|
Units sold
|
5,400
|
|
Units in ending inventory
|
300
|
|
Variable costs per unit:
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
$46
|
|
Direct labor
|
$25
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead
|
$6
|
|
Variable selling and administrative
|
$7
|
|
Fixed costs:
|
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead
|
$193,800
|
|
Fixed selling and administrative
|
$43,200
|
What is the unit product cost for the month under variable costing?
A) $111
B) $118
C) $77
D) $84
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Illa Company, which has only one product, has provided the following data concerning its most recent month of operations:
|
Selling price
|
$131
|
|
Units in beginning inventory
|
0
|
|
Units produced
|
5,700
|
|
Units sold
|
5,400
|
|
Units in ending inventory
|
300
|
|
Variable costs per unit:
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
$46
|
|
Direct labor
|
$25
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead
|
$6
|
|
Variable selling and administrative
|
$7
|
|
Fixed costs:
|
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead
|
$193,800
|
|
Fixed selling and administrative
|
$43,200
|
What is the net operating income for the month under variable costing?
A) $10,200
B) $27,000
C) ($6,300)
D) $16,800
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Ibushi Company, which has only one product, has provided the following data concerning its most recent month of operations:
|
Selling price
|
$117
|
|
Units in beginning inventory
|
0
|
|
Units produced
|
7,900
|
|
Units sold
|
7,600
|
|
Units in ending inventory
|
300
|
|
Variable costs per unit:
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
$29
|
|
Direct labor
|
$37
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead
|
$4
|
|
Variable selling and administrative
|
$8
|
|
Fixed costs:
|
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead
|
$205,400
|
|
Fixed selling and administrative
|
$91,200
|
What is the unit product cost for the month under variable costing?
A) $104
B) $70
C) $78
D) $96
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Ibushi Company, which has only one product, has provided the following data concerning its most recent month of operations:
|
Selling price
|
$117
|
|
Units in beginning inventory
|
0
|
|
Units produced
|
7,900
|
|
Units sold
|
7,600
|
|
Units in ending inventory
|
300
|
|
Variable costs per unit:
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
$29
|
|
Direct labor
|
$37
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead
|
$4
|
|
Variable selling and administrative
|
$8
|
|
Fixed costs:
|
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead
|
$205,400
|
|
Fixed selling and administrative
|
$91,200
|
What is the net operating income for the month under variable costing?
A) ($21,200)
B) $7,600
C) $7,800
D) ($200)
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Johnston Company manufactures a single product. The company has supplied the following
data:
|
Selling price
|
$30
|
|
Variable costs per unit:
|
|
|
Production
|
$8
|
|
Selling and administrative
|
$5
|
|
Fixed costs:
|
|
|
Production
|
$80,000
|
|
Selling and administrative
|
$60,000
|
Last year there was no beginning inventory. During the year, 20,000 units were produced and 17,000 units were sold.
Under absorption costing, the unit product cost would be:
A) $20
B) $12
C) $13
D) $8
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Johnston Company manufactures a single product. The company has supplied the following
data:
|
Selling price
|
$30
|
|
Variable costs per unit:
|
|
|
Production
|
$10
|
|
Selling and administrative
|
$4
|
|
Fixed costs:
|
|
|
Production
|
$15,000
|
|
Selling and administrative
|
$10,000
|
Last year there was no beginning inventory. During the year, 20,000 units were produced and 17,000 units were sold.
The company”s net operating income last year under variable costing would be:
A) $110,000
B) $149,000
C) $161,000
D) $170,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following data were provided by Rider, Inc, which produces a single product:
|
Units in beginning inventory
|
0
|
|
Units produced
|
5,000
|
|
Units sold
|
4,500
|
|
Variable costs per unit:
|
|
|
Production
|
$8
|
|
Selling and administrative
|
$5
|
|
Fixed costs:
|
|
|
Production
|
$80,000
|
|
Selling and administrative
|
$60,000
|
Under variable costing, the unit product cost is:
A) $14
B) $13
C) $10
D) $16
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following data were provided by Rider, Inc, which produces a single product:
|
Units in beginning inventory
|
0
|
|
Units produced
|
5,000
|
|
Units sold
|
4,500
|
|
Variable costs per unit:
|
|
|
Production
|
$8
|
|
Selling and administrative
|
$5
|
|
Fixed costs:
|
|
|
Production
|
$80,000
|
|
Selling and administrative
|
$60,000
|
For the year in question, one would expect the net operating income under absorption costing to be:
A) higher than the net operating income under variable costing.
B) lower than the net operating income under variable costing.
C) the same as the net operating income under variable costing.
D) none of these.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Abbey Company, which has only one product, has provided the following data concerning its most recent month of operations:
|
Selling price
|
$129
|
|
Units in beginning inventory
|
0
|
|
Units produced
|
6,300
|
|
Units sold
|
6,100
|
|
Units in ending inventory
|
200
|
|
Variable costs per unit:
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
$32
|
|
Direct labor
|
$50
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead
|
$5
|
|
Variable selling and administrative
|
$11
|
|
Fixed costs:
|
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead
|
$88,200
|
|
Fixed selling and administrative
|
$97,600
|
The total contribution margin for the month under the variable costing approach is:
A) $170,800
B) $256,200
C) $100,900
D) $189,100
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Abbey Company, which has only one product, has provided the following data concerning its most recent month of operations:
|
Selling price
|
$129
|
|
Units in beginning inventory
|
0
|
|
Units produced
|
6,300
|
|
Units sold
|
6,100
|
|
Units in ending inventory
|
200
|
|
Variable costs per unit:
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
$32
|
|
Direct labor
|
$50
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead
|
$5
|
|
Variable selling and administrative
|
$11
|
|
Fixed costs:
|
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead
|
$88,200
|
|
Fixed selling and administrative
|
$97,600
|
The total gross margin for the month under the absorption costing approach is:
A) $189,100
B) $6,100
C) $170,800
D) $191,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Abbey Company, which has only one product, has provided the following data concerning its most recent month of operations:
|
Selling price
|
$129
|
|
Units in beginning inventory
|
0
|
|
Units produced
|
6,300
|
|
Units sold
|
6,100
|
|
Units in ending inventory
|
200
|
|
Variable costs per unit:
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
$32
|
|
Direct labor
|
$50
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead
|
$5
|
|
Variable selling and administrative
|
$11
|
|
Fixed costs:
|
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead
|
$88,200
|
|
Fixed selling and administrative
|
$97,600
|
What is the total period cost for the month under the variable costing approach?
A) $252,900
B) $164,700
C) $88,200
D) $185,800
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Abbey Company, which has only one product, has provided the following data concerning its most recent month of operations:
|
Selling price
|
$129
|
|
Units in beginning inventory
|
0
|
|
Units produced
|
6,300
|
|
Units sold
|
6,100
|
|
Units in ending inventory
|
200
|
|
Variable costs per unit:
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
$32
|
|
Direct labor
|
$50
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead
|
$5
|
|
Variable selling and administrative
|
$11
|
|
Fixed costs:
|
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead
|
$88,200
|
|
Fixed selling and administrative
|
$97,600
|
What is the total period cost for the month under the absorption costing approach?
A) $88,200
B) $252,900
C) $97,600
D) $164,700
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Abbey Company, which has only one product, has provided the following data concerning its most recent month of operations:
|
Selling price
|
$129
|
|
Units in beginning inventory
|
0
|
|
Units produced
|
6,300
|
|
Units sold
|
6,100
|
|
Units in ending inventory
|
200
|
|
Variable costs per unit:
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
$32
|
|
Direct labor
|
$50
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead
|
$5
|
|
Variable selling and administrative
|
$11
|
|
Fixed costs:
|
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead
|
$88,200
|
|
Fixed selling and administrative
|
$97,600
|
What is the net operating income for the month under variable costing?
A) $3,300
B) $2,800
C) ($14,100)
D) $6,100
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Abbey Company, which has only one product, has provided the following data concerning its most recent month of operations:
|
Selling price
|
$129
|
|
Units in beginning inventory
|
0
|
|
Units produced
|
6,300
|
|
Units sold
|
6,100
|
|
Units in ending inventory
|
200
|
|
Variable costs per unit:
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
$32
|
|
Direct labor
|
$50
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead
|
$5
|
|
Variable selling and administrative
|
$11
|
|
Fixed costs:
|
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead
|
$88,200
|
|
Fixed selling and administrative
|
$97,600
|
What is the net operating income for the month under absorption costing?
A) $3,300
B) $2,800
C) ($14,100)
D) $6,100
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Abbitt Company, which has only one product, has provided the following data concerning its
most recent month of operations:
|
Selling price
|
$142
|
|
Units in beginning inventory
|
0
|
|
Units produced
|
2,500
|
|
Units sold
|
2,300
|
|
Units in ending inventory
|
200
|
|
Variable costs per unit:
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
$22
|
|
Direct labor
|
$57
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead
|
$1
|
|
Variable selling and administrative
|
$6
|
|
Fixed costs:
|
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead
|
$82,500
|
|
Fixed selling and administrative
|
$41,400
|
What is the unit product cost for the month under absorption costing?
A) $86
B) $119
C) $113
D) $80
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Abbitt Company, which has only one product, has provided the following data concerning its
most recent month of operations:
|
Selling price
|
$142
|
|
Units in beginning inventory
|
0
|
|
Units produced
|
2,500
|
|
Units sold
|
2,300
|
|
Units in ending inventory
|
200
|
|
Variable costs per unit:
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
$22
|
|
Direct labor
|
$57
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead
|
$1
|
|
Variable selling and administrative
|
$6
|
|
Fixed costs:
|
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead
|
$82,500
|
|
Fixed selling and administrative
|
$41,400
|
The total contribution margin for the month under the variable costing approach is:
A) $66,700
B) $128,800
C) $46,300
D) $142,600